ML011340072: Difference between revisions

From kanterella
Jump to navigation Jump to search
(Created page by program invented by StriderTol)
 
(Created page by program invented by StriderTol)
 
(One intermediate revision by the same user not shown)
Line 17: Line 17:


=Text=
=Text=
{{#Wiki_filter:REGULATORY GUIDE 1.70 REVISION 3 NOVEMBER 1978 OFFICE OF STANDARDS DEVELOPMENT U. S. NUCLEAR REGULATORY COMMISSION STANDARD FORMAT AND CONTENT OF SAFETY ANALYSIS REPORTS FOR NUCLEAR POWER PLANTS LWR EDITION
{{#Wiki_filter:REGULATORY GUIDE 1.70 REVISION 3 STANDARD FORMAT AND CONTENT OF SAFETY ANALYSIS REPORTS FOR NUCLEAR POWER PLANTS LWR EDITION NOVEMBER 1978 OFFICE OF STANDARDS DEVELOPMENT U. S. NUCLEAR REGULATORY COMMISSION
*PAWOO UNUAMDO PA UOWýAc*4 P=A$=l 'Awa. Apo Pamopvm PLN opwid 4ma wD4 PaAo*w vamý awý po )o --m.0 '-6-NO :--8W IMM 70 'uM&-f-m '-mw-Alw3 Wý a w pommu "a @ON* aLti vamodw ja momm"mcom Avu xwou ok pw Amup*ow AmwN -s-n ow ca aLa- -w- aq wow --w =Pmm w nuomum "opo"umn m 'empoomckw w Vý aq o- upre P-,-m ip I A WrQn; ;0 WAftO SOL" XN M4 UOWWAM *Q&A=M MW UO UMMOMW n poftww*w a* am" w moummood" jol smommosm pus wou"No x)4 jo (pmwVcxow eq AAw 4M41A) PWIM I* =WW MOW8 AN N RALoDOL lQQ28MM4 MIUM PA "MkNWM 'S IJWNWAPAM*
 
ý w Imo."A p- 3m4u,,w *6 BUIN.S PUN PMLWAMMAý%Q
                                    *PAWOOUNUAMDO PA UOWýAc
't wo AR GoAMI m *Mad N so eamWNAMuM jo smmý No GB sopwow %mmm "Lcuaon=o I o"No" "@Lmwn PLa ""4 1 WkMW &a m3l ýq f qWOM Aog p spnft= aq 0- 1. R 4m& w 3mo M Lwowv MI pw wamm"T SMMa WDq WAMW PUR MMOM V-dW 3- 0 M-a WU GMAW m=nPOAd I Wow" jaw4d A -mW Mw VA*Wdw X4 mwqpWw ou *a nW AXWPINW IWACPMM 09 4MAPM6 *PMDAd Ot JD )WAPOW POMPOOd JO NUMP4*9 2WMM &M pmm ula aw-cow sýa -P-m mA mw GqL ýWo W kqoo a& Aq pý nf*Mpft MONAM 01 VAopWlftj GW0WWOhPV3 NO JD MM 2kWOM OLMOLLOPAII PD VW OFM ftf Ot OPpodows IPMsrý I I as al "amwa evKu PL* smamp at Pý ý ampows Ammwdmw OW &AMR-0 :U=LMM VAIX *O'C '-WL-PWM 'UDMKL-Awo Aawpolu mow" S-n -uowmuoo "a Jo kft*A=s eta co wa 4q wow =.m-w3 saoino AvoLLqnoam ammon NOWm UMI SINVId U3MOd uv3ionN UO:l SlUOd3U SISAIVNV A13dVS do IN31NOO ONV ivwuoA allVONV1.S OCL 3aino AuoivinfAU IN3WdOl3A3(3 SCUV(3NVIS:iO 301:1:10 3aino Auo.Lvmln.93M 81-6L joqWSAON NOISSIYYWOO Amo.LvinE)3U HV31onN *sn E: UOISIASH Revision 3 November 1978 TABLE OF CONTENTS Page INTRODUCTION
........................................
Changes were made in the numbering of some Standard Format sections in Revision 2 to provide consistency with the corresponding sections of the Standard Review Plans in order to increase the efficiency of the staff review. Revision 3 to the Standard Format incorporates changes made to reflect public comments on Revision 2; to improve the consistency of the Standard Format with existing sections of the Standard Review Plan; to track recent revisions to the Standard Review Plan; and to provide guide lines for identifying and a format for submitting nuclear steam supply system (NSSS) and balance-of-plant (BOP) interfaces for standard designs.
Changes were made in the numbering of some Standard Format sections in Revision 2 to provide consistency with the corresponding sections of the Standard Review Plans in order to increase the efficiency of the staff review. Revision 3 to the Standard Format incorporates changes made to reflect public comments on Revision 2; to improve the consistency of the Standard Format with existing sections of the Standard Review Plan; to track recent revisions to the Standard Review Plan; and to provide guide lines for identifying and a format for submitting nuclear steam supply system (NSSS) and balance-of-plant (BOP) interfaces for standard designs.
The purpose of the interface guidelines (Appendix A to the Standard Format) is to provide that, in such instances when a standard design is referenced by an applicant, the necessary safety-related interfaces will be accounted for to ensure that systems, structures, and components within the standard design will perform their intended safety functions.
The purpose of the interface guidelines (Appendix A to the Standard Format) is to provide that, in such instances when a standard design is referenced by an applicant, the necessary safety-related interfaces will be accounted for to ensure that systems, structures, and components within the standard design will perform their intended safety functions.
The principal purpose of the SAR is to inform the Commission of the nature of the plant, the plans for its use, and the safety evaluations that have been performed to evaluate whether the plant can be constructed ii Revision 3 November 1978 and operated without undue risk to the health and safety of the public. The SAR is the principal document for the applicant to provide the informa tion needed to understand the basis on which this conclusion has been reached; it is the principal document referenced in the Construction Permit or Operating License that describes the basis on which the permit or license is issued; and it it the basic document used by NRC inspectors to determine whether the facility is being constructed and operated within the licensed conditions.
The principal purpose of the SAR is to inform the Commission of the nature of the plant, the plans for its use, and the safety evaluations that have been performed to evaluate whether the plant can be constructed ii
Therefore, the information contained in the SAR should be timely, accurate, complete, and organized in a format that provides easy access. Purpose of Standard Format The purpose of the Standard Format and Content of Safety Analysis Reports for Nuclear Power Plants (hereinafter "Standard Format") is to indicate the information to be provided in the SAR and to establish a uniform format for presenting the information.
 
Use of this format will help ensure the completeness of the information provided, will assist the Commission's staff and others in locating the information, and will aid in shortening the time needed for the review process.
Revision                                                     November 1978 and operated without undue risk to the health and safety of the public.
Applicability of Standard Format This Standard Format applies specifically to SARs for light-water cooled nuclear power reactors.
The SAR is the principal document for the applicant to provide the informa tion needed to understand the basis on which this conclusion has been reached; it is the principal document referenced in the Construction Permit or Operating License that describes the basis on which the permit or license is issued; and it it the basic document used by NRC inspectors to determine whether the facility is being constructed and operated within the licensed conditions. Therefore, the information contained in the SAR should be timely, accurate, complete, and organized in a format that provides easy access.
Two additional editions of the Standard Format have been prepared, one for high-temperature gas-cooled reactors (HTGR Edition) and one for liquid metal fast breeder reactors (LMFBR Edi tion). Copies may be obtained on written request to the U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission, Washington, D.C. 20555, Attention:
Purpose of Standard Format The purpose of the Standard Format and Content of Safety Analysis Reports for Nuclear Power Plants (hereinafter "Standard Format") is to indicate the information to be provided in the SAR and to establish a uniform format for presenting the information. Use of this format will help ensure the completeness of the information provided, will assist the Commission's staff and others in locating the information, and will aid in shortening the time needed for the review process.
Director, Divi sion of Technical Information and Document Control.
Applicability of Standard Format This Standard Format applies specifically to SARs for light-water cooled nuclear power reactors. Two additional editions of the Standard Format have been prepared, one for high-temperature gas-cooled reactors (HTGR Edition) and one for liquid metal fast breeder reactors (LMFBR Edi tion). Copies may be obtained on written request to the U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission, Washington, D.C. 20555, Attention: Director, Divi sion of Technical Information and Document Control.
Use of Standard Format The Standard Format represents a format for SARs that is acceptable to the NRC staff. Conformance with the Standard Format, however, is not required.
Use of Standard Format The Standard Format represents a format for SARs that is acceptable to the NRC staff. Conformance with the Standard Format, however, is not required. Safety Analysis Reports with different formats will be acceptable to the staff if they provide an adequate basis for the findings requisite to the issuance of a license or permit. However, because it may be more difficult to locate needed information, the staff review time for such reports may be longer, and there is a greater likehood that the staff may regard the report as incomplete.
Safety Analysis Reports with different formats will be acceptable to the staff if they provide an adequate basis for the findings requisite to the issuance of a license or permit. However, because it may be more difficult to locate needed information, the staff review time for such reports may be longer, and there is a greater likehood that the staff may regard the report as incomplete.
Upon receipt of an application, the NRC staff will perform a pre liminary review to determine if the SAR provides a reasonably complete presentation of the information that is needed to form a basis for the findings required before issuance of a permit or license in accordance with 10 CFR § 2.101. The Standard Format will be used by the staff as a guideline to identify the type of information needed unless there is good reason for not doing so. If the SAR does not provide a reasonably complete presentation of the necessary information, further review of the application iii
Upon receipt of an application, the NRC staff will perform a pre liminary review to determine if the SAR provides a reasonably complete presentation of the information that is needed to form a basis for the findings required before issuance of a permit or license in accordance with 10 CFR § 2.101. The Standard Format will be used by the staff as a guideline to identify the type of information needed unless there is good reason for not doing so. If the SAR does not provide a reasonably complete presentation of the necessary information, further review of the application iii Revision November 1978 will not be initiated until a reasonably complete presentation is provided.
 
The information provided in the SAR should be up to date with respect to the state of technology for nuclear power plants and should take into account recent changes in the NRC regulations and guides and in industry codes and standards, results of recent developments in nuclear reactor safety, and experience in the construction and operation of nuclear power plants. The Standard Format should be used for both Preliminary Safety Analysis Reports and Final Safety Analysis Reports; however, any specific item that applies only to the FSAR will be indicated in the text by adding (FSAR) at the end of the guidance for that item. An entire section that is applicable only to the FSAR will be indicated by including (FSAR) follow ing the heading.
Revision 3                                                    November 1978 will not be initiated until a reasonably complete presentation is provided.
Style and Composition The applicant should strive for clear, concise presentations of the information provided in the SAR. Confusing or ambiguous statements and unnecessarily verbose descriptions do not contribute to expeditious tech nical review. Claims of adequacy of designs or design methods should be supported by technical bases. The SAR should follow the numbering system and headings of the Standard Format at least to the headings with three digits, e.g., 2.4.2 Floods. Appendices to the SAR should be used to provide supplemental infor mation not explicitly identified in the Standard Format. Examples of such information are (1) summaries of the manner in which the applicant has treated matters addressed in NRC Regulatory Guides or proposed regula tions and (2) supplementary information regarding calculational methods or design approaches used by the applicant or its agents. Duplication of information should be avoided. Similar or identical information may be requested in various sections of the Standard Format because it is relevant to more than one portion of the plant; however, this information should be presented in~the principal section and appro priately referenced in the other applicable sections of the SAR. For example, where piping and instrumentation diagrams for the same system are requested in more than one section of the Standard Format, duplicate diagrams need not be submitted provided all the information requested in all sections is included on the diagrams and is appropriately identified and referenced.
The information provided in the SAR should be up to date with respect to the state of technology for nuclear power plants and should take into account recent changes in the NRC regulations and guides and in industry codes and standards, results of recent developments in nuclear reactor safety, and experience in the construction and operation of nuclear power plants.
The design information provided in the SAR should reflect the most advanced state of design at the time of submission.
The Standard Format should be used for both Preliminary Safety Analysis Reports and Final Safety Analysis Reports; however, any specific item that applies only to the FSAR will be indicated in the text by adding (FSAR) at the end of the guidance for that item. An entire section that is applicable only to the FSAR will be indicated by including (FSAR) follow ing the heading.
If certain information identified in the Standard Format is not yet available at the time of submission of a PSAR because the design has not progressed sufficiently at the time of writing, the PSAR should provide the criteria and bases iv Revision 3 November 1978 being used to develop the required information, the concepts and alter natives under consideration, and the schedule for completion of the design and submission of the missing informnation.
Style and Composition The applicant should strive for clear, concise presentations of the information provided in the SAR. Confusing or ambiguous statements and unnecessarily verbose descriptions do not contribute to expeditious tech nical review. Claims of adequacy of designs or design methods should be supported by technical bases.
In general, the PSAR should describe the preliminary design of the plant in sufficient detail to enable a definitive evaluation by the staff as to whether the plant can be con structed and operated without undue risk to the health and safety of the public. Changes from the criteria, design, and bases set forth in the PSAR, as well as any new criteria, designs, and bases, should be identified in the FSAR. The reasons for and safety significance of each change should be discussed.
The SAR should follow the numbering system and headings of the Standard Format at least to the headings with three digits, e.g., 2.4.2 Floods.
The FSAR should describe in detail the final design of the plant as constructed.
Appendices to the SAR should be used to provide supplemental infor mation not explicitly identified in the Standard Format. Examples of such information are (1) summaries of the manner in which the applicant has treated matters addressed in NRC Regulatory Guides or proposed regula tions and (2) supplementary information regarding calculational methods or design approaches used by the applicant or its agents.
Where numerical values are stated, the number of significant figures given should reflect the accuracy or precision to which the number is known. Where possible, estimated limits of error or uncertainty should be given. Abbreviations should be consistent throughout the SAR and should be consistent with generally accepted usage. Any abbreviations, symbols, or special terms unique to the proposed plant or not in general usage should be'defined in each chapter of the SAR where they are used. Drawings, maps, diagrams, sketches, and charts should be employed where the information can be presented more adequately or conveniently by such means. Due concern should be taken to ensure that all informa tion presented in drawings is legible, symbols are defined, and drawings are not reduced to the extent that visual aids are necessary to interpret pertinent items of information presented in the drawings.
Duplication of information should be avoided. Similar or identical information may be requested in various sections of the Standard Format because it is relevant to more than one portion of the plant; however, this information should be presented in~the principal section and appro priately referenced in the other applicable sections of the SAR.       For example, where piping and instrumentation diagrams for the same system are requested in more than one section of the Standard Format, duplicate diagrams need not be submitted provided all the information requested in all sections is included on the diagrams and is appropriately identified and referenced.
Reports or other documents that are referenced in the text of the SAR should be listed at the end of the section in which they are refer enced. In cases where proprietary documents are referenced, a nonpropri etary summary of the document should also be referenced.
The design information provided in the SAR should reflect the most advanced state of design at the time of submission. If certain information identified in the Standard Format is not yet available at the time of submission of a PSAR because the design has not progressed sufficiently at the time of writing, the PSAR should provide the criteria and bases iv
Material incor porated into the application by reference should be listed in Chapter 1 (see Section 1.6 of the Standard Format).
 
Revisions Data and text should be updated or revised by replacing pages. "Pen and ink" or "cut and paste" changes should not be used. The changed or revised portion on each page should be highlighted by a "change indicator" mark consisting of a bold vertical line drawn in the margin opposite the binding margin. The line should be the same length as the portion actually changed.
Revision 3                                                   November 1978 being used to develop the required information, the concepts and alter natives under consideration, and the schedule for completion of the design and submission of the missing informnation. In general, the PSAR should describe the preliminary design of the plant in sufficient detail to enable a definitive evaluation by the staff as to whether the plant can be con structed and operated without undue risk to the health and safety of the public.
All pages submitted to update, revise, or add pages to the report should show the date of change and a change or amendment number. A guide v Revision 3 November 1978 page listing the pages to be inserted and the pages to be removed should accompany the revised pages. All statements on a revised page should be accurate as of the date of the submittals.
Changes from the criteria, design, and bases set forth in the PSAR, as well as any new criteria, designs, and bases, should be identified in the FSAR. The reasons for and safety significance of each change should be discussed. The FSAR should describe in detail the final design of the plant as constructed.
Where numerical values are stated, the number of significant figures given should reflect the accuracy or precision to which the number is known. Where possible, estimated limits of error or uncertainty should be given.
Abbreviations should be consistent throughout the SAR and should be consistent with generally accepted usage. Any abbreviations, symbols, or special terms unique to the proposed plant or not in general usage should be'defined in each chapter of the SAR where they are used.
Drawings, maps, diagrams, sketches, and charts should be employed where the information can be presented more adequately or conveniently by such means. Due concern should be taken to ensure that all informa tion presented in drawings is legible, symbols are defined, and drawings are not reduced to the extent that visual aids are necessary to interpret pertinent items of information presented in the drawings.
Reports or other documents that are referenced in the text of the SAR should be listed at the end of the section in which they are refer enced. In cases where proprietary documents are referenced, a nonpropri etary summary of the document should also be referenced. Material incor porated into the application by reference should be listed in Chapter 1 (see Section 1.6 of the Standard Format).
Revisions Data and text should be updated or revised by replacing pages.   "Pen and ink" or "cut and paste" changes should not be used.
The changed or revised portion on each page should be highlighted by a "change indicator" mark consisting of a bold vertical line drawn in the margin opposite the binding margin. The line should be the same length as the portion actually changed.
All pages submitted to update, revise, or add pages to the report should show the date of change and a change or amendment number. A guide v
 
Revision 3                                                     November 1978 page listing the pages to be inserted and the pages to be removed should accompany the revised pages.
All statements on a revised page should be accurate as of the date of the submittals.
Special care should be made to ensure that the main sections of the report are revised to reflect any design changes reported in supplemental information, i.e., responses to NRC staff requests for information or responses to regulatory positions.
Special care should be made to ensure that the main sections of the report are revised to reflect any design changes reported in supplemental information, i.e., responses to NRC staff requests for information or responses to regulatory positions.
Physical Specifications All material submitted as part of the Safety Analysis Report should conform to specific standards as to the physical dimensions of page size, quality of paper and inks, and number of pages, exhibits, and attachments.
Physical Specifications All material submitted as part of the Safety Analysis Report should conform to specific standards as to the physical dimensions of page size, quality of paper and inks, and number of pages, exhibits, and attachments.
More specifically:  
More specifically:
: 1. Paper Size (not to exceed) Text pages: 8-1/2 x 11 inches. Drawings and graphics:
: 1. Paper Size (not to exceed)
8-1/2 x 11 inches preferred; however, a larger size is acceptable provided:  
Text pages:   8-1/2 x 11 inches.
: a. the bound side does not exceed 11 inches except where required for legibility, and b. the finished copy when folded does not exceed 8-1/2 x 11 inches. 2. Paper Stock Weight or substance:
Drawings and graphics:   8-1/2 x 11 inches preferred; however, a larger size is acceptable provided:
20 pound for printing on both sides. 16 to 20 pound for printing on one side only. Composition:
: a. the bound side does not exceed 11 inches except where required for legibility, and
wood chemical sulphite (no groundwood) and a pH of 5.5. Color: white is preferred, but pastel colors are acceptable provided the combination of paper stock and ink is suitable for microfilming.
: b. the finished copy when folded does not exceed 8-1/2 x 11 inches.
: 3. Ink Color sufficiently dense to record on microfilm or image-copying equipment.
: 2. Paper Stock Weight or substance:   20 pound for printing on both sides.
: 4. Page Margins A margin of no less than one inch should be maintained on the top, bottom, and binding side of all pages.vi Revision 3 Revision 3 November 1978 5. Printing Composition:
16 to 20 pound for printing on one side only.
text pages should be single spaced. Type font and style: must be suitable for microfilming.
Composition:   wood chemical sulphite (no groundwood) and a pH of 5.5.
Reproduction:
Color:   white is preferred, but pastel colors are acceptable provided the combination of paper stock and ink is suitable for microfilming.
may be mechanically or photographically reproduced.
: 3. Ink Color sufficiently dense to record on microfilm or image-copying equipment.
Text pages should preferably be printed on two sides with the image printed head to head. 6. Binding Pages should be punched for standard 3-hole loose-leaf binder. 7. Page Numbering Pages should be numbered with the two digits corresponding to the chapter and first-level section numbers followed by a hyphen and a sequential number within the section, i.e., the third page in Sec tion 4.1 of Chapter 4 should be numbered 4.1-3. Do not number the entire report sequentially. (Note that because of the small number of pages in many sections, this Standard Format is numbered sequentially within each chapter.)vii Revision 3 November 1978 I. INTRODUCTION AND GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PLANT The first chapter of the SAR should present an introduction to the report and a general description of the plant. This chapter should enable the reader to obtain a basic understanding of the overall facility without having to refer to the subsequent chapters.
: 4. Page Margins A margin of no less than one inch should be maintained on the top, bottom, and binding side of all pages.
Review of the detailed chapters that follow can then be accomplished with better perspective and with recognition of the relative safety importance of each individual item to the overall plant design. 1.1 Introduction This section should present briefly the principal aspects of the overall application, including the type of license requested, the number of plant units, a brief description of the proposed location of the plant, the type of the nuclear steam supply system and its designer, the type of containment structure and its designer, the core thermal power levels, both rated and design,* and the corresponding net electrical output for each thermal power level, the scheduled completion date, and the antici pated commercial operation date for each unit. 1.2 General Plant Description This section should include a summary description of the principal characteristics of the site and a concise description of the plant. The plant description should include a brief discussion of the principal design criteria, operating characteristics, and safety considerations for the nuclear steam supply system; the engineered safety features and emergency systems; the instrumentation, control, and electrical systems; the power conversion system; the fuel handling and storage systems; the cooling water and other auxiliary systems; and the radioactive waste management system. The general arrangement of major structures and equipment should be indicated by the use of plan and elevation drawings in sufficient number and detail to provide a reasonable understanding of the general layout of the plant. Those features of the plant likely to be of special interest because of their relationship to safety should be identified.
vi
Such items as unusual site characteristics, solutions to particularly difficult engineering problems, and significant extrapolations in technology repre sented by the design should be highlighted.
 
SRated power is defined as the power level at which the plant would be operated if licensed.
Revision 3                                                     November 1978
Design power is defined as the highest power level that would be permitted by plant design and that is used in some safety evaluations.
: 5. Printing Composition:   text pages should be single spaced.
1-1 November 1978 1.3 Comparison Tables 1.3.1 Comparisons with Similar Facility Designs This section should provide a summary of sufficient detail to identify the principal similarities to other nuclear power plants (preferably plants already designed, constructed, or operated) and principal differences from such plants. Such comparisons may be limited to those plants or portions of plants designed or built by the nuclear steam system supplier, the architect-engineer, or the applicant.
Type font and style:   must be suitable for microfilming.
This information should be provided in tabular form with cross-references to the sections of the SAR that fully describe the similarities and differences.
Reproduction:   may be mechanically or photographically reproduced.
This comparison should not be restricted to a comparison of the reactor design parameters, but should include all principal features of the plant such as the engineered safety features, the containment concept, the instrumentation and electrical systems, the radioactive waste management system, and other principal systems.
Text pages should preferably be printed on two sides with the image printed head to head.
1.3.2 Comparison of Final and Preliminary Information (FSAR) The FSAR should be complete without reliance on the PSAR. In an FSAR, tables should be provided to identify clearly all the significant changes that have been made in the plant since submittal of the PSAR. Each item should be cross-referenced to the section in the FSAR that describes the changes and the reasons for them. 1.4 Identification of Agents and Contractors This section should identify the prime agents or contractors for the design, construction, and operation of the nuclear power plant. The principal consultants and outside service organizations (such as those providing audits of the quality assurance program) should be identified.
: 6. Binding Pages should be punched for standard 3-hole loose-leaf binder.
: 7. Page Numbering Pages should be numbered with the two digits corresponding to the chapter and first-level section numbers followed by a hyphen and a sequential number within the section, i.e., the third page in Sec tion 4.1 of Chapter 4 should be numbered 4.1-3. Do not number the entire report sequentially.     (Note that because of the small number of pages in many sections, this Standard Format is numbered sequentially within each chapter.)
vii
 
Revision 3 November 1978 I. INTRODUCTION AND GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PLANT The first chapter of the SAR should present report and a general description of the plant.         an introduction to the the reader to obtain a basic understanding         This  chapter should enable of the overall facility without having to refer to the subsequent chapters.
that follow can then be accomplished with Review of the detailed chapters recognition of the relative safety importance   better perspective and with of each individual item to the overall plant design.
1.1   Introduction This section should present briefly overall application, including the type of the principal aspects of the of plant units, a brief description of the     license requested, the number proposed location of the plant, the type of the nuclear steam supply system of containment structure and its designer,         and its designer, the type the both rated and design,* and the corresponding core thermal power levels, each thermal power level, the scheduled completion net electrical output for date, and the antici pated commercial operation date for each unit.
1.2 General Plant Description This section should include a summary characteristics of the site and a concise description of the principal description of the plant. The plant description should include a brief discussion criteria, operating characteristics, and                   of the principal design safety considerations for the nuclear steam supply system; the engineered safety features and emergency systems; the instrumentation, control, and electrical     systems; the power conversion system; the fuel handling and water and other auxiliary systems; and the     storage    systems;  the cooling radioactive waste management system. The general arrangement of major be indicated by the use of plan and elevation structures and equipment should drawings in sufficient number and detail to provide a reasonable understanding of the plant. Those features of the plant                 of the general layout likely because of their relationship to safety should         to  be of special interest be identified. Such items as unusual site characteristics, solutions to particularly difficult engineering problems, and significant extrapolations in technology repre sented by the design should be highlighted.
SRated power is defined as the power level at which operated if licensed. Design                           the plant would be power is defined level that would be permitted by plant design as the highest power and that is used in some safety evaluations.
1-1
 
Revision 3                                                    November 1978 1.3 Comparison Tables 1.3.1   Comparisons with Similar Facility Designs This section should provide a summary of sufficient detail to identify the principal similarities to other nuclear power plants (preferably plants already designed, constructed, or operated) and principal differences from such plants.     Such comparisons may be limited to those plants or portions of plants designed or built by the nuclear steam system supplier, the architect-engineer, or the applicant.       This information should be provided in tabular form with cross-references to the sections of the SAR that fully describe the similarities and differences. This comparison should not be restricted to a comparison of the reactor design parameters, but should include all principal features of the plant such as the engineered safety features, the containment concept, the instrumentation and electrical systems, the radioactive waste management system, and other principal systems.
1.3.2   Comparison of Final and Preliminary Information (FSAR)
The FSAR should be complete without reliance on the PSAR.       In an FSAR, tables should be provided to identify clearly all the significant changes that have been made in the plant since submittal of the PSAR.
Each item should be cross-referenced to the section in the FSAR that describes the changes and the reasons for them.
1.4   Identification of Agents and Contractors This section should identify the prime agents or contractors for the design, construction, and operation of the nuclear power plant. The principal consultants and outside service organizations (such as those providing audits of the quality assurance program) should be identified.
The division of responsibility between the reactor designer, architect engineer, constructor, and plant operator should be delineated.
The division of responsibility between the reactor designer, architect engineer, constructor, and plant operator should be delineated.
1.5 Requirements for Further Technical Information This section of the PSAR should identify, describe, and discuss those safety features or components for which further technical information is required in support of the issuance of a construction permit, but which has not been supplied in the PSAR. This section of the PSAR should: 1. Identify and distinguish between those technical information development programs that will be required to determine the adequacy of a new design and those that will be used to demonstrate the margin of conservatism of a proven design, 2. Describe the specific technical information that must be obtained to demonstrate acceptable resolution of the problems, 1-2 Revision 3 Revision 3 November 1978 3. Describe the program in sufficient detail to show how the informa tion will be obtained, or cross-reference those sections of the PSAR in which this information is provided, 4. Provide a schedule of completion of the program as related to the projected startup date of the proposed plant, and 5. Discuss the design alternatives or operational restrictions available in the event that the results of the program do not demonstrate acceptable resolution of the problems.
1.5   Requirements for Further Technical Information This section of the PSAR should identify, describe, and discuss those safety features or components for which further technical information is required in support of the issuance of a construction permit, but which has not been supplied in the PSAR. This section of the PSAR should:
: 1. Identify and distinguish between those technical information development programs that will be required to determine the adequacy of a new design and those that will be used to demonstrate the margin of conservatism of a proven design,
: 2. Describe the specific technical information that must be obtained to demonstrate acceptable resolution of the problems, 1-2
 
Revision 3                                                         November 1978
: 3. Describe the program in sufficient detail to show tion will be obtained, or cross-reference those                     how the informa sections of the PSAR in which this information is provided,
: 4. Provide a schedule of completion of the program as related to the projected startup date of the proposed plant, and
: 5. Discuss the design alternatives or operational available in the event that the results of the                     restrictions program do not demonstrate acceptable resolution of the problems.
Reference may be made to topical program summary reports filed with the NRC; however, if such references are made, the applicability of each technical information development item to the applicant's plant should be discussed.
Reference may be made to topical program summary reports filed with the NRC; however, if such references are made, the applicability of each technical information development item to the applicant's plant should be discussed.
In the FSAR, this section should include a r6sum6 of special technical information development programs undertaken to establish the final design and/or demonstrate the conservatism of the design and a discussion of any programs that will be conducted during operation in order to demonstrate the acceptability of contemplated future changes in design or modes of operation.
In the FSAR, this section should include a r6sum6 of special technical information development programs undertaken to establish the final design and/or demonstrate the conservatism of the design and a discussion of any programs that will be conducted during operation in order to demonstrate the acceptability of contemplated future changes in design or modes of operation.
1.6 Material Incorporated by Reference This section should provide a tabulation of all topical reports that are incorporated by reference as part of the application.
1.6   Material Incorporated by Reference This section should provide a tabulation of all topical reports that are incorporated by reference as part of the application.
In this context, "topical reports" are defined as reports that have been prepared by reactor manufacturers, architect-engineers, or other organizations and filed separately with the NRC in support of this application or of other applica tions or product lines. This tabulation should include, for each topical report, the title, the report number, the date submitted to the NRC (or AEC), and the sections of the SAR in which this report is referenced.
"topical reports" are defined as reports that have               In this context, been prepared by reactor manufacturers, architect-engineers, or other organizations and filed separately with the NRC in support of this application or of other applica tions or product lines. This tabulation should include, for each topical report, the title,     the report number, the date submitted to the NRC AEC), and the sections of the SAR in which this                                 (or report is referenced.
For any topical reports that have been withheld from public disclosure pursuant to Section 2.790(b) of 10 CFR Part 2 as proprietary documents, nonproprietary summary descriptions of the general content of such reports should also be referenced.
For any topical reports that have been withheld from public disclosure pursuant to Section 2.790(b) of 10 CFR Part 2 as proprietary documents, nonproprietary summary descriptions of the general content of such reports should also be referenced. This section should also include a tabulation of any documents submitted to the Commission in other applications that are incorporated in whole or in part in this application by reference.
This section should also include a tabulation of any documents submitted to the Commission in other applications that are incorporated in whole or in part in this application by reference.
If any information submitted in connection with other applications is incorporated by reference in this SAR, summaries of such information should be included in appropriate sections of this SAR.
If any information submitted in connection with other applications is incorporated by reference in this SAR, summaries of such information should be included in appropriate sections of this SAR. Results of tests and analyses may be submitted as separate reports.
Results of tests and analyses may be submitted as separate reports.
In such cases, these reports should be referenced in this section and summarized in the appropriate section of the SAR.1-3 November 1978 1.7 Drawings and Other Detailed Information 1.7.1 Electrical, Instrumentation, and Control Drawings (FSAR) The FSAR should include a list of proprietary and nonproprietary electrical, instrumentation, and control (EI&C) drawings, including drawing number, title, revision number, and date. The list should be revised as necessary to conform to drawing revisions.
In such cases, these reports should be referenced in this section and summarized in the appropriate section of the SAR.
Three copies of all proprietary and nonproprietary EI&C drawings, including revisions as they are issued, should be provided separate from the FSAR but incorporated by reference in this section.
1-3
1.7.2 Piping and Instrumentation Diagrams For each piping and instrumentation diagram (including revisions as issued) in the SAR, two large-scale copies (approximately 22 in. x 34 in.) should be provided separately but should be referenced in this section.
 
Revision 3                                                      November 1978 1.7   Drawings and Other Detailed Information 1.7.1   Electrical,   Instrumentation, and Control Drawings (FSAR)
The FSAR should include a list of proprietary and nonproprietary electrical, instrumentation, and control (EI&C) drawings, including drawing number, title, revision number, and date. The list should be revised as necessary to conform to drawing revisions. Three copies of all proprietary and nonproprietary EI&C drawings, including revisions as they are issued, should be provided separate from the FSAR but incorporated by reference in this section.
1.7.2   Piping and Instrumentation Diagrams For each piping and instrumentation diagram (including revisions as issued) in the SAR, two large-scale copies (approximately 22 in. x 34 in.) should be provided separately but should be referenced in this section.
The piping and instrumentation diagrams should contain grid coordinates and drawing cross-references.
The piping and instrumentation diagrams should contain grid coordinates and drawing cross-references.
1.7.3 Other Detailed Information This section of the SAR should include a list of other specific data submitted in response to requests of the NRC staff, including card decks for computer codes, computer printouts, and detailed geologic, seismologic, and foundation engineering information.
1.7.3 Other Detailed Information This section of the SAR should include a list of other specific data submitted in response to requests of the NRC staff, including card decks for computer codes, computer printouts, and detailed geologic, seismologic, and foundation engineering information. Three copies of each such item should be submitted separately but should be referenced in this section.
Three copies of each such item should be submitted separately but should be referenced in this section.
1.8   Conformance to NRC Regulatory Guides The SAR should include a table indicating the extent to which the applicant intends to comply with all applicable NRC regulatory guides and the revision number of those guides. For each applicable regulatory guide, the table should identify those sections of the SAR to which the guide applies and should indicate any proposed exceptions to the regula tory position.
1.8 Conformance to NRC Regulatory Guides The SAR should include a table indicating the extent to which the applicant intends to comply with all applicable NRC regulatory guides and the revision number of those guides. For each applicable regulatory guide, the table should identify those sections of the SAR to which the guide applies and should indicate any proposed exceptions to the regula tory position.
1.9 Standard Designs 1.9.1 Interfaces For standard designs, this section of the SSAR should provide a listing of the NSSS-BOP safety-related interfaces and should identify the sections in the SSAR where descriptions of these interfaces are presented.
1.9 Standard Designs 1.9.1 Interfaces For standard designs, this section of the SSAR should provide a listing of the NSSS-BOP safety-related interfaces and should identify the sections in the SSAR where descriptions of these interfaces are presented.
1.9.2   Exceptions In this section of the SAR, the applicant should (1) clearly identify and describe any exceptions taken to the approved standard design in the referenced SSAR and (2) reference the appropriate section in the SAR where 1-4
1.9.2 Exceptions In this section of the SAR, the applicant should (1) clearly identify and describe any exceptions taken to the approved standard design in the referenced SSAR and (2) reference the appropriate section in the SAR where 1-4 Revision 3 Revision 3 November 1978 the detailed description of the component, system, or structure and the justification for the exception may be found. Portions of the SAR that contain exceptions to the referenced SSAR should be clearly identified by means of delineators such as marginal notation or pages of different color.1-5 Revision 3 November 1978 2. SITE CHARACTERISTICS This chapter of the SAR should provide information on the geological, seismological, hydrological, and meteorological characteristics of the site and vicinity, in conjunction with present and projected population distribution and land use and site activities and controls.
 
The purpose is to indicate how these site characteristics have influenced plant design and operating criteria and to show the adequacy of the site characteristics from a safety viewpoint.
Revision 3 November 1978 the detailed description of the component, system, or structure and the justification for the exception may be found. Portions of the SAR that contain exceptions to the referenced SSAR should be clearly identified by means of delineators such as marginal notation or pages of different color.
2.1 Geography and Demography 2.1.1 Site Location and Description 21.1.1 Specification of Location.
1-5
The location of each reactor at the site should be specified by latitude and longitude to the nearest second and by Universal Transverse Mercator Coordinates (Zone Number, Northing, and Easting, as found on USGS topographical maps) to the nearest 100 meters. The State and county or other political subdivision in which the site is located should be identified, as well as the location of the site with respect to prominent natural and man-made features such as rivers and lakes. 2.1.1.2 Site Area Map. A map of the site area of suitable scale (with explanatory text as necessary) should be included.
 
It should clearly show the following:  
Revision 3 November 1978
: 1. The plant property lines. The area of plant property in acres should be stated. 2. Location of the site boundary.
: 2. SITE CHARACTERISTICS This chapter of the SAR should provide information seismological, hydrological, and meteorological                   on the geological, site and vicinity, in conjunction with                     characteristics  of the present distribution and land use and site activities and projected population is to indicate how these site characteristics and controls. The purpose and operating criteria and to show the adequacyhave influenced plant design of the site characteristics from a safety viewpoint.
If the site boundary lines are the same as the plant property lines, this should be stated. 3. The location and orientation of principal plant structures within the site area. Principal structures should be identified as to function (e.g., reactor building, auxiliary building, turbine building).
2.1   Geography and Demography 2.1.1   Site Location and Description 21.1.1 Specification of Location.
: 4. The location of any industrial, commercial, institutional, recrea tional, or residential structures within the site area. 5. The boundary lines of the plant exclusion area (as defined in 10 CFR Part 100). If these boundary lines are the same as the plant property lines, this should be stated. The minimum distance from each reactor to the exclusion area boundary should be shown and specified. "Site" means the contiguous real estate on which nuclear facilities are located and for which one or more licensees has the legal right to control access by individuals and to restrict land use for purposes of limiting the potential doses from radiation or radioactive material during normal operation of the facilities.
at the site should be specified by latitudeThe location of each reactor second and by Universal Transverse Mercator and longitude to the nearest Northing, and Easting, as found on USGS               Coordinates (Zone Number, topographical maps) to the nearest 100 meters. The State and county or other the site is located should be identified, political subdivision in which site with respect to prominent natural and as well as the location of the man-made features such as rivers and lakes.
2-1 November 1978 6. A scale that will permit the measurement of distances with reasonable accuracy.
2.1.1.2 Site Area Map.         A map of the site area of suitable scale (with explanatory text as necessary) should be included. It should clearly show the following:
: 7. True north. 8. Highways, railways, and waterways that traverse or are adjacent to the site. 2.1.1.3 Boundaries for Establishing Effluent Release Limits. The site description should define the boundary lines of the restricted area (as defined in 10 CFR Part 20) and should describe how access to this area is controlled for radiation protection purposes, including how the applicant will be made aware of individuals entering the area and will control such access. If it is proposed that limits higher than those established by § 20.106(a) (and related as low as is reasonably achievable provisions) be set, the information required by § 20.106 should be sub mitted. The site map discussed above may be used to identify this area, or a separate map of the site may be used. Indicate the location of the boundary line with respect to the water's edge of nearby rivers and lakes. Distances from plant effluent release points to the boundary line should be clearly defined.
: 1. The plant property lines.         The area of plant property in acres should be stated.
2.1.2 Exclusion Area Authority andControl 2.1.2.1 Authority.
: 2. Location of the site boundary. If the the same as the plant property lines, this                 site boundary lines are should be stated.
The application should include a specific description of the applicant's legal rights with respect to all areas that lie within the designated exclusion area. The description should establish, as required by paragraph 100.3(a) of Part 100, that the appli cant has the authority to determine all activities, including exclusion and removal of personnel and property from the area. The status of mineral rights and easements within this area should be addressed.
: 3. The location and orientation of principal the site area. Principal structures should                     plant structures within be identified as to function (e.g., reactor building, auxiliary building, turbine building).
: 4. The location of any industrial, commercial, tional, or residential structures within                         institutional, recrea the site area.
: 5. The boundary lines   of the plant exclusion area (as defined 10 CFR Part 100).       If these   boundary lines are the same as the plantin property lines, this should         be stated. The minimum distance from each reactor to the exclusion area       boundary should be shown and specified.
  "Site" means the contiguous real estate on which nuclear facilities are located and for which one or more licensees     has the legal right to control access by individuals and to restrict land use for purposes of limiting the potential doses from radiation or radioactive material during normal operation of the facilities.
2-1
 
Revision 3                                                          November 1978
: 6. A scale that will permit the measurement of distances with reasonable accuracy.
: 7. True north.
: 8. Highways, railways,     and waterways   that   traverse or   are adjacent to the site.
2.1.1.3 Boundaries for Establishing Effluent Release Limits.             The site description should define the boundary lines of the restricted area (as defined in 10 CFR Part 20) and should describe how access to this area is controlled for radiation protection purposes, including how the applicant will be made aware of individuals entering the area and will control such access.       If it is proposed that limits higher than those established by § 20.106(a) (and related as low as is reasonably achievable provisions) be set, the information required by § 20.106 should be sub mitted. The site map discussed above may be used to identify this area, or a separate map of the site may be used. Indicate the location of the boundary line with respect to the water's edge of nearby rivers and lakes.
Distances from plant effluent release points to the boundary line should be clearly defined.
2.1.2   Exclusion Area Authority andControl 2.1.2.1 Authority.       The application should include a specific description of the applicant's legal rights with respect to all areas that lie within the designated exclusion area. The description should establish, as required by paragraph 100.3(a) of Part 100, that the appli cant has the authority to determine all activities, including exclusion and removal of personnel and property from the area. The status of mineral rights and easements within this area should be addressed.
If ownership of all land within the exclusion area has not been obtained by the applicant, those parcels of land not owned within the area should be clearly described by means of a scaled map of the exclusion area, and Ithe status of proceedings to obtain ownership or the required authority over the land for the life of the plant should be specifically described.
If ownership of all land within the exclusion area has not been obtained by the applicant, those parcels of land not owned within the area should be clearly described by means of a scaled map of the exclusion area, and Ithe status of proceedings to obtain ownership or the required authority over the land for the life of the plant should be specifically described.
Minimum distance to and direction of exclusion area boundaries should be given for both present ownership and proposed ownership.
Minimum distance to and direction of exclusion area boundaries should be given for both present ownership and proposed ownership.           If the exclu sion   area extends into a body of water, the application   should specif ically address the bases upon which it has.been determined that the authority required by paragraph 100.3(a) of Part 100 is or will be held by the applicant.
If the exclu sion area extends into a body of water, the application should specif ically address the bases upon which it has.been determined that the authority required by paragraph 100.3(a) of Part 100 is or will be held by the applicant.
2.1.2.2 Control of Activities Unrelated to Plant Operation.             Any activities unrelated to plant       operation which are to be permitted within the exclusion area (aside from transit through the area) should be des cribed with respect to the nature of such activities, the number of persons engaged in them, and the specific locations within the exclusion area where such activities will be permitted. The application should 2-2
2.1.2.2 Control of Activities Unrelated to Plant Operation.
 
Any activities unrelated to plant operation which are to be permitted within the exclusion area (aside from transit through the area) should be des cribed with respect to the nature of such activities, the number of persons engaged in them, and the specific locations within the exclusion area where such activities will be permitted.
Revision 3                                                   November 1978 describe the limitations to be imposed on such activities and the proce dure to be followed to ensure that the plant staff has general knowledge of the number and location of persons within the exclusion area engaged in such activities. An estimate should be provided of the time required to evacuate all such persons from the area in order that calculations can be made of radiation doses resulting from the accidents postulated in Chapter 15.
The application should 2-2 Revision 3 November 1978 describe the limitations to be imposed on such activities and the proce dure to be followed to ensure that the plant staff has general knowledge of the number and location of persons within the exclusion area engaged in such activities.
2.1.2.3 Arrangements for Traffic Control. Where the exclusion area is traversed by a highway, railway, or waterway, the application should describe the arrangements made or to be made to control traffic in the event of an emergency.
An estimate should be provided of the time required to evacuate all such persons from the area in order that calculations can be made of radiation doses resulting from the accidents postulated in Chapter 15. 2.1.2.3 Arrangements for Traffic Control. Where the exclusion area is traversed by a highway, railway, or waterway, the application should describe the arrangements made or to be made to control traffic in the event of an emergency.
2.1.2.4 Abandonment or Relocation of Roads. If there are any public roads traversing the proposed exclusion area which, because of their loca tion, will have to be abandoned or relocated, specific information should be provided regarding authority possessed under state laws to effect abandonment; the procedures that must be followed to achieve abandonment; the identity of the public authorities who will make the final determina tion; and the status of the proceedings completed to date to obtain abandonment. If a public hearing is required prior to abandonment, the type of hearing should be specified (e.g., legislative or adjudicatory).
2.1.2.4 Abandonment or Relocation of Roads. If there are any public roads traversing the proposed exclusion area which, because of their loca tion, will have to be abandoned or relocated, specific information should be provided regarding authority possessed under state laws to effect abandonment; the procedures that must be followed to achieve abandonment; the identity of the public authorities who will make the final determina tion; and the status of the proceedings completed to date to obtain abandonment.
If a public hearing is required prior to abandonment, the type of hearing should be specified (e.g., legislative or adjudicatory).
If the public road will be relocated rather than abandoned, specific information as described above should be provided with regard to the relocation and the status of obtaining any lands required for relocation.
If the public road will be relocated rather than abandoned, specific information as described above should be provided with regard to the relocation and the status of obtaining any lands required for relocation.
2.1.3 Population Distribution Population data presented should be based on the 1970 census data and, where available, more recent census data. The following information should be presented on population distribution.
2.1.3   Population Distribution Population data presented should be based on the 1970 census data and, where available, more recent census data. The following information should be presented on population distribution.
2.1.3.1 Population Within 10 Miles. On a map of suitable scale that identifies places of significant population grouping such as cities and towns within a 10-mile radius, concentric circles should be drawn, with the reactor at the center point, at distances of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 10 miles. The circles should be divided into 22-1/2-degree segments with each segment centered on one of the 16 compass points (e.g., true north, north-northeast, northeast).
2.1.3.1 Population Within 10 Miles. On a map of suitable scale that identifies places of significant population grouping such as cities and towns within a 10-mile radius, concentric circles should be drawn, with the reactor at the center point, at distances of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 10 miles. The circles should be divided into 22-1/2-degree segments with each segment centered on one of the 16 compass points (e.g., true north, north-northeast, northeast). A table appropriately keyed to the map should provide the current residential population within each area of the map formed by the concentric circles and radial lines. The same table, or separate tables, should be used to provide the projected population within each area for (1) the expected first year of plant operation and (2) by census decade (e.g., 1990) through the projected plant life. The tables should provide population totals for each segment and annular ring, and a total for the 0 to 10 miles enclosed population. The basis for popula tion projections should be described.
A table appropriately keyed to the map should provide the current residential population within each area of the map formed by the concentric circles and radial lines. The same table, or separate tables, should be used to provide the projected population within each area for (1) the expected first year of plant operation and (2) by census decade (e.g., 1990) through the projected plant life. The tables should provide population totals for each segment and annular ring, and a total for the 0 to 10 miles enclosed population.
2.1.3.2 Population Between 10 and 50 Miles. A map of suitable scale and appropriately keyed tables should be used in the same manner as 2-3
The basis for popula tion projections should be described.
 
2.1.3.2 Population Between 10 and 50 Miles. A map of suitable scale and appropriately keyed tables should be used in the same manner as 2-3 Revision 3 November 1978 described above to describe the population and its distribution at 10-mile intervals between the 10- and 50-mile radii from the reactor.
Revision 3                                                     November 1978 described above to describe the population and its distribution at 10-mile intervals between the 10- and 50-mile radii from the reactor.
2.1.3.3 Transient Population.
2.1.3.3 Transient Population.     Seasonal and daily variations in population and population distribution resulting from land uses such as recreational or industrial should be generally described and appropriately keyed to the areas and population numbers contained on the maps and tables of paragraphs 2.1.3.1 and 2.1.3.2.     If the plant is located in an area where significant population variations due to transient land use are expected, additional tables of population distribution should be provided to indicate peak seasonal and daily populations.     The additional tables should cover projected as well as current populations.
Seasonal and daily variations in population and population distribution resulting from land uses such as recreational or industrial should be generally described and appropriately keyed to the areas and population numbers contained on the maps and tables of paragraphs 2.1.3.1 and 2.1.3.2. If the plant is located in an area where significant population variations due to transient land use are expected, additional tables of population distribution should be provided to indicate peak seasonal and daily populations.
2.1.3.4 Low Population Zone. The low population zone (as defined in 10 CFR Part 100) should be specified and the basis for its selection discussed. A scaled map of the zone should be provided to illustrate topographic features; highways, railways, waterways, and any other trans portation routes that may be used for evacuation purposes; and the location of all facilities and institutions such as schools, hospitals, prisons, beaches, and parks. Facilities and institutions beyond the low population zone which, because of their nature, may require special consideration when evaluating emergency plans, should be identified out to a distance of five miles. A table of population distribution within the low popula tion zone should provide estimates of peak daily, as well as seasonal transient, population within the zone, including estimates of transient population in the facilities and institutions identified.
The additional tables should cover projected as well as current populations.
2.1.3.5 Population Center. The nearest population center (as defined in 10 CFR Part 100) should be identified and its population and its direc tion and distance from the reactor specified. The distance from the reactor to the nearest boundary of the population center (not necessarily the political boundary) should be related to the low population zone radius to demonstrate compliance with Part 100 guidelines.       The bases for the boundary selected should be provided. Indicate the extent to which tran sient population has been considered in establishing the population center.
2.1.3.4 Low Population Zone. The low population zone (as defined in 10 CFR Part 100) should be specified and the basis for its selection discussed.
In addition tc specifying the distance to the nearest boundary of a popula tion center, discuss the present and projected population distribution and population density within and adjacent to local population groupings.
A scaled map of the zone should be provided to illustrate topographic features; highways, railways, waterways, and any other trans portation routes that may be used for evacuation purposes; and the location of all facilities and institutions such as schools, hospitals, prisons, beaches, and parks. Facilities and institutions beyond the low population zone which, because of their nature, may require special consideration when evaluating emergency plans, should be identified out to a distance of five miles. A table of population distribution within the low popula tion zone should provide estimates of peak daily, as well as seasonal transient, population within the zone, including estimates of transient population in the facilities and institutions identified.
2.1.3.6 Population Density. The cumulative resident population projected for the year of initial plant operation should be plotted to a distance of at least 30 miles and compared with a cumulative population resulting from a uniform population density of 500 people/sq. mile in all directions from the plant. Similar information should be provided for the end of plant life but compared with a cumulative population resulting from a uniform population density of 1000 people/sq. mile.
2.1.3.5 Population Center. The nearest population center (as defined in 10 CFR Part 100) should be identified and its population and its direc tion and distance from the reactor specified.
2-4
The distance from the reactor to the nearest boundary of the population center (not necessarily the political boundary) should be related to the low population zone radius to demonstrate compliance with Part 100 guidelines.
 
The bases for the boundary selected should be provided.
Revision 3                                                       November 1978 2.2 Nearby Industrial, Transportation, and Military Facilities The purpose of this section is to establishwhether the effects of potential accidents in the vicinity* of the site from present and projected industrial, transportation, and military installations and operations should be used as design basis events for plant design and to establish the design parameters related to the accidents so selected.
Indicate the extent to which tran sient population has been considered in establishing the population center. In addition tc specifying the distance to the nearest boundary of a popula tion center, discuss the present and projected population distribution and population density within and adjacent to local population groupings.
2.2.1   Locations and Routes Provide maps showing the location and distance from the nuclear plant of all significant manufacturing plants; chemical plants; refineries; storage facilities; mining and quarrying operations; military bases; sites; transportation routes (air, land, and water); transportation missile ities (docks, anchorages, airports); oil and gas pipelines,                 facil drilling opera tions, and wells; and underground gas storage facilities.
2.1.3.6 Population Density. The cumulative resident population projected for the year of initial plant operation should be plotted to a distance of at least 30 miles and compared with a cumulative population resulting from a uniform population density of 500 people/sq.
mile in all directions from the plant. Similar information should be provided for the end of plant life but compared with a cumulative population resulting from a uniform population density of 1000 people/sq.
mile.2-4 Revision 3 Revision 3 November 1978 2.2 Nearby Industrial, Transportation, and Military Facilities The purpose of this section is to establishwhether the effects of potential accidents in the vicinity*
of the site from present and projected industrial, transportation, and military installations and operations should be used as design basis events for plant design and to establish the design parameters related to the accidents so selected.
2.2.1 Locations and Routes Provide maps showing the location and distance from the nuclear plant of all significant manufacturing plants; chemical plants; refineries; storage facilities; mining and quarrying operations; military bases; missile sites; transportation routes (air, land, and water); transportation facil ities (docks, anchorages, airports);
oil and gas pipelines, drilling opera tions, and wells; and underground gas storage facilities.
Show any other facilities that, because of the products manufactured, stored, or trans ported, may require consideration with respect to possible adverse effects on the plant. Also, show any military firing or bombing ranges and any nearby aircraft flight, holding, and landing patterns.
Show any other facilities that, because of the products manufactured, stored, or trans ported, may require consideration with respect to possible adverse effects on the plant. Also, show any military firing or bombing ranges and any nearby aircraft flight, holding, and landing patterns.
The maps should be clearly legible and of suitable scale to enable easy location of the facilities and routes in relation to the nuclear plant. All symbols and notations used to depict the location of the facilities and routes should be identified in legends or tables. Topo graphic features should be included on the maps in sufficient detail to adequately illustrate the information presented.
The maps should be clearly legible and of suitable scale to enable easy location of the facilities and routes in relation to the nuclear plant. All symbols and notations used to depict the location of the facilities and routes should be identified in legends or tables. Topo graphic features should be included on the maps in sufficient detail to adequately illustrate the information presented.
2.2.2 Descriptions The descriptions of the nearby industrial, transportation, and military facilities identified in 2.2.1 should include the information indicated in the following sections.
2.2.2   Descriptions The descriptions of the nearby industrial, transportation, and military facilities identified in 2.2.1 should include the information indicated in the following sections.
2.2.2.1 Description of Facilities.
2.2.2.1 Description of Facilities. A concise description of each facility, including its primary function and major products and the number of persons employed, should be provided in tabular form.
A concise description of each facility, including its primary function and major products and the number of persons employed, should be provided in tabular form. 2.2.2.2 Description of Products and Materials.
2.2.2.2 Description of Products and Materials.       A description of the products and materials regularly manufactured, stored, used, or trans ported in the vicinity of the nuclear plant should be provided. Emphasis should be placed on the identification and description of any hazardous materials. Statistical data should be provided on the amounts involved, modes of transportation, frequency of shipment, and the maximum quantity of hazardous material likely to be Drocessed, stored, or transported at any given time. The applicable toxicity limits should be provided for each hazardous material.
A description of the products and materials regularly manufactured, stored, used, or trans ported in the vicinity of the nuclear plant should be provided.
All facilities and activities within five miles of the nuclear plant should be considered. Facilities and activities at greater distances should be included as appropriate to their significance.
Emphasis should be placed on the identification and description of any hazardous materials.
2-5
Statistical data should be provided on the amounts involved, modes of transportation, frequency of shipment, and the maximum quantity of hazardous material likely to be Drocessed, stored, or transported at any given time. The applicable toxicity limits should be provided for each hazardous material.
 
All facilities and activities within five miles of the nuclear plant should be considered.
Revision 3                                                         November 1978 2.2.2.3 Pipelines.     For pipelines, indicate the pipe size, pipe age, operating pressure, depth of burial, location and type of isolation valves, and the type of gas or liquid presently carried.
Facilities and activities at greater distances should be included as appropriate to their significance.
Indicate whether the pipeline is used for gas storage at higher than normal pressure and discuss the possibility of the pipeline being used in the future to carry a different product than the one presently being carried (e.g., propane instead of natural gas).
2-5 Revision 3 November 1978 2.2.2.3 Pipelines.
2.2.2.4 Waterways.     If the site is located adjacent to waterway, provide information on the location of the intake a navigable structure(s) in relation to the shipping channel, the depth of channel, the location of locks, the type of ships and barges using the waterway, and any nearby docks and anchorages.
For pipelines, indicate the pipe size, pipe age, operating pressure, depth of burial, location and type of isolation valves, and the type of gas or liquid presently carried. Indicate whether the pipeline is used for gas storage at higher than normal pressure and discuss the possibility of the pipeline being used in the future to carry a different product than the one presently being carried (e.g., propane instead of natural gas). 2.2.2.4 Waterways.
2.2.2.5 Airports.     For airports, provide information on orientation of runways, type of aircraft using the facility, length and the number of operations per year by aircraft type, and the flying patterns asso ciated with the airport.       Plans for future utilization of the airport, including possible construction of new runways, increased traffic, or utilization by larger aircraft, should be provided.
If the site is located adjacent to a navigable waterway, provide information on the location of the intake structure(s) in relation to the shipping channel, the depth of channel, the location of locks, the type of ships and barges using the waterway, and any nearby docks and anchorages.
In addition, statistics on aircraft accidents* should be provided for:
2.2.2.5 Airports.
: 1. All airports within five miles of the nuclear plant,
For airports, provide information on length and orientation of runways, type of aircraft using the facility, the number of operations per year by aircraft type, and the flying patterns asso ciated with the airport. Plans for future utilization of the airport, including possible construction of new runways, increased traffic, or utilization by larger aircraft, should be provided.
: 2. Airports with projected operations greater than 500d 2 move ments per year within 10 miles,** and
In addition, statistics on aircraft accidents*
: 3. Airports with projected operations   greater than 1000d 2 move ments per year outside 10 miles.**
should be provided for: 1. All airports within five miles of the nuclear plant, 2. Airports with projected operations greater than 500d 2 move ments per year within 10 miles,** and 3. Airports with projected operations greater than 1000d 2 move ments per year outside 10 miles.** Provide equivalent information describing any other aircraft activ ities in the vicinity of the plant. These should include aviation routes, pilot training areas, and landing and approach paths to airports and military facilities.
Provide equivalent information describing any other aircraft ities in the vicinity of the plant. These should include aviation           activ routes, pilot training areas, and landing and approach paths to airports and military facilities.
2.2.2.6 Projections of Industrial Growth. For each of the above categories, provide projections of the growth of present activities and new types of activities in the vicinity of the nuclear plant that can be reasonably expected based on economic growth projections for the area. 2.2.3 Evaluation of Potential Accidents On the basis of the information provided in Sections 2.2.1 and 2.2.2, the potential accidents to be considered as design basis events should be determined and the potential effects of these accidents on the nuclear An analysis of the probability of an aircraft collision at the nuclear plant and the effects of the collision on the safety-related components of the plant should be provided in Section 3.5. "d" is the distance in miles from the site.2-6 November 1978 plant should be identified in terms of design parameter (e.g., overpres sure, missile energies) or physical phenomena (e.g., concentration of flammable or toxic cloud outside building structures).
2.2.2.6 Projections of Industrial Growth.       For each of the above categories, provide projections of the growth of present activities and new types of activities in the vicinity of the nuclear plant that can be reasonably expected based on economic growth projections for the area.
2.2.3.1 Determination of Design Basis Events. Design basis events external to the nuclear plant are defined as those accidents that have a probability of occurrence on the order of about l0-7 per year or greater and have potential consequences serious enough to affect the safety of the plant to the extent that Part 100 guidelines could be exceeded.
2.2.3     Evaluation of Potential Accidents On the basis of the information provided in Sections 2.2.1 and 2.2.2, the potential accidents to be considered as design basis events should be determined and the potential effects of these accidents on the nuclear An analysis of the probability of an aircraft collision at the nuclear plant and the effects of the collision on the safety-related components of the plant should be provided in Section 3.5.
The determination of the probability of occurrence of potential accidents should be based on an analysis of the available statistical data on the frequency of occurrence for the type of accident under consideration and on the transportation accident rates for the mode of transportation used to carry the hazardous material.
  "d" is   the distance in miles from the site.
If the probability of such an accident is on the order of 1O-7 per year or greater, the accident should be con sidered a design basis event, and a detailed analysis of the effects of the accident on the plant's safety-related structures and components should be provided.
2-6
The accident categories discussed below should be considered in selecting design basis events. 1. Explosions.
 
Accidents involving detonations of high explosives, munitions, chemicals, or liquid and gaseous fuels should be considered for facilities and activities in the vicinity of the plant where such materials are processed, stored, used, or transported in quantity.
Revision 3                                                  November 1978 plant should be identified in terms of design parameter (e.g., overpres sure, missile energies) or physical phenomena (e.g., concentration of flammable or toxic cloud outside building structures).
Atten tion should be given to potential accidental explosions that could produce a blast overpressure on the order of 1 psi or greater at the nuclear plant, using recognized quantity-distance relationships.*
2.2.3.1 Determination of Design Basis Events. Design basis events external to the nuclear plant are defined as those accidents that have a probability of occurrence on the order of about l0-7 per year or greater and have potential consequences serious enough to affect the safety of the plant to the extent that Part 100 guidelines could be exceeded. The determination of the probability of occurrence of potential accidents should be based on an analysis of the available statistical data on the frequency of occurrence for the type of accident under consideration and on the transportation accident rates for the mode of transportation used to carry the hazardous material. If the probability of such an accident is on the order of 1O-7 per year or greater, the accident should be con sidered a design basis event, and a detailed analysis of the effects of the accident on the plant's safety-related structures and components should be provided. The accident categories discussed below should be considered in selecting design basis events.
Missiles generated in the explosion should also be considered, and an analysis should be provided in Section 3.5. 2. Flammable Vapor Clouds (Delayed Ignition).
: 1. Explosions. Accidents involving detonations of high explosives, munitions, chemicals, or liquid and gaseous fuels should be considered for facilities and activities in the vicinity of the plant where such materials are processed, stored, used, or transported in quantity. Atten tion should be given to potential accidental explosions that could produce a blast overpressure on the order of 1 psi or greater at the nuclear plant, using recognized quantity-distance relationships.*     Missiles generated in the explosion should also be considered, and an analysis should be provided in Section 3.5.
Accidental releases of flammable liquids or vapors that result in the formation of unconfined vapor clouds should be considered.
: 2. Flammable Vapor Clouds (Delayed Ignition). Accidental releases of flammable liquids or vapors that result in the formation of unconfined vapor clouds should be considered. Assuming that no immediate explosion occurs, the extent of the cloud and the concentrations of gas that could reach the plant under "worst-case" meteorological conditions should be determined. An evaluation of the effects on the plant of detonation and deflagration of the vapor cloud should be provided. An analysis of the missiles generated as a result of the detonation should be provided in Section 3.5.
Assuming that no immediate explosion occurs, the extent of the cloud and the concentrations of gas that could reach the plant under "worst-case" meteorological conditions should be determined.
: 3. Toxic Chemicals. Accidents involving the release of toxic chem icals (e.g., chlorine) from onsite storage facilities and nearby mobile and stationary sources should be considered. If toxic chemicals are known or projected to be present onsite or in the vicinity of a nuclear plant or to be frequently transported in the vicinity of the plant, releases One acceptable reference is the Department of the Army Technical Manual TM 5-1300, "Structures to Resist the Effects of Accidental Explosions,"
An evaluation of the effects on the plant of detonation and deflagration of the vapor cloud should be provided.
for sale by Superintendent of Documents, U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C. 20402.
An analysis of the missiles generated as a result of the detonation should be provided in Section 3.5. 3. Toxic Chemicals.
2-7
Accidents involving the release of toxic chem icals (e.g., chlorine) from onsite storage facilities and nearby mobile and stationary sources should be considered.
 
If toxic chemicals are known or projected to be present onsite or in the vicinity of a nuclear plant or to be frequently transported in the vicinity of the plant, releases One acceptable reference is the Department of the Army Technical Manual TM 5-1300, "Structures to Resist the Effects of Accidental Explosions," for sale by Superintendent of Documents, U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C. 20402.2-7 Revision 3 November 1978 of these chemicals should be evaluated.
Revision 3                                                   November 1978 of these chemicals should be evaluated.     For each postulated event, a range of concentrations at the site should be determined for a spectrum of meteorological conditions. These toxic chemical concentrations should be used in evaluating control room habitability in Section 6.4.
For each postulated event, a range of concentrations at the site should be determined for a spectrum of meteorological conditions.
: 4. Fires. Accidents leading to high heat fluxes or to'smoke, and nonflammable gas- or chemical-bearing clouds from the release of materials as the consequence of fires in the vicinity of the plant should be consid ered. Fires in adjacent industrial and chemical plants and storage facili ties and in oil and gas pipelines, brush and forest fires, and fires from transportation accidents should be evaluated as events that could lead to high heat fluxes or to the formation of such clouds.       A spectrum of meteorological conditions should be included in the dispersal analysis when determining the concentrations of nonflammable material that could reach the site. These concentrations should be used in Section 6.4 to evaluate control room habitability and in Section 9.5 to evaluate the operability of diesels and other equipment.
These toxic chemical concentrations should be used in evaluating control room habitability in Section 6.4. 4. Fires. Accidents leading to high heat fluxes or to'smoke, and nonflammable gas- or chemical-bearing clouds from the release of materials as the consequence of fires in the vicinity of the plant should be consid ered. Fires in adjacent industrial and chemical plants and storage facili ties and in oil and gas pipelines, brush and forest fires, and fires from transportation accidents should be evaluated as events that could lead to high heat fluxes or to the formation of such clouds. A spectrum of meteorological conditions should be included in the dispersal analysis when determining the concentrations of nonflammable material that could reach the site. These concentrations should be used in Section 6.4 to evaluate control room habitability and in Section 9.5 to evaluate the operability of diesels and other equipment.
: 5. Collisions with Intake Structure. For nuclear power plant sites located on navigable waterways, the evaluation should consider the proba bility and potential effects of impact on the plant cooling water intake structure and enclosed pumps by the various size, weight, and type of barges or ships that normally pass the site, including any explosions incident to the collision. This analysis should be used in Section 9.2.5 to determine whether an additional source of cooling water is required.
: 5. Collisions with Intake Structure.
For nuclear power plant sites located on navigable waterways, the evaluation should consider the proba bility and potential effects of impact on the plant cooling water intake structure and enclosed pumps by the various size, weight, and type of barges or ships that normally pass the site, including any explosions incident to the collision.
This analysis should be used in Section 9.2.5 to determine whether an additional source of cooling water is required.
: 6. Liquid Spills. The accidental release of oil or liquids which may be corrosive, cryogenic, or coagulant should be considered to deter mine if the potential exists for such liquids to be drawn into the plant's intake structure and circulating water system or otherwise to affect the plant's safe operation.
: 6. Liquid Spills. The accidental release of oil or liquids which may be corrosive, cryogenic, or coagulant should be considered to deter mine if the potential exists for such liquids to be drawn into the plant's intake structure and circulating water system or otherwise to affect the plant's safe operation.
2.2.3.2 Effects of Design Basis Events. Provide the analysis of the effects of the design basis accidents identified in Section 2.2.3.1 on the safety-related components of the nuclear plant and discuss the steps taken to mitigate the consequences of these accidents, including such things as the addition of engineered-safety-feature equipment and reinforcing of plant structures, as well as the provisions made to lessen the likelihood and severity of the accidents themselves.
2.2.3.2 Effects of Design Basis Events.     Provide the analysis of the effects of the design basis accidents identified in Section 2.2.3.1 on the safety-related components of the nuclear plant and discuss the steps taken to mitigate the consequences of these accidents, including such things as the addition of engineered-safety-feature equipment and reinforcing of plant structures, as well as the provisions made to lessen the likelihood and severity of the accidents themselves.
2.3 Meteorology This section should provide a meteorological description of the site and its surrounding areas. Sufficient data should be included to permit an independent evaluation by the staff. 2.3.1 Regional Climatology 2.3.1.1 General Climate. The general climate of the region should be described with respect to types of air masses, synoptic features (high-2-8 Revision 3 November 1978 and low-pressure systems and frontal systems), general airflow patterns (wind direction and speed), temperature and humidity, precipitation (rain, snow, and sleet), and relationships between synoptic-scale atmospheric processes and local (site) meteorological conditions.
2.3 Meteorology This section should provide a meteorological description of the site and its surrounding areas. Sufficient data should be included to permit an independent evaluation by the staff.
Provide references that indicate the climatic atlases and regional climatic summaries used. 2.3.1.2 Regional Meteorological Conditions for Design and Operating Bases. Seasonal and annual frequencies of severe weather phenomena, includ ing hurricanes, tornadoes and waterspouts, thunderstorms, lightning, hail, and high air pollution potential, should be provided.
2.3.1   Regional Climatology 2.3.1.1 General Climate. The general climate of the region should be described with respect to types of air masses, synoptic features (high-2-8
Provide the probable maximum annual frequency of occurrence and time duration of freezing rain (ice storms) and dust (sand) storms where applicable.
 
Provide estimates of the weight of the 100-year return period snowpack and the weight of the 48-hour Probable Maximum Winter Precipitation for the site vicinity.
Revision 3                                                   November 1978 and low-pressure systems and frontal systems), general airflow patterns (wind direction and speed), temperature and humidity, precipitation (rain, snow, and sleet), and relationships between synoptic-scale atmospheric processes and local (site) meteorological conditions. Provide references that indicate the climatic atlases and regional climatic summaries used.
2.3.1.2 Regional Meteorological Conditions for Design and Operating Bases. Seasonal and annual frequencies of severe weather phenomena, includ ing hurricanes, tornadoes and waterspouts, thunderstorms, lightning, hail, and high air pollution potential, should be provided. Provide the probable maximum annual frequency of occurrence and time duration of freezing rain (ice storms) and dust (sand) storms where applicable. Provide estimates of the weight of the 100-year return period snowpack and the weight of the 48-hour Probable Maximum Winter Precipitation for the site vicinity.
Using the above estimates, provide the weight of snow and ice on the roof of each safety-related structure.
Using the above estimates, provide the weight of snow and ice on the roof of each safety-related structure.
Provide the meteorological data used for evaluating the performance of the ultimate heat sink with respect to (1) maximum evaporation and drift loss and (2) minimum water cooling (see Regulatory Guide 1.27, "Ultimate Heat Sink for Nuclear Power Plants").
Provide the meteorological data used for evaluating the performance of the ultimate heat sink with respect to (1) maximum evaporation and drift loss and (2) minimum water cooling (see Regulatory Guide 1.27, "Ultimate Heat Sink for Nuclear Power Plants").     The period of record examined should be identified, and the bases and procedures used for selec tion of the critical meteorological data should be provided and justified.
The period of record examined should be identified, and the bases and procedures used for selec tion of the critical meteorological data should be provided and justified.
Provide design basis tornado parameters, including translational speed, rotational speed, maximum pressure differential with its asso ciated time interval (see guidance in Regulatory Guide 1.76, "Design Basis Tornado for Nuclear Power Plants"), and 100-year return period "fastest mile of wind," including vertical distribution of velocity and appropriate gust factor.
Provide design basis tornado parameters, including translational speed, rotational speed, maximum pressure differential with its asso ciated time interval (see guidance in Regulatory Guide 1.76, "Design Basis Tornado for Nuclear Power Plants"), and 100-year return period "fastest mile of wind," including vertical distribution of velocity and appropriate gust factor. Provide all other regional meteorological and air quality conditions used for design and operating basis considerations and their bases. Refer ences to SAR sections in which these conditions are used should be included.
Provide all other regional meteorological and air quality conditions used for design and operating basis considerations and their bases. Refer ences to SAR sections in which these conditions are used should be included.
2.3.2 Local Meteorology 2.3.2.1 Normal and Extreme Values of Meteorological Parameters.
2.3.2   Local Meteorology 2.3.2.1 Normal and Extreme Values of Meteorological Parameters.
Provide monthly and annual summaries (based on both long-term data from nearby reasonably representative locations and shorter-term onsite data) of: 1. Monthly and annual wind roses using the wind speed classes pro vided in Regulatory Guide 1.23 (Safety Guide 23), "Onsite Meteorological Programs," and wind direction persistence summaries at all heights at which wind characteristics data are applicable or have been measured.
Provide monthly and annual summaries (based on both long-term data from nearby reasonably representative locations and shorter-term onsite data) of:
: 2. Monthly and annual air temperature and dewpoint temperature summaries, including averages, measured extremes, and diurnal range.2-9 Revision 3 Revision 3 November 1978 3. Monthly and annual extremes of atmospheric water vapor (absolute and relative) including averages, measured extremes, and diurnal range. 4. Monthly and annual summaries of precipitation, including averages and measured extremes, number of hours with precipitation, rainfall rate distribution, (i.e., maximum 1 hr, 2 hr, ... , 24 hr) and monthly precipita tion wind roses with precipitation rate classes.
: 1. Monthly and annual wind roses using the wind speed classes pro vided in Regulatory Guide 1.23 (Safety Guide 23), "Onsite Meteorological Programs," and wind direction persistence summaries at all heights at which wind characteristics data are applicable or have been measured.
: 5. Monthly and annual summaries of fog (and smog), including expected values and extremes of frequency and duration.
: 2. Monthly and annual air temperature and dewpoint temperature summaries, including averages, measured extremes, and diurnal range.
: 6. Monthly and annual summaries of atmospheric stability defined by vertical temperature gradient or other well-documented parameters that have been substantiated by diffusion data. 7. Monthly mixing height data, including frequency and duration (persistence) of inversion conditions.
2-9
 
Revision 3                                                     November 1978
: 3. Monthly and annual extremes of atmospheric water vapor (absolute and relative) including averages, measured extremes, and diurnal range.
: 4. Monthly and annual summaries of precipitation, including averages and measured extremes, number of hours with precipitation, rainfall rate distribution, (i.e., maximum 1 hr, 2 hr, ... , 24 hr) and monthly precipita tion wind roses with precipitation rate classes.
: 5. Monthly and annual summaries of fog (and smog), including expected values and extremes of frequency and duration.
: 6. Monthly and annual summaries of atmospheric stability defined by vertical temperature gradient or other well-documented parameters that have been substantiated by diffusion data.
: 7. Monthly mixing height data, including frequency and duration (persistence) of inversion conditions.
: 8. Hourly averages of wind speed and direction at all heights at which wind characteristics data are applicable or have been measured and hourly averages of atmospheric stability as defined by vertical temper ature gradient or other well-documented parameters that have been substan tiated by diffusion data. (These data should be presented as hour-by-hour data on magnetic tape or monthly and annual joint frequency distributions of wind speed and wind direction by atmospheric stability.)
: 8. Hourly averages of wind speed and direction at all heights at which wind characteristics data are applicable or have been measured and hourly averages of atmospheric stability as defined by vertical temper ature gradient or other well-documented parameters that have been substan tiated by diffusion data. (These data should be presented as hour-by-hour data on magnetic tape or monthly and annual joint frequency distributions of wind speed and wind direction by atmospheric stability.)
This information should be fully documented and substantiated as to the validity of its representation of conditions at and near the site. References should be provided to the National Weather Service (NOAA) station summaries from nearby locations and to other meteorological data that were used to describe site characteristics.
This information should be fully documented and substantiated as to the validity of its representation of conditions at and near the site.
2.3.2.2 Potential Influence of the Plant and Its Facilities on Local Meteorology.
References should be provided to the National Weather Service (NOAA) station summaries from nearby locations and to other meteorological data that were used to describe site characteristics.
Discuss and provide an evaluation of the potential modifica tion of the normal and extreme values of meteorological parameters described in Section 2.3.2.1 above as a result of the presence and operation of the plant (e.g. , the influence of cooling towers or water impoundment features on meteorological conditions).
2.3.2.2 Potential Influence of the Plant and Its Facilities on Local Meteorology. Discuss and provide an evaluation of the potential modifica tion of the normal and extreme values of meteorological parameters described in Section 2.3.2.1 above as a result of the presence and operation of the plant (e.g. , the influence of cooling towers or water impoundment features on meteorological conditions). Provide a map showing the detailed topographic features (as modified by the plant) within a 5-mile (3.1 km) radius of the plant. Also provide a smaller scale map showing topography within a 50-mile (80 km) radius of the plant as well as a plot of maximum elevation versus distance from the center of the plant in each of the sixteen 22-1/2-degree compass point sectors (centered on true north, north northeast, northeast, etc.) radiating from the plant to a distance of 50 miles (80 km).
Provide a map showing the detailed topographic features (as modified by the plant) within a 5-mile (3.1 km) radius of the plant. Also provide a smaller scale map showing topography within a 50-mile (80 km) radius of the plant as well as a plot of maximum elevation versus distance from the center of the plant in each of the sixteen 22-1/2-degree compass point sectors (centered on true north, north northeast, northeast, etc.) radiating from the plant to a distance of 50 miles (80 km). 2.3.2.3 Local Meteorological Conditions for Design and Operating Bases. Provide all local meteorological and air quality conditions used for design and operating basis considerations and their bases, except 2-10 November 1978 for those conditions referred to in Sections 2.3.4 and 2.3.5. References should be included to SAR sections in which these conditions are used. 2.3.3 Onsite Meteorological Measurements Program The preoperational and operational programs for meteorological measure ments at the site, including offsite satellite facilities, should be described.
2.3.2.3 Local Meteorological Conditions for Design and Operating Bases. Provide all local meteorological and air quality conditions used for design and operating basis considerations and their bases, except 2-10
This description should include measurements made, locations and elevations of measurements, exposure of instruments, descriptions of instruments used, instrument performance specifications, calibration and maintenance procedures, data output and recording systems and locations, and data analysis procedures.
 
Additional sources of meteorological data for consideration in the description of airflow trajectories from the site to a distance of 80 km should be similarly described in as much detail as possible, particularly measurements made, locations and eleva tions of measurements, exposure of instruments, descriptions of instru ments used, and instrument performance specifications.
Revision 3                                                  November 1978 for those conditions referred to in Sections 2.3.4 and 2.3.5. References should be included to SAR sections in which these conditions are used.
These additional sources of meteorological data may include National Weather Service stations and other meteorological programs that are well maintained and well exposed (e.g., other nuclear facilities, university and private meteorological programs).
2.3.3   Onsite Meteorological Measurements Program The preoperational and operational programs for meteorological measure ments at the site, including offsite satellite facilities, should be described. This description should include measurements made, locations and elevations of measurements, exposure of instruments, descriptions of instruments used, instrument performance specifications, calibration and maintenance procedures, data output and recording systems and locations, and data analysis procedures. Additional sources of meteorological data for consideration in the description of airflow trajectories from the site to a distance of 80 km should be similarly described in as much detail as possible, particularly measurements made, locations and eleva tions of measurements, exposure of instruments, descriptions of instru ments used, and instrument performance specifications. These additional sources of meteorological data may include National Weather Service stations and other meteorological programs that are well maintained and well exposed (e.g., other nuclear facilities, university and private meteorological programs). Guidance on acceptable onsite meteorological programs is presented in Regulatory Guide 1.23.
Guidance on acceptable onsite meteorological programs is presented in Regulatory Guide 1.23. Provide joint frequency distributions of wind speed and direction by atmospheric stability class (derived from currently acceptable param eters), based on appropriate meteorological measurement heights and data reporting periods, in the format described in Regulatory Guide 1.23. An hour-by-hour listing of hourly-averaged parameters should also be provided on magnetic tape. For the PSAR, at least one annual cycle of onsite meteorological data should be provided at docketing.
Provide joint frequency distributions of wind speed and direction by atmospheric stability class (derived from currently acceptable param eters), based on appropriate meteorological measurement heights and data reporting periods, in the format described in Regulatory Guide 1.23. An hour-by-hour listing of hourly-averaged parameters should also be provided on magnetic tape.
If adequate meteorological data are not available at docketing, the best available (onsite and offsite) data to describe atmospheric dispersion characteristics should be pro vided. Adequate onsite meteorological data must be provided prior to or with the scheduled response to the first set of staff requests for addi tional information.
For the PSAR, at least one annual cycle of onsite meteorological data should be provided at docketing. If adequate meteorological data are not available at docketing, the best available (onsite and offsite) data to describe atmospheric dispersion characteristics should be pro vided. Adequate onsite meteorological data must be provided prior to or with the scheduled response to the first set of staff requests for addi tional information.
For the FSAR, at least two consecutive annual cycles (and preferably three or more whole years), including the most recent one-year period, should be provided at docketing.
For the FSAR, at least two consecutive annual cycles (and preferably three or more whole years), including the most recent one-year period, should be provided at docketing.
Evidence should be provided to show how well these data represent long-term conditions at the site. 2.3.4 Short-Term Diffusion Estimates 2.3.4.1 Objective.
Evidence should be provided to show how well these data represent long-term conditions at the site.
Provide conservative and realistic estimates of atmospheric diffusion (x/Q) at the site boundary (exclusion area) and 2-11 Revision 3 November 1978 at the outer boundary of the low population zone for appropriate time periods up to 30 days after an accident.
2.3.4 Short-Term Diffusion Estimates 2.3.4.1 Objective. Provide conservative and realistic estimates of atmospheric diffusion (x/Q) at the site boundary (exclusion area) and 2-11
2.3.4.2 Calculations.
 
Diffusion estimates should be based on the most representative meteorological data. Onsite data alone should be used as soon as a one-year period of record is completed.
Revision 3                                                     November 1978 at the outer boundary of the low population zone for appropriate time periods up to 30 days after an accident.
Provide hourly cumulative frequency distributions of relative concen trations (x/Q), using onsite data at appropriate distances from the effluent release point(s), such as the minimum site boundary distance (exclusion area). The x/Q values from each of these distributions that are exceeded 5% and 50% (median value) of the time should be reported.
2.3.4.2 Calculations. Diffusion estimates should be based on the most representative meteorological data.     Onsite data alone should be used as soon as a one-year period of record is completed.
For the outer boundary of the low population zone, provide cumulative frequency of x/Q estimates for (1) the 8-hour time period from 0 to 8 hours; (2) the 16-hour period from 8 to 24 hours; (3) the 3-day period from 1 to 4 days; and (4) the 26-day period from 4 to 30 days. Report the worst condition and the 5% and 50% probability level conditions.
Provide hourly cumulative frequency distributions of relative concen trations (x/Q), using onsite data at appropriate distances from the effluent release point(s), such as the minimum site boundary distance (exclusion area). The x/Q values from each of these distributions that are exceeded 5% and 50% (median value) of the time should be reported.     For the outer boundary of the low population zone, provide cumulative frequency of x/Q estimates for (1) the 8-hour time period from 0 to 8 hours; (2) the 16-hour period from 8 to 24 hours; (3) the 3-day period from 1 to 4 days; and (4) the 26-day period from 4 to 30 days. Report the worst condition and the 5% and 50% probability level conditions.       Guidance on appropriate diffusion models for estimating X/Q values is presented in Regulatory Guides 1.3, "Assumptions Used for Evaluating the Potential Radiological
Guidance on appropriate diffusion models for estimating X/Q values is presented in Regulatory Guides 1.3, "Assumptions Used for Evaluating the Potential Radiological .Consequences of a Loss-of-Coolant Accident for Boiling Water Reactors," and 1.4, "Assumptions Used for Evaluating the Potential Radiological Con sequences of a Loss-of-Coolant Accident for Pressurized Water Reactors." Evidence should be provided to show how well these diffusion estimates represent conditions that would be estimated from anticipated long-term conditions at the site. The effects of topography on short-term diffusion estimates should be discussed.
.Consequences of a Loss-of-Coolant Accident for Boiling Water Reactors,"
2.3.5 Long-Term Diffusion Estimates 2.3.5.1 Objective.
and 1.4, "Assumptions Used for Evaluating the Potential Radiological Con sequences of a Loss-of-Coolant Accident for Pressurized Water Reactors."
Provide realistic estimates of annual average atmospheric transport and diffusion characteristics to a distance of 50 miles (80.5 km) from the plant for annual average release limit calcu lations and man-rem estimates.
Evidence should be provided to show how well these diffusion estimates represent conditions that would be estimated from anticipated long-term conditions at the site. The effects of topography on short-term diffusion estimates should be discussed.
2.3.5.2 Calculations.
2.3.5   Long-Term Diffusion Estimates 2.3.5.1   Objective. Provide realistic estimates of annual average atmospheric transport and diffusion characteristics to a distance of 50 miles (80.5 km) from the plant for annual average release limit calcu lations and man-rem estimates.
Provide a detailed description of the model used to calculate realistic annual average x/Q values. Discuss the accuracy and validity of the model, including the suitability of input parameters, source configuration, and topography.
2.3.5.2 Calculations. Provide a detailed description of the model used to calculate realistic annual average x/Q values.         Discuss the accuracy and validity of the model, including the suitability of input parameters, source configuration, and topography. Provide the meteorolog ical data summaries (onsite and regional) used as input to the models.
Provide the meteorolog ical data summaries (onsite and regional) used as input to the models. Guidance on acceptable atmospheric transport and diffusion models is presented in Regulatory Guide 1.111, "Methods for Estimating Atmospheric Transport and Dispersion of Gaseous Effluents in Routine Releases from Light-Water-Cooled Reactors."" Provide a calculation of the maximum annual average X/Q at or beyond the site boundary utilizing appropriate meteorological data for each routine venting location.
Guidance on acceptable atmospheric transport and diffusion models is presented in Regulatory Guide 1.111, "Methods for Estimating Atmospheric Transport and Dispersion of Gaseous Effluents in Routine Releases from Light-Water-Cooled Reactors.""
Estimates of annual average X/Q values for 16 2-12 Revision 3 November 1978 radial sectors to a distance of 50 miles (80.5 km) from the plant using appropriate meteorological data should be provided.
Provide a calculation of the maximum annual average X/Q at or beyond the site boundary utilizing appropriate meteorological data for each routine venting location. Estimates of annual average X/Q values for 16 2-12
Evidence should be provided to show how well these estimates represent conditions that would be estimated from climatologically representative data. 2.4 Hydrologic Engineering The following sections should contain sufficient information to allow an independent hydrologic engineering review to be made of all hydrolog ically related design bases, performance requirements, and bases for operation of structures, systems, and components important to safety, considering the following phenomena or conditions:  
 
: 1. Runoff floods for streams, reservoirs, adjacent drainage areas, and site drainage, and flood waves resulting from dam failures induced by runoff floods, 2. Surges, seiches, and wave action, 3. Tsunami, 4. Nonrunoff-induced flood waves due to dam failures or landslides, 5. Blockage of cooling water sources by natural events, 6. Ice jam flooding, 7. Combinations of flood types, 8. Low water and/or drought effects (including setdown due tc surges, seiches, or tsunami) on safety-related cooling water supplies and their dependability, 9. Channel diversions of safety-related cooling water sources, 10. Capacity requirements for safety-related cooling water sources, and 11. Dilution and dispersion of severe accidental releases to the hydrosphere relating to existing and potential future users of surface water and groundwater resources.
Revision 3                                                     November 1978 radial sectors to a distance of 50 miles (80.5 km) from the plant using appropriate meteorological data should be provided.
The level of analysis that should be presented may range from very conservative, based on simplifying assumptions, to detailed analytical estimates of each facet of the bases being studied. The former approach is suggested in evaluating phenomena that do not influence the selection of design bases or where the adoption of very conservative design bases does not adversely affect plant design.2-13 Revision 3 November 1978 2.4.1 Hydrologic Description 2.4.1.1 Site and Facilities.
Evidence should be provided to show how well these estimates represent conditions that would be estimated from climatologically representative data.
Describe the site and all safety related elevations, structures, exterior accesses, equipment, and systems from the standpoint of hydrologic considerations.
2.4 Hydrologic Engineering The following sections should contain sufficient information to allow an independent hydrologic engineering review to be made of all hydrolog ically related design bases, performance requirements, and bases for operation of structures, systems, and components important to safety, considering the following phenomena or conditions:
Provide a topographic -nap of the site that shows any proposed changes to natural drainage features.
: 1. Runoff floods for streams, reservoirs, adjacent drainage areas, and site drainage, and flood waves resulting from dam failures induced by runoff floods,
2.4.1.2 Hydrosphere.
: 2. Surges, seiches, and wave action,
Describe the location, size, shape, and other hydrologic characteristics of streams, lakes, shore regions, and ground water environments influencing plant siting. Include a description of existing and proposed water control structures, both upstream and down stream, that may influence conditions at the site. For these structures, (1) tabulate contributing drainage areas, (2) describe types of structures, all appurtenances, ownership, seismic design criteria, and spillway design criteria, and (3) provide elevation-area-storage relationships and short term and long-term storage allocations for pertinent reservoirs.
: 3. Tsunami,
Provide a regional map showing major hydrologic features.
: 4. Nonrunoff-induced flood waves due to dam failures or landslides,
List the owner, loca tion, and rate of use of surface water users whose intakes could be adversely affected by accidental release of contaminants.
: 5. Blockage of cooling water sources by natural events,
Refer to Sec tion 2.4.13.2 for the tabulation of groundwater users. 2.4.2 Floods 2.4.2.1 Flood History. Provide the date, level, peak discharge, and related information for major historical flood events in the site region. A "flood" is defined as any abnormally high water stage or over flow from a stream, floodway, lake, or coastal area that results in significantly detrimental effects. Include stream floods, surges, seiches, tsunami, dam failures, ice jams, floods induced by landslides, and similar events. 2.4.2.2 Flood Design Considerations.
: 6. Ice jam flooding,
Discuss the general capability of safety-related facilities, systems, and equipment to withstand floods and flood waves. The design flood protection for safety-related components and structures of the plant should be based on the highest calculated flood water level elevations and flood wave effects (design basis flood) resulting from analyses of several different hypothetical causes. Any possible flood condition up to and including the highest and most crit ical flood level resulting from any of several different events should be considered as the basis for the design protection level for safety related components and structures of the plant. The flood potential from streams, reservoirs, adjacent watersheds, and site drainage should be discussed.
: 7. Combinations of flood types,
The probable maximum water level from a stream flood, surge, seiche, combination of surge and stream flood in estuarial areas, wave action, or tsunami (whichever is applicable and/or greatest) may cause the highest water level at safety-related facilities.
: 8. Low water and/or drought effects (including setdown due tc surges, seiches, or tsunami) on safety-related cooling water supplies and their dependability,
Other possibilities are the flood level resulting from the most severe flood wave at the plant site caused by an upstream or downstream landslide, dam failure, or dam breaching resulting from a seismic or foundation disturbance.
: 9. Channel diversions of safety-related cooling water sources,
The effects 2-14 Revision 3 November 1978 of coincident wind-generated wave action should be superimposed on the applicable flood level. The assumed hypothetical conditions should be evaluated both statically and dynamically to determine the design flood protection level. The topical information that should be included is generally out lined in Sections 2.4.3 through 2.4.6 of this guide, but the types of events considered and the controlling event should be summarized in this section. Indicate whether, and if so how, the regulatory positions of Regulatory Guide 1.59, "Design Basis Floods for Nuclear Power Plants," have been followed; if not followed, describe the specific alternative approaches used. 2.4.2.3 Effects of Local Intense Precipitation.
: 10. Capacity requirements for safety-related cooling water sources, and
Describe the effects of local probable maximum precipitation (see Section 2.4.3.1) on adjacent drainage areas and site drainage systems, including drainage from the roofs of structures.
: 11. Dilution and dispersion of severe accidental releases to the hydrosphere relating to existing and potential future users of surface water and groundwater resources.
Tabulate rainfall intensities for the selected and critically arranged time increments, provide characteristics and descrip tions of runoff models, and estimate the resulting water levels. Summarize the design criteria for site drainage facilities and provide analyses that demonstrate the capability of site drainage facilities to prevent flooding of safety-related facilities resulting from local probable maximum precipitation.
The level of analysis that should be presented may range from very conservative, based on simplifying assumptions, to detailed analytical estimates of each facet of the bases being studied. The former approach is suggested in evaluating phenomena that do not influence the selection of design bases or where the adoption of very conservative design bases does not adversely affect plant design.
Estimates of precipitation based on NOAA publications (formerly U.S. Weather Bureau) with the time distribution based on critical distributions such as those employed by the Corps of Engineers usually provide acceptable bases. Sufficient details of the site drainage system should be provided (1) to allow an independent review of rainfall and runoff effects on safety-related facilities, (2) to judge the adequacy of design criteria, and (3) to allow independent review of the potential for blockage of site drainage due to ice, debris, or similar material.
2-13
 
Revision 3                                                     November 1978 2.4.1   Hydrologic Description 2.4.1.1   Site and Facilities. Describe the site and all safety related elevations, structures, exterior accesses, equipment, and systems from the standpoint of hydrologic considerations.       Provide a topographic
  -nap of the site that shows any proposed changes to natural drainage features.
2.4.1.2 Hydrosphere. Describe the location, size, shape, and other hydrologic characteristics of streams, lakes, shore regions, and ground water environments influencing plant siting.       Include a description of existing and proposed water control structures, both upstream and down stream, that may influence conditions at the site. For these structures, (1) tabulate contributing drainage areas, (2) describe types of structures, all appurtenances, ownership, seismic design criteria, and spillway design criteria, and (3) provide elevation-area-storage relationships and short term and long-term storage allocations for pertinent reservoirs. Provide a regional map showing major hydrologic features.       List the owner, loca tion, and rate of use of surface water users whose intakes could be adversely affected by accidental release of contaminants.       Refer to Sec tion 2.4.13.2 for the tabulation of groundwater users.
2.4.2   Floods 2.4.2.1   Flood History. Provide the date, level, peak discharge, and related information for major historical flood events in the site region. A "flood" is defined as any abnormally high water stage or over flow from a stream, floodway, lake, or coastal area that results in significantly detrimental effects. Include stream floods, surges, seiches, tsunami, dam failures, ice jams, floods induced by landslides, and similar events.
2.4.2.2 Flood Design Considerations. Discuss the general capability of safety-related facilities, systems, and equipment to withstand floods and flood waves. The design flood protection for safety-related components and structures of the plant should be based on the highest calculated flood water level elevations and flood wave effects (design basis flood) resulting from analyses of several different hypothetical causes.         Any possible flood condition up to and including the highest and most crit ical flood level resulting from any of several different events should be considered as the basis for the design protection level for safety related components and structures of the plant. The flood potential from streams, reservoirs, adjacent watersheds, and site drainage should be discussed. The probable maximum water level from a stream flood, surge, seiche, combination of surge and stream flood in estuarial areas, wave action, or tsunami (whichever is applicable and/or greatest) may cause the highest water level at safety-related facilities. Other possibilities are the flood level resulting from the most severe flood wave at the plant site caused by an upstream or downstream landslide, dam failure, or dam breaching resulting from a seismic or foundation disturbance. The effects 2-14
 
Revision 3                                                     November 1978 of coincident wind-generated wave action should be superimposed on the applicable flood level. The assumed hypothetical conditions should be evaluated both statically and dynamically to determine the design flood protection level.
The topical information that should be included is generally out lined in Sections 2.4.3 through 2.4.6 of this guide, but the types of events considered and the controlling event should be summarized in this section. Indicate whether, and if so how, the regulatory positions of Regulatory Guide 1.59, "Design Basis Floods for Nuclear Power Plants,"
have been followed; if not followed, describe the specific alternative approaches used.
2.4.2.3 Effects of Local Intense Precipitation. Describe the effects of local probable maximum precipitation (see Section 2.4.3.1) on adjacent drainage areas and site drainage systems, including drainage from the roofs of structures. Tabulate rainfall intensities for the selected and critically arranged time increments, provide characteristics and descrip tions of runoff models, and estimate the resulting water levels. Summarize the design criteria for site drainage facilities and provide analyses that demonstrate the capability of site drainage facilities to prevent flooding of safety-related facilities resulting from local probable maximum precipitation. Estimates of precipitation based on NOAA publications (formerly U.S. Weather Bureau) with the time distribution based on critical distributions such as those employed by the Corps of Engineers usually provide acceptable bases. Sufficient details of the site drainage system should be provided (1) to allow an independent review of rainfall and runoff effects on safety-related facilities, (2) to judge the adequacy of design criteria, and (3) to allow independent review of the potential for blockage of site drainage due to ice, debris, or similar material.
Provide a discussion of the effects of ice accumulation on site facil ities where such accumulation could coincide with local probable maximum (winter) precipitation and cause flooding or other damage to safety-related facilities.
Provide a discussion of the effects of ice accumulation on site facil ities where such accumulation could coincide with local probable maximum (winter) precipitation and cause flooding or other damage to safety-related facilities.
2.4.3 Probable Maximum Flood (PMF) on Streams and Rivers Indicate whether, and if so how, the guidance given in Appendix A of Regulatory Guide 1.59 has been followed; if not followed, describe the specific alternative approaches used. Summarize the locations and associated water levels for which PMF determinations have been made. 2.4.3.1 Probable Maximum Precipitation (PMP). The PMP is the theoret ical precipitation over the applicable drainage area that would produce flood flows that have virtually no risk of being exceeded.
2.4.3   Probable Maximum Flood (PMF)   on Streams and Rivers Indicate whether, and if so how, the guidance given in Appendix A of Regulatory Guide 1.59 has been followed; if not followed, describe the specific alternative approaches used.       Summarize the locations and associated water levels for which PMF determinations have been made.
These estimates usually involve detailed analyses of actual storms in the general region of the drainage basin under study and certain modifications and extrapola tions of historical data to reflect more severe rainfall conditions than have actually been recorded, insofar as these are deemed "reasonably 2-15 Revision 3 Revision 3 possible" to occur on the basis of hydrometeorological reasoning.
2.4.3.1   Probable Maximum Precipitation (PMP). The PMP is the theoret ical precipitation over the applicable drainage area that would produce flood flows that have virtually no risk of being exceeded. These estimates usually involve detailed analyses of actual storms in the general region of the drainage basin under study and certain modifications and extrapola tions of historical data to reflect more severe rainfall conditions than have actually been recorded, insofar as these are deemed "reasonably 2-15
Discuss considerations of storm configuration (orientation of areal distribution), maximized precipitation amounts (include a description of maximization procedures and/or studies available for the area such as reference to National Weather Service and Corps of Engineers determinations), time distributions, orographic effects, storm centering, seasonal effects, antecedent storm sequences, antecedent snowpack (depth, moisture content, areal distribution), and any snowmelt model. Present the selected maximized storm precipitation distribution (time and space). 2.4.3.2 Precipitation Losses. Describe the absorption capability of the basin, including consideration of initial losses, infiltration rates, and antecedent precipitation.
 
Provide verification of these assump tions by reference to regional studies or by presenting detailed applicable local storm-runoff studies.
Revision 3                                                   November 1978 possible" to occur on the basis of hydrometeorological reasoning. Discuss considerations of storm configuration (orientation of areal distribution),
2.4.3.3 Runoff and Stream Course Models. Describe the hydrologic response characteristics of the watershed to precipitation (such as unit hydrographs), verification from historical floods or synthetic procedures, and the nonlinearity of the model at high rainfall rates. A description of subbasin drainage areas (including a map), their sizes, and topographic features of watersheds should be provided.
maximized precipitation amounts (include a description of maximization procedures and/or studies available for the area such as reference to National Weather Service and Corps of Engineers determinations), time distributions, orographic effects, storm centering, seasonal effects, antecedent storm sequences, antecedent snowpack (depth, moisture content, areal distribution), and any snowmelt model.       Present the selected maximized storm precipitation distribution (time and space).
Include a tabulation of all drainage areas. Discuss the stream course model and its ability to compute floods up to the severity of the PMF. Present any reservoir and channel routing assumptions anu coefficients and their bases with appropriate discussion of initial conditions, outlet works (controlled and uncontrolled), and spillways (controlled and uncontrolled).
2.4.3.2 Precipitation Losses. Describe the absorption capability of the basin, including consideration of initial losses, infiltration rates, and antecedent precipitation. Provide verification of these assump tions by reference to regional studies or by presenting detailed applicable local storm-runoff studies.
2.4.3.4 Probable Maximum Flood Flow. Present the controlling PMF runoff hydrograph at the plant site that would result from rainfall (and snowmelt if pertinent).
2.4.3.3 Runoff and Stream Course Models.     Describe the hydrologic response characteristics of the watershed to precipitation (such as unit hydrographs), verification from historical floods or synthetic procedures, and the nonlinearity of the model at high rainfall rates. A description of subbasin drainage areas (including a map), their sizes, and topographic features of watersheds should be provided. Include a tabulation of all drainage areas. Discuss the stream course model and its ability to compute floods up to the severity of the PMF. Present any reservoir and channel routing assumptions anu coefficients and their bases with appropriate discussion of initial conditions, outlet works (controlled and uncontrolled),
The analysis should consider all appropriate positions and distributions of the probable maximum precipitation and the potential influence of existing and proposed upstream and downstream dams and river structures.
and spillways (controlled and uncontrolled).
Present analyses and conclusions concerning the ability of upstream dams lying within a practical sphere of influence to withstand PMF conditions combined with setup, waves, and runup from appropriate coincident winds (see Section 2.4.3.6).
2.4.3.4 Probable Maximum Flood Flow. Present the controlling PMF runoff hydrograph at the plant site that would result from rainfall (and snowmelt if pertinent). The analysis should consider all appropriate positions and distributions of the probable maximum precipitation and the potential influence of existing and proposed upstream and downstream dams and river structures. Present analyses and conclusions concerning the ability of upstream dams lying within a practical sphere of influence to withstand PMF conditions combined with setup, waves, and runup from appropriate coincident winds (see Section 2.4.3.6). If failures are likely, show the flood hydrographs at the plant site resulting from the most critical combination of such dam failures, including induced domino type failures of dams lying upstream of the plant site. When credit is taken for flood lowering at the plant site as a result of failure of any downstream dam during a PMF, support the conclusion that the downstream dam is reasonably certain to fail.     Finally, provide the estimated PMF discharge hydrograph at the site and, when available, provide a similar hydrograph without upstream reservoir effects to allow an evaluation of reservoir effects and a regional comparison of the PMF estimate to be made.
If failures are likely, show the flood hydrographs at the plant site resulting from the most critical combination of such dam failures, including induced domino type failures of dams lying upstream of the plant site. When credit is taken for flood lowering at the plant site as a result of failure of any downstream dam during a PMF, support the conclusion that the downstream dam is reasonably certain to fail. Finally, provide the estimated PMF discharge hydrograph at the site and, when available, provide a similar hydrograph without upstream reservoir effects to allow an evaluation of reservoir effects and a regional comparison of the PMF estimate to be made. 2.4.3.5 Water Level Determinations.
2.4.3.5 Water Level Determinations. Describe the t!ansiation of the estimated peak PMP discharge to elevation using (when ai)vlicable) 2-16
Describe the t!ansiation of the estimated peak PMP discharge to elevation using (when ai)vlicable) 2-16 November 1978 November 1978 cross-section and profile data, reconstitution of historical floods (with consideration of high water marks and discharge estimates), standard step methods, transient flow methods, roughness coefficients, bridge and other losses, verification, extrapolation of coefficients for the PMF, estimates of PMF water surface profiles, and flood outlines.
 
2.4.3.6 Coincident Wind Wave Activity.
Revision 3                                                    November 1978 cross-section and profile data, reconstitution of historical floods (with consideration of high water marks and discharge estimates), standard step methods, transient flow methods, roughness coefficients, bridge and other losses, verification, extrapolation of coefficients for the PMF, estimates of PMF water surface profiles, and flood outlines.
Discuss setup, significant (33-1/3%)
2.4.3.6 Coincident Wind Wave Activity. Discuss setup, significant (33-1/3%) and maximum (1%) wave heights, runup, and resultant static and dynamic effects of wave action on each safety-related facility from wind generated activity that may occur coincidently with the peak PMF water level. Provide a map and analysis showing that the most critical fetch has been used to determine wave action.
and maximum (1%) wave heights, runup, and resultant static and dynamic effects of wave action on each safety-related facility from wind generated activity that may occur coincidently with the peak PMF water level. Provide a map and analysis showing that the most critical fetch has been used to determine wave action. 2.4.4 Potential Dam Failures, Seismically Induced Indicate whether, and if so how, the guidance given in Appendix A of Regulatory Guide 1.59 has been followed; if not followed, describe the specific alternative approaches used. 2.4.4.1 Dam Failure Permutations.
2.4.4   Potential Dam Failures, Seismically Induced Indicate whether, and if so how, the guidance given in Appendix A of Regulatory Guide 1.59 has been followed; if not followed, describe the specific alternative approaches used.
Discuss the locations of dams (both upstream and downstream), potential modes of failure, and results of seismically induced dam failures that could cause the most critical conditions (floods or low water) with respect to the safety-related facil ities for such an event (see Section 2.4.3.4).
2.4.4.1 Dam Failure Permutations. Discuss the locations of dams (both upstream and downstream), potential modes of failure, and results of seismically induced dam failures that could cause the most critical conditions (floods or low water) with respect to the safety-related facil ities for such an event (see Section 2.4.3.4). Consideration should be given to possible landslides, preseismic-event reservoir levels, and ante cedent flood flows coincident with the flood peak (base flow).     Present the determination of the peak flow rate at the site for the worst dam failure reasonably possible or combination of dam failures, and summarize all analyses to show that the presented condition is the worst permutation.
Consideration should be given to possible landslides, preseismic-event reservoir levels, and ante cedent flood flows coincident with the flood peak (base flow). Present the determination of the peak flow rate at the site for the worst dam failure reasonably possible or combination of dam failures, and summarize all analyses to show that the presented condition is the worst permutation.
Include descriptions of all coefficients and methods used and their bases.
Include descriptions of all coefficients and methods used and their bases. Also, consider the effects on plant safety of other potential concurrent events such as blockage of a stream, waterborne missiles, etc. 2.4.4.2 Unsteady Flow Analysis of Potential Dam Failures.
Also, consider the effects on plant safety of other potential concurrent events such as blockage of a stream, waterborne missiles, etc.
In deter mining the effect of dam failures at the site (see Section 2.4.4.1), the analytical methods presented should be applicable to artificially large floods with appropriately acceptable coefficients and should also consider flood waves through reservoirs downstream of failures.
2.4.4.2 Unsteady Flow Analysis of Potential Dam Failures. In deter mining the effect of dam failures at the site (see Section 2.4.4.1), the analytical methods presented should be applicable to artificially large floods with appropriately acceptable coefficients and should also consider flood waves through reservoirs downstream of failures.         Domino-type failures resulting from flood waves should be considered, where appli cable. Discuss estimates of coincident flow (see Regulatory Guide 1.59) and other assumptions used to attenuate the dain-failure flood wave down stream. Discuss static and dynamic effects of the attenuated wave at the site.
Domino-type failures resulting from flood waves should be considered, where appli cable. Discuss estimates of coincident flow (see Regulatory Guide 1.59) and other assumptions used to attenuate the dain-failure flood wave down stream. Discuss static and dynamic effects of the attenuated wave at the site. 2.4.4.3 Water Level at Plant Site. Describe the backwater, unsteady flow, or other computational method leading to the water elevation estimate (Section 2.4.4.1) for the most critical upstream dam failure or failures, and discuss its verification and reliability.
2.4.4.3 Water Level at Plant Site. Describe the backwater, unsteady flow, or other computational method leading to the water elevation estimate (Section 2.4.4.1) for the most critical upstream dam failure or failures, and discuss its verification and reliability. Superimpose wind and wave conditions that may occur simultanecusly in a manner similar to that described in Section 2.4.3.6.
Superimpose wind and wave conditions that may occur simultanecusly in a manner similar to that described in Section 2.4.3.6.2-17 Revision 3 November 1978 2.4.5 Probable Maximum Surge and Seiche Flooding 2.4.5.1 Probable Maximum Winds and Associated Meteorological Param eters. This mechanism is defined as a hypothetical hurricane or other windstorm that might result from the most severe combinations of meteorolog ical parameters that are considered reasonably possible in the region involved, with the hurricane or other type of windstorm moving along a critical path and at an optimum rate of movement.
2-17
The determination of probable maximum meteorological winds should be presented in detail. This determination involves detailed analyses of actual historical storm events in the general region and certain modifications and extrapolations of data to reflect a more severe meteorological wind system than actually recorded, insofar as these are deemed "reasonably possible" to occur on the basis of meteorological reasoning.
 
Where this has been done previously or on a generic basis (e.g., Atlantic and Gulf Coast Probable Maximum Hurricane characteristics reported in U. S. Weather Bureau memorandum HUR 7-97), reference to that work with a brief description will be suffi cient. The probable maximum conditions are the most severe combinations of hydrometeorological parameters considered reasonably possible that would produce a surge or seiche that has virtually no risk of being exceeded.
Revision 3                                                     November 1978 2.4.5   Probable Maximum Surge and Seiche Flooding 2.4.5.1   Probable Maximum Winds and Associated Meteorological Param eters. This mechanism is defined as a hypothetical hurricane or other windstorm that might result from the most severe combinations of meteorolog ical parameters that are considered reasonably possible in the region involved, with the hurricane or other type of windstorm moving along a critical path and at an optimum rate of movement.     The determination of probable maximum meteorological winds should be presented in detail.
This hypothetical event is postulated along a critical path at an optimal rate of movement from correlations of storm parameters of record. Sufficient bases and information should be provided to ensure that the parameters presented are the most severe combination.
This determination involves detailed analyses of actual historical storm events in the general region and certain modifications and extrapolations of data to reflect a more severe meteorological wind system than actually recorded, insofar as these are deemed "reasonably possible" to occur on the basis of meteorological reasoning. Where this has been done previously or on a generic basis (e.g., Atlantic and Gulf Coast Probable Maximum Hurricane characteristics reported in U. S. Weather Bureau memorandum HUR 7-97), reference to that work with a brief description will be suffi cient. The probable maximum conditions are the most severe combinations of hydrometeorological parameters considered reasonably possible that would produce a surge or seiche that has virtually no risk of being exceeded. This hypothetical event is postulated along a critical path at an optimal rate of movement from correlations of storm parameters of record. Sufficient bases and information should be provided to ensure that the parameters presented are the most severe combination.
2.4.5.2 Surge and Seiche Water Levels. Discuss considerations of hurricanes, frontal (cyclonic) type windstorms, moving squall lines, and surge mechanisms that are possible and applicable to the site. Include the antecedent water level (the 10% exceedance high tide, including initial rise for coastal locations, or the 100-year recurrence interval high water for lakes), the determination of the controlling storm surge or seiche (include the parameters used in the analysis such as storm track, wind fields, fetch or direction of wind approach, bottom effects, and verifi cation of historic events), a detailed description of the methods and models used, and the results of the computation of the probable maximum surge hydrograph (graphical presentation).
2.4.5.2 Surge and Seiche Water Levels.     Discuss considerations of hurricanes, frontal (cyclonic) type windstorms, moving squall lines, and surge mechanisms that are possible and applicable to the site.       Include the antecedent water level (the 10% exceedance high tide, including initial rise for coastal locations, or the 100-year recurrence interval high water for lakes), the determination of the controlling storm surge or seiche (include the parameters used in the analysis such as storm track, wind fields, fetch or direction of wind approach, bottom effects, and verifi cation of historic events), a detailed description of the methods and models used, and the results of the computation of the probable maximum surge hydrograph (graphical presentation).
2.4.5.3 Wave Action. Discuss the wind-generated wave activity that can occur coincidently with a surge or seiche, or independently.
2.4.5.3 Wave Action. Discuss the wind-generated wave activity that can occur coincidently with a surge or seiche, or independently. Estimates of the wave period and the significant (33-1/3%) and maximum (1%) wave heights and elevations with the coincident water level hydrograph should be presented. Specific data should be presented on the largest breaking wave height, setup, runup, and the effect of overtopping in relation to each safety-related facility. A discussion of the effects of the water levels on each affected safety-related facility and the protection to be provided against static and dynamic effects and splash should be included.
Estimates of the wave period and the significant (33-1/3%)
2.4.5.4 Resonance. Discuss the possibility of oscillations of waves at natural periodicity, such as lake reflection and harbor resonance phenomena, and any resulting effects at the site.
and maximum (1%) wave heights and elevations with the coincident water level hydrograph should be presented.
2-18
Specific data should be presented on the largest breaking wave height, setup, runup, and the effect of overtopping in relation to each safety-related facility.
 
A discussion of the effects of the water levels on each affected safety-related facility and the protection to be provided against static and dynamic effects and splash should be included.
Revision 3                                                   November 1978 2.4.5.5 Protective Structures. Discuss the location of and design criteria for any special facilities for the protection of intake, effluent, and other safety-related facilities against surges, seiches, and wave action.
2.4.5.4 Resonance.
2.4.6 Probable Maximum Tsunami Flooding For sites adjacent to coastal areas, discuss historical tsunami, either recorded or translated and inferred, that provide information for use in determining the probable maximum water levels and the geoseismic generating mechanisms available,     with appropriate references to Section 2.5.
Discuss the possibility of oscillations of waves at natural periodicity, such as lake reflection and harbor resonance phenomena, and any resulting effects at the site.2-18 Revision 3 November 1978 2.4.5.5 Protective Structures.
2.4.6.1 Probable Maximum Tsunami. This event is defined as the most severe tsunami at the site, which has virtually no risk of being exceeded. Consideration should be given to the most reasonably severe geoseismic activity possible (resulting from, for example, fractures, faults, landslides, volcanism) in determining the limiting tsunami producing mechanism. The geoseismic investigations required to identify potential tsunami sources and mechanisms are similar to those necessary for the analysis of surface faulting and vibratory ground motions indicated for Section 2.5 and are summarized herein to define those loca tions and mechanisms that could produce the controlling maximum tsunami at the site (from both local and distant generating mechanisms). Such considerations as the orientation of the site relative to the earthquake epicenter or generating mechanism, shape of the coastline, offshore land areas, hydrography, and stability of the coastal area (proneness of sliding) should be considered in the analysis.
Discuss the location of and design criteria for any special facilities for the protection of intake, effluent, and other safety-related facilities against surges, seiches, and wave action. 2.4.6 Probable Maximum Tsunami Flooding For sites adjacent to coastal areas, discuss historical tsunami, either recorded or translated and inferred, that provide information for use in determining the probable maximum water levels and the geoseismic generating mechanisms available, with appropriate references to Section 2.5. 2.4.6.1 Probable Maximum Tsunami. This event is defined as the most severe tsunami at the site, which has virtually no risk of being exceeded.
2.4.6.2 Historical Tsunami Record. Provide local and regional historical tsunami information.
Consideration should be given to the most reasonably severe geoseismic activity possible (resulting from, for example, fractures, faults, landslides, volcanism) in determining the limiting tsunami producing mechanism.
2.4.6.3 Source Generator Characteristics. Provide detailed geoseismic descriptions of the controlling local and distant tsunami generators, including location, source dimensions, fault orientation, and maximum displacement.
The geoseismic investigations required to identify potential tsunami sources and mechanisms are similar to those necessary for the analysis of surface faulting and vibratory ground motions indicated for Section 2.5 and are summarized herein to define those loca tions and mechanisms that could produce the controlling maximum tsunami at the site (from both local and distant generating mechanisms).
2.4.6.4 Tsunami Analysis. Provide a complete description of the analysis procedure used to calculate tsunami height and period at the site. All models used in the analysis should be described in detail.
Such considerations as the orientation of the site relative to the earthquake epicenter or generating mechanism, shape of the coastline, offshore land areas, hydrography, and stability of the coastal area (proneness of sliding) should be considered in the analysis.
The description should include the theoretical bases of the model, its verification, and the conservatism of all input parameters.
2.4.6.2 Historical Tsunami Record. Provide local and regional historical tsunami information.
2.4.6.3 Source Generator Characteristics.
Provide detailed geoseismic descriptions of the controlling local and distant tsunami generators, including location, source dimensions, fault orientation, and maximum displacement.
2.4.6.4 Tsunami Analysis.
Provide a complete description of the analysis procedure used to calculate tsunami height and period at the site. All models used in the analysis should be described in detail. The description should include the theoretical bases of the model, its verification, and the conservatism of all input parameters.
2.4.6.5 Tsunami Water Levels. Provide estimates of maximum and minimum (low water) tsunami heights from both distant and local generators.
2.4.6.5 Tsunami Water Levels. Provide estimates of maximum and minimum (low water) tsunami heights from both distant and local generators.
Describe the ambient water levels, including tides, sea level anomalies, and wind waves assumed coincident with the tsunami.
Describe the ambient water levels, including tides, sea level anomalies, and wind waves assumed coincident with the tsunami.
2.4.6.6 Hydrography and Harbor or Breakwater Influences on Tsunami.
2.4.6.6 Hydrography and Harbor or Breakwater Influences on Tsunami.
Present the routing of the controlling tsunami, including breaking wave 2-19 Revision 3 Revision 3 November 1978 formation, bore formation, and any resonance effects (natural frequencies and successive wave effects) that result in the estimate of the maximum tsunami runup on each pertinent safety-related facility.
Present the routing of the controlling tsunami, including breaking wave 2-19
This should include a discussion both of the analysis used to translate tsunami waves from offshore generator locations, or in deep water, to the site and of antecedent conditions.
 
Provide, where possible, verification of the tech niques and coefficients used by reconstituting tsunami of record. 2.4.6.7 Effects on Safety-Related Facilities.
Revision 3                                                   November 1978 formation, bore formation, and any resonance effects (natural frequencies and successive wave effects) that result in the estimate of the maximum tsunami runup on each pertinent safety-related facility.     This should include a discussion both of the analysis used to translate tsunami waves from offshore generator locations, or in deep water, to the site and of antecedent conditions. Provide, where possible, verification of the tech niques and coefficients used by reconstituting tsunami of record.
Discuss the effects of the controlling tsunami on safety-related facilities and discuss the design criteria for the tsunami protection to be provided.
2.4.6.7 Effects on Safety-Related Facilities. Discuss the effects of the controlling tsunami on safety-related facilities and discuss the design criteria for the tsunami protection to be provided.
2.4.7 Ice Effects Describe potential icing effects and design criteria for protecting safety-related facilities from the most severe ice jam flood, wind-driven ice ridges, or other ice-produced effects and forces that are reasonably possible and could affect safety-related facilities with respect to adjacent streams, lakes, etc. , for both high and low water levels. Include the location and proximity of such facilities to the ice-generating mech anisms. Describe the regional ice and ice jam formation history with respect to water bodies. 2.4.8 Cooling Water Canals and Reservoirs Present the design bases for the capacity and the operating plan for safety-related cooling water canals and reservoirs (reference Sec tion 2.4.11). Discuss and provide bases for protecting the canals and reservoirs against wind waves, flow velocities (including allowance for freeboard), and blockage and (where applicable) describe the ability to withstand a probable maximum flood, surge, etc. Discuss the emergency storage evacuation of reservoirs (low-level outlet and emergency spillway).
2.4.7   Ice Effects Describe potential icing effects and design criteria for protecting safety-related facilities from the most severe ice jam flood, wind-driven ice ridges, or other ice-produced effects and forces that are reasonably possible and could affect safety-related facilities with respect to adjacent streams, lakes, etc. , for both high and low water levels. Include the location and proximity of such facilities to the ice-generating mech anisms. Describe the regional ice and ice jam formation history with respect to water bodies.
Describe verified runoff models (e.g., unit hydrographs), flood routing, spillway design, and outlet protection.
2.4.8   Cooling Water Canals and Reservoirs Present the design bases for the capacity and the operating plan for safety-related cooling water canals and reservoirs (reference Sec tion 2.4.11). Discuss and provide bases for protecting the canals and reservoirs against wind waves, flow velocities (including allowance for freeboard), and blockage and (where applicable) describe the ability to withstand a probable maximum flood, surge, etc.
2.4.9 Channel Diversions Discuss the potential for upstream diversion or rerouting of the source of cooling water (resulting from, for example, river cutoffs, ice jams, or subsidence) with respect to historical, topographical, and geologic evidence in the region. Present the history of flow diversions and realignments in the region. Discuss the potential for adversely affecting safety-related facilities or water supply, and describe avail able alternative safety-related cooling water sources in the event that diversions are possible.2-20 November 1978 2.4.10 Flooding Protection Requirements Describe the static and dynamic consequences of all types of flood ing on each pertinent safety-related facility.
Discuss the emergency storage evacuation of reservoirs (low-level outlet and emergency spillway). Describe verified runoff models (e.g.,
Present the design bases required to ensure that safety-related facilities will be capable of surviving all design flood conditions, and reference appropriate discus sions -in other sections of the SAR where the design bases are implemented.
unit hydrographs), flood routing, spillway design, and outlet protection.
2.4.9   Channel Diversions Discuss the potential for upstream diversion or rerouting of the source of cooling water (resulting from, for example, river cutoffs, ice jams, or subsidence) with respect to historical, topographical,       and geologic evidence in the region. Present the history of flow diversions and realignments in the region.     Discuss the potential for adversely affecting safety-related facilities or water supply, and describe avail able alternative safety-related cooling water sources in the event that diversions are possible.
2-20
 
Revision 3                                                    November 1978 2.4.10   Flooding Protection Requirements Describe the static and dynamic consequences of all types of flood ing on each pertinent safety-related facility. Present the design bases required to ensure that safety-related facilities will be capable of surviving all design flood conditions, and reference appropriate discus sions -in other sections of the SAR where the design bases are implemented.
Describe various types of flood protection used and the emergency pro cedures to be implemented (where applicable).
Describe various types of flood protection used and the emergency pro cedures to be implemented (where applicable).
2.4.11 Low Water Considerations 2.4.11.1 Low Flow in Streams. Estimate and provide the design basis for the probable minimum flow rate and level resulting from the most severe drought considered reasonably possible in the region, if such conditions could affect the ability of safety-related facilities, particularly the ultimate heat sink, to perform adequately.
2.4.11   Low Water Considerations 2.4.11.1   Low Flow in Streams. Estimate and provide the design basis for the probable minimum flow rate and level resulting from the most severe drought considered reasonably possible in the region, if such conditions could affect the ability of safety-related facilities, particularly the ultimate heat sink, to perform adequately.       Include considerations of downstream dam failures (see Section 2.4.4). For non-safety-related water supplies, demonstrate that the supply will be adequate during a 100-year drought.
Include considerations of downstream dam failures (see Section 2.4.4). For non-safety-related water supplies, demonstrate that the supply will be adequate during a 100-year drought.
2.4.11.2 Low Water Resulting from Surges, Seicdhes, or Tsunami.
2.4.11.2 Low Water Resulting from Surges, Seicdhes, or Tsunami.
Determine the surge-, seiche-, or tsunami-caused low water level that could occur from probable maximum meteorological or geoseismic events, if such level could affect the ability of safety-related features to func tion adequately.
Determine the surge-, seiche-, or tsunami-caused low water level that could occur from probable maximum meteorological or geoseismic events, if such level could affect the ability of safety-related features to func tion adequately. Include a description of the probable maximum meteorolog ical event (its track, associated parameters, antecedent conditions) and the computed low water level, or a description of tsunami conditions appli cable. Also consider, where applicable, ice formation or ice jams causing low flow since such conditions may affect the safety-related cooling water source.
Include a description of the probable maximum meteorolog ical event (its track, associated parameters, antecedent conditions) and the computed low water level, or a description of tsunami conditions appli cable. Also consider, where applicable, ice formation or ice jams causing low flow since such conditions may affect the safety-related cooling water source. 2.4.11.3 Historical Low Water. Discuss historical low water flows and levels and their probabilities (unadjusted for historical controls and adjusted for both historical and future controls and uses) only when statistical methods are used to extrapolate flows and/or levels to probable minimum conditions.
2.4.11.3 Historical Low Water. Discuss historical low water flows and levels and their probabilities (unadjusted for historical controls and adjusted for both historical and future controls and uses) only when statistical methods are used to extrapolate flows and/or levels to probable minimum conditions.
2.4.11.4 Future Controls.
2.4.11.4 Future Controls. Provide the estimated flow rate, durations, and levels for probable minimum flow conditions considering future uses, if such conditions could affect the ability of safety-related facilities to function adequately. Substantiate any provisions for flow augmentation for plant use.
Provide the estimated flow rate, durations, and levels for probable minimum flow conditions considering future uses, if such conditions could affect the ability of safety-related facilities to function adequately.
2.4.11.5 Plant Requirements. Present the required minimum safety related cooling water flow, 'the sump invert elevation and configuration, the minimum design operating level, pump submergence elevations (operating heads), and design bases for effluent submergence, mixing, and dispersion.
Substantiate any provisions for flow augmentation for plant use. 2.4.11.5 Plant Requirements.
Discuss the capability of cooling water pumps to supply sufficient water during periods of low water resulting from the 100-year drought.       Refer 2-21
Present the required minimum safety related cooling water flow, 'the sump invert elevation and configuration, the minimum design operating level, pump submergence elevations (operating heads), and design bases for effluent submergence, mixing, and dispersion.
 
Discuss the capability of cooling water pumps to supply sufficient water during periods of low water resulting from the 100-year drought. Refer 2-21 Revision 3 November 1978 to Sections 9.2.1, 9.2.5, and 10.4.5 where applicable.
Revision 3                                                   November 1978 to Sections 9.2.1, 9.2.5, and 10.4.5 where applicable. Identify or refer to institutional restraints on water use.
Identify or refer to institutional restraints on water use. 2.4.11.6 Heat Sink Dependability Requirements.
2.4.11.6 Heat Sink Dependability Requirements. Identify all sources of normal and emergency shutdown water supply and related retaining and conveyance systems.
Identify all sources of normal and emergency shutdown water supply and related retaining and conveyance systems.
Identify design bases used to compare minimum flow and level estimates with plant requirements and describe any available low water safety factors (see Sections 2.4.4 and 2.4.11). Describe (or refer to Section 9.2.5) the design bases for operation and normal or accidental shutdown and cool down during (1) the most severe natural and site-related accident phenomena, (2) reasonable combinations of less severe phenomena, and (3) single failures of man-made structural comporents.     In the PSAR, describe or refer to the criteria for protecting all structures related to the ultimate heat sink during the above events. In the FSAR, describe the design to implement the criteria. Identify the sources of water and related retain ing and conveyance systems that will be designed for each of the above bases or situations.
Identify design bases used to compare minimum flow and level estimates with plant requirements and describe any available low water safety factors (see Sections 2.4.4 and 2.4.11). Describe (or refer to Section 9.2.5) the design bases for operation and normal or accidental shutdown and cool down during (1) the most severe natural and site-related accident phenomena, (2) reasonable combinations of less severe phenomena, and (3) single failures of man-made structural comporents.
Describe the ability to provide sufficient warning of impending low flow or low water levels to allow switching to alternative sources where necessary. Heat dissipation capacity and water losses (such as drift, seepage, and evaporation) should be identified and conservatively estimated.
In the PSAR, describe or refer to the criteria for protecting all structures related to the ultimate heat sink during the above events. In the FSAR, describe the design to implement the criteria.
Indicate whether, and if so how, guidance given in Regulatory Guide 1.27, "Ultimate Heat Sink for Nuclear Power Plants," has been followed; if not followed, describe the specific alternative approaches used.
Identify the sources of water and related retain ing and conveyance systems that will be designed for each of the above bases or situations.
Identify or refer to descriptions of any other uses of water drawn from the ultimate heat sink, such as fire water or system charging requirements. If interdependent water supply systems are used, such as an excavated reservoir within a cooling lake or tandem reservoirs, describe the ability of the principal portion of the system to survive the failure of the secondary portion. Provide the bases for and describe the measures to be taken (dredging or other maintenance) to prevent loss of reservoir capacity as a result of sedimentation.
Describe the ability to provide sufficient warning of impending low flow or low water levels to allow switching to alternative sources where necessary.
2.4.12 Dispersion, Dilution, and Travel Times of Accidental Releases of Liquid Effluents in Surface Waters Describe the ability of the surface water environment to disperse, dilute, or concentrate accidental liquid releases of radioactive effluents as related to existing or potential futurd water users. Discuss the bases used to determine dilution factors, dispersion coefficients, flow velocities, travel times, sorption and pathways of liquid contaminants. The locations and users of surface waters should be included in Section 2.4.1.2, and the release points should be identified in Section 11.2.3.
Heat dissipation capacity and water losses (such as drift, seepage, and evaporation) should be identified and conservatively estimated.
2-22
Indicate whether, and if so how, guidance given in Regulatory Guide 1.27, "Ultimate Heat Sink for Nuclear Power Plants," has been followed; if not followed, describe the specific alternative approaches used. Identify or refer to descriptions of any other uses of water drawn from the ultimate heat sink, such as fire water or system charging requirements.
 
If interdependent water supply systems are used, such as an excavated reservoir within a cooling lake or tandem reservoirs, describe the ability of the principal portion of the system to survive the failure of the secondary portion. Provide the bases for and describe the measures to be taken (dredging or other maintenance) to prevent loss of reservoir capacity as a result of sedimentation.
Revision 3                                                         November 1978 2.4.13   Groundwater All groundwater data should be presented in this section, 2.5.4, or in both and should be appropriately cross-referenced. in Section information is placed in both sections, the information                   If the in the two sections should be consistent.
2.4.12 Dispersion, Dilution, and Travel Times of Accidental Releases of Liquid Effluents in Surface Waters Describe the ability of the surface water environment to disperse, dilute, or concentrate accidental liquid releases of radioactive effluents as related to existing or potential futurd water users. Discuss the bases used to determine dilution factors, dispersion coefficients, flow velocities, travel times, sorption and pathways of liquid contaminants.
2.4.13.1 Description and Onsite Use. Describe the regional and local groundwater aquifers, formations, sources, and sinks.       Describe the type of groundwater use, wells, pumps, storage facilities, and flow requirements of the plant. If groundwater is to be used as a safety related source of water, the design basis protection from natural and accident phenomena should be compared with Regulatory Guide 1.27 guide lines and an indication should be given as to whether, and if so how, the guidelines have been followed; if not followed, the specific alter native approaches used should be described.     Bases and sources of data should be adequately described.
The locations and users of surface waters should be included in Section 2.4.1.2, and the release points should be identified in Section 11.2.3.2-22 Revision 3 Revision 3 November 1978 2.4.13 Groundwater All groundwater data should be presented in this section, in Section 2.5.4, or in both and should be appropriately cross-referenced.
2.4.13.2 Sources. Describe present regional use and projected future use. Tabulate existing users (amounts, water levels tions, locations, and drawdown).                                       and eleva Tabulate or illustrate the history of groundwater or piezometric level fluctuations beneath and in the vicinity of the site. Provide groundwater or piezometric contour maps of aquifers beneath and in the vicinity of the site to indicate flow directions and gradients; discuss the seasonal and long-term variations of these aquifers.
If the information is placed in both sections, the information in the two sections should be consistent.
Indicate the range of values and the method of determination for vertical and horizontal permeability and total and effective porosity (specific yield) for each relevant geologic formation beneath the site. Discuss the potential for reversibility of groundwater flow resulting from local areas of pumping for both plant and nonplant use.
2.4.13.1 Description and Onsite Use. Describe the regional and local groundwater aquifers, formations, sources, and sinks. Describe the type of groundwater use, wells, pumps, storage facilities, and flow requirements of the plant. If groundwater is to be used as a safety related source of water, the design basis protection from natural and accident phenomena should be compared with Regulatory Guide 1.27 guide lines and an indication should be given as to whether, and if so how, the guidelines have been followed; if not followed, the specific alter native approaches used should be described.
Describe the effects of present and projected groundwater use (wells) on gradients and ground water or piezometric levels beneath the site. Note any potential ground water recharge area such as lakes or outcrops within the influence of the plant.
Bases and sources of data should be adequately described.
2.4.13.3 Accident Effects. Provide a conservative analysis of a postulated accidental release of liquid radioactive material at the site.
2.4.13.2 Sources. Describe present regional use and projected future use. Tabulate existing users (amounts, water levels and eleva tions, locations, and drawdown).
Evaluate (where applicable) the dispersion, ion-exchange, capability of the groundwater environment with                       and dilution respect to present and projected users. Identify potential pathways of contamination to groundwater users and to springs, lakes, streams,                           nearby etc. Determine ground water and radionuclide (if necessary) travel time to the nearest down gradient groundwater user or surface body of water.
Tabulate or illustrate the history of groundwater or piezometric level fluctuations beneath and in the vicinity of the site. Provide groundwater or piezometric contour maps of aquifers beneath and in the vicinity of the site to indicate flow directions and gradients; discuss the seasonal and long-term variations of these aquifers.
Include all methods of calculation, data sources, models, and parameters or coefficients used such as dispersion coefficients, dispersivity, distribution (sorption) coefficients, hydraulic gradients, and values of permeability, total and effective porosity, and bulk density along contaminant pathways.
Indicate the range of values and the method of determination for vertical and horizontal permeability and total and effective porosity (specific yield) for each relevant geologic formation beneath the site. Discuss the potential for reversibility of groundwater flow resulting from local areas of pumping for both plant and nonplant use. Describe the effects of present and projected groundwater use (wells) on gradients and ground water or piezometric levels beneath the site. Note any potential ground water recharge area such as lakes or outcrops within the influence of the plant. 2.4.13.3 Accident Effects. Provide a conservative analysis of a postulated accidental release of liquid radioactive material at the site. Evaluate (where applicable) the dispersion, ion-exchange, and dilution capability of the groundwater environment with respect to present and projected users. Identify potential pathways of contamination to nearby groundwater users and to springs, lakes, streams, etc. Determine ground water and radionuclide (if necessary) travel time to the nearest down gradient groundwater user or surface body of water. Include all methods of calculation, data sources, models, and parameters or coefficients used such as dispersion coefficients, dispersivity, distribution (sorption) coefficients, hydraulic gradients, and values of permeability, total and effective porosity, and bulk density along contaminant pathways.
2.4.13.4 Monitoring or Safeguard Requirements.
2.4.13.4 Monitoring or Safeguard Requirements.
Present and discuss plans, procedures, safeguards, and monitoring programs to be used to protect present and projected groundwater users.2-23 November 1978 2.4.13.5 Design Bases for Subsurface Hydrostatic Loading.
plans, procedures, safeguards, and monitoring programs Present and discuss to be used to protect present and projected groundwater users.
: 1. For plants not employing permanent dewatering systems, describe the design bases for groundwater-induced hydrostatic loadings on subsurface portions of safety-related structures, systems, and components.
2-23
Discuss the development of these design bases. Where dewatering during construc tion is critical to the integrity of safety-related structures, describe the bases for subsurface hydrostatic loadings assumed during construction and the dewatering meLhods to be employed in achieving these loadinqs.
 
Where wells are proposed for safety-related purposes, discuss the hydrodynamic design bases for protection against seismically-induced pressure waves. These design bases should be consistent with the ground wiater conditions described in Sections 2.4.13.2 and 2.5.4.6.
Revision 3                                                    November 1978 2.4.13.5   Design Bases for Subsurface Hydrostatic Loading.
: 2. For plants employing permanent dewatering systems: a. Provide a description of the proposed dewatering system, including drawings showing the proposed locations of affected structures, components, and features of the system. Provide information related to the hydrologic design of all system components.
: 1. For plants not employing permanent dewatering systems, describe the design bases for groundwater-induced hydrostatic loadings on subsurface portions of safety-related structures, systems, and components.     Discuss the development of these design bases. Where dewatering during construc tion is critical to the integrity of safety-related structures, describe the bases for subsurface hydrostatic loadings assumed during construction and the dewatering meLhods to be employed in achieving these loadinqs.
Where the dewatering system is important to safety, provide a discussion of its expected func tional reliability.
Where   wells are proposed for safety-related purposes, discuss the hydrodynamic   design bases for protection against seismically-induced pressure waves. These design bases should be consistent with the ground wiater conditions described in Sections 2.4.13.2 and 2.5.4.6.
The discussion of the bases for reliability should include comparisons of proposed systems and components with the perform ance of existing and comparable systems and components for applications under site conditions similar to those proposed.
: 2. For plants employing permanent dewatering systems:
: b. Provide estimates and their bases for soil and rock perme abilities, total porosity, effective porosity (specific yield), storage coefficient, and other related parameters used in the design of the dewatering system. If available, provide the results of monitoring pumping rates and flow patterns during dewatering for the construction excavation.
: a. Provide a description of the proposed dewatering system, including drawings showing the proposed locations of affected structures, components, and features of the system.     Provide information related to the hydrologic design of all system components.       Where the dewatering system is important to safety, provide a discussion of its expected func tional reliability.     The discussion of the bases for reliability should include comparisons of proposed systems and components with the perform ance of existing and comparable systems and components for applications under site conditions similar to those proposed.
: c. Provide analyses and their bases for estimates of ground water flow rates in the various parts of the permanent dewatering system, the area of influence of drawdown, and the shapes of phreatic surfaces to be expected during operation of the system. d. Provide analyses, including their bases, to establish con servative estimates of the time available to mitigate the consequences of the system degradation that could cause groundwater levels to exceed design bases. Document the measures that will be taken to repair the system or to provide an alternative dewatering system that would become operational before the design basis grounawater level is exceeded.
: b. Provide estimates and their bases for soil and rock perme abilities, total porosity, effective porosity (specific yield), storage coefficient, and other related parameters used in the design of the dewatering system. If available, provide the results of monitoring pumping rates and flow patterns during dewatering for the construction excavation.
: c. Provide analyses and their bases for estimates of ground water flow rates in the various parts of the permanent dewatering system, the area of influence of drawdown, and the shapes of phreatic surfaces to be expected during operation of the system.
: d. Provide analyses, including their bases, to establish con servative estimates of the time available to mitigate the consequences of the system degradation that could cause groundwater levels to exceed design bases. Document the measures that will be taken to repair the system or to provide an alternative dewatering system that would become operational before the design basis grounawater level is exceeded.
: e. Provide both the design basis and normal operation ground water levels for safety-related structures, systems, and components.
: e. Provide both the design basis and normal operation ground water levels for safety-related structures, systems, and components.
The design basis groundwater level is defined as the maximum groundwater level used in the design analysis for dynamic or static loading conditions (whichever is being considered) and may be in excess of the elevation 2-24 Revision 3 Revision 3 November 1978 for which the underdrain system is designed for normal operation.
The design basis groundwater level is defined as the maximum groundwater level used in the design analysis for dynamic or static loading conditions (whichever is being considered) and may be in excess of the elevation 2-24
This level should consider abnormal and rare events (such as an occurrence of the Safe Shutdown Earthquake (SSE), a failure of a circulating water system pipe, or a single failure within the system) that can cause failure or overloading of the permanent dewatering system. f. Postulate a single failure of a critical active feature or component during any design basis event. Unless it can be documented that the potential consequences of the failure will not result in dose guidelines exceeding those in Regulatory Guides 1.26, "Quality Group Classifications and Standards for Water-, Steam-, and Radioactive-Waste Containing Components of Nuclear'Power Plants," and 1.29, "Seismic Design Classification," either (1) document by pertinent analyses that groundwater level recovery times are sufficient to allow other forms of dewatering to be implemented before the design basis groundwater level is exceeded, discuss the measures to be implemented and equipment needed, and identify the amount of time required to accomplish each measure or (2) design all system components for all severe phenomena and events. g. Where appropriate, document the bases that ensure the abil ity of the system to withstand various natural and accidental phenomena such as earthquakes, tornadoes, surges, floods, and a single failure of a component feature of the system (such as a failure of any cooling water pipe penetrating, or in close proximity to, the outside walls of safety related buildings where the groundwater level is controlled by the system).
 
An analysis of the consequences of pipe ruptures on the proposed underdrain system should be provided and should include consideration of postulated breaks in the circulating system pipes at, in, or near the dewatering system building either independently of, or as a result of the SSE. h. State the maximum groundwater level the plant structures can tolerate under various significant loading conditions in the absence of the underdrain system. i. Provide a description of the proposed groundwater level monitoring programs for dewatering during plant construction and for permanent dewatering during plant operation.
Revision 3                                                     November 1978 for which the underdrain system is designed for normal operation.
Provide (1) the general arrangement in plans and profile with approximate elevation of piezom eters and observation wells to be installed, (2) intended zone(s) of placement, (3) type(s) of piezometer (closed or open system), (4) screens and filter gradation descriptions, (5) drawings showing typical installa tions showing limits of filter and seals, (6) observation schedules (initial and time intervals for subsequent readings), (7) plans for evalua tion of recorded data, and (8) plans for alarm devices to ensure sufficient time for initiation of corrective action. j. Provide information regarding the outlet flow monitoring program. The information required includes (1) the general location and type of flow measurement device(s) and (2) the observation plan and alarm 2-25 November 1978 procedure to identify unanticipated high or low flow in the system and the condition of the effluent.
This level should consider abnormal and rare events (such as an occurrence of the Safe Shutdown Earthquake (SSE), a failure of a circulating water system pipe, or a single failure within the system) that can cause failure or overloading of the permanent dewatering system.
: k. For OL reviews, but only if not previously reviewed by the staff, provide (1) substantiation of assumed design bases using infor mation gathered during dewatering for construction excavation and (2) all other details of the dewatering system design that implement design bases established during the CP review. 1. For OL reviews, provide a technical specification for periods when the dewatering system may be exposed to sources of water not considered in the design. An example of such a situation would be the excavation of surface seal material for repair of piping such that the underdrain would be exposed to direct surface runoff. In addition, where the permanent dewatering system is safety related, is not completely redundant, or is not designed for all design basis events, provide the bases for a technical specification with action levels, the remedial work required and the estimated time that it will take to accomplish the work, and the sources, types of equipment, and manpower required as well as the availability of the above under potentially adverse conditions.
: f. Postulate a single failure of a critical active feature or component during any design basis event. Unless it can be documented that the potential consequences of the failure will not result in dose guidelines exceeding those in Regulatory Guides 1.26, "Quality Group Classifications and Standards for Water-, Steam-, and Radioactive-Waste Containing Components of Nuclear'Power Plants," and 1.29, "Seismic Design Classification," either (1) document by pertinent analyses that groundwater level recovery times are sufficient to allow other forms of dewatering to be implemented before the design basis groundwater level is exceeded, discuss the measures to be implemented and equipment needed, and identify the amount of time required to accomplish each measure or (2) design all system components for all severe phenomena and events.
: g. Where appropriate, document the bases that ensure the abil ity of the system to withstand various natural and accidental phenomena such as earthquakes, tornadoes, surges, floods, and a single failure of a component feature of the system (such as a failure of any cooling water pipe penetrating, or in close proximity to, the outside walls of safety related buildings where the groundwater level is controlled by the system).
An analysis of the consequences of pipe ruptures on the proposed underdrain system should be provided and should include consideration of postulated breaks in the circulating system pipes at, in, or near the dewatering system building either independently of, or as a result of the SSE.
: h. State the maximum groundwater level the plant structures can tolerate under various significant loading conditions in the absence of the underdrain system.
: i. Provide a description of the proposed groundwater level monitoring programs for dewatering during plant construction and for permanent dewatering during plant operation.         Provide (1) the general arrangement in plans and profile with approximate elevation of piezom eters and observation wells to be installed, (2) intended zone(s) of placement, (3) type(s) of piezometer (closed or open system),
(4) screens and filter     gradation descriptions, (5) drawings showing typical installa tions showing limits of filter and seals, (6)         observation schedules (initial and time intervals for subsequent readings), (7) plans for evalua tion of recorded data, and (8) plans for alarm devices to ensure sufficient time for initiation of corrective action.
: j. Provide information regarding the outlet flow monitoring program. The information required includes (1) the general location and type of flow measurement device(s) and (2) the observation plan and alarm 2-25
 
Revision 3                                                    November 1978 procedure to identify unanticipated high or low flow in the system and the condition of the effluent.
: k. For OL reviews, but only if not previously reviewed by the staff, provide (1) substantiation of assumed design bases using infor mation gathered during dewatering for construction excavation and (2) all other details of the dewatering system design that implement design bases established during the CP review.
: 1. For OL reviews, provide a technical specification for periods when the dewatering system may be exposed to sources of water not considered in the design.     An example of such a situation would be the excavation of surface seal material for repair of piping such that the underdrain would be exposed to direct surface runoff.     In addition, where the permanent dewatering system is safety related, is not completely redundant, or is not designed for all design basis events, provide the bases for a technical specification with action levels, the remedial work required and the estimated time that it will take to accomplish the work, and the sources, types of equipment, and manpower required as well as the availability of the above under potentially adverse conditions.
: m. Where wells are proposed for safety-related purposes, discuss the hydrodynamic design bases for protection against seismically induced pressure waves. These design bases should be consistent with the groundwater conditions described in Section 2.4.13.2 and 2.5.4.6.
: m. Where wells are proposed for safety-related purposes, discuss the hydrodynamic design bases for protection against seismically induced pressure waves. These design bases should be consistent with the groundwater conditions described in Section 2.4.13.2 and 2.5.4.6.
2.4.14 Technical Specification and Emergency Operation Requirements Describe any emergency protective measures designed to minimize the impact of adverse hydrology-related events on safety-related facilities.
2.4.14   Technical Specification and Emergency Operation Requirements Describe any emergency protective measures designed to minimize the impact of adverse hydrology-related events on safety-related facilities.
Describe the manner in which these requirements will be incorporated into appropriate technical specifications and emergency procedures.
Describe the manner in which these requirements will be incorporated into appropriate technical specifications and emergency procedures.     Discuss the need for any technical specifications for plant shutdown to minimize the consequences of an accident resulting from hydrologic phenomena such as floods or the degradation of the ultimate heat sink.       In the event emergency procedures are to be used to meet safety requirements associated with hydrologic events, identify the event, present appropriate water levels and lead times available, indicate what type of action would be taken, and discuss the time required to implement each procedure.
Discuss the need for any technical specifications for plant shutdown to minimize the consequences of an accident resulting from hydrologic phenomena such as floods or the degradation of the ultimate heat sink. In the event emergency procedures are to be used to meet safety requirements associated with hydrologic events, identify the event, present appropriate water levels and lead times available, indicate what type of action would be taken, and discuss the time required to implement each procedure.
2.5   Geology, Seismology, and Geotechnical Engineering This section of the SAR should provide information regarding the seismic and geologic characteristics of the site and the region surround ing the site. Appendix A, "Seismic and Geologic Siting Criteria for Nuclear Power Plants," to 10 CFR Part 100, "Reactor Site Criteria," gives the principal seismic and geologic considerations that guide the staff in its evaluation of the acceptability of sites and seismic design bases.
2.5 Geology, Seismology, and Geotechnical Engineering This section of the SAR should provide information regarding the seismic and geologic characteristics of the site and the region surround ing the site. Appendix A, "Seismic and Geologic Siting Criteria for Nuclear Power Plants," to 10 CFR Part 100, "Reactor Site Criteria," gives the principal seismic and geologic considerations that guide the staff in its evaluation of the acceptability of sites and seismic design bases.2-26 Revision 3 Revision 3 November 1978 This section should include, but not necessarily be limited to, the information discussed below. It should be preceded by a summary that contains a synopsis of Sections 2.5.1 through 2.5.6. Include a brief description of the sites, the investigations performed, results of investigations, conclusions, and a statement as to who did the work. 2.5.1 Basic Geologic and Seismic Information Basic geologic and seismic information is required throughout the following sections to provide a basis for evaluation.
2-26
In some cases, this information is germane to more than one section. The information may be presented under this section, under the following sections,-or as appendices to this section, provided adequate cross-references are made in the appropriate sections.
 
Information obtained from published reports, maps, private communi cations, or other sources should be referenced.
Revision 3                                                       November 1978 This section should include, but not necessarily be limited information discussed below.                                               to, the It should be preceded by a summary that contains a synopsis of Sections 2.5.1 through 2.5.6.
Information from surveys, geophysical investigations, borings, trenches, or other investigations should be adequately documented by descriptions of techniques, graphic logs, photographs, laboratory results, identification of principal inves tigators, and other data necessary to assess the adequacy of the information.
Include a brief description of the sites, the investigations performed, results of investigations, conclusions, and a statement as to who did the work.
2.5.1.1 Regional Geology. Discuss all geologic, seismic, and man made hazards within the site region and relate them to the regional physiography, tectonic structures and tectonic provinces, geomorphology, stratigraphy, lithology, and geologic and structural history, and geochro nology. The above information should be discussed, documented by appro priate references, and illustrated by a regional physiographic map, surface and subsurface geologic maps, isopach maps, regional gravity and magnetic maps, stratigraphic sections, tectonic and structure maps, fault maps, a site topographic map, a map showing areas of mineral and hydrocarbon extraction, boring logs, aerial photographs, and any maps needed to illustrate such hazards as subsidence, cavernous or karst terrain, irregular weathering conditions, and landslide potential.
2.5.1   Basic Geologic and Seismic Information Basic geologic and seismic information is required throughout following sections to provide a basis for evaluation.                         the In some cases, this information is germane to more than one section.
The relationship between the regional and the site physiography should be discussed.
The information may be presented under this section, under the following sections,-or as appendices to this section, provided adequate cross-references are made in the appropriate sections.
A regional physiographic map showing the site location should be included.
Information obtained from published reports, maps, private cations, or other sources should be referenced. Information               communi from surveys, geophysical investigations, borings, trenches, or other investigations should be adequately documented by descriptions of techniques, graphic logs, photographs, laboratory results, identification of principal inves tigators, and other data necessary to assess the adequacy of the information.
Identify and describe tectonic structures such as folds, faults, basins, and domes underlying the region surrounding the site, and include a discussion of their geologic history. A regional tectonic map showing the site location should be included and detailed discussions of the regional tectonic structures of significance to the site should be provided.
2.5.1.1   Regional Geology. Discuss all geologic, seismic, and man made hazards within the site region and relate them to the regional physiography, tectonic structures and tectonic provinces, geomorphology, stratigraphy, lithology, and geologic and structural history, and geochro nology. The above information should be discussed, documented by appro priate references, and illustrated by a regional physiographic map, surface and subsurface geologic maps, isopach maps, regional gravity and magnetic maps, stratigraphic sections, tectonic and structure maps, fault maps, a site topographic map, a map showing areas of mineral and hydrocarbon extraction, boring logs, aerial photographs, and any maps needed to illustrate such hazards as subsidence, cavernous or karst terrain, irregular weathering conditions, and landslide potential.
The detailed analyses of faults to determine their capacity for generating ground motions at the site and to deter mine the potential for surface faulting should be included in Sections 2.5.2 and 2.5.3, respectively.
The relationship between the regional and the site physiography should be discussed.     A regional physiographic map showing the site location should be included.       Identify and describe tectonic structures such as folds, faults, basins, and domes underlying the region surrounding the site, and include a discussion of their geologic history.
The lithologic, stratigraphic, and structural geologic conditions of the region surrounding the site should be described and related to 2-27 November 1978 its geologic history. Provide geologic profiles showing the relation ship of the regional and local geology to the site location.
A regional tectonic map showing the site location should be included and detailed discussions of the regional tectonic structures of significance site should be provided.                                                   to the The detailed analyses of faults to determine their capacity for generating ground motions at the site and to deter mine the potential for surface faulting should be included in Sections 2.5.2 and 2.5.3, respectively.
The geologic province within which the site is located and the relation to other geologic provinces should be indicated.
The lithologic, stratigraphic, and structural geologic conditions of the region surrounding the site should be described and related to 2-27
Regional geologic maps indicating the site location and showing both surface and bedrock geology should also be included.
 
2.5.1.2 Site Geology. Material on site geology included in this section may be cross-referenced in Section 2.5.4. The site physiography and local land forms should be described and the relationship between the regional and site physiography should be discussed.
Revision 3                                                    November 1978 its geologic history.     Provide geologic profiles showing the relation ship of the regional and local geology to the site location. The geologic province within which the site is located and the relation to other geologic provinces should be indicated. Regional geologic maps indicating the site location and showing both surface and bedrock geology should also be included.
A site topographic map showing the locations of the principal plant facilities should be included.
2.5.1.2 Site Geology. Material on site geology included in this section may be cross-referenced in Section 2.5.4. The site physiography and local land forms should be described and the relationship between the regional and site physiography should be discussed. A site topographic map showing the locations of the principal plant facilities should be included. Describe the configuration of the land forms and relate the history of geologic changes that have occurred. Areas that are significant to the site of actual or potential landsliding, surface or subsurface subsidence, uplift, or collapse resulting from natural features such as tectonic depression and cavernous or karst terrains should be evaluated.
Describe the configuration of the land forms and relate the history of geologic changes that have occurred.
Areas that are significant to the site of actual or potential landsliding, surface or subsurface subsidence, uplift, or collapse resulting from natural features such as tectonic depression and cavernous or karst terrains should be evaluated.
The detailed lithologic and stratigraphic conditions of the site and the relationship to the regional stratigraphy should be described.
The detailed lithologic and stratigraphic conditions of the site and the relationship to the regional stratigraphy should be described.
The thicknesses, physical characteristics, origin, and degree of consoli dation of each lithologic unit should also be described, including a local stratigraphic column. Furnish summary logs or borings and excavations such as trenches used in the geologic evaluation.
The thicknesses, physical characteristics, origin, and degree of consoli dation of each lithologic unit should also be described, including a local stratigraphic column. Furnish summary logs or borings and excavations such as trenches used in the geologic evaluation. Boring logs included in Section 2.5.4 may be referenced.
Boring logs included in Section 2.5.4 may be referenced.
A detailed discussion of the structural geology in the vicinity of the site should be provided. Include in the discussion the relationship of site structure to regional tectonics, with particular attention to specific structural units of significance to the site such as folds, faults, synclines, anticlines, domes, and basins. Provide a large-scale structural geology map (1:24,000) of the site showing bedrock surface contours and including the locations of Seismic Category I structures.
A detailed discussion of the structural geology in the vicinity of the site should be provided.
A large-scale geologic map (1:24,000) of the region within 5 miles of the site that shows surface geology and that includes the locations of major structures of the nuclear power plant, including all Seismic Cate gory I structures, should also be furnished. Areas of bedrock outcrop from which geologic interpretation has been extrapolated should be distinguished from areas in which bedrock is not exposed at the surface.
Include in the discussion the relationship of site structure to regional tectonics, with particular attention to specific structural units of significance to the site such as folds, faults, synclines, anticlines, domes, and basins. Provide a large-scale structural geology map (1:24,000) of the site showing bedrock surface contours and including the locations of Seismic Category I structures.
A large-scale geologic map (1:24,000) of the region within 5 miles of the site that shows surface geology and that includes the locations of major structures of the nuclear power plant, including all Seismic Cate gory I structures, should also be furnished.
Areas of bedrock outcrop from which geologic interpretation has been extrapolated should be distinguished from areas in which bedrock is not exposed at the surface.
When the interpretation differs substantially from the published geologic literature on the area, the differences should be noted and documentation for the new conclusions presented.
When the interpretation differs substantially from the published geologic literature on the area, the differences should be noted and documentation for the new conclusions presented.
The geologic history of the site should be discussed and related to the regional geologic history.
The geologic history of the site should be discussed and related to the regional geologic history.
Include an evaluation from an engineering-geology standpoint of the local geologic features that affect the plant structures.
Include an evaluation from an engineering-geology standpoint of the local geologic features that affect the plant structures. Geologic con ditions underlying all Seismic Category I structures, dams, dikes, and pipelines should be described in detail. The dynamic behavior of the 2-28
Geologic con ditions underlying all Seismic Category I structures, dams, dikes, and pipelines should be described in detail. The dynamic behavior of the 2-28 Revision 3 Revision 3 November 1978 site during prior earthquakes should be described.
 
Deformational zones such as shears, joints, fractures, and folds, or combinations of these features should be identified and evaluated relative to structural founda tions. Describe and evaluate zones of alteration or irregular weathering profiles, zones of structural  
Revision 3                                                         November 1978 site during prior earthquakes should be described.
*weakness, unrelieved residual stresses in bedrock, and all rocks or soils that might be unstable because of their mineralogy or unstable physical or chemical properties.
Deformational zones such as shears, joints, fractures, and folds, or combinations of these features should be identified and evaluated relative to structural founda tions. Describe and evaluate zones of alteration or profiles, zones of structural *weakness, unrelieved irregular weathering residual stresses in bedrock, and all rocks or soils that might be unstable because of their mineralogy or unstable physical or chemical properties.     The effects of man's activities in the area such as withdrawal or addition of subsurface fluids or mineral extraction at the site should be evaluated.
The effects of man's activities in the area such as withdrawal or addition of subsurface fluids or mineral extraction at the site should be evaluated.
Site groundwater conditions should be described.
Site groundwater conditions should be described.
Information included in Section 2.4.13 may be referenced in this section.
Information included in Section 2.4.13 may be referenced in this section.
2.5.2 Vibratory Ground Motion This section is directed toward establishing the seismic design basis for vibratory ground motion. The presentation should be aimed at (1) determining the Safe Shutdown Earthquake (SSE) and the Operating Basis Earthquake (OBE) for the site and (2) specifying the vibratory ground motion corresponding to each of these events. Determination of the SSE and the OBE should be based on the identification of tectonic provinces or active geologic structures with which earthquake activity in the region can be associated.
2.5.2   Vibratory Ground Motion This section is directed toward establishing the seismic design basis for vibratory ground motion.     The presentation should be aimed at (1) determining the Safe Shutdown Earthquake (SSE) and the Operating Basis Earthquake (OBE) for the site and (2) specifying motion corresponding to each of these events.             the vibratory ground Determination of the SSE and the OBE should be based on the identification of tectonic provinces or active geologic structures with which earthquake activity in the region can be associated. The design vibratory ground motion for the OBE should then be determined by assessing                               SSE and the effects at the site of the SSE and OBE associated with the identified provinces or structures.
The design vibratory ground motion for the SSE and OBE should then be determined by assessing the effects at the site of the SSE and OBE associated with the identified provinces or structures.
The presentation in the SAR should proceed from discussions of the regional seismicity, geologic structures, and tectonic activity to a deter mination of the relation between seismicity and geologic structures.
The presentation in the SAR should proceed from discussions of the regional seismicity, geologic structures, and tectonic activity to a deter mination of the relation between seismicity and geologic structures.
Earthquake-generating potential of tectonic provinces and any active struc tures should be identified.
Earthquake-generating potential of tectonic provinces and any active struc tures should be identified. Finally, the ground motion that would result at the site from the maximum potential earthquakes associated with each tectonic province or geologic structure should be assessed considering any site amplification effects.     The results should be used to establish the vibratory ground motion design spectrum.
Finally, the ground motion that would result at the site from the maximum potential earthquakes associated with each tectonic province or geologic structure should be assessed considering any site amplification effects. The results should be used to establish the vibratory ground motion design spectrum.
Information should be presented to describe for vibratory ground motion (Safe Shutdown               how the design basis Earthquake) was determined.
Information should be presented to describe how the design basis for vibratory ground motion (Safe Shutdown Earthquake) was determined.
The following specific information and determinations included, as needed, to clearly establish the                     should also be design basis for vibratory ground motion.     Information presented in other sections may be cross referenced and need not be repeated.
The following specific information and determinations should also be included, as needed, to clearly establish the design basis for vibratory ground motion. Information presented in other sections may be cross referenced and need not be repeated.
2.5.2.1 Seismicity. A complete list   of all historically reported earthquakes that could have reasonably affected the region surrounding the site should be provided.     The listing should include all earthquakes of MM Intensity greater than IV or magnitude greater than 3.0 that have been reported in all tectonic provinces, any part of which is within 200 miles of the site. This account should be augmented by a regional scale map showing all listed earthquake epicenters and, in areas of high 2-29
2.5.2.1 Seismicity.
 
A complete list of all historically reported earthquakes that could have reasonably affected the region surrounding the site should be provided.
Revision 3                                                    November 1978 seismicity, by a larger-scale map showing earthquake epicenters within 50 miles of the site. The following information describing each earth quake should be provided whenever it is available: epicenter coordinates, depth of focus, origin time, highest intensity, magnitude, seismic moment, source mechanism, source dimensions, source rise time, rupture velocity, total dislocation, fractional stress drop, any strong-motion recordings, and identification of references from which the specified information was obtained. In addition, any earthquake-induced geologic hazards (e.g.,
The listing should include all earthquakes of MM Intensity greater than IV or magnitude greater than 3.0 that have been reported in all tectonic provinces, any part of which is within 200 miles of the site. This account should be augmented by a regional scale map showing all listed earthquake epicenters and, in areas of high 2-29 November 1978 seismicity, by a larger-scale map showing earthquake epicenters within 50 miles of the site. The following information describing each earth quake should be provided whenever it is available:
liquefaction, landsliding, landspreading, or lurching) that have been reported should be described completely, including the level of strong motion that induced failure and the properties of the materials involved.
epicenter coordinates, depth of focus, origin time, highest intensity, magnitude, seismic moment, source mechanism, source dimensions, source rise time, rupture velocity, total dislocation, fractional stress drop, any strong-motion recordings, and identification of references from which the specified information was obtained.
2.5.2.2 Geologic Structures and Tectonic Activity.     Identify the regional geologic structures and tectonic activity that are significant in determining regional earthquake potential.     All tectonic provinces any part of which occurs within 200 miles of the site should be identified.
In addition, any earthquake-induced geologic hazards (e.g., liquefaction, landsliding, landspreading, or lurching) that have been reported should be described completely, including the level of strong motion that induced failure and the properties of the materials involved.
The identification should include a description of those characteristics of geologic structure, tectonic history, present and past stress regimes, and seismicity that distinguish the various tectonic provinces and parti cular areas within those provinces where historical earthquakes have occurred. Alternative models of regional tectonic activity from available literature sources should be discussed. The discussion in this section should be augmented by a regional-scale map showing the tectonic provinces, earthquake epicenters, the locations of geologic structures and other features that characterize the provinces, and the locations of any capable faults.
2.5.2.2 Geologic Structures and Tectonic Activity.
2.5.2.3 Correlation of Earthquake Activity with Geologic Structures or Tectonic Provinces. Provide a correlation between epicenters or regions of highest intensity of historically reported earthquakes and geologic structures or tectonic provinces. Whenever an earthquake epicenter or concentration of earthquake epicenters can be reasonably correlated with geologic structures, the rationale for the association should be developed.
Identify the regional geologic structures and tectonic activity that are significant in determining regional earthquake potential.
This discussion should include identification of the methods used to locate the earthquake epicenters and an estimate of their accuracy and should provide a detailed account that compares and contrasts the geologic struc ture involved in the earthquake activity with other areas within the tectonic province. When an earthquake epicenter cannot be reasonably correlated with geologic structures, the epicenter should be discussed in relation to tectonic provinces. A subdivision of a tectonic province should be corroborated on the basis of evaluations that consider, but should not be limited to, detailed seismicity studies, tectonic flux measurements, contrasting structural fabric, differences in geologic history, and differences in stress regime.
All tectonic provinces any part of which occurs within 200 miles of the site should be identified.
2.5.2.4 Maximum Earthquake Potential. The largest earthquakes asso ciated with each geologic structure or tectonic province should be identi fied. Where the earthquakes are associated with a geologic structure, the largest earthquake that could occur on that structure should be evaluated based on considerations such as the nature of faulting, fault length, 2-30
The identification should include a description of those characteristics of geologic structure, tectonic history, present and past stress regimes, and seismicity that distinguish the various tectonic provinces and parti cular areas within those provinces where historical earthquakes have occurred.
 
Alternative models of regional tectonic activity from available literature sources should be discussed.
Revision 3                                                       November 1978 fault displacement, and earthquake history. Where the earthquakes are associated with a tectonic province, the largest historical earthquakes within the province should be identified and, whenever reasonable, the return period for the earthquakes should be determined.
The discussion in this section should be augmented by a regional-scale map showing the tectonic provinces, earthquake epicenters, the locations of geologic structures and other features that characterize the provinces, and the locations of any capable faults. 2.5.2.3 Correlation of Earthquake Activity with Geologic Structures or Tectonic Provinces.
Provide a correlation between epicenters or regions of highest intensity of historically reported earthquakes and geologic structures or tectonic provinces.
Whenever an earthquake epicenter or concentration of earthquake epicenters can be reasonably correlated with geologic structures, the rationale for the association should be developed.
This discussion should include identification of the methods used to locate the earthquake epicenters and an estimate of their accuracy and should provide a detailed account that compares and contrasts the geologic struc ture involved in the earthquake activity with other areas within the tectonic province.
When an earthquake epicenter cannot be reasonably correlated with geologic structures, the epicenter should be discussed in relation to tectonic provinces.
A subdivision of a tectonic province should be corroborated on the basis of evaluations that consider, but should not be limited to, detailed seismicity studies, tectonic flux measurements, contrasting structural fabric, differences in geologic history, and differences in stress regime. 2.5.2.4 Maximum Earthquake Potential.
The largest earthquakes asso ciated with each geologic structure or tectonic province should be identi fied. Where the earthquakes are associated with a geologic structure, the largest earthquake that could occur on that structure should be evaluated based on considerations such as the nature of faulting, fault length, 2-30 Revision 3 Revision 3 November 1978 fault displacement, and earthquake history. Where the earthquakes are associated with a tectonic province, the largest historical earthquakes within the province should be identified and, whenever reasonable, the return period for the earthquakes should be determined.
Isoseismal maps should also be presented for the earthquakes.
Isoseismal maps should also be presented for the earthquakes.
Ground motion at the site should be determined assuming seismic energy transmission effects are constant over the region and assuming the largest earthquake associated with each geologic structure or with each tectonic province occurs at the point of closest approach of that structure or province to the site. The set of conditions describing the occurrence of the potential earthquake that would produce the largest vibratory ground motion at the site should be defined. If different potential earthquakes would produce the maximum ground motion in different frequency bands, the conditions describing all such earthquakes should be specified.
Ground motion at the site should be determined assuming seismic energy transmission effects are constant over the region and assuming the largest earthquake associated with each geologic structure or with each tectonic province occurs at the point of closest approach of that structure or province to the site. The set of conditions describing the occurrence of the potential earthquake that would produce the largest vibratory ground motion at the site should be defined. If different potential earthquakes would produce the maximum ground motion in different frequency bands, the conditions describing all such earthquakes should be specified. The description of the potential earthquake occurrences should include the maximum intensity or magnitude and the distance from the assumed location of the potential earthquake to the site.
The description of the potential earthquake occurrences should include the maximum intensity or magnitude and the distance from the assumed location of the potential earthquake to the site. 2.5.2.5 Seismic Wave Transmission Characteristics of the Site. The following material properties should be determined for each stratum under the site: seismic compressional and shear velocities, bulk densities, soil properties and classification, shear modulus and its variation with strain level, and water table elevation and its variation.
2.5.2.5 Seismic Wave Transmission Characteristics The following material properties should be determined of the Site.
for each stratum under the site: seismic compressional and shear velocities, bulk densities, soil properties and classification, shear modulus and its variation with strain level, and water table elevation and its variation.
The methods used to determine these properties should be described.
The methods used to determine these properties should be described.
For each set of conditions describing the occurrence of the maximum potential earthquakes, determined in Section 2.5.2.4, the types of seismic waves producing the maximum ground motion and the significant frequencies at the site should be determined.
For each set of conditions describing the occurrence of the maximum potential earthquakes, determined in Section 2.5.2.4, the types of seismic waves producing the maximum ground motion and the significant frequencies at the site should be determined. For each set of conditions, an analysis should be performed to determine the effects of transmission in the site material for the identified seismic wave types in the significant frequency bands.
For each set of conditions, an analysis should be performed to determine the effects of transmission in the site material for the identified seismic wave types in the significant frequency bands. 2.5.2.6 Safe Shutdown Earthquake.
2.5.2.6 Safe Shutdown Earthquake. The acceleration surface, the effective frequency range, and the duration at the ground corresponding to each maximum potential earthquake should be determined.
The acceleration at the ground surface, the effective frequency range, and the duration corresponding to each maximum potential earthquake should be determined.
earthquake has been associated with a geologic structure,             Where the the acceleration should be determined using a relation between acceleration, magnitude, or fault length, earthquake history and other geologic information, and the distance from the fault. Where the earthquake has been associated with a tectonic province, the acceleration should be determined using appropriate relations between acceleration, intensity, epicentral inten sity, and distance. Available ground motion time histories from earth quakes of comparable magnitude, epicentral distance, and acceleration level should be presented. The spectral content from each maximum poten tial earthquake should be described based on consideration ground motion time histories and regional characteristics of the available of seismic wave transmission. The dominant frequency associated with the peak acceleration should be determined either from analysis of ground motion time histories or by inference from descriptions of earthquake phenomenology, reports, and regional characteristics of seismic wave                     damage transmission. Design 2-31
Where the earthquake has been associated with a geologic structure, the acceleration should be determined using a relation between acceleration, magnitude, or fault length, earthquake history and other geologic information, and the distance from the fault. Where the earthquake has been associated with a tectonic province, the acceleration should be determined using appropriate relations between acceleration, intensity, epicentral inten sity, and distance.
 
Available ground motion time histories from earth quakes of comparable magnitude, epicentral distance, and acceleration level should be presented.
Revision 3                                                    November 1978 response spectra corresponding to the SSE should be defined and their conservatism assessed by comparing them to the ground motion expected from the potential earthquakes.
The spectral content from each maximum poten tial earthquake should be described based on consideration of the available ground motion time histories and regional characteristics of seismic wave transmission.
2.5.2.7 Operating Basis Earthquake. The vibratory ground motion for the Operating Basis Earthquake should be described and the probabil ity of exceeding the OBE during the operating life of the plant should be determined.
The dominant frequency associated with the peak acceleration should be determined either from analysis of ground motion time histories or by inference from descriptions of earthquake phenomenology, damage reports, and regional characteristics of seismic wave transmission.
2.5.3   Surface Faulting Information should be provided to describe whether or not there exists a potential for surface faulting at the site.     The following specific information and determinations should also be included to the extent neces sary to clearly establish zones requiring detailed faulting investigation.
Design 2-31 November 1978 response spectra corresponding to the SSE should be defined and their conservatism assessed by comparing them to the ground motion expected from the potential earthquakes.
2.5.2.7 Operating Basis Earthquake.
The vibratory ground motion for the Operating Basis Earthquake should be described and the probabil ity of exceeding the OBE during the operating life of the plant should be determined.
2.5.3 Surface Faulting Information should be provided to describe whether or not there exists a potential for surface faulting at the site. The following specific information and determinations should also be included to the extent neces sary to clearly establish zones requiring detailed faulting investigation.
Information presented in Section 2.5.1 may be cross-referenced and need not be repeated.
Information presented in Section 2.5.1 may be cross-referenced and need not be repeated.
2.5.3.1 Geologic Conditions of the Site. The lithologic, strati graphic, and structural geologic conditions of the site and the area surrounding the site, including its geologic history, should be described.
2.5.3.1 Geologic Conditions of the Site. The lithologic, strati graphic, and structural geologic conditions of the site and the area surrounding the site, including its geologic history, should be described.
Site and regional geologic maps and profiles illustrating the surface and bedrock geology, structure geology, topography, and the relationship of the safety-related foundations of the nuclear power plant to these features should be included.
Site and regional geologic maps and profiles illustrating the surface and bedrock geology, structure geology, topography, and the relationship of the safety-related foundations of the nuclear power plant to these features should be included.
2.5.3.2 Evidence of Fault Offset. Determine the geologic evidence of fault offset at or near the around surface at or near the site. If faulting exists, it should be defined as to its attitudes, orientations, width of shear zone, amount and sense of movement, and age of movements.
2.5.3.2 Evidence of Fault Offset. Determine the geologic evidence of fault offset at or near the around surface at or near the site.     If faulting exists, it should be defined as to its attitudes, orientations, width of shear zone, amount and sense of movement, and age of movements.
Any topographic photo linears and Environmental Resources Technology Satellite linears prepared as part of this study should be discussed.
Any topographic photo linears and Environmental Resources Technology Satellite linears prepared as part of this study should be discussed.
Site surface and subsurface investigations to determine the absence of faulting should be reported, including information on the detail and areal extent of the investigation.
Site surface and subsurface investigations to determine the absence of faulting should be reported, including information on the detail and areal extent of the investigation.
2.5.3.3 Earthquakes Associated with Capable Faults. List all histor ically reported earthquakes that can be reasonably associated with faults, and part of which is within 5 miles of the site. A plot of earthquake epicenters superimposed on a map showing the local tectonic structures should be provided.
2.5.3.3 Earthquakes Associated with Capable Faults. List all histor ically reported earthquakes that can be reasonably associated with faults, and part of which is within 5 miles of the site. A plot of earthquake epicenters superimposed on a map showing the local tectonic structures should be provided.
2.5.3.4 Investigation of Capable Faults. Identified faults, any part of which is within 5 miles of the site, should be investigated in sufficient detail and using geological and geophysical techniques of suffi cient sensitivity to demonstrate the age of most recent movement on each. The type and extent of investigation varies from one geologic province to another and depends on site-specific conditions.
2.5.3.4 Investigation of Capable Faults. Identified faults, any part of which is within 5 miles of the site, should be investigated in sufficient detail and using geological and geophysical techniques of suffi cient sensitivity to demonstrate the age of most recent movement on each.
2.5.3.5 Correlation of Epicenters with Capable Faults. The structure and genetic relationship between site area faulting and regional tectonic 2-32 Revision 3 Revision 3 November 1978 framework should be discussed.
The type and extent of investigation varies from one geologic province to another and depends on site-specific conditions.
In regions of active tectonism, any detailed geologic and geophysical investigations conducted to demonstrate the structural relationships of site area faults with regional faults known to be seismically active should be discussed.
2.5.3.5 Correlation of Epicenters with Capable Faults. The structure and genetic relationship between site area faulting and regional tectonic 2-32
2.5.3.6 Description of Capable Faults. For capable faults more than 1,000 feet long, any part of which is within 5 miles of the site, determine for all offsets within the immediate site vicinity the length of the fault; the relationship to regional tectonic structures; the nature, amount, and geologic displacement along the fault; and the outer limits of the fault zone established by detailed faulting investigation.
 
2.5.3.7 Zone Requiring Detailed Faulting Investigation.
Revision 3 November 1978 framework should be discussed.     In regions of active tectonism, any detailed geologic and geophysical investigations the structural relationships of site area               conducted to demonstrate faults with regional faults known to be seismically active should be discussed.
Determine the zone requiring detailed faulting investigation as described in Appen dix A to 10 CFR Part 100. 2.5.3.8 Results of Faulting Investigation.
2.5.3.6 Description of Capable Faults.
Where the site is located within a zone requiring detailed faulting investigation, details and the results of investigations should be provided to substantiate that there are no geologic hazards that could affect the safety-related facilities of the plant. The information may be in the form of boring logs, detailed geologic maps, geophysical data, maps and logs of trenches, remote sensing data, and seismic refraction and reflection data. 2.5.4 Stability of Subsurface Materials and Foundations Information should be presented that thoroughly defines the condi tions and engineering properties of both soil and/or rock supporting nuclear power plant foundations.
than 1,000 feet long, any part of which                 For capable faults more is within 5 miles of the site, determine for all offsets within the immediate of the fault; the relationship to regional             site vicinity the length tectonic structures; the nature, amount, and geologic displacement along the fault; and the outer limits of the fault zone established by detailed faulting investigation.
The stability of the soils and rock under plant structures should be evaluated both for static and dynamic loading conditions (including an evaluation of the ability of these materials to perform their support function without incurring unexpected or excessive subsidence and settlement due to their long-term consolida tion under load or to their response to natural phenomena).
2.5.3.7 Zone Requiring Detailed Faulting the zone requiring detailed faulting investigation       Investigation. Determine as described in Appen dix A to 10 CFR Part 100.
Both the operating and safe shutdown earthquakes should be used in the dynamic stability evaluation.
2.5.3.8 Results of Faulting Investigation.
An evaluation of site conditions and geologic features that may affect nuclear power plant structures or their foundations should be presented.
within a zone requiring detailed faulting                   Where the site is located results of investigations should be provided     investigation,    details and the are no geologic hazards that could affect           to  substantiate  that there of the plant. The information may be in         the safety-related facilities geologic maps, geophysical data, maps and the form of boring logs, detailed logs of trenches, remote sensing data, and seismic refraction and reflection data.
Information presented in other sec tions should be cross-referenced rather than repeated.
2.5.4     Stability of Subsurface Materials and Foundations Information should be presented that tions and engineering properties of both thoroughly defines the condi nuclear power plant foundations.                  soil and/or rock supporting The stability of the soils and rock under plant structures should be evaluated loading conditions (including an evaluationboth for static and dynamic materials to perform their support function           of the ability of these or excessive subsidence and settlement               without    incurring unexpected due to their long-term consolida tion under load or to their response operating and safe shutdown earthquakesto natural phenomena).               Both the should be used in the dynamic stability evaluation.       An evaluation of features that may affect nuclear power site conditions and geologic foundations should be presented.                   plant structures or their Information presented in other sec tions should be cross-referenced rather than repeated.
2.5.4.1 Geologic Features.
2.5.4.1 Geologic Features. Describe geologic features, including the following:
Describe geologic features, including the following:  
: 1. Areas of actual or potential surface or subsurface subsidence, upl ift, or collapse and the causes of these conditions,
: 1. Areas of actual or potential surface or subsurface subsidence, upl ift, or collapse and the causes of these conditions, 2. Previous loading history of the foundation materials, i.e., history of deposition and erosion, groundwater levels, and glacial or other preloading influences on the soil, 2-33 November 1978 3. Rock jointing pattern and distribution, depth of weathering, zones of alteration or irregular weathering, and zones of structural weak ness composed of crushed or disturbed materials such as slickensides, shears, joints, fractures, faults, folds, or a combination of these features.
: 2. Previous loading history of the foundation history of deposition and erosion, groundwater                    materials, i.e.,
Especially note seams and lenses of weak materials such as clays and weathered shales, 4. Unrelieved residual stresses in bedrock, and 5. Rocks or soils that may be hazardous, or may become hazardous, to the plant because of their lack of consolidation or induration, varia bility, high water content, solubility, or undesirable response to natural or induced site conditions.
levels, and glacial or other preloading influences on the soil, 2-33
2.5.4.2 Properties of Subsurface Materials.
 
Describe in detail the static and dynamic engineering properties of the materials underlying the site. The classification and engineering properties of soils and rocks should be determined by testing techniques defined by accepted standards such as ASTM and AASHO, or in manuals of practice issued by the Army Corps of Engineers and the Bureau of Reclamation.
Revision 3                                                        November 1978
The determina tion of dynamic or special engineering properties should be by accepted state-of-the-art methods such as those described in professional geotech nical journals.
: 3. Rock jointing pattern and distribution, depth of weathering, zones of alteration or irregular weathering, and zones of structural weak ness composed of crushed or disturbed materials such as slickensides, shears, joints, fractures, faults, folds, or a combination of these features.     Especially note seams and lenses of weak materials such as clays and weathered shales,
Reported properties of foundation materials should be supported by field and laboratory test records. Furnish data to justify and demonstrate the selection of design parameters.
: 4. Unrelieved residual stresses in bedrock, and
These data should be sufficient to permit the staff to make an independent interpretation and evaluation of design parameters.
: 5. Rocks or soils that may be hazardous, or may become hazardous, to the plant because of their lack of consolidation or induration, varia bility, high water content, solubility, or undesirable response to natural or induced site conditions.
Furnish summaries of the physical (static and dynamic), index, and chemical properties of materials.
2.5.4.2 Properties of Subsurface Materials.         Describe in detail the static and dynamic     engineering properties of the materials underlying the   site. The classification and engineering properties   of soils and rocks should be determined by testing techniques defined by accepted standards such as ASTM and AASHO, or in manuals of practice issued by the Army Corps of Engineers and the Bureau of Reclamation. The determina tion of dynamic or special engineering properties should be by accepted state-of-the-art methods such as those described in professional geotech nical journals.     Reported properties of foundation materials should be supported by field and laboratory test records. Furnish data to justify and demonstrate the selection of design parameters.         These data should be sufficient to permit the staff to make an independent interpretation and evaluation of design parameters.       Furnish summaries of the physical (static and dynamic), index,   and chemical properties of materials. Infor mation provided   should include grain-size distribution (graphic representa tion), consolidation data, mineralogy, natural moisture content, Atterberg limits, unit weights, shear strength, relative density, overconsolidation ratio, ion exchange capacity, sensitivity, swelling, shear modulus, damping, Poisson's ratio, bulk modulus, cyclic strength, and seismic wave velocities.
Infor mation provided should include grain-size distribution (graphic representa tion), consolidation data, mineralogy, natural moisture content, Atterberg limits, unit weights, shear strength, relative density, overconsolidation ratio, ion exchange capacity, sensitivity, swelling, shear modulus, damping, Poisson's ratio, bulk modulus, cyclic strength, and seismic wave velocities.
2.5.4.3 Exploration. Discuss the type, quantity, extent, and purpose of all explorations. Provide plot plans that graphically show the location of all site explorations such as boring, trenches, borrow pits, seismic lines, piezometers, wells, geologic profiles, and the limits of required excavations. The locations of the safety-related facilities should be superimposed on the plot plan. Also, furnish selective geologic sections and profiles that indicate the location of borings and other site explora tion features, groundwater elevations, and final foundation grades. The location of safety-related foundations should be superimposed on these sections and profiles.
2.5.4.3 Exploration.
Logs of all borings and test pits should be provided. Furnish logs and maps of exploratory trenches in the PSAR and geologic maps and photo graphs of the excavations for the facilities of the nuclear power plant in the FSAR.
Discuss the type, quantity, extent, and purpose of all explorations.
2-34
Provide plot plans that graphically show the location of all site explorations such as boring, trenches, borrow pits, seismic lines, piezometers, wells, geologic profiles, and the limits of required excavations.
 
The locations of the safety-related facilities should be superimposed on the plot plan. Also, furnish selective geologic sections and profiles that indicate the location of borings and other site explora tion features, groundwater elevations, and final foundation grades. The location of safety-related foundations should be superimposed on these sections and profiles.
Revision 3                                                       November 1978 2.5.4.4   Geophysical Surveys. Results of compressional and shear wave velocity   surveys performed to evaluate the occurrence and   character istics of the     foundation soils and rocks should be provided     in tables and profiles. Discuss other geophysical methods used to define foundation conditions.
Logs of all borings and test pits should be provided.
2.5.4.5 Excavations and Backfill.       The following data concerning excavation, backfill, and earthwork at the site should be discussed:
Furnish logs and maps of exploratory trenches in the PSAR and geologic maps and photo graphs of the excavations for the facilities of the nuclear power plant in the FSAR.2-34 Revision 3 November 1978 2.5.4.4 Geophysical Surveys. Results of compressional and shear wave velocity surveys performed to evaluate the occurrence and character istics of the foundation soils and rocks should be provided in tables and profiles.
: 1. The extent (horizontally and vertically) of all Seismic Cate gory I excavations, fills,     and slopes. The locations and limits of excava tions, fills,     and backfills should be shown on plot plans and on geologic sections and profiles.
Discuss other geophysical methods used to define foundation conditions.
: 2. The dewatering and excavation methods to be used.       Evaluate how these will affect the quality and condition of foundation materials.
2.5.4.5 Excavations and Backfill.
Discuss the need and proposed measures for foundation protection and treatment after excavation.       Also discuss proposed quality control and quality assurance programs related to foundation excavation, and sub sequent protection and treatment.       Discuss measures to monitor foundation rebound and heave.
The following data concerning excavation, backfill, and earthwork at the site should be discussed:  
: 3. The sources and quantities of backfill and borrow. Describe exploration and laboratory studies and the static and dynamic engineering properties of these materials in the same fashion as described in Sec tions 2.5.4.2 and 2.5.4.3.         Provide the plans for field test fills   and identify the material and placement specification proposed in the PSAR.
: 1. The extent (horizontally and vertically) of all Seismic Cate gory I excavations, fills, and slopes. The locations and limits of excava tions, fills, and backfills should be shown on plot plans and on geologic sections and profiles.
Include grain size bands, moisture control, and compaction requirements.
: 2. The dewatering and excavation methods to be used. Evaluate how these will affect the quality and condition of foundation materials.
Results of test fills     should be included in the FSAR.
Discuss the need and proposed measures for foundation protection and treatment after excavation.
2.5.4.6 Groundwater Conditions.       The analysis   of groundwater   at the site should include the following points:
Also discuss proposed quality control and quality assurance programs related to foundation excavation, and sub sequent protection and treatment.
: 1. A discussion of groundwater conditions relative to the stability of the safety-related nuclear power plant facilities,
Discuss measures to monitor foundation rebound and heave. 3. The sources and quantities of backfill and borrow. Describe exploration and laboratory studies and the static and dynamic engineering properties of these materials in the same fashion as described in Sec tions 2.5.4.2 and 2.5.4.3. Provide the plans for field test fills and identify the material and placement specification proposed in the PSAR. Include grain size bands, moisture control, and compaction requirements.
: 2. A discussion of design criteria for the control of groundwater levels or collection and control of seepage,
Results of test fills should be included in the FSAR. 2.5.4.6 Groundwater Conditions.
: 3. Requirements for dewatering during construction and a discus sion of how dewatering will be accomplished,
The analysis of groundwater at the site should include the following points: 1. A discussion of groundwater conditions relative to the stability of the safety-related nuclear power plant facilities, 2. A discussion of design criteria for the control of groundwater levels or collection and control of seepage, 3. Requirements for dewatering during construction and a discus sion of how dewatering will be accomplished, 4. Description and interpretation of actual groundwater conditions experienced during construction (FSAR), 5. Records of field and laboratory permeability tests, 6. History of groundwater fluctuations, including those due to flooding, and projected variances in the groundwater levels during the life of the plant, 2-35 Revision 3 November 1978 7. Information related to the periodic monitoring of local wells and piezometers, 8. Direction of groundwater flow, gradients, and velocities.
: 4. Description and interpretation of actual groundwater conditions experienced during construction (FSAR),
: 5. Records of field and laboratory permeability tests,
: 6. History of groundwater fluctuations, including those due to flooding, and projected variances in the groundwater levels during the life of the plant, 2-35
 
Revision 3                                                     November 1978
: 7. Information related to the periodic monitoring of local wells and piezometers,
: 8. Direction of groundwater flow, gradients, and velocities.
: 9. Discussion of or reference to the groundwater monitoring program during the life of the plant to assess the potential for subsidence.
: 9. Discussion of or reference to the groundwater monitoring program during the life of the plant to assess the potential for subsidence.
2.5.4.7 Response of Soil and Rock to Dynamic Loading. Furnish analyses of the responses of the soil and rock to dynamic and seismic loading condi tions. Discuss the testing performed and test results. Justify selected design values used for dynamic response analyses.
2.5.4.7 Response of Soil and Rock to Dynamic Loading.       Furnish analyses of the responses of the soil and rock to dynamic and seismic loading condi tions. Discuss the testing performed and test results. Justify selected design values used for dynamic response analyses.       Justify the methods of analyses used and indicate the results of analyses.     Identify computer programs used and provide abstracts. Sol-structure interaction analyses should be described in this section or cross-referenced from Section 3.7.2.4. Buried pipelines and earthworks should also be included in this section.
Justify the methods of analyses used and indicate the results of analyses.
2.5.4.8 Liquefaction Potential.     If the foundation materials at the site adjacent to and under safety-related structures are saturated soils or soils that have a potential for becoming saturated, an appro priate state-of-the-art analysis of the potential for liquefaction occur ring at the site should be provided. The method of analysis should be determined on the basis of actual site conditions, the properties of the plant facilities, and the earthquake and seismic design requirement.
Identify computer programs used and provide abstracts.
2.5.4.9 Earthquake Design Basis.     A summary should be provided of the derivation of the OBE and SSE, including references to Sections 2.5.2.6 and 2.5.2.7. Justify the selection of earthquakes for liquefaction and seismic response analysis of earthworks.
Sol-structure interaction analyses should be described in this section or cross-referenced from Section 3.7.2.4. Buried pipelines and earthworks should also be included in this section.
2.5.4.10 Static Stability. The stability of all safety-related facilities should be analyzed for static loading conditions.       Foundation rebound, settlement, differential settlement, and bearing capacity should be analyzed under the design loads of fills     and plant facilities. A discussion and evaluation of lateral earth pressures and hydrostatic ground water loads acting on plant facilities should be included in this section.
2.5.4.8 Liquefaction Potential.
Field and laboratory test results should be discussed. Design parameters used in stability analyses should be discussed and justified. Sufficient data and analyses should be provided so that the staff may make an inde pendent interpretation and evaluation.       Results of stability analyses should be presented in the PSAR and confirmed with as-built data in the FSAR.
If the foundation materials at the site adjacent to and under safety-related structures are saturated soils or soils that have a potential for becoming saturated, an appro priate state-of-the-art analysis of the potential for liquefaction occur ring at the site should be provided.
2.5.4.11   Design Criteria. Provide a brief discussion of the design criteria and methods of design used in the stability studies of all safety related facilities. Identify required and computed factors of safety, assumptions, and conservatisms in each analysis.       Provide references.
The method of analysis should be determined on the basis of actual site conditions, the properties of the plant facilities, and the earthquake and seismic design requirement.
Explain and verify computer analyses used.
2.5.4.9 Earthquake Design Basis. A summary should be provided of the derivation of the OBE and SSE, including references to Sections 2.5.2.6 and 2.5.2.7. Justify the selection of earthquakes for liquefaction and seismic response analysis of earthworks.
2-36
2.5.4.10 Static Stability.
 
The stability of all safety-related facilities should be analyzed for static loading conditions.
Revision 3                                                     November 1978 2.5.4.12 Techniques to Improve Subsurface Conditions. Discuss and provide specifications for measures to improve foundations such as grouting, vibroflotation, dental work, rock bolting, and anchors.       A verification program designed to permit a thorough evaluation of the effectiveness of foundation improvement measures should also be discussed.
Foundation rebound, settlement, differential settlement, and bearing capacity should be analyzed under the design loads of fills and plant facilities.
2.5.4.13 Subsurface Instrumentation.     Instrumentation for the surveil lance of foundations for safety-related structures should be presented in this section. Indicate the type, location, and purpose of each instru ment and provide significant details of installation methods.       Provide a schedule for installing and reading all proposed instruments and for the interpretation of the data obtained (PSAR).     Results and analyses should be presented in the FSAR.
A discussion and evaluation of lateral earth pressures and hydrostatic ground water loads acting on plant facilities should be included in this section.
2.5.4.14 Construction Notes.     Significant construction problems should be discussed. Discuss changes in design details or construction procedures that became necessary during construction (FSAR).
Field and laboratory test results should be discussed.
2.5.5   Stability of Slopes Information should be presented concerning the static and dynamic stability of all soil or rock slopes, both natural and man-made, the failure of which could adversely affect the safety of the nuclear power plant. This information should include a thorough evaluation of site conditions, geologic features, the engineering properties of the materials comprising the slope and its foundation. The stability of slopes should be evaluated using classic and contemporary methods of analyses.         The evaluation should include, whenever possible, comparative field performance of similar slopes. All information related to defining site conditions, geologic features, the engineering properties of materials, and design criteria should be of the same scope as that provided under Section 2.5.4.
Design parameters used in stability analyses should be discussed and justified.
Cross-references may be used where appropriate. The stability evaluation of man-made slopes should include summary data and a discussion of con struction procedures, record testing, and instrumentation monitoring to ensure high quality earthwork.
Sufficient data and analyses should be provided so that the staff may make an inde pendent interpretation and evaluation.
2.5.5.1   Slope Characteristics. Describe and illustrate slopes and related site features in detail.       Provide a plan showing the limits of cuts, fills,   or natural undisturbed slopes and show their relation and orientation relative to plant facilities. Benches, retaining walls, bulk heads, jetties, and slope protection should be clearly identified.       Pro vide detailed cross sections and profiles of all slopes and their founda tions. Discuss exploration programs and local geologic features. Describe the groundwater and seepage conditions that exist and those assumed for analysis purposes. The type, quantity, extent, and purpose of exploration should be described and the location of borings, test pits, and trenches should be shown on all drawings.
Results of stability analyses should be presented in the PSAR and confirmed with as-built data in the FSAR. 2.5.4.11 Design Criteria.
Discuss sampling methods used. Identify material types and the static and dynamic engineering properties of the soil and rock materials comprising the slopes and their foundations. Identify the presence of any weak zones, 2-37
Provide a brief discussion of the design criteria and methods of design used in the stability studies of all safety related facilities.
 
Identify required and computed factors of safety, assumptions, and conservatisms in each analysis.
Revision 3                                                    November 1978 such as seams or lenses of clay, mylonites, or potentially liquefiabie materials. Discuss and present results of the field and laboratory testing programs and justify selected design strengths.
Provide references.
2.5.5.2 Design Criteria and Analyses. The design criteria for the stability and design of all safety-related and Seismic Category I slopes should be described. Valid static and dynamic analyses should be presented to demonstrate the reliable performance of these slopes throughout the lifetime of the plant. Describe the methods used for static and dynamic analyses and indicate reasons for selecting them.     Indicate assumptions and design cases analyzed with computed factors of safety. Present the results of stability analyses in tables identifying design cases analyzed, strength assumptions for materials, and type of failure surface. Assumed failure surfaces should be graphically shown on cross sections and appro priately identified on both the tables and sections. Explain and justify computer analyses; provide an abstract of computer programs used.
Explain and verify computer analyses used.2-36 Revision 3 Revision 3 2.5.4.12 Techniques to Improve Subsurface Conditions.
2.5.5.3 Logs of Borings. Present the logs of borings, test pits and trenches that were completed for the evaluation of slopes, founda tions, and borrow materials to be used for slopes.     Logs should indicate elevations, depths, soil and rock classification information, groundwater levels, exploration and sampling method, recovery, RQD, and blow counts from standard penetration tests. Discuss drilling and sampling procedures and indicate where samples were taken on the logs.
Discuss and provide specifications for measures to improve foundations such as grouting, vibroflotation, dental work, rock bolting, and anchors. A verification program designed to permit a thorough evaluation of the effectiveness of foundation improvement measures should also be discussed.
2.5.5.4 Compacted Fill. In this section, provide information related to material, placement, and compaction specifications for fill   (soil and/or rock) required to construct slopes such as canal or channel slopes, break waters, and jetties. Planned construction procedures and control of earth works should be thoroughly described. Information necessary is similar to that outlined in Section 2.5.4.5. Quality control techniques and docu mentation during and following construction should be discussed and refer enced to quality assurance sections of the SAR.
2.5.4.13 Subsurface Instrumentation.
2.5.6   Embankments and Dams This section should include information related to the investigation, engineering design, proposed construction, and performance of all earth, rock, or earth and rock fill   embankments used for plant flood protection or for impounding cooling water required for the operation of the nuclear power plant. The format given below may be used for both Seismic Cate gory I and safety-related embankments, the failure of which could threaten the public health and safety.     The following information should be included:   (1) the purpose and location of the embankment and appurtenant structures (spillways, outlet works, etc.), (2) specific geologic features of the site, (3) engineering properties of the bedrock and foundation and embankment soils, (4) design assumptions, data, analyses, and discus sions on foundation treatment and embankment design, (5) any special con struction requirements, and (6) proposed instrumentation and performance monitoring systems and programs.
Instrumentation for the surveil lance of foundations for safety-related structures should be presented in this section. Indicate the type, location, and purpose of each instru ment and provide significant details of installation methods. Provide a schedule for installing and reading all proposed instruments and for the interpretation of the data obtained (PSAR). Results and analyses should be presented in the FSAR. 2.5.4.14 Construction Notes. Significant construction problems should be discussed.
2-38
Discuss changes in design details or construction procedures that became necessary during construction (FSAR). 2.5.5 Stability of Slopes Information should be presented concerning the static and dynamic stability of all soil or rock slopes, both natural and man-made, the failure of which could adversely affect the safety of the nuclear power plant. This information should include a thorough evaluation of site conditions, geologic features, the engineering properties of the materials comprising the slope and its foundation.
 
The stability of slopes should be evaluated using classic and contemporary methods of analyses.
Revision 3                                                       November 1978 Embankment design studies should include an evaluation of the perfor mance of the embankment on the basis of instrumentation monitored during construction and during the initial reservoir filling.
The evaluation should include, whenever possible, comparative field performance of similar slopes. All information related to defining site conditions, geologic features, the engineering properties of materials, and design criteria should be of the same scope as that provided under Section 2.5.4. Cross-references may be used where appropriate.
Information related to the evaluation of embankment performance should be provided in the FSAR.
The stability evaluation of man-made slopes should include summary data and a discussion of con struction procedures, record testing, and instrumentation monitoring to ensure high quality earthwork.
Any significant event such as an earthquake or flood that occurs during construction or during the initial reservoir filling should be documented in the FSAR together with all information related to the per formance of the embankment and observed behavior within its foundation and abutments during the event.
2.5.5.1 Slope Characteristics.
Photographs showing general views of damsite (before, during, and after construction), foundation stripping and treatment (FSAR), construc tion equipment and activities (FSAR), instrumentation devices and instal lation work (FSAR), and special items should be provided.
Describe and illustrate slopes and related site features in detail. Provide a plan showing the limits of cuts, fills, or natural undisturbed slopes and show their relation and orientation relative to plant facilities.
Benches, retaining walls, bulk heads, jetties, and slope protection should be clearly identified.
Pro vide detailed cross sections and profiles of all slopes and their founda tions. Discuss exploration programs and local geologic features.
Describe the groundwater and seepage conditions that exist and those assumed for analysis purposes.
The type, quantity, extent, and purpose of exploration should be described and the location of borings, test pits, and trenches should be shown on all drawings.
Discuss sampling methods used. Identify material types and the static and dynamic engineering properties of the soil and rock materials comprising the slopes and their foundations.
Identify the presence of any weak zones, 2-37 November 1978 November 1978 such as seams or lenses of clay, mylonites, or potentially liquefiabie materials.
Discuss and present results of the field and laboratory testing programs and justify selected design strengths.
2.5.5.2 Design Criteria and Analyses.
The design criteria for the stability and design of all safety-related and Seismic Category I slopes should be described.
Valid static and dynamic analyses should be presented to demonstrate the reliable performance of these slopes throughout the lifetime of the plant. Describe the methods used for static and dynamic analyses and indicate reasons for selecting them. Indicate assumptions and design cases analyzed with computed factors of safety. Present the results of stability analyses in tables identifying design cases analyzed, strength assumptions for materials, and type of failure surface. Assumed failure surfaces should be graphically shown on cross sections and appro priately identified on both the tables and sections.
Explain and justify computer analyses; provide an abstract of computer programs used. 2.5.5.3 Logs of Borings. Present the logs of borings, test pits and trenches that were completed for the evaluation of slopes, founda tions, and borrow materials to be used for slopes. Logs should indicate elevations, depths, soil and rock classification information, groundwater levels, exploration and sampling method, recovery, RQD, and blow counts from standard penetration tests. Discuss drilling and sampling procedures and indicate where samples were taken on the logs. 2.5.5.4 Compacted Fill. In this section, provide information related to material, placement, and compaction specifications for fill (soil and/or rock) required to construct slopes such as canal or channel slopes, break waters, and jetties. Planned construction procedures and control of earth works should be thoroughly described.
Information necessary is similar to that outlined in Section 2.5.4.5. Quality control techniques and docu mentation during and following construction should be discussed and refer enced to quality assurance sections of the SAR. 2.5.6 Embankments and Dams This section should include information related to the investigation, engineering design, proposed construction, and performance of all earth, rock, or earth and rock fill embankments used for plant flood protection or for impounding cooling water required for the operation of the nuclear power plant. The format given below may be used for both Seismic Cate gory I and safety-related embankments, the failure of which could threaten the public health and safety. The following information should be included:  
(1) the purpose and location of the embankment and appurtenant structures (spillways, outlet works, etc.), (2) specific geologic features of the site, (3) engineering properties of the bedrock and foundation and embankment soils, (4) design assumptions, data, analyses, and discus sions on foundation treatment and embankment design, (5) any special con struction requirements, and (6) proposed instrumentation and performance monitoring systems and programs.2-38 Revision 3 Revision 3 November 1978 Embankment design studies should include an evaluation of the perfor mance of the embankment on the basis of instrumentation monitored during construction and during the initial reservoir filling. Information related to the evaluation of embankment performance should be provided in the FSAR. Any significant event such as an earthquake or flood that occurs during construction or during the initial reservoir filling should be documented in the FSAR together with all information related to the per formance of the embankment and observed behavior within its foundation and abutments during the event. Photographs showing general views of damsite (before, during, and after construction), foundation stripping and treatment (FSAR), construc tion equipment and activities (FSAR), instrumentation devices and instal lation work (FSAR), and special items should be provided.
Embankment zone placement quantities, a comparison of embankment zone design placement requirements with a summary of field control test data results (FSAR), and a comparison of embankment shear strength design assumptions with a summary of record control shear strength test results (FSAR) should be tabulated.
Embankment zone placement quantities, a comparison of embankment zone design placement requirements with a summary of field control test data results (FSAR), and a comparison of embankment shear strength design assumptions with a summary of record control shear strength test results (FSAR) should be tabulated.
The following drawings should be provided:  
The following drawings should be provided:
: 1. General plan with vicinity map, 2. Large-scale embankment plan with boring and instrumentation locations shown, 3. Geologic profile embankment axis, control structure axis, and spillway axis, 4. Embankment cross sections with instrumentation shown, 5. Embankment details, 6. Embankment foundation excavation plan, 7. Embankment and foundation design shear strength test data graphic summaries with selected design values shown, 8. Embankment slope stability cross sections with design assumptions, critical failure planes, and factors of safety shown, 9. Embankment slope stability reevaluation, if necessary (FSAR), 10. Embankment seepage control design with assumptions, section, and selected design shown, 2-39 November 1978 11. Relief well profile with the quantities of flow measured at various depths in the relief wells shown (FSAR), 12. Plot of pool elevation versus total relief well discharge quantities (FSAR), 13. Distribution of field control test locations.
: 1. General plan with vicinity map,
For each zone tested, plot a profile parallel to the axis with field control test data plotted at the locations sampled.
: 2. Large-scale embankment plan with boring and instrumentation locations shown,
: 14. Instrumentation installation details, 15. Interpretations of instrumentation data. a. Settlement profile or contour plan, b. Alignment profiles of measured movements, c. Embankment section with embankment and foundation pore pressure contours.
: 3. Geologic profile embankment axis,   control structure axis,   and spillway axis,
May be necessary to plot contour diagrams at various dates. d. Embankment sections showing phreatic surface through foundation, e. Profile in relief well line showing well and piezometer locations and measured and design heads. 2.5.6.1 General. The purpose of the embankment, including natural and severe conditions under which it is to function, should be stated. Identify the reasons for selecting the proposed location within the site. General design features, including planned water control structures, should be discussed.
: 4. Embankment cross sections with instrumentation shown,
2.5.6.2 Exploration.
: 5. Embankment details,
Discuss exploration and the local geologic features of the proposed embankment site, and relate these features to the plant site in general. The type, quantity, extent, and purpose of the underground exploration program should be provided.
: 6. Embankment foundation excavation plan,
Exploration and sampling methods used should be discussed.
: 7. Embankment and foundation design shear strength test data graphic summaries with selected design values shown,
2.5.6.3 Foundation and Abutment Treatment.
: 8. Embankment slope stability cross sections with design assumptions, critical failure planes, and factors of safety shown,
Discuss the need for, and justify the selection of the types of foundation and abutment treat ment such as grouting, cutoff trenches, and dental treatment.
: 9. Embankment slope stability reevaluation, if necessary (FSAR),
Evaluate and report the effectiveness of the completed foundation and abutment treatment programs in the FSAR. The areal extent and depth limits of treatment should be shown on plot plans. Discuss the construction proce dures to be employed, and estimate the construction quantities involved.
: 10. Embankment seepage control design with assumptions,     section, and selected design shown, 2-39
2.5.6.4 Embankment.
 
Present the general embankment features, including height, slopes, zoning, material properties (including borrow and foundation), sources of materials, and location and usage of materials 2-40 Revision 3 Revision 3 November 1978 in the embankment.
Revision 3                                                      November 1978
Slope protection design, material properties, and placement methods should be presented.
: 11. Relief well profile with the quantities of flow measured at various depths in the relief wells shown (FSAR),
Discuss consolidation testing results, embankment settlement, and overbuild.
: 12. Plot of pool elevation versus total     relief well discharge quantities (FSAR),
Compaction test results on laboratory test specimens and on test fills in the field should be discussed, as well as field control to be specified for the foundation preparation and protection and also for place ment of fill, including material requirements, placement conditions, moisture control, and compaction.
: 13. Distribution of field control test locations.     For each zone tested, plot a profile parallel to the axis with field control test data plotted at the locations sampled.
Also, discuss protection required of fill surfaces and stockpiles during construction, compaction equipment to be used, and any special fill placement activities required.
: 14. Instrumentation installation details,
The FSAR should document compliance with specifications related to foundation preparation and also with material specifications and fill placement requirements.
: 15. Interpretations of instrumentation data.
Significant or unusual construction activities and problems should also be documented in the FSAR. 2.5.6.5 Slope Stability.
: a. Settlement profile or contour plan,
For both the foundation and embankment materials, discuss the shear testing performed, shear test data results, selected design strengths, reasons for selecting the method of slope stabil ity analysis used, and the results of design cases analyzed for the embank ment constructed.
: b. Alignment profiles of measured movements,
2.5.6.6 Seepage Control. Exploration and testing performed to deter mine assumptions used for seepage analyses should be discussed.
: c. Embankment section with embankment and foundation pore pressure contours.     May be necessary to plot contour diagrams at various dates.
Present design assumptions, results of design analyses, and reasons for the seepage control design selected.
: d. Embankment   sections   showing phreatic surface through foundation,
Special construction requirements as well as activities related to the final construction of seepage control features should be discussed in the FSAR. 2.5.6.7 Diversion and Closure. Programs needed for the care and diversion of water during construction should be discussed, including the need for cofferdams, techniques used to dewater excavations, and any expected problems or difficulties.
: e. Profile in relief well line showing well and piezometer locations and measured and design heads.
Discuss the proposed diversion and closure construction sequence.
2.5.6.1   General. The purpose of the embankment, including natural and severe conditions under which it is to function, should be stated.
Relate actual construction experiences in the FSAR. 2.5.6.8 Performance Monitoring.
Identify the reasons for selecting the proposed location within the site.
The overall instrumentation plan and the purpose of each set of instruments should be discussed, as well as the different kinds of instruments, special instruments, and significant details for installation of instruments.
General design features, including planned water control structures, should be discussed.
Provide the program for periodic monitoring of instrumentation and periodic inspection of the embankment and appurtenant structures.
2.5.6.2 Exploration.     Discuss exploration and the local geologic features of the proposed embankment site, and relate these features to the plant site in general.       The type, quantity, extent, and purpose of the underground exploration program should be provided.       Exploration and sampling methods used should be discussed.
2.5.6.9 Construction Notes (FSAR). Significant embankment construc tion history should be provided.
2.5.6.3 Foundation and Abutment Treatment.       Discuss the need for, and justify the selection of the types of foundation and abutment treat ment such as grouting, cutoff trenches, and dental treatment.         Evaluate and report the effectiveness of the completed foundation and abutment treatment programs in the FSAR.       The areal extent and depth limits of treatment should be shown on plot plans. Discuss the construction proce dures to be employed, and estimate the construction quantities involved.
Discuss changes in design details or construction procedures that became necessary during construction.
2.5.6.4 Embankment.     Present the general embankment features, including height, slopes, zoning, material properties (including borrow and foundation), sources of materials, and location and usage of materials 2-40
2.5.6.10 Operational Notes. Embankment performance history since completion of construction should be provided in the FSAR.2-41 November 1978 3. DESIGN OF STRUCTURES, COMPONENTS, EQUIPMENT, AND SYSTEMS This chapter of the SAR should identify, describe, and discuss the principal architectural and engineering design of those structures, com ponents, equipment, and systems important to safety. 3.1 Conformance with NRC General Design Criteria This section should briefly discuss the extent to which the design criteria for the plant structures, systems, and components important to safety meet the NRC "General Design Criteria for Nuclear Power Plants" specified in Appendix A to 10 CFR Part 50. For each criterion, a summary should be provided to show how the principal design features meet the criterion.
 
Any exceptions to criteria should be identified and the justification for each exception should be discussed.
Revision 3                                                       November 1978 in the embankment.     Slope protection design, material properties, and placement methods should be presented.         Discuss consolidation testing results, embankment settlement, and overbuild.
In the discussion of each criterion, the sections of the SAR where more detailed informa tion is presented to demonstrate compliance with or exceptions to the criterion should be referenced.
Compaction test results on laboratory test specimens and on test fills   in the field should be discussed, as well as field control to be specified for the foundation preparation and protection and also for place ment of fill,     including material requirements, placement conditions, moisture control, and compaction. Also, discuss protection required of fill   surfaces and stockpiles during construction, compaction equipment to be used, and any special fill placement activities required. The FSAR should document compliance with specifications related to foundation preparation and also with material specifications and fill placement requirements. Significant or unusual construction activities and problems should also be documented in the FSAR.
3.2 Classification of Structures, Components, and Systems 3.2.1 Seismic Classification This section should identify those structures, systems, and compo nents important to safety that are designed to withstand the effects of a Safe Shutdown Earthquake (see Section 2.5) and remain functional.
2.5.6.5 Slope Stability. For both the foundation and embankment materials, discuss the shear testing performed, shear test data results, selected design strengths, reasons for selecting the method of slope stabil ity analysis used, and the results of design cases analyzed for the embank ment constructed.
These plant features are those necessary to ensure: 1. The integrity of the reactor coolant pressure boundary, 2. The capability to shut down the reactor and maintain it in a safe condition, or 3. The capability to prevent or mitigate the consequences of accidents that could result in potential offsite exposures comparable to the guideline exposures of 10 CFR Part 100. Guidance for determining the seismic classification of structures, systems, and components is provided in Regulatory Guide 1.29, "Seismic Design Classification." These plant features, including their founda tions and supports, designed to remain functional in the event of a Safe Shutdown Earthquake are designated as Seismic Category I. This section should indicate if the recommendations of Regulatory Guide 1.29 are being followed and provide a list of all Seismic Category I items. If only portions of structures and systems are Sei-smic Category I, they should be listed and, where necessary for clarity, the boundaries of the Seismic Category I portions should be shown on piping and instrumentation diagrams.
2.5.6.6 Seepage Control. Exploration and testing performed to deter mine assumptions used for seepage analyses should be discussed. Present design assumptions, results of design analyses, and reasons for the seepage control design selected.       Special construction requirements as well as activities related to the final construction of seepage control features should be discussed in the FSAR.
Where there are differences with Regulatory Guide 1.29, they should be identified and a discussion of the proposed classification should be included.3-1 Revision 3 Revision 3 November 1978 All structures, systems, and components or portions thereof, which are intended to be designed for an Operating Basis Earthquake (OBE), should be listed or otherwise clearly identified.
2.5.6.7 Diversion and Closure.     Programs needed for the care and diversion of water during construction should be discussed, including the need for cofferdams, techniques used to dewater excavations, and any expected problems or difficulties.       Discuss the proposed diversion and closure construction sequence.       Relate actual construction experiences in the FSAR.
3.2.2 System Quality Group Classifications This section should identify those fluid systems or portions of fluid systems important to safety and the industry codes and standards applicable to each pressure-retaining component in the systems.
2.5.6.8 Performance Monitoring.     The overall instrumentation plan and the purpose of each set of instruments should be discussed, as well as the different kinds of instruments, special instruments, and significant details for installation of instruments. Provide the program for periodic monitoring of instrumentation and periodic inspection of the embankment and appurtenant structures.
Section 50.55a of 10 CFR Part 50 specifies quality requirements for the reactor coolant pressure boundary, and Regulatory Guide 1.26, "Quality Group Classifications and Standards for Water-, Steam-, and Radioactive Waste-Containing Components of Nuclear Power Plants," describes a quality group classification system and relates it to industry codes for water and steam-containing fluid systems. The section should indicate the extent to which the recommendations of Regulatory Guide 1.26 are followed.
2.5.6.9 Construction Notes (FSAR).     Significant embankment construc tion history should be provided.       Discuss changes in design details or construction procedures that became necessary during construction.
Where there are differences, they should be identified and a discussion included justifying each proposed quality group classification in terms of the reliance placed on these systems: 1. To prevent or mitigate the consequences of accidents and mal functions originating within the reactor coolant pressure boundary, 2. To permit shutdown of the reactor and maintenance in the safe shutdown condition, and 3. To contain radioactive material.
2.5.6.10 Operational Notes.     Embankment performance history since completion of construction should be provided in the FSAR.
In such cases, the proposed design features and measures that would be applied to attain a quality level equivalent to the level of the above classifications should be specified, including the quality assurance pro grams that would be implemented.
2-41
The section should contain group classi fication boundaries of each safety-related system. The classifications should be noted at valves or other appropriate locations in each fluid system where the respective classification changes in terms of the NRC group classification letters, for example, from A to B, B to C, C to D as well as other combinations, or alternately, in terms of corresponding classification notations that can be referenced with those classification groups in Regulatory Guide 1.26. 3.3 Wind and Tornado Loadings 3.3.1 Wind Loadings This section should discuss the design wind load on Seismic Cate gory I structures and, in particular, should include the information identified below.3-2 November 1978 3.3.1.1 Design Wind Velocity.
 
The design wind velocity and its recurrence interval, the vertical velocity profiles, and the applicable gust factors, as described in Section 2.3, should be presented here for information.
Revision 3                                                    November 1978
3.3.1.2 Determination of Applied Forces. The procedures used to transform the wind velocity into an effective pressure applied to exposed surfaces of structures should be described.
: 3. DESIGN OF STRUCTURES, COMPONENTS, EQUIPMENT, AND SYSTEMS This chapter of the SAR should identify, describe, and discuss the principal architectural and engineering design of those structures, com ponents, equipment, and systems important to safety.
Wind force distribution and shape coefficients being applied should be included.
3.1 Conformance with NRC General Design Criteria This section should briefly discuss the extent to which the design criteria for the plant structures, systems, and components important to safety meet the NRC "General Design Criteria for Nuclear Power Plants" specified in Appendix A to 10 CFR Part 50. For each criterion, a summary should be provided to show how the principal design features meet the criterion. Any exceptions to criteria should be identified and the justification for each exception should be discussed. In the discussion of each criterion, the sections of the SAR where more detailed informa tion is presented to demonstrate compliance with or exceptions to the criterion should be referenced.
3.3.2 Tornado Loadings This section should discuss the design basis tornado loadings on structures that must be designed for tornadoes.
3.2   Classification of Structures, Components,   and Systems 3.2.1   Seismic Classification This section should identify those structures, systems, and compo nents important to safety that are designed to withstand the effects of a Safe Shutdown Earthquake (see Section 2.5) and remain functional.
It should include the information identified below. 3.3.2.1 Applicable Design Parameters.
These plant features are those necessary to ensure:
The design parameters appli cable to the design basis tornado should be presented here for information.
: 1. The integrity of the reactor coolant pressure boundary,
The translational velocity, the tangential velocity, the pressure differ ential and its associated time interval, and the spectrum and pertinent characteristics of tornado-generated missiles should be included.
: 2. The capability to shut down the reactor and maintain it   in a safe condition, or
Material covered in Sections 2.3 and 3.5.1 may be incorporated by reference.
: 3. The capability to prevent or mitigate the consequences of accidents that could result in potential offsite exposures comparable to the guideline exposures of 10 CFR Part 100.
3.3.2.2 Determination of Forces on Structures.
Guidance for determining the seismic classification of structures, systems, and components is provided in Regulatory Guide 1.29, "Seismic Design Classification." These plant features, including their founda tions and supports, designed to remain functional in the event of a Safe Shutdown Earthquake are designated as Seismic Category I. This section should indicate if the recommendations of Regulatory Guide 1.29 are being followed and provide a list of all Seismic Category I items. If only portions of structures and systems are Sei-smic Category I, they should be listed and, where necessary for clarity, the boundaries of the Seismic Category I portions should be shown on piping and instrumentation diagrams.
The procedures used to transform the tornado loadings into effective loads on structures should be described.
Where there are differences with Regulatory Guide 1.29, they should be identified and a discussion of the proposed classification should be included.
The following information should be included:  
3-1
: 1. The procedures used for transforming the tornado wind into an effective pressure on exposed surfaces of structures.
 
Shape coefficients and pressure distribution on flat surfaces and round structures such as containments should also be included.
Revision 3                                                     November 1978 All structures,   systems, and components or portions thereof, which are intended to be designed for an Operating Basis Earthquake (OBE),
: 2. If venting of a structure is used, the procedures employed for transforming the tornado-generated differential pressure into an effec tive reduced pressure.
should be listed or otherwise clearly identified.
: 3. The procedures used for transforming the tornado-generated missile loadings, which are considered impactive dynamic loads, into effective loads. Material included in Section 3.5.3 may be referenced in this section.
3.2.2   System Quality Group Classifications This section should identify those fluid systems or portions of fluid systems important to safety and the industry codes and standards applicable to each pressure-retaining component in the systems.
Section 50.55a of 10 CFR Part 50 specifies quality requirements the reactor coolant pressure boundary, and Regulatory Guide 1.26,               for "Quality Group Classifications and Standards for Water-, Steam-, and Radioactive Waste-Containing Components of Nuclear Power Plants," describes a quality group classification system and relates it to industry codes for water and steam-containing fluid systems. The section should indicate the to which the recommendations of Regulatory Guide 1.26 are followed. extent Where there are differences, they should be identified and a discussion included justifying each proposed quality group classification in terms of the reliance placed on these systems:
: 1. To prevent or mitigate the consequences of accidents and mal functions originating within the reactor coolant pressure boundary,
: 2. To permit shutdown of the reactor and maintenance in the safe shutdown condition, and
: 3. To contain radioactive material.
In such cases, the proposed design features and measures that would be applied to attain a quality level equivalent to the level of the above classifications should be specified, including the quality assurance pro grams that would be implemented. The section should contain group classi fication boundaries of each safety-related system. The classifications should be noted at valves or other appropriate locations in each fluid system where the respective classification changes in terms of the NRC group classification letters, for example, from A to B, B to C, C to D as well as other combinations, or alternately, in terms of corresponding classification notations that can be referenced with those classification groups in Regulatory Guide 1.26.
3.3   Wind and Tornado Loadings 3.3.1   Wind Loadings This section should discuss the design wind load on Seismic Cate gory I structures and, in particular, should include the information identified below.
3-2
 
Revision 3                                                    November 1978 3.3.1.1   Design Wind Velocity. The design wind velocity and its recurrence interval, the vertical velocity profiles, and the applicable gust factors, as described in Section 2.3, should be presented here for information.
3.3.1.2 Determination of Applied Forces.       The procedures used to transform the wind velocity into an effective pressure applied to exposed surfaces of structures should be described. Wind force distribution and shape coefficients being applied should be included.
3.3.2   Tornado Loadings This section should discuss the design basis tornado loadings on structures that must be designed for tornadoes.        It should include the information identified below.
3.3.2.1 Applicable Design Parameters.     The design parameters appli cable to the design basis tornado should be presented here for information.
The translational velocity, the tangential velocity, the pressure differ ential and its associated time interval, and the spectrum and pertinent characteristics of tornado-generated missiles should be included. Material covered in Sections 2.3 and 3.5.1 may be incorporated by reference.
3.3.2.2 Determination of Forces on Structures. The procedures used to transform the tornado loadings into effective loads on structures should be described. The following information should be included:
: 1. The procedures used for transforming the tornado wind into an effective pressure on exposed surfaces of structures. Shape coefficients and pressure distribution on flat surfaces and round structures such as containments should also be included.
: 2. If venting of a structure is used, the procedures employed for transforming the tornado-generated differential pressure into an effec tive reduced pressure.
: 3. The procedures used for transforming the tornado-generated missile loadings, which are considered impactive dynamic loads, into effective loads.     Material included in Section 3.5.3 may be referenced in this section.
: 4. The various combinations of the above individual loadings that will produce the most adverse total tornado effect on structures.
: 4. The various combinations of the above individual loadings that will produce the most adverse total tornado effect on structures.
3.3.2.3 Effect of Failure of Structures or Components Not Designed for Tornado Loads. This section should present information to show that the failure of any structure or component not designed for tornado loads will not affect the ability of other structures to pe'rform their intended safety functions.
3.3.2.3 Effect of Failure of Structures or Components Not Designed for Tornado Loads. This section should present information to show that the failure of any structure or component not designed for tornado loads will not affect the ability of other structures to pe'rform their intended safety functions.
3-3 Revision 3 November 1978 3.4 Water Level (Flood) Design This section should discuss the flood and/or the highest ground water level design for Seismic Category I structures and components including the following information.
3-3
3.4.1 Flood Protection 3.4.1.1 Flood Protection Measures for Seismic Category I Structures.
 
The flood protection measures for Seismic Category I structures, systems, and components should be described and include the following:  
Revision 3                                                   November 1978 3.4 Water Level (Flood) Design This section should discuss the flood and/or the highest ground water level design for Seismic Category I structures and components including the following information.
: 1. Identify the safety-related systems and components that should be protected against floods (see Regulatory Guide 1.59, "Design Basis Floods for Nuclear Power Plants," and Regulatory Guide 1.102, "Flood Pro tection for Nuclear Power Plants"), and show the relationship to design flood levels and conditions defined in Section 2.4 (include station drawings).*  
3.4.1   Flood Protection 3.4.1.1   Flood Protection Measures for Seismic Category I Structures.
: 2. Describe the structures that house safety-related equipment, including an identification of exterior or access openings and penetra tions that are below the design flood levels.* 3. If flood protection is required, discuss the means of providing flood protection (e.g., pumping systems, stoplogs, watertight doors, and drainage systems) for equipment that may be vulnerable because of its location and the protection provided to cope with potential inleakage from such phenomena as cracks in structure walls, leaking water stops, and effects of wind wave action (including spray). Identify on plant layout drawings individual compartments or cubicles that house safety related equipment and that act as positive barriers against possible flooding.
The flood protection measures for Seismic Category I structures, systems, and components should be described and include the following:
: 4. Describe the procedures required (see regulatory position 2 of Regulatory Guide 1.59 and regulatory position 2 of Regulatory Guide 1.102) and implementation times available to bring the reactor to a cold shutdown for the flood conditions identified in Section 2.4.14. These procedures and times should be compared with the procedures and times required to implement flood protection requirements identified in Section 2.4.14. 5. Identify those safety-related systems or components, if any, that are capable of normal function while completely or partially flooded.
: 1. Identify the safety-related systems and components that should be protected against floods (see Regulatory Guide 1.59, "Design Basis Floods for Nuclear Power Plants," and Regulatory Guide 1.102, "Flood Pro tection for Nuclear Power Plants"), and show the relationship to design flood levels and conditions defined in Section 2.4 (include station drawings).*
3.4.1.2 Permanent Dewatering System. This section should describe any permanent dewatering system provided to protect safety-related structures, systems, or components from the effects of ground water. The following information should be included:
: 2. Describe the structures that house safety-related equipment, including an identification of exterior or access openings and penetra tions that are below the design flood levels.*
: 3. If flood protection is required, discuss the means of providing flood protection (e.g., pumping systems, stoplogs, watertight doors, and drainage systems) for equipment that may be vulnerable because of its location and the protection provided to cope with potential inleakage from such phenomena as cracks in structure walls, leaking water stops, and effects of wind wave action (including spray).       Identify on plant layout drawings individual compartments or cubicles that house safety related equipment and that act as positive barriers against possible flooding.
: 4. Describe the procedures required (see regulatory position 2 of Regulatory Guide 1.59 and regulatory position 2 of Regulatory Guide 1.102) and implementation times available to bring the reactor to a cold shutdown for the flood conditions identified in Section 2.4.14. These procedures and times should be compared with the procedures and times required to implement flood protection requirements identified in Section 2.4.14.
: 5. Identify those safety-related systems or components, if any, that are     capable of normal function while completely or partially flooded.
3.4.1.2 Permanent Dewatering System. This section should describe any permanent dewatering system provided to protect safety-related structures, systems, or components from the effects of ground water.
The following information should be included:
* The details discussed herein should be consistent with Sections 2.4.1.1,.
* The details discussed herein should be consistent with Sections 2.4.1.1,.
2.4.2.2, and 2.4.10.3-4 Revision 3 Revision 3 November 1978 I. A summary description of the dewatering system. All major sub systems such as the active discharge subsystem and the passive collection and drainage subsystem should be described.
2.4.2.2, and 2.4.10.
: 2. The design bases for the functional performance requirements for each subsystem, along with the bases for selecting the system operating parameters.
3-4
: 3. A safety evauation demonstrating how the system satisfies the design bases, the system's capability to withstand design basis events, and its capability to perform its safety function assuming a single active failure with the ioss of offsite power. Protection against single failure should be evaluated in terms of piping arrangement and layout, selection of valve types and location, redundancy of various system components, redundancy of power supplies, redundant sources of actuation signals, and redundancy of instrumentation.
 
The safety evaluation should also demonstrate that the dewatering system is protected from the effects of pipe breaks and missiles.
Revision 3                                                   November 1978 I. A summary description of the dewatering system. All major sub systems such as the active discharge subsystem and the passive collection and drainage subsystem should be described.
: 4. The testing and inspection to be performed to verify that the system capability and reliability are met and the instrumentation and control necessary for proper operation of the system. 5. The information provided in this section of the SAR should be consistent with the information provided in Sections 2.4 and 2.5, which should be referenced as appropriate.
: 2. The design bases for the functional performance requirements for each subsystem, along with the bases for selecting the system operating parameters.
3.4.2 Analytical and Test Procedures Describe the methods and procedures by which the static and dynamic effects of the design basis flood conditions or design basis ground water conditions identified in Section 2.4 are applied to safety-related struc tures, systems, and components.
: 3. A safety evauation demonstrating how the system satisfies the design bases, the system's capability to withstand design basis events, and its capability to perform its safety function assuming a single active failure with the ioss of offsite power. Protection against single failure should be evaluated in terms of piping arrangement and layout, selection of valve types and location, redundancy of various system components, redundancy of power supplies, redundant sources of actuation signals, and redundancy of instrumentation.       The safety evaluation should also demonstrate that the dewatering system is protected from the effects of pipe breaks and missiles.
Summarize for each safety-related struc ture, system, and component that may be so affected, the design basis static and dynamic loadings, including consideration of hydrostatic load ings, equivalent hydrostatic dynamically induced loadings, coincident wind loadings, and the static and dynamic effects on foundation properties (Section 2.5). If physical models are used to predict prototype performance of hydraulic structures and systems, information on such model testing should be included herein (see Regulatory Guide 1.125, "Physical Models for Design and Operation of Hydraulic Structures and Systems for Nuclear Power Plants").
: 4. The testing and inspection to be performed to verify that the system capability and reliability are met and the instrumentation and control necessary for proper operation of the system.
3.5 Missile Protection 3.5.1 Missile Selection and Description 3.5.1.1 Internally Generated Missiles (Outside Containment).
: 5. The information provided in this section of the SAR should be consistent with the information provided in Sections 2.4 and 2.5, which should be referenced as appropriate.
The design bases for the structures, systems (or portions of systems), and 3-5 November 1978 components that are to be protected against damage from internally gen erated missiles outside containment should be provided.
3.4.2 Analytical and Test Procedures Describe the methods and procedures by which the static and dynamic effects of the design basis flood conditions or design basis ground water conditions identified in Section 2.4 are applied to safety-related struc tures, systems, and components. Summarize for each safety-related struc ture, system, and component that may be so affected, the design basis static and dynamic loadings, including consideration of hydrostatic load ings, equivalent hydrostatic dynamically induced loadings, coincident wind loadings, and the static and dynamic effects on foundation properties (Section 2.5).
Missiles asso ciated with overspeed failures of rotating components and with failures of high-pressure system components should be considered.
If physical models are used to predict prototype performance of hydraulic structures and systems, information on such model testing should be included herein (see Regulatory Guide 1.125, "Physical Models for Design and Operation of Hydraulic Structures and Systems for Nuclear Power Plants").
The design bases should consider the design features provided for either continued safe operation or shutdown during all operating conditions, operational tran sients, and postulated accident conditions.
3.5 Missile Protection 3.5.1     Missile Selection and Description 3.5.1.1 Internally Generated Missiles (Outside Containment).     The design bases for the structures, systems (or portions of systems), and 3-5
A tabulation showing the safety-related structures, systems, and components outside containment required for safe shutdown of the reactor under all conditions of plant operation should be provided and, as a minimum, should include the following:  
 
: 1. Locations of the structures, systems, or components.
Revision 3                                                    November 1978 components that are to be protected against damage from internally gen erated missiles outside containment should be provided. Missiles asso ciated with overspeed failures of rotating components and with failures of high-pressure system components should be considered. The design bases should consider the design features provided for either continued safe operation or shutdown during all operating conditions, operational tran sients, and postulated accident conditions.
: 2. Applicable seismic category and quality group classifications (may be referenced from Section 3.2). 3. Sections in the SAR where descriptions of the items may be found. 4. Reference drawings or piping and instrumentation diagrams where applicable (may be referenced from other sections of the SAR). 5. Identification of missiles to be protected against, their source, and the bases for selection.
A tabulation showing the safety-related structures, systems, and components outside containment required for safe shutdown of the reactor under all conditions of plant operation should be provided and, as a minimum, should include the following:
: 1. Locations of the structures, systems, or components.
: 2. Applicable seismic category and quality group classifications (may be referenced from Section 3.2).
: 3. Sections in the SAR where descriptions   of the items may be found.
: 4. Reference drawings or piping and instrumentation diagrams where applicable (may be referenced from other sections of the SAR).
: 5. Identification of missiles to be protected against, their source, and the bases for selection.
: 6. Missile protection provided.
: 6. Missile protection provided.
The ability of the structures, systems, and components to withstand the effects of selected internally generated missiles should be evaluated.
The ability of the structures, systems, and components to withstand the effects of selected internally generated missiles should be evaluated.
3.5.1.2 Internally Generated Missiles (Inside Containment).
3.5.1.2 Internally Generated Missiles (Inside Containment).       All plant structures, systems, and components inside containment whose failure could lead to offsite radiological consequences or that are required for safe plant shutdown to a cold condition assuming an additional single failure should be identified. The separation and independence of those structures, systems, and components protected by redundancy rather than physical barriers against very low probability missile strikes should be clearly demonstrated. The structures, systems, and components protected by physical barriers should be identified. Missiles associated with over speed failures of rotating components, with primary and secondary failures of high-pressure system components, and those due to gravitational effects should be identified.
All plant structures, systems, and components inside containment whose failure could lead to offsite radiological consequences or that are required for safe plant shutdown to a cold condition assuming an additional single failure should be identified.
The separation and independence of those structures, systems, and components protected by redundancy rather than physical barriers against very low probability missile strikes should be clearly demonstrated.
The structures, systems, and components protected by physical barriers should be identified.
Missiles associated with over speed failures of rotating components, with primary and secondary failures of high-pressure system components, and those due to gravitational effects should be identified.
A tabulation showing the safety-related structures, systems, and components inside containment required for safe shutdown of the reactor under all conditions of the plant operation, including operational tran sients and postulated accident conditions, should be provided and, as a minimum, should include the following:
A tabulation showing the safety-related structures, systems, and components inside containment required for safe shutdown of the reactor under all conditions of the plant operation, including operational tran sients and postulated accident conditions, should be provided and, as a minimum, should include the following:
3-6 Revision 3 November 1978 1. Location of the structure, system, or component.
3-6
: 2. Identification of missiles to be protected against, their source, and the bases for selection.
 
Revision 3                                                     November 1978
: 1. Location of the structure, system, or component.
: 2. Identification of missiles to be protected against, their source, and the bases for selection.
: 3. Missile protection provided.
: 3. Missile protection provided.
The ability of the structures, systems, and components to withstand the effects of selected internally generated missiles should be evaluated.
The ability of the structures, systems, and components to withstand the effects of selected internally generated missiles should be evaluated.
3.5.1.3 Turbine Missiles.
3.5.1.3 Turbine Missiles. Information should be provided on the following topics:
Information should be provided on the following topics: 1. Turbine Placement and Orientation.
: 1. Turbine Placement and Orientation. Plant layout drawings should indicate clearly turbine placement and orientation.       Plan and elevation views should have appropriate indication of the + 25-degree low-trajectory turbine missile ejection zone with respect to the low-pressure turbine wheels for each turbine unit "within reach" of the plant structures.
Plant layout drawings should indicate clearly turbine placement and orientation.
Target areas should be indicated clearly on plan and elevation views with respect to all systems identified in Section 3.5.2.
Plan and elevation views should have appropriate indication of the + 25-degree low-trajectory turbine missile ejection zone with respect to the low-pressure turbine wheels for each turbine unit "within reach" of the plant structures.
: 2. Missile Identification and Characteristics.       Description of postulated turbine missiles should include missile properties such as mass, shape, cross-sectional areas, ranged turbine exit speeds, and range of turbine exit angles. Mathematical models used in the analysis of such items as missile selection, turbine casing penetration, and missile trajectories should be included. A description of the analytical models used to determine the characteristics of the selected missiles, including any assumptions, should be included.
Target areas should be indicated clearly on plan and elevation views with respect to all systems identified in Section 3.5.2. 2. Missile Identification and Characteristics.
: 3. Target Description. Structures and equipment identified in Section 3.5.2, if within the low-trajectory turbine missile strike zones described in item 1, should be identified in dimensioned plan and eleva tion drawings. Safety-related equipment occupying small portions of a room or a structure should be indicated individually (e.g., batteries, switchgear cabinets, isolation valves).       Separation distances and/or separation barriers should be indicated with respect to redundant equipment.
Description of postulated turbine missiles should include missile properties such as mass, shape, cross-sectional areas, ranged turbine exit speeds, and range of turbine exit angles. Mathematical models used in the analysis of such items as missile selection, turbine casing penetration, and missile trajectories should be included.
: 4. Probability Analysis. An analysis of strike probabilities for low-trajectory turbine missiles with respect to plant systems identified in Section 3.5.2 should be provided.       If the analytical methods are described by referencing other documents, a brief summary outline of the method, including sample calculations, should be provided. All assump tions used in the analysis should be identified, and the bases supporting them should be discussed.
A description of the analytical models used to determine the characteristics of the selected missiles, including any assumptions, should be included.
Numerical results of the analysis should be presented in tabular form, listing the individual strike probabilities for each vital area with respect to design and destructive overspeed turbine missiles. The 3-7
: 3. Target Description.
 
Structures and equipment identified in Section 3.5.2, if within the low-trajectory turbine missile strike zones described in item 1, should be identified in dimensioned plan and eleva tion drawings.
Revision 3                                                       November 1978 data should be resolved into strike probability contributions from each turbine unit (including nonnuclear units) on or in the vicinity of the site.
Safety-related equipment occupying small portions of a room or a structure should be indicated individually (e.g., batteries, switchgear cabinets, isolation valves). Separation distances and/or separation barriers should be indicated with respect to redundant equipment.
In the case of destructive overspeed, an analysis should be presented justifying the assumption of only one disc failure.       Turbine overspeed acceleration characteristics, statistical distribution of destructive overspeed failure speeds, and related information should be considered in the evaluation of the probability of second wheel failure during the interval of physical disassembly caused by the first   failure.
: 4. Probability Analysis.
: 5. Turbine Overspeed Protection. A description of the turbine overspeed protection system in terms of redundancy, diversity, component reliability, and testing procedures should be provided.
An analysis of strike probabilities for low-trajectory turbine missiles with respect to plant systems identified in Section 3.5.2 should be provided.
: 6. Turbine Valve Testing. A discussion of the turbine valve test ing environment should cover such items as test frequency, power level, pressure difference across the steam valve(s), and other parameters pertinent to overspeed protection.
If the analytical methods are described by referencing other documents, a brief summary outline of the method, including sample calculations, should be provided.
: 7. Turbine Characteristics. Turbine data pertinent to the evalua tion of its failure characteristics should include a description of its overall configuration, major components (e.g., steam valves, reheaters, etc.), rotor materials and their properties, steam environment (e.g.,
All assump tions used in the analysis should be identified, and the bases supporting them should be discussed.
pressure, temperature, quality, chemistry), and other appropriate pro perties. Turbine operational and transient characteristics should be described, including turbine startup and trip environments, as well as its overspeed parameters (e.g., time to 180% overspeed from loss of 100%
Numerical results of the analysis should be presented in tabular form, listing the individual strike probabilities for each vital area with respect to design and destructive overspeed turbine missiles.
power load).
The 3-7 Revision 3 November 1978 data should be resolved into strike probability contributions from each turbine unit (including nonnuclear units) on or in the vicinity of the site. In the case of destructive overspeed, an analysis should be presented justifying the assumption of only one disc failure. Turbine overspeed acceleration characteristics, statistical distribution of destructive overspeed failure speeds, and related information should be considered in the evaluation of the probability of second wheel failure during the interval of physical disassembly caused by the first failure.
3.5.1.4 Missiles Generated by Natural Phenomena.       Identify   all missiles generated as a result of natural phenomena (e.g., tornadoes and floods) in the vicinity of the plant.       For selected missiles, specify the origin, dimensions, mass, energy, velocity, and any other parameters required to determine missile penetration.
: 5. Turbine Overspeed Protection.
The structures and/or barriers used for missile protection should be tabulated. The table should contain the following information:
A description of the turbine overspeed protection system in terms of redundancy, diversity, component reliability, and testing procedures should be provided.
: 1. Systems or components that are protected by the structure/
: 6. Turbine Valve Testing. A discussion of the turbine valve test ing environment should cover such items as test frequency, power level, pressure difference across the steam valve(s), and other parameters pertinent to overspeed protection.
barrier.
: 7. Turbine Characteristics.
: 2. Concrete thickness and strength for walls, roofs, and floors used for missile protection and the curing time on which the strength is based.
Turbine data pertinent to the evalua tion of its failure characteristics should include a description of its overall configuration, major components (e.g., steam valves, reheaters, etc.), rotor materials and their properties, steam environment (e.g., pressure, temperature, quality, chemistry), and other appropriate pro perties. Turbine operational and transient characteristics should be described, including turbine startup and trip environments, as well as its overspeed parameters (e.g., time to 180% overspeed from loss of 100% power load). 3.5.1.4 Missiles Generated by Natural Phenomena.
3.5.1.5 Missiles Generated by Events Near the Site.       Identify all missile sources resulting from accidental explosions in the vicinity of the site. The presence of and operations at nearby industrial, trans portation, and military facilities should be considered. The following missile sources should be considered with respect to the site:
Identify all missiles generated as a result of natural phenomena (e.g., tornadoes and floods) in the vicinity of the plant. For selected missiles, specify the origin, dimensions, mass, energy, velocity, and any other parameters required to determine missile penetration.
3-8
The structures and/or barriers used for missile protection should be tabulated.
 
The table should contain the following information:  
Revision 3                                                   November 1978
: 1. Systems or components that are protected by the structure/
: 1. Train explosions (including rocket effects),
barrier.
: 2. Truck explosions, 3., Ship or barge explosions,
: 2. Concrete thickness and strength for walls, roofs, and floors used for missile protection and the curing time on which the strength is based. 3.5.1.5 Missiles Generated by Events Near the Site. Identify all missile sources resulting from accidental explosions in the vicinity of the site. The presence of and operations at nearby industrial, trans portation, and military facilities should be considered.
: 4. Industrial facilities,
The following missile sources should be considered with respect to the site: 3-8 Revision 3 Revision 3 November 1978 1. Train explosions (including rocket effects), 2. Truck explosions, 3., Ship or barge explosions, 4. Industrial facilities, 5. Pipeline explosions, and 6. Military facilities.
: 5. Pipeline explosions, and
Missiles from each type of source should be characterized in terms of dimensions, mass, energy, velocity, trajectory, and energy density. (Aircraft crashes should be analyzed in Section 3.5.1.5.)
: 6. Military facilities.
3.5.1.6 Aircraft Hazards. An aircraft hazard analysis should be provided for each of the following:  
Missiles from each type of source should be characterized in terms of dimensions, mass, energy, velocity, trajectory, and energy density.
: 1. Federal airways or airport approaches passing within 2 miles of the nuclear facility.
(Aircraft crashes should be analyzed in Section 3.5.1.5.)
: 2. All airports located within 5 miles of the site. 3. Airports-with projected operations greater than 500d 2 movements per year located within 10 miles of the site and greater than 1000d 2 out side 10 miles, where d is the distance in miles from the site. 4. Military installations or any airspace usage that might present a hazard to the site. For some uses such as practice bombing ranges, it may be necessary to evaluate uses as far as 20 miles from the site. The analyses should provide an estimate of the probability of an aircraft accident with consequences worse than those of the design basis accident.
3.5.1.6 Aircraft Hazards. An aircraft hazard analysis should be provided for each of the following:
Hazards to the plant may be divided into accidents resulting in structural damage and accidents involving fire. These analyses should be based on the projected traffic for the facilities, the aircraft accident statistics provided in Section 2.2, and the critical areas described in Section 3.5.2. All the parameters used in these analyses should be explicitly justified.
: 1. Federal airways or airport approaches passing within 2 miles of the nuclear facility.
Wherever a range of values is obtained for a given parameter, it should be plainly indicated and the most conservative value used. Justification for all assumptibns made should also be clearly stated. Conclusions on the aircraft, if any, that are to be selected as design basis impact events should be stated and the rationale for the choice clearly set forth. The whole aircraft or parts thereof should be characterized in terms of dimensions, mass (including Variations along the length of the aircraft), energy, velocity, trajectory, and energy 3-9 November 1978 density. Resultant loading curves on structures should be presented in Section 3.5.3. 3.5.2 Structures, Systems, and Components To Be Protected from Externally Generated Missiles All plant structures, systems, and components whose failure could lead to offsite radiological consequences or that are required to shut down the reactor and maintain it in a safe condition assuming an addi tional single failure should be identified.
: 2. All airports located within 5 miles of the site.
It should be demonstrated that such safety-related structures, systems, and components are ade quately protected against very low probability missile strikes by physical barriers or protective structures.
: 3. Airports-with projected operations greater than 500d 2 movements 2
Missiles that should be considered are identified in Section 3.5.1. Protective structures and barriers should be identified on plant arrangement and elevation drawings and in the system and component classification tables. 3.5.3 Barrier Design Procedures The procedures by which each structure or barrier will be designed to resist the missile hazards previously described should be presented; the following should be included:  
per year located within 10 miles of the site and greater than 1000d out side 10 miles, where d is the distance in miles from the site.
: 1. Procedures utilized (a) to predict local damage in the impact area, including estimation of the depth of penetration, (b) to estimate barrier thickness required to prevent perforation, and (c) in the case of concrete barriers to predict the potential for generating secondary missiles by spalling and scabbing effects, and 2. Procedures utilized for the prediction of the overall response of the barrier and portions thereof to missile impact. This includes assumptions on acceptable ductility ratios and estimates of forces, moments, and shears induced in the barrier by the impact force of the missile.
: 4. Military installations or any airspace usage that might present a hazard to the site. For some uses such as practice bombing ranges, it may be necessary to evaluate uses as far as 20 miles from the site.
3.6 Protection Against Dynamic Effects Associated with the Postulated Rupture of Piping This section should describe design bases (PSAR) and design measures (FSAR) to ensure that the containment vessel and all essential equipment inside or outside the containment, including components of the reactor coolant pressure boundary, have been adequately protected against the effects of blowdown jet and reactive forces and pipe whip resulting from postulated rupture of piping located either inside or outside of contain ment. The following specific information should be included.
The analyses should provide an estimate of the probability of an aircraft accident with consequences worse than those of the design basis accident. Hazards to the plant may be divided into accidents resulting in structural damage and accidents involving fire. These analyses should be based on the projected traffic for the facilities, the aircraft accident statistics provided in Section 2.2, and the critical areas described in Section 3.5.2.
3.6.1 Postulated Piping Failures in Fluid Systems Outside of Containment 3.6.1.1 Design Bases (PSAR). Systems or components important to plant safety or shutdown that are located proximate to high- or moderate energy piping systems and that are susceptible to the consequences of failures of these piping systems should be identified.
All the parameters used in these analyses should be explicitly justified. Wherever a range of values is obtained for a given parameter, it should be plainly indicated and the most conservative value used.
The identification 3-10 Revision 3 November 1978 should be related to predetermined piping failure locations in accordance with Section 3.6.2. Typical piping runs with failure points ý..dicated on drawings should be provided.
Justification for all assumptibns made should also be clearly stated.
The identification of affected components should also include limiting acceptable conditions, i.e., those conditions for which operation of the component will not be precluded.
Conclusions on the aircraft, if any, that are to be selected as design basis impact events should be stated and the rationale for the choice clearly set forth. The whole aircraft or parts thereof should be characterized in terms of dimensions, mass (including Variations along the length of the aircraft), energy, velocity, trajectory, and energy 3-9
The design approach taken to protect the systems and components identified above should be indicated.
 
3.6.1.2 Description (FSAR). Provide a listing of high- and moderate energy lines. In the case where physical arrangement of the piping systems provides the required protection, a description of the layout of all systems should be submitted.
Revision 3                                                      November 1978 density.     Resultant loading curves on structures should be presented in Section 3.5.3.
In the case where the high- or moderate-energy piping systems have been enclosed in structures or compartments to protect nearby essential systems or components, descriptions and pressure rise analyses should be provided to verify the structural adequacy of such enclosures.
3.5.2     Structures, Systems, and Components To Be Protected from Externally Generated Missiles All plant structures, systems, and components whose failure could lead to offsite radiological consequences or that are required to shut down the reactor and maintain it in a safe condition assuming an addi tional single failure should be identified.       It should be demonstrated that such safety-related structures, systems, and components are ade quately protected against very low probability missile strikes by physical barriers or protective structures. Missiles that should be considered are identified in Section 3.5.1.       Protective structures and barriers should be identified on plant arrangement and elevation drawings and in the system and component classification tables.
An analysis of the potential effects of secondary missiles on the compo nents should also be provided.
3.5.3     Barrier Design Procedures The procedures by which each structure or barrier will be designed to resist the missile hazards previously described should be presented; the following should be included:
If failure of or leakage from high- or moderate-energy lines affect nearby safety features or results in the transport of a steam environment to other rooms or compartments in the facility, an analysis should be provided of the effects of the environ ment on the operation of the affected equipment or systems. In the case of the control room, analyses should be provided to verify that habitabil ity will be ensured.
: 1. Procedures utilized (a) to predict local damage in the impact area, including estimation of the depth of penetration, (b) to estimate barrier thickness required to prevent perforation, and (c) in the case of concrete barriers to predict the potential for generating secondary missiles by spalling and scabbing effects, and
3.6.1.3 Safety Evaluation (FSAR). The results of failure mode and effects analyses should be provided to verify that the consequences of failures of high- and moderate-energy lines do not affect the ability to safely shut the plant down. The analyses should include consideration of single active component failures occurring in required systems concur rently with the postulated event. 3.6.2 Determination of Break Locations and Dynamic Effects Associated with the Postulated Rupture of Piping This section should describe the design bases for locating postu lated breaks and cracks in piping inside and outside of containment, the procedures used to define the jet thrust reaction at the break or crack location, and the jet impingement loading on adjacent safety-related structures, equipment, systems, and components.
: 2. Procedures utilized for the prediction of the overall response of the barrier and portions thereof to missile impact.         This includes assumptions on acceptable ductility ratios and estimates of forces, moments, and shears induced in the barrier by the impact force of the missile.
3.6.2.1 Criteria Used to Define Break and Crack Location and Configuration (PSAR). The criteria should be provided for the location and configuration of postulated breaks and cracks in those high- and moderate-energy piping systems for which separation or enclosure cannot be achieved.
3.6 Protection Against Dynamic Effects Associated with the Postulated Rupture of Piping This section should describe design bases (PSAR) and design measures (FSAR) to ensure that the containment vessel and all essential equipment inside or outside the containment, including components of the reactor coolant pressure boundary, have been adequately protected against the effects of blowdown jet and reactive forces and pipe whip resulting from postulated rupture of piping located either inside or outside of contain ment. The following specific information should be included.
In the case of containment penetration piping, in addition to the material requested above, the details of the containment penetra tion identifying all process pipe welds, access for inservice inspection of welds, points of fixity, and points of geometric discontinuity should be provided.3-11 Revision 3 Revision 3 November 1978 3.6.2.2 Analytical Methods to Define Forcing Functions and Response Models (PSAR). The methods used to define the forcing functions to be used for the pipe whip dynamic analyses should be described.
3.6.1   Postulated Piping Failures in Fluid Systems Outside of Containment 3.6.1.1 Design Bases (PSAR).     Systems or components important to plant safety or shutdown that are located proximate to high- or moderate energy piping systems and that are susceptible to the consequences of failures of these piping systems should be identified. The identification 3-10
The descrip tion should include direction, thrust coefficients, rise time, magnitude, duration, and initial conditions that adequately represent the jet stream dynamics and the system pressure differences.
 
Pipe restraint rebound effects should be included if appropriate.
Revision 3                                                     November 1978 should be related to predetermined piping failure locations in accordance with Section 3.6.2. Typical piping runs with failure points ý..dicated on drawings should be provided. The identification of affected components should also include limiting acceptable conditions, i.e., those conditions for which operation of the component will not be precluded.     The design approach taken to protect the systems and components identified above should be indicated.
Diagrams of typical mathematical models used for the dynamic response analysis should be provided.
3.6.1.2 Description (FSAR). Provide a listing of high- and moderate energy lines. In the case where physical arrangement of the piping systems provides the required protection, a description of the layout of all systems should be submitted. In the case where the high- or moderate-energy piping systems have been enclosed in structures or compartments to protect nearby essential systems or components, descriptions and pressure rise analyses should be provided to verify the structural adequacy of such enclosures.
All dynamic amplification factors to be used should be presented and justified.
An analysis of the potential effects of secondary missiles on the compo nents should also be provided. If failure of or leakage from high- or moderate-energy lines affect nearby safety features or results in the transport of a steam environment to other rooms or compartments in the facility, an analysis should be provided of the effects of the environ ment on the operation of the affected equipment or systems.       In the case of the control room, analyses should be provided to verify that habitabil ity will be ensured.
3.6.2.3 Dynamic Analysis Methods to Verify Integrity and Operability (PSAR). The method of analysis that will be used to evaluate the jet impingement effects and loading effects applicable to components and systems resulting from postulated pipe breaks and cracks should be provided.
3.6.1.3 Safety Evaluation (FSAR). The results of failure mode and effects analyses should be provided to verify that the consequences of failures of high- and moderate-energy lines do not affect the ability to safely shut the plant down.     The analyses should include consideration of single active component failures occurring in required systems concur rently with the postulated event.
In addition, provide the analytical methods used to verify the integrity of mechanical components under pipe rupture loads. In the case of piping systems where pipe whip restraints are included, the loading combinations and the design criteria for the restraints should be provided along with a description typical of the restraint configuration to be used. 3.6.2.4 Guard Pipe Assembly Design Criteria (PSAR). The details of protective assemblies or guard pipes (a guard pipe is a device to limit pressurization of the space between dual barriers of certain containments to acceptable levels) to be used for piping penetrations of containment areas should be provided.
3.6.2   Determination of Break Locations and Dynamic Effects Associated with the Postulated Rupture of Piping This section should describe the design bases for locating postu lated breaks and cracks in piping inside and outside of containment, the procedures used to define the jet thrust reaction at the break or crack location, and the jet impingement loading on adjacent safety-related structures, equipment, systems, and components.
Discuss whether such protective assemblies serve to provide an extension of containment, prevent overpressurization, or both. The use of moment-limiting restraints at the extremities or within the protective assembly should be indicated.
3.6.2.1 Criteria Used to Define Break and Crack Location and Configuration (PSAR). The criteria should be provided for the location and configuration of postulated breaks and cracks in those high- and moderate-energy piping systems for which separation or enclosure cannot be achieved. In the case of containment penetration piping, in addition to the material requested above, the details of the containment penetra tion identifying all process pipe welds, access for inservice inspection of welds, points of fixity, and points of geometric discontinuity should be provided.
The following should be provided:  
3-11
: 1. The criteria for the design of the process pipe within the protec tive assembly.
 
Include type of material (seamless or welded), allowable stress level, and loading combinations.
Revision 3 November 1978 3.6.2.2 Analytical Methods to Define Forcing Functions and Response Models (PSAR). The methods used to define the forcing functions to be used for the pipe whip dynamic analyses should be described. The descrip tion should include direction, thrust coefficients, rise time, magnitude, duration, and initial conditions that adequately represent the jet stream dynamics and the system pressure differences.       Pipe restraint rebound effects should be included if appropriate.
: 2. The design criteria to be used for flued heads and bellows expan sion joints. 3. The design criteria applicable to the guard pipe that is used with the assembly.
Diagrams of typical mathematical models used for the dynamic response analysis should be provided. All dynamic amplification factors to be used should be presented and justified.
: 4. A description of the method of providing access and the loca tion of such access openings to permit periodic examinations of all process pipe welds within the protective assembly as required by the plant inservice inspection program (refer to Section 5.2.4 for ASME Class 1 systems. and Section 6.6 for ASME Class 2 and 3 systems).3-12 November 1978 3.6.2.5 Material To Be Submitted for the Operating License Review (FSAR). A summary of the dynamic analyses applicable to high- and moderate energy piping systems and associated supports that determine the loadings resulting from postulated pipe breaks and cracks should be presented.
3.6.2.3 Dynamic Analysis Methods to Verify Integrity and Operability (PSAR). The method of analysis that will be used to evaluate the jet impingement effects and loading effects applicable to components and systems resulting from postulated pipe breaks and cracks should be provided.       In addition, provide the analytical methods used to verify the integrity of mechanical components under pipe rupture loads.       In the case of piping systems where pipe whip restraints are included, the loading combinations and the design criteria for the restraints should be provided along with a description typical of the restraint configuration to be used.
The following should be included:  
3.6.2.4 Guard Pipe Assembly Design Criteria (PSAR).       The details of protective assemblies or guard pipes (a guard pipe is a device to limit pressurization of the space between dual barriers of certain containments to acceptable levels) to be used for piping penetrations of containment areas should be provided.     Discuss whether such protective assemblies serve to provide an extension of containment, prevent overpressurization, or both.
: 1. The implementation of criteria for defining pipe break and crack locations and configurations.
The use of moment-limiting restraints at the extremities or within the protective assembly should be indicated.       The following should be provided:
Provide the locations and number of design basis breaks-and cracks on which the dynamic analyses are based. Also provide the postulated rupture orientation, such as the circumferential and/or longitudinal break(s), for each postulated design basis break location.
: 1. The criteria for the design of the process pipe within the protec tive assembly. Include type of material (seamless or welded), allowable stress level, and loading combinations.
: 2. The implementation of criteria dealing with special features such as augmented inservice inspection program or the use of special protec tive devices such as pipe whip restraints, including diagrams showing their final configurations, locations, and orientations in relation to break locations in each piping system. 3. The acceptability of the analysis results, including the jet thrust and impingement functions and the pipe whip dynamic effects.
: 2. The design criteria to be used for flued heads and bellows expan sion joints.
: 4. The design adequacy of systems, components, and component supports to ensure that their design-intended functions will not be impaired to an unacceptable level of integrity or operability as a result of pipe whip loading or jet impingement loading.
: 3. The design criteria applicable to the guard pipe that is     used with the assembly.
: 4. A description of the method of providing access and the loca tion of such access openings to permit periodic examinations of all process pipe welds within the protective assembly as required by the plant inservice inspection program (refer to Section 5.2.4 for ASME Class 1 systems. and Section 6.6 for ASME Class 2 and 3 systems).
3-12
 
Revision 3                                                      November 1978 3.6.2.5 Material To Be Submitted for the Operating License Review (FSAR). A summary of the dynamic analyses applicable to high- and moderate energy piping systems and associated supports that determine the loadings resulting from postulated pipe breaks and cracks should be presented.
The following should be included:
: 1. The implementation of criteria for defining pipe break and crack locations and configurations.     Provide the locations and number of design basis breaks-and cracks on which the dynamic analyses are based. Also provide the postulated rupture orientation, such as the circumferential and/or longitudinal break(s), for each postulated design basis break location.
: 2. The implementation of criteria dealing with special features such as augmented inservice inspection program or the use of special protec tive devices such as pipe whip restraints, including diagrams showing their final configurations, locations, and orientations in relation to break locations in each piping system.
: 3. The acceptability of the analysis results, including the jet thrust and impingement functions and the pipe whip dynamic effects.
: 4. The design adequacy of systems, components, and component supports to ensure that their design-intended functions will not be impaired to an unacceptable level of integrity or operability as a result of pipe whip loading or jet impingement loading.
: 5. The implementation of the criteria relating to protective assembly design, including the final design, location of restraints, stress levels for various plant operating conditions for the process pipe, flued heads, bellows expansion joints, and guard pipes. Present the final design and arrangement of the access openings that are used to examine all process pipe welds within such protective assemblies to meet the requirements of the plant inservice inspection program.
: 5. The implementation of the criteria relating to protective assembly design, including the final design, location of restraints, stress levels for various plant operating conditions for the process pipe, flued heads, bellows expansion joints, and guard pipes. Present the final design and arrangement of the access openings that are used to examine all process pipe welds within such protective assemblies to meet the requirements of the plant inservice inspection program.
3.7 Seismic Design 3.7.1 Seismic Input 3.7.1.1 Design Response Spectra. Design response spectra (Operat ing Basis Earthquake (OBE) and Safe Shutdown Earthquake (SSE)) should be provided to permit comparison with Regulatory Guide 1.60, "Design Response Spectra for Seismic Design of Nuclear Power Plants," which provides accept able design response spectra. The basis for any response spectra that differ from the spectra given in Regulatory Guide 1.60 should be included.
3.7 Seismic Design 3.7.1   Seismic Input 3.7.1.1 Design Response Spectra. Design response spectra (Operat ing Basis Earthquake (OBE) and Safe Shutdown Earthquake (SSE)) should be provided to permit comparison with Regulatory Guide 1.60, "Design Response Spectra for Seismic Design of Nuclear Power Plants," which provides accept able design response spectra. The basis for any response spectra that differ from the spectra given in Regulatory Guide 1.60 should be included.
The response spectra applied at the finished grade in the free field or at the various foundation locations of Seismic Category I structures should be provided.3-13 Revision 3 November 1978 3.7.1.2 Design Time History. For the time history analyses, the response spectra derived from the actual or synthetic earthquake time motion records should be provided.
The response spectra applied at the finished grade in the free field or at the various foundation locations of Seismic Category I structures should be provided.
A comparison of the response spectra obtained in the free field at the finished grade level and the founda tion level (obtained from an appropriate time history at the base of the soil/structure interaction system) with the design response spectra should be submitted for each of the damping values to be used in the design of structures, systems, and components.
3-13
Alternatively, if the design response spectra for the OBE and SSE are applied at the foundation levels of Seismic Category I structures in the free field, a comparison of the free-field response spectra at the foundation level (derived from an actual or synthetic time history) with the design response spectra should be provided for each of the damping values to be used in the design. The period intervals at which the spectra values were calculated should be identified.
 
3.7.1.3 Critical Damping Values. The specific percentage of crit ical damping values used for Seismic Category I structures, systems, and components and soil should be provided for both the OBE and SSE (e.g., damping values for the type of construction or fabrication such as pre stressed concrete and welded pipe) to permit comparison with Regulatory Guide 1.61, "Damping Values for Seismic Design of Nuclear Power Plants," which provides acceptable damping values. The basis for any proposed damping values that differ from those given in Regulatory Guide 1.61 should be included.
Revision 3                                                   November 1978 3.7.1.2 Design Time History. For the time history analyses, the response spectra derived from the actual or synthetic earthquake time motion records should be provided. A comparison of the response spectra obtained in the free field at the finished grade level and the founda tion level (obtained from an appropriate time history at the base of the soil/structure interaction system) with the design response spectra should be submitted for each of the damping values to be used in the design of structures, systems, and components. Alternatively, if the design response spectra for the OBE and SSE are applied at the foundation levels of Seismic Category I structures in the free field, a comparison of the free-field response spectra at the foundation level (derived from an actual or synthetic time history) with the design response spectra should be provided for each of the damping values to be used in the design. The period intervals at which the spectra values were calculated should be identified.
3.7.1.4 Supporting Media for Seismic Category I Structures.
3.7.1.3 Critical Damping Values. The specific percentage of crit ical damping values used for Seismic Category I structures, systems, and components and soil should be provided for both the OBE and SSE (e.g.,
A descrip tion of the supporting media for each Seismic Category I structure should be provided.
damping values for the type of construction or fabrication such as pre stressed concrete and welded pipe) to permit comparison with Regulatory Guide 1.61, "Damping Values for Seismic Design of Nuclear Power Plants,"
Include in this description foundation embedment depth, depth of soil over bedrock, soil layering characteristics, width of the structural foundation, total structural height, and soil properties such as shear wave velocity, shear modulus, and density. This information is needed to permit evaluation of the suitability of using either a finite element or lumped spring approach for soil/structure interaction analysis.
which provides acceptable damping values. The basis for any proposed damping values that differ from those given in Regulatory Guide 1.61 should be included.
3.7.2 Seismic System Analysis This section should discuss the seismic system analyses applicable to Seismic Category I structures, systems, and components.
3.7.1.4 Supporting Media for Seismic Category I Structures. A descrip tion of the supporting media for each Seismic Category I structure should be provided. Include in this description foundation embedment depth, depth of soil over bedrock, soil layering characteristics, width of the structural foundation, total structural height, and soil properties such as shear wave velocity, shear modulus, and density. This information is needed to permit evaluation of the suitability of using either a finite element or lumped spring approach for soil/structure interaction analysis.
The specific information identified in the following sections should be included.
3.7.2   Seismic System Analysis This section should discuss the seismic system analyses applicable to Seismic Category I structures, systems, and components. The specific information identified in the following sections should be included.
3.7.2.1 Seismic Analysis Methods. The applicable methods of seismic analysis (e.g., modal analysis response spectra, modal analysis time history, equivalent static load) should be identified and described.
3.7.2.1   Seismic Analysis Methods. The applicable methods of seismic analysis (e.g., modal analysis response spectra, modal analysis time history, equivalent static load) should be identified and described. Descriptions (sketches) of typical mathematical models used to determine the response should be provided. Indicate how the dynamic system analysis method includes in the model consideration of foundation torsion, rocking, and translation. The method chosen for selection of significant modes and adequate number of masses or degrees of freedom should be specified.
Descriptions (sketches) of typical mathematical models used to determine the response should be provided.
The manner in which consideration is given in the seismic dynamic analysis to maximum relative displacement among supports should be indicated.     In addition, other significant effects that are accounted for in the dynamic 3-14
Indicate how the dynamic system analysis method includes in the model consideration of foundation torsion, rocking, and translation.
 
The method chosen for selection of significant modes and adequate number of masses or degrees of freedom should be specified.
Revision 3                                                       November 1978 seismic analysis (e.g., hydrodynamic effects and nonlinear response) should be indicated. If tests or empirical methods are used in lieu of analysis, the testing procedure, load levels, and acceptance bases should also be provided.
The manner in which consideration is given in the seismic dynamic analysis to maximum relative displacement among supports should be indicated.
3.7.2.2 Natural Frequencies and Response Loads (FSAR).
In addition, other significant effects that are accounted for in the dynamic 3-14 Revision 3 Revision 3 November 1978 seismic analysis (e.g., hydrodynamic effects and nonlinear response) should be indicated.
For the operating license review, significant natural frequencies and response loads determined by seismic system analyses should be provided for major Seismic Category I structures.     In addition, the response spectra at critical major Seismic Category I elevations and points of support should be specified.
If tests or empirical methods are used in lieu of analysis, the testing procedure, load levels, and acceptance bases should also be provided.
3.7.2.3 Procedure Used for Modeling. The criteria used for modeling in the seismic system analyses should and procedures be provided.
3.7.2.2 Natural Frequencies and Response Loads (FSAR). For the operating license review, significant natural frequencies and response loads determined by seismic system analyses should be provided for major Seismic Category I structures.
In addition, the response spectra at critical major Seismic Category I elevations and points of support should be specified.
3.7.2.3 Procedure Used for Modeling.
The criteria and procedures used for modeling in the seismic system analyses should be provided.
Include the criteria and bases used to determine whether a component or structure should be analyzed as part of a system analysis or independently as a subsystem.
Include the criteria and bases used to determine whether a component or structure should be analyzed as part of a system analysis or independently as a subsystem.
3.7.2.4 Soil/Structure Interaction.
3.7.2.4 Soil/Structure Interaction. As applicable, the methods of soil/structure interaction analysis used in the seismic system analysis and their bases should be provided. The following information should be included:   (1) the extent of embedment, (2) the depth of soil over and (3) the layering of the soil stratum. If the finite                     rock, element approach is used, the criteria for determining the location of the bottom boundary and side boundary should be specified.       The procedure by which strain dependent soil properties (e.g., damping and shear modulus) are incorpo rated in the analysis should also be specified. The material given in Section 3.7.1.4 may be referenced in this section.
As applicable, the methods of soil/structure interaction analysis used in the seismic system analysis and their bases should be provided.
If lumped spring methods are used, the parameters used in the analysis should be discussed. Describe the procedures by which strain-dependent soil properties, layering, and variation of soil properties are incorporated into the analysis. The suitability of a lumped spring method used for the particular site conditions should also be discussed.
The following information should be included:  
(1) the extent of embedment, (2) the depth of soil over rock, and (3) the layering of the soil stratum. If the finite element approach is used, the criteria for determining the location of the bottom boundary and side boundary should be specified.
The procedure by which strain dependent soil properties (e.g., damping and shear modulus) are incorpo rated in the analysis should also be specified.
The material given in Section 3.7.1.4 may be referenced in this section.
If lumped spring methods are used, the parameters used in the analysis should be discussed.
Describe the procedures by which strain-dependent soil properties, layering, and variation of soil properties are incorporated into the analysis.
The suitability of a lumped spring method used for the particular site conditions should also be discussed.
Any other methods used for soil/structure interaction analysis or the basis for not using soil/structure interaction analysis should be provided.
Any other methods used for soil/structure interaction analysis or the basis for not using soil/structure interaction analysis should be provided.
The procedures used to consider effects of adjacent structures on structural response in soil/structure interaction analysis should be provided.
The procedures used to consider effects of adjacent structural response in soil/structure interaction                 structures on analysis should be provided.
3.7.2.5 Development of Floor Response Spectra. The procedures for developing floor response spectra considering the three components of earthquake motion should be described.
3.7.2.5 Development of Floor Response Spectra.       The procedures for developing floor response spectra considering the three components of earthquake motion should be described. If a modal response spectrum method of analysis is used to develop floor response spectra, the basis for its conservatism and equivalence to a time history method should be provided.
If a modal response spectrum method of analysis is used to develop floor response spectra, the basis for its conservatism and equivalence to a time history method should be provided.
3.7.2.6 Three Components of Earthquake Motion. Indicate the extent tc which the procedures for considering the three components of earthquake 3-15
3.7.2.6 Three Components of Earthquake Motion. Indicate the extent tc which the procedures for considering the three components of earthquake 3-15 November 1978 motion in determining the seismic response of structures, systems, and components follow the recommendations of Regulatory Guide 1.92, "Combining Modal Responses and Spatial Components in Seismic Response Analysis." 3.7.2.7 Combination of Modal Responses.
 
When a response spectra method is used, a description of the procedure for combining modal responses (shears, moments, stresses, deflections, and accelerations) should be provided.
Revision 3                                                      November 1978 motion in determining the seismic response of structures, systems, and components follow the recommendations of Regulatory Guide 1.92, "Combining Modal Responses and Spatial Components in Seismic Response Analysis."
Indicate the extent to which the recommendations of Regulatory Guide 1.92 are followed.
3.7.2.7 Combination of Modal Responses. When a response spectra method is used, a description of the procedure for combining modal responses (shears, moments, stresses, deflections, and accelerations) should be provided. Indicate the extent to which the recommendations of Regulatory Guide 1.92 are followed.
3.7.2.8 Interaction of Non-Category I Structures with Seismic Cate gory I Structures.
3.7.2.8 Interaction of Non-Category I Structures with Seismic Cate gory I Structures. Provide the design criteria used to account for the seismic   motion of non-Category I structures or portions thereof in the seismic design of Seismic Category I structures or portions thereof. In addition, describe the design criteria that will be applied to ensure protection of Seismic Category I structures from the structural failure of non-Category I structures due to seismic effects.
Provide the design criteria used to account for the seismic motion of non-Category I structures or portions thereof in the seismic design of Seismic Category I structures or portions thereof. In addition, describe the design criteria that will be applied to ensure protection of Seismic Category I structures from the structural failure of non-Category I structures due to seismic effects.
3.7.2.9 Effects of Parameter Variations on Floor Response Spectra.
3.7.2.9 Effects of Parameter Variations on Floor Response Spectra.
The procedures that will be used to consider the effects of expected varia tions of structural properties, dampings, soil properties, and soil/structure interaction on floor response spectra (e.g., peak width and period coor dinates) and time histories should be described.
The procedures that will be used to consider the effects of expected varia tions of structural properties, dampings, soil properties, and soil/structure interaction on floor response spectra (e.g., peak width and period coor dinates) and time histories should be described.
3.7.2.10 Use of Constant Vertical Static Factors. Where applicable, identify and justify the application of constant static factors as vertical response loads for the seismic design of Seismic Category I structures, systems, and components in lieu of a vertical seismic-system dynamic analysis method. 3.7.2.11 Method Used to Account for Torsional Effects. The method used to consider the torsional effects in the seismic analysis of the Seismic Category I structures should be described.
3.7.2.10 Use of Constant Vertical Static Factors. Where applicable, identify and justify the application of constant static factors as vertical response loads for the seismic design of Seismic Category I structures, systems, and components in lieu of a vertical seismic-system dynamic analysis method.
Where applicable, discuss and justify the use of static factors or any other approximate method in lieu of a combined vertical, horizontal, and torsional system dynamic analysis to account for torsional accelerations in the seismic design of Seismic Category I structures.
3.7.2.11 Method Used to Account for Torsional Effects. The method used to consider the torsional effects in the seismic analysis of the Seismic Category I structures should be described. Where applicable, discuss and justify the use of static factors or any other approximate method in lieu of a combined vertical, horizontal, and torsional system dynamic analysis to account for torsional accelerations in the seismic design of Seismic Category I structures.
3.7.2.12 Comparison of Responses'SFSARQ.
3.7.2.12 Comparison of Responses'SFSARQ. For the operating license review where both modal response and time history methods are applied, the responses obtained from both methods at selected points in major Seismic Category I structures should be provided, together with a compar ative discussion of the responses.
For the operating license review where both modal response and time history methods are applied, the responses obtained from both methods at selected points in major Seismic Category I structures should be provided, together with a compar ative discussion of the responses.
3.7.2.13 Methods for Seismic Analysis of Dams.       A comprehensive description of the analytical methods and procedures that will be used for the seismic system analysis of Seismic Category I dams should be pro vided. The assumptions made, the boundary conditions used, and the proce dures by which strain-dependent soil properties are incorporated in the analysis should be provided.
3.7.2.13 Methods for Seismic Analysis of Dams. A comprehensive description of the analytical methods and procedures that will be used for the seismic system analysis of Seismic Category I dams should be pro vided. The assumptions made, the boundary conditions used, and the proce dures by which strain-dependent soil properties are incorporated in the analysis should be provided.3-16 Revision 3 Revision 3 November 1978 3.7.2.14 Determination of Seismic Category I Structure Overturning Moments. A description of the dynamic methods and procedures used to determine Seismic Category I structure overturning moments should be provided.
3-16
3.7.2.15 Analysis Procedure for Damping. The analysis procedure used to account for the damping in different elements of the model of a coupled system should be described.
 
3.7.3 Seismic Subsystem Analysis This section should discuss the seismic subsystem analyses appli cable to Seismic Category I structures, subsystems, and components.
Revision 3                                                   November 1978 3.7.2.14 Determination of Seismic Category I Structure Overturning Moments. A description of the dynamic methods and procedures used to determine Seismic Category I structure overturning moments should be provided.
The specific information identified in the following sections should be included.
3.7.2.15 Analysis Procedure for Damping. The analysis used to account for the damping in different elements of the procedure model of a coupled system should be described.
3.7.3   Seismic Subsystem Analysis This section should discuss the seismic subsystem analyses appli cable to Seismic Category I structures, subsystems, and components.
specific information identified in the following sections should The be included.
3.7.3.1 Seismic Analysis Methods. Information should be provided as requested in Section 3.7.2.1, but as applied to the Seismic Category I subsystems.
3.7.3.1 Seismic Analysis Methods. Information should be provided as requested in Section 3.7.2.1, but as applied to the Seismic Category I subsystems.
3.7.3.2 Determination of Number of Earthquake Cycles. Describe criteria or procedures that are used to determine the number of earth quake cycles during one seismic event. The maximum number of cycles for which applicable Seismic Category I structures, subsystems, and components are designed should be specified.
3.7.3.2 Determination of Number of Earthquake Cycles.       Describe criteria or procedures that are used to determine the number quake cycles during one seismic event. The maximum number of   of  earth cycles for which applicable Seismic Category I structures, subsystems, and components are designed should be specified.
3.7.3.3 Procedure Used for Modeling.
3.7.3.3 Procedure Used for Modeling. The criteria and procedures used for modeling for the seismic subsystem analysis should be provided.
The criteria and procedures used for modeling for the seismic subsystem analysis should be provided.
3.7.3.4 Basis for Selection of Frequencies. Where applicable, discuss the procedures and criteria used to separate the fundamental frequencies of components and equipment from the forcing frequencies of the support structures.
3.7.3.4 Basis for Selection of Frequencies.
3.7.3.5 Use of Equivalent Static Load Method of Analysis. The for the use of the equivalent static load method of analysis and         basis the proce dures used for determining the equivalent static loads should be provided.
Where applicable, discuss the procedures and criteria used to separate the fundamental frequencies of components and equipment from the forcing frequencies of the support structures.
3.7.3.6 Three Components of Earthquake Motion. Information be provided as requested in Section 3.7.2.6, but as applied to the should Seismic Category I subsystems.
3.7.3.5 Use of Equivalent Static Load Method of Analysis.
3.7.3.7 Combination of Modal Responses. Information should vided as requested in Section 3.7.2.7, but as applied to the Seismicbe pro Cate gory I subsystems.
The basis for the use of the equivalent static load method of analysis and the proce dures used for determining the equivalent static loads should be provided.
3.7.3.8 Analytical Procedures for Piping. The analytical dures applicable to seismic analysis piping should be described. proce Include the methods used to consider differential piping support movements different support points located within a structure and between           at structures.
3.7.3.6 Three Components of Earthquake Motion. Information should be provided as requested in Section 3.7.2.6, but as applied to the Seismic Category I subsystems.
3-17
3.7.3.7 Combination of Modal Responses.
 
Information should be pro vided as requested in Section 3.7.2.7, but as applied to the Seismic Cate gory I subsystems.
Revision 3                                                      November 1978 3.7.3.9 Multiply Supported Equipment Components with Distinct Inputs.
3.7.3.8 Analytical Procedures for Piping. The analytical proce dures applicable to seismic analysis piping should be described.
The criteria and procedures for seismic analysis of equipment and compo nents supported at different elevations within a building and between buildings with distinct inputs should be described.
Include the methods used to consider differential piping support movements at different support points located within a structure and between structures.
3-17 November 1978 3.7.3.9 Multiply Supported Equipment Components with Distinct Inputs. The criteria and procedures for seismic analysis of equipment and compo nents supported at different elevations within a building and between buildings with distinct inputs should be described.
3.7.3.10 Use of Constant Vertical Static Factors. Information should be provided as requested in Section 3.7.2.10, but as applied to the Seismic Category I subsystems.
3.7.3.10 Use of Constant Vertical Static Factors. Information should be provided as requested in Section 3.7.2.10, but as applied to the Seismic Category I subsystems.
3.7.3.11 Torsional Effects of Eccentric Masses. The criteria and procedures that will be employed to account for the torsional effects of valves and other eccentric masses (e.g., valve operators) in the seismic subsystem analyses should be provided.
3.7.3.11   Torsional Effects of Eccentric Masses. The criteria and procedures that will be employed to account for the torsional effects of valves and other eccentric masses (e.g., valve operators) in the seismic subsystem analyses should be provided.
3.7.3.12 Buried Seismic Category I Piping Systems and Tunnels.
3.7.3.12 Buried Seismic Category I Piping Systems and Tunnels.
For buried Seismic Category I piping and tunnels, describe the seismic criteria and methods for considering the compliance of soil media, the settlement due to the earthquake, and the differential movement at support points, penetrations, and entry points into other structures provided with anchors.
For buried Seismic Category I piping and tunnels, describe the seismic criteria and methods for considering the compliance of soil media, the settlement due to the earthquake, and the differential movement at support points, penetrations, and entry points into other structures provided with anchors.
3.7.3.13 Interaction of Other Piping with Seismic Category I Piping. The analysis procedures used to account for the seismic motion of non Category I piping systems in the seismic design of Seismic Category I piping should be described.
3.7.3.13 Interaction of Other Piping with Seismic Category I Piping.
3.7.3.14 Seismic Analyses for Reactor Internals.
The analysis procedures used to account for the seismic motion of non Category I piping systems in the seismic design of Seismic Category I piping should be described.
The seismic sub system analyses that will be used in establishing seismic design adequacy of the reactor internals, including fuel elements, control rod assemblies, and control rod drive mechanisms, should be described.
3.7.3.14 Seismic Analyses for Reactor Internals.     The seismic sub system analyses that will be used in establishing seismic design adequacy of the reactor internals, including fuel elements, control rod assemblies, and control rod drive mechanisms, should be described.       The following information should be included:
The following information should be included:  
: 1. Typical diagrams of dynamic mathematical modeling of the reactor internal structures to be used in the analysis,
: 1. Typical diagrams of dynamic mathematical modeling of the reactor internal structures to be used in the analysis, 2. Damping values and their justification, 3. A description of the methods and procedures that will be used to compute seismic responses, 4. A summary of the results of the dynamic seismic analysis for the operating license review. 3.7.3.15 Analysis Procedure for Damping. Information should be provided as requested in Section 3.7.2.15, but as applied to the Seismic Category I subsystems.
: 2. Damping values and their justification,
3-18 Revision 3 Revision 3 November 1978 3.7.4 Seismic Instrumentation 3.7.4.1 Comparison with Regulatory Guide 1.12. The proposed seismic instrumentation should be discussed and compared with the seismic instru mentation program recommended in Regulatory Guide 1.12, "Instrumentation for Earthquakes." The bases for elements of the proposed program that differ from Regulatory Guide 1.12 should be included.
: 3. A description of the methods and procedures that will be used to compute seismic responses,
: 4. A summary of the results of the dynamic seismic analysis for the operating license review.
3.7.3.15 Analysis Procedure for Damping.     Information should be provided as requested in Section 3.7.2.15, but as applied to the Seismic Category I subsystems.
3-18
 
Revision 3 November 1978 3.7.4   Seismic Instrumentation 3.7.4.1 Comparison with Regulatory Guide 1.12.
The proposed seismic instrumentation should be discussed and compared with the seismic instru mentation program recommended in Regulatory Guide 1.12, "Instrumentation for Earthquakes."     The bases for elements of the proposed program that differ from Regulatory Guide 1.12 should be included.
3.7.4.2 Location and Description of Instrumentation.
3.7.4.2 Location and Description of Instrumentation.
Seismic instru mentation such as triaxial peak accelerographs, triaxial time history accelerographs, and triaxial response spectrum recorders that will be installed in selected Seismic Category I structures and on selected Seismic Category I components should be described.
mentation such as triaxial peak accelerographs,                         Seismic instru triaxial time history accelerographs, and triaxial response spectrum recorders that will be installed in selected Seismic Category I structures and on selected Seismic Category I components should be described.           The bases for selection of these structures and components and the location of instrumentation, as well as the extent to which this instrumentation will be employed to verify the seismic analyses following a seismic event, should be specified.
The bases for selection of these structures and components and the location of instrumentation, as well as the extent to which this instrumentation will be employed to verify the seismic analyses following a seismic event, should be specified.
3.7.4.3 Control Room Operator Notification.           The provisions that will be used to inform the control room operator of the value of the peak acceleration level and the input response spectra values shortly after occurrence of an earthquake should be described.
3.7.4.3 Control Room Operator Notification.
The provisions that will be used to inform the control room operator of the value of the peak acceleration level and the input response spectra values shortly after occurrence of an earthquake should be described.
The bases for establish ing predetermined values for activating the readout of the seismic instru ment to the control room operator should be included.
The bases for establish ing predetermined values for activating the readout of the seismic instru ment to the control room operator should be included.
3.7.4.4 Comparison of Measured and Predicted Responses.
3.7.4.4 Comparison of Measured       and Predicted Responses.
Provide the criteria and procedures that will be used to cQmpare measured responses of Seismic Category I structures and selected components in the event of an earthquake with the results of the seismic system and subsystem analyses.
the criteria and procedures that will                                         Provide be used to cQmpare measured responses of Seismic Category I structures and       selected components in the event of an earthquake with the results of the       seismic system and subsystem analyses.
3.8 Design of Category I Structures 3.8.1 Concrete Containment This section should provide the following information on concrete containments and on concrete portions of steel/concrete containments:  
3.8   Design of Category I Structures 3.8.1     Concrete Containment This section should provide the following information on concrete containments and on concrete portions of steel/concrete containments:
: 1. The physical description.
: 1. The physical description.
: 2. The applicable design codes, standards, and specifications.
: 2. The applicable design codes, standards,     and specifications.
: 3. The loading criteria, including loads and load combinations.
: 3. The loading criteria, including loads and load combinations.
: 4. The design and analysis procedures.
: 4. The design and analysis procedures.
: 5. The structural acceptance criteria.
: 5. The structural acceptance criteria.
: 6. The materials, quality control programs, and special construction techniques.
: 6. The materials,     quality control programs,   and special construction techniques.
3-19 November 1978 7. The testing and inservice inspection programs.
3-19
3.8.1.1 Description of the Containment.
 
A physical description of the concrete containment or concrete portions of steel/concrete contain ments should be provided and supplemented with plan and section views sufficient to define the primary structural aspects and elements relied upon to perform the containment function.
Revision 3                                                    November 1978
The geometry of the concrete containment or concrete portions of steel/concrete containments, including plan views at various elevations and sections in at least two orthogonal directions should be provided.
: 7. The testing and inservice inspection programs.
The arrangement of the containment and the relationship and interaction of the shell with its surrounding struc tures and with its interior compartments and floors should be provided to establish the effect that these structures could have upon the design boundary conditions and expected structural behavior of the containment when subjected to design loads. General descriptive information should be provided for the following:  
3.8.1.1   Description of the Containment. A physical description of the concrete containment or concrete portions of steel/concrete contain ments should be provided and supplemented with plan and section views sufficient to define the primary structural aspects and elements relied upon to perform the containment function. The geometry of the concrete containment or concrete portions of steel/concrete containments, including plan views at various elevations and sections in at least two orthogonal directions should be provided. The arrangement of the containment and the relationship and interaction of the shell with its surrounding struc tures and with its interior compartments and floors should be provided to establish the effect that these structures could have upon the design boundary conditions and expected structural behavior of the containment when subjected to design loads.
: 1. The base foundation slab, including the main reinforcement, the floor liner plate and its anchorage and stiffening system, and the methods by which the interior structures are anchored through the liner plate and into the slab, if applicable.
General descriptive information should be provided for the following:
: 2. The cylindrical wall, including the main reinforcement and pre stressing tendons, if any; the wall liner plate and its anchorage and stiffening system; the major penetrations and the.reinforcement surround ing them, including the equipment and personnel hatches and major pipe penetrations; major structural attachments to the wall which penetrate the liner plate, such as beam seats, pipe restraints, and crane brackets; and external supports, if any, attached to the wall to support external structures such as enclosure buildings.
: 1. The base foundation slab, including the main reinforcement, the floor liner plate and its anchorage and stiffening system, and the methods by which the interior structures are anchored through the liner plate and into the slab, if applicable.
: 3. The dome and the ring girder, if any, including the main rein forcement and prestressing tendons; the liner plate and its anchorage and stiffening system; and any major attachments to the liner plate made from the inside. 4. Steel components of concrete containments that resist pressure and are not backed by structural concrete should be discussed in Section 3.8.2. 3.8.1.2 Applicable Codes, Standards, and Specifications.
: 2. The cylindrical wall, including the main reinforcement and pre stressing tendons, if any; the wall liner plate and its anchorage and stiffening system; the major penetrations and the.reinforcement surround ing them, including the equipment and personnel hatches and major pipe penetrations; major structural attachments to the wall which penetrate the liner plate, such as beam seats, pipe restraints, and crane brackets; and external supports, if any, attached to the wall to support external structures such as enclosure buildings.
Informa tion pertaining to design codes, standards, specifications, regulations, general design criteria, regulatory guides, and other industry standards that are used in the design, fabrication, construction, testing, and inservice inspection of the containment should be provided.
: 3. The dome and the ring girder, if any, including the main rein forcement and prestressing tendons; the liner plate and its anchorage and stiffening system; and any major attachments to the liner plate made from the inside.
The specific edition, date, or addenda of each document should be identified.
: 4. Steel components of concrete containments that resist pressure and are not backed by structural concrete should be discussed in Section 3.8.2.
3.8.1.3 Loads and Load Combinations.
3.8.1.2 Applicable Codes, Standards, and Specifications. Informa tion pertaining to design codes, standards, specifications, regulations, general design criteria, regulatory guides, and other industry standards that are used in the design, fabrication, construction, testing, and inservice inspection of the containment should be provided. The specific edition, date, or addenda of each document should be identified.
The loads and load combinations that are utilized in the design of the containment should be discussed, with emphasis on the extent of compliance with Article CC-3000 of the 3-20 Revision 3 Revision 3 November 1978 ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section III, Division 2, "Code for Concrete Reactor Vessels and Containments," particularly with respect to the following:  
3.8.1.3 Loads and Load Combinations. The loads and load combinations that are utilized in the design of the containment should be discussed, with emphasis on the extent of compliance with Article CC-3000 of the 3-20
: 1. Those loads encountered during preoperational testing.
 
: 2. Those loads encountered during normal plant startup, operation, and shutdown, including dead loads, live loads, thermal loads due to operating temperature, hydrostatic loads such as those present in pressure-suppression containments utilizing water, and localized transient pressure loads induced by actuation of safety relief valves in BWRs. 3. Those loads that would be sustained in the event of severe environ mental conditions, including those that would be induced by the design wind and the Operating Basis Earthquake.
Revision 3                                                       November 1978 ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section III, Division 2, "Code for Concrete Reactor Vessels and Containments," particularly with respect to the following:
: 4. Those loads that would be sustained during extreme environmental conditions, including those that would be induced by the Design Basis Tornado and the Safe Shutdown Earthquake.
: 1. Those loads encountered during preoperational testing.
: 5. Those loads that would be sustained during abnormal plant condi tions, including the design basis loss-of-coolant accident (LOCA). Loads generated by other postulated accidents involving various high-energy pipe ruptures should also be discussed.
: 2. Those loads encountered during normal plant startup, and shutdown, including dead loads, live loads, thermal               operation, loads due to operating temperature, hydrostatic loads such as those present in pressure-suppression containments utilizing water, and localized transient pressure loads induced by actuation of safety relief valves in BWRs.
Loads on the containment induced by such accidents should include associated temperature effects and pressure and localized loads such as jet impingement and associated missile impact. Also, external pressure loads generated by events inside or outside the containment should be discussed.
: 3. Those loads that would be sustained in the event of mental conditions, including those that would be induced severe environ by the design wind and the Operating Basis Earthquake.
: 4. Those loads that would be sustained during extreme environmental conditions, including those that would be induced by the Design Basis Tornado and the Safe Shutdown Earthquake.
: 5. Those loads that would be sustained during abnormal plant condi tions, including the design basis loss-of-coolant accident (LOCA). Loads generated by other postulated accidents involving various high-energy pipe ruptures should also be discussed. Loads on the containment induced by such accidents should include associated temperature effects and pressure and localized loads such as jet impingement and associated missile impact. Also, external pressure loads generated by events inside or outside the containment should be discussed.
: 6. If applicable, those loads that would be encountered after abnormal plant conditions, including flooding of the containment subsequent to a loss-of-coolant accident for the purpose of fuel recovery.
: 6. If applicable, those loads that would be encountered after abnormal plant conditions, including flooding of the containment subsequent to a loss-of-coolant accident for the purpose of fuel recovery.
The various combinations of the above loads that should be discussed include testing loads, normal operating loads, normal operating loads with severe environmental loads, normal operating loads with extreme environmental loads, normal operating loads with abnormal loads, normal operating loads with severe environmental and abnormal loads, normal operating loads with extreme environmental and abnormal loads, and post-LOCA flooding loads with severe environmental loads, if applicable.
The various combinations of the above loads that should be discussed include testing loads, normal operating loads, normal operating loads with severe environmental loads, normal operating loads with extreme environmental loads, normal operating loads with abnormal loads, normal operating loads with severe environmental and abnormal loads, normal operating loads with extreme environmental and abnormal loads, and post-LOCA flooding loads with severe environmental loads, if applicable.
The loads and load combinations described above are generally appli cable to most containments.
The loads and load combinations described above are generally appli cable to most containments. Other site-related or plant-related design loads may also be applicable. Such loads include those induced by floods, potential aircraft crashes, explosive hazards in proximity to the site, and missiles generated from activities of nearby military installations or from plant-related accidents such as turbine failures.
Other site-related or plant-related design loads may also be applicable.
Such loads include those induced by floods, potential aircraft crashes, explosive hazards in proximity to the site, and missiles generated from activities of nearby military installations or from plant-related accidents such as turbine failures.
As appropriate, these loads and load combinations should be discussed.
As appropriate, these loads and load combinations should be discussed.
3.8.1.4 Design and Analysis Procedures.
3.8.1.4 Design and Analysis Procedures. The design and analysis procedures utilized for the containment should be described, with emphasis 3-21
The design and analysis procedures utilized for the containment should be described, with emphasis 3-21 November 1978 on the extent of compliance with Article CC-3000 of the ASME Code, Sec tion III, Division 2. The assumptions made on the boundary conditions should be described.
 
The treatment of loads, including those that may be nonaxisymmetric, localized, or transient, should be provided.
Revision 3                                                            November 1978 on the extent of compliance with Article CC-3000 of the ASME Code, Sec tion III, Division 2.         The assumptions made on the boundary conditions should be described.         The treatment of loads, including those that may be nonaxisymmetric, localized, or transient, should be provided.               The manner     in which   creep,   shrinkage,   and cracking   of the concrete are addressed in the analysis and design should be described.             Computer pro grams utilized should be referenced to permit identification with avail able published programs.           Proprietary computer programs should be described in sufficient detail to establish the applicability of the pro grams and the measures taken to validate the programs with solutions derived from other acceptable programs or with solutions of classical problems.     The treatment of the effects of tangential (membrane) shears should be discussed.         Information on the evaluation of the effects of expected variation in assumptions and material properties on the analysis results should be provided.           The method of analyzing large thickened penetration regions and their effect on the containment behavior should be described.       The analysis and design procedures for the liner plate and its anchorage system should be described.
The manner in which creep, shrinkage, and cracking of the concrete are addressed in the analysis and design should be described.
3.8.1.5 Structural Acceptance Criteria.           The acceptance criteria relating stresses, strains, gross deformations, and other parameters that identify quantitatively the margins of safety should be specified, with emphasis on the extent of compliance with Article CC-3000 of the ASME Code, Section III, Division 2.         The information provided should address the containment as an entire structure, and it should also address the margins of safety related to the major important local areas of the con tainment, including openings, hatch penetrations, anchorage zones, and other areas important to the safety function.             The criteria addressing the various loading combinations       should be presented   in terms of allowable limits   for at least the following major parameters:
Computer pro grams utilized should be referenced to permit identification with avail able published programs.
: 1. Compressive stresses in concrete, including membrane,         membrane plus bending, and localized stresses.
Proprietary computer programs should be described in sufficient detail to establish the applicability of the pro grams and the measures taken to validate the programs with solutions derived from other acceptable programs or with solutions of classical problems.
: 2. Shear stresses in concrete.
The treatment of the effects of tangential (membrane) shears should be discussed.
: 3. Tensile stresses in reinforcement.
Information on the evaluation of the effects of expected variation in assumptions and material properties on the analysis results should be provided.
: 4. Tensile stresses in prestressing tendons.
The method of analyzing large thickened penetration regions and their effect on the containment behavior should be described.
: 5. Tensile or compressive stress/strain limits in the liner plate, including membrane and membrane plus bending.
The analysis and design procedures for the liner plate and its anchorage system should be described.
: 6. Force/displacement limits in the liner plate anchors,       including those induced by strains in the adjacent concrete.
3.8.1.5 Structural Acceptance Criteria.
3.8.1.6 Materials, Quality Control, and Special Construction Tech niques. The materials that are used in the construction of the containment should be identified, with emphasis on the extent of compliance with Article CC-2000 of the ASME Code, Section III, Division 2.               A summary of the 3-22
The acceptance criteria relating stresses, strains, gross deformations, and other parameters that identify quantitatively the margins of safety should be specified, with emphasis on the extent of compliance with Article CC-3000 of the ASME Code, Section III, Division 2. The information provided should address the containment as an entire structure, and it should also address the margins of safety related to the major important local areas of the con tainment, including openings, hatch penetrations, anchorage zones, and other areas important to the safety function.
 
The criteria addressing the various loading combinations should be presented in terms of allowable limits for at least the following major parameters:  
Rpvi*inn  R Revision q                                                           November 1978 engineering properties of the materials should be presented.       Among the major materials of construction that should be indicated are the following:
: 1. Compressive stresses in concrete, including membrane, membrane plus bending, and localized stresses.
: 1. The concrete ingredients,
: 2. Shear stresses in concrete.
: 2. The reinforcing bars and splices,
: 3. Tensile stresses in reinforcement.
: 3. The prestressing system,
: 4. Tensile stresses in prestressing tendons.
: 4. The liner plate.,
: 5. Tensile or compressive stress/strain limits in the liner plate, including membrane and membrane plus bending.
: 5. The liner plate anchors and associated hardware,
: 6. Force/displacement limits in the liner plate anchors, including those induced by strains in the adjacent concrete.
: 6. The structural steel used for embedments, such as beam seats and crane brackets, and
3.8.1.6 Materials, Quality Control, and Special Construction Tech niques. The materials that are used in the construction of the containment should be identified, with emphasis on the extent of compliance with Article CC-2000 of the ASME Code, Section III, Division 2. A summary of the 3-22 Revision 3 Revision q November 1978 engineering properties of the materials should be presented.
: 7. The corrosion-retarding   compounds   used for the prestressing tendons.
Among the major materials of construction that should be indicated are the following:  
The quality control program that is proposed for the fabrication and construction of the containment should be described with emphasis on the extent of compliance with Articles CC-4000 and CC-5000 of the ASME Code, Section III,     Division 2. The description should show the extent to which the quality control program covers the examination of materials, including tests to determine the physical properties of concrete, reinforc ing steel, mechanical splices, the liner plate and its anchors, and the prestressing system, if any; placement of concrete; and erection tolerances of the liner plate, reinforcement, and prestressing system.
: 1. The concrete ingredients, 2. The reinforcing bars and splices, 3. The prestressing system, 4. The liner plate., 5. The liner plate anchors and associated hardware, 6. The structural steel used for embedments, such as beam seats and crane brackets, and 7. The corrosion-retarding compounds used for the prestressing tendons.
Special, new, or unique construction techniques, if proposed, should be described, and the                     such as slip forming, effects that these techniques may have on the structural integrity of the completed containment should be discussed.
The quality control program that is proposed for the fabrication and construction of the containment should be described with emphasis on the extent of compliance with Articles CC-4000 and CC-5000 of the ASME Code, Section III, Division 2. The description should show the extent to which the quality control program covers the examination of materials, including tests to determine the physical properties of concrete, reinforc ing steel, mechanical splices, the liner plate and its anchors, and the prestressing system, if any; placement of concrete; and erection tolerances of the liner plate, reinforcement, and prestressing system. Special, new, or unique construction techniques, such as slip forming, if proposed, should be described, and the effects that these techniques may have on the structural integrity of the completed containment should be discussed.
The detailed program for the use of grouted tendons for the contain ment structure, if proposed, should be completely described in the PSAR and should indicate the extent to which the recommendations of Regulatory Guide 1.107, "Qualifications for Cement Grouting in Containment Structures," are followed.               for Prestressing Tendons At the time of submittal of the FSAR, or earlier if desirable, information on the following subjects should be included:
The detailed program for the use of grouted tendons for the contain ment structure, if proposed, should be completely described in the PSAR and should indicate the extent to which the recommendations of Regulatory Guide 1.107, "Qualifications for Cement Grouting for Prestressing Tendons in Containment Structures," are followed.
: 1. Deviations in the materials and methods from those proposed in the PSAR.
At the time of submittal of the FSAR, or earlier if desirable, information on the following subjects should be included:  
: 2. Grout properties from tests on the grout.
: 1. Deviations in the materials and methods from those proposed in the PSAR. 2. Grout properties from tests on the grout. 3. Test results demonstrating the suitability of the sheathing and splices, effective grouting of curved and vertical tendons, and accept able grout under all bearing plate configurations.
: 3. Test results demonstrating the suitability and splices, effective grouting of curved                         of the sheathing and vertical tendons, and accept able grout under all bearing plate configurations.
3-23R November 1978 3.8.1.7 Testing and Inservice Inspection Requirements.
3-23
The testing and inservice inspection program for the containment should be described with emphasis on the extent of compliance with Articles CC-6000 and CC-9000 of the ASME Code, Section III, Division 2, and the extent to which the recommendations of Regulatory Guides 1.18, "Structural Acceptance Test for Concrete Primary Reactor Containments;" 1.35, "Inservice Inspec tion of Ungrouted Tendons in Prestressed Concrete Containment Structures;" and 1.90, "Inservice Inspection of Prestressed Concrete Containment Struc tures with Grouted Tendons," are followed.
 
Discussion of the initial structural integrity testing, as well as those tests related to the inservice inspection programs and requirements, should be provided.
Revision 3                                                          November 1978 3.8.1.7 Testing and Inservice Inspection Requirements.         The testing and inservice     inspection program for the containment should be described with emphasis on the extent of compliance with Articles CC-6000 and CC-9000 of the ASME Code, Section III, Division 2, and the extent to which the recommendations of Regulatory Guides 1.18, "Structural Acceptance Test for Concrete Primary Reactor Containments;" 1.35, "Inservice Inspec tion of Ungrouted Tendons in Prestressed Concrete Containment Structures;"
Infor mation pertaining to the incorporation of inservice inspection programs into the Technical Specifications should be provided.
and 1.90, "Inservice Inspection of Prestressed Concrete Containment Struc tures with Grouted Tendons," are followed.           Discussion of the initial structural integrity testing, as well as those tests related to the inservice inspection programs and requirements, should be provided. Infor mation pertaining to the incorporation of inservice inspection programs into the Technical Specifications should be provided. The objectives of the tests, as well as the acceptance criteria for the results, should be defined.     If new or previously untried design approaches are used, the extent of additional testing and inservice inspection should be discussed.
The objectives of the tests, as well as the acceptance criteria for the results, should be defined. If new or previously untried design approaches are used, the extent of additional testing and inservice inspection should be discussed.
3.8.2   Steel Containment This section should provide information similar to that requested in Section 3.8.1, but for steel containments and for Class MC (see ASME Code, Section III, Subsection NE) vessels, parts, or appurtenances of steel or concrete containments.       In particular, the information described below should be provided.
3.8.2 Steel Containment This section should provide information similar to that requested in Section 3.8.1, but for steel containments and for Class MC (see ASME Code, Section III, Subsection NE) vessels, parts, or appurtenances of steel or concrete containments.
3.8.2.1 Description of the Containment.       A physical description of the steel containment and other Class       MC components should be provided and supplemented   with plan and section views   sufficient to define the primary structural aspects and elements relied upon to perform the con tainment or other Class MC component function.
In particular, the information described below should be provided.
The geometry of the containment or component, including plan views at various elevations and sections in at least two orthogonal directions, should be provided. The arrangement of the containment shell, particu larly the relationship and interaction of the shell with its surrounding shield building and with its interior compartments and floors, should be provided to establish the effect that these structures could have upon the design boundary conditions and expected behavior of the shell when subjected to the design loads.
3.8.2.1 Description of the Containment.
General information related to cylindrical containment shells should include the following:
A physical description of the steel containment and other Class MC components should be provided and supplemented with plan and section views sufficient to define the primary structural aspects and elements relied upon to perform the con tainment or other Class MC component function.
: 1. The foundation of the steel containment.
The geometry of the containment or component, including plan views at various elevations and sections in at least two orthogonal directions, should be provided.
: a. If the bottom of the steel containment is continuous through an inverted dome, the method by which this inverted dome and its supports are anchored to the concrete foundation should be described. The founda tion, however, should be described in Section 3.8.5.
The arrangement of the containment shell, particu larly the relationship and interaction of the shell with its surrounding shield building and with its interior compartments and floors, should be provided to establish the effect that these structures could have upon the design boundary conditions and expected behavior of the shell when subjected to the design loads. General information related to cylindrical containment shells should include the following:  
3-24
: 1. The foundation of the steel containment.
 
: a. If the bottom of the steel containment is continuous through an inverted dome, the method by which this inverted dome and its supports are anchored to the concrete foundation should be described.
Revision 3                                                   November 1978
The founda tion, however, should be described in Section 3.8.5.3-24 Revision 3 November 1978 b. If the bottom of the steel containment is not continuous, and where a concrete base slab covered with a liner plate is used for a foundation, the method of anchorage of the steel shell cylindrical walls in the concrete base slab, particularly the connection between the floor liner plate and the steel shell, should be described.
: b. If the bottom of the steel containment is not continuous, and where a concrete base slab covered with a liner plate is used for a foundation, the method of anchorage of the steel shell cylindrical walls in the concrete base slab, particularly the connection between the floor liner plate and the steel shell, should be described. The concrete foundation, however, should be described in Section 3.8.1.
The concrete foundation, however, should be described in Section 3.8.1. 2. The cylindrical portion of the shell, including major structural attachments, such as beam seats, pipe restraints, crane brackets, and shell stiffeners, if any, in the hoop and vertical directions.
: 2. The cylindrical portion of the shell, including major structural attachments, such as beam seats, pipe restraints, crane brackets, and shell stiffeners, if any, in the hoop and vertical directions.
: 3. The dome of the steel shell, including any reinforcement at the dome/wall junction, penetrations or attachments on the inside such as supports for containment spray piping, and any stiffening of the dome. 4. Major penetrations of steel or concrete containments, or por tions thereof, in particular, portions of the penetrations that are intended to resist pressure but are not backed by concrete, including sleeved and unsleeved piping penetrations, mechanical systems penetra tions such as fuel transfer tubes, electrical penetrations, and access openings such as the equipment hatch and personnel locks. Similar information should be provided for containments that are not of the cylindrical type. 3.8.2.2 Applicable Codes, Standards, and Specifications.
: 3. The dome of the steel shell, including any reinforcement at the dome/wall junction, penetrations or attachments on the inside such as supports for containment spray piping, and any stiffening of the dome.
This sec tion should provide information similar to that requested in Section 3.8.1.2 for concrete containment but as applicable to steel containments or other Class MC components.
: 4. Major penetrations of steel or concrete containments, or por tions thereof, in particular, portions of the penetrations that are intended to resist pressure but are not backed by concrete, including sleeved and unsleeved piping penetrations, mechanical systems penetra tions such as fuel transfer tubes, electrical penetrations, and access openings such as the equipment hatch and personnel locks.
3.8.2.3 Loads and Load Combinations.
Similar information should be provided for containments that are not of the cylindrical type.
The loads used in the design of the steel containment or other Class MC components should be specified with emphasis on the extent of compliance with Article NE-3000 of the ASME Code, Section III, Division 1, and the extent to which the recommenda tions of Regulatory Guide 1.57, "Design Limits and Loading Combinations for Metal Primary Reactor Containment System Components," are followed.
3.8.2.2 Applicable Codes, Standards, and Specifications. This sec tion should provide information similar to that requested in Section 3.8.1.2 for concrete containment but as applicable to steel containments or other Class MC components.
The items listed below should be included.
3.8.2.3 Loads and Load Combinations. The loads used in the design of the steel containment or other Class MC components should be specified with emphasis on the extent of compliance with Article NE-3000 of the ASME Code, Section III, Division 1, and the extent to which the recommenda tions of Regulatory Guide 1.57, "Design Limits and Loading Combinations for Metal Primary Reactor Containment System Components," are followed.
: 1. Those loads encountered during preoperational testing.
The items listed below should be included.
: 2. Those loads encountered during normal plant startup, operation, and shutdown, including dead loads, live loads, thermal loads due to operating temperature, hydrostatic loads such as those present in pressure suppression containments utilizing water, and localized transient pressure loads such as those induced by actuation of safety relief valves in BWRs. 3. Those loads that would be sustained in the event of severe environ mental conditions, including those that would be induced by the design wind (if the containment is not protected by a shield building) and the Operating Basis Earthquake.
: 1. Those loads encountered during preoperational testing.
3-25 Revision 3 November 1978 4. Those loads that would be sustained in the event of extreme environ mental conditions, including those that would be induced by the Design Basis Tornado (if the containment is not protected by a shield building) and the Safe Shutdown Earthquake.
: 2. Those loads encountered during normal plant startup, operation, and shutdown, including dead loads, live loads, thermal loads due to operating temperature, hydrostatic loads such as those present in pressure suppression containments utilizing water, and localized transient pressure loads such as those induced by actuation of safety relief valves in BWRs.
: 3. Those loads that would be sustained in the event of severe environ mental conditions, including those that would be induced by the design wind (if the containment is not protected by a shield building) and the Operating Basis Earthquake.
3-25
 
Revision 3                                                   November 1978
: 4. Those loads that would be sustained in the event of extreme environ mental conditions, including those that would be induced by the Design Basis Tornado (if the containment is not protected by a shield building) and the Safe Shutdown Earthquake.
: 5. Those loads that would be sustained in the event of abnormal plant conditions, including the design basis loss-of-coolant accident.
: 5. Those loads that would be sustained in the event of abnormal plant conditions, including the design basis loss-of-coolant accident.
Loads generated by other postulated accidents involving various high energy pipe ruptures should also be discussed.
Loads generated by other postulated accidents involving various high energy pipe ruptures should also be discussed. Loads induced on the con tainment by such accidents should include associated temperature effects, pressures, and possible localized impact loads such as jet impingement and associated missile impact. Also, external pressure loads generated by events inside or outside the containment should be discussed.
Loads induced on the con tainment by such accidents should include associated temperature effects, pressures, and possible localized impact loads such as jet impingement and associated missile impact. Also, external pressure loads generated by events inside or outside the containment should be discussed.
: 6. If applicable, those loads that would be encountered, after abnormal plant conditions, including flooding of the containment sub sequent to a postulated loss-of-coolant accident for the purpose of fuel recovery.
: 6. If applicable, those loads that would be encountered, after abnormal plant conditions, including flooding of the containment sub sequent to a postulated loss-of-coolant accident for the purpose of fuel recovery.
The various combinations of the above loads that should be discussed include the following:
The various combinations of the above loads that should be discussed include the following: testing loads, normal operating loads, normal operating loads with severe environmental loads, normal operating loads with severe environmental loads and abnormal loads, normal operating loads with extreme environmental loads and abnormal loads, and post-LOCA flooding loads with severe environmental loads, if applicable.
testing loads, normal operating loads, normal operating loads with severe environmental loads, normal operating loads with severe environmental loads and abnormal loads, normal operating loads with extreme environmental loads and abnormal loads, and post-LOCA flooding loads with severe environmental loads, if applicable.
Unless the steel containment is protected by a shield building, other site-related or plant-related design loads may also be applicable, as explained in Section 3.8.1.3, and should be addressed accordingly.
Unless the steel containment is protected by a shield building, other site-related or plant-related design loads may also be applicable, as explained in Section 3.8.1.3, and should be addressed accordingly.
3.8.2.4 Design and Analysis Procedures.
3.8.2.4 Design and Analysis Procedures. The procedures that will be used in the design and analysis of the steel containment should be described, with emphasis on the extent of compliance with Subsection NE of the ASME Code, Section III, Division 1. In particular, the following subjects should be discussed:     (1) the manner in which local buckling effects are treated, (2) the expected behavior under loads, including loads that may be nonaxisymmetric and localized, and (3) the computer programs utilized. These programs should be referenced to permit identi fication with available published programs. Proprietary computer programs should be described in sufficient detail to establish the applicability of the programs and the measures taken to validate the programs with solutions derived from other acceptable programs or with solutions of classical problems.
The procedures that will be used in the design and analysis of the steel containment should be described, with emphasis on the extent of compliance with Subsection NE of the ASME Code, Section III, Division 1. In particular, the following subjects should be discussed:  
3.8.2.5 Structural Acceptance Criteria. The acceptance criteria related to allowable stresses and other response characteristics that identify quantitatively the structural behavior of the containment should be specified with emphasis on the extent of compliance with Subsection NE of the ASME Code, Section III, Division 1, and the extent to which the recommendations of Regulatory Guide 1.57 are followed. The criteria 3-26
(1) the manner in which local buckling effects are treated, (2) the expected behavior under loads, including loads that may be nonaxisymmetric and localized, and (3) the computer programs utilized.
 
These programs should be referenced to permit identi fication with available published programs.
Revision 3                                                     November 1978 addressing the various loading combinations specified should be presented in terms of allowable limits for at least the following major parameters:
Proprietary computer programs should be described in sufficient detail to establish the applicability of the programs and the measures taken to validate the programs with solutions derived from other acceptable programs or with solutions of classical problems.
: 1. Primary stresses, including general membrane,   local membrane, and bending plus local membrane stresses.
3.8.2.5 Structural Acceptance Criteria.
: 2. Primary and secondary stresses.
The acceptance criteria related to allowable stresses and other response characteristics that identify quantitatively the structural behavior of the containment should be specified with emphasis on the extent of compliance with Subsection NE of the ASME Code, Section III, Division 1, and the extent to which the recommendations of Regulatory Guide 1.57 are followed.
: 3. Peak stresses.
The criteria 3-26 Revision 3 November 1978 addressing the various loading combinations specified should be presented in terms of allowable limits for at least the following major parameters:  
: 1. Primary stresses, including general membrane, local membrane, and bending plus local membrane stresses.
: 2. Primary and secondary stresses.
: 3. Peak stresses.
: 4. Buckling criteria.
: 4. Buckling criteria.
3.8.2.6 Materials, Quality Control, and Special Construction Tech niques. The materials that are to be used in the construction of the steel containment should be identified with emphasis on the extent of compliance with Article NE-2000 of Subsection NE of the ASME Code, Sec tion III, Division 1. Among the major materials that should be identi fied are the following:  
3.8.2.6 Materials, Quality Control, and Special Construction Tech niques. The materials that are to be used in the construction of the steel containment should be identified with emphasis on the extent of compliance with Article NE-2000 of Subsection NE of the ASME Code, Sec tion III, Division 1. Among the major materials that should be identi fied are the following:
: 1. Steel plates used as shell components.
: 1. Steel plates used as shell components.
: 2. Structural steel shapes used for stiffeners, beam seats, and crane brackets.
: 2. Structural steel   shapes used for stiffeners, beam seats, and crane brackets. Corrosion protection procedures should be described.
Corrosion protection procedures should be described.
The quality control program that is proposed for the fabrication and construction of the containment should be described with emphasis on the extent of compliance with Article NE-5000 of the ASME Code, Section III, Division 1, including the following:
The quality control program that is proposed for the fabrication and construction of the containment should be described with emphasis on the extent of compliance with Article NE-5000 of the ASME Code, Section III, Division 1, including the following:  
: 1. Nondestructive examination of the materials,   including tests to determine their physical properties.
: 1. Nondestructive examination of the materials, including tests to determine their physical properties.
: 2. Welding procedures.
: 2. Welding procedures.
: 3. Erection tolerances.
: 3. Erection tolerances.
Special construction techniques, if proposed, should be described, and potential effects on the structural integrity of the completed con tainment should be discussed.
Special construction techniques, if proposed, should be described, and potential effects on the structural integrity of the completed con tainment should be discussed.
3.8.2.7 Testing and Inservice Inspection Requirements.
3.8.2.7 Testing and Inservice Inspection Requirements.     The testing and inservice inspection programs for the containment should be described with emphasis on the extent of compliance with Article NE-6000 of Sub section NE of the ASME Code, Section HI, Division 1. A discussion of the proposed initial structural testing, including the objectives of the test and the acceptance criteria for the results, should be provided.
The testing and inservice inspection programs for the containment should be described with emphasis on the extent of compliance with Article NE-6000 of Sub section NE of the ASME Code, Section HI, Division 1. A discussion of the proposed initial structural testing, including the objectives of the test and the acceptance criteria for the results, should be provided.
If new or previously untried design approaches are used, the extent of additional testing and inservice inspection should be discussed.         The structural integrity testing criteria for components of the containment such as personnel and equipment locks should be provided. Test program 3-27
If new or previously untried design approaches are used, the extent of additional testing and inservice inspection should be discussed.
 
The structural integrity testing criteria for components of the containment such as personnel and equipment locks should be provided.
Revision 3                                                     November 1978 criteria for any other components that are relied upon for containment integrity should be submitted. Programs for inservice inspection in areas subject to corrosion should be provided.
Test program 3-27 Revision 3 Revision 3 November 1978 criteria for any other components that are relied upon for containment integrity should be submitted.
3.8.3   Concrete and Steel Internal Structures of Steel or Concrete Con tai nments This section should provide information similar to that requested in Section 3.8.1, but for internal structures of the containment.         In particular, the information described below should be provided.
Programs for inservice inspection in areas subject to corrosion should be provided.
3.8.3.1 Description of the Internal Structures. Descriptive informa tion, including plan and section views of the various internal structures, should be provided to define the primary structural aspects and elements relied upon to perform the safety-related functions of these structures.
3.8.3 Concrete and Steel Internal Structures of Steel or Concrete Con tai nments This section should provide information similar to that requested in Section 3.8.1, but for internal structures of the containment.
General arrangement diagrams and principal features of major internal structures should be provided.       Among the major structures that should be described are:
In particular, the information described below should be provided.
: 1. For PWR dry containments:
3.8.3.1 Description of the Internal Structures.
: a. Reactor support system.
Descriptive informa tion, including plan and section views of the various internal structures, should be provided to define the primary structural aspects and elements relied upon to perform the safety-related functions of these structures.
: b. Steam generator support system.
General arrangement diagrams and principal features of major internal structures should be provided.
: c. Reactor coolant pump support system.
Among the major structures that should be described are: 1. For PWR dry containments:  
: d. Primary shield wall and reactor cavity.
: a. Reactor support system. b. Steam generator support system. c. Reactor coolant pump support system. d. Primary shield wall and reactor cavity. e. Secondary shield walls. f. Other major interior structures, as appropriate, and including the pressurizer supports, the refueling pool walls, the operating floor, intermediate floors, and the polar crane supporting elements.
: e. Secondary shield walls.
: 2. For PWR ice-condenser containments:  
: f. Other major interior structures, as appropriate, and including the pressurizer supports, the refueling pool walls, the operating floor, intermediate floors, and the polar crane supporting elements.
: a. All structures listed in item 1 above, as appropriate.
: 2. For PWR ice-condenser containments:
: b. The divider-barrier.
: a. All structures listed in item 1 above, as appropriate.
: c. The ice-condenser elements.
: b. The divider-barrier.
: 3. For BWR containments:  
: c. The ice-condenser elements.
: 3. For BWR containments:
: a. Drywell structure and appurtenances such as the drywell head and major penetrations.
: a. Drywell structure and appurtenances such as the drywell head and major penetrations.
3-28 November 1978 b. Weir wall. c. Refueling pool and operating floor. d. Reactor and recirculation pump and motor support system. e. Reactor pedestal.
3-28
: f. Reactor shield wall. g. Other major interior structures, as appropriate, including the various platforms inside and outside the drywell and the polar crane supporting elements.
 
3.8.3.2 Applicable Codes, Standards, and Specifications.
Revision 3                                                    November 1978
This sec tion should provide information similar to that requested in Section 3.8.1.2 for concrete containments, but as applicable to the internal struc tures of the containment as listed in Section 3.8.3.1.
: b. Weir wall.
3.8.3.3 Loads and Load Combinations.
: c. Refueling pool and operating floor.
Among the loads used in the design of the containment internal structures listed in Section 3.8.3.1 that should be specified are the following:
: d. Reactor and recirculation pump and motor support system.
I. Loads encountered during normal plant startup, operation, and shutdown, including dead loads, live loads, thermal loads due to operating temperature, and hydrostatic loads such as those present tn refueling and pressure-suppression pools. 2. Loads that would be sustained in the event of severe environ mental conditions, including those induced by the Operating Basis Earthquake.
: e. Reactor pedestal.
: 3. Loads that would be sustained in the event of extreme environ mental conditions, including those that would be induced by the Safe Shut down Earthquake.
: f. Reactor shield wall.
: 4. Loads that would be sustained in the event of abnormal plant conditions, including the design basis loss-of-coolant accident and other high-energy pipe rupture accidents.
: g. Other major interior structures, as appropriate, including the various platforms inside and outside the drywell and the polar crane supporting elements.
Loads that should be discussed include compartment pressures, jet impingement and reaction forces due to pipe rupture, elevated temperatures, impact forces of associated missiles and whipping pipes, and loads applicable to some structures such as pool swell loads in the BWR Mark Ill containment and drag forces in the ice-condenser PWR containment.
3.8.3.2 Applicable Codes, Standards, and Specifications. This sec tion should provide information similar to that requested in Section 3.8.1.2 for concrete containments, but as applicable to the internal struc tures of the containment as listed in Section 3.8.3.1.
The structures listed are those of the BWR Mark III containment.
3.8.3.3 Loads and Load Combinations. Among the loads used in the design of the containment internal structures listed in Section 3.8.3.1 that should be specified are the following:
For other BWR containment concepts, the applicable major interior structures should be described accordingly.
I. Loads encountered during normal plant startup, operation, and shutdown, including dead loads, live loads, thermal loads due to operating temperature, and hydrostatic loads such as those present tn refueling and pressure-suppression pools.
3-29 Revision 3 November 1978 The various combinations of the above loads that should be discussed include, as a minimum, normal operating loads, normal operating loads with severe environmental loads, normal operating loads with extreme environmental loads, normal operating loads with abnormal loads, normal operating loads with severe environmental loads and abnormal loads, and normal operating loads with extreme environmental loads and abnormal loads. In addition, the following information should be provided:  
: 2. Loads that would be sustained in the event of severe environ mental conditions, including those induced by the Operating Basis Earthquake.
: 1. The extent to which the applicant's criteria comply with ACI-349, "Proposed ACI Standard:
: 3. Loads that would be sustained in the event of extreme environ mental conditions, including those that would be induced by the Safe Shut down Earthquake.
Code Requirements for Nuclear Safety Related Concrete Structures," for concrete, and with the AISC "Specifica tion for Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Build ings,"* for steel, as applicable.
: 4. Loads that would be sustained in the event of abnormal plant conditions, including the design basis loss-of-coolant accident and other high-energy pipe rupture accidents. Loads that should be discussed include compartment pressures, jet impingement and reaction forces due to pipe rupture, elevated temperatures, impact forces of associated missiles and whipping pipes, and loads applicable to some structures such as pool swell loads in the BWR Mark Ill containment and drag forces in the ice-condenser PWR containment.
: 2. For concrete pressure-resisting portions of the divider barrier of the PWR ice-condenser containment and for concrete pressure-resisting portions of the drywell of the Mark III BWR containment, the extent to which the applicant's criteria comply with Article CC-3000 of the ASME Code, Section III, Division 2. 3. For steel pressure-resisting portions of the structures describec in item 2 above, the extent to which the applicant's criteria comply with Article NE-3000 of Subsection NE of the ASME Code, Section III, Division 1, and the extent to which the recommendations of Regulatory Guide 1.57 are followed.
The structures listed are those of the BWR Mark III containment. For other BWR containment concepts, the applicable major interior structures should be described accordingly.
: 4. For steel linear supports of the reactor coolant system, the extent to which the applicant's criteria comply with Subsection NF of the ASME Code, Section III, Division 1. 3.8.3.4 Design and Analysis Procedures.
3-29
The procedures that will be used in the design and analysis of at least those internal structures listed in Section 3.8.3.1 should be described, including the assumptions made and the identification of boundary conditions.
 
The expected behavior under load and the mechanisms for load transfer to these structures and then to the containment base slab should be provided.
Revision 3                                                     November 1978 The various combinations of the above loads that should be discussed include, as a minimum, normal operating loads, normal operating loads with severe environmental loads, normal operating loads with extreme environmental loads, normal operating loads with abnormal loads, normal operating loads with severe environmental loads and abnormal loads, and normal operating loads with extreme environmental loads and abnormal loads.
Computer programs that are utilized should be referenced to permit identification with available published programs.
In addition, the following information should be provided:
Proprietary computer programs should be described to the maximum extent practical to establish the applicability of the programs and the measures taken to validate the programs with solutions derived from other acceptable programs or with solutions of classical problems.
: 1. The extent to which the applicant's criteria comply with ACI-349, "Proposed ACI Standard: Code Requirements for Nuclear Safety Related Concrete Structures," for concrete, and with the AISC "Specifica tion for Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Build ings,"* for steel, as applicable.
: 2. For concrete pressure-resisting portions of the divider barrier of the PWR ice-condenser containment and for concrete pressure-resisting portions of the drywell of the Mark III BWR containment, the extent to which the applicant's criteria comply with Article CC-3000 of the ASME Code, Section III, Division 2.
: 3. For steel pressure-resisting portions of the structures describec in item 2 above, the extent to which the applicant's criteria comply with Article NE-3000 of Subsection NE of the ASME Code, Section III, Division 1, and the extent to which the recommendations of Regulatory Guide 1.57 are followed.
: 4. For steel linear supports of the reactor coolant system, the extent to which the applicant's criteria comply with Subsection NF of the ASME Code, Section III, Division 1.
3.8.3.4 Design and Analysis Procedures. The procedures that will be used in the design and analysis of at least those internal structures listed in Section 3.8.3.1 should be described, including the assumptions made and the identification of boundary conditions. The expected behavior under load and the mechanisms for load transfer to these structures and then to the containment base slab should be provided. Computer programs that are utilized should be referenced to permit identification with available published programs. Proprietary computer programs should be described to the maximum extent practical to establish the applicability of the programs and the measures taken to validate the programs with solutions derived from other acceptable programs or with solutions of classical problems.
The extent to which the design and analysis procedures comply with ACI-349 and with the AISC Specifications for concrete and steel structures, respectively, should be provided as applicable.
The extent to which the design and analysis procedures comply with ACI-349 and with the AISC Specifications for concrete and steel structures, respectively, should be provided as applicable.
Copies of the AISC Specifications may be obtained from American Institute for Steel Construction, 100 Park Ave. , New York, New York 10017.3-30 Revision 3 November 1978 For reactor coolant system linear supports, the design and analysis procedures utilized, including the type of analysis (elastic or plastic), the methods of load transfer, particularly seismic and accident loads, and the assumptions on boundary conditions, should be provided.
Copies of the AISC Specifications may be obtained from American Institute for Steel Construction, 100 Park Ave. , New York, New York 10017.
Specifi cally, the extent of compliance with design and analysis procedures delineated in Subsection NF of the ASME Code, Section III, Division 1, should be indicated.
3-30
For PWR primary shield walls and BWR reactor pedestals and shield walls, the design and analysis procedures utilized should be described, including the manner by which the individual loads and load combinations are transferred to the walls and their foundations.
 
In particular, the description should cover the normal operating thermal gradient, if any, seismic loads, and accident loads, particularly pipe rupture jet and reaction forces and cavity pressures as they may act on the entire cavity or on portions thereof.
Revision 3                                                   November 1978 For reactor coolant system linear supports, the design and analysis procedures utilized, including the type of analysis (elastic or plastic),
For secondary shield walls and operating and intermediate floors, the design and analysis procedures utilized for these walls and floors, including assumptions on structural framing and behavior under loads, should be described.
the methods of load transfer, particularly seismic and accident loads, and the assumptions on boundary conditions, should be provided. Specifi cally, the extent of compliance with design and analysis procedures delineated in Subsection NF of the ASME Code, Section III, Division 1, should be indicated.
Where elastoplastic behavior is assumed and the ductility of the walls is relied upon to absorb the energy associated with jet and missile loads, the procedures and assumptions should be described with particular emphasis on modeling techniques, boundary con ditions, force-time functions, and assumed ductility.
For PWR primary shield walls and BWR reactor pedestals and shield walls, the design and analysis procedures utilized should be described, including the manner by which the individual loads and load combinations are transferred to the walls and their foundations. In particular, the description should cover the normal operating thermal gradient, if any, seismic loads, and accident loads, particularly pipe rupture jet and reaction forces and cavity pressures as they may act on the entire cavity or on portions thereof.
For the differential pressure, methods of ensuring elastic behavior should be described, particularly in determining an equivalent static load for the impulsive pressure load. For concrete pressure-resisting portions of the divider barrier of the PWR ice-condenser containment and for concrete pressure-resisting portions of the drywell of the BWR Mark III containment, the extent to which the applicant's criteria comply with Article CC-3000 of the ASME Code, Section III, Division 2, should be provided.
For secondary shield walls and operating and intermediate floors, the design and analysis procedures utilized for these walls and floors, including assumptions on structural framing and behavior under loads, should be described. Where elastoplastic behavior is assumed and the ductility of the walls is relied upon to absorb the energy associated with jet and missile loads, the procedures and assumptions should be described with particular emphasis on modeling techniques, boundary con ditions, force-time functions, and assumed ductility. For the differential pressure, methods of ensuring elastic behavior should be described, particularly in determining an equivalent static load for the impulsive pressure load.
For steel pressure resisting portions of these two structures, discuss the extent to which the applicant's criteria comply with Article NE-3000 of Subsection NE of the ASME Code, Section III, Division 1, and the extent to which the recommendations of Regulatory Guide 1.57 are followed.
For concrete pressure-resisting portions of the divider barrier of the PWR ice-condenser containment and for concrete pressure-resisting portions of the drywell of the BWR Mark III containment, the extent to which the applicant's criteria comply with Article CC-3000 of the ASME Code, Section III, Division 2, should be provided. For steel pressure resisting portions of these two structures, discuss the extent to which the applicant's criteria comply with Article NE-3000 of Subsection NE of the ASME Code, Section III, Division 1, and the extent to which the recommendations of Regulatory Guide 1.57 are followed.
3.8.3.5 Structural Acceptance Criteria.
3.8.3.5 Structural Acceptance Criteria. This section should provide information similar to that requested in Section 3.8.1.5 for concrete containments, but as applicable to the various containment internal struc tures listed in Section 3.8.3.1.
This section should provide information similar to that requested in Section 3.8.1.5 for concrete containments, but as applicable to the various containment internal struc tures listed in Section 3.8.3.1.
For each applicable load combination listed in Section 3.8.3.3, the allowable limits should be provided, as applicable, for stresses, strains, deformation (particularly for the RCS linear supports), and factors of safety against structural failure. The extent of compliance with the various applicable codes, as indicated in Section 3.8.3.3, should be presented.
For each applicable load combination listed in Section 3.8.3.3, the allowable limits should be provided, as applicable, for stresses, strains, deformation (particularly for the RCS linear supports), and factors of safety against structural failure. The extent of compliance with the various applicable codes, as indicated in Section 3.8.3.3, should be presented.
3-31 Revision 3 November 1978 3.8.3.6 Materials, Quality Control, and Special Construction Tech"niques. The materials, quality control programs, and any special construc tion techniques should be identified and described.
3-31
 
Revision 3                                                   November 1978 3.8.3.6   Materials, Quality Control, and Special Construction Tech "niques. The materials, quality control programs, and any special construc tion techniques should be identified and described.
Among the major materials of construction that should be described are the concrete ingredients, the reinforcing bars and splices, and the structural steel and various supports and anchors.
Among the major materials of construction that should be described are the concrete ingredients, the reinforcing bars and splices, and the structural steel and various supports and anchors.
The quality control program proposed for the fabrication and construc tion of the containment interior structures should be described, including nondestructive examination of the materials to determine physical properties, placement of concrete, and erection tolerances.
The quality control program proposed for the fabrication and construc tion of the containment interior structures should be described, including nondestructive examination of the materials to determine physical properties, placement of concrete, and erection tolerances.
Special, new, or unique construction techniques should be described to determine their effects on the structural integrity of the completed interior structure.
Special, new, or unique construction techniques should be described to determine their effects on the structural integrity of the completed interior structure.
In addition, the following information should be provided:  
In addition, the following information should be provided:
: 1. The extent to which the material and quality control require ments comply with ACI-349 for concrete, and with the AISC Specifications for steel, as applicable.
: 1. The extent to which the material and quality control require ments comply with ACI-349 for concrete, and with the AISC Specifications for steel, as applicable.
: 2. For steel linear supports of the reactor coolant system, the extent to which the material and quality control requirements comply with Subsection NF of the ASME Code, Section III, Division 1. 3. For quality control in general, the extent to which the applicant complies with ANSI N45.2.5, and follows the recommendations of Regulatory Guide 1.55, "Concrete Placement in Category I Structures." 4. If welding of reinforcing bars is proposed, the extent to which the design complies with the ASME Code, Section III, Division 2. Any exceptions taken should be identified and justified.
: 2. For steel linear supports of the reactor coolant system, the extent to which the material and quality control requirements comply with Subsection NF of the ASME Code, Section III, Division 1.
3.8.3.7 Testing and Inservice Inspection Requirements.
: 3. For quality control in general, the extent to which the applicant complies with ANSI N45.2.5, and follows the recommendations of Regulatory Guide 1.55, "Concrete Placement in Category I Structures."
The testing and inservice inspection programs for the internal structures should be described.
: 4. If welding of reinforcing bars is proposed, the extent to which the design complies with the ASME Code, Section III, Division 2. Any exceptions taken should be identified and justified.
Test requirements for internal structures related directly and critically to the functioning of the containment concept such as the drywell of the BWR Mark III containment should be specified.
3.8.3.7 Testing and Inservice Inspection Requirements. The testing and inservice inspection programs for the internal structures should be described. Test requirements for internal structures related directly and critically to the functioning of the containment concept such as the drywell of the BWR Mark III containment should be specified. Inservice inspection requirements, when needed, should also be described. The extent of compliance with the applicable codes as described in Section 3.8.3.6 should be indicated.
Inservice inspection requirements, when needed, should also be described.
3.8.4   Other Seismic Category I Structures Information should be provided in this section for all Seismic Cate gory I structures not covered by Sections 3.8.1, 3.8.2, 3.8.3, or 3.8.5.
The extent of compliance with the applicable codes as described in Section 3.8.3.6 should be indicated.
The information should be similar to that requested for Section 3.8.1.
3.8.4 Other Seismic Category I Structures Information should be provided in this section for all Seismic Cate gory I structures not covered by Sections 3.8.1, 3.8.2, 3.8.3, or 3.8.5. The information should be similar to that requested for Section 3.8.1. In particular, the information described below should be provided.3-32 Revision 3 November 1978 3.8.4.1 Description of the Structures.
In particular, the information described below should be provided.
Descriptive information, including plan and section views of each structure, should be provided to define the primary structural aspects and elements relied upon for the structure to perform its safety-related function.
3-32
The relationship between adjacent structures, including any separation or structural ties, should be described.
 
Among the plant Seismic Category I structures that should be described are the following:  
Revision 3                                                     November 1978 3.8.4.1   Description of the Structures. Descriptive information, including plan and section views of each structure, should be provided to define the primary structural aspects and elements relied upon for the structure to perform its safety-related function. The relationship between adjacent structures, including any separation or structural ties, should be described. Among the plant Seismic Category I structures that should be described are the following:
: 1. Containment enclosure buildings.
: 1. Containment enclosure buildings.
: 2. Auxiliary buildings.
: 2. Auxiliary buildings.
: 3. Fuel storage buildings.
: 3. Fuel storage buildings.
: 4. Control buildings.
: 4. Control buildings.
: 5. Diesel generator buildings.
: 5. Diesel generator buildings.
: 6. Other Seismic Category I structures, as applicable, including such structures as pipe and electrical conduit tunnels, waste storage facilities, stacks, intake structures, pumping stations, water wells, cooling towers, and concrete dams, embankments, and tunnels. Structures that are safety related but because of other design provisions are not classified as Seismic Category I should also be described.
: 6. Other Seismic Category I structures, as applicable, including such structures as pipe and electrical conduit tunnels, waste storage facilities, stacks, intake structures, pumping stations, water wells, cooling towers, and concrete dams, embankments, and tunnels.     Structures that are safety related but because of other design provisions are not classified as Seismic Category I should also be described.
3.8.4.2 Applicable Codes, Standards, and Specifications.
3.8.4.2 Applicable Codes, Standards, and Specifications.     Informa tion similar to that requested in Section 3.8.1.2 for concrete contain ments, but as applicable to all other Seismic Category I structures, should be provided.
Informa tion similar to that requested in Section 3.8.1.2 for concrete contain ments, but as applicable to all other Seismic Category I structures, should be provided.
3.8.4.3 Loads and Load Combinations. The loads used in the design of all other Seismic Category I structures should be specified, including:
3.8.4.3 Loads and Load Combinations.
: 1. Those loads encountered during normal plant startup, operation, and shutdown, including dead loads, live loads, thermal loads due to operating temperature, and hydrostatic loads such as those in spent fuel pools.
The loads used in the design of all other Seismic Category I structures should be specified, including:  
: 2. Those loads that would be sustained in the event of severe environmental conditions, including those that would be induced by the Operating Basis Earthquake (OBE) and the design wind specified for the plant site.
: 1. Those loads encountered during normal plant startup, operation, and shutdown, including dead loads, live loads, thermal loads due to operating temperature, and hydrostatic loads such as those in spent fuel pools. 2. Those loads that would be sustained in the event of severe environmental conditions, including those that would be induced by the Operating Basis Earthquake (OBE) and the design wind specified for the plant site. 3. Those loads that would be sustained in the event of extreme environmental conditions, including those that would be induced by the Safe Shutdown Earthquake (SSE) and the Design Basis Tornado specified for the plant site. 4. Those loads that would be sustained in the event of abnormal plant conditions.
: 3. Those loads that would be sustained in the event of extreme environmental conditions, including those that would be induced by the Safe Shutdown Earthquake (SSE) and the Design Basis Tornado specified for the plant site.
Such abnormal plant conditions include the postulated rupture of high-energy piping. Loads induced by such an accident include 3-33 Revision 3 Revision 3 November 1978 elevated temperatures and pressures within or across compartments and possibly jet impingement and impact forces usually associated with such ruptures.
: 4. Those loads that would be sustained in the event of abnormal plant conditions. Such abnormal plant conditions include the postulated rupture of high-energy piping. Loads induced by such an accident include 3-33
The various combinations of the above loads that should be discussed include normal operating loads, normal operating loads with severe environ mental loads, normal operating loads with extreme environmental loads, normal operating loads with abnormal loads, normal operating loads with severe environmental loads and abnormal loads, and normal operating loads with extreme environmental loads and abnormal loads. The loads and load combinations described above are generally appli cable to most structures.
 
However, other site-related design loads might also be applicable.
Revision 3                                                       November 1978 elevated temperatures and pressures within or across possibly jet impingement and impact forces usually         compartments and associated with such ruptures.
Such loads include those induced by floods, potential aircraft crashes, explosive hazards in proximity to the site, and projec tiles and missiles generated from activities of nearby military installations.
The various combinations of the above loads that should include normal operating loads, normal operating loads             be discussed with severe environ mental loads, normal operating loads with extreme environmental loads, normal operating loads with abnormal loads, normal operating loads with severe environmental loads and abnormal loads, and normal operating loads with extreme environmental loads and abnormal loads.
3.8.4.4 Design and Analysis Procedures.
The loads and load combinations described above cable to most structures. However, other site-relatedare generally appli also be applicable. Such loads include those induced       design loads might by floods, potential aircraft crashes, explosive hazards in proximity to the site, and projec tiles and missiles generated from activities of nearby military installations.
The design and analysis procedures should be described with emphasis on the extent of compliance with ACI-349 and the AISC Specifications for concrete and steel structures, respectively, including the assumptions made on boundary conditions.
3.8.4.4 Design and Analysis Procedures. The procedures should be described with emphasis on the design and analysis with ACI-349 and the AISC Specifications for concrete extent of compliance and steel structures, respectively, including the assumptions made on The expected behavior under load and the mechanisms   boundary    conditions.
The expected behavior under load and the mechanisms of load transfer to the foundations should be provided.
the foundations should be provided. Computer programs   of  load  transfer to to permit identification with available published         should  be referenced programs. Proprietary computer programs should be described to the maximum establish the applicability of the program and the extent practical to measures taken to validate the program with solutions derived from other acceptable pro grams or with solutions of classical problems.
Computer programs should be referenced to permit identification with available published programs.
3.8.4.5 Structural Acceptance Criteria. The design criteria relating to stresses, strains, gross deformations, factors parameters that identify quantitatively the margins   of   safety,  and other of  safety  should be specified with emphasis on the extent of compliance with ACI-349 for con crete and with the AISC Specifications for steel.
Proprietary computer programs should be described to the maximum extent practical to establish the applicability of the program and the measures taken to validate the program with solutions derived from other acceptable pro grams or with solutions of classical problems.
3.8.4.6 Materials, Quality Control, and Special niques. The materials, quality control programs, and Construction Tech any new or special construction techniques should be addressed as outlined in Section 3.8.3.6.
3.8.4.5 Structural Acceptance Criteria.
The design criteria relating to stresses, strains, gross deformations, factors of safety, and other parameters that identify quantitatively the margins of safety should be specified with emphasis on the extent of compliance with ACI-349 for con crete and with the AISC Specifications for steel. 3.8.4.6 Materials, Quality Control, and Special Construction Tech niques. The materials, quality control programs, and any new or special construction techniques should be addressed as outlined in Section 3.8.3.6.
3.8.4.7 Testing and Inservice Inspection Requirements.
3.8.4.7 Testing and Inservice Inspection Requirements.
The testing and inservice inspection requirements, if any, should be specified.
The testing and inservice inspection requirements, if any, should be specified.
3.8.5 Foundations The information provided in this section should be similar to that requested under Section 3.8.1 for concrete containments but as applicable to foundations of all Seismic Category I structures.
3.8.5   Foundations The information provided in this section should be requested under Section 3.8.1 for concrete containments       similar to that but as applicable to foundations of all Seismic Category I structures.
Concrete foundations of steel or concrete containments should be discussed in Section 3.8.1 and in this section as appropriate.
Concrete foundations of steel or concrete containments should be discussed in Section 3.8.1 and in this section as appropriate.
3-34 November 1978 The information should address foundations for all Seismic Category I structures constructed of materials other than soil for the purpose of transferring loads and forces to the basic supporting media. In partic ular, the information described below should be provided.
3-34
3.8.5.1 Description of the Foundations.
 
Descriptive information, including plan and section views of each foundation, should be provided to define the primary structural aspects and elements relied upon to perform the foundation function.
Revision 3                                                  November 1978 The information should address foundations for all Seismic Category I structures constructed of materials other than soil for the purpose of transferring loads and forces to the basic supporting media. In partic ular, the information described below should be provided.
The relationship between adjacent foundations, including any separation provided and the reasons for such separation, should be described.
3.8.5.1 Description of the Foundations. Descriptive information, including plan and section views of each foundation, should be provided to define the primary structural aspects and elements relied upon to perform the foundation function.       The relationship between adjacent foundations, including any separation provided and the reasons for such separation, should be described. In particular, the type of foundation and its structural characteristics should be discussed. General arrange ment of each foundation should be provided with emphasis on the methods of transferring horizontal shears, such as those seismically induced, to the foundation media. If shear keys are utilized for such purposes, the general arrangement of the keys should be included.     If waterproofing membranes are utilized, their effect on the capability of the foundation to transfer shears should be discussed.
In particular, the type of foundation and its structural characteristics should be discussed.
General arrange ment of each foundation should be provided with emphasis on the methods of transferring horizontal shears, such as those seismically induced, to the foundation media. If shear keys are utilized for such purposes, the general arrangement of the keys should be included.
If waterproofing membranes are utilized, their effect on the capability of the foundation to transfer shears should be discussed.
Information should be provided to adequately describe other types of foundation structures such as pile foundations, caisson foundations, retaining walls, abutments, and rock and soil anchorage systems.
Information should be provided to adequately describe other types of foundation structures such as pile foundations, caisson foundations, retaining walls, abutments, and rock and soil anchorage systems.
3.8.5.2 Applicable Codes, Standards, and Specifications.
3.8.5.2 Applicable Codes, Standards, and Specifications. Informa tion similar to that requested in Section 3.8.1.2, but as applicable to foundations of all Seismic Category I structures,. should be provided.
Informa tion similar to that requested in Section 3.8.1.2, but as applicable to foundations of all Seismic Category I structures,.
3.8.5.3 Loads and Load Combinations. This section should provide similar information to that requested in Section 3.8.4.3, but as applic able to the foundations of all Seismic Category I structures.
should be provided.
      "3.8.5.4 Design and Analysis Procedures. This section should provide information applicable to the foundations of all Seismic Category I struc tures. The information should be similar to that requested in Section 3.8.4.4.
3.8.5.3 Loads and Load Combinations.
This section should provide similar information to that requested in Section 3.8.4.3, but as applic able to the foundations of all Seismic Category I structures.
"3.8.5.4 Design and Analysis Procedures.
This section should provide information applicable to the foundations of all Seismic Category I struc tures. The information should be similar to that requested in Section 3.8.4.4.
In particular, the assumptions made on boundary conditions and the methods by which lateral loads and forces and overturning moments thereof are transmitted from the structure to the foundation media should be discussed, and the methods by which the effects of settlement are taken into consideration should be described.
In particular, the assumptions made on boundary conditions and the methods by which lateral loads and forces and overturning moments thereof are transmitted from the structure to the foundation media should be discussed, and the methods by which the effects of settlement are taken into consideration should be described.
3.8.5.5 Structural Acceptance Criteria.
3.8.5.5 Structural Acceptance Criteria. This section should pro vide information applicable to foundations of all Seismic Category I structures. The information should be similar to that requested in Section 3.8.4.5.
This section should pro vide information applicable to foundations of all Seismic Category I structures.
In particular, the design limits imposed on the various parameters that serve to define the structural stability of each structure and its 3-35
The information should be similar to that requested in Section 3.8.4.5.
 
In particular, the design limits imposed on the various parameters that serve to define the structural stability of each structure and its 3-35 Revision 3 Revision 3 November 1978 foundations should be indicated, including differential settlements and factors of safety against overturning and sliding.
Revision 3                                                   November 1978 foundations should be indicated, including differential settlements and factors of safety against overturning and sliding.
3.8.5.6 Materials, Quality Control, and Special Construction Tech niques. This section should provide information for the foundations of all Seismic Category I structures.
3.8.5.6 Materials, Quality Control, and Special Construction Tech niques. This section should provide information for the foundations of all Seismic Category I structures. The information should be similar to that requested in Section 3.8.4.6.
The information should be similar to that requested in Section 3.8.4.6.
3.8.5.7 Testing and Inservice Inspection Requirements. This section should discuss information for the foundations of all Seismic Category I structures. The information should be similar to that requested in Section 3.8.4.7.
3.8.5.7 Testing and Inservice Inspection Requirements.
This section should discuss information for the foundations of all Seismic Category I structures.
The information should be similar to that requested in Section 3.8.4.7.
If programs for continued surveillance and monitoring of foundations are required, a discussion to define the various aspects of the program should be provided.
If programs for continued surveillance and monitoring of foundations are required, a discussion to define the various aspects of the program should be provided.
3.9 Mechanical Systems* and Components 3.9.1 Special Topics for Mechanical Components 3.9.1.1 Design Transients.
3.9 Mechanical Systems* and Components 3.9.1   Special Topics for Mechanical Components 3.9.1.1 Design Transients. Provide a complete list of transients to be used in the design and fatigue analysis of all ASME Code Class 1 and CS components, component supports, and reactor internals. The number of events for each transient should be included, along with assurance that the number of load and stress cycles per event is properly taken into account. All design transients that are contained in the ASME Code required "Design Specifications" for the components of the reactor coolant pressure boundary should be specified. Examples of such transients are startup and shutdown operations, power level changes, emergency and recovery conditions, switching operations (i.e., startup or shutdown of one or more coolant loops), control system or other system malfunctions, component malfunctions, transients resulting from single operator errors, inservice hydrostatic tests, and seismic events. All transients or combinations of transients should be classified with respect to the plant and system operating condition categories identified as "normal," "upset," "emergency,"
Provide a complete list of transients to be used in the design and fatigue analysis of all ASME Code Class 1 and CS components, component supports, and reactor internals.
"faulted," or "testing."
The number of events for each transient should be included, along with assurance that the number of load and stress cycles per event is properly taken into account. All design transients that are contained in the ASME Code required "Design Specifications" for the components of the reactor coolant pressure boundary should be specified.
3.9.1.2 Computer Programs Used in Analyses. Provide a list of compu ter programs that will be used in dynamic and static analyses to determine structural and functional integrity of all Seismic Category I systems, components, equipment, and supports. Include a brief description of each program, the extent of its application, and the design control measures, required per Appendix B of 10 CFR Part 50, that will be employed to demonstrate the applicability and validity of each program.
Examples of such transients are startup and shutdown operations, power level changes, emergency and recovery conditions, switching operations (i.e., startup or shutdown of one or more coolant loops), control system or other system malfunctions, component malfunctions, transients resulting from single operator errors, inservice hydrostatic tests, and seismic events. All transients or combinations of transients should be classified with respect to the plant and system operating condition categories identified as "normal," "upset," "emergency," "faulted," or "testing." 3.9.1.2 Computer Programs Used in Analyses.
3.9.1.3 Experimental Stress Analysis. If experimental stress analysis methods are used in lieu of analytical methods for Seismic Category I "XFuel system design information is addressed in Section 4.2.
Provide a list of compu ter programs that will be used in dynamic and static analyses to determine structural and functional integrity of all Seismic Category I systems, components, equipment, and supports.
3-36
Include a brief description of each program, the extent of its application, and the design control measures, required per Appendix B of 10 CFR Part 50, that will be employed to demonstrate the applicability and validity of each program.
 
3.9.1.3 Experimental Stress Analysis.
Revision 3                                                    November 1978 ASME Code and non-Code items, sufficient information should be provided to show the validity of the design.
If experimental stress analysis methods are used in lieu of analytical methods for Seismic Category I "XFuel system design information is addressed in Section 4.2.3-36 November 1978 ASME Code and non-Code items, sufficient information should be provided to show the validity of the design. 3.9.1.4 Considerations for the Evaluation of the Faulted Condition.
3.9.1.4 Considerations for the Evaluation of the Faulted Condition.
The analytical methods (e.g., elastic or elastic-plastic) used to evaluate stresses for Seismic Category I ASME Code and non-Code items should be described, including a discussion of their compatibility with the type of dynamic system analysis used. The stress-strain relationship and ultimate strength used in the analysis for each component should be shown to be valid. If the use of elastic, elastic-plastic, or limit item analysis concurrently with elastic or elastic-plastic system analysis is invoked, the basis for these procedures should provide assurance that the calculated item or item support deformations and displacements do not violate the corresponding limits and assumptions on which the method used for the system analysis is based. When elastic plastic stress or deformation design limits are specified for ASME Code and non-Code items, the methods of analysis used to calculate the stresses and/or deformations resulting from the faulted condition loadings should be provided.
The analytical methods (e.g., elastic or elastic-plastic) used to evaluate stresses for Seismic Category I ASME Code and non-Code items should be described, including a discussion of their compatibility with the type of dynamic system analysis used. The stress-strain relationship and ultimate strength used in the analysis for each component should be shown to be valid. If the use of elastic, elastic-plastic, or limit item analysis concurrently with elastic or elastic-plastic system analysis is invoked, the basis for these procedures should provide assurance that the calculated item or item support deformations and displacements do not violate the corresponding limits and assumptions on which the method used for the system analysis is based. When elastic plastic stress or deformation design limits are specified for ASME Code and non-Code items, the methods of analysis used to calculate the stresses and/or deformations resulting from the faulted condition loadings should be provided. Describe the procedure for developing the loading function on each component.
Describe the procedure for developing the loading function on each component.
3.9.2 Dynamic Testing and Analysis The criteria, testing procedures, and dynamic analyses employed to ensure structural and functional integrity of piping systems, mechanical equipment, and reactor internals under vibratory loadings, including those due to fluid flow and postulated seismic events, should be provided.
3.9.2 Dynamic Testing and Analysis The criteria, testing procedures, and dynamic analyses employed to ensure structural and functional integrity of piping systems, mechanical equipment, and reactor internals under vibratory loadings, including those due to fluid flow and postulated seismic events, should be provided.
3.9.2.1 Piping Vibration, Thermal Expansion, and Dynamic Effects.
3.9.2.1 Piping Vibration, Thermal Expansion, and Dynamic Effects.
Information should be provided concerning the piping vibration, thermal expansion, and dynamic effects testing that will be conducted during startup functional testing on (1) ASME Code Class 1, 2, and 3 systems, (2) other high-energy piping systems inside Seismic Category I structures, (3) high-energy portions of systems whose failure could reduce the func tioning of any Seismic Category I plant feature to an unacceptable level, and (4) Seismic Category I portions of moderate-energy piping systems located outside containment.
Information should be provided concerning the piping vibration, thermal expansion, and dynamic effects testing that will be conducted during startup functional testing on (1) ASME Code Class 1, 2, and 3 systems, (2) other high-energy piping systems inside Seismic Category I structures, (3) high-energy portions of systems whose failure could reduce the func tioning of any Seismic Category I plant feature to an unacceptable level, and (4) Seismic Category I portions of moderate-energy piping systems located outside containment. The purpose of these tests is to confirm that these piping systems, restraints, components, and supports have been designed adequately to withstand the flow-induced dynamic loadings under operational transient and steady-state conditions anticipated during service.
The purpose of these tests is to confirm that these piping systems, restraints, components, and supports have been designed adequately to withstand the flow-induced dynamic loadings under operational transient and steady-state conditions anticipated during service.
In addition, the thermal motions should be monitored to ensure that adequate clearances are provided to allow unrestrained normal thermal movement of systems, components, and supports. The program should include a list of different flow modes, a list of selected locations for visual inspection and measurements, the acceptance criteria, and the possible corrective actions if excessive vibration occurs.
In addition, the thermal motions should be monitored to ensure that adequate clearances are provided to allow unrestrained normal thermal movement of systems, components, and supports.
3.9.2.2 Seismic Qualification Testing of Safety-Related Mechanical Equipment. Seismic qualification testing of safety-related mechanical equipment is required to ensure its functional integrity and operability 3-37
The program should include a list of different flow modes, a list of selected locations for visual inspection and measurements, the acceptance criteria, and the possible corrective actions if excessive vibration occurs. 3.9.2.2 Seismic Qualification Testing of Safety-Related Mechanical Equipment.
 
Seismic qualification testing of safety-related mechanical equipment is required to ensure its functional integrity and operability 3-37 Revision 3 November 1978 during and after a postulated seismic occurrence.
Revision 3                                                   November 1978 during and after a postulated seismic occurrence. The following informa tion should be provided in the PSAR:
The following informa tion should be provided in the PSAR: 1. The criteria for seismic qualification, such as the deciding factors for choosing test and/or analysis, considerations in defining the input motion at the equipment monitoring locations, and the process to demonstrate adequacy of the seismic qualification program.
: 1. The criteria for seismic qualification, such as the deciding factors for choosing test and/or analysis, considerations in defining the input motion at the equipment monitoring locations, and the process to demonstrate adequacy of the seismic qualification program.
: 2. The methods and procedures used to test Seismic Category I mechanical equipment operation during and after the Safe Shutdown Earth quake (SSE) and to ensure structural and functional integrity of the equip ment after several occurrences of the Operating Basis Earthquake (OBE) in combination with normal operating loads. Included are mechanical equip ment such as fans, pump drives, heat exchanger tube bundles, valve actuators, battery and instrument racks, control consoles, cabinets, panels, and cable trays.. Broad-band seismic excitation, dynamic coupling, and multi directional loading effects should be considered in the development of the seismic qualification program.
: 2. The methods and procedures used to test Seismic Category I mechanical equipment operation during and after the Safe Shutdown Earth quake (SSE) and to ensure structural and functional integrity of the equip ment after several occurrences of the Operating Basis Earthquake (OBE) in combination with normal operating loads. Included are mechanical equip ment such as fans, pump drives, heat exchanger tube bundles, valve actuators, battery and instrument racks, control consoles, cabinets, panels, and cable trays.. Broad-band seismic excitation, dynamic coupling, and multi directional loading effects should be considered in the development of the seismic qualification program.
: 3. The methods and procedures of analysis and for testing of the supports for the above Seismic Category I mechanical equipment, and the verification procedures used to account for the possible amplification of design loads (amplitude and frequency content) under seismic conditions.
: 3. The methods and procedures of analysis and for testing of the supports for the above Seismic Category I mechanical equipment, and the verification procedures used to account for the possible amplification of design loads (amplitude and frequency content) under seismic conditions.
There should be provided in the FSAR the results of tests and analyses to ensure the proper implementation of the criteria accepted in the construction permit (CP) review and to demonstrate adequate seismic qualification.
There should be provided in the FSAR the results of tests and analyses to ensure the proper implementation of the criteria accepted in the construction permit (CP) review and to demonstrate adequate seismic qualification.
3.9.2.3 Dynamic Response Analysis of Reactor Internals Under Operational Flow Transients and Steady-State Conditions.
3.9.2.3 Dynamic Response Analysis of Reactor Internals Under Operational Flow Transients and Steady-State Conditions. A description of the dynamic system analysis of structural components within the reactor vessel caused by the operational flow transients and steady-state condi tions should be provided in the PSAR. The purpose of this analysis is to demonstrate the acceptability of the reactor internals design for normal operating conditions and to predict the input forcing functions and the vibratory response of the reactor internals prior to conducting the preoperational vibration test of a prototype reactor. Information concerning the method of analysis, the specific locations for response calculation, the considerations to define the mathematical model, and the acceptance criteria should be provided in the PSAR.
A description of the dynamic system analysis of structural components within the reactor vessel caused by the operational flow transients and steady-state condi tions should be provided in the PSAR. The purpose of this analysis is to demonstrate the acceptability of the reactor internals design for normal operating conditions and to predict the input forcing functions and the vibratory response of the reactor internals prior to conducting the preoperational vibration test of a prototype reactor. Information concerning the method of analysis, the specific locations for response calculation, the considerations to define the mathematical model, and the acceptance criteria should be provided in the PSAR. 3.9.2.4 Preoperational Flow-Induced Vibration Testing of Reactor Internals.
3.9.2.4 Preoperational Flow-Induced Vibration Testing of Reactor Internals. Information should be provided in the PSAR describing the extent to which the recommendations of preoperational flow-induced vibra tion testing of reactor internals during the startup functional test pro gram, as delineated in Regulatory Guide 1.20, "Comprehensive Vibration Assessment Program for Reactor Internals During Preoperational and Initial Startup Testing," will be implemented. The purpose of this test is to 3-38
Information should be provided in the PSAR describing the extent to which the recommendations of preoperational flow-induced vibra tion testing of reactor internals during the startup functional test pro gram, as delineated in Regulatory Guide 1.20, "Comprehensive Vibration Assessment Program for Reactor Internals During Preoperational and Initial Startup Testing," will be implemented.
 
The purpose of this test is to 3-38 Revision 3 November 1978 demonstrate that flow-induced vibrations experienced during normal opera tion will not cause structural failure or degradation.
Revision 3                                                     November 1978 demonstrate that flow-induced vibrations experienced during normal opera tion will not cause structural failure or degradation. For the prototype reactor, information in the PSAR should include a list   of flow modes, a list of sensor types and locations, a description of test procedures, methods used to process and interpret the measured data, and the proce dures for implementing the visual inspection.     For a reactor internal with the same design, size, configuration, and operation conditions as an identified valid prototype reactor internal, indicate the extent to which the preoperational vibration test program follows the recommenda tions for non-prototype testing presented in Regulatory Guide 1.20; pro vide justification for any alternative approach.
For the prototype reactor, information in the PSAR should include a list of flow modes, a list of sensor types and locations, a description of test procedures, methods used to process and interpret the measured data, and the proce dures for implementing the visual inspection.
3.9.2.5 Dynamic System Analysis of the Reactor Internals Under Faulted Condition. The following information should be included in the discussion of the dynamic system analysis methods and procedures used to confirm the structural design adequacy of the reactor internals and the unbroken loop of the reactor piping system to withstand dynamic effects with no loss of function under a simultaneous occurrence of LOCA or steam line break and Safe Shutdown Earthquake (SSE):
For a reactor internal with the same design, size, configuration, and operation conditions as an identified valid prototype reactor internal, indicate the extent to which the preoperational vibration test program follows the recommenda tions for non-prototype testing presented in Regulatory Guide 1.20; pro vide justification for any alternative approach.
: 1. Typical diagrams of the dynamic system mathematical modeling of piping, pipe supports, and reactor internals, along with fuel element assemblies and control rod assemblies and drives, that will be used in the analysis, including a discussion of the bases for any structural partitioning and directional decoupling of components (PSAR).
3.9.2.5 Dynamic System Analysis of the Reactor Internals Under Faulted Condition.
: 2. A description of the methods used to obtain the forcing func tions and a description of the forcing functions that will be used for the dynamic analysis of the LOCA or steam line break and SSE event, including system pressure differentials, direction, rise time, magnitude, duration, initial conditions, spatial distribution, and loading combina tions (PSAR).
The following information should be included in the discussion of the dynamic system analysis methods and procedures used to confirm the structural design adequacy of the reactor internals and the unbroken loop of the reactor piping system to withstand dynamic effects with no loss of function under a simultaneous occurrence of LOCA or steam line break and Safe Shutdown Earthquake (SSE): 1. Typical diagrams of the dynamic system mathematical modeling of piping, pipe supports, and reactor internals, along with fuel element assemblies and control rod assemblies and drives, that will be used in the analysis, including a discussion of the bases for any structural partitioning and directional decoupling of components (PSAR). 2. A description of the methods used to obtain the forcing func tions and a description of the forcing functions that will be used for the dynamic analysis of the LOCA or steam line break and SSE event, including system pressure differentials, direction, rise time, magnitude, duration, initial conditions, spatial distribution, and loading combina tions (PSAR). 3. A description of the methods and procedures that will be used to compute the total dynamic structural responses, including the buckling response, of those structures in compression (PSAR). 4. A summary of the results of the dynamic analysis (FSAR). 3.9.2.6 Correlations of Reactor Internals Vibration Tests with the Analytical Results (FSAR). A-discussion should be provided that describes the method to be used for correlating the results from the reactor inter nals preoperational vibration test with the analytical results derived from dynamic analyses of reactor internals under nperational flow tran sients and steady-state conditions.
: 3. A description of the methods and procedures that will be used to compute the total dynamic structural responses, including the buckling response, of those structures in compression (PSAR).
In addition, this discussion may include procedures for verifying the mathematical model used in the faulted condition (LOCA, steam line break, and SSE) by comparing certain dynamic characteristics such as natural frequencies.
: 4. A summary of the results of the dynamic analysis (FSAR).
3-39 Revision 3 Revision 3 November 1978 3.9.3 ASME Code Class 1, 2, and 3 Components, Component Supports, and Core Support Structures The information requested in Sections 3.9.3.1 through 3.9.3.4 should be provided for components and component supports constructed in accord ance with Division I of Section III of the ASME Code. Section 3.9.3 includes ASME Code Class 1, 2, and 3 components, core support (CS) struc tures, and component supports; Class MC is covered in Section 3.8.3. The design information relative to component design for steam generators as called for in Section 5.4.2 should be incorporated in this section.
3.9.2.6 Correlations of Reactor Internals Vibration Tests with the Analytical Results (FSAR). A-discussion should be provided that describes the method to be used for correlating the results from the reactor inter nals preoperational vibration test with the analytical results derived from dynamic analyses of reactor internals under nperational flow tran sients and steady-state conditions. In addition, this discussion may include procedures for verifying the mathematical model used in the faulted condition (LOCA, steam line break, and SSE) by comparing certain dynamic characteristics such as natural frequencies.
3-39
 
Revision 3                                                     November 1978 3.9.3 ASME Code Class 1, 2, and 3 Components,     Component Supports, and Core Support Structures The information requested in Sections 3.9.3.1 through 3.9.3.4 should be provided for components and component supports constructed in accord ance with Division I of Section III of the ASME Code.         Section 3.9.3 includes ASME Code Class 1, 2, and 3 components, core support (CS) struc tures, and component supports; Class MC is covered in Section 3.8.3.
The design information relative to component design for steam generators as called for in Section 5.4.2 should be incorporated in this section.
This includes field run piping and internal parts of components.
This includes field run piping and internal parts of components.
3.9.3.1 Loading Combinations, Design Transients, and Stress Limits. Provide the combination of loading conditions and the design transients applicable to the design of each ASME Code constructed item for each system. Identify for each initiating event (i.e. , LOCA, SSE, pipe break, and other transients) the appropriate plant operating condition and the appropriate component operating condition used to establish the design stress limits for the ASME Code constructed items (see Section 3.9.1.1).
3.9.3.1 Loading Combinations, Design Transients, and Stress Limits.
The actual design condition (including test condition) stress limits and deformation criteria selected for design (for the combination of loading conditions and design transients established as described above) should be presented.
Provide the combination of loading conditions and the design transients applicable to the design of each ASME Code constructed item for each system.
Design stress limits that allow inelastic deformation (compar able to faulted condition design limits) should be identified, and a description of the procedures that will be used for analysis or test should be provided in the PSAR (see Section 3.9.1.4).
Identify for each initiating event (i.e. , LOCA, SSE, pipe break, and other transients) the appropriate plant operating condition and the appropriate component operating condition used to establish the design stress limits for the ASME Code constructed items (see Section 3.9.1.1).
The FSAR should include the following for ASME Code Class 1 compo nents, CS structures, and ASME Code Class 1 component supports:  
The actual design condition (including test condition) stress limits and deformation criteria selected for design (for the combination of loading conditions and design transients established as described above) should be presented. Design stress limits that allow inelastic deformation (compar able to faulted condition design limits) should be identified, and a description of the procedures that will be used for analysis or test should be provided in the PSAR (see Section 3.9.1.4).
: 1. A summary description of mathematical or test models used, 2. Methods of calculation or test, including simplifying assumptions, identification of method of system and component analysis used, and demonstra tion of their compatibility (see Section 3.9.1.4) in the case of components and supports designed to faulted limits, and 3. A summary of the maximum total stress, deformation, and cumulative usage factor values should be provided in the FSAR for each of the compo nent operating conditions for all ASME Code Class I components.
The FSAR should include the following for ASME Code Class 1 compo nents, CS structures, and ASME Code Class 1 component supports:
Identify those values that differ from the allowable limits by less than 10%, and provide the contribution of each of the loading categories, such as seismic, dead weight, pressure, and thermal, to the total stress for each maximum stress value identified in this range. The FSAR should include the following for all other classes of com ponents and their supports: 3-40 November 1978 1. A summary description of any test models used (see Section 3.9.1.3).
: 1. A summary description of mathematical or test models used,
: 2. A summary description of mathematical models or test models used to evaluate the faulted conditions, as appropriate, for components and supports (see Sections 3.9.1.2 and 3.9.1.4).
: 2. Methods of calculation or test, including simplifying assumptions, identification of method of system and component analysis used, and demonstra tion of their compatibility (see Section 3.9.1.4) in the case of components and supports designed to faulted limits, and
: 3. For all ASME Code Class 2 and 3 components required to shut down the reactor or mitigate the consequences of a postulated piping failure without offsite power, a summary of the maximum total stress and deformation values should be provided in the FSAR for each of the component operating conditions.
: 3. A summary of the maximum total stress, deformation, and cumulative usage factor values should be provided in the FSAR for each of the compo nent operating conditions for all ASME Code Class I components. Identify those values that differ from the allowable limits by less than 10%, and provide the contribution of each of the loading categories, such as seismic, dead weight, pressure, and thermal, to the total stress for each maximum stress value identified in this range.
Identify those values that differ from the allowable limits by less than 10%. The PSAR should include a listing of transients appropriate to ASME Code Class 1, 2, and 3 components, CS structures, and component supports and should be categorized on the basis of plant operating condition.
The FSAR should include the following for all other classes of com ponents and their supports:
In addition, for ASME Code Class 1 components and CS and ASME Code Class 1 component supports, include the number of cycles to be used in the fatigue analysis appropriate to each transient (see Section 3.9.1.1).
3-40
3.9.3.2 Pump and Valve Operability Assurance.
 
Provide a list that identifies all active ASME Class 1, 2, and 3 pumps and valves. Present the criteria to be employed in a test program, or program consisting of test and analysis, to ensure the operability of pumps required to function and valves required to open or close to perform a safety function during or following the specified plant event. Discuss the features of the program, and include conditions of test, scale effects if appropriate, loadings for specified plant event, transient loads, including seismic component, dynamic coupling to other systems, stress limits, deformation limits, and other information considered pertinent to assurance of operability.
Revision 3                                                    November 1978
Design stress limits established as provided for in Section 3.9.3.1 should be included in the program. All of the above should be included in the PSAR. The FSAR should include program results summarizing stress and defor mation levels and environmental qualification, as well as maximum test envelope conditions for which the component qualifies, including end connec tion loads and operability results.
: 1. A summary description of any test models used (see Section 3.9.1.3).
3.9.3.3 Design and Installation Details for Mounting of Pressure Relief Devices. The design and installation criteria applicable to the mounting of the pressure-relieving devices (safety valves and relief valves) for the overpressure protection of ASME Class 1 and 2 system components should be described.
: 2. A summary description of mathematical models or test models used to evaluate the faulted conditions, as appropriate, for components and supports (see Sections 3.9.1.2 and 3.9.1.4).
Information pertaining to loading combinations should identify the most severe combination of the applicable loads due to internal fluid pressure, fluid states, dead weight of valves and piping, thermal load under heatup, steady-state and transient valve operation, reaction forces when valves are discharging (valve opening sequence and opening 3-41 Revision 3 November 1978 times), and seismic events (i.e., Operating Basis Earthquake and Safe Shutdown Earthquake).
: 3. For all ASME Code Class 2 and 3 components required to shut down the reactor or mitigate the consequences of a postulated piping failure without offsite power, a summary of the maximum total stress and deformation values should be provided in the FSAR for each of the component operating conditions. Identify those values that differ from the allowable limits by less than 10%.
The method of analysis and magnitude of any dynamic load factors used should be included.
The PSAR should include a listing of transients appropriate to ASME Code Class 1, 2, and 3 components, CS structures, and component supports and should be categorized on the basis of plant operating condition. In addition, for ASME Code Class 1 components and CS and ASME Code Class 1 component supports, include the number of cycles to be used in the fatigue analysis appropriate to each transient (see Section 3.9.1.1).
Discharge piping effects (i.e., closed or open system) should be discussed and included in the analysis.
3.9.3.2 Pump and Valve Operability Assurance. Provide a list that identifies all active ASME Class 1, 2, and 3 pumps and valves. Present the criteria to be employed in a test program, or program consisting of test and analysis, to ensure the operability of pumps required to function and valves required to open or close to perform a safety function during or following the specified plant event. Discuss the features of the program, and include conditions of test, scale effects if appropriate, loadings for specified plant event, transient loads, including seismic component, dynamic coupling to other systems, stress limits, deformation limits, and other information considered pertinent to assurance of operability.
The PSAR should include the criteria presented above, and the FSAR should present the results of the analysis.
Design stress limits established as provided for in Section 3.9.3.1 should be included in the program. All of the above should be included in the PSAR.
3.9.3.4 Component Supports.
The FSAR should include program results summarizing stress and defor mation levels and environmental qualification, as well as maximum test envelope conditions for which the component qualifies, including end connec tion loads and operability results.
Loading combinations, design transients, stress limits, and deformation limits should be provided as discussed in Section 3.9.3.1 . The supports for active components should be tested, analyzed, or analyzed and tested, as discussed for components in Section 3.9.3.2, and their effects on operability included in the discussion provided in that section.
3.9.3.3 Design and Installation Details for Mounting of Pressure Relief Devices. The design and installation criteria applicable to the mounting of the pressure-relieving devices (safety valves and relief valves) for the overpressure protection of ASME Class 1 and 2 system components should be described. Information pertaining to loading combinations should identify the most severe combination of the applicable loads due to internal fluid pressure, fluid states, dead weight of valves and piping, thermal load under heatup, steady-state and transient valve operation, reaction forces when valves are discharging (valve opening sequence and opening 3-41
 
Revision 3                                                   November 1978 times), and seismic events (i.e.,   Operating Basis Earthquake and Safe Shutdown Earthquake).
The method of analysis and magnitude   of any dynamic load factors used should be included. Discharge piping   effects (i.e., closed or open system) should be discussed and included in the analysis. The PSAR should include the criteria presented above, and     the FSAR should present the results of the analysis.
3.9.3.4 Component Supports. Loading combinations, design transients, stress limits, and deformation limits should be provided as discussed in Section 3.9.3.1 .
The supports for active components should be tested, analyzed, or analyzed and tested, as discussed for components in Section 3.9.3.2, and their effects on operability included in the discussion provided in that section.
The PSAR should present the criteria to be used, and the FSAR should present the results of analysis or test programs as discussed in Sections 3.9.3.1 and 3.9.3.2.
The PSAR should present the criteria to be used, and the FSAR should present the results of analysis or test programs as discussed in Sections 3.9.3.1 and 3.9.3.2.
3.9.4 Control Rod Drive Systems Information on the control rod drive systems (CRDS) should be provided by the applicant in the SAR for review by the staff. For electromagnetic systems, this includes the control rod drive mechanism (CRDM) and extends to the coupling interface with the reactivity control elements.
3.9.4   Control Rod Drive Systems Information on the control rod drive systems (CRDS) should be provided by the applicant in the SAR for review by the staff. For electromagnetic systems, this includes the control rod drive mechanism (CRDM) and extends to the coupling interface with the reactivity control elements. For hydraulic systems, this includes the CRDM, the hydraulic control unit, the condensate supply system, and the scram discharge volume and extends to the coupling interface with the reactivity control elements. For both types of systems, the CRDM housing should be treated as part of the reactor coolant pressure boundary (RCPB). Information on CRDS materials should be included in Section 4.5.1.
For hydraulic systems, this includes the CRDM, the hydraulic control unit, the condensate supply system, and the scram discharge volume and extends to the coupling interface with the reactivity control elements.
If other types of CRDS are proposed or if new features that are not specifically mentioned here are incorporated in current types of CRDS, information should be supplied for the new systems or new features.
For both types of systems, the CRDM housing should be treated as part of the reactor coolant pressure boundary (RCPB). Information on CRDS materials should be included in Section 4.5.1. If other types of CRDS are proposed or if new features that are not specifically mentioned here are incorporated in current types of CRDS, information should be supplied for the new systems or new features.
3.9.4.1 Descriptive Information of CRDS. The descriptive informa tion, including design criteria, testing programs, drawings, and a summary of the method of operation of the control rod drives, should be provided to permit an evaluation of the adequacy of the system to properly perform its design function.
3.9.4.1 Descriptive Information of CRDS. The descriptive informa tion, including design criteria, testing programs, drawings, and a summary of the method of operation of the control rod drives, should be provided to permit an evaluation of the adequacy of the system to properly perform its design function.
      "3.9.4.2 Applicable CRDS Design Specifications. Information should be provided pertaining to design codes, standards, specifications, and standard practices, as well as to NRC general design criteria, regulatory guides, and positions that are applied in the design, fabrication, con struction, and operation of the CRDS.
"3.9.4.2 Applicable CRDS Design Specifications.
3-42
Information should be provided pertaining to design codes, standards, specifications, and standard practices, as well as to NRC general design criteria, regulatory guides, and positions that are applied in the design, fabrication, con struction, and operation of the CRDS.3-42 Revision 3 November 1978 The various criteria should be supplied along with the names of the apparatus to which they apply. Pressurized parts of the system should be listed or referenced in Section 3.2.2 in order to determine the extent to which the applicant complies with the Class 1 requirements of Section III of the ASME Code for those portions that are part of the reactor coolant pressure boundary, and with other specified parts of Section III or other sections of the ASME Code for pressurized portions that are not part of the reactor coolant pressure boundary.
 
Information should be provided to evaluate the nonpressurized portions of the control rod drive system to determine the acceptability of design margins for allowable values of stress, deformation, and fatigue used in the analyses.
Revision 3                                                   November 1978 The various criteria should be supplied along with the names of the apparatus to which they apply.     Pressurized parts of the system should be listed or referenced in Section 3.2.2 in order to determine the extent to which the applicant complies with the Class 1 requirements of Section III of the ASME Code for those portions that are part of the reactor coolant pressure boundary, and with other specified parts of Section III or other sections of the ASME Code for pressurized portions that are not part of the reactor coolant pressure boundary.
If an experimental testing program is used in lieu of analysis, the program should be provided.
Information should be provided to evaluate the nonpressurized portions of the control rod drive system to determine the acceptability of design margins for allowable values of stress, deformation, and fatigue used in the analyses. If an experimental testing program is used in lieu of analysis, the program should be provided. The program description should adequately cover the areas of concern in the determination and verifica tion of the stress, deformation, and fatigue in the CRDS.
The program description should adequately cover the areas of concern in the determination and verifica tion of the stress, deformation, and fatigue in the CRDS. 3.9.4.3 Design Loads, Stress Limits, and Allowable Deformations.
3.9.4.3 Design Loads, Stress Limits, and Allowable Deformations.
Information should be presented that pertains to the applicable design loads and their appropriate combinations, to the corresponding design stress limits, and to the corresponding allowable deformations.
Information should be presented that pertains to the applicable design loads and their appropriate combinations, to the corresponding design stress limits, and to the corresponding allowable deformations.         The deformations are of interest in the present context only in those instances where a failure of movement could be postulated to occur and such movement would be necessary for a safety-related function.
The deformations are of interest in the present context only in those instances where a failure of movement could be postulated to occur and such movement would be necessary for a safety-related function.
If the applicant selects an experimental testing option in lieu of establishing a set of stress allowables and deformation allowables, an extensive description of the testing program should be provided.       The load combination, design stress limit, and allowable deformation criteria should be provided in the PSAR.
If the applicant selects an experimental testing option in lieu of establishing a set of stress allowables and deformation allowables, an extensive description of the testing program should be provided.
The design limits and safety margins for those components not designed to the ASME Code should be specified in the FSAR, or alternatively a commitment to provide this information prior to fuel loading should be made in the FSAR. Information similar to that requested in Section 3.9.3 should be provided for those components designed to the ASME Code.
The load combination, design stress limit, and allowable deformation criteria should be provided in the PSAR. The design limits and safety margins for those components not designed to the ASME Code should be specified in the FSAR, or alternatively a commitment to provide this information prior to fuel loading should be made in the FSAR. Information similar to that requested in Section 3.9.3 should be provided for those components designed to the ASME Code. 3.9.4.4 CRDS Performance Assurance Program. Plans for the conduct of a performance assurance program or plans that reference previous test programs or standard industry procedures for similar apparatus should be provided.
3.9.4.4 CRDS Performance Assurance Program.     Plans for the conduct of a performance assurance program or plans that reference previous test programs or standard industry procedures for similar apparatus should be provided. For example, the life cycle tezt program for the CRDS should be presented. The design performance assurance program presented should cover the following:
For example, the life cycle tezt program for the CRDS should be presented.
: 1. Life cycle test program,
The design performance assurance program presented should cover the following:  
: 2. Proper service environment imposed during test,
: 1. Life cycle test program, 2. Proper service environment imposed during test, 3. Mechanism functional tests, and 4. Program results (FSAR).3-43 Revision 3 November 1978 3.9.5 Reactor Pressure Vessel Internals The information requested in Sections 3.9.5.1 through 3.9.5.3 should be provided as part of an evaluation program to ensure the structural and functional integrity of the reactor internals (includes ASME Class CS (core supports) and non-ASME-Code-covered internals).
: 3. Mechanism functional tests, and
Information on reactor internals materials should be included in Section 4.5.2. 3.9.5.1 Design Arrangements.
: 4. Program results (FSAR).
The physical or design arrangements of all reactor internals structures, components, assemblies, and systems should be presented, including the manner of positioning and securing such items within the reactor pressure vessel, the manner of providing for axial and lateral retention and support of the internals assemblies and components, and the manner of accommodating dimensional changes due to thermal and other effects. The functional requirements for each com ponent should be described.
3-43
Verify that any significant changes in design from those in previously licensed plants of similar design do not affect the flow-induced vibration test results requested in Section 3.9.2. 3.9.5.2 Loading Conditions.
 
The plant and system operating condi tions and design basis events that provide the basis for the design of the reactor internals to sustain normal operation, anticipated operational occurrences, postulated accidents, and seismic events should be specified in accordance with the information requested in Section 3.9.1.1.
Revision 3                                                   November 1978 3.9.5   Reactor Pressure Vessel Internals The information requested in Sections 3.9.5.1 through 3.9.5.3 should be provided as part of an evaluation program to ensure the structural and functional integrity of the reactor internals (includes ASME Class CS (core supports) and non-ASME-Code-covered internals). Information on reactor internals materials should be included in Section 4.5.2.
3.9.5.3 Design Bases. Provide the specific design and service loading combinations applicable to reactor internals.
3.9.5.1 Design Arrangements. The physical or design arrangements of all reactor internals structures, components, assemblies, and systems should be presented, including the manner of positioning and securing such items within the reactor pressure vessel, the manner of providing for axial and lateral retention and support of the internals assemblies and components, and the manner of accommodating dimensional changes due to thermal and other effects. The functional requirements for each com ponent should be described. Verify that any significant changes in design from those in previously licensed plants of similar design do not affect the flow-induced vibration test results requested in Section 3.9.2.
These loading com binations should consider all the conditions in 3.9.5.2 above. Describe the method of combination of these loads. For each specific loading com bination, provide the design or service limits to be applied to the reactor internals.
3.9.5.2 Loading Conditions. The plant and system operating condi tions and design basis events that provide the basis for the design of the reactor internals to sustain normal operation, anticipated operational occurrences, postulated accidents, and seismic events should be specified in accordance with the information requested in Section 3.9.1.1.
Provide the deflection, cycling, and fatigue limits. Verify that the allowable deflections will not interfere with the functioning of all related components (e.g., control rods and standby cooling systems).
3.9.5.3 Design Bases. Provide the specific design and service loading combinations applicable to reactor internals. These loading com binations should consider all the conditions in 3.9.5.2 above. Describe the method of combination of these loads. For each specific loading com bination, provide the design or service limits to be applied to the reactor internals. Provide the deflection, cycling, and fatigue limits. Verify that the allowable deflections will not interfere with the functioning of all related components (e.g., control rods and standby cooling systems).
Indicate the extent to which the design and construction of the core support structures is in accordance with Subsection NG of the ASME Code. Indicate the extent to which the design of other reactor internals will be consistent with Article NG-3000. A summary of the maximum calculated total stress, deformation, and cumulative usage factor should be provided in the FSAR for each designated design or service limit. Details of the dynamic analyses should be presented in Section 3.9.2 of the SAR. 3.9.6 Inservice Testing of Pumps and Valves A test program should be provided that includes baseline preservice testing and a periodic inservice test program to ensure that all ASME Code Class 1, 2, and 3 pumps provided with an emergency power source and all ASME Code Class 1, 2, and 3 valves will be in a state of operational readiness to perform their safety function throughout the life of the plant.3-44 Revision 3 November 1978 3.9.6.1 Inservice Testing of Pumps. Descriptive information in the PSAR should cover the inservice test program of all ASME Code Class 1, 2, and 3 system pumps provided with an emergency power source. Refer ence value* tests for speed, pressure, flow rate, vibration, lubrication, and bearing temperature at normal pump operating conditions should be presented.
Indicate the extent to which the design and construction of the core support structures is in accordance with Subsection NG of the ASME Code. Indicate the extent to which the design of other reactor internals will be consistent with Article NG-3000. A summary of the maximum calculated total stress, deformation, and cumulative usage factor should be provided in the FSAR for each designated design or service limit. Details of the dynamic analyses should be presented in Section 3.9.2 of the SAR.
Methods for measuring the reference values and inservice values for the pump parameters listed above should be presented.
3.9.6   Inservice Testing of Pumps and Valves A test program should be provided that includes baseline preservice testing and a periodic inservice test program to ensure that all ASME Code Class 1, 2, and 3 pumps provided with an emergency power source and all ASME Code Class 1, 2, and 3 valves will be in a state of operational readiness to perform their safety function throughout the life of the plant.
In addition, the pump test plan and schedule should be provided and included in the technical specifications.
3-44
3.9.6.2 Inservice Testing of Valves. Descriptive information in the PSAR should cover the inservice test program of all ASME Code Class 1, 2, and 3 valves. The test program should include preservice tests, valve replacement, valve repair and maintenance, indication of valve position, and inservice tests for all valve categories (as defined in IWV-2100 of the ASME Code). In addition, the valve test procedure and schedule should be provided and included in the technical specifications.
 
3.9.6.3 Relief Requests.
Revision 3                                                   November 1978 3.9.6.1 Inservice Testing of Pumps.     Descriptive information in the PSAR should cover the inservice test program of all ASME Code Class 1, 2, and 3 system pumps provided with an emergency power source. Refer ence value* tests for speed, pressure, flow rate, vibration, lubrication, and bearing temperature at normal pump operating conditions should be presented. Methods for measuring the reference values and inservice values for the pump parameters listed above should be presented.       In addition, the pump test plan and schedule should be provided and included in the technical specifications.
Paragraph 50.55a(g) of 10 CFR requires a nuclear power facility to periodically update its inservice testing program to meet the requirements of future revisions of Section XI of the ASME Code. However, if it proves impractical to implement these criteria, the applicant is allowed to submit requests for relief from Section XI requirements on a case-by-case basis. Information provided should describe the specific area of relief requested, explain why compliance with Sec tion XI in this case is impractical, and describe any alternative test procedures.
3.9.6.2 Inservice Testing of Valves.     Descriptive information in the PSAR should cover the inservice test program of all ASME Code Class 1, 2, and 3 valves. The test program should include preservice tests, valve replacement, valve repair and maintenance, indication of valve position, and inservice tests for all valve categories (as defined in IWV-2100 of the ASME Code).     In addition, the valve test procedure and schedule should be provided and included in the technical specifications.
3.10 Seismic Qualification of Seismic Category I Instrumentation and Electrical Equipment All Seismic Category I instrumentation, electrical equipment, and their supports should be identified.
3.9.6.3 Relief Requests. Paragraph 50.55a(g) of 10 CFR requires a nuclear power facility to periodically update its inservice testing program to meet the requirements of future revisions of Section XI of the ASME Code. However, if it proves impractical to implement these criteria, the applicant is allowed to submit requests for relief from Section XI requirements on a case-by-case basis. Information provided should describe the specific area of relief requested, explain why compliance with Sec tion XI in this case is impractical, and describe any alternative test procedures.
The seismic qualification criteria applicable to the reactor protection system, engineered-safety-feature Class 1E equipment, the emergency power system, and all auxiliary safety related systems and supports should be provided.
3.10   Seismic Qualification of Seismic Category I Instrumentation and Electrical Equipment All Seismic Category I instrumentation, electrical equipment, and their supports should be identified. The seismic qualification criteria applicable to the reactor protection system, engineered-safety-feature Class 1E equipment, the emergency power system, and all auxiliary safety related systems and supports should be provided. Methods and procedures used to qualify electrical equipment, instrumentation, and their supports should also be provided.
Methods and procedures used to qualify electrical equipment, instrumentation, and their supports should also be provided.
3.10.1   Seismic Qualification Criteria The criteria for seismic qualification, including the decision criteria for selecting a particular test or method of analysis, the con siderations defining the input motion, and the process to demonstrate adequacy of the seismic qualification program, should be provided. The extent to which guidance contained in Regulatory Guide 1.100, "Seismic Qualification of Electric Equipment for Nuclear Power Plants," will be used should be indicated.
3.10.1 Seismic Qualification Criteria The criteria for seismic qualification, including the decision criteria for selecting a particular test or method of analysis, the con siderations defining the input motion, and the process to demonstrate adequacy of the seismic qualification program, should be provided.
Defined in IWP-3112 of the ASME Code.
The extent to which guidance contained in Regulatory Guide 1.100, "Seismic Qualification of Electric Equipment for Nuclear Power Plants," will be used should be indicated.
3-45
Defined in IWP-3112 of the ASME Code.3-45 Revision 3 November 1978 3.10.2 Methods and Procedures for Qualifying Electrical Equipment and Instrumentation The methods and procedures used to qualify by test or analysis Seismic Category I instrumentation and electrical equipment for operation during and after the Safe Shutdown Earthquake and to ensure structural and func tional integrity of the equipment after several occurrences of the Operating Basis Earthquake should be provided.
 
Seismic Category I instrumentation and electrical equipment include the reactor protection system, engineered I safety-feature Class IE equipment, emergency power system, and all auxiliary safety-related systems.
Revision 3                                                   November 1978 3.10.2 Methods and Procedures for Qualifying Electrical Equipment and Instrumentation The methods and procedures used to qualify by test or analysis Seismic Category I instrumentation and electrical equipment for operation during and after the Safe Shutdown Earthquake and to ensure structural and func tional integrity of the equipment after several occurrences of the Operating Basis Earthquake should be provided. Seismic Category I instrumentation and electrical equipment include the reactor protection system, engineered I safety-feature Class IE equipment, emergency power system, and all auxiliary safety-related systems.
3.10.3 Methods and Procedures of Analysis or Testing of Supports of Electrical Equipment and Instrumentation The methods and procedures for analysis or testing of Seismic Cate gory I instrumentation and electrical equipment supports and the verifi cation procedures used to account for the possible amplification of design loads (amplitude and frequency content) under seismic conditions should be provided.
3.10.3 Methods and Procedures of Analysis or Testing of Supports of Electrical Equipment and Instrumentation The methods and procedures for analysis or testing of Seismic Cate gory I instrumentation and electrical equipment supports and the verifi cation procedures used to account for the possible amplification of design loads (amplitude and frequency content) under seismic conditions should be provided. Supports include items such as battery racks, instrument racks, control consoles, cabinets, panels, and cable trays.
Supports include items such as battery racks, instrument racks, control consoles, cabinets, panels, and cable trays. 3.10.4 Operating License Review (FSAR) The results of tests and analyses that ensure the proper implementa tion of the criteria established in the construction permit review, and that demonstrate adequate seismic qualification, should be provided in the FSAR. 3.11 Environmental Design of Mechanical and Electrical Equipment The purpose of this section is to provide information on the environ mental conditions and design bases for which the mechanical, instrumenta tion, and electrical portions of the engineered safety features and reactor protection systems are designed to ensure acceptable performance in all environments (e.g., normal, tests, and accident).
3.10.4 Operating License Review (FSAR)
The following specific information should be included concerning the design bases related to the capability of the mechanical.
The results of tests and analyses that ensure the proper implementa tion of the criteria established in the construction permit review, and that demonstrate adequate seismic qualification, should be provided in the FSAR.
nstrumenta tion, and electrical portions of the engineered safety features, and reactor protection system to perform their intended functions in the combinec postaccident environment of temperature, pressure, humi ity, chemistry, and radia.ion.
3.11   Environmental Design of Mechanical and Electrical Equipment The purpose of this section is to provide information on the environ mental conditions and design bases for which the mechanical, instrumenta tion, and electrical portions of the engineered safety features and reactor protection systems are designed to ensure acceptable performance in all environments (e.g., normal, tests, and accident).
3.11.1 Equipment I-entification and Environmental Conditions Ali safety-related equipment and components (e.g., motors, cables, filters. pumrp seals. shielding) iocated in the Frimary containment and "e!h*Pwhe t:at ;re required to function during and subsequent.
The following specific information should be included concerning the design bases related to the capability of the mechanical. nstrumenta tion, and electrical portions of the engineered safety features, and reactor protection system to perform their intended functions in the combinec postaccident environment of temperature, pressure, humi ity, chemistry, and radia.ion.
to any of the design basis accidents should be identified and their locations specified.
3.11.1   Equipment I-entification and Environmental Conditions Ali safety-related equipment and components (e.g., motors, cables, filters. pumrp seals. shielding) iocated in the Frimary containment and "e!h*Pwhet:at ;re required to function during and subsequent. to any of the design basis accidents should be identified and their locations specified. for equipment inside containment, the locatioin should secCifv 3-46
for equipment inside containment, the locatioin should secCifv 3-46 Revision 3 Revision 3 November 1978 whether inside or outside the missile shield (for PWRs) or whether inside or outside the drywell (for BWRs). Both the normal and accident environmental conditions should be explic itly defined for each item of equipment.
 
These definitions should include the following parameters:
Revision 3                                                   November 1978 whether inside or outside the missile shield (for PWRs) or whether inside or outside the drywell (for BWRs).
temperature, pressure, relative humidity, radia tion, chemicals, and vibration (nonseismic).
Both the normal and accident environmental conditions itly defined for each item of equipment. These definitions should  be explic should include the following parameters: temperature, pressure, relative humidity, radia tion, chemicals, and vibration (nonseismic).
For the normal environment, including that due to loss of environ mental control systems, specific values should be provided.
For the normal environment, including that due to loss of environ mental control systems, specific values should be provided. For the accident environment, these parameters should be presented as functions of time, and the cause of the postulated environment (loss-of-coolant accident, steam line break, or other) should be identified.
For the accident environment, these parameters should be presented as functions of time, and the cause of the postulated environment (loss-of-coolant accident, steam line break, or other) should be identified.
The length of time that each item of equipment is required to operate in the accident environment should be provided.
The length of time that each item of equipment is required to operate in the accident environment should be provided.
3.11.2 Qualification Tests and Analyses A description should be provided of the qualification tests and analyses that have been or will be performed on each of these items to ensure that it will perform in the combined temperature, pressure, humidity, chemical, and radiation environment.
3.11.2   Qualification Tests and Analyses A description should be provided of the qualification tests and analyses that have been or will be performed on each of these items to ensure it will perform in the combined temperature, pressure, humidity,         that chemical, and radiation environment. The specific values of temperature, pressure, humidity, chemicals, and radiation should be included.
The specific values of temperature, pressure, humidity, chemicals, and radiation should be included.
Indicate how the requirements of General Design Criteria 1, 4, and 50 of Appendix A to 10 CFR Part 50 and Criterion III of Appendix       23, to 10 CFR Part 50 will be met. The extent to which the guidance             B contained in the regulatory guides listed below will be utilized should be indicated:
Indicate how the requirements of General Design Criteria 1, 4, 23, and 50 of Appendix A to 10 CFR Part 50 and Criterion III of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 50 will be met. The extent to which the guidance contained in the regulatory guides listed below will be utilized should be indicated:
Regulatory Guide i.30 (Safety Guide 30), "Quality Assurance Require ments for the Installation, Inspection, and Testing of Instrumentation and Electric Equipment;"
Regulatory Guide i.30 (Safety Guide 30), "Quality Assurance Require ments for the Installation, Inspection, and Testing of Instrumentation and Electric Equipment;" Regulatory Guide 1.40, "Qualification Tests of Continuous-Duty Motors Installed T iside the Containment of Water-Cooled Nuclear Power Plants;" Regulatory Guide 1.63, "Electric Penetration Assemblies in Contain ment Structures for Light-Water-Cooled Nuclear Power Plants;" Regulatory Guide 1.73, "Qualification Tests of Electric Valve Oper ators Installed Inside the Containment of Nuclear Power Plants;" Regulatory Guide 1.89, "Qualification of Class 1E Equipment for Nuclear Power Plants;" and Regulatory Guide 1.131, "Qualification Tests of Electric Cables, Field Splices, and Connections for Light-Water-Cooled Nuclear Power Plants." 3-47 November 1978 3.11.3 Qualification Test Results The results of the qualification tests for each type of equipment should be provided in the FSAR or should be referenced if previously submitted.
Regulatory Guide 1.40, "Qualification Tests of Continuous-Duty Motors Installed T iside the Containment of Water-Cooled Nuclear Power Plants;"
3.11.4 Loss of Ventilation Provide the bases that ensure that loss of the air conditioning or ventilation system will not adversely affect the operability of safety related control and electrical equipment located in the control room and other areas. The analyses performed to identify the worst case environ ment (e.g. , temperature, humidity) should be described, including identifi cation and determination of the limiting condition with regard to temper ature that would require reactor shutdown.
Regulatory Guide 1.63, "Electric Penetration Assemblies in Contain ment Structures for Light-Water-Cooled Nuclear Power Plants;"
Any testing (factory or onsite) that has been or will be performed to confirm satisfactory operability of control and electrical equipment under extreme environmental conditions should be described.
Regulatory Guide 1.73, "Qualification Tests of Electric Valve ators Installed Inside the Containment of Nuclear Power Plants;"         Oper Regulatory Guide 1.89,   "Qualification of Class 1E Equipment for Nuclear Power Plants;" and Regulatory Guide 1.131, "Qualification Tests of Field Splices, and Connections for Light-Water-CooledElectric        Cables, Nuclear Power Plants."
The documentation of the successful completion of qualification tests for each type of equipment should be specified in the PSAR and supplied in the FSAR. 3.11.5 Estimated Chemical and Radiation Environment For each engineered safety feature (ESF), the design source term for the chemical and radiation environment both for normal operation and for the design basis accident environment should be identified.
3-47
For engineered safety features inside containment, the chemical composition and resulting pH of the liquids in the reactor core and in the containment Ssump should be identified.
 
Indicate the extent to which estimates of radiation exposures are based on a radiation source term that is consistent with Regulatory Guides 1.3, "Assumptions Used for Evaluating the Potential Radiological Consequences of a Loss-of-Coolant Accident for Boiling Water Reactors," 1.4, "Assumptions Used for Evaluating the Potential Radiological Consequences of a Loss-of-Coolant Accident for Pressurized Water Reactors," and 1.7, "Control of Combustible Gas Concentrations in Containment Following a Loss-of-Coolant Accident." Wherever alternative approaches are used, demonstrate that an acceptable level of safety has been attained.
Revision 3                                                    November 1978 3.11.3 Qualification Test Results The results of the qualification tests for each type of equipment should be provided in the FSAR or should be referenced if previously submitted.
Determina tions of the exposure of organic components on ESF systems should consider both beta and gamma radiation.
3.11.4   Loss of Ventilation Provide the bases that ensure that loss of the air conditioning or ventilation system will not adversely affect the operability of safety related control and electrical equipment located in the control room and other areas. The analyses performed to identify the worst case environ ment (e.g. , temperature, humidity) should be described, including identifi cation and determination of the limiting condition with regard to temper ature that would require reactor shutdown. Any testing (factory or onsite) that has been or will be performed to confirm satisfactory operability of control and electrical equipment under extreme environmental conditions should be described. The documentation of the successful completion of qualification tests for each type of equipment should be specified in the PSAR and supplied in the FSAR.
Beta and gamma exposures should be tabulated separately and should list the average energy of each type of radiation.
3.11.5   Estimated Chemical and Radiation Environment For each engineered safety feature (ESF), the design source term for the chemical and radiation environment both for normal operation and for the design basis accident environment should be identified.       For engineered safety features inside containment, the chemical composition and resulting pH of the liquids in the reactor core and in the containment Ssump should be identified. Indicate the extent to which estimates of radiation exposures are based on a radiation source term that is consistent with Regulatory Guides 1.3, "Assumptions Used for Evaluating the Potential Radiological Consequences of a Loss-of-Coolant Accident for Boiling Water Reactors," 1.4, "Assumptions Used for Evaluating the Potential Radiological Consequences of a Loss-of-Coolant Accident for Pressurized Water Reactors,"
For ESF systems outside containment, the radiation estimates should take into account factors affecting the source term such as containment leak rate, meteorological dispersion (if appropriate), and operation of other ESF systems. The engineered safety features considered and the correspond ing source terms and chemical environments should be presented in tabular form. All assumptions used in the calculation should be listed.3-48 Revision 3 Revision 3 November 1978 4. REACTOR In this chapter of the SAR, the applicant should provide an evalua tion and supporting information to establish the capability of the reactor to perform its safety functions throughout -its design lifetime under all normal operational modes, including both transient and steady state, and accident conditions.
and 1.7, "Control of Combustible Gas Concentrations in Containment Following a Loss-of-Coolant Accident."   Wherever alternative approaches are used, demonstrate that an acceptable level of safety has been attained. Determina tions of the exposure of organic components on ESF systems should consider both beta and gamma radiation. Beta and gamma exposures should be tabulated separately and should list the average energy of each type of radiation.
This chapter should also include information to support the analyses presented in Chapter 15, "Accident Analyses." 4.1 Summary Description A summary description of the mechanical, nuclear, and thermal and hydraulic designs of the various reactor components, including the fuel, reactor vessel internals, and reactivity control systems, should be given. The description should indicate the independent and interrelated perform ance and safety functions of each component.
For ESF systems outside containment, the radiation estimates should take into account factors affecting the source term such as containment leak rate, meteorological dispersion (if appropriate), and operation of other ESF systems. The engineered safety features considered and the correspond ing source terms and chemical environments should be presented in tabular form. All assumptions used in the calculation should be listed.
Information on control rod drive systems and reactor vessel internals presented in Sections 3.9.4 and 3.9.5 may be incorporated by reference.
3-48
A summary table of the important design and performance characteristics should be included.
 
A tabulation of analysis techniques used and load conditions considered, including computer code names, should also be included.
Revision 3                                                   November 1978
4.2 Fuel System Design The fuel system is defined as consisting of guide tubes or thimbles; fuel rods with fuel pellets, insulator pellets, cladding, springs, end closures, fill gas, and getters; water rods; burnable poison rods; spacer grids and springs; assembly end fittings and springs; channel boxes; and the reactivity control assembly.
: 4. REACTOR In this chapter of the SAR, the applicant should provide an tion and supporting information to establish the capability           evalua of the reactor to perform its safety functions throughout -its design lifetime normal operational modes, including both transient and steady under all accident conditions. This chapter should also include information state, and support the analyses presented in Chapter 15, "Accident Analyses."         to 4.1 Summary Description A summary description of the mechanical, nuclear, and thermal hydraulic designs of the various reactor components, including             and reactor vessel internals, and reactivity control systems, should   the  fuel, be given.
In the case of the control rods, this section covers the reactivity control elements that extend from the coupling interface of the control rod drive mechanism.
The description should indicate the independent and interrelated perform ance and safety functions of each component. Information on drive systems and reactor vessel internals presented in Sections control    rod and 3.9.5 may be incorporated by reference.                             3.9.4 A summary table of the important design and performance characteristics should be tabulation of analysis techniques used and load conditions included. A considered, including computer code names, should also be included.
The design bases for the mechanical, chemical, and thermal design of the fuel system that can affect or limit the safe, reliable operation of the plant should be presented.
4.2 Fuel System Design The fuel system is defined as consisting of guide tubes or thimbles; fuel rods with fuel pellets, insulator pellets, cladding, springs, end closures, fill gas, and getters; water rods; burnable poison grids and springs; assembly end fittings and springs; channelrods; spacer boxes; and the reactivity control assembly. In the case of the control rods, this section covers the reactivity control elements that extend coupling interface of the control rod drive mechanism. The         from the for the mechanical, chemical, and thermal design of the fuel   design    bases system that can affect or limit the safe, reliable operation of the plant presented. The description of the fuel system mechanical design   should be include the following aspects: (1) mechanical design limits             should for allowable stresses, deflection, cycling, and fatigue,     such  as  those for fuel fission gas inventory and pressure, (3) a listing     (2)  capacity properties, and (4) considerations for radiation damage, claddingof material collapse time, materials selection, and normal operational vibration.
The description of the fuel system mechanical design should include the following aspects: (1) mechanical design limits such as those for allowable stresses, deflection, cycling, and fatigue, (2) capacity for fuel fission gas inventory and pressure, (3) a listing of material properties, and (4) considerations for radiation damage, cladding collapse time, materials selection, and normal operational vibration.
Details for seismic loadings should be presented in Section 3.7.3; shock (LOCA) loadings and the effects of combined shock and seismic loads presented in this section. The chemical design should consider     should be all possible fuel-cladding-coolant interactions.       The description of the thermal design should include such items as maximum fuel temperatures, clad-to-fuel gap conductance as a function of   and cladding burnup and operating conditions, and fuel cladding integrity criteria.
Details for seismic loadings should be presented in Section 3.7.3; shock (LOCA) loadings and the effects of combined shock and seismic loads should be presented in this section. The chemical design should consider all possible fuel-cladding-coolant interactions.
4.2.1   Design Bases The applicant should explain and substantiate the selection of bases from the viewpoint of safety considerations. Where                 design the limits selected 4-1
The description of the thermal design should include such items as maximum fuel and cladding temperatures, clad-to-fuel gap conductance as a function of burnup and operating conditions, and fuel cladding integrity criteria.
 
4.2.1 Design Bases The applicant should explain and substantiate the selection of design bases from the viewpoint of safety considerations.
Revision 3                                                      November 1978 are consistent with proven practice, a referenced statement to that effect will suffice; where the limits extend beyond present practice, an evalua tion and an explanation based on developmental work or analysis should be provided. These bases may be expressed as explicit numbers or as general conditions.
Where the limits selected 4-1 November 1978 are consistent with proven practice, a referenced statement to that effect will suffice; where the limits extend beyond present practice, an evalua tion and an explanation based on developmental work or analysis should be provided.
The discussion of design bases should include a description of the functional characteristics in terms of desired performance under stated conditions. This should relate systems, components, and materials per formance under normal operating, anticipated transient, and accident con ditions. The discussion should consider the following with respect to performance:
These bases may be expressed as explicit numbers or as general conditions.
: i. Cladding
The discussion of design bases should include a description of the functional characteristics in terms of desired performance under stated conditions.
: a. The mechanical properties of the cladding, e.g., Young's modulus, Poisson's ratio, design dimensions, strength, ductility, and creep rupture limits, and the effects of design temperature and irradia tion on the properties,
This should relate systems, components, and materials per formance under normal operating, anticipated transient, and accident con ditions. The discussion should consider the following with respect to performance:  
: b. Stress-strain limits,
: i. Cladding a. The mechanical properties of the cladding, e.g., Young's modulus, Poisson's ratio, design dimensions, strength, ductility, and creep rupture limits, and the effects of design temperature and irradia tion on the properties, b. Stress-strain limits, c. Vibration and fatigue, d. The chemical properties of the cladding.
: c. Vibration and fatigue,
: 2. Fuel Material a. The thermal-physical properties of the fuel, e.g., melting point, thermal conductivity, density, and specific heat, and the effects of design temperature and irradiation on the properties, b. The effects of fuel densification and fission product swelling, c. The chemical properties of the fuel. 3. Fuel Rod Performance  
: d. The chemical properties of the cladding.
: a. Analytical models and the conservatism in the input data, b. The ability of the models to predict experimental or operating characteristics, c. The standard deviation or statistical uncertainty asso ciated with the correlations or analytical models. 4. Spacer Grid and Channel Boxes a. Mechanical, chemical, thermal, and irradiation properties of the materials, 4-2 Revision 3 Revision 3 November 1978 b. Vibration and fatigue, c. Chemical compatibility with other core components, including cool ant. 5. Fuel Assembly a. Structural design, b. Thermal-hydraulic design. 6. Reactivity Control Assembly and Burnable Poison Rods a. The thermal-physical properties of the absorber material, b. The compatibility of the absorber and cladding materials, c. Cladding stress-strain limits, d. Irradiation behavior of absorber material.
: 2. Fuel Material
: 7. Surveillance Program a. The requirements for surveillance and testing of irradiated fuel rods, burnable poison rods, control rods, channel boxes, and instru ment tube/thimbles.
: a. The thermal-physical properties of the fuel, e.g., melting point, thermal conductivity, density, and specific heat, and the effects of design temperature and irradiation on the properties,
4.2.2 Description and Design Drawings A description and preliminary (PSAR) or final (FSAR) design drawing of the fuel rod ccmponents, burnable poison rods, fuel assemblies, and reactivity control assemblies showing arrangement, dimensions, critical tolerances, sealing and handling features, methods of support, internal pressurization, fission gas spaces, burnable poison content, and internal components should be provided.
: b. The effects   of fuel densification and fission product swelling,
A discussion of design features that prevent improper orientation or placement of fuel rods or assemblies within the core should be included.
: c. The chemical properties of the fuel.
4.2.3 Design Evaluation An evaluation of the fuel system design should be presented for the physically feasible combinations of chemical, thermal, irradiation, mechanical, and hydraulic interaction.
: 3. Fuel Rod Performance
Evaluation of these interactions should include the effects of normal reactor operations, anticipated tran sients without scram, and postulated accidents.
: a. Analytical models and the conservatism in the input data,
The fuel system design evaluation should include the following:  
: b. The ability   of the models   to predict experimental   or operating characteristics,
: 1. Cladding a. Vibration analysis, 4-3 November 1978 b. Fuel element internal and external pressure and cladding stresses during normal and accident conditions with particular emphasis on temperature transients or depressurization accidents, c. Potential for chemical reaction, including hydriding, fission product attack, and crud deposition, d. Fretting and crevice corrosion, e. Stress-accelerated corrosion, f. Cycling and fatigue, g. Material wastage due to mass transfer, h. Rod bowing due to thermal, irradiation, and creep dimen sional changes, i. Consequences of power-coolant mismatch, j. Irradiation stability of the cladding, k. Creep collapse-and creepdown.
: c. The standard deviation or statistical     uncertainty asso ciated with the correlations or analytical models.
: 2. Fuel a. Dimensional stability of the fuel, b. Potential for chemical interaction, including possible waterlogging rupture, c. Thermal stability of the fuel, including densification, phase changes, and thermal expansion, d. Irradiation stability of the fuel, including fission product swelling and fission gas release.
: 4. Spacer Grid and Channel Boxes
: 3. Fuel Rod Performance  
: a. Mechanical, chemical, thermal, and irradiation properties of the materials, 4-2
: a. Fuel-cladding mechanical interaction, b. Failure and burnup experience, including the thermal condi tions for which the experience was obtained for a given type of fuel and the results of long-term irradiation testing of production fuel and test specimens, c. Fuel and cladding temperatures, both local and gross, with an indication of the correlation used for thermal conductivity, gap conduct ance as a function of burnup and power level, and the method of employing peaking factors, 4-4 Revision 3 Revision 3 November 1978 d. An analysis of the potential effect of sudden temperature transients on waterlogged elements or elements with high internal gas pressure, e. An analysis of temperature effects during anticipated opera tional transients that may cause bowing or other damage to fuel, control rods, or structure, f. An analysis of the energy release and potential for a chemical reaction should physical burnout of fuel elements occur,* g. An analysis of the energy release and resulting pressure pulse should waterlogged elements rupture and spill fuel into the coolant,*  
 
: h. An analysis of the behavior of fuel rods in the event coolant flow blockage is predicted.*  
Revision 3                                                           November 1978
: 4. Spacer Grid and Channel Boxes a. Dimensional stability considering thermal, chemical, and irradiation effects, b. Spring loads for grids. 5. Fuel Assembly a. Loads applied by core restraint system, b. Analysis of combined shock (including LOCA) and seismic loading, c. Loads applied in fuel handling, including misaligned handling tools. 6. Reactivity Control Assembly and Burnable Poison Rods a. Internal pressure and cladding stresses during normal, transient, and accident conditions, b. Thermal stability of the absorber material, including phase changes and thermal expansion, c. Irradiation stability of the absorber material, taking into consideration gas release and swelling, d. Potential for chemical interaction, including possible waterlogging rupture.
: b. Vibration and fatigue,
If this information is included in Chapter 15, it may be incorporated in this section by reference.
: c. Chemical compatibility with other core components, cool ant.                                                                   including
4-5 November 1978 4.2.4 Testing and Inspection Plan The testing and inspections to be performed to verify the design characteristics of the fuel system components, including clad integrity, dimensions, fuel enrichment, burnable poison concentration, absorber com position, and characteristics of the fuel, absorber, and poison pellets, should be described.
: 5.     Fuel Assembly
Descriptions of radiographic inspections, destruc tive tests, fuel assembly dimensional checks, and the program for inspec tion of new fuel assemblies and new control rods to ensure mechanical integrity after shipment should be included.
: a. Structural design,
Where testing and inspec tion programs are essentially the same as for previously accepted plants, a referenced statement to that effect with an identification of the fabricator and a summary table of the important design and performance characteristics should be provided.
: b. Thermal-hydraulic design.
4.3 Nuclear Design 4.3.1 Design Bases The design bases for the nuclear design of the fuel and reactivity control systems should be provided and discussea, including nuclear and reactivity control limits such as excess reactivity, fuel burnup, nega tive reactivity feedback, core design lifetime, fuel replacement program, reactivity coefficients, stability criteria, maximum controlled reactiv ity insertion rates, control of power distribution, shutdown margins, stuck rod criteria, rod speeds, chemical and mechanical shim control, burnable poison requirements, and backup and emergency shutdown provisions.
: 6.     Reactivity Control Assembly and Burnable Poison Rods
4.3.2 Description A description of the nuclear characteristics of the design should be provided and should include the information indicated in the follow ing sections.
: a. The thermal-physical properties of the absorber material,
4.3.2.1 Nuclear Design Description.
: b. The compatibility of the absorber and cladding materials,
Features of the nuclear design not discussed in specific subsections should be listed, described, or illustrated for appropriate times in the fuel cycle. These should include such areas as fuel enrichment distributions, burnable poison distributions, other physical features of the lattice or assemblies relevant to nuclear design parameters, delayed neutron fraction and neutron lifetimes, core lifetime and burnup, plutonium buildup, soluble poison insertion rates, and the relationship to cooldown or xenon burnout or other transient requirements.
: c. Cladding stress-strain limits,
4.3.2.2 Power Distribution.
: d. Irradiation behavior of absorber material.
Full quantitative information on calcu lated "normal" power distributions, including distributions within typical assemblies, axial distributions, gross radial distributions (XY assembly patterns), and nonseparable aspects of radial and axial distributions should be presented.
: 7.     Surveillance Program
4-6 Revision 3 November 1978 A full range of both representative and limiting power density patterns related to representative and limiting conditions of such relevant parameters as power, flow, flow distribution, rod patterns, time in cycle (burnup and possible burnup distributions), cycle, burnable poison, and xenon should be covered in sufficient detail to ensure that normally anticipated distributions are fully described and that the effects of all parameters important in affecting distributions are displayed.
: a. The requirements for surveillance and testing fuel rods, burnable poison rods, control rods,                       of irradiated channel boxes, and instru ment tube/thimbles.
This should include details of transient power shapes and magnitudes accom panying normal transients such as load following, xenon buildup, decay or redistribution, and xenon oscillation control. Describe the radial power distribution within a fuel pin and its variation with burnup if use is made of this in thermal calculations.
4.2.2     Description and Design Drawings A description and preliminary (PSAR) or final of the fuel rod ccmponents, burnable poison                 (FSAR) design drawing rods, reactivity control assemblies showing arrangement, fuel assemblies, and tolerances, sealing and handling features, methods dimensions, critical pressurization, fission gas spaces, burnable               of support, internal poison content, and internal components should be provided.         A discussion of design features that prevent improper orientation or placement of fuel rods or assemblies within the core should be included.
Discuss and assign specific magnitudes to errors or uncertainties that may be associated with these calculated distributions and present the experimental data, including results from both critical experiments and operating reactors that back up the analysis, likely distribution limits, and assigned uncertainty magnitudes.
4.2.3   Design Evaluation An evaluation of the fuel system design should physically feasible combinations of chemical,                 be presented for the mechanical, and hydraulic interaction. Evaluation       thermal,    irradiation, should include the effects of normal reactor operations,   of  these  interactions sients without scram, and postulated accidents.                   anticipated  tran The fuel system design evaluation should include the following:
Experimental checks to be made on this reactor and the criteria for satisfactory results should be discussed.
: 1. Cladding
The design power distributions (shapes and magnitudes) and the design peaking factors to be used in steady-state limit statements and transient analysis initial conditions should be given in detail. Include all relevant components and such variables as maximum allowable peaking factors vs. axial position or changes over the fuel cycle. Justify the selections by a discussion of the relationship of these design assumptions to the previously presented expected and limiting distributions and uncertainty analysis.
: a.     Vibration analysis, 4-3
Describe the relationship of these distributions to the monitoring instrumentation, discussing in detail the adequacy of the number of instru ments and their spatial deployment (including allowed failures);
 
required correlations between readings and peaking factors, calibrations and errors, operational procedures and specific operational limits; axial and azimuthal asymmetry limits; limits for alarms, rod blocks, scrams, etc., to demon strate that sufficient information is available to determine, monitor, and limit distributions associated with normal operation to within proper limits. Describe in detail all calculations, computer codes, and computers used in the course of operations that are involved in translating power distribution-related measurements into calculated power distribution infor mation. Give the frequency with which the calculations are normally performed and execution times of the calculations.
Revision 3                                                        November 1978
Describe the input data required for the codes. Present a full quantitative analysis of the uncertainties associated with the sources and processing of informa tion used to produce operational power distribution results. This should include consideration of allowed instrumentation failures.
: b. Fuel element internal and external pressure and cladding stresses during normal and accident conditions with particular emphasis on temperature transients or depressurization accidents,
4.3.2.3 Reactivity Coefficients.
: c. Potential for chemical reaction,     including hydriding, fission product attack, and crud deposition,
Full quantitative information on calculated reactivity coefficients, including fuel Doppler coefficient, moderator coefficients (density, temperature, pressure, void), and power 4-7 Revision-3 November 1978 coefficient should be presented.
: d. Fretting and crevice corrosion,
The precise definitions or assumptions relating to parameters involved, e.g., effective fuel temperature for Doppler, distinction between intra- and interassembly moderator coeffi cients, parameters held constant in power coefficient, spatial variation of parameter, and flux weighting used, should be stated. The information should be primarily in the form of curves covering the full applicable range of the parameters (density, temperature, pressure, void, power) from cold startup through limiting values used in accident analyses.
: e. Stress-accelerated corrosion,
: f. Cycling and fatigue,
: g. Material wastage due to mass transfer,
: h. Rod bowing due to thermal,   irradiation, and creep dimen sional changes,
: i. Consequences of power-coolant mismatch,
: j. Irradiation stability of the cladding,
: k. Creep collapse-and creepdown.
: 2. Fuel
: a. Dimensional stability of the fuel,
: b. Potential   for chemical interaction,   including possible waterlogging rupture,
: c. Thermal stability of the fuel,     including densification, phase changes,   and thermal expansion,
: d. Irradiation stability of the fuel, including fission product swelling and fission gas release.
: 3. Fuel Rod Performance
: a. Fuel-cladding mechanical interaction,
: b. Failure and burnup experience, including the thermal condi tions for which the experience was obtained for a given type of fuel and the results of long-term irradiation testing of production fuel and test specimens,
: c. Fuel and cladding temperatures, both local and gross, with an indication of the correlation used for thermal conductivity, gap conduct ance as a function of burnup and power level, and the method of employing peaking factors, 4-4
 
Revision 3                                                         November 1978
: d. An analysis of the potential effect transients on waterlogged elements or elements withof sudden temperature high internal gas pressure,
: e. An analysis of temperature effects tional transients that may cause bowing or other during          anticipated opera damage to fuel, control rods, or structure,
: f. An analysis of the energy release and potential for chemical reaction should physical burnout of fuel elements                       a occur,*
: g. An analysis of the energy release pulse should waterlogged elements rupture and spilland        resulting pressure fuel into the coolant,*
: h. An analysis of the behavior of fuel rods in the event coolant flow blockage is predicted.*
: 4. Spacer Grid and Channel Boxes
: a. Dimensional stability considering thermal,         chemical,   and irradiation effects,
: b. Spring loads for grids.
: 5. Fuel Assembly
: a. Loads applied by core restraint system,
: b. Analysis of combined shock (including       LOCA) and seismic loading,
: c. Loads applied   in fuel handling,   including misaligned handling tools.
: 6. Reactivity Control Assembly and Burnable Poison Rods
: a. Internal pressure and cladding stresses during normal, transient, and accident conditions,
: b. Thermal stability of the absorber material,       including phase changes and thermal expansion,
: c. Irradiation stability of the absorber material,           taking into consideration gas release and swelling,
: d. Potential   for chemical interaction,     including possible waterlogging rupture.
If this information is included in Chapter 15,       it may be incorporated in this section by reference.
4-5
 
Revision 3                                                    November 1978 4.2.4 Testing and Inspection Plan The testing and inspections to be performed to verify the design characteristics of the fuel system components, including clad integrity, dimensions, fuel enrichment, burnable poison concentration, absorber com position, and characteristics of the fuel, absorber, and poison pellets, should be described. Descriptions of radiographic inspections, destruc tive tests, fuel assembly dimensional checks, and the program for inspec tion of new fuel assemblies and new control rods to ensure mechanical integrity after shipment should be included. Where testing and inspec tion programs are essentially the same as for previously accepted plants, a referenced statement to that effect with an identification of the fabricator and a summary table of the important design and performance characteristics should be provided.
4.3 Nuclear Design 4.3.1     Design Bases The design bases for the nuclear design of the fuel and reactivity control systems should be provided and discussea, including nuclear and reactivity control limits such as excess reactivity, fuel burnup, nega tive reactivity feedback, core design lifetime, fuel replacement program, reactivity coefficients, stability criteria, maximum controlled reactiv ity insertion rates, control of power distribution, shutdown margins, stuck rod criteria, rod speeds, chemical and mechanical shim control, burnable poison requirements,       and backup and emergency shutdown provisions.
4.3.2   Description A description of the nuclear characteristics of the design should be provided and should include the information indicated in the follow ing sections.
4.3.2.1 Nuclear Design Description. Features of the nuclear design not discussed in specific subsections should be listed, described, or illustrated for appropriate times in the fuel cycle. These should include such areas as fuel enrichment distributions, burnable poison distributions, other physical features of the lattice or assemblies relevant to nuclear design parameters, delayed neutron fraction and neutron lifetimes, core lifetime and burnup, plutonium buildup, soluble poison insertion rates, and the relationship to cooldown or xenon burnout or other transient requirements.
4.3.2.2 Power Distribution. Full quantitative information on calcu lated "normal" power distributions, including distributions within typical assemblies, axial distributions, gross radial distributions (XY assembly patterns), and nonseparable aspects of radial and axial distributions should be presented.
4-6
 
Revision- 3                                                   November 1978 A full range of both representative and limiting power density patterns related to representative and limiting conditions of such relevant parameters as power, flow, flow distribution, rod patterns, time in cycle (burnup and possible burnup distributions), cycle, burnable poison, and xenon should be covered in sufficient detail to ensure that normally anticipated distributions are fully described and that the effects of all parameters important in affecting distributions are displayed. This should include details of transient power shapes and magnitudes accom panying normal transients such as load following, xenon buildup, decay or redistribution, and xenon oscillation control. Describe the radial power distribution within a fuel pin and its variation with burnup if use is made of this in thermal calculations.
Discuss and assign specific magnitudes to errors or uncertainties that may be associated with these calculated distributions and present the experimental data, including results from both critical experiments and operating reactors that back up the analysis, likely distribution limits, and assigned uncertainty magnitudes. Experimental checks to be made on this reactor and the criteria for satisfactory results should be discussed.
The design power distributions (shapes and magnitudes) and the design peaking factors to be used in steady-state limit statements and transient analysis initial conditions should be given in detail. Include all relevant components and such variables as maximum allowable peaking factors vs.
axial position or changes over the fuel cycle. Justify the selections by a discussion of the relationship of these design assumptions to the previously presented expected and limiting distributions and uncertainty analysis.
Describe the relationship of these distributions to the monitoring instrumentation, discussing in detail the adequacy of the number of instru ments and their spatial deployment (including allowed failures); required correlations between readings and peaking factors, calibrations and errors, operational procedures and specific operational limits; axial and azimuthal asymmetry limits; limits for alarms, rod blocks, scrams, etc., to demon strate that sufficient information is available to determine, monitor, and limit distributions associated with normal operation to within proper limits. Describe in detail all calculations, computer codes, and computers used in the course of operations that are involved in translating power distribution-related measurements into calculated power distribution infor mation. Give the frequency with which the calculations are normally performed and execution times of the calculations. Describe the input data required for the codes. Present a full quantitative analysis of the uncertainties associated with the sources and processing of informa tion used to produce operational power distribution results. This should include consideration of allowed instrumentation failures.
4.3.2.3 Reactivity Coefficients. Full quantitative information on calculated reactivity coefficients, including fuel Doppler coefficient, moderator coefficients (density, temperature, pressure, void), and power 4-7
 
Revision 3                                                   November 1978 coefficient should be presented. The precise definitions or assumptions relating to parameters involved, e.g., effective fuel temperature for Doppler, distinction between intra- and interassembly moderator coeffi cients, parameters held constant in power coefficient, spatial variation of parameter, and flux weighting used, should be stated. The information should be primarily in the form of curves covering the full applicable range of the parameters (density, temperature, pressure, void, power) from cold startup through limiting values used in accident analyses.
Quantitative discussions of both spatially uniform-parameter changes and these nonuniform parameter and flux weighting changes appropriate to operational and accident analyses and the methods used to treat nonuniform changes in transient analysis should be included.
Quantitative discussions of both spatially uniform-parameter changes and these nonuniform parameter and flux weighting changes appropriate to operational and accident analyses and the methods used to treat nonuniform changes in transient analysis should be included.
Sufficient information should be presented to illustrate the normal and limiting values of parameters appropriate to operational and accident states, considering cycle, time in cycle, control rod insertions, boron content, burnable poisons, power distribution, moderator density, etc. Potential uncertainties in the results of the calculations and experi mental results that back up the analysis and assigned uncertainty magni tudes and experimental checks to be made in this reactor should be discussed.
Sufficient information should be presented to illustrate the normal and limiting values of parameters appropriate to operational and accident states, considering cycle, time in cycle, control rod insertions, boron content, burnable poisons, power distribution, moderator density, etc.
Where limits on coefficients are especially important, e.g2, positive moderator coefficients in the power range, experimental checks on these limits should be fully detailed.
Potential uncertainties in the results of the calculations and experi mental results that back up the analysis and assigned uncertainty magni tudes and experimental checks to be made in this reactor should be discussed. Where limits on coefficients are especially important, e.g2, positive moderator coefficients in the power range, experimental checks on these limits should be fully detailed.
Present the coefficients actually used in transient analyses and show by reference to the previously discussed information and uncertainty analysis that suitably conservative values are used (1) for both beginning of life (BOL) and end of life (EOL) analyses, (2) where most negative or most positive (or least negative) coefficients are appropriate, and (3) where spatially nonuniform changes are involved.
Present the coefficients actually used in transient analyses and show by reference to the previously discussed information and uncertainty analysis that suitably conservative values are used (1) for both beginning of life (BOL) and end of life (EOL) analyses, (2) where most negative or most positive (or least negative) coefficients are appropriate, and (3) where spatially nonuniform changes are involved.
4.3.2.4 Control Requirements.
4.3.2.4 Control Requirements. Tables and discussions relating to core reactivity balances for BOL, EOL, and, where appropriate, interme diate conditions should be provided. This should include consideration of such reactivity influences as control bank requirements and expected and minimum worths, burnable poison worths, soluble boron amounts and unit worths for various operating states, "stuck rod" allowance, moder ator and fuel temperature and void defects, burnup and fission products, xenon and samarium poisoning, pH effects, permitted rod insertions at power and error allowances. Required and expected shutdown margin as a function of time in cycle, along with uncertainties in the shutdown margin and experimental confirmations from operating reactors should be presented and discussed.
Tables and discussions relating to core reactivity balances for BOL, EOL, and, where appropriate, interme diate conditions should be provided.
Methods, paths, and limits for normal operational control involving such areas as soluble poison concentration and changes, control rod motion, power shaping rod (e.g., part length rod) motion, and flow change should be described fully. This should include consideration of cold, hot, and peak xenon startup, load following and xenon reactivity control, power shaping (e.g., xenon redistribution or oscillation control), and burnup.
This should include consideration of such reactivity influences as control bank requirements and expected and minimum worths, burnable poison worths, soluble boron amounts and unit worths for various operating states, "stuck rod" allowance, moder ator and fuel temperature and void defects, burnup and fission products, xenon and samarium poisoning, pH effects, permitted rod insertions at power and error allowances.
4t-03
Required and expected shutdown margin as a function of time in cycle, along with uncertainties in the shutdown margin and experimental confirmations from operating reactors should be presented and discussed.
 
Methods, paths, and limits for normal operational control involving such areas as soluble poison concentration and changes, control rod motion, power shaping rod (e.g., part length rod) motion, and flow change should be described fully. This should include consideration of cold, hot, and peak xenon startup, load following and xenon reactivity control, power shaping (e.g., xenon redistribution or oscillation control), and burnup.Revision 3 4t-03 November 1978 4.3.2.5 Control Rod Patterns and Reactivity Worths. Full informa tion on control rod patterns expected to be used throughout a fuel cycle should be presented.
Revision 3                                                    November 1978 4.3.2.5 Control Rod Patterns and Reactivity Worths. Full informa tion on control rod patterns expected to be used throughout a fuel cycle should be presented. This should include details on separation into groups or banks if applicable, order and extent of withdrawal of individual rods or banks, limits, with justification, to be imposed on rod or bank posi tions as a function .of power level and/or time in cycle or for any other reason, expected positions of rods or banks for cold critical, hot standby critical, and for full power for both BOL and EOL. Describe allowable deviations from these patterns for misaligned or stuck rods or for any other-reason such as special power shaping. For the allowable patterns, including allowable deviations, indicate for various power and EOL and BOL conditions, the maximum worth of rods that might be postulated to be removed from the core in an ejection or drop accident and rods or rod banks that could be removed in rod withdrawal accidents, and give the worths of these rods as a function of position. Describe any experimental confirmation of these worths. Present maximum reactivity increase rates associated with these withdrawals. Describe fully and give the methods for calculating the scram reactivity as a function of time after scram signal, including consideration for Technical Specification scram times, stuck rods, power level and shape, time in cycle, and any other parameter important for bank reactivity worth and axial reactivity shape functions.
This should include details on separation into groups or banks if applicable, order and extent of withdrawal of individual rods or banks, limits, with justification, to be imposed on rod or bank posi tions as a function .of power level and/or time in cycle or for any other reason, expected positions of rods or banks for cold critical, hot standby critical, and for full power for both BOL and EOL. Describe allowable deviations from these patterns for misaligned or stuck rods or for any other-reason such as special power shaping. For the allowable patterns, including allowable deviations, indicate for various power and EOL and BOL conditions, the maximum worth of rods that might be postulated to be removed from the core in an ejection or drop accident and rods or rod banks that could be removed in rod withdrawal accidents, and give the worths of these rods as a function of position.
Describe any experimental confirmation of these worths. Present maximum reactivity increase rates associated with these withdrawals.
Describe fully and give the methods for calculating the scram reactivity as a function of time after scram signal, including consideration for Technical Specification scram times, stuck rods, power level and shape, time in cycle, and any other parameter important for bank reactivity worth and axial reactivity shape functions.
For BWRs, provide criteria for control rod velocity limiters and control rod worth minimizers.
For BWRs, provide criteria for control rod velocity limiters and control rod worth minimizers.
4.3.2.6 Criticality of Reactor During Refueling.
4.3.2.6 Criticality of Reactor During Refueling. The maximum value of koff for the reactor during refueling should be stated. Describe the basi* or assuming that this maximum value will not be exceeded.
The maximum value of koff for the reactor during refueling should be stated. Describe the or assuming that this maximum value will not be exceeded.
4.3.2.7 Stability. Information defining the degree of predicted stability with regard to xenon oscillations in both the axial direction and in the horizontal plane should be provided. If any form of xenon instability is predicted, include evaluations of higher mode oscillations.
4.3.2.7 Stability.
Information defining the degree of predicted stability with regard to xenon oscillations in both the axial direction and in the horizontal plane should be provided.
If any form of xenon instability is predicted, include evaluations of higher mode oscillations.
Indicate in detail the analytic and experimental bases for the predictions.
Indicate in detail the analytic and experimental bases for the predictions.
Include an assessment of potential error in the predictions.
Include an assessment of potential error in the predictions. Also, show how unexpected oscillations would be detectable before safety limits are exceeded.
Also, show how unexpected oscillations would be detectable before safety limits are exceeded.
Unambiguous positions regarding stability or lack thereof should be provided. That is, where stability is claimed, provide corroborating data from sufficiently similar power plants or provide commitments to demonstrate stability. Indicate criteria for determining whether the reactor will be stable or not. Where instability or marginal stability is predicted, provide details of how oscillations will be detected and controlled and provisions for protection-against exceeding safety limits.
Unambiguous positions regarding stability or lack thereof should be provided.
Analyses of the overall reactor stability against power oscillations (other than xenon) should be provided.
That is, where stability is claimed, provide corroborating data from sufficiently similar power plants or provide commitments to demonstrate stability.
4.3.2.8 Vessel Irradiation. The neutron flux distribution and spectrum in the core, at core boundaries, and at the pressure vessel wall for appro priate times in the reactor life for NVT determinations should be provided.
Indicate criteria for determining whether the reactor will be stable or not. Where instability or marginal stability is predicted, provide details of how oscillations will be detected and controlled and provisions for protection-against exceeding safety limits. Analyses of the overall reactor stability against power oscillations (other than xenon) should be provided.
4-9
4.3.2.8 Vessel Irradiation.
 
The neutron flux distribution and spectrum in the core, at core boundaries, and at the pressure vessel wall for appro priate times in the reactor life for NVT determinations should be provided.4-9 Revision 3 November 1978 4.3.3 Analytical Methods A detailed description of the analytical methods used in tne nuclear design, including those for predicting criticality, reactivity coefficients, and burnup effects should be provided.
Revision 3                                                   November 1978 4.3.3 Analytical Methods A detailed description of the analytical methods used in tne nuclear design, including those for predicting criticality, reactivity coefficients, and burnup effects should be provided. Computer codes used should be described in detail as to the name and the type of code, how it is used, and its validity based on critical experiments or confirmed predictions of operating plants. Code descriptions should include methods of obtain ing parameters such as cross sections. Estimates of the accuracy of the analytical methods should be included.
Computer codes used should be described in detail as to the name and the type of code, how it is used, and its validity based on critical experiments or confirmed predictions of operating plants. Code descriptions should include methods of obtain ing parameters such as cross sections.
4.3.4 Changes Any changes in reactor core design features, calculational methods, data, or information relevant to determining important nuclear design parameters that depart from prior practice of the reactor designs should be listed along with affected parameters.       Details of the nature and effects of the changes should be treated in appropriate subsections.
Estimates of the accuracy of the analytical methods should be included.
4.4 Thermal and Hydraulic Design 4.4.1   Design Bases The design bases for the thermal and hydraulic design of the reactor should be provided, including such items as maximum fuel and clad tempera tures and cladding-to-fuel gap characteristics as a function of burnup (at rated power, at design overpower, and during transients), critical heat flux ratio (at rated power, at design overpower, and during trans ients), flow velocities and distribution control, coolant and moderator voids, hydraulic stability, transient limits, fuel cladding integrity criteria, and fuel assembly integrity criteria.
4.3.4 Changes Any changes in reactor core design features, calculational methods, data, or information relevant to determining important nuclear design parameters that depart from prior practice of the reactor designs should be listed along with affected parameters.
Details of the nature and effects of the changes should be treated in appropriate subsections.
4.4 Thermal and Hydraulic Design 4.4.1 Design Bases The design bases for the thermal and hydraulic design of the reactor should be provided, including such items as maximum fuel and clad tempera tures and cladding-to-fuel gap characteristics as a function of burnup (at rated power, at design overpower, and during transients), critical heat flux ratio (at rated power, at design overpower, and during trans ients), flow velocities and distribution control, coolant and moderator voids, hydraulic stability, transient limits, fuel cladding integrity criteria, and fuel assembly integrity criteria.
4.4.2 Description of Thermal and Hydraulic Design of the Reactor Core A description of the thermal and hydraulic characteristics of the reactor design should be provided and should include information indi cated in the following sections.
4.4.2 Description of Thermal and Hydraulic Design of the Reactor Core A description of the thermal and hydraulic characteristics of the reactor design should be provided and should include information indi cated in the following sections.
4.4.2.1 Summary Comparison.
4.4.2.1 Summary Comparison. A summary comparison of the thermal and hydraulic design parameters of the reactor with previously approved reactors of similar design should be provided. This should include, for example, primary coolant temperatures, fuel temperatures, maximum and average linear heat generation rates, critical heat flux ratios, critical heat flux correlations used, coolant velocities, surface heat fluxes, power densities, specific powers, surface areas, and flow areas.
A summary comparison of the thermal and hydraulic design parameters of the reactor with previously approved reactors of similar design should be provided.
4.4.2.2 Critical Heat Flux Ratios. The critical heat flux ratios for the core hot spot at normal full power and at design overpower con ditions should be provided. State the critical heat flux correlation used, analysis techniques, method of use, method of employing peaking factors, and comparison with other correlations.
This should include, for example, primary coolant temperatures, fuel temperatures, maximum and average linear heat generation rates, critical heat flux ratios, critical heat flux correlations used, coolant velocities, surface heat fluxes, power densities, specific powers, surface areas, and flow areas. 4.4.2.2 Critical Heat Flux Ratios. The critical heat flux ratios for the core hot spot at normal full power and at design overpower con ditions should be provided.
4-10
State the critical heat flux correlation used, analysis techniques, method of use, method of employing peaking factors, and comparison with other correlations.
 
4-10 Revision 3 November 1978 4.4.2.3 Linear Heat Generation Rate. The core-average linear heat generation rate (LHGR) and the maximum LHGR anywhere in the core should be provided.
Revision 3                                                     November 1978 4.4.2.3 Linear Heat Generation Rate. The core-average       linear heat generation rate (LHGR) and the maximum LHGR anywhere in the     core should be provided. The method of utilizing hot channel factors     and power distribution information to determine the maximum LHGR should   be indicated.
The method of utilizing hot channel factors and power distribution information to determine the maximum LHGR should be indicated.
4.4.2.4 Void Fraction Distribution. Curves showing the predicted radial and axial distribution of steam quality and steam void fraction in the core should be provided. State the predicted core average void fraction and the maximum void fraction anywhere in the core.
4.4.2.4 Void Fraction Distribution.
4.4.2.5 Core Coolant Flow Distribution. Coolant flow distribution and orificing and the basis on which orificing is designed relative to shifts in power production during core life should be described and discussed.
Curves showing the predicted radial and axial distribution of steam quality and steam void fraction in the core should be provided.
4.4.2.6 Core Pressure Drops and Hydraulic Loads.       Core pressure drops and hydraulic loads during normal and accident conditions that are not addressed in Chapter 15 should be provided.
State the predicted core average void fraction and the maximum void fraction anywhere in the core. 4.4.2.5 Core Coolant Flow Distribution.
Coolant flow distribution and orificing and the basis on which orificing is designed relative to shifts in power production during core life should be described and discussed.
4.4.2.6 Core Pressure Drops and Hydraulic Loads. Core pressure drops and hydraulic loads during normal and accident conditions that are not addressed in Chapter 15 should be provided.
4.4.2.7 Correlation and Physical Data. The correlations and physical data employed in determining important characteristics such as heat transfer coefficients and pressure drop should be discussed.
4.4.2.7 Correlation and Physical Data. The correlations and physical data employed in determining important characteristics such as heat transfer coefficients and pressure drop should be discussed.
4.4.2.8 Thermal Effects of Operational Transients.
4.4.2.8 Thermal Effects of Operational Transients.     The capability of the core to withstand the thermal effects resulting from anticipated operational transients should be evaluated.
The capability of the core to withstand the thermal effects resulting from anticipated operational transients should be evaluated.
4.4.2.9 Uncertainties in Estimates. The uncertainties associated with estimating the peak or limiting conditions for thermal and hydraulic analysis (e.g., fuel temperature, clad temperature, pressure drops, and orificing effects) should be discussed.
4.4.2.9 Uncertainties in Estimates.
4.4.2.10 Flux Tilt Considerations. Discuss the margin provided in the peaking factor to account for flux tilts   to ensure that flux limits are not exceeded during operation. Describe plans for power reduction in the event of flux tilts   and provide criteria for selection of a safe operating power level.
The uncertainties associated with estimating the peak or limiting conditions for thermal and hydraulic analysis (e.g., fuel temperature, clad temperature, pressure drops, and orificing effects) should be discussed.
4.4.3   Description of the Thermal and Hydraulic Design of the Reactor Coolant System The thermal and hydraulic design of the reactor coolant system should be described in this section. The information indicated in the following sections should be included.
4.4.2.10 Flux Tilt Considerations.
4.4.3.1 Plant Configuration Data. The following   information   on plant configuration and operation should be provided:
Discuss the margin provided in the peaking factor to account for flux tilts to ensure that flux limits are not exceeded during operation.
: 1. A description of the reactor coolant system, including isometric drawings that show the configuration and approximate dimensions of the reactor coolant system piping, 4-11
Describe plans for power reduction in the event of flux tilts and provide criteria for selection of a safe operating power level. 4.4.3 Description of the Thermal and Hydraulic Design of the Reactor Coolant System The thermal and hydraulic design of the reactor coolant system should be described in this section. The information indicated in the following sections should be included.
 
4.4.3.1 Plant Configuration Data. The following information on plant configuration and operation should be provided:  
Revision 3                                                     November 1978
: 1. A description of the reactor coolant system, including isometric drawings that show the configuration and approximate dimensions of the reactor coolant system piping, 4-11 Revision 3 Revision 3 November 1978 2. A listing of all valves and pipe fittings (elbows, tees, etc.) in the reactor coolant system, 3. Total coolant flow through each flowpath (total loop flow, core flow, bypass flow, etc.), 4. Total volume of each plant component, including ECCS components with sufficient detail in reactor vessel and the steam generator (for PWRs) to define each part (downcomer, lower plenum, upper head, etc.), 5. The flowpath length through each volume, 6. The height and liquid level of each volume, 7. The elevation of the bottom of each volume with respect to some reference elevation, preferably the centerline of the outer piping, 8. The line lengths and sizes of all safety injection lines, 9. Minimum flow areas of each component, 10. Steady-state pressure and temperature distribution throughout the system. 4.4.3.2 Operating Restrictions on Pumps. The operating restrictions that will be imposed on the coolant pumps to meet net positive suction head requirements should be stated. 4.4.3.3 Power-Flow Operating Map (BWR). For boiling water reactors, a power-flow operating map indicating the limits of reactor coolant system operation should be provided.
: 2. A listing of all valves and pipe fittings (elbows,     tees,   etc.)
This map should indicate the permissible operating range as bounded by minimum flow, design flow, maximum pump speed, and natural circulation.
in the reactor coolant system,
4.4.3.4 Temperature-Power Operating Map (PWR). For pressurized water reactors, a temperature-power operating map should be provided.
: 3. Total coolant flow through each flowpath (total loop flow, core flow, bypass flow, etc.),
: 4. Total volume of each plant component, including ECCS components with sufficient detail in reactor vessel and the steam generator (for PWRs) to define each part (downcomer, lower plenum, upper head, etc.),
: 5. The flowpath length through each volume,
: 6. The height and liquid level of each volume,
: 7. The elevation of the bottom of each volume with respect to some reference elevation, preferably the centerline of the outer piping,
: 8. The line lengths and sizes of all safety injection lines,
: 9. Minimum flow areas of each component,
: 10. Steady-state pressure and temperature distribution throughout the system.
4.4.3.2 Operating Restrictions on Pumps. The operating restrictions that will be imposed on the coolant pumps to meet net positive suction head requirements should be stated.
4.4.3.3 Power-Flow Operating Map (BWR). For boiling water reactors, a power-flow operating map indicating the limits of reactor coolant system operation should be provided. This map should indicate the permissible operating range as bounded by minimum flow, design flow, maximum pump speed, and natural circulation.
4.4.3.4 Temperature-Power Operating Map (PWR).       For pressurized water reactors, a temperature-power operating map should be provided.
The effects of reduced core flow due to inoperative pumps, including system capability during natural circulation conditions, should be indicated.
The effects of reduced core flow due to inoperative pumps, including system capability during natural circulation conditions, should be indicated.
4.4.3.5 Load-Following Characteristics.
4.4.3.5 Load-Following Characteristics. The load-following charac teristics of the reactor coolant system and the techniques employed to provide this capability should be described.
The load-following charac teristics of the reactor coolant system and the techniques employed to provide this capability should be described.
4.4.3.6 Thermal and Hydraulic Characteristics Summary Table.           A table summarizing the thermal and hydraulic characteristics of the reactor coolant system should be provided.
4.4.3.6 Thermal and Hydraulic Characteristics Summary Table. A table summarizing the thermal and hydraulic characteristics of the reactor coolant system should be provided.4-12 November 1978 4.4.4 Evaluation An evaluation of the thermal and hydraulic design of the reactor and the reactor coolant system should be provided.
4-12
It should include the information indicated in the following sections.
 
4.4.4.1 Critical Heat Flux. The critical heat flux, departure from nucleate boiling, or critical power ratio correlation utilized in the core thermal and hydraulic analysis should be identified.
Revision 3                                                    November 1978 4.4.4   Evaluation An evaluation of the thermal and hydraulic design of the reactor and the reactor coolant system should be provided.       It should include the information indicated in the following sections.
The experi mental basis for the correlation should be described, preferably by refer ence to documents available to the NRC. The applicability of the correla tion to the proposed design should be discussed in the SAR. Particular emphasis should be placed on the effect of the grid spacer design, the calculational technique used to determine coolant mixing, and the effect of axial power distribution.
4.4.4.1 Critical Heat Flux. The critical heat flux, departure from nucleate boiling, or critical power ratio correlation utilized in the core thermal and hydraulic analysis should be identified. The experi mental basis for the correlation should be described, preferably by refer ence to documents available to the NRC. The applicability of the correla tion to the proposed design should be discussed in the SAR. Particular emphasis should be placed on the effect of the grid spacer design, the calculational technique used to determine coolant mixing, and the effect of axial power distribution.
4.4.4.2 Core Hydraulics.
4.4.4.2 Core Hydraulics. The core hydraulics evaluation should include (1) a discussion of the results of flow model tests (with respect to pressure drop for the various flowpaths through the reactor and flow distributions at the core inlet), (2) the empirical correlation selected for use in analyses for both single-phase and two-phase flow conditions and the applicability over the range of anticipated reactor conditions, and (3) the effect of partial or total isolation of a loop.
The core hydraulics evaluation should include (1) a discussion of the results of flow model tests (with respect to pressure drop for the various flowpaths through the reactor and flow distributions at the core inlet), (2) the empirical correlation selected for use in analyses for both single-phase and two-phase flow conditions and the applicability over the range of anticipated reactor conditions, and (3) the effect of partial or total isolation of a loop. 4.4.4.3 Influence of Power Distribution.
4.4.4.3 Influence of Power Distribution. The influence of axial and radial power distributions on the thermal and hydraulic design should be discussed. An analysis to determine which fuel rods control the thermal limits of the reactor should be included.
The influence of axial and radial power distributions on the thermal and hydraulic design should be discussed.
4.4.4.4 Core Thermal Response. The thermal response of the core should be evaluated at rated power, at design overpower, and for expected transient conditions.
An analysis to determine which fuel rods control the thermal limits of the reactor should be included.
4.4.4.4 Core Thermal Response.
The thermal response of the core should be evaluated at rated power, at design overpower, and for expected transient conditions.
4.4.4.5 Analytical Methods. The analytical methods and data used to determine the reactor coolant system flow rate should be described.
4.4.4.5 Analytical Methods. The analytical methods and data used to determine the reactor coolant system flow rate should be described.
This should include classical fluid mechanics relationships and empirical correlations.
This should include classical fluid mechanics relationships and empirical correlations. The description should include both single-phase and two phase fluid flow, as applicable. Estimates of the uncertainties in the calculations and the resultant uncertainty in reactor coolant system flow rate should be provided.
The description should include both single-phase and two phase fluid flow, as applicable.
A comprehensive discussion of the analytical techniques used in evalu ating the core thermal-hydraulics, including estimates of uncertainties, should be provided. This discussion should include such items as hydraulic instability, the application of hot spot factors and hot channel factors, subchannel hydraulic analysis, effects of crud (in the core and in the reactor coolant system), and operation with one or more loops isolated.
Estimates of the uncertainties in the calculations and the resultant uncertainty in reactor coolant system flow rate should be provided.
Descriptions of computer codes may be included by reference to documents available to the NRC.
A comprehensive discussion of the analytical techniques used in evalu ating the core thermal-hydraulics, including estimates of uncertainties, should be provided.
4-13
This discussion should include such items as hydraulic instability, the application of hot spot factors and hot channel factors, subchannel hydraulic analysis, effects of crud (in the core and in the reactor coolant system), and operation with one or more loops isolated.
 
Descriptions of computer codes may be included by reference to documents available to the NRC.4-13 Revision 3 Revision 3 November 1978 4.4.5 Testing and Verification The testing and verification techniques to be used to ensure that the planned thermal and hydraulic design characteristics of the core and the reactor coolant system have been provided and will remain within required limits throughout core lifetime should be discussed.
Revision 3                                                   November 1978 4.4.5   Testing and Verification The testing and verification techniques to be used to ensure that the planned thermal and hydraulic design characteristics of the core and the reactor coolant system have been provided and will remain within required limits throughout core lifetime should be discussed. This discus sion should address the applicable portions of Regulatory Guide 1.68, "Initial Test Program for Water-Cooled Reactor Power Plants." References to the appropriate portions of Chapter 14 are acceptable.
This discus sion should address the applicable portions of Regulatory Guide 1.68, "Initial Test Program for Water-Cooled Reactor Power Plants." References to the appropriate portions of Chapter 14 are acceptable.
4.4.6   Instrumentation Requirements The functional requirements for the instrumentation to be employed in monitoring and measuring those thermal-hydraulic parameters important to safety should be discussed. The requirements for in-core instrumenta tion to confirm predicted power density distribution and moderator tempe rature distributions, for example, should be included.     Details of the instrumentation design and logic should be discussed in Chapter 7 of the SAR.
4.4.6 Instrumentation Requirements The functional requirements for the instrumentation to be employed in monitoring and measuring those thermal-hydraulic parameters important to safety should be discussed.
The vibration and loose-parts monitoring equipment to be provided in the plant should be described. The procedures to be used to detect excessive vibration and the occurrence of loose parts should be discussed.
The requirements for in-core instrumenta tion to confirm predicted power density distribution and moderator tempe rature distributions, for example, should be included.
4.5 Reactor Materials 4.5.1     Control Rod Drive System Structural Materials For the purpose of this section, the control rod drive system includes the control rod drive mechanism (CRDM) and extends to the coupling inter face with the reactivity control (poison) elements in the reactor vessel.
Details of the instrumentation design and logic should be discussed in Chapter 7 of the SAR. The vibration and loose-parts monitoring equipment to be provided in the plant should be described.
It does not include the electrical and hydraulic systems necessary for actuating the CRDMs. The information described below should be provided.
The procedures to be used to detect excessive vibration and the occurrence of loose parts should be discussed.
: 1. Materials Specifications
4.5 Reactor Materials 4.5.1 Control Rod Drive System Structural Materials For the purpose of this section, the control rod drive system includes the control rod drive mechanism (CRDM) and extends to the coupling inter face with the reactivity control (poison) elements in the reactor vessel. It does not include the electrical and hydraulic systems necessary for actuating the CRDMs. The information described below should be provided.
: a. Provide a list of the materials and their specifications for each component of the control rod drive mechanism.     Furnish informa tion regarding the mechanical properties of any material not included in Appendix I to Section III of the ASME B&PV Code or Regulatory Guide 1.85, "Materials Code Case Acceptability - ASME Section III Division 1," and provide justification for the use of such material.
: 1. Materials Specifications  
: b. State whether any of the following materials that have a yield strength greater than 90,000 psi are being used:         cold-worked austenitic stainless steels, precipitation hardenable stainless steels, or hardenable martensitic stainless steels. If such materials are employed, identify their usage and provide evidence that stress-corrosion cracking will not occur during service life in components fabricated from the materials.
: a. Provide a list of the materials and their specifications for each component of the control rod drive mechanism.
4-14
Furnish informa tion regarding the mechanical properties of any material not included in Appendix I to Section III of the ASME B&PV Code or Regulatory Guide 1.85, "Materials Code Case Acceptability  
 
-ASME Section III Division 1," and provide justification for the use of such material.
Revision 3                                                      November 1978
: b. State whether any of the following materials that have a yield strength greater than 90,000 psi are being used: cold-worked austenitic stainless steels, precipitation hardenable stainless steels, or hardenable martensitic stainless steels. If such materials are employed, identify their usage and provide evidence that stress-corrosion cracking will not occur during service life in components fabricated from the materials.
: 2. Austenitic Stainless Steel Components
4-14 November 1978 2. Austenitic Stainless Steel Components  
: a. Provide a description of the processes, inspections, and tests on austenitic stainless steel components to ensure freedom from increased susceptibility to intergranular stress-corrosion cracking caused by sensitization. If special processing or fabrication methods subject the materials to temperatures between 800 and 1500*F, or involve slow cooling from temperatures over 1500 0 F, describe the processing or fabrica tion methods and provide justification to show that such treatment will not cause susceptibility to intergranular stress-corrosion cracking.
: a. Provide a description of the processes, inspections, and tests on austenitic stainless steel components to ensure freedom from increased susceptibility to intergranular stress-corrosion cracking caused by sensitization.
Indicate the degree of conformance to the recommendations of Regulatory Guide 1.44, "Control of the Use of Sensitized Stainless Steel."       Provide justification for any deviations from these recommendations.
If special processing or fabrication methods subject the materials to temperatures between 800 and 1500*F, or involve slow cooling from temperatures over 1500 0 F, describe the processing or fabrica tion methods and provide justification to show that such treatment will not cause susceptibility to intergranular stress-corrosion cracking.
: b. State the procedures and requirements that will be applied to prevent hot cracking in austenitic stainless steel welds, especially those procedures and requirements to control the delta ferrite content in weld filler metal and in completed welds.     Indicate the degree of con formance to the recommendations of Regulatory Guide 1.31, "Control of Ferrite Content in Stainless Steel Weld Metal."       Provide justification for any deviations from these recommendations.
Indicate the degree of conformance to the recommendations of Regulatory Guide 1.44, "Control of the Use of Sensitized Stainless Steel." Provide justification for any deviations from these recommendations.
: 3. Other Materials The tempering temperature of hardenable martensitic stainless steels and the aging temperature and aging time of precipitation-hardening stainless steels should be described.     The processing and treatment of other special purpose materials such as cobalt-base alloys (Stellites),
: b. State the procedures and requirements that will be applied to prevent hot cracking in austenitic stainless steel welds, especially those procedures and requirements to control the delta ferrite content in weld filler metal and in completed welds. Indicate the degree of con formance to the recommendations of Regulatory Guide 1.31, "Control of Ferrite Content in Stainless Steel Weld Metal." Provide justification for any deviations from these recommendations.
Inconels, Colmonoys, and Graphitars should be described.
: 3. Other Materials The tempering temperature of hardenable martensitic stainless steels and the aging temperature and aging time of precipitation-hardening stainless steels should be described.
The processing and treatment of other special purpose materials such as cobalt-base alloys (Stellites), Inconels, Colmonoys, and Graphitars should be described.
: 4. Cleaning and Cleanliness Control Provide details of the steps that will be taken in protecting austenitic stainless steel materials and parts of these systems during fabrication, shipping, and onsite storage to ensure that all cleaning solutions, processing compounds, degreasing agents, and detrimental con taminants are completely removed and that all parts are dried and properly protected following any flushing treatment with water. Indicate the degree of conformance to the recommendations of Regulatory Guide 1.37, "Quality Assurance Requirements for Cleaning of Fluid Systems and Associated Compo nents of Water-Cooled Nuclear Power Plants." Provide justification for any deviations from these recommendations.
: 4. Cleaning and Cleanliness Control Provide details of the steps that will be taken in protecting austenitic stainless steel materials and parts of these systems during fabrication, shipping, and onsite storage to ensure that all cleaning solutions, processing compounds, degreasing agents, and detrimental con taminants are completely removed and that all parts are dried and properly protected following any flushing treatment with water. Indicate the degree of conformance to the recommendations of Regulatory Guide 1.37, "Quality Assurance Requirements for Cleaning of Fluid Systems and Associated Compo nents of Water-Cooled Nuclear Power Plants." Provide justification for any deviations from these recommendations.
4.5.2 Reactor Internals Materials This section should discuss the materials used for reactor internals and should include the information described below. 4.5.2.1 Materials Specifications.
4.5.2   Reactor Internals Materials This section should discuss the materials used for reactor internals and should include the information described below.
Provide a list of the materials and their specifications for major components of the reactor internals.
4.5.2.1 Materials Specifications.     Provide a list of the materials and their specifications for major components of the reactor internals.
Include materials treated to enhance corrosion resistance, strength, and 4-15 Revision 3 Revision 3 November 1978 hardness.
Include materials treated to enhance corrosion resistance, strength, and 4-15
Furnish information regarding the mechanical properties of any material not included in Appendix I to Section III of the ASME B&PV Code and provide justification for the use of such material.
 
4.5.2.2 Controls on Welding. Indicate the controls that will be used when welding reactor internals components, and provide assurance that such welds will meet the acceptance criteria of Article NG-5000 of ASME B&PV Code Section III or alternative acceptance criteria that provide an acceptable level of safety. 4.5.2.3 Nondestructive Examination of Tubular Products and Fittings.
Revision 3                                                     November 1978 hardness. Furnish information regarding the mechanical properties of any material not included in Appendix I to Section III of the ASME B&PV Code and provide justification for the use of such material.
4.5.2.2 Controls on Welding. Indicate the controls that will be used when welding reactor internals components, and provide assurance that such welds will meet the acceptance criteria of Article NG-5000 of ASME B&PV Code Section III or alternative acceptance criteria that provide an acceptable level of safety.
4.5.2.3 Nondestructive Examination of Tubular Products and Fittings.
Indicate that the nondestructive examination procedures used for the examina tion of tubular products conform to the requirements of the ASME B&PV Code. Provide justification for any deviations from these requirements.
Indicate that the nondestructive examination procedures used for the examina tion of tubular products conform to the requirements of the ASME B&PV Code. Provide justification for any deviations from these requirements.
4.5.2.4 Fabrication and Processing of Austenitic Stainless Steel Components.
4.5.2.4 Fabrication and Processing of Austenitic Stainless Steel Components. Indicate the degree of conformance with the recommendations of Regulatory Guide 1.44, "Control of the Use of Sensitized Stainless Steel;" Regulatory Guide 1.31, "Control of Ferrite Content in Stainless Steel Weld Metal;" and Regulatory Guide 1.37, "Quality Assurance Require ments for Cleaning of Fluid Systems and Associated Components of Water Cooled Nuclear Power Plants."     If alternative measures are used, show that they will provide the same assurance of component integrity as would be achieved by following the recommendations of the guides.       Indicate the maximum yield strength of all cold worked stainless steels used in the reactor internals.
Indicate the degree of conformance with the recommendations of Regulatory Guide 1.44, "Control of the Use of Sensitized Stainless Steel;" Regulatory Guide 1.31, "Control of Ferrite Content in Stainless Steel Weld Metal;" and Regulatory Guide 1.37, "Quality Assurance Require ments for Cleaning of Fluid Systems and Associated Components of Water Cooled Nuclear Power Plants." If alternative measures are used, show that they will provide the same assurance of component integrity as would be achieved by following the recommendations of the guides. Indicate the maximum yield strength of all cold worked stainless steels used in the reactor internals.
4.5.2.5 Other Materials. The tempering temperature of hardenable martensitic stainless steels and the aging temperatures and aging time of precipitation-hardening stainless steels should be described.       The processing and treatment of other special purpose materials such as cobalt base alloys (Stellites), Inconels, and Colmonoys should be described.
4.5.2.5 Other Materials.
4.6   Functional Design of Reactivity Control Systems Information should be presented to establish that the control rod drive system (CRDS), which includes the essential ancillary equipment and hydraulic systems, is designed and installed to provide the required functional performance and is properly isolated from other equipment.
The tempering temperature of hardenable martensitic stainless steels and the aging temperatures and aging time of precipitation-hardening stainless steels should be described.
The processing and treatment of other special purpose materials such as cobalt base alloys (Stellites), Inconels, and Colmonoys should be described.
4.6 Functional Design of Reactivity Control Systems Information should be presented to establish that the control rod drive system (CRDS), which includes the essential ancillary equipment and hydraulic systems, is designed and installed to provide the required functional performance and is properly isolated from other equipment.
Additionally, information should be presented to establish the bases for assessing the combined functional performance of all the reactivity con trol systems to mitigate the consequences of anticipated transients and postulated accidents.
Additionally, information should be presented to establish the bases for assessing the combined functional performance of all the reactivity con trol systems to mitigate the consequences of anticipated transients and postulated accidents.
These reactivity control systems include, in addition to the CRDS and the emergency core cooling system (ECCS), the chemical and volume control system (CVCS) and the emergency boration system (EBS) for pres surized water reactors and the standby liquid control system (SLCS) and the recirculation flow control system (RFCS) for boiling water reactors.4-16 November 1978 4.6.1 Information for CRDS Information submitted should include drawings of the rod drive mechanism, layout drawings of the collective rod drive system, process flow diagrams, piping and instrumentation diagrams, component descriptions and character istics, and a description of the functions of all related ancillary equip ment and hydraulic systems. This information may be presented in conjunc tion with the information requested for Section 3.9.4. 4.6.2 Evaluations of the CRDS Failure mode and effects analyses of the CRDS should be presented in tabular form with supporting discussion to delineate the logic employed.
These reactivity control systems include, in addition to the CRDS and the emergency core cooling system (ECCS),       the chemical and volume control system (CVCS) and the emergency boration system (EBS) for pres surized water reactors and the standby liquid control system (SLCS) and the recirculation flow control system (RFCS) for boiling water reactors.
4-16
 
Revision 3                                                    November 1978 4.6.1   Information for CRDS Information submitted should include drawings of the rod drive mechanism, layout drawings of the collective rod drive system, process flow diagrams, piping and instrumentation diagrams, component descriptions and character istics, and a description of the functions of all related ancillary equip ment and hydraulic systems. This information may be presented in conjunc tion with the information requested for Section 3.9.4.
4.6.2   Evaluations of the CRDS Failure mode and effects analyses of the CRDS should be presented in tabular form with supporting discussion to delineate the logic employed.
The failure analysis should demonstrate that the CRDS, which for purposes of these evaluations includes all essential ancillary equipment and hydraulic systems, can perform the intended safety functions with the loss of any single active component.
The failure analysis should demonstrate that the CRDS, which for purposes of these evaluations includes all essential ancillary equipment and hydraulic systems, can perform the intended safety functions with the loss of any single active component.
These evaluations and assessments should establish that all essential elements of the CRDS are identified and provisions made for isolation from nonessential CRDS elements.
These evaluations and assessments should establish that all essential elements of the CRDS are identified and provisions made for isolation from nonessential CRDS elements.     It should be established that all essential equipment is amply protected from common mode failures such as failure of moderate- and high-energy lines.
It should be established that all essential equipment is amply protected from common mode failures such as failure of moderate-and high-energy lines. 4.6.3 Testing and Verification of the CRDS A functional testing program should be presented.
4.6.3   Testing and Verification of the CRDS A functional testing program should be presented. This should include rod insertion and withdrawal tests, thermal and fluid dynamic tests simulat ing postulated operating and accident conditions, and test verification of the CRDS with imposed single failures, as appropriate.
This should include rod insertion and withdrawal tests, thermal and fluid dynamic tests simulat ing postulated operating and accident conditions, and test verification of the CRDS with imposed single failures, as appropriate.
Preoperational and initial startup test programs should be presented.
Preoperational and initial startup test programs should be presented.
The objectives, test methods, and acceptance criteria should be included.
The objectives, test methods, and acceptance criteria should be included.
4.6.4 Information for Combined Performance of Reactivity Systems Information consisting of piping and instrumentation diagrams, lay out drawings, process diagrams, failure analyses, descriptive material, and performance evaluations related to specific evaluations of the CVCS, the SLCS, and the RFCS is presented in other sections of the safety analysis report, e.g., 9.3.4 and 9.3.5. This section should include sufficient plan and elevation layout drawings to provide bases for establishing that the reactivity control systems (CRDS, ECCS, CVCS, SLCS, RFCS, EBS) when used in single or multiple redundant modes are not vulnerable to common mode failures.
4.6.4   Information for Combined Performance of Reactivity Systems Information consisting of piping and instrumentation diagrams, lay out drawings, process diagrams, failure analyses, descriptive material, and performance evaluations related to specific evaluations of the CVCS, the SLCS, and the RFCS is presented in other sections of the safety analysis report, e.g., 9.3.4 and 9.3.5. This section should include sufficient plan and elevation layout drawings to provide bases for establishing that the reactivity control systems (CRDS, ECCS, CVCS, SLCS, RFCS, EBS) when used in single or multiple redundant modes are not vulnerable to common mode failures.
Evaluations pertaining to the response of the plant to postulated process disturbances and to postulated malfunctions or failures of equip ment are presented in Chapter 15, "Accident Analyses." This section should include a list of all the postulated accidents evaluated in Chapter 15 that take credit for two or more reactivity control systems for preventing 4-17 Revision 3 Revision 3 November 1978 or mitigating each accident.
Evaluations pertaining to the response of the plant to postulated process disturbances and to postulated malfunctions or failures of equip ment are presented in Chapter 15, "Accident Analyses." This section should include a list   of all the postulated accidents evaluated in Chapter 15 that take credit for two or more reactivity control systems for preventing 4-17
The related reactivity systems should also be tabulated.
 
4.6.5 Evaluations of Combined Performance Evaluations of the combined functional performance for accidents where two or more reactivity systems are used should be presented.
Revision 3                                                   November 1978 or mitigating each accident. The related reactivity systems should also be tabulated.
The neutronic, fluid dynamic, instrumentation, controls, time sequencing, and other process-parameter-related features are presented primarily in Chapters 4, 7, and 15 of the safety analysis report. This section should include failure analyses to demonstrate that the reactivity control systems used redundantly are not susceptible to common mode failures.
4.6.5 Evaluations of Combined Performance Evaluations of the combined functional performance for accidents where two or more reactivity systems are used should be presented.
These failure analyses should consider failures originating within each reactivity control system and from plant equipment other than reactivity systems and should be presented in tabular form with supporting discussion and logic.4-18 November 1978 5. REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM AND CONNECTED SYSTEMS This chapter of the SAR should provide information regarding the reactor coolant system and systems connected to i.t. Special considera tion should be given to the reactor coolant system and pressure-containing appendages out to and including isolation valving which is the "reactor coolant pressure boundary" (RCPB), as defined in paragraph 50.2(v) of 10 CFR Part 50. Evaluations, together with the necessary supporting material, should be submitted to show that the reactor coolant system is adequate to accomplish its intended objective and to maintain its integrity under conditions imposed by all foreseeable reactor behavior, either normal or accident conditions.
neutronic, fluid dynamic, instrumentation, controls, time               The sequencing, and other process-parameter-related features are presented primarily in Chapters 4, 7, and 15 of the safety analysis report. This section include failure analyses to demonstrate that the reactivity control should used redundantly are not susceptible to common mode failures.         systems These analyses should consider failures originating within each reactivity failure system and from plant equipment other than reactivity systems           control and should be presented in tabular form with supporting discussion and logic.
The information should permit a determination of the adequacy of the evaluations; that is, assurance that the evaluations included are correct and complete and all the evaluations needed have been made. Evaluations included in other chapters that have a bearing on the reactor coolant system should be referenced.
4-18
5.1 Summary Description A summary description of the reactor coolant system and its various components should be provided.
 
The description should indicate the inde pendent and interrelated performance and safety functions of each compo nent. Include a tabulation of important design and performance characteristics.
Revision 3                                                      November 1978
: 5. REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM AND CONNECTED SYSTEMS This chapter of the SAR should provide information regarding the reactor coolant system and systems connected to i.t. Special considera tion should be given to the reactor coolant system and pressure-containing appendages out to and including isolation valving which is the "reactor coolant pressure boundary" (RCPB), as defined in paragraph 50.2(v) of 10 CFR Part 50.
Evaluations, together with the necessary supporting material, should be submitted to show that the reactor coolant system is adequate to accomplish its intended objective and to maintain its integrity under conditions imposed by all foreseeable reactor behavior, either normal or accident conditions.     The information should permit a determination of the adequacy of the evaluations; that is, assurance that the evaluations included are correct and complete and all the evaluations needed have been made. Evaluations included in other chapters that have a bearing on the reactor coolant system should be referenced.
5.1 Summary Description A summary description of the reactor coolant system and its various components should be provided. The description should indicate the inde pendent and interrelated performance and safety functions of each compo nent. Include a tabulation of important design and performance characteristics.
5.1.1 Schematic Flow Diagram A schematic flow diagram of the reactor coolant system denoting all major components, principal pressures, temperatures, flow rates, and coolant volume under normal steady-state full power operating conditions should be provided.
5.1.1 Schematic Flow Diagram A schematic flow diagram of the reactor coolant system denoting all major components, principal pressures, temperatures, flow rates, and coolant volume under normal steady-state full power operating conditions should be provided.
5.1.2 Piping and Instrumentation Diagram Provide a piping and instrumentation diagram of the reactor coolant system and connected systems delineating the following:  
5.1.2   Piping and Instrumentation Diagram Provide a piping and instrumentation diagram of the reactor coolant system and connected systems delineating the following:
: 1. The extent of the systems located within the containment, 2. The points of separation between the reactor coolant (heat transport) system and the secondary (heat utilization or removal) system, and 3. The extent of isolability of any fluid system as provided by the use of isolation valves between the radioactive and nonradioactive sections of the system, isolation valves between the RCPB and connected systems, and passive barriers between the RCPB and other systems.5-1 Revision 3 Revision 3 November 1978 5.1.3 Elevation Drawing Provide an elevation drawing showing principal dimensions of the reactor coolant system in relation to the supporting or surrounding con crete structures from which a measure of the protection afforded by the arrangement and the safety considerations incorporated in the layout can be gained. 5.2 Integrity of Reactor Coolant Pressure Boundary This section should present discussions of the measures to be employed to provide and maintain the integrity of the reactor coolant pressure boundary (RCPB) for the plant design lifetime.
: 1. The extent of the systems located within the containment,
5.2.1 Compliance with Codes and Code Cases 5.2.1.1 Compliance with 10 CFR §50.55a. A table showing compliance with the regulations of 10 CFR §50.55a, "Codes and Standards," should be provided.
: 2. The points of separation between the reactor coolant (heat transport) system and the secondary (heat utilization or removal) system, and
This table should identify pressure vessel components, piping, pumps, and valves. The applicable component code, code edition, code addenda, and, when required, the component order date of each ASME Sec tion III, Class 1 component within the reactor coolant pressure boundary may be identified by reference to the table of structures, systems, and components in Section 3.2 of the SAR; alternatively, they may be included in this section of the SAR. In the event there are cases wherein conform ance to the regulations of §50.55a would result in hardships or unusual difficulties without a compensating increase in the level of safety and quality, a complete description of the circumstances resulting in such cases and the basis for proposed alternative requirements should be provided.
: 3. The extent of isolability of any fluid system as provided by the use of isolation valves between the radioactive and nonradioactive sections of the system, isolation valves between the RCPB and connected systems, and passive barriers between the RCPB and other systems.
Describe how an acceptable level of safety and quality will be provided by the proposed alternative requirements.
5-1
5.2.1.2 Applicable Code Cases. Provide a list of ASME Code Case interpretations that will be applied to components within the reactor coolant pressure boundary.
 
Each component to which a Code Case has been applied should be identified by Code Case number, revision, and title. Caution is advised in the use of Code Cases to ensure that the applicable revision of a Code Case is identified for each component application.
Revision 3                                                     November 1978 5.1.3   Elevation Drawing Provide an elevation drawing showing principal dimensions reactor coolant system in relation to the supporting or               of the surrounding con crete structures from which a measure of the protection arrangement and the safety considerations incorporated afforded by the in the layout can be gained.
Regulatory Guides 1.84, "Design and Fabrication Code Case Acceptability ASME Section III Division 1," and 1.85, "Materials Code Case Acceptabil ity -ASME Section III Division 1," list those Section III, Division 1, ASME Code Cases that are generally acceptable.
5.2   Integrity of Reactor Coolant Pressure Boundary This section should present discussions of the measures employed to provide and maintain the integrity of the                 to be reactor coolant pressure boundary (RCPB) for the plant design lifetime.
The section should indicate the extent of conformance with the recommendations of Regulatory Guides 1.84 and 1.85. If Code Cases other than those listed are used, show that their use will result in as acceptable a level of quality and safety for the component as would be achieved by following the recommendation of the guides.5-2 November 1978 5.2.2 Overpressurization Protection The information cited below should be provided to accommodate an evaluation of the systems that protect the RCPB and the secondary side of steam generators from overpressurization.
5.2.1   Compliance with Codes and Code Cases 5.2.1.1 Compliance with 10 CFR §50.55a. A table showing with the regulations of 10 CFR §50.55a, "Codes and Standards,"     compliance provided. This table should identify pressure vessel components,should be pumps, and valves. The applicable component code, code                 piping, edition, code addenda, and, when required, the component order date of tion III, Class 1 component within the reactor coolant       each ASME Sec may be identified by reference to the table of structures,pressure    boundary systems, and components in Section 3.2 of the SAR; alternatively, they in this section of the SAR. In the event there are cases may be included wherein conform ance to the regulations of §50.55a would result in hardships or unusual difficulties without a compensating increase in the level quality, a complete description of the circumstances         of  safety and resulting in such cases and the basis for proposed alternative requirements should provided. Describe how an acceptable level of safety and quality be be provided by the proposed alternative requirements.                     will 5.2.1.2 Applicable Code Cases. Provide a list of ASME interpretations that will be applied to components within         Code Case the reactor coolant pressure boundary. Each component to which a Code applied should be identified by Code Case number, revision,Case has been Caution is advised in the use of Code Cases to ensure that         and title.
These systems include all pressure-relieving devices (safety and relief valves) for: 1. The reactor coolant system, 2. The primary side of auxiliary or emergency systems connected to the reactor coolant system, 3. Any blowdown or heat dissipation systems connected to the discharge of these pressure-relieving devices, and 4. The secondary side of steam generators.
revision of a Code Case is identified for each component       the  applicable Regulatory Guides 1.84, "Design and Fabrication Code Case       application.
5.2.2.1 Design Bases. Provide the design bases on which the func tional design of the overpressure protection system was established.
Acceptability ASME Section III Division 1," and 1.85, "Materials Code Case Acceptabil ity - ASME Section III Division 1," list those Section ASME Code Cases that are generally acceptable. The section III, Division 1, should indicate the extent of conformance with the recommendations of Regulatory Guides 1.84 and 1.85. If Code Cases other than those listed are their use will result in as acceptable a level of quality used, show that and safety for the component as would be achieved by following the recommendation of the guides.
Identify the postulated events or transients on which the design require ments are based, including:  
5-2
: 1. The extent of simultaneous occurrences, 2. The assumptions regarding initial plant conditions and system parameters, and 3. A list of all systems that could initiate during the postulated event and the initiating and trip signals.
 
5.2.2.2 Design Evaluation.
Revision 3                                                        November 1978 5.2.2   Overpressurization Protection The information cited below should be provided to accommodate an evaluation of the systems that protect the RCPB and the secondary side of steam generators from overpressurization.         These systems include all pressure-relieving devices (safety and relief valves) for:
An evaluation of the functional design of the overpressurization system should be provided.
: 1. The reactor coolant system,
Present an analysis of the capability of the system to perform its function.
: 2. The primary side of auxiliary or emergency systems connected to the reactor coolant system,
Describe the analytical model used in the analysis and discuss the bases for its validity.
: 3. Any     blowdown or heat dissipation systems     connected to the discharge of these pressure-relieving devices, and
Discuss and justify the assumptions used in the analysis, including the plant initial conditions and system parameters.
: 4. The secondary side of steam generators.
List the systems and equipment assumed to operate and describe their performance characteristics.
5.2.2.1 Design Bases.       Provide the design bases on which the func tional design of the overpressure protection system was established.
Provide studies that show the sensitivity of the perform ance of the system to variations in these conditions, parameters, and performance.
Identify the postulated events or transients on which the design require ments are based, including:
5.2.2.3 Piping and Instrumentation Diagrams.
: 1. The extent of simultaneous occurrences,
Provide piping and instrumentation diagrams for the overpressure protection system showing the number and location of all components, including valves, piping, tanks, instrumentation, andcontrols.
: 2. The assumptions     regarding initial plant conditions and system parameters, and
Connections and other interfaces with other systems should be indicated.
: 3. A list   of all systems that could initiate during the postulated event and the initiating and trip signals.
5.2.2.4 Equipment and Component Description.
5.2.2.2 Design Evaluation. An evaluation of the functional design of the overpressurization system should be provided. Present an analysis of the capability of the system to perform its function.         Describe the analytical model used in the analysis and discuss the bases for its validity. Discuss and justify the assumptions used in the analysis, including the plant initial conditions and system parameters.         List the systems and equipment assumed to operate and describe their performance characteristics.       Provide studies that show the sensitivity of the perform ance of the system to variations in these conditions, parameters, and performance.
Describe the equip ment and components of the overpressure protection system, including schematic drawings of the safety and relief valves and a discussion of how the valves operate. Identify the significant design parameters for 5-3 Revision 3 November 1978 each component, including the design, throat area, capacity, and set point of the valves and the diameter, length, and routing of piping. List the design parameters (e.g., pressure and temperature) for each component.
5.2.2.3 Piping and Instrumentation Diagrams.         Provide piping and instrumentation diagrams for the overpressure protection system showing the number and location of all components, including valves, piping, tanks, instrumentation, andcontrols.         Connections and other interfaces with other systems should be indicated.
Specify the number and type of operating cycles for which each component is designed.
5.2.2.4 Equipment and Component Description.         Describe the equip ment and components of the overpressure protection system, including schematic drawings of the safety and relief valves and a discussion of how the valves operate.       Identify the significant design parameters for 5-3
The environmental conditions (e.g. , temperature and humidity) for which the components are designed should also be specified.
 
5.2.2.5 Mounting of Pressure-Relief Devices. Describe the design and installation details of the mounting of the pressure-relief devices within the reactor coolant pressure boundary and the secondary side of steam generators.
Revision 3                                                     November 1978 each component, including the design, throat area, capacity, and set point of the valves and the diameter, length, and routing of piping. List the design parameters (e.g., pressure and temperature) for each component.
Specify the design bases for the assumed loads (i.e., thrust, bending, and torsion) imposed on the valves, nozzles, and con nected piping in the event all valves discharge.
Specify the number and type of operating cycles for which each component is designed. The environmental conditions (e.g. , temperature and humidity) for which the components are designed should also be specified.
Describe how these loads can be accommodated; include a listing of these loads and result ing stresses.
5.2.2.5 Mounting of Pressure-Relief Devices.       Describe the design and installation details of the mounting of the pressure-relief devices within the reactor coolant pressure boundary and the secondary side of steam generators. Specify the design bases for the assumed loads (i.e.,
Material contained in Section 3.9.3.3 may be incorporated by reference.
thrust, bending, and torsion) imposed on the valves, nozzles, and con nected piping in the event all valves discharge. Describe how these loads can be accommodated; include a listing of these loads and result ing stresses. Material contained in Section 3.9.3.3 may be incorporated by reference.
5.2.2.6 Applicable Codes and Classification.
5.2.2.6 Applicable Codes and Classification.       Identify the appli cable industry codes and classifications applied to the system.
Identify the appli cable industry codes and classifications applied to the system. 5.2.2.7 Material Specification.
5.2.2.7 Material Specification. The material   specifications for each component should be identified.
The material specifications for each component should be identified.
5.2.2.8   Process Instrumentation. Identify all process instrumen tation.
5.2.2.8 Process Instrumentation.
5.2.2.9 System Reliability. The reliability of the system and the consequences of failures should be discussed.
Identify all process instrumen tation. 5.2.2.9 System Reliability.
5.2.2.10 Testing and Inspection.     Identify the tests and inspec tions to be performed (1) prior to operation and during startup which demonstrate the functional performance and (2) as inservice surveillance to ensure continued reliability.
The reliability of the system and the consequences of failures should be discussed.
5.2.3   Reactor Coolant Pressure Boundary Materials 5.2.3.1 Material Specifications. Provide a list of specifications for the principal ferritic materials, austenitic stainless steels, and nonferrous metals, including bolting and weld materials, to be used in fabricating and assembling each component (e.g., vessels, piping, pumps, and valves) that is part of the reactor coolant pressure boundary (RCPB),
5.2.2.10 Testing and Inspection.
excluding the reactor pressure vessel.       Identify the grade or type and final metallurgical condition of the material placed in service.
Identify the tests and inspec tions to be performed (1) prior to operation and during startup which demonstrate the functional performance and (2) as inservice surveillance to ensure continued reliability.
5.2.3.2 Compatibility with Reactor Coolant. Provide the following information relative to compatibility of the reactor coolant with the materials of construction and the external insulation of the RCPB:
5.2.3 Reactor Coolant Pressure Boundary Materials 5.2.3.1 Material Specifications.
: 1. PWR reactor coolant chemistry (for PWRs only). Provide a descrip tion of the chemistry of the reactor coolant and the additives (such as inhibitors). Describe water chemistry, including maximum allowable content 5-4
Provide a list of specifications for the principal ferritic materials, austenitic stainless steels, and nonferrous metals, including bolting and weld materials, to be used in fabricating and assembling each component (e.g., vessels, piping, pumps, and valves) that is part of the reactor coolant pressure boundary (RCPB), excluding the reactor pressure vessel. Identify the grade or type and final metallurgical condition of the material placed in service.
 
5.2.3.2 Compatibility with Reactor Coolant. Provide the following information relative to compatibility of the reactor coolant with the materials of construction and the external insulation of the RCPB: 1. PWR reactor coolant chemistry (for PWRs only). Provide a descrip tion of the chemistry of the reactor coolant and the additives (such as inhibitors).
Revision 3                                                     November 1978 of chloride, fluoride, and oxygen and permissible content of hydrogen and soluble poisons. Discuss methods to control water chemistry, including pH.
Describe water chemistry, including maximum allowable content 5-4 Revision 3 November 1978 of chloride, fluoride, and oxygen and permissible content of hydrogen and soluble poisons. Discuss methods to control water chemistry, including pH. 2. BWR reactor coolant chemistry (for BWRs only). Describe the chemistry of the reactor coolant and the methods for maintaining coolant chemistry.
: 2. BWR reactor coolant chemistry (for BWRs only). Describe the chemistry of the reactor coolant and the methods for maintaining coolant chemistry. Provide sufficient information about allowable range and maxi mum allowable chloride and fluoride contents, maximum allowable conductiv ity, pH range, location of conductivity meters, performance monitoring, and other details of the coolant chemistry program to indicate whether coolant chemistry will be maintained at a level comparable to the recom mendations in Regulatory Guide 1.56, "Maintenance of Water Purity in Boiling Water Reactors."
Provide sufficient information about allowable range and maxi mum allowable chloride and fluoride contents, maximum allowable conductiv ity, pH range, location of conductivity meters, performance monitoring, and other details of the coolant chemistry program to indicate whether coolant chemistry will be maintained at a level comparable to the recom mendations in Regulatory Guide 1.56, "Maintenance of Water Purity in Boiling Water Reactors." 3. Compatibility of construction materials with reactor coolant.
: 3. Compatibility of construction materials with reactor coolant.
Provide a list of the materials of construction exposed to the reactor coolant and a description of material compatibility with the coolant, contaminants, and radiolytic products to which the materials may be exposed. If nonmetallics are exposed to the reactor coolant, include a description of the compatibility of these materials with the coolant.
Provide a list of the materials of construction exposed to the reactor coolant and a description of material compatibility with the coolant, contaminants, and radiolytic products to which the materials may be exposed. If nonmetallics are exposed to the reactor coolant, include a description of the compatibility of these materials with the coolant.
: 4. Compatibility of construction materials with external insula tion and reactor coolant. Provide a list of the materials of construction of the RCPB and a description of their compatibility with the external insulation, especially in the event of a coolant leakage. Provide suffi cient information about the selection, procurement, testing, storage, and installation of any nonmetallic thermal insulation for austenitic stainless steel to indicate whether the concentrations of chloride, fluoride, sodium, and silicate in thermal insulation will be within the ranges recom mended in Regulatory Guide 1.36, "Nonmetallic Thermal Insulation for Aus tenitic Stainless Steel." Provide information on the leachable contaminants in insulation on nonaustenitic piping. 5.2.3.3 Fabrication and Processing of Ferritic Materials.
: 4. Compatibility of construction materials with external insula tion and reactor coolant. Provide a list of the materials of construction of the RCPB and a description of their compatibility with the external insulation, especially in the event of a coolant leakage. Provide suffi cient information about the selection, procurement, testing, storage, and installation of any nonmetallic thermal insulation for austenitic stainless steel to indicate whether the concentrations of chloride, fluoride, sodium, and silicate in thermal insulation will be within the ranges recom mended in Regulatory Guide 1.36, "Nonmetallic Thermal Insulation for Aus tenitic Stainless Steel." Provide information on the leachable contaminants in insulation on nonaustenitic piping.
Provide the following information relative to fabrication and processing of ferritic materials used for components of the RCPB: 1. Fracture toughness.
5.2.3.3 Fabrication and Processing of Ferritic Materials. Provide the following information relative to fabrication and processing of ferritic materials used for components of the RCPB:
In regard to fracture toughness of the ferritic materials, including bolting materials for components (e.g., vessels, piping, pumps, and valves) of the RCPB, indicate how compliance with the test and acceptance requirements of Appendix G to 10 CFR Part 50 and with Section NB-2300 and Appendix G of the ASME Code, Section III, is achieved.
: 1. Fracture toughness. In regard to fracture toughness of the ferritic materials, including bolting materials for components (e.g.,
Submit the fracture toughness data in tabular form, including information regarding the calibration of instruments and equipment (FSAR). 2. Control of welding. Provide the following information relative to control of welding of ferritic materials used for components of the RCPB: a. Sufficient information regarding the avoidance of cold cracking during welding of low-alloy steel components of the RCPB to 5-5 Revision 3 November 1978 indicate whether the degree of weld integrity and quality will be com parable to that obtainable by following the recommendations of Regulatory Guides 1.50, "Control of Preheat Temperature for Welding of Low-Alloy Steel," and 1.43, "Control of Stainless Steel Weld Cladding of Low-Alloy Steel Components." Provide details on proposed minimum preheat tempera ture and maximum interpass temperature during procedure qualification and production welding. Provide information on the moisture control for low-hydrogen, covered-arc-welding electrodes.
vessels, piping, pumps, and valves) of the RCPB, indicate how compliance with the test and acceptance requirements of Appendix G to 10 CFR Part 50 and with Section NB-2300 and Appendix G of the ASME Code, Section III, is achieved. Submit the fracture toughness data in tabular form, including information regarding the calibration of instruments and equipment (FSAR).
: b. Sufficient information for electroslag welds in the low-alloy steel components of the RCPB to indicate whether the degree of weld integ rity and quality will be comparable to that obtainable by following the recommendations of Regulatory Guide 1.34, "Control of Electroslag Weld Properties." Provide details on the control of welding variables and the metallurgical tests required during procedure qualification and pro duction welding.
: 2. Control of welding. Provide the following information relative to control of welding of ferritic materials used for components of the RCPB:
: c. In regard to welding and weld repair during fabrication and assembly of ferritic steel components of the RCPB, provide suffi cient details for welder qualification for areas of limited accessibil ity, requalification, and monitoring of production welding for adherence to welding qualification requirements to indicate whether the degree of weld integrity and quality will be comparable to that obtainable by following the recommendations of Regulatory Guide 1.71, "Welder Qualifi cation for Areas of Limited Accessibility." 3. Nondestructive examination.
: a. Sufficient information regarding the avoidance of cold cracking during welding of low-alloy steel components of the RCPB to 5-5
Provide sufficient information on nondestructive examination of ferritic steel tubular products (pipe, tubing, flanges, and fittings) for components of the RCPB to indicate whether detection of unacceptable defects (regardless of defect shape, orientation, or location in the product) will be in conformance with the requirements of the ASME Code. 5.2.3.4 Fabrication and Processing of Austenitic Stainless Steels. Provide the following information relative to fabrication and processing of austenitic stainless steels for components of the RCPB: 1. Avoidance of stress-corrosion cracking.
 
Provide the following information relative to avoidance of stress-corrosion cracking of aus tenitic stainless steels for components of the RCPB during all stages of component manufacture and reactor construction:  
Revision 3                                                   November 1978 indicate whether the degree of weld integrity and quality will be com parable to that obtainable by following the recommendations of Regulatory Guides 1.50, "Control of Preheat Temperature for Welding of Low-Alloy Steel," and 1.43, "Control of Stainless Steel Weld Cladding of Low-Alloy Steel Components." Provide details on proposed minimum preheat tempera ture and maximum interpass temperature during procedure qualification and production welding. Provide information on the moisture control for low-hydrogen, covered-arc-welding electrodes.
: a. Sufficient details about the avoidance of sensitization during fabrication and assembly of austenitic stainless steel components of the RCPB to indicate whether the degree of freedom from sensitization will be comparable to that obtainable by following the recommendations of Regulatory Guide 1.44, "Control of the Use of Sensitized Stainless Steel." Provide a description of materials (including provision for 5% minimum delta ferrite when required), welding and heat treating processes, inspections, and tests.5-6 Revision 3 Revision 3 November 1978 b. Sufficient details about the process controls to minimize exposure to contaminants capable of causing stress-corrosion cracking of austenitic stainless steel components of the RCPB to show whether the process controls will provide, during all stages of component manufacture and reactor construction, a degree of surface cleanliness comparable to that obtainable by following the recommendations of Regulatory Guide 1.44 and Regulatory Guide 1.37, "Quality Assurance Requirements for Cleaning of Fluid Systems and Associated Components of Water-Cooled Nuclear Power Plants." c. Characteristics and mechanical properties of cold-worked austenitic stainless steels for components of the RCPB. If such steels are employed at yield strength levels greater than 90,000 psi, provide assurance that they will be compatible with the reactor coolant.
: b. Sufficient information for electroslag welds in the low-alloy steel components of the RCPB to indicate whether the degree of weld integ rity and quality will be comparable to that obtainable by following the recommendations of Regulatory Guide 1.34, "Control of Electroslag Weld Properties."   Provide details on the control of welding variables and the metallurgical tests required during procedure qualification and pro duction welding.
: 2. Control of welding. Provide the following information relative to the control of welding of austenitic stainless steels for components of the RCPB: a. Sufficient information about the avoidance of hot cracking (fissuring) during weld fabrication and assembly of austenitic stainless steel components of the RCPB to indicate whether the degree of weld integ rity and quality will be comparable to that obtainable by following the recommendations of Regulatory Guide 1.31, "Control of Ferrite Content in Stainless Steel Weld Metal." Describe the requirements regarding welding procedures and the amount of and method of determining delta ferrite in weld filler metals and in qualification welds. b. Sufficient information about electroslag welds in aus tenitic stainless steel components of the RCPB to indicate whether the degree of weld integrity and quality will be comparable to that obtain able by following the recommendations of Regulatory Guide 1.34. Provide details on the control of welding variables and the metallurgical tests required during procedure qualification and production welding.
: c. In regard to welding and weld repair during fabrication and assembly of ferritic steel components of the RCPB, provide suffi cient details for welder qualification for areas of limited accessibil ity, requalification, and monitoring of production welding for adherence to welding qualification requirements to indicate whether the degree of weld integrity and quality will be comparable to that obtainable by following the recommendations of Regulatory Guide 1.71, "Welder Qualifi cation for Areas of Limited Accessibility."
: c. In regard to welding and weld repair during fabrication and assembly of austenitic stainless steel components of the RCPB, pro vide sufficient details about welder qualification for areas of limited accessibility, requalification, and monitoring of production welding for adherence to welding qualification requirements to indicate whether the degree of weld integrity and quality will be comparable to that obtain able by following the recommendations of Regulatory Guide 1.71. 3. Nondestructive examination.
: 3. Nondestructive examination. Provide sufficient information on nondestructive examination of ferritic steel tubular products (pipe, tubing, flanges, and fittings) for components of the RCPB to indicate whether detection of unacceptable defects (regardless of defect shape, orientation, or location in the product) will be in conformance with the requirements of the ASME Code.
Provide sufficient information about the program for nondestructive examination of austenitic stainless steel tubular products (pipe, tubing, flanges, and fittings) for compo nents of the RCPB to indicate whether detection of unacceptable defects (regardless of defect shape, orientation, or location in the product) will be in conformance with the requirement of the ASME Code.5-7 November 1978 5.2.4 Inservice Inspection and Testing of Reactor Coolant Pressure Boundary This section should discuss the inservice inspection and testing program for the NRC Quality Group A components (ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section III, Class 1 components).
5.2.3.4 Fabrication and Processing of Austenitic Stainless Steels.
Provide sufficient detail to show that the inservice inspection program meets the requirements of Section XI of the ASME Code. Areas to be discussed should include: 1. System boundary subject to inspection, including associated component supports, structures, and bolting, 2. Arrangement of systems and components to provide accessibility, 3. Examination techniques and procedures, including any special techniques and procedures that might be used to meet the Code requirement, 4. Inspection intervals, 5. Inservice inspection program categories and requirements, 6. Evaluation of examination results, and 7. System leakage and hydrostatic pressure tests. In the FSAR, a detailed inservice inspection program, including infor mat 4 on on areas subject to examination, method of examination, and extent and frequency of examination, should be provided in Chapter 16, "Technical Specifications." 5.2.5 Detection of Leakage Through Reactor Coolant Pressure Boundary The program should be described and sufficient leak detection system information should be furnished to indicate the extent to which the recom mendations of Regulatory Guide 1.45, "Reactor Coolant Pressure Boundary Leakage Detection Systems," have been followed.
Provide the following information relative to fabrication and processing of austenitic stainless steels for components of the RCPB:
Specifically, provide information that will permit comparison with the regulatory positions of the guide, giving a detailed description of the systems employed, their sensitivity and response time, and the reli ance placed on their proper functioning.
: 1. Avoidance of stress-corrosion cracking. Provide the following information relative to avoidance of stress-corrosion cracking of aus tenitic stainless steels for components of the RCPB during all stages of component manufacture and reactor construction:
Also, the limiting leakage con ditions that will be included in the technical specifications should be provided.
: a. Sufficient details about the avoidance of sensitization during fabrication and assembly of austenitic stainless steel components of the RCPB to indicate whether the degree of freedom from sensitization will be comparable to that obtainable by following the recommendations of Regulatory Guide 1.44, "Control of the Use of Sensitized Stainless Steel." Provide a description of materials (including provision for 5%
Identify the leakage detection systems tnat are designed to meet the sensitivity and response guidelines of Regulatory Guide 1.45. Describe these systems as discussed in Section 7.5, "Safety-Related Display Instru mentation." Also, identify these systems that are used for alarm as an indirect indication of leakage, and provide the design criteria.5-8 Revision 3 November 1978 Describe how signals from the various leakage detection systems are correlated to provide information to the plant operators on conditions of quantitative leakage flow rate. Discuss the provisions for testing and calibration of the leak detec tion systems.
minimum delta ferrite when required), welding and heat treating processes, inspections, and tests.
5.3 Reactor Vessels 5.3.1 Reactor Vessel Materials This section should contain pertinent data in enough detail to provide assurance that the materials, fabrication methods, and inspection techniques used for the reactor vessel conform to all applicable regulations.
5-6
The PSAR should describe the specifications and criteria to be applied, whereas the FSAR should demonstrate that these requirements have been met. 5.3.1.1 Material Specifications.
 
List all materials in the reactor vessel and its appurtenances and provide the applicable material specifi cations, making appropriate references to Section 5.2.3. If any materials other than those listed in Appendix I to the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section III, are used, provide the data called for under Appendix IV for approval of the new material.
Revision 3                                                   November 1978
Information provided in Section 5.2.3.1 may be incorporated by reference.
: b. Sufficient details about the process controls to minimize exposure to contaminants capable of causing stress-corrosion cracking of austenitic stainless steel components of the RCPB to show whether the process controls will provide, during all stages of component manufacture and reactor construction, a degree of surface cleanliness comparable to that obtainable by following the recommendations of Regulatory Guide 1.44 and Regulatory Guide 1.37, "Quality Assurance Requirements for Cleaning of Fluid Systems and Associated Components of Water-Cooled Nuclear Power Plants."
: c. Characteristics and mechanical properties of cold-worked austenitic stainless steels for components of the RCPB. If such steels are employed at yield strength levels greater than 90,000 psi, provide assurance that they will be compatible with the reactor coolant.
: 2. Control of welding. Provide the following information relative to the control of welding of austenitic stainless steels for components of the RCPB:
: a. Sufficient information about the avoidance of hot cracking (fissuring) during weld fabrication and assembly of austenitic stainless steel components of the RCPB to indicate whether the degree of weld integ rity and quality will be comparable to that obtainable by following the recommendations of Regulatory Guide 1.31, "Control of Ferrite Content in Stainless Steel Weld Metal." Describe the requirements regarding welding procedures and the amount of and method of determining delta ferrite in weld filler metals and in qualification welds.
: b. Sufficient information about electroslag welds in tenitic stainless steel components of the RCPB to indicate whether aus the degree of weld integrity and quality will be comparable to that obtain able by following the recommendations of Regulatory Guide 1.34. Provide details on the control of welding variables and the metallurgical tests required during procedure qualification and production welding.
: c. In regard to welding and weld repair during fabrication and assembly of austenitic stainless steel components of the RCPB, pro vide sufficient details about welder qualification for areas of limited accessibility, requalification, and monitoring of production welding for adherence to welding qualification requirements to indicate whether the degree of weld integrity and quality will be comparable to that obtain able by following the recommendations of Regulatory Guide 1.71.
: 3. Nondestructive examination. Provide sufficient information about the program for nondestructive examination of austenitic stainless steel tubular products (pipe, tubing, flanges, and fittings) for compo nents of the RCPB to indicate whether detection of unacceptable defects (regardless of defect shape, orientation, or location in the product) will be in conformance with the requirement of the ASME Code.
5-7
 
Revision 3                                                    November 1978 5.2.4     Inservice Inspection and Testing of Reactor Coolant Pressure Boundary This section should discuss the inservice inspection and testing program for the NRC Quality Group A components (ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section III, Class 1 components). Provide sufficient detail to show that the inservice inspection program meets the requirements of Section XI of the ASME Code. Areas to be discussed should include:
: 1. System boundary subject to inspection,       including associated component supports, structures, and bolting,
: 2. Arrangement of systems and components to provide accessibility,
: 3. Examination techniques and procedures, including any special techniques and procedures that might be used to meet the Code requirement,
: 4. Inspection intervals,
: 5. Inservice inspection program categories and requirements,
: 6. Evaluation of examination results, and
: 7. System leakage and hydrostatic pressure tests.
In the FSAR, a detailed inservice inspection program, including infor mat 4 on on areas subject to examination, method of examination, and extent and frequency of examination, should be provided in Chapter 16, "Technical Specifications."
5.2.5     Detection of Leakage Through Reactor Coolant Pressure Boundary The program should be described and sufficient leak detection system information should be furnished to indicate the extent to which the recom mendations of Regulatory Guide 1.45, "Reactor Coolant Pressure Boundary Leakage Detection Systems," have been followed.
Specifically, provide information that will permit comparison with the regulatory positions of the guide, giving a detailed description of the systems employed, their sensitivity and response time, and the reli ance placed on their proper functioning. Also, the limiting leakage con ditions that will be included in the technical specifications should be provided.
Identify the leakage detection systems tnat are designed to meet the sensitivity and response guidelines of Regulatory Guide 1.45. Describe these systems as discussed in Section 7.5, "Safety-Related Display Instru mentation." Also, identify these systems that are used for alarm as an indirect indication of leakage, and provide the design criteria.
5-8
 
Revision 3                                                     November 1978 Describe how signals from the various leakage detection systems are correlated to provide information to the plant operators on conditions of quantitative leakage flow rate.
Discuss the provisions for testing and calibration of the leak detec tion systems.
5.3 Reactor Vessels 5.3.1   Reactor Vessel Materials This section should contain pertinent data in enough detail to provide assurance that the materials, fabrication methods, and inspection techniques used for the reactor vessel conform to all applicable regulations.
The PSAR should describe the specifications and criteria to be applied, whereas the FSAR should demonstrate that these requirements have been met.
5.3.1.1 Material Specifications. List all materials in the reactor vessel and its appurtenances and provide the applicable material specifi cations, making appropriate references to Section 5.2.3. If any materials other than those listed in Appendix I to the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section III, are used, provide the data called for under Appendix IV for approval of the new material.       Information provided in Section 5.2.3.1 may be incorporated by reference.
5.3.1.2 Special Processes Used for Manufacturing and Fabrication.
5.3.1.2 Special Processes Used for Manufacturing and Fabrication.
Describe the manufacture of the product forms and the methods used to fabricate the vessel. Discuss any special or unusual processes used, and show that they will not compromise the integrity of the reactor vessel. 5.3.1.3 Special Methods for Nondestructive Examination.
Describe the manufacture of the product forms and the methods used to fabricate the vessel. Discuss any special or unusual processes used, and show that they will not compromise the integrity of the reactor vessel.
Describe in detail all special procedures for detecting surface and internal disconti nuities with emphasis on procedures that differ from those in Section III of the Code. Pay particular attention to calibration methods, instrumen tation, method of application, sensitivity, reliability, reproducibility, and acceptance standards.
5.3.1.3 Special Methods for Nondestructive Examination.       Describe in detail all special procedures for detecting surface and internal disconti nuities with emphasis on procedures that differ from those in Section III of the Code. Pay particular attention to calibration methods, instrumen tation, method of application, sensitivity, reliability, reproducibility, and acceptance standards.
5.3.1.4 Special Controls for Ferritic and Austenitic Stainless Steels. Making appropriate references to Section 5.2.3, describe controls on weld ing, composition, heat treatments, and similar processes covered by regu latory guides to verify that these recommendations or equivalent controls are employed.
5.3.1.4 Special Controls for Ferritic and Austenitic Stainless Steels.
The following regulatory guides should be addressed:
Making appropriate references to Section 5.2.3, describe controls on weld ing, composition, heat treatments, and similar processes covered by regu latory guides to verify that these recommendations or equivalent controls are employed. The following regulatory guides should be addressed:
Regulatory Guide 1.31, "Control of Ferrite Content in Stainless Steel Weld Metal;" Regulatory Guide 1.34, "Control of Electroslag Weld Properties;" 5-9 Revision 3 Revision 3 November 1978 Regulatory Guide 1.43, "Control of Stainless Steel Weld Cladding of Low-Alloy Steel Components;" Regulatory Guide 1.44, "Control of the Use of Sensitized Stainless Steel;" Regulatory Guide 1.50, "Control of Preheat Temperature for Welding of Low-Alloy Steel;" Regulatory Guide 1.71, "Welder Qualification for Areas of Limited Accessibility;" and Regulatory Guide 1.99, "Effects of Residual Elements on Predicted Radiation Damage to Reactor Vessel Materials." 5.3.1.5 Fracture Toughness.
Regulatory Guide 1.31,   "Control of Ferrite Content in Stainless Steel Weld Metal;"
Describe the fracture testing and accept ance criteria specified for materials of the reactor vessel. In particular, describe how the toughness requirements of Appendix G to 10 CFR Part 50 will be met. In the FSAR, report the results of fracture toughness tests on all ferritic materials of the reactor vessel, and demonstrate that the mate rial toughness meets all requirements.
Regulatory Guide 1.34, "Control of Electroslag Weld Properties;"
5.3.1.6 Material Surveillance.
5-9
Describe the material surveillance program in detail. Provide assurance that the program meets the require ments of Appendix H to 10 CFR Part 50. In particular, consider the follow ing subjects:  
 
: 1. Basis for selection of material in the program, 2. Number and type of specimens in each capsule, 3. Number of capsules and proposed withdrawal schedule, 4. Neutron flux and fluence calculations for the vessel wall and surveillance specimens, 5. Expected effects of radiation on the vessel wall materials and the basis for this estimation, and 6. Location of capsules, method of attachment, and provisions to ensure that capsules will be retained in position throughout the life time of the vessel. 5.3.1.7 Reactor Vessel Fasteners.
Revision 3                                                   November 1978 Regulatory Guide 1.43, "Control of Stainless Steel Weld Cladding of Low-Alloy Steel Components;"
Describe the materials and design of fasteners for the reactor vessel closure. Include enough detail regarding materials property requirements, nondestructive evaluation procedures, lubricants or surface treatments, and protection provisions to show that the recommendations of Regulatory Guide 1.65, "Materials and Inspections for Reactor Vessel Closure Studs," or equivalent measures, are followed.5-10 Revision 3 November 1978 In the FSAR, include the results of mechanical property and tough ness tests to demonstrate that the material conforms to these recommen dations or their equivalent.
Regulatory Guide 1.44, "Control of the Use of Sensitized Stainless Steel;"
5.3.2 Pressure-Temperature Limits This section should describe the bases for setting operational limits on pressure and temperature for normal, upset, and test conditions.
Regulatory Guide 1.50, "Control of Preheat Temperature for Welding of Low-Alloy Steel;"
It should provide detailed assurance that Appendices G and H to 10 CFR Part 50 will be complied with throughout the life of the plant. 5.3.2.1 Limit Curves. Provide limits on pressure and temperature for the following conditions:  
Regulatory Guide 1.71, "Welder Qualification for Areas of Limited Accessibility;" and Regulatory Guide 1.99, "Effects of Residual Elements on Predicted Radiation Damage to Reactor Vessel Materials."
: 1. Preservice system hydrostatic tests, 2. Inservice leak and hydrostatic tests, 3. Normal operation, including heatup and cooldown, and 4. Reactor core operation.
5.3.1.5 Fracture Toughness. Describe the fracture testing and accept ance criteria specified for materials of the reactor vessel. In particular, describe how the toughness requirements of Appendix G to 10 CFR Part 50 will be met.
In the FSAR, report the results of fracture toughness tests on all ferritic materials of the reactor vessel, and demonstrate that the mate rial toughness meets all requirements.
5.3.1.6 Material Surveillance. Describe the material surveillance program in detail. Provide assurance that the program meets the require ments of Appendix H to 10 CFR Part 50. In particular, consider the follow ing subjects:
: 1. Basis for selection of material in the program,
: 2. Number and type of specimens in each capsule,
: 3. Number of capsules and proposed withdrawal schedule,
: 4. Neutron flux and fluence calculations for the vessel wall and surveillance specimens,
: 5. Expected effects of radiation on the vessel wall materials and the basis for this estimation, and
: 6. Location of capsules, method of attachment, and provisions to ensure that capsules will be retained in position throughout the life time of the vessel.
5.3.1.7 Reactor Vessel Fasteners. Describe the materials and design of fasteners for the reactor vessel closure. Include enough detail regarding materials property requirements, nondestructive evaluation procedures, lubricants or surface treatments, and protection provisions to show that the recommendations of Regulatory Guide 1.65, "Materials and Inspections for Reactor Vessel Closure Studs," or equivalent measures, are followed.
5-10
 
Revision 3                                                     November 1978 In the FSAR, include the results of mechanical property and tough ness tests to demonstrate that the material conforms to these recommen dations or their equivalent.
5.3.2   Pressure-Temperature Limits This section should describe the bases for setting operational limits on pressure and temperature for normal, upset, and test conditions.
It should provide detailed assurance that Appendices G and H to 10 CFR Part 50 will be complied with throughout the life of the plant.
5.3.2.1   Limit Curves. Provide limits on pressure and temperature for the following conditions:
: 1. Preservice system hydrostatic tests,
: 2. Inservice leak and hydrostatic tests,
: 3. Normal operation, including heatup and cooldown, and
: 4. Reactor core operation.
If procedures or criteria other than those recommended in the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code are used, show that equivalent safety margins are provided.
If procedures or criteria other than those recommended in the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code are used, show that equivalent safety margins are provided.
In the PSAR, describe the bases used to determine these limits, and provide typical curves with temperatures relative to the RT (as defined in paragraph NB-2331 of Section III of the ASME Code) o 3 fP e limiting material.
In the PSAR, describe the bases used to determine these limits, provide typical curves with temperatures relative to the RT                   and (as defined in paragraph NB-2331 of Section III of the ASME Code) o 3fP e limiting material.
In the FSAR and technical specifications, include the actual material toughness test results, and provide limits based on these properties and the predicted effects of irradiation.
In the FSAR and technical specifications, include the actual material toughness test results, and provide limits based on these properties and the predicted effects of irradiation.       Describe the bases used for the prediction, and indicate the extent to which the recommendations of Regu latory Guide 1.99 are followed.
Describe the bases used for the prediction, and indicate the extent to which the recommendations of Regu latory Guide 1.99 are followed.
Describe the procedures that will be used to update these limits during service, taking into account radiation effects.
Describe the procedures that will be used to update these limits during service, taking into account radiation effects.
5.3.2.2 Operating Procedures.
5.3.2.2 Operating Procedures.       Compare the pressure-temperature limits in Section 5.3.2.1 with intended normal operating procedures, and show that the limits will not be exceeded during any foreseeable upset condition.
Compare the pressure-temperature limits in Section 5.3.2.1 with intended normal operating procedures, and show that the limits will not be exceeded during any foreseeable upset condition.
5.3.3     Reactor Vessel Integrity This section should contain any important information about vessel integrity not covered in other sections. In addition, it should summarize the major considerations in achieving reactor vessel safety and describe the factors contributing to the vessel's integrity.
5.3.3 Reactor Vessel Integrity This section should contain any important information about vessel integrity not covered in other sections.
5-11
In addition, it should summarize the major considerations in achieving reactor vessel safety and describe the factors contributing to the vessel's integrity.
 
5-11 November 1978 The introductory material should identify the reactor vessel designer and manufacturer and should describe their experience.
Revision 3                                                    November 1978 The introductory material should identify the reactor vessel designer and manufacturer and should describe their experience.
5.3.3.1 Design. Include a brief description of the basic design, preferably with a simple schematic showing materials, construction features, and fabrication methods. Summarize applicable design codes and bases. Reference other sections of the SAR as appropriate.
5.3.3.1 Design. Include a brief description of the basic design, preferably with a simple schematic showing materials, construction features, and fabrication methods. Summarize applicable design codes and bases.
5.3.3.2 Materials of Construction.
Reference other sections of the SAR as appropriate.
Note briefly the materials used and describe any special requirements to improve their properties or quality.
5.3.3.2 Materials of Construction. Note briefly the materials used and describe any special requirements to improve their properties or quality.
Emphasize the reasons for selection and provide assurance of suitability.
Emphasize the reasons for selection and provide assurance of suitability.
5.3.3.3 Fabrication Methods. Summarize the fabrication methods.
5.3.3.3 Fabrication Methods. Summarize the fabrication methods.
Describe the service history of vessels constructed using these methods and the vessel supplier's experience with the procedures.
Describe the service history of vessels constructed using these methods and the vessel supplier's experience with the procedures.
5.3.3.4 Inspection Requirements.
5.3.3.4 Inspection Requirements. Summarize the inspection require ments, paying particular attention to the level of initial integrity.
Summarize the inspection require ments, paying particular attention to the level of initial integrity.
Describe any examination methods used that are, in addition to the minimum requirements of Section III of the ASME Code.
Describe any examination methods used that are, in addition to the minimum requirements of Section III of the ASME Code. 5.3.3.5 Shipment and Installation.
5.3.3.5 Shipment and Installation. Summarize the means used to protect the vessel so that its as-manufactured integrity will be main tained during shipment and installation.     Reference other sections of the SAR as appropriate.
Summarize the means used to protect the vessel so that its as-manufactured integrity will be main tained during shipment and installation.
5.3.3.6 Operating Conditions. Summarize the operational limits that will be specified to ensure vessel safety. Provide a basis for con cluding that vessel integrity will be maintained during the most severe postulated transients, or reference other appropriate SAR sections.
Reference other sections of the SAR as appropriate.
5.3.3.7 Inservice Surveillance. Making appropriate reference to Section 5.2.4, summarize the inservice inspection and material surveil lance programs and explain why they are adequate.
5.3.3.6 Operating Conditions.
5.4   Component and Subsystem Design This section should present discussions of the performance require ments and design features to ensure overall safety of the various compo nents within the reactor coolant system and subsystems closely allied with the reactor coolant system.
Summarize the operational limits that will be specified to ensure vessel safety. Provide a basis for con cluding that vessel integrity will be maintained during the most severe postulated transients, or reference other appropriate SAR sections.
Because these components and subsystems differ for various types and designs o- reactors, the Standard Format does not assig, specific subsection numbers to each of these components or subsystems. The appli cant should provide separate subsections (numbered 5.4.1 through 5.4.X) for each principal component or subsystem. The discussion in each sub section should present the design bases, description, evaluation, and necessary tests and inspections for the component or subsystem, including a discussion of the radiological considerations for each subsystem from a viewpoint of how radiation affects the operation of the subsystem and 5-12
5.3.3.7 Inservice Surveillance.
 
Making appropriate reference to Section 5.2.4, summarize the inservice inspection and material surveil lance programs and explain why they are adequate.
Revision 3                                                         November 1978 from a viewpoint of how radiation levels affect the operators and capa bilities of operation and maintenance.       Appropriate details of the mechanical design should be described in Sections 3.7, 3.9, and 5.2.
5.4 Component and Subsystem Design This section should present discussions of the performance require ments and design features to ensure overall safety of the various compo nents within the reactor coolant system and subsystems closely allied with the reactor coolant system. Because these components and subsystems differ for various types and designs o- reactors, the Standard Format does not assig, specific subsection numbers to each of these components or subsystems.
The following paragraphs provide examples of components and subsys tems that should be discussed as appropriate to the individual plant and identify some specific information that should be provided in addition to the items identified above.
The appli cant should provide separate subsections (numbered 5.4.1 through 5.4.X) for each principal component or subsystem.
5.4.1     Reactor Coolant Pumps In addition to the discussion of design bases, tions, and tests and inspections, the provisions             description, evalua taken to preclude rotor overspeeding of the reactor coolant pumps in the event of a design basis LOCA should be discussed.
The discussion in each sub section should present the design bases, description, evaluation, and necessary tests and inspections for the component or subsystem, including a discussion of the radiological considerations for each subsystem from a viewpoint of how radiation affects the operation of the subsystem and 5-12 Revision 3 Revision 3 November 1978 from a viewpoint of how radiation levels affect the operators and capa bilities of operation and maintenance.
5.4.1.1 Pump Flywheel Integrity (PWR).     The applicant should provide explicit information to indicate the extent to which the recommendations of Regulatory Guide 1.14, "Reactor Coolant Pump Flywheel Integrity," are followed in the design, testing, and inservice inspection of the reactor coolant pump flywheels.
Appropriate details of the mechanical design should be described in Sections 3.7, 3.9, and 5.2. The following paragraphs provide examples of components and subsys tems that should be discussed as appropriate to the individual plant and identify some specific information that should be provided in addition to the items identified above. 5.4.1 Reactor Coolant Pumps In addition to the discussion of design bases, description, evalua tions, and tests and inspections, the provisions taken to preclude rotor overspeeding of the reactor coolant pumps in the event of a design basis LOCA should be discussed.
5.4.2   Steam Generators (PWR)
5.4.1.1 Pump Flywheel Integrity (PWR). The applicant should provide explicit information to indicate the extent to which the recommendations of Regulatory Guide 1.14, "Reactor Coolant Pump Flywheel Integrity," are followed in the design, testing, and inservice inspection of the reactor coolant pump flywheels.
The information provided should include estimates for radioactivity levels in the secondary side                   of design limits of the steam generators during normal operation and the bases for these estimates. The potential effects of tube ruptures should be discussed.
5.4.2 Steam Generators (PWR) The information provided should include estimates of design limits for radioactivity levels in the secondary side of the steam generators during normal operation and the bases for these estimates.
Provide the steam generator design criteria used to prevent unaccept able tube damage from flow-induced vibration and cavitation. Information included in Section 3.9.3 should be referenced in this section. The fol lowing specific information should be included:
The potential effects of tube ruptures should be discussed.
: 1. The design conditions and transients the design of the steam generator tubes and the that will be specified in operating condition cate gory selected (e.g., upset, emergency, or faulted) that defines the allow able stress intensity limits to be used and the justification for this selection.
Provide the steam generator design criteria used to prevent unaccept able tube damage from flow-induced vibration and cavitation.
: 2. The extent of tube-wall thinning that could be tolerated without exceeding the allowable     stress intensity limits defined above under the postulated condition of     a design basis pipe break in the reactor coolant pressure boundary or a       break in the secondary piping during reactor operation.
Information included in Section 3.9.3 should be referenced in this section. The fol lowing specific information should be included:  
5.4.2.1 Steam Generator Materials.     This section should contain information on the selection and fabrication of Code Class 1 and 2 steam generator materials (including those that are part of the reactor coolant pressure boundary), the design aspects of the steam generator that affect 5-13
: 1. The design conditions and transients that will be specified in the design of the steam generator tubes and the operating condition cate gory selected (e.g., upset, emergency, or faulted) that defines the allow able stress intensity limits to be used and the justification for this selection.
 
: 2. The extent of tube-wall thinning that could be tolerated without exceeding the allowable stress intensity limits defined above under the postulated condition of a design basis pipe break in the reactor coolant pressure boundary or a break in the secondary piping during reactor operation.
Revision 3                                                    November 1978 materials performance, and the compatibility of the steam generator materials with the primary and secondary coolant.
5.4.2.1 Steam Generator Materials.
: 1. Selection and Fabrication of Materials. Making appropriate references to Section 5.2.3, provide information on the selection and fabrication of materials for Code Class 1 and 2 components of the steam generators, including tubing, tube sheet, channel head casting or plate, tube sheet and channel head cladding, forged nozzles, shell pressure plates, access plates (manway and handhole), and bolting. Indicate the method used to fasten tubes to the tube sheet and show that it meets the require ments of Sections III and IX of the ASME Code. Include the extent of tube expansion and the methods of expansion used. Describe onsite cleaning and cleanliness control provisions, and show that they produce results equivalent to those obtained by following the recommendations of Regula tory Guide 1.37 and ANSI Standard N45.21-1973, "Cleaning of Fluid Systems and Associated Components for Nuclear Power Plants." For steam generators that are shipped partially assembled, include a discussion of the tech niques used to maintain cleanliness during shipment and final assembly.
This section should contain information on the selection and fabrication of Code Class 1 and 2 steam generator materials (including those that are part of the reactor coolant pressure boundary), the design aspects of the steam generator that affect 5-13 November 1978 materials performance, and the compatibility of the steam generator materials with the primary and secondary coolant.
List the Code Cases used in material selection. Technical justification for any Code Cases not listed in Regulatory Guide 1.85, "Materials Code Case Acceptability - ASME Section III Division 1," should be provided.
: 1. Selection and Fabrication of Materials.
Provide information on the fracture toughness properties of ferritic materials, making appropriate references to Section 5.2.3. Sufficient information on materials for Class 1 components should be given to show that they meet the requirements of Article NB-2300 and Appendix G of Sec tion III of the ASME Code. Sufficient information on Class 2 materials should be provided to show the extent to which they meet the requirements of Article NC-2300 of Section III of the Code.
Making appropriate references to Section 5.2.3, provide information on the selection and fabrication of materials for Code Class 1 and 2 components of the steam generators, including tubing, tube sheet, channel head casting or plate, tube sheet and channel head cladding, forged nozzles, shell pressure plates, access plates (manway and handhole), and bolting. Indicate the method used to fasten tubes to the tube sheet and show that it meets the require ments of Sections III and IX of the ASME Code. Include the extent of tube expansion and the methods of expansion used. Describe onsite cleaning and cleanliness control provisions, and show that they produce results equivalent to those obtained by following the recommendations of Regula tory Guide 1.37 and ANSI Standard N45.21-1973, "Cleaning of Fluid Systems and Associated Components for Nuclear Power Plants." For steam generators that are shipped partially assembled, include a discussion of the tech niques used to maintain cleanliness during shipment and final assembly.
: 2. Steam Generator Design. Provide information on those aspects of steam generator design that may affect the performance of steam generator materials. Describe the methods used to avoid extensive crevice areas where the tubes pass through the tube sheet and tubing supports.
List the Code Cases used in material selection.
: 3. Compatibility of the Steam Generator Tubing with the Primary and Secondary Coolant. Provide information on the compatibility of the steam generator tubing with both the primary and secondary coolant.
Technical justification for any Code Cases not listed in Regulatory Guide 1.85, "Materials Code Case Acceptability  
: 4. Cleanup of Secondary Side. Describe the procedures and methods used to remove surface deposits, sludge, and excessive corrosion products in the secondary side.
-ASME Section III Division 1," should be provided.
5.4.2.2 Steam Generator Inservice Inspection. In this section, the PSAR should describe the provisions in the design of the steam gener ators to permit inservice inspection of all Code Class 1 and 2 components, including individual steam generator tubes. The FSAR should describe detailed plans for baseline and inservice inspections of all Code Class I 1 and 2 components making appropriate references to Section 5.2.4.
Provide information on the fracture toughness properties of ferritic materials, making appropriate references to Section 5.2.3. Sufficient information on materials for Class 1 components should be given to show that they meet the requirements of Article NB-2300 and Appendix G of Sec tion III of the ASME Code. Sufficient information on Class 2 materials should be provided to show the extent to which they meet the requirements of Article NC-2300 of Section III of the Code. 2. Steam Generator Design. Provide information on those aspects of steam generator design that may affect the performance of steam generator materials.
5-14
Describe the methods used to avoid extensive crevice areas where the tubes pass through the tube sheet and tubing supports.
 
: 3. Compatibility of the Steam Generator Tubing with the Primary and Secondary Coolant. Provide information on the compatibility of the steam generator tubing with both the primary and secondary coolant.
Revision 3                                                     November 1978
: 4. Cleanup of Secondary Side. Describe the procedures and methods used to remove surface deposits, sludge, and excessive corrosion products in the secondary side. 5.4.2.2 Steam Generator Inservice Inspection.
: 1. Compliance with Section XI of the ASME Code. Provide sufficient information on the proposed inservice inspection program for Code Class 1 and 2 components of the steam generators to show that it complies with the edition of Section XI of the ASME Code, Division 1, "Rules for Inspec tion and Testing of Components of Light-Water-Cooled Plants," required by 10 CFR 50.55a, paragraph g.
In this section, the PSAR should describe the provisions in the design of the steam gener ators to permit inservice inspection of all Code Class 1 and 2 components, including individual steam generator tubes. The FSAR should describe detailed plans for baseline and inservice inspections of all Code Class I 1 and 2 components making appropriate references to Section 5.2.4.5-14 Revision 3 November 1978 1. Compliance with Section XI of the ASME Code. Provide sufficient information on the proposed inservice inspection program for Code Class 1 and 2 components of the steam generators to show that it complies with the edition of Section XI of the ASME Code, Division 1, "Rules for Inspec tion and Testing of Components of Light-Water-Cooled Plants," required by 10 CFR 50.55a, paragraph  
: 2. Program for Inservice Inspection of Steam Generator Tubing.
: g. 2. Program for Inservice Inspection of Steam Generator Tubing. Provide sufficient information in the FSAR on the inservice inspection program for steam generator tubing to show that it will be at least as effective as the program recommended in Regulatory Guide 1.83, "Inservice Inspection of Pressurized Water Reactor Steam Generator Tubes." The information provided should include a description of the equipment, pro cedures, sensitivity of the examination, and recording methods; criteria used to select tubes for examination; inspection intervals; and actions that will be taken if defects are found (including criteria for plugging defective tubes). 5.4.3 Reactor Coolant Piping The section on reactor coolant piping should present an overall description of this system, making appropriate references to detailed information  
Provide sufficient information in the FSAR on the inservice inspection program for steam generator tubing to show that it will be at least as effective as the program recommended in Regulatory Guide 1.83, "Inservice Inspection of Pressurized Water Reactor Steam Generator Tubes." The information provided should include a description of the equipment, pro cedures, sensitivity of the examination, and recording methods; criteria used to select tubes for examination; inspection intervals; and actions that will be taken if defects are found (including criteria for plugging defective tubes).
*on criteria, methods, and materials provided in Chapter 3 and Section 5.2.3. The discussion should include the provisions taken during design, fabrication, and operation to control those factors that contribute to stress corrosion cracking.
5.4.3     Reactor Coolant Piping The section on reactor coolant piping should present an overall description of this system, making appropriate references to detailed information *on criteria, methods, and materials provided in Chapter 3 and Section 5.2.3. The discussion should include the provisions taken during design, fabrication, and operation to control those factors that contribute to stress corrosion cracking.
5.4.4 Main Steam Line Flow Restrictions 5.4.5 Main Steam Line Isolation System Include discussion of provisions, such as seal systems, taken to reduce the potential leakage of radioactivity to the environment in the event of a main steam line break. 5.4.6 Reactor Core Isolation Cooling System 5.4.6.1 Design Bases. A summary description of the reactor core isolation cooling (RCIC) system should be provided.
5.4.4 Main Steam Line Flow Restrictions 5.4.5 Main Steam Line Isolation System Include discussion of provisions, such as seal systems, taken to reduce the potential leakage of radioactivity to the environment in the event of a main steam line break.
The RCIC system design bases and criteria for both the steamside and pumpside should be specified, and in particular discuss: 1. The design bases with respect to General Design Criteria 34, 55, 56, and 57. 2. Design bases concerned with reliability and operability require ments. The design bases for the manual operations required to operate the system should be described.
5.4.6 Reactor Core Isolation Cooling System 5.4.6.1 Design Bases.     A summary description of the reactor core isolation cooling (RCIC) system should be provided. The RCIC system design bases and criteria for both the steamside and pumpside should be specified, and in particular discuss:
: 3. Design bases for RCIC operation following a loss of offsite power event.5-15 Revision 3 Revision 3 4. The design bases established for the purpose of protecting the RCIC system from physical damage. This discussion should include the design bases for the RCIC system support structure and for protection aganst incidents that could fail RCIC and high pressure core spray (HPCS) jointly.
: 1. The design bases with respect to General Design Criteria 34, 55, 56, and 57.
5.4.6.2 System Design. This section should include: 1. Schematic Piping and Instrumentation Diagrams.
: 2. Design bases concerned with reliability and operability require ments. The design bases for the manual operations required to operate the system should be described.
Provide a descrip tion of the RCIC system. Provide piping and instrumentation diagrams showing all components, piping, points where connecting systems and sub systems tie together, and instrumentation and controls associated with subsystem and component actuation.
: 3. Design bases for RCIC operation following a loss of offsite power event.
Provide a complete description of component interlocks.
5-15
Provide a diagram showing temperatures, pressures, and flow rates for RCIC operation.
 
: 2. Equipment and Component Descriptions.
Revision 3                                                       November 1978
Describe each component of the system. Identify the significant design parameters for each com ponent. State the design pressure and temperature of components for various portions of the system and explain the bases for their selection.
: 4. The design bases established for the purpose of protecting the RCIC system from physical damage.       This discussion should include the design bases for the RCIC system support structure and for protection aganst incidents that could fail RCIC and high pressure core spray (HPCS) jointly.
: 3. Applicable Codes and Classifications.
5.4.6.2     System Design. This section should include:
Identify the applicable industry codes and classifications for the system design. 4. System Reliability Considerations.
: 1. Schematic Piping and Instrumentation Diagrams. Provide a descrip tion of the RCIC system.       Provide piping and instrumentation diagrams showing all components, piping, points where connecting systems and sub systems tie together, and instrumentation and controls associated with subsystem and component actuation.         Provide a complete description of component interlocks. Provide a diagram showing temperatures, pressures, and flow rates for RCIC operation.
Discuss the provisions incorporated in the design to ensure that the system will operate when needed and will deliver the required flow rates. 5. Manual Actions. Discuss all manual actions required to be taken by an operator in order for the RCIC system to operate properly, assuming all components are operable.
: 2.     Equipment and Component Descriptions. Describe each component of the system. Identify the significant design parameters for each com ponent. State the design pressure and temperature of components for various portions of the system and explain the bases for their selection.
Identify any actions that are required to be taken from outside the control room. Repeat this discussion for the most limiting single failure in the combined RCIC and HPCS system. 5.4.6.3 Performance Evaluation.
: 3.     Applicable Codes and Classifications. Identify the applicable industry codes and classifications for the system design.
Provide an evaluation of the ability of the RCIC system to perform its function.
: 4.     System Reliability Considerations.     Discuss the provisions incorporated in the design to ensure that the system will operate when needed and will deliver the required flow rates.
Describe the analytical methods used and clearly state all assumptions.
: 5. Manual Actions. Discuss all manual actions required to be taken by an operator in order for the RCIC system to operate properly, assuming all components are operable.       Identify any actions that are required to be taken from outside the control room.         Repeat this discussion for the most limiting single failure in the combined RCIC and HPCS system.
5.4.6.4 Preoperational Testing. The proposed preoperational test program should be discussed.
5.4.6.3 Performance Evaluation. Provide an evaluation of the ability of the RCIC system to perform its function. Describe the analytical methods used and clearly state all assumptions.
The discussion should identify test objec tives, method of testing, and test acceptance criteria.
5.4.6.4 Preoperational Testing.       The proposed preoperational test program should be discussed. The discussion should identify test objec tives, method of testing, and test acceptance criteria.
5.4.7 Residual Heat Removal System 5.4.7.1 Design Bases. A summary description of the residual heat removal (RHR) system should be provided.
5.4.7     Residual Heat Removal System 5.4.7.1 Design Bases.       A summary description of the residual heat removal (RHR)       system should be provided. Nuclear plants employing the same RHR system design that are operating or have been licensed should be referenced.       The design basis should be specified, including:
Nuclear plants employing the same RHR system design that are operating or have been licensed should be referenced.
: 1. Functional design bases, including the time required to reduce the reactor coolant system (RCS) temperature to approximately 212*F, and 5-16
The design basis should be specified, including:  
 
: 1. Functional design bases, including the time required to reduce the reactor coolant system (RCS) temperature to approximately 212*F, and 5-16 November 1978 Revision 3 November 1978 to a temperature that would permit refueling.
Revision 3                                                         November 1978 to a temperature that would permit refueling.         The design basis times should be presented for the case where the entire RHR system is operable and for the case with the most limiting single failure in the RHR system.
The design basis times should be presented for the case where the entire RHR system is operable and for the case with the most limiting single failure in the RHR system. 2. The design bases for the isolation of the RHR system from the RCS. These isolation design bases should include any interlocks that are provided.
: 2. The design bases for the isolation of the RHR system from RCS.                                                                           the These isolation design bases should include any interlocks that are provided.       The design bases regarding prevention of RHR pump damage in event of closure of the isolation valves should be discussed.
The design bases regarding prevention of RHR pump damage in event of closure of the isolation valves should be discussed.
: 3. The design basis for the pressure relief capacity of the RHR system.     These design bases should consider limiting transients, equip ment malfunctions, and possible operator errors during plant startup and cooldown when the RHR system is not isolated from the RCS.
: 3. The design basis for the pressure relief capacity of the RHR system. These design bases should consider limiting transients, equip ment malfunctions, and possible operator errors during plant startup and cooldown when the RHR system is not isolated from the RCS. 4. The design bases with respect to General Design Criterion  
: 4.     The design bases with respect to General Design Criterion 5.
: 5. 5. Design bases concerned with reliability and operability require ments. The design bases regarding the manual operations required to operate the system should be described with emphasis on any operations that cannot be performed from the control room in the event of a single failure.
: 5.     Design bases concerned with reliability and operability ments. The design bases regarding the manual operations                     require required to operate the system should be described with emphasis on any operations that cannot be performed from the control room in the event of a single failure.
Protection against single failure in terms of piping arrangement and layout, selection of valve types and locations, redundancy of various system com ponents, redundancy of power supplies, and redundancy of instrumentation should be described.
Protection against single failure in terms of piping arrangement and layout, selection of valve types and locations, redundancy of various system com ponents, redundancy of power supplies, and redundancy of instrumentation should be described. Protection against valve motor flooding and spurious single failures should be described.
Protection against valve motor flooding and spurious single failures should be described.
: 6. The design bases established for the purpose of protecting the RHR system from physical damage. This discussion should include the design bases for the RHR system support structure and for protection against incidents and accidents that could render redundant components inoperative (e.g., fires, pipe whip, internally generated missiles, loss-of-coolant accident loads, seismic events).
: 6. The design bases established for the purpose of protecting the RHR system from physical damage. This discussion should include the design bases for the RHR system support structure and for protection against incidents and accidents that could render redundant components inoperative (e.g., fires, pipe whip, internally generated missiles, loss-of-coolant accident loads, seismic events).
5.4.7.2 System Design. 1. Schematic Piping and Instrumentation Diagrams.
5.4.7.2     System Design.
Provide a description of the RHR system, including piping and instrumentation dia grams showing all components, piping, points where connecting systems and subsystems tie together, and instrumentation and controls associated with subsystem and component actuation.
: 1.     Schematic Piping and Instrumentation Diagrams.         Provide a description of the RHR system, including piping and instrumentation grams showing all components, piping, points where connecting                   dia systems and subsystems tie together, and instrumentation and controls associated with subsystem and component actuation.           Provide a complete description of component interlocks.           Provide a mode diagram showing temperatures, pressures, and flow rates for each mode of RHR operation (for example, in a BWR, the RCIC condensing mode).
Provide a complete description of component interlocks.
: 2.     Equipment and Component Descriptions. Describe each component of the system.         Identify the significant design parameters for each com ponent.         State the design pressure and temperature of components various portions of the system, and explain the bases for                        for their selection.
Provide a mode diagram showing temperatures, pressures, and flow rates for each mode of RHR operation (for example, in a BWR, the RCIC condensing mode). 2. Equipment and Component Descriptions.
Describe each component of the system. Identify the significant design parameters for each com ponent. State the design pressure and temperature of components for various portions of the system, and explain the bases for their selection.
Provide pump characteristic curves and pump power requirements.
Provide pump characteristic curves and pump power requirements.
Specify the available and required net positive suction head for the RHR pumps. Describe heat exchanger characteristics, including design flow rates, 5-17 November 1978 inlet and outlet temperatures for the cooling fluid and for the fluid being cooled, the overall heat transfer coefficient, and the heat trans fer area. Identify each component of the RHR system that is also a portion of some other system (e.g. , ECCS). 3. Control. State the RHR system relief valve capacity and settings, and state the method of collection of fluids discharged through the relief valve. Describe provisions with respect to the control circuits for motor operated isolation valves in the RHR system, including consideration of inadvertent actuation.
Specify the available and required net positive suction head for the RHR pumps.
This description should include discussions of the controls and interlocks for these values (e.g. , intent of IEEE Std 279 1971), considerations for automatic valve closure (e.g. , RCS pressure exceeds design pressure of residual heat removal system), valve position indications, and valve interlocks and alarms. 4. Applicable Codes and Classifications.
Describe heat exchanger characteristics, including design flow rates, 5-17
Identify the applicable industry codes and classifications for the system design. 5. System Reliabiity Considerations.
 
Discuss the provisions incor porated in the design to ensure that the system will operate when needed and will deliver the required flow rates (e.g., redundancy and separation of components and power sources).
Revision 3                                                      November 1978 inlet and outlet temperatures for the cooling fluid and for the fluid being cooled, the overall heat transfer coefficient, and the heat trans fer area. Identify each component of the RHR system that is also a portion of some other system (e.g. , ECCS).
: 6. Manual Actions. Discuss all manual actions required to be taken by an operator in order for the RHR system to operate properly with all components assumed to be operable.
: 3. Control. State the RHR system relief valve capacity and settings, and state the method of collection of fluids discharged through the relief valve. Describe provisions with respect to the control circuits for motor operated isolation valves in the RHR system, including consideration of inadvertent actuation. This description should include discussions of the controls and interlocks for these values (e.g. , intent of IEEE Std 279 1971), considerations for automatic valve closure (e.g. , RCS pressure exceeds design pressure of residual heat removal system), valve position indications, and valve interlocks and alarms.
Identify any actions that are required to be taken from outside the control room. Repeat this discussion for the most limiting single failure in the RHR system. 5.4.7.3 Performance Evaluation.
: 4. Applicable Codes and Classifications. Identify the applicable industry codes and classifications for the system design.
Provide an evaluation of the ability of the RHR system to reduce the temperature of the reactor coolant at a rate consistent with the design basis (5.4.7.1, item 1). Describe the analytical methods used and clearly state all assump tions. Provide curves showing the reactor coolant temperature as a function of time for the following cases: 1. All RHR system components are operable.
: 5. System Reliabiity Considerations. Discuss the provisions incor porated in the design to ensure that the system will operate when needed and will deliver the required flow rates (e.g., redundancy and separation of components and power sources).
: 2. The most limiting single failure has occurred in the RHR system. 5.4.7.4 Preoperational Testing. The proposed preoperational test program should be discussed.
: 6. Manual Actions. Discuss all manual actions required to be taken by an operator in order for the RHR system to operate properly with all components assumed to be operable. Identify any actions that are required to be taken from outside the control room.       Repeat this discussion for the most limiting single failure in the RHR system.
The discussion should identify test objec tives, method of testing, and test acceptance criteria.
5.4.7.3 Performance Evaluation. Provide an evaluation of the ability of the RHR system to reduce the temperature of the reactor coolant at a rate consistent with the design basis (5.4.7.1, item 1).
5.4.8 Reactor Water Cleanup System (BWRs) This section should describe the processing capabilities and the safety-related functions of the reactor water cleanup system of a BWR.5-18 Revision 3 Revision 3 November 1978 5.4.8.1 Design Bases. The PSAR should provide the design objec tives and design criteria for the reactor water cleanup system in terms of (1) maintaining reactor water purity within the guidelines of Regula tory Guide 1.56, "Maintenance of Water Purity in Boiling Water Reactors," (2) providing system isolation capabilities to maintain the integrity of the reactor pressure boundary, and (3) precluding liquid poison removal when the poison is required for reactor shutdown.
Describe the analytical methods used and clearly state all assump tions. Provide curves showing the reactor coolant temperature as a function of time for the following cases:
The PSAR should describe how the requirements of 10 CFR Part 50 will be implemented and should indicate the extent to which the recommendations of Regulatory Guide 1.26, "Quality Group Classifications and Standards for Water-, Steam-, and Radioactive-Waste-Containing Components of Nuclear Power Plants," and Regulatory Guide 1.29, "Seismic Design Classification," will be followed.
: 1. All RHR system components are operable.
5.4.8.2 System Description.
: 2. The most limiting single failure has occurred in the RHR system.
In the PSAR, each component should be described and its capacity provided.
5.4.7.4 Preoperational Testing.     The proposed preoperational test program should be discussed. The discussion should identify test objec tives, method of testing, and test acceptance criteria.
The processing routes and the expected and design flow rates should be indicated.
5.4.8   Reactor Water Cleanup System (BWRs)
Describe the instru mentation and controls provided to (1) isolate the system to maintain the reactor coolant pressure boundary, (2) isolate the system in the event the liquid poison system is needed for reactor shutdown, and (3) monitor, control, and annunciate abnormal conditions concerning the system temper ature and differential pressure across filter/demineralizer units and resin strainers.
This section should describe the processing capabilities and the safety-related functions of the reactor water cleanup system of a BWR.
Indicate the means to be used for "holding" filter/ demineralizer beds intact if system flow is reduced or lost. Any control features to prevent inadvertent opening of the filter/demineralizer back wash valves during normal operation should be described.
5-18
Describe the resin transfer system and indicate the provisions taken to ensure that transfers are complete and that crud traps in transfer lines are elimin ated. For systems using other than filter/demineralizer units, appro priate information should be provided.
 
The routing and termination points of system vents should be indicated.
Revision 3                                                         November 1978 5.4.8.1 Design Bases. The PSAR should provide tives and design criteria for the reactor water             the design objec cleanup     system in terms of (1) maintaining reactor water purity within tory Guide 1.56, "Maintenance of Water Purity     the guidelines of Regula in Boiling Water Reactors,"
Provide piping and instrumentation diagrams indicating system interconnections and seismic and quality group interfaces.
(2) providing system isolation capabilities to maintain the integrity of the reactor pressure boundary, and (3) precluding when the poison is required for reactor shutdown.       liquid poison removal The PSAR should describe how the requirements of 10 CFR Part 50 will indicate the extent to which the recommendationsbe implemented and should "Quality Group Classifications and Standards of Regulatory Guide 1.26, for Radioactive-Waste-Containing Components of NuclearWater-, Steam-, and Regulatory Guide 1.29, "Seismic Design Classification,"Power Plants," and will be followed.
The FSAR should provide any additional information required to update the PSAR to the final design conditions.
5.4.8.2 System Description. In the PSAR, each described and its capacity provided.                       component should be The processing routes and the expected and design flow rates should be indicated.
5.4.8.3 System Evaluation.
mentation and controls provided to (1) isolate             Describe the instru the reactor coolant pressure boundary, (2) isolate   the   system to maintain the liquid poison system is needed for reactor         the  system in the event shutdown,     and (3) monitor, control, and annunciate abnormal conditions concerning ature and differential pressure across filter/demineralizer   the  system temper resin strainers.                                                       units and Indicate the means to be used for "holding" demineralizer beds intact if system flow is reduced                       filter/
The PSAR should provide the design bases for the system capacity and should discuss the system's capability to maintain acceptable reactor water purity for normal operation, including anticipated operational occurrences (e.g. , reactor startup, shutdown refue ing, condensate demineralizer breakthrough, equipment downtime).
features to prevent inadvertent opening of the             or  lost. Any  control wash valves during normal operation should       filter/demineralizer        back be described. Describe the resin transfer system and indicate the provisions transfers are complete and that crud traps in             taken to ensure that transfer ated. For systems using other than filter/demineralizer         lines are elimin priate information should be provided. The routing                 units, appro and termination   points of system vents should be indicated. Provide diagrams indicating system interconnections and   piping    and   instrumentation interfaces. The FSAR should provide any additional seismic and quality group information required to update the PSAR to the final design conditions.
Any reliance on other plant systems to meet the design objectives (e.g. , liquid radwaste system) should be indicated.
5.4.8.3 System Evaluation. The PSAR should for the system capacity and should discuss the provide the design bases maintain acceptable reactor water purity for           system's capability to normal operation, including anticipated operational occurrences (e.g. , reactor ing, condensate demineralizer breakthrough,             startup, shutdown refue reliance on other plant systems to meet the designequipment      downtime). Any radwaste system) should be indicated. The design objectives (e.g. , liquid criteria for components and piping should be presented in terms of temperature, or volume capacity. The seismic design and quality               pressure, flow, for components and piping should be provided.             group  classifications Discuss the capability of the nonregenerative heat exchanger to reduce the process temperature to a level low enough to be compatible with the cleanup in the event that there is no flow return to               demineralizer resins FSAR should provide any additional information     the  reactor    system. The required to update the PSAR to the final design conditions.
The design criteria for components and piping should be presented in terms of temperature, pressure, flow, or volume capacity.
5-19
The seismic design and quality group classifications for components and piping should be provided.
 
Discuss the capability of the nonregenerative heat exchanger to reduce the process temperature to a level low enough to be compatible with the cleanup demineralizer resins in the event that there is no flow return to the reactor system. The FSAR should provide any additional information required to update the PSAR to the final design conditions.
Revision 3                                                  November 1978 5.4.9   Main Steam Line and Feedwater Piping 5.4.10   Pressurizer 5.4.11   Pressurizer Relief Discharge System (PWR) 5.4.11.1 Design Bases. The design bases for the pressurizer relief discharge system should include the maximum step load and the consequent steam volume that the pressurizer relief tank must absorb and also the maximum heat input that the volume of water in the tank must absorb under any plant condition. This should be provided for (1) the relief valve discharge to the tank only and (2) the combined relief and safety valve discharge to the tank. The method of supporting the tank and the system should be verified.
5-19 November 1978 5.4.9 Main Steam Line and Feedwater Piping 5.4.10 Pressurizer 5.4.11 Pressurizer Relief Discharge System (PWR) 5.4.11.1 Design Bases. The design bases for the pressurizer relief discharge system should include the maximum step load and the consequent steam volume that the pressurizer relief tank must absorb and also the maximum heat input that the volume of water in the tank must absorb under any plant condition.
5.4.11.2 System Description. Provide a description of the system, including the tank, the piping connections from the tank to the loop seals of the pressurizer relief and safety valves, the relief tank spray system and associated piping, the nitrogen supply piping, and the piping from the tank to the cover gas analyzer and to the reactor coolant drain tank.
This should be provided for (1) the relief valve discharge to the tank only and (2) the combined relief and safety valve discharge to the tank. The method of supporting the tank and the system should be verified.
A piping and instrumentation diagram and a drawing of the pressurizer relief tank should be presented.
5.4.11.2 System Description.
5.4.11.3 Safety Evaluation. The safety evaluation should demon strate that the system, including the tank, is designed to handle the maximum heat load. The adequacy of the tank design pressure and temper ature should be stated and justified. The results of a failure mode and effects analysis should be presented to demonstrate that the auxiliary systems serving the tank can meet the single-failure criterion without compromising safe plant shutdown. The tank rupture disk and relief valve capacities should be given, and it should be shown that their relief capacity is at least equal to the combined capacity of the pressurizer safety valves. Compliance of the system with General Design Criteria 14 and 15 should be demonstrated. The extent to which the recommendations of applicable regulatory guides such as Regulatory Guide 1.46, "Protec tion Against Pipe Whip Inside Containment," and Regulatory Guide 1.67, "Installation of Overpressure Protection Devices," are followed should be indicated.
Provide a description of the system, including the tank, the piping connections from the tank to the loop seals of the pressurizer relief and safety valves, the relief tank spray system and associated piping, the nitrogen supply piping, and the piping from the tank to the cover gas analyzer and to the reactor coolant drain tank. A piping and instrumentation diagram and a drawing of the pressurizer relief tank should be presented.
5.4.11.4 Instrumentation Reouirements. The instrumentation and control requirements for the pressurizer relief tank and associated piping should be stated.
5.4.11.3 Safety Evaluation.
5.4.11.5 Inspection and Testing Requirements. The inspection and testing requirements for the pressurizer relief tank and associated piping should be described. Chapter 14 of the SAR should include a description of the preoperational and startup testing to demonstrate pressurizer relief discharge system response to step loads and transients that it is expected to accommodate during operation. Such material may be incorporated into this section by reference.
The safety evaluation should demon strate that the system, including the tank, is designed to handle the maximum heat load. The adequacy of the tank design pressure and temper ature should be stated and justified.
5-20
The results of a failure mode and effects analysis should be presented to demonstrate that the auxiliary systems serving the tank can meet the single-failure criterion without compromising safe plant shutdown.
 
The tank rupture disk and relief valve capacities should be given, and it should be shown that their relief capacity is at least equal to the combined capacity of the pressurizer safety valves. Compliance of the system with General Design Criteria 14 and 15 should be demonstrated.
Revision 3                           November 1978 5.4.12 Valves 5.4.13 Safety and Relief Valves 5.4.14 Component Supports 5-21}}
The extent to which the recommendations of applicable regulatory guides such as Regulatory Guide 1.46, "Protec tion Against Pipe Whip Inside Containment," and Regulatory Guide 1.67, "Installation of Overpressure Protection Devices," are followed should be indicated.
5.4.11.4 Instrumentation Reouirements.
The instrumentation and control requirements for the pressurizer relief tank and associated piping should be stated. 5.4.11.5 Inspection and Testing Requirements.
The inspection and testing requirements for the pressurizer relief tank and associated piping should be described.
Chapter 14 of the SAR should include a description of the preoperational and startup testing to demonstrate pressurizer relief discharge system response to step loads and transients that it is expected to accommodate during operation.
Such material may be incorporated into this section by reference.
5-20 Revision 3 Revision 3 November 1978 5.4.12 Valves 5.4.13 Safety and Relief Valves 5.4.14 Component Supports 5-21}}

Latest revision as of 04:51, 24 November 2019

Part I - Regulatory Guide 1.70, Revision 3, Standard Format and Content of Safety Analysis Reports for Nuclear Power Plants, LWR Edition
ML011340072
Person / Time
Issue date: 11/30/1978
From:
Office of Nuclear Regulatory Research
To:
References
-nr, FOIA/PA-2015-0456, FOIA/PA-2015-0458 RG-1.070, Rev. 3
Download: ML011340072 (156)
v • d • e


Text

REGULATORY GUIDE 1.70 REVISION 3 STANDARD FORMAT AND CONTENT OF SAFETY ANALYSIS REPORTS FOR NUCLEAR POWER PLANTS LWR EDITION NOVEMBER 1978 OFFICE OF STANDARDS DEVELOPMENT U. S. NUCLEAR REGULATORY COMMISSION

  • PAWOOUNUAMDO PA UOWýAc*4 P=A$=l 'Awa. Apo Pamopvm PLN opwid 4mawD4 PaAo*w vamý awý po

)o -- m.0 '-6-NO  :--8W IMM 70 'uM&-f-m '-mw-Alw3 Wý a w pommu "a @ON* aLti vamodw ja momm"mcomAvu xwou ok pw Amup*ow AmwN -s-n ow ca aLa- - w- aq wow -- w =Pmm w nuomum "opo"umn m 'empoomckww Vý I A WrQn; ;0 WAftO SOL" XN M4 UOWWAM *Q&A=M MWUO UMMOMW aq o- upre P-,-m ip n poftww*w a* am" w moummood" jol smommosm pus wou"No x)4 jo (pmwVcxow eq AAw 4M41A) PWIM I* =WW MOW8 AN N RALoDOL lQQ28MM4 MIUMPA "MkNWM 'S IJWNWAPAM*

ý w Imo."A p- 3m4u,,w *6 BUIN.S PUNPMLWAMMAý%Q 't wo AR GoAMI m *Mad N so eamWNAMuMjo smmý No GB sopwow

%mmm"Lcuaon=o I o"No" "@Lmwn PLa ""4 1 WkMW &a m3lýq f qWOM Aog p spnft= aq 0- 1. R 4m&w 3moM Lwowv MI pw wamm"T SMMaWDq WAMW PURMMOM V-dW 3- 0 M-a WU GMAW m=nPOAd I Wow" jaw4d A -mW Mw VA*Wdw X4 mwqpWw ou *a nW AXWPINW IWACPMM 09 4MAPM6 *PMDAd Ot JD )WAPOW POMPOOd JO NUMP4*9 2WMM &M pmm ula aw-cow sýa - P-m mA mw GqL ýWo W kqoo a& Aq pý nf*Mpft MONAM 01 VAopWlftj GW0WWOhPV3 NO JD MM 2kWOM OLMOLLOPAII PD VW OFM ftf Ot OPpodows IPMsrý II as al "amwa evKu PL* smamp at Pý ý ampowsAmmwdmw OW &AMR-0 :U=LMM VAIX *O'C '-WL-PWM 'UDMKL-Awo Aawpolu mow" S-n -uowmuoo "a Jo kft*A=s eta co wa 4q wow =.m-w3 saoino AvoLLqnoam ammon NOWm UMI SINVId U3MOd uv3ionN UO:l SlUOd3U SISAIVNV A13dVS do IN31NOO ONV ivwuoA allVONV1.S OCL 3aino AuoivinfAU IN3WdOl3A3(3 SCUV(3NVIS:iO 301:1:10 3aino Auo.Lvmln.93M 81-6L joqWSAON NOISSIYYWOO Amo.LvinE)3U HV31onN *sn E: UOISIASH

Revision 3 November 1978 TABLE OF CONTENTS Page INTRODUCTION ................................................... i Chapter 1 INTRODUCTION AND GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PLANT 1.1 Introduction........ .... ............ ........ .........

1.2 General Plant Description ................................ 1-1 1.3 Comparison Tables ........................................ 1-2 1.3.1 Comparisons with Similar Facility Designs ......... 1-2 1.3.2 Comparison of Final and Preliminary Information... 1-2 1.4 Identification of Agents and Contractors ................. 1-2 1.5 Requirements for Further Technical Information ........... 1-2 1.6 Material Incorporated by Reference ....................... . -3 1.7 Drawings and Other Detailed Information .................. 1-4 1.7.1 Electrical, Instrumentation, and Control Drawings. 1-4 1.7.2 Piping and Instrumentation Diagrams ............... 1-4 1.7.3 Other Detailed Information ........................ 1-4 1.8 Conformance to NRC Regulatory Guides ..................... 1-4 1.9 Standard Designs ......................................... 1-4 1.9.1 Interfaces ........................................ 1-4 1.9.2 Exceptions ........................................ 1-4 Chapter 2 SITE CHARACTERISTICS 2.1 Geography and Demography ................................. 2-1 2.1.1 Site Location and Description ..................... 2-1 2.1.2 Exclusion Area Authority and Control .............. 2-2 2.1.3 Population Distribution ........................... 2-3 2.2 Nearby Industrial, Transportation, and Military Facilities ............................................... 2-5 2.2.1 Location and Routes ............................... 2-5 2.2.2 Descriptions ...................................... 2-5 2.2.3 Evaluation of Potential Accidents ................. 2-6 2.3 Meteorology .............................................. 2-8 2.3.1 Regional Climatology .............................. 2-8 2.3.2 Local Meteorology ................................. 2-9 2.3.3 Onsite Meteorological Measurements Program ........ 2-11 Lines indicate changes from Revision 2, dated September 1975.

Revision 3 November 1978 TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued) Page 2.3.4 Short-Term Diffusion Estimates .................... 2-11 2.3.5 Long-Term Diffusion Estimates ..................... 2-12 2.3.6 BOP Interface* ................................... A-29 2.4 Hydrologic Engineering ................................... 2-13 2.4.1 Hydrologic uescription ........................... 2-14 2.4.2 Floods .............. . . .............. 2-14 2.4.3 Probable Maximum Flood (PMF) on Streams and Rivers ....................................... 2-15 z.4.4 Potential Dam Failures, Seismically Induced ...... 2-17 2.4.5 Probable Maximum Surge and Seiche Flooding ....... 2-18 2.4.6 Probable Maximum Tsunami Flooding ................ 2-19 2.4.7 Ice Effects .................................. 2-20 2.4-.8 Cooling Water Canals and Reservoirs .............. 2-20 2.4.9 Channel Diversions ............................... 2-20 2.4.10 Flooding Protection Requirements ................. 2-21 2.4.11 Low Water Considerations ......................... 2-21 2.4.12 Dispersion, Dilution, and Travel Times of Accidental Releases of Liqufd Effluents in Surface Waters ................................... 2-22 2.4.13 Groundwater...................................... 2-23 2.4.14 Technical Specification and Emergency Operation Requirements ........................... 2-26 2.5 Geology, Seismology, and Geotechnical Engineering ........ 2-26 2.5.1 Basic Geologic and Seismic Information ........... 2-27 2.5.2 Vibratory Ground Motion .......................... 2-29 2.5.3 Surface Faulting ................................. 2-32 2.5.4 Stability of Subsurface Materials and Foundations ...................................... 2-33 2.5.5 Stability of Slopes .............................. 2-37 2.5.6 Embankments and Dams ............................. 2-38 Chapter 3 DESIGN OF STRUCTURES, COMPONENTS, EQUIPMENT, AND SYSTEMS 3.1 Conformance with NRC General Design Criteria ............. 3-1 3.2 Classification of Structures, Components, and Systems .... 3-1 3.2.1 Seismic Classification ........................... 3-1 3.2.2 System Quality Group Classifications ............. 3-2 Interface applies to standard designs only. See Appendix A.

Revision 3 November 1978 TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued) Page 3.3 Wind and Tornado Loadings ................................ 3-2 3.3.1 Wind Loadings .................................... 3-2 3.3.2 Tornado Loadings ................................. 3-3 3.3.3 BOP Interface .................................. A-29 3.4 Water Level (Flood) Design ............................... 3-3 3.4.1 Flood Protection ................................. 3-4 3.4.2 Analytical and Test Procedures ................... 3-5 3.4.3 NSSS Interface" ................................. A-10 3.4.3 BOP Interface** .................................. A-30 3.5 Missile Protection ....................................... 3-5 3.5.1 Missile Selection and Description ................ 3-5 3.5.2 Structures, Systems, and Components To Be Protected from Externally Generated Missiles..... 3-101 3.5.3 Barrier Design Procedures ........................ 3-10 3.5.4 NSSS Interface** .............................. A-0 3.5.4 BOP Interface ................................. A-30 3.6 Protection Against Dynamic Effects Associated with the Postulated Rupture of Piping ......................... 3-10 3.6.1 Postulated Piping Failures in Fluid Systems Outside of Containment ......................... 3-10 3.6.2 Determination of Break Locations and Dynamic Effects Associated with the Postulated Rupture of Piping ................................ 3-11 3.6.3 NSSS Interface** ................................. A-10 3.7 Seismic Design ........................................... 3-13 3.7.1 Seismic Input .................................... 3-13 3.7.2 Seismic System Analysis .......................... 3-14 3.7.3 Seismic Subsystem Analysis ....................... 3-17 3.7.4 Seismic Instrumentation .......................... 3-19 3.7.5 NSSS Interface" ................................. A-11 3.7.5 BOP Interface** .................................. A-30 3.8 Design of Category I Structures .......................... 3-19 3.8.1 Concrete Containment ............................ 3-19 3.8.2 Steel Containment ............................... 3-24 3.8.3 Concrete and Steel Internal Structures of Steel or Concrete Containments .................. 3-28 3.8.4 Other Seismic Category I Structures ............. 3-32

Revision 3 November 1978 TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued) Page 3.8.5 Foundations ..................................... 3-34 3.8.6 NSSS Interface * ................................ A-ll 3.8.6 BOP Interface** ................................. A-30 3.9 Mechanical Systems and Components ....................... 3-36 3.9.1 Special Topics for Mechanical Components ........ 3-36 3.9.2 Dynamic Testing and Analysis .................... 3-37 3.9.3 ASME Code Class 1, 2, and 3 Components, Component Supports, and Core Support Structures. 3-40 3.9.4 Control Rod Drive Systems ........................ 3-42 3.9.5 Reactor Pressure Vessel Internals ................ 3-44 3.9.6 Inservice Testing of Pumps and Valves ............ 3-44 3.9.7 NSSS Interface * ................................. A-12 3.9.7 BOP Interface" .................................. A-31 3.10 Seismic Qualification of Seismic Category I Instrumentation and Electrical Equipment ................. 3-45 3.10.1 Seismic Qualification Criteria ................... 3-45 3.10.2 Methods and Procedures for Qualifying Electrical Equipment and Instrumentation ......... 3-46 3.10.3 Methods and Procedures of Analysis or Testing of Supports of Electrical Equipment and Instrumentation ................................. 3-46 3.10.4 Operating License Review ......................... 3-46 3.10.5 NSSS Interface* ................................. A-13 3.11 Environmental Design of Mechanical and Electrical Equipment ................................................ 3-46 3.11.1 Equipment Identification and Environmental Conditions ........................................ 3-46 3.11.2 Qualification Tests and Analyses ................. 3-47 3.11.3 Qualification Test Results ....................... 3-48 3.11.4 Loss of Ventilation .............................. 3-48 3.11.5 Estimated Chemical and Radiation Environment ..... 3-48 3.11.6 NSSS Interface" ................................ A-13 Chapter 4 REACTOR 4.1 Summary Description ...................................... 4-1 4.2 Fuel System Design ....................................... 4-1 4.2.1 Design Bases ..................................... 4-1 4.2.2 Description and Design Drawings .................. 4-3 4.2.3 Design Evaluation ................................ 4-3 4.2.4 Testing and Inspection Plan ...................... 4-6

Revision 3 November 1978 TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued Page 4.3 Nuclear Design ........................................... 4-6 4.3.1 Design Bases ..................................... 4-6 4.3.2 Description ...................................... 4-6 4.3.3 Analytical Methods ............................... 4-10 4.3.4 Changes .......................................... 4-10 4.4 Thermal and Hydraulic Design ............................. 4-10 4.4.1 Design Bases ..................................... 4-10 4.4.2 Description of Thermal and Hydraulic Design of the Reactor Core .............................. 4-10 4.4.3 Description of the Thermal and Hydraulic Design of the Reactor Coolant System ............. 4-11 4.4.4 Evaluation ....................................... 4-13 4.4.5 Testing and Verification ......................... 4-14 4.4.6 Instrumentation Requirements ..................... 4-14 4.5 Reactor Materials ........................................ 4-14 4.5.1 Control Rod Drive System Structural Materials .... 4-14 4.5.2 Reactor Internals Materials ...................... 4-15 4.6 Functional Design of Reactivity Control Systems .......... 4-16 4.6.1 Information for CRDS ............................. 4-17 4.6.2 Evaluations of the CRDS .......................... 4-17 4.6.3 Testing and Verification of the CRDS ............. 4-17 4.6.4 Information for Combined Performance of Reactivity Systems ............................... 4-17 4.6.5 Evaluations of Combined Performance .............. 4-18 Chapter 5 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM AND CONNECTED SYSTEMS 5.1 Summary Description ...................................... 5-1 5.1.1 Schematic Flow Diagram ........................... 5-1 5.1.2 Piping and Instrumentation Diagram ............... 5-1 5.1.3 Elevation Drawing ................................ 5-2 5.2 Integrity of Reactor Coolant Pressure Boundary ........... 5-2 5.2.1 Compliance with Codes and Code Cases ............. 5-2 5.2.2 Overpressurization Protection .................... 5-3 5.2.3 Reactor Coolant Pressure Boundary Materials ...... 5-4 5.2.4 Inservice Inspection and Testing of Reactor Coolant Pressure Boundary ........................ 5-8 5.2.5 Detection of Leakage Through Reactor Coolant Pressure Boundary ................................ 5-8 5.2.6 NSSS Interface* .......................... ....... A-13

Revision 3 November 1978 TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued) Page 5.3 Reactor Vessels .......................................... 5-9 5.3.1 Reactor Vessel Materials ......................... 5-9 5.3.2 Pressure-Temperature Limits ...................... 5-11 5.3.3 Reactor Vessel Integrity ......................... 5-11 5.4 Component and Subsystem Design ........................... 5-12 5.4.1 Reactor Coolant Pumps ............................ 5-13 5.4.2 Steam Generators ................................. 5-13 5.4.3 Reactor Coolant Piping ........................... 5-15 5.4.4 Main Steam Line Flow Restrictions ................ 5-15 5.4.5 Main Steam Line Isolation System ................. 5-15 5.4.6 Reactor Core Isolation Cooling System*** ......... 5-15 5.4.7 Residual Heat Removal System*** .................. 5-16 5.4.8 Reactor Water Cleanup System*** .................. 5-18 5.4.9 Main Steam Line and Feedwater Piping ............. 5-20 5.4.10 Pressurizer ...................................... 5-20 5.4.11 Pressurizer Relief Discharge System*** ........... 5-20 5.4.12 Valves ........................................... 5-21 5.4.13 Safety and Relief Valves ......................... 5-21 5.4.14 Component Supports ............................... 5-21 Chapter 6 ENGINEERED SAFETY FEATURES 6.1 Engineered Safety Feature Materials ...................... 6-1 6.1.1 Metallic Materials ............................... 6-2 6.1.2 Organic Materials ................................ 6-3 6.2 Containment Systems ...................................... 6-3 6.2.1 Containment Functional Design .................... 6-3 6.2.2 Containment Heat Removal Systems ...... ........... 6-23 6.2.3 Secondary Containment Functional Design .......... 6-28 6.2.4 Containment Isolation System*** .................. 6-30 6.2.5 Combustible Gas Control in Containment ........... 6-33 6.2.6 Containment Leakage Testing ...................... 6-38 6.3 Emergency Core Cooling System ............................ 6-40 6.3.1 Design Bases ..................................... 6-40 6.3.2 System Design .................................... 6-41 6.3.3 Performance Evaluation ........................... 6-43 This section includes an NSSS or BOP interface. See Appendix A.

Revision 3 November 1978 TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued) Page 6.3.4 Tests and Inspections ............................ 6-44 6.3.5 Instrumentation Requirements ..................... 6-45 6.3.6 NSSS Interface" ................................. A-20 6.4 Habitability Systems ..................................... 6-45 6.4.1 Design Basis ..................................... 6-46 6.4.2 System Design .................................... 6-46 6.4.3 System Operational Procedures ..................... 6-49 6.4.4 Design Evaluations ............................... 6-49 6.4.5 Testing and Inspection ........................... 6-50 6.4.6 Instrumentation Requirement ...................... 6-50 6.4.7 NSSS Interface" ................................. A-22 6.4.7 BOP Interface" .................................. A-31 6.5 Fission Product Removal and Control Systems .............. 6-50 6.5.1 Engineered Safety Feature (ESF) Filter Systems... 6-51 6.5.2 Containment Spray Systems ........................ 6-52 6.5.3 Fission Product Control Systems .................. 6-54 6.5.4 Ice Condenser as a Fission Product Cleanup System ........................................... 6-55 6.6 Inservice Inspection of Class 2 and 3 Components ......... 6-56 6.6.1 Components Subject to Examination ................ 6-56 6.6.2 Accessibility .................................... 6-56 6.6.3 Examination Techniques and Procedures ............ 6-56 6.6.4 Inspection Intervals ............................. 6-56 6.6.5 Examination Categories and Requirements .......... 6-56 6.6.6 Evaluation of Examination Results ................ 6-57 6.6.7 System Pressure Tests ............................ 6-57 6.6.8 Augmented Inservice Inspection to Protect Against Postulated Piping Failures ............... 6-57 6.6.9 NSSS Interface" ................................. A-22 6.7 Main Steam Isolation Valve Leakage Control System ........ 6-57 6.7.1 Design Bases ..................................... 6-57 6.7.2 System Description ............................... 6-58 6,7.3 System Evaluation ................................ 6-58 6.7.4 Instrumentation Requirements ..................... 6-59 6.7.5 Inspection and Testing ........................... 6-59 6.7.6 NSSS Interface" ................................. A-22

Revision 3 November 1978 TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued) Page 6.X Other Engineered Safety Features ......................... 6-59 6.X.l Design Bases ..................................... 6-59 6.X.2 System Design .................................... 6-59 6.X.3 Design Evaluation ................................ 6-59 6.X.4 Tests and Inspections ............................ 6-59 6.X.5 Instrumentation Requirements ..................... 6-59 Chapter 7 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 7.1 Introduction............................... .............. 7-1 7.1.1 Identification of Safety-Related Systems ......... 7-1 7.1.2 Identification of Safety Criteria ................ 7-1 7.2 Reactor Trip System ...................................... 7-3 7.2.1 Description ...................................... 7-3 7.2.2 Analysis ......................................... 7-3 7.2.3 NSSS Interface" ................................. A-23 7.3 Engineered-Safety-Feature Systems ........................ 7-4 7.3.1 Description ...................................... 7-4 7.3.2 Analysis ......................................... 7-4 7.4 Systems Required for Safe Shutdown ....................... 7-4 7.4.1 Description ...................................... 7-5 7.4.2 Analysis ......................................... 7-5 7.5 Safety-Related Display Instrumentation ................... 7-5 7.5.1 Description ...................................... 7-5 7.5.2 Analysis ......................................... 7-5 7.6 All Other Instrumentation Systems Required for Safety .... 7-6 7.6.1 Description ...................................... 7-6 7.6.2 Analysis ......................................... 7-6 7.7 Control Systems Not Required for Safety .................. 7-7 7.7.1 Description ...................................... 7-7 7.7.2 Analysis ......................................... 7-7

Revision 3 November 1978 TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued) Page 7.8 NSSS Interface** ........................................ A-23 7.8 BOP Interface** .......................................... A-31 Chapter 8 ELECTRIC POWER 8.1 Introduction ............................................. 8-1 8.2 Offsite Power System ..................................... 8-3 8.2.1 Description ...................................... 8-3 8.2.2 Analysis ......................................... 8-3 8.2.3 NSSS Interface** ................................. A-24 8.2.3 BOP Interface** .................................. A-32 8.3 Onsite Power Systems ..................................... 8-3 8.3.1 A.C. Power Systems* ............................ 8-3 8.3.2 D.C. Power Systems ' ............................ 8-7 8.3.3 Fire Protection for Cable Systems ................ 8-7 Chapter 9 AUXILIARY SYSTEMS 9.1 Fuel Storage and Handling ................................ 9-1 9.1.1 New Fuel Storage*** .............................. 9-1 9.1.2 Spent Fuel Storage*"* ............................ 9-2 9.1.3 Spent Fuel Pool Cooling and Cleanup System ....... 9-2 9.1.4 Fuel Handling System*** .......................... 9-3 9.2 Water Systems ............................................ 9-4 9.2.1 Station Service Water System ..................... 9-4 9.2.2 Cooling System for Reactor Auxiliaries ........... 9-5 9.2.3 Demineralized Water Makeup System ................ 9-5 9.2.4 Potable and Sanitary Water Systems ............... 9-5 9.2.5 Ultimate Heat Sink ............................... 9-5 9.2.6 Condensate Storage Facilities .................... 9-5 9.2.7 BOP Interface** .................................. A-34 9.3 Process Auxiliaries ...................................... 9-6 9.3.1 Compressed Air Systems ........................... 9-6 9.3.2 Process Sampling System .......................... 9-6 9.3.3 Equipment and Floor Drainage System .............. 9-7 9.3.4 Chemical and Volume Control System*** ............ 9-7 9.3.5 Standby Liquid Control System*** ................. 9-8

Revision 3 November 1978 TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued) Page 9.4 Air Conditioning, Heating, Cooling, and Ventilation Systems ................................................... 9-9 9.4.1 Control Room Area Ventilation System ............. 9-9 9.4.2 Spent Fuel Pool Area Ventilation System .......... 9-10 9.4.3 Auxiliary and Radwaste Area Ventilation System... 9-11 9.4.4 Turbine Building Area Ventilation System ......... 9-11 9.4.5 Engineered-Safety-Feature Ventilation System ..... 9-12 9.4.6 BOP Interface" .................................. A-35 9.5 Other Auxiliary Systems ................................. 9-12 9.5.1 Fire Protection System*** ........................ 9-12 9.5.2 Communication Systems ............................ 9-18 9.5.3 Lighting Systems ................................. 9-19 9.5.4 Diesel Generator Fuel Oil Storage and Transfer System ........................................... 9-19 9.5.5 Diesel Generator Cooling Water System ............ 9-19 9.5.6 Diesel Generator Starting System ................. 9-19 9.5.7 Diesel Generator Lubrication System .............. 9-19 9.5.8 Diesel Generator Combustion Air Intake and Exhaust System ................................... 9-20 9.5.9 BOP Interface .................................. A-35 Chapter 10 STEAM AND POWER CONVERSION SYSTEM 10.1 Summary Description ...................................... 10-1 10.2 Turbine-Generator ........................................ 10-1 10.2.1 Design Bases ..................................... 10-1 10.2.2 Description ...................................... 10-2 10.2.3 Turbine Disk Integrity ........................... 10-2 10.2.4 Evaluation ....................................... 10-3 10.3 Main Steam Supply System ................................. 10-3 10.3.1 Design Bases ..................................... 10-3 10.3.2 Description ................ ..................... 10-3 10.3.3 Evaluation ....................................... 10-3 10.3.4 Inspection and Testing Requirements .............. 10-3 10.3.5 Water Chemistry .................................. 10-4 10.3.6 Steam and Feedwater System Materials ............. 10-4 10.4 Other Features of Steam and Power Conversion System ...... 10-5 10.4.1 Main Condensers .................................. 10-5 10.4.2 Main Condenser Evacuation System ................. 10-6 10.4.3 Turbine Gland Sealing System ..................... 10-6 10.4.4 Turbine Bypass System*** ......................... 10-6

Revision 3 November 1978 TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued) Page 10.4.5 Circulating Water System ............. S... ... .... .. 10-6 10.4.6 Condensate Cleanup System ............ S. . . . . . . . . . . .* 10-7 10.4.7 Condensate and Feedwater Systems ..... .. 0 ... ....... 10-7 10.4.8 Steam Generator Blowdown System ...... 10-7 10.4.9 Auxiliary Feedwater System ........... 10-8 Chapter 11 RADIOACTIVE WASTE MANAGEMENT 11.1 Source Terms ................................. 11-1 11.2 Liquid Waste Management Systems .............. 11-2 11.2.1 Design Bases ......................... S........ 11-2 11.2.2 System Description ................... S........ 11-3 11.2.3 Radioactive Releases ................. S........ 11-4 11.2.4 BOP Interface* ...................... S........ A-35 1 11.3 Gaseous Waste Management Systems ......................... 11-4 11.3.1 Design Bases ........................... S....... 11-5 11.3.2 System Description ..................... S....... 11-6 11.3.3 Radioactive Releases ................... S....... 11-7 11.3.4 BOP Interface* ........................ S....... A-35 1 11.4 Solid Waste Management System ............................ 11-8 11.4.1 Design Bases ..................................... 11-8 11.4.2 System Description ............................... 11-8 11.5 Process and Effluent Radiological Monitoring and Sampling Systems ......................................... 11-9 11.5.1 Design Bases .................................. 11-10 11.5.2 System Description ............................ 11-10 11.5.3 Effluent Monitoring and Sampling' ........... 11-11 11.5.4 Process Monitoring and Sampling ............... 11-11 Chapter 12 RADIATION PROTECTION 12.1 Ensuring that Occupational Radiation Exposures Are As Low As Is Reasonably Achievable ....................... 12-1 12.1.1 Policy Considerations .......................... 12-1 12.1.2 Design Considerations ...................... ... 12-1 12.1.3 Operational Considerations ..................... 12-2 12.2 Radiation Sources ........................................ 12-2 12.2.1 Contained Sources ................................ 12-2 12.2.2 Airborne Radioactive Material Sources ............ 12-3

Revision 3 November 1978 TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued) Page 12.3 Radiation Protection Design Features ..................... 12-3 12.3.1 Facility Design Features ......................... 12-3 12.3.2 Shielding ........................................ 12-4 12.3.3 Ventilation ......... ....................... 12-4 12.3.4 Area Radiation and Airborne Radioactivity Monitoring Instrumentation ....................... 12-5 12.4 Dose Assessment .......................................... 12-5 12.5 Health Physics Program ................................... 12-6 12.5.1 Organization ..................................... 12-6 12.5.2 Equipment, Instrumentation, and Facilities ....... 12-7 12.5.3 Procedures ....................................... 12-7 Chapter 13 CONDUCT OF OPERATIONS 13.1 Organizational Structure of Applicant .................... 13-1 13.1.1 Management and Technical Support Organization .... 13-1 13.1.2 Operating Organization ........................... 13-3 13.1.3 Qualifications of Nuclear Plant Personnel ........ 13-4 13.2 Training ................................................. 13-5 13.2.1 Plant Staff Training Program ..................... 13-5 13.2.2 Replacement and Retraining ....................... 13-8 13.2.3 Applicable NRC Documents ......................... 13-8 13.3 Emergency Planning ....................................... 13-9 13.3.1 Preliminary Planning ............................. 13-9 13.3.2 Emergency Plan ................................... 13-13 13.3.3 BOP Interface* .................................. A-36 13.4 Review and Audit ......................................... 13-13 13.4.1 Onsite Review .................................... 13-13 13.4.2 Independent Review ............................... 13-14 13.4.3 Audit Program .................................... 13-14 13.5 Plant Procedures ......................................... 13-14 13.5.1 Administrative Procedures ........................ 13-14 13.5.2 Operating and Maintenance Procedures ............. 13-15

Revision 3 November 1978 TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued) Page 13.6 Industrial Security ....................................... 13-16 13.6.1 Preliminary Planning ............................. 13-16 13.6.2 Security Plan .................................... 13-18 13.6.3 NSSS Interface**..............................A-28 13.6.3 BOP Interface ................................. A-36 Chapter 14 INITIAL TEST PROGRAM 14.1 Specific Information To Be Included in Preliminary Safety Analysis Reports .................................. 14-1 14.1.1 Scope of Test Program ............................. 14-1 14.1.2 Plant Design Features That Are Special, Unique, or First of a Kind ....................... 14-2 14.1.3 Regulatory Guides ................................ 14-2 14.1.4 Utilization of Plant Operating and Testing Experiences at Other Reactor Facilities .......... 14-2 14.1.5 Test Program Schedule ............................ 14-2 14.1.6 Trial Use of Plant Operating and Emergency Procedures ....................................... 14-2 14.1.7 Augmenting Applicant's Staff During Test Program .......................................... 14-2 14.1.8 NSSS Interface** ................................. A-29 14.1.8 BOP Interface .................................. A-36 14.2 Specific Information To Be Included in Final Safety Analysis Reports ......................................... 14-3 14.2.1 Summary of Test Program and Objectives .......... 14-3 14.2.2 Organization and Staffing ....................... 14-3 14.2.3 Test Procedures ................................. 14-3 14.2.4 Conduct of Test Program ......................... 14-3 14.2.5 Review, Evaluation, and Approval of Test Results ......................................... 14-4 14.2.6 Test Records .................................... 14-4 14.2.7 Conformance of Test Programs with Regulatory Guides ......................................... 14-4 14.2.8 Utilization of Reactor Operating and Testing Experiences in Development of Test Program ...... 14-4 14.2.9 Trial Use of Plant Operating and Emergency Procedures ...................................... 14-4 14.2.10 Initial Fuel Loading and Initial Criticaity .... 14-5 14.2.11 Test Program Schedule ........................... 14-5 14.2.12 Individual Test Descriptions .................... 14-5

Revision 3 November 1978 TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued) Page Chapter 15 ACCIDENT ANALYSES 15.X Evaluation of Individual Initiating Events ............... 15-3 15.X.X Event Evaluation"* ............................. 15-4 Chapter 16 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 16.1 Preliminary Technical Specifications ..................... 16-1 16.2 Proposed Final Technical Specifications .................. 16-1 Chapter 17 QUALITY ASSURANCE 17.1 Quality Assurance During Design and Construction ......... 17-2 17.1.1 Organization .................................... 17-2 17.1.2 Quality Assurance Program ....................... 17-3 17.1.3 Design Control .................................. 17-5 17.1.4 Procurement Document Control .................... 17-6 17.1.5 Instructions, Procedures, and Drawings .......... 17-7 17.1.6 Document Control ................................ 17-7 17.1.7 Control of Purchased Material, Equipment, and Services .................................... 17-8 17.1.8 Identification and Control of Materials, Parts, and Components ........................... 17-9 17.1.9 Control of Special Processes .................... 17-9 17.1.10 Inspection ...................................... 17-9 17.1.11 Test Control .................................... 17-10 17.1.12 Control of Measuring and Test Equipment ......... 17-10 17.1.13 Handling, Storage, and Shipping ................. 17-11 17.1.14 Inspection, Test, and Operating Status .......... 17-11 17.1.15 Nonconforming Materials, Parts, or Components... 17-11 17.1.16 Corrective Action ............................... 17-12 17.1.17 Quality Assurance Records ....................... 17-12 17.1.18 Audits .......................................... 17-12 17.2 Quality Assurance During the Operations Phase ............ 17-13 Appendix A INTERFACES FOR STANDARD DESIGNS

Revision 3 November 1978 INTRODUCTION Section 50.34 of 10 CF1R Part 50 requires that each application for a construction permit fcr a nuclear reactor facility include a Preliminary Safety Analysis Report (PSAR) and that each application for a license to operate such a facility include a Final Safety Analysis Report (FSAR).

Section 50.34 specifies in general terms the information to be supplied in these Safety Analysis Reports (SARs). Further information was provided in a "Guide to the Organization and Contents of Safety Analysis Reports" issued by the Atomic Energy Commission* on June 30, 1966.

In the course of reviewing applications for construction permits and operating licenses, the AEC Regulatory staff found that most SARs as initially submitted did not provide sufficient information to permit the staff to conclude its review, and it was necessary for the staff to make specific requests for additional information. These requests, which are available in the NRC Public Document Room in the Dockets for individual cases, are a source of additional guidance to applicants.

In 1970, the Commission instituted a series of Safety Guides to inform applicants cf solutions to specific safety issues that were determined to be acceptable to the Regulatory staff and the Advisory Committee on Reactor Safeguards. In 1971, a new series of -Information Guides was initiated to list needed information that is frequently omitted from appli cations.

In November 1971, the AEC Director of Regulation announced that the Regulatory staff would make a preliminary review of each application for a construction permit or an operating license to determine whether suffi cient information is included. If it is clear that a responsible effort has not been made to provide the information needed by the staff for its review, the licensing review would not be started until the application is reasonably complete. The Director of Regulation also indicated that additional guidance would be issued shortly. Accordingly, in February 1972, the Commission distributed for information and comment a proposed "Standard Format and Content of Safety Analysis Reports for Nuclear Power Plants."

It provided a standard format for these reports and identified the principal information needed by the staff for its review. Numerous comments were received, and a revised document reflecting those comments and superseding both the February 1972 issue and the 1966 guide was issued in October 1972.

In December 1972, the Commission combined the Safety Guide and Informa tion Guide Series to form a new series with an expanded scope. This new series, designated the Regulatory Guide Series, is intended to provide guidance to applicants for and holders of all specific licenses or permits The Atomic Energy Commission was abolished by the Energy Reorganization Act of 1974, which also created the Nuclear Regulatory Commission and gave it the licensing and related regulatory function of the AEC.

i

Revision 3 November 1978 issued by the Commission. The "Standard Format and Content of Safety Analysis Reports for Nuclear Power Plants" (Revision 1) issued in October 1972 was later made a part of the Regulatory Guide Series and designated Regulatory Guide 1.70.

As developments in the nuclear industry occurred and changes became necessary in the Commission's requirements for information on which to base its findings requisite to the issuance of a permit or license, interim revisions to specific sections of the Standard Format were issued. These interim revisions were issued in a subseries of regulatory guides bearing the designation 1.70.X. Regulatory Guides 1.70.1 through 1.70.38 were issued as the need arose to update portions of Revision 1 to the Standard Format. All the changes included in these guides were incorporated into Revision 2 to the Standard Format, which was issued in September 1975.

Accordingly, Regulatory Guides 1.70.1 through 1.70.38 were withdrawn.

The need for many of the changes that appeared in Revision 2 became evident during the development of a series of standard review plans for the guidance of staff reviewers who perform the detailed safety review of applications to construct or operate nuclear power plants. The indi vidual standard review plans were combined into a single document, "Stand ard Review Plan for the Review of Safety Analysis Reports for Nuclear Power Plants--LWR Edition" (NUREG-75/087), dated September 1975. The primary purpose of the Standard Review Plan is to improve the quality and uniformity of staff reviews and to present a well-defined base from which to evaluate proposed changes in the scope and requirements of reviews.

The Standard Review Plan identifies the specific areas of review and the associated acceptance criteria to guide the staff when reviewing an SAR.

Incorporated into some sections of the Standard Review Plan are Branch Technical Positions, which, although less formal than regulatory guides, provide acceptable methods for satisfying the acceptance criteria.

Changes were made in the numbering of some Standard Format sections in Revision 2 to provide consistency with the corresponding sections of the Standard Review Plans in order to increase the efficiency of the staff review. Revision 3 to the Standard Format incorporates changes made to reflect public comments on Revision 2; to improve the consistency of the Standard Format with existing sections of the Standard Review Plan; to track recent revisions to the Standard Review Plan; and to provide guide lines for identifying and a format for submitting nuclear steam supply system (NSSS) and balance-of-plant (BOP) interfaces for standard designs.

The purpose of the interface guidelines (Appendix A to the Standard Format) is to provide that, in such instances when a standard design is referenced by an applicant, the necessary safety-related interfaces will be accounted for to ensure that systems, structures, and components within the standard design will perform their intended safety functions.

The principal purpose of the SAR is to inform the Commission of the nature of the plant, the plans for its use, and the safety evaluations that have been performed to evaluate whether the plant can be constructed ii

Revision November 1978 and operated without undue risk to the health and safety of the public.

The SAR is the principal document for the applicant to provide the informa tion needed to understand the basis on which this conclusion has been reached; it is the principal document referenced in the Construction Permit or Operating License that describes the basis on which the permit or license is issued; and it it the basic document used by NRC inspectors to determine whether the facility is being constructed and operated within the licensed conditions. Therefore, the information contained in the SAR should be timely, accurate, complete, and organized in a format that provides easy access.

Purpose of Standard Format The purpose of the Standard Format and Content of Safety Analysis Reports for Nuclear Power Plants (hereinafter "Standard Format") is to indicate the information to be provided in the SAR and to establish a uniform format for presenting the information. Use of this format will help ensure the completeness of the information provided, will assist the Commission's staff and others in locating the information, and will aid in shortening the time needed for the review process.

Applicability of Standard Format This Standard Format applies specifically to SARs for light-water cooled nuclear power reactors. Two additional editions of the Standard Format have been prepared, one for high-temperature gas-cooled reactors (HTGR Edition) and one for liquid metal fast breeder reactors (LMFBR Edi tion). Copies may be obtained on written request to the U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission, Washington, D.C. 20555, Attention: Director, Divi sion of Technical Information and Document Control.

Use of Standard Format The Standard Format represents a format for SARs that is acceptable to the NRC staff. Conformance with the Standard Format, however, is not required. Safety Analysis Reports with different formats will be acceptable to the staff if they provide an adequate basis for the findings requisite to the issuance of a license or permit. However, because it may be more difficult to locate needed information, the staff review time for such reports may be longer, and there is a greater likehood that the staff may regard the report as incomplete.

Upon receipt of an application, the NRC staff will perform a pre liminary review to determine if the SAR provides a reasonably complete presentation of the information that is needed to form a basis for the findings required before issuance of a permit or license in accordance with 10 CFR § 2.101. The Standard Format will be used by the staff as a guideline to identify the type of information needed unless there is good reason for not doing so. If the SAR does not provide a reasonably complete presentation of the necessary information, further review of the application iii

Revision 3 November 1978 will not be initiated until a reasonably complete presentation is provided.

The information provided in the SAR should be up to date with respect to the state of technology for nuclear power plants and should take into account recent changes in the NRC regulations and guides and in industry codes and standards, results of recent developments in nuclear reactor safety, and experience in the construction and operation of nuclear power plants.

The Standard Format should be used for both Preliminary Safety Analysis Reports and Final Safety Analysis Reports; however, any specific item that applies only to the FSAR will be indicated in the text by adding (FSAR) at the end of the guidance for that item. An entire section that is applicable only to the FSAR will be indicated by including (FSAR) follow ing the heading.

Style and Composition The applicant should strive for clear, concise presentations of the information provided in the SAR. Confusing or ambiguous statements and unnecessarily verbose descriptions do not contribute to expeditious tech nical review. Claims of adequacy of designs or design methods should be supported by technical bases.

The SAR should follow the numbering system and headings of the Standard Format at least to the headings with three digits, e.g., 2.4.2 Floods.

Appendices to the SAR should be used to provide supplemental infor mation not explicitly identified in the Standard Format. Examples of such information are (1) summaries of the manner in which the applicant has treated matters addressed in NRC Regulatory Guides or proposed regula tions and (2) supplementary information regarding calculational methods or design approaches used by the applicant or its agents.

Duplication of information should be avoided. Similar or identical information may be requested in various sections of the Standard Format because it is relevant to more than one portion of the plant; however, this information should be presented in~the principal section and appro priately referenced in the other applicable sections of the SAR. For example, where piping and instrumentation diagrams for the same system are requested in more than one section of the Standard Format, duplicate diagrams need not be submitted provided all the information requested in all sections is included on the diagrams and is appropriately identified and referenced.

The design information provided in the SAR should reflect the most advanced state of design at the time of submission. If certain information identified in the Standard Format is not yet available at the time of submission of a PSAR because the design has not progressed sufficiently at the time of writing, the PSAR should provide the criteria and bases iv

Revision 3 November 1978 being used to develop the required information, the concepts and alter natives under consideration, and the schedule for completion of the design and submission of the missing informnation. In general, the PSAR should describe the preliminary design of the plant in sufficient detail to enable a definitive evaluation by the staff as to whether the plant can be con structed and operated without undue risk to the health and safety of the public.

Changes from the criteria, design, and bases set forth in the PSAR, as well as any new criteria, designs, and bases, should be identified in the FSAR. The reasons for and safety significance of each change should be discussed. The FSAR should describe in detail the final design of the plant as constructed.

Where numerical values are stated, the number of significant figures given should reflect the accuracy or precision to which the number is known. Where possible, estimated limits of error or uncertainty should be given.

Abbreviations should be consistent throughout the SAR and should be consistent with generally accepted usage. Any abbreviations, symbols, or special terms unique to the proposed plant or not in general usage should be'defined in each chapter of the SAR where they are used.

Drawings, maps, diagrams, sketches, and charts should be employed where the information can be presented more adequately or conveniently by such means. Due concern should be taken to ensure that all informa tion presented in drawings is legible, symbols are defined, and drawings are not reduced to the extent that visual aids are necessary to interpret pertinent items of information presented in the drawings.

Reports or other documents that are referenced in the text of the SAR should be listed at the end of the section in which they are refer enced. In cases where proprietary documents are referenced, a nonpropri etary summary of the document should also be referenced. Material incor porated into the application by reference should be listed in Chapter 1 (see Section 1.6 of the Standard Format).

Revisions Data and text should be updated or revised by replacing pages. "Pen and ink" or "cut and paste" changes should not be used.

The changed or revised portion on each page should be highlighted by a "change indicator" mark consisting of a bold vertical line drawn in the margin opposite the binding margin. The line should be the same length as the portion actually changed.

All pages submitted to update, revise, or add pages to the report should show the date of change and a change or amendment number. A guide v

Revision 3 November 1978 page listing the pages to be inserted and the pages to be removed should accompany the revised pages.

All statements on a revised page should be accurate as of the date of the submittals.

Special care should be made to ensure that the main sections of the report are revised to reflect any design changes reported in supplemental information, i.e., responses to NRC staff requests for information or responses to regulatory positions.

Physical Specifications All material submitted as part of the Safety Analysis Report should conform to specific standards as to the physical dimensions of page size, quality of paper and inks, and number of pages, exhibits, and attachments.

More specifically:

1. Paper Size (not to exceed)

Text pages: 8-1/2 x 11 inches.

Drawings and graphics: 8-1/2 x 11 inches preferred; however, a larger size is acceptable provided:

a. the bound side does not exceed 11 inches except where required for legibility, and
b. the finished copy when folded does not exceed 8-1/2 x 11 inches.
2. Paper Stock Weight or substance: 20 pound for printing on both sides.

16 to 20 pound for printing on one side only.

Composition: wood chemical sulphite (no groundwood) and a pH of 5.5.

Color: white is preferred, but pastel colors are acceptable provided the combination of paper stock and ink is suitable for microfilming.

3. Ink Color sufficiently dense to record on microfilm or image-copying equipment.
4. Page Margins A margin of no less than one inch should be maintained on the top, bottom, and binding side of all pages.

vi

Revision 3 November 1978

5. Printing Composition: text pages should be single spaced.

Type font and style: must be suitable for microfilming.

Reproduction: may be mechanically or photographically reproduced.

Text pages should preferably be printed on two sides with the image printed head to head.

6. Binding Pages should be punched for standard 3-hole loose-leaf binder.
7. Page Numbering Pages should be numbered with the two digits corresponding to the chapter and first-level section numbers followed by a hyphen and a sequential number within the section, i.e., the third page in Sec tion 4.1 of Chapter 4 should be numbered 4.1-3. Do not number the entire report sequentially. (Note that because of the small number of pages in many sections, this Standard Format is numbered sequentially within each chapter.)

vii

Revision 3 November 1978 I. INTRODUCTION AND GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PLANT The first chapter of the SAR should present report and a general description of the plant. an introduction to the the reader to obtain a basic understanding This chapter should enable of the overall facility without having to refer to the subsequent chapters.

that follow can then be accomplished with Review of the detailed chapters recognition of the relative safety importance better perspective and with of each individual item to the overall plant design.

1.1 Introduction This section should present briefly overall application, including the type of the principal aspects of the of plant units, a brief description of the license requested, the number proposed location of the plant, the type of the nuclear steam supply system of containment structure and its designer, and its designer, the type the both rated and design,* and the corresponding core thermal power levels, each thermal power level, the scheduled completion net electrical output for date, and the antici pated commercial operation date for each unit.

1.2 General Plant Description This section should include a summary characteristics of the site and a concise description of the principal description of the plant. The plant description should include a brief discussion criteria, operating characteristics, and of the principal design safety considerations for the nuclear steam supply system; the engineered safety features and emergency systems; the instrumentation, control, and electrical systems; the power conversion system; the fuel handling and water and other auxiliary systems; and the storage systems; the cooling radioactive waste management system. The general arrangement of major be indicated by the use of plan and elevation structures and equipment should drawings in sufficient number and detail to provide a reasonable understanding of the plant. Those features of the plant of the general layout likely because of their relationship to safety should to be of special interest be identified. Such items as unusual site characteristics, solutions to particularly difficult engineering problems, and significant extrapolations in technology repre sented by the design should be highlighted.

SRated power is defined as the power level at which operated if licensed. Design the plant would be power is defined level that would be permitted by plant design as the highest power and that is used in some safety evaluations.

1-1

Revision 3 November 1978 1.3 Comparison Tables 1.3.1 Comparisons with Similar Facility Designs This section should provide a summary of sufficient detail to identify the principal similarities to other nuclear power plants (preferably plants already designed, constructed, or operated) and principal differences from such plants. Such comparisons may be limited to those plants or portions of plants designed or built by the nuclear steam system supplier, the architect-engineer, or the applicant. This information should be provided in tabular form with cross-references to the sections of the SAR that fully describe the similarities and differences. This comparison should not be restricted to a comparison of the reactor design parameters, but should include all principal features of the plant such as the engineered safety features, the containment concept, the instrumentation and electrical systems, the radioactive waste management system, and other principal systems.

1.3.2 Comparison of Final and Preliminary Information (FSAR)

The FSAR should be complete without reliance on the PSAR. In an FSAR, tables should be provided to identify clearly all the significant changes that have been made in the plant since submittal of the PSAR.

Each item should be cross-referenced to the section in the FSAR that describes the changes and the reasons for them.

1.4 Identification of Agents and Contractors This section should identify the prime agents or contractors for the design, construction, and operation of the nuclear power plant. The principal consultants and outside service organizations (such as those providing audits of the quality assurance program) should be identified.

The division of responsibility between the reactor designer, architect engineer, constructor, and plant operator should be delineated.

1.5 Requirements for Further Technical Information This section of the PSAR should identify, describe, and discuss those safety features or components for which further technical information is required in support of the issuance of a construction permit, but which has not been supplied in the PSAR. This section of the PSAR should:

1. Identify and distinguish between those technical information development programs that will be required to determine the adequacy of a new design and those that will be used to demonstrate the margin of conservatism of a proven design,
2. Describe the specific technical information that must be obtained to demonstrate acceptable resolution of the problems, 1-2

Revision 3 November 1978

3. Describe the program in sufficient detail to show tion will be obtained, or cross-reference those how the informa sections of the PSAR in which this information is provided,
4. Provide a schedule of completion of the program as related to the projected startup date of the proposed plant, and
5. Discuss the design alternatives or operational available in the event that the results of the restrictions program do not demonstrate acceptable resolution of the problems.

Reference may be made to topical program summary reports filed with the NRC; however, if such references are made, the applicability of each technical information development item to the applicant's plant should be discussed.

In the FSAR, this section should include a r6sum6 of special technical information development programs undertaken to establish the final design and/or demonstrate the conservatism of the design and a discussion of any programs that will be conducted during operation in order to demonstrate the acceptability of contemplated future changes in design or modes of operation.

1.6 Material Incorporated by Reference This section should provide a tabulation of all topical reports that are incorporated by reference as part of the application.

"topical reports" are defined as reports that have In this context, been prepared by reactor manufacturers, architect-engineers, or other organizations and filed separately with the NRC in support of this application or of other applica tions or product lines. This tabulation should include, for each topical report, the title, the report number, the date submitted to the NRC AEC), and the sections of the SAR in which this (or report is referenced.

For any topical reports that have been withheld from public disclosure pursuant to Section 2.790(b) of 10 CFR Part 2 as proprietary documents, nonproprietary summary descriptions of the general content of such reports should also be referenced. This section should also include a tabulation of any documents submitted to the Commission in other applications that are incorporated in whole or in part in this application by reference.

If any information submitted in connection with other applications is incorporated by reference in this SAR, summaries of such information should be included in appropriate sections of this SAR.

Results of tests and analyses may be submitted as separate reports.

In such cases, these reports should be referenced in this section and summarized in the appropriate section of the SAR.

1-3

Revision 3 November 1978 1.7 Drawings and Other Detailed Information 1.7.1 Electrical, Instrumentation, and Control Drawings (FSAR)

The FSAR should include a list of proprietary and nonproprietary electrical, instrumentation, and control (EI&C) drawings, including drawing number, title, revision number, and date. The list should be revised as necessary to conform to drawing revisions. Three copies of all proprietary and nonproprietary EI&C drawings, including revisions as they are issued, should be provided separate from the FSAR but incorporated by reference in this section.

1.7.2 Piping and Instrumentation Diagrams For each piping and instrumentation diagram (including revisions as issued) in the SAR, two large-scale copies (approximately 22 in. x 34 in.) should be provided separately but should be referenced in this section.

The piping and instrumentation diagrams should contain grid coordinates and drawing cross-references.

1.7.3 Other Detailed Information This section of the SAR should include a list of other specific data submitted in response to requests of the NRC staff, including card decks for computer codes, computer printouts, and detailed geologic, seismologic, and foundation engineering information. Three copies of each such item should be submitted separately but should be referenced in this section.

1.8 Conformance to NRC Regulatory Guides The SAR should include a table indicating the extent to which the applicant intends to comply with all applicable NRC regulatory guides and the revision number of those guides. For each applicable regulatory guide, the table should identify those sections of the SAR to which the guide applies and should indicate any proposed exceptions to the regula tory position.

1.9 Standard Designs 1.9.1 Interfaces For standard designs, this section of the SSAR should provide a listing of the NSSS-BOP safety-related interfaces and should identify the sections in the SSAR where descriptions of these interfaces are presented.

1.9.2 Exceptions In this section of the SAR, the applicant should (1) clearly identify and describe any exceptions taken to the approved standard design in the referenced SSAR and (2) reference the appropriate section in the SAR where 1-4

Revision 3 November 1978 the detailed description of the component, system, or structure and the justification for the exception may be found. Portions of the SAR that contain exceptions to the referenced SSAR should be clearly identified by means of delineators such as marginal notation or pages of different color.

1-5

Revision 3 November 1978

2. SITE CHARACTERISTICS This chapter of the SAR should provide information seismological, hydrological, and meteorological on the geological, site and vicinity, in conjunction with characteristics of the present distribution and land use and site activities and projected population is to indicate how these site characteristics and controls. The purpose and operating criteria and to show the adequacyhave influenced plant design of the site characteristics from a safety viewpoint.

2.1 Geography and Demography 2.1.1 Site Location and Description 21.1.1 Specification of Location.

at the site should be specified by latitudeThe location of each reactor second and by Universal Transverse Mercator and longitude to the nearest Northing, and Easting, as found on USGS Coordinates (Zone Number, topographical maps) to the nearest 100 meters. The State and county or other the site is located should be identified, political subdivision in which site with respect to prominent natural and as well as the location of the man-made features such as rivers and lakes.

2.1.1.2 Site Area Map. A map of the site area of suitable scale (with explanatory text as necessary) should be included. It should clearly show the following:

1. The plant property lines. The area of plant property in acres should be stated.
2. Location of the site boundary. If the the same as the plant property lines, this site boundary lines are should be stated.
3. The location and orientation of principal the site area. Principal structures should plant structures within be identified as to function (e.g., reactor building, auxiliary building, turbine building).
4. The location of any industrial, commercial, tional, or residential structures within institutional, recrea the site area.
5. The boundary lines of the plant exclusion area (as defined 10 CFR Part 100). If these boundary lines are the same as the plantin property lines, this should be stated. The minimum distance from each reactor to the exclusion area boundary should be shown and specified.

"Site" means the contiguous real estate on which nuclear facilities are located and for which one or more licensees has the legal right to control access by individuals and to restrict land use for purposes of limiting the potential doses from radiation or radioactive material during normal operation of the facilities.

2-1

Revision 3 November 1978

6. A scale that will permit the measurement of distances with reasonable accuracy.
7. True north.
8. Highways, railways, and waterways that traverse or are adjacent to the site.

2.1.1.3 Boundaries for Establishing Effluent Release Limits. The site description should define the boundary lines of the restricted area (as defined in 10 CFR Part 20) and should describe how access to this area is controlled for radiation protection purposes, including how the applicant will be made aware of individuals entering the area and will control such access. If it is proposed that limits higher than those established by § 20.106(a) (and related as low as is reasonably achievable provisions) be set, the information required by § 20.106 should be sub mitted. The site map discussed above may be used to identify this area, or a separate map of the site may be used. Indicate the location of the boundary line with respect to the water's edge of nearby rivers and lakes.

Distances from plant effluent release points to the boundary line should be clearly defined.

2.1.2 Exclusion Area Authority andControl 2.1.2.1 Authority. The application should include a specific description of the applicant's legal rights with respect to all areas that lie within the designated exclusion area. The description should establish, as required by paragraph 100.3(a) of Part 100, that the appli cant has the authority to determine all activities, including exclusion and removal of personnel and property from the area. The status of mineral rights and easements within this area should be addressed.

If ownership of all land within the exclusion area has not been obtained by the applicant, those parcels of land not owned within the area should be clearly described by means of a scaled map of the exclusion area, and Ithe status of proceedings to obtain ownership or the required authority over the land for the life of the plant should be specifically described.

Minimum distance to and direction of exclusion area boundaries should be given for both present ownership and proposed ownership. If the exclu sion area extends into a body of water, the application should specif ically address the bases upon which it has.been determined that the authority required by paragraph 100.3(a) of Part 100 is or will be held by the applicant.

2.1.2.2 Control of Activities Unrelated to Plant Operation. Any activities unrelated to plant operation which are to be permitted within the exclusion area (aside from transit through the area) should be des cribed with respect to the nature of such activities, the number of persons engaged in them, and the specific locations within the exclusion area where such activities will be permitted. The application should 2-2

Revision 3 November 1978 describe the limitations to be imposed on such activities and the proce dure to be followed to ensure that the plant staff has general knowledge of the number and location of persons within the exclusion area engaged in such activities. An estimate should be provided of the time required to evacuate all such persons from the area in order that calculations can be made of radiation doses resulting from the accidents postulated in Chapter 15.

2.1.2.3 Arrangements for Traffic Control. Where the exclusion area is traversed by a highway, railway, or waterway, the application should describe the arrangements made or to be made to control traffic in the event of an emergency.

2.1.2.4 Abandonment or Relocation of Roads. If there are any public roads traversing the proposed exclusion area which, because of their loca tion, will have to be abandoned or relocated, specific information should be provided regarding authority possessed under state laws to effect abandonment; the procedures that must be followed to achieve abandonment; the identity of the public authorities who will make the final determina tion; and the status of the proceedings completed to date to obtain abandonment. If a public hearing is required prior to abandonment, the type of hearing should be specified (e.g., legislative or adjudicatory).

If the public road will be relocated rather than abandoned, specific information as described above should be provided with regard to the relocation and the status of obtaining any lands required for relocation.

2.1.3 Population Distribution Population data presented should be based on the 1970 census data and, where available, more recent census data. The following information should be presented on population distribution.

2.1.3.1 Population Within 10 Miles. On a map of suitable scale that identifies places of significant population grouping such as cities and towns within a 10-mile radius, concentric circles should be drawn, with the reactor at the center point, at distances of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 10 miles. The circles should be divided into 22-1/2-degree segments with each segment centered on one of the 16 compass points (e.g., true north, north-northeast, northeast). A table appropriately keyed to the map should provide the current residential population within each area of the map formed by the concentric circles and radial lines. The same table, or separate tables, should be used to provide the projected population within each area for (1) the expected first year of plant operation and (2) by census decade (e.g., 1990) through the projected plant life. The tables should provide population totals for each segment and annular ring, and a total for the 0 to 10 miles enclosed population. The basis for popula tion projections should be described.

2.1.3.2 Population Between 10 and 50 Miles. A map of suitable scale and appropriately keyed tables should be used in the same manner as 2-3

Revision 3 November 1978 described above to describe the population and its distribution at 10-mile intervals between the 10- and 50-mile radii from the reactor.

2.1.3.3 Transient Population. Seasonal and daily variations in population and population distribution resulting from land uses such as recreational or industrial should be generally described and appropriately keyed to the areas and population numbers contained on the maps and tables of paragraphs 2.1.3.1 and 2.1.3.2. If the plant is located in an area where significant population variations due to transient land use are expected, additional tables of population distribution should be provided to indicate peak seasonal and daily populations. The additional tables should cover projected as well as current populations.

2.1.3.4 Low Population Zone. The low population zone (as defined in 10 CFR Part 100) should be specified and the basis for its selection discussed. A scaled map of the zone should be provided to illustrate topographic features; highways, railways, waterways, and any other trans portation routes that may be used for evacuation purposes; and the location of all facilities and institutions such as schools, hospitals, prisons, beaches, and parks. Facilities and institutions beyond the low population zone which, because of their nature, may require special consideration when evaluating emergency plans, should be identified out to a distance of five miles. A table of population distribution within the low popula tion zone should provide estimates of peak daily, as well as seasonal transient, population within the zone, including estimates of transient population in the facilities and institutions identified.

2.1.3.5 Population Center. The nearest population center (as defined in 10 CFR Part 100) should be identified and its population and its direc tion and distance from the reactor specified. The distance from the reactor to the nearest boundary of the population center (not necessarily the political boundary) should be related to the low population zone radius to demonstrate compliance with Part 100 guidelines. The bases for the boundary selected should be provided. Indicate the extent to which tran sient population has been considered in establishing the population center.

In addition tc specifying the distance to the nearest boundary of a popula tion center, discuss the present and projected population distribution and population density within and adjacent to local population groupings.

2.1.3.6 Population Density. The cumulative resident population projected for the year of initial plant operation should be plotted to a distance of at least 30 miles and compared with a cumulative population resulting from a uniform population density of 500 people/sq. mile in all directions from the plant. Similar information should be provided for the end of plant life but compared with a cumulative population resulting from a uniform population density of 1000 people/sq. mile.

2-4

Revision 3 November 1978 2.2 Nearby Industrial, Transportation, and Military Facilities The purpose of this section is to establishwhether the effects of potential accidents in the vicinity* of the site from present and projected industrial, transportation, and military installations and operations should be used as design basis events for plant design and to establish the design parameters related to the accidents so selected.

2.2.1 Locations and Routes Provide maps showing the location and distance from the nuclear plant of all significant manufacturing plants; chemical plants; refineries; storage facilities; mining and quarrying operations; military bases; sites; transportation routes (air, land, and water); transportation missile ities (docks, anchorages, airports); oil and gas pipelines, facil drilling opera tions, and wells; and underground gas storage facilities.

Show any other facilities that, because of the products manufactured, stored, or trans ported, may require consideration with respect to possible adverse effects on the plant. Also, show any military firing or bombing ranges and any nearby aircraft flight, holding, and landing patterns.

The maps should be clearly legible and of suitable scale to enable easy location of the facilities and routes in relation to the nuclear plant. All symbols and notations used to depict the location of the facilities and routes should be identified in legends or tables. Topo graphic features should be included on the maps in sufficient detail to adequately illustrate the information presented.

2.2.2 Descriptions The descriptions of the nearby industrial, transportation, and military facilities identified in 2.2.1 should include the information indicated in the following sections.

2.2.2.1 Description of Facilities. A concise description of each facility, including its primary function and major products and the number of persons employed, should be provided in tabular form.

2.2.2.2 Description of Products and Materials. A description of the products and materials regularly manufactured, stored, used, or trans ported in the vicinity of the nuclear plant should be provided. Emphasis should be placed on the identification and description of any hazardous materials. Statistical data should be provided on the amounts involved, modes of transportation, frequency of shipment, and the maximum quantity of hazardous material likely to be Drocessed, stored, or transported at any given time. The applicable toxicity limits should be provided for each hazardous material.

All facilities and activities within five miles of the nuclear plant should be considered. Facilities and activities at greater distances should be included as appropriate to their significance.

2-5

Revision 3 November 1978 2.2.2.3 Pipelines. For pipelines, indicate the pipe size, pipe age, operating pressure, depth of burial, location and type of isolation valves, and the type of gas or liquid presently carried.

Indicate whether the pipeline is used for gas storage at higher than normal pressure and discuss the possibility of the pipeline being used in the future to carry a different product than the one presently being carried (e.g., propane instead of natural gas).

2.2.2.4 Waterways. If the site is located adjacent to waterway, provide information on the location of the intake a navigable structure(s) in relation to the shipping channel, the depth of channel, the location of locks, the type of ships and barges using the waterway, and any nearby docks and anchorages.

2.2.2.5 Airports. For airports, provide information on orientation of runways, type of aircraft using the facility, length and the number of operations per year by aircraft type, and the flying patterns asso ciated with the airport. Plans for future utilization of the airport, including possible construction of new runways, increased traffic, or utilization by larger aircraft, should be provided.

In addition, statistics on aircraft accidents* should be provided for:

1. All airports within five miles of the nuclear plant,
2. Airports with projected operations greater than 500d 2 move ments per year within 10 miles,** and
3. Airports with projected operations greater than 1000d 2 move ments per year outside 10 miles.**

Provide equivalent information describing any other aircraft ities in the vicinity of the plant. These should include aviation activ routes, pilot training areas, and landing and approach paths to airports and military facilities.

2.2.2.6 Projections of Industrial Growth. For each of the above categories, provide projections of the growth of present activities and new types of activities in the vicinity of the nuclear plant that can be reasonably expected based on economic growth projections for the area.

2.2.3 Evaluation of Potential Accidents On the basis of the information provided in Sections 2.2.1 and 2.2.2, the potential accidents to be considered as design basis events should be determined and the potential effects of these accidents on the nuclear An analysis of the probability of an aircraft collision at the nuclear plant and the effects of the collision on the safety-related components of the plant should be provided in Section 3.5.

"d" is the distance in miles from the site.

2-6

Revision 3 November 1978 plant should be identified in terms of design parameter (e.g., overpres sure, missile energies) or physical phenomena (e.g., concentration of flammable or toxic cloud outside building structures).

2.2.3.1 Determination of Design Basis Events. Design basis events external to the nuclear plant are defined as those accidents that have a probability of occurrence on the order of about l0-7 per year or greater and have potential consequences serious enough to affect the safety of the plant to the extent that Part 100 guidelines could be exceeded. The determination of the probability of occurrence of potential accidents should be based on an analysis of the available statistical data on the frequency of occurrence for the type of accident under consideration and on the transportation accident rates for the mode of transportation used to carry the hazardous material. If the probability of such an accident is on the order of 1O-7 per year or greater, the accident should be con sidered a design basis event, and a detailed analysis of the effects of the accident on the plant's safety-related structures and components should be provided. The accident categories discussed below should be considered in selecting design basis events.

1. Explosions. Accidents involving detonations of high explosives, munitions, chemicals, or liquid and gaseous fuels should be considered for facilities and activities in the vicinity of the plant where such materials are processed, stored, used, or transported in quantity. Atten tion should be given to potential accidental explosions that could produce a blast overpressure on the order of 1 psi or greater at the nuclear plant, using recognized quantity-distance relationships.* Missiles generated in the explosion should also be considered, and an analysis should be provided in Section 3.5.
2. Flammable Vapor Clouds (Delayed Ignition). Accidental releases of flammable liquids or vapors that result in the formation of unconfined vapor clouds should be considered. Assuming that no immediate explosion occurs, the extent of the cloud and the concentrations of gas that could reach the plant under "worst-case" meteorological conditions should be determined. An evaluation of the effects on the plant of detonation and deflagration of the vapor cloud should be provided. An analysis of the missiles generated as a result of the detonation should be provided in Section 3.5.
3. Toxic Chemicals. Accidents involving the release of toxic chem icals (e.g., chlorine) from onsite storage facilities and nearby mobile and stationary sources should be considered. If toxic chemicals are known or projected to be present onsite or in the vicinity of a nuclear plant or to be frequently transported in the vicinity of the plant, releases One acceptable reference is the Department of the Army Technical Manual TM 5-1300, "Structures to Resist the Effects of Accidental Explosions,"

for sale by Superintendent of Documents, U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C. 20402.

2-7

Revision 3 November 1978 of these chemicals should be evaluated. For each postulated event, a range of concentrations at the site should be determined for a spectrum of meteorological conditions. These toxic chemical concentrations should be used in evaluating control room habitability in Section 6.4.

4. Fires. Accidents leading to high heat fluxes or to'smoke, and nonflammable gas- or chemical-bearing clouds from the release of materials as the consequence of fires in the vicinity of the plant should be consid ered. Fires in adjacent industrial and chemical plants and storage facili ties and in oil and gas pipelines, brush and forest fires, and fires from transportation accidents should be evaluated as events that could lead to high heat fluxes or to the formation of such clouds. A spectrum of meteorological conditions should be included in the dispersal analysis when determining the concentrations of nonflammable material that could reach the site. These concentrations should be used in Section 6.4 to evaluate control room habitability and in Section 9.5 to evaluate the operability of diesels and other equipment.
5. Collisions with Intake Structure. For nuclear power plant sites located on navigable waterways, the evaluation should consider the proba bility and potential effects of impact on the plant cooling water intake structure and enclosed pumps by the various size, weight, and type of barges or ships that normally pass the site, including any explosions incident to the collision. This analysis should be used in Section 9.2.5 to determine whether an additional source of cooling water is required.
6. Liquid Spills. The accidental release of oil or liquids which may be corrosive, cryogenic, or coagulant should be considered to deter mine if the potential exists for such liquids to be drawn into the plant's intake structure and circulating water system or otherwise to affect the plant's safe operation.

2.2.3.2 Effects of Design Basis Events. Provide the analysis of the effects of the design basis accidents identified in Section 2.2.3.1 on the safety-related components of the nuclear plant and discuss the steps taken to mitigate the consequences of these accidents, including such things as the addition of engineered-safety-feature equipment and reinforcing of plant structures, as well as the provisions made to lessen the likelihood and severity of the accidents themselves.

2.3 Meteorology This section should provide a meteorological description of the site and its surrounding areas. Sufficient data should be included to permit an independent evaluation by the staff.

2.3.1 Regional Climatology 2.3.1.1 General Climate. The general climate of the region should be described with respect to types of air masses, synoptic features (high-2-8

Revision 3 November 1978 and low-pressure systems and frontal systems), general airflow patterns (wind direction and speed), temperature and humidity, precipitation (rain, snow, and sleet), and relationships between synoptic-scale atmospheric processes and local (site) meteorological conditions. Provide references that indicate the climatic atlases and regional climatic summaries used.

2.3.1.2 Regional Meteorological Conditions for Design and Operating Bases. Seasonal and annual frequencies of severe weather phenomena, includ ing hurricanes, tornadoes and waterspouts, thunderstorms, lightning, hail, and high air pollution potential, should be provided. Provide the probable maximum annual frequency of occurrence and time duration of freezing rain (ice storms) and dust (sand) storms where applicable. Provide estimates of the weight of the 100-year return period snowpack and the weight of the 48-hour Probable Maximum Winter Precipitation for the site vicinity.

Using the above estimates, provide the weight of snow and ice on the roof of each safety-related structure.

Provide the meteorological data used for evaluating the performance of the ultimate heat sink with respect to (1) maximum evaporation and drift loss and (2) minimum water cooling (see Regulatory Guide 1.27, "Ultimate Heat Sink for Nuclear Power Plants"). The period of record examined should be identified, and the bases and procedures used for selec tion of the critical meteorological data should be provided and justified.

Provide design basis tornado parameters, including translational speed, rotational speed, maximum pressure differential with its asso ciated time interval (see guidance in Regulatory Guide 1.76, "Design Basis Tornado for Nuclear Power Plants"), and 100-year return period "fastest mile of wind," including vertical distribution of velocity and appropriate gust factor.

Provide all other regional meteorological and air quality conditions used for design and operating basis considerations and their bases. Refer ences to SAR sections in which these conditions are used should be included.

2.3.2 Local Meteorology 2.3.2.1 Normal and Extreme Values of Meteorological Parameters.

Provide monthly and annual summaries (based on both long-term data from nearby reasonably representative locations and shorter-term onsite data) of:

1. Monthly and annual wind roses using the wind speed classes pro vided in Regulatory Guide 1.23 (Safety Guide 23), "Onsite Meteorological Programs," and wind direction persistence summaries at all heights at which wind characteristics data are applicable or have been measured.
2. Monthly and annual air temperature and dewpoint temperature summaries, including averages, measured extremes, and diurnal range.

2-9

Revision 3 November 1978

3. Monthly and annual extremes of atmospheric water vapor (absolute and relative) including averages, measured extremes, and diurnal range.
4. Monthly and annual summaries of precipitation, including averages and measured extremes, number of hours with precipitation, rainfall rate distribution, (i.e., maximum 1 hr, 2 hr, ... , 24 hr) and monthly precipita tion wind roses with precipitation rate classes.
5. Monthly and annual summaries of fog (and smog), including expected values and extremes of frequency and duration.
6. Monthly and annual summaries of atmospheric stability defined by vertical temperature gradient or other well-documented parameters that have been substantiated by diffusion data.
7. Monthly mixing height data, including frequency and duration (persistence) of inversion conditions.
8. Hourly averages of wind speed and direction at all heights at which wind characteristics data are applicable or have been measured and hourly averages of atmospheric stability as defined by vertical temper ature gradient or other well-documented parameters that have been substan tiated by diffusion data. (These data should be presented as hour-by-hour data on magnetic tape or monthly and annual joint frequency distributions of wind speed and wind direction by atmospheric stability.)

This information should be fully documented and substantiated as to the validity of its representation of conditions at and near the site.

References should be provided to the National Weather Service (NOAA) station summaries from nearby locations and to other meteorological data that were used to describe site characteristics.

2.3.2.2 Potential Influence of the Plant and Its Facilities on Local Meteorology. Discuss and provide an evaluation of the potential modifica tion of the normal and extreme values of meteorological parameters described in Section 2.3.2.1 above as a result of the presence and operation of the plant (e.g. , the influence of cooling towers or water impoundment features on meteorological conditions). Provide a map showing the detailed topographic features (as modified by the plant) within a 5-mile (3.1 km) radius of the plant. Also provide a smaller scale map showing topography within a 50-mile (80 km) radius of the plant as well as a plot of maximum elevation versus distance from the center of the plant in each of the sixteen 22-1/2-degree compass point sectors (centered on true north, north northeast, northeast, etc.) radiating from the plant to a distance of 50 miles (80 km).

2.3.2.3 Local Meteorological Conditions for Design and Operating Bases. Provide all local meteorological and air quality conditions used for design and operating basis considerations and their bases, except 2-10

Revision 3 November 1978 for those conditions referred to in Sections 2.3.4 and 2.3.5. References should be included to SAR sections in which these conditions are used.

2.3.3 Onsite Meteorological Measurements Program The preoperational and operational programs for meteorological measure ments at the site, including offsite satellite facilities, should be described. This description should include measurements made, locations and elevations of measurements, exposure of instruments, descriptions of instruments used, instrument performance specifications, calibration and maintenance procedures, data output and recording systems and locations, and data analysis procedures. Additional sources of meteorological data for consideration in the description of airflow trajectories from the site to a distance of 80 km should be similarly described in as much detail as possible, particularly measurements made, locations and eleva tions of measurements, exposure of instruments, descriptions of instru ments used, and instrument performance specifications. These additional sources of meteorological data may include National Weather Service stations and other meteorological programs that are well maintained and well exposed (e.g., other nuclear facilities, university and private meteorological programs). Guidance on acceptable onsite meteorological programs is presented in Regulatory Guide 1.23.

Provide joint frequency distributions of wind speed and direction by atmospheric stability class (derived from currently acceptable param eters), based on appropriate meteorological measurement heights and data reporting periods, in the format described in Regulatory Guide 1.23. An hour-by-hour listing of hourly-averaged parameters should also be provided on magnetic tape.

For the PSAR, at least one annual cycle of onsite meteorological data should be provided at docketing. If adequate meteorological data are not available at docketing, the best available (onsite and offsite) data to describe atmospheric dispersion characteristics should be pro vided. Adequate onsite meteorological data must be provided prior to or with the scheduled response to the first set of staff requests for addi tional information.

For the FSAR, at least two consecutive annual cycles (and preferably three or more whole years), including the most recent one-year period, should be provided at docketing.

Evidence should be provided to show how well these data represent long-term conditions at the site.

2.3.4 Short-Term Diffusion Estimates 2.3.4.1 Objective. Provide conservative and realistic estimates of atmospheric diffusion (x/Q) at the site boundary (exclusion area) and 2-11

Revision 3 November 1978 at the outer boundary of the low population zone for appropriate time periods up to 30 days after an accident.

2.3.4.2 Calculations. Diffusion estimates should be based on the most representative meteorological data. Onsite data alone should be used as soon as a one-year period of record is completed.

Provide hourly cumulative frequency distributions of relative concen trations (x/Q), using onsite data at appropriate distances from the effluent release point(s), such as the minimum site boundary distance (exclusion area). The x/Q values from each of these distributions that are exceeded 5% and 50% (median value) of the time should be reported. For the outer boundary of the low population zone, provide cumulative frequency of x/Q estimates for (1) the 8-hour time period from 0 to 8 hours9.259259e-5 days <br />0.00222 hours <br />1.322751e-5 weeks <br />3.044e-6 months <br />; (2) the 16-hour period from 8 to 24 hours2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br />; (3) the 3-day period from 1 to 4 days; and (4) the 26-day period from 4 to 30 days. Report the worst condition and the 5% and 50% probability level conditions. Guidance on appropriate diffusion models for estimating X/Q values is presented in Regulatory Guides 1.3, "Assumptions Used for Evaluating the Potential Radiological

.Consequences of a Loss-of-Coolant Accident for Boiling Water Reactors,"

and 1.4, "Assumptions Used for Evaluating the Potential Radiological Con sequences of a Loss-of-Coolant Accident for Pressurized Water Reactors."

Evidence should be provided to show how well these diffusion estimates represent conditions that would be estimated from anticipated long-term conditions at the site. The effects of topography on short-term diffusion estimates should be discussed.

2.3.5 Long-Term Diffusion Estimates 2.3.5.1 Objective. Provide realistic estimates of annual average atmospheric transport and diffusion characteristics to a distance of 50 miles (80.5 km) from the plant for annual average release limit calcu lations and man-rem estimates.

2.3.5.2 Calculations. Provide a detailed description of the model used to calculate realistic annual average x/Q values. Discuss the accuracy and validity of the model, including the suitability of input parameters, source configuration, and topography. Provide the meteorolog ical data summaries (onsite and regional) used as input to the models.

Guidance on acceptable atmospheric transport and diffusion models is presented in Regulatory Guide 1.111, "Methods for Estimating Atmospheric Transport and Dispersion of Gaseous Effluents in Routine Releases from Light-Water-Cooled Reactors.""

Provide a calculation of the maximum annual average X/Q at or beyond the site boundary utilizing appropriate meteorological data for each routine venting location. Estimates of annual average X/Q values for 16 2-12

Revision 3 November 1978 radial sectors to a distance of 50 miles (80.5 km) from the plant using appropriate meteorological data should be provided.

Evidence should be provided to show how well these estimates represent conditions that would be estimated from climatologically representative data.

2.4 Hydrologic Engineering The following sections should contain sufficient information to allow an independent hydrologic engineering review to be made of all hydrolog ically related design bases, performance requirements, and bases for operation of structures, systems, and components important to safety, considering the following phenomena or conditions:

1. Runoff floods for streams, reservoirs, adjacent drainage areas, and site drainage, and flood waves resulting from dam failures induced by runoff floods,
2. Surges, seiches, and wave action,
3. Tsunami,
4. Nonrunoff-induced flood waves due to dam failures or landslides,
5. Blockage of cooling water sources by natural events,
6. Ice jam flooding,
7. Combinations of flood types,
8. Low water and/or drought effects (including setdown due tc surges, seiches, or tsunami) on safety-related cooling water supplies and their dependability,
9. Channel diversions of safety-related cooling water sources,
10. Capacity requirements for safety-related cooling water sources, and
11. Dilution and dispersion of severe accidental releases to the hydrosphere relating to existing and potential future users of surface water and groundwater resources.

The level of analysis that should be presented may range from very conservative, based on simplifying assumptions, to detailed analytical estimates of each facet of the bases being studied. The former approach is suggested in evaluating phenomena that do not influence the selection of design bases or where the adoption of very conservative design bases does not adversely affect plant design.

2-13

Revision 3 November 1978 2.4.1 Hydrologic Description 2.4.1.1 Site and Facilities. Describe the site and all safety related elevations, structures, exterior accesses, equipment, and systems from the standpoint of hydrologic considerations. Provide a topographic

-nap of the site that shows any proposed changes to natural drainage features.

2.4.1.2 Hydrosphere. Describe the location, size, shape, and other hydrologic characteristics of streams, lakes, shore regions, and ground water environments influencing plant siting. Include a description of existing and proposed water control structures, both upstream and down stream, that may influence conditions at the site. For these structures, (1) tabulate contributing drainage areas, (2) describe types of structures, all appurtenances, ownership, seismic design criteria, and spillway design criteria, and (3) provide elevation-area-storage relationships and short term and long-term storage allocations for pertinent reservoirs. Provide a regional map showing major hydrologic features. List the owner, loca tion, and rate of use of surface water users whose intakes could be adversely affected by accidental release of contaminants. Refer to Sec tion 2.4.13.2 for the tabulation of groundwater users.

2.4.2 Floods 2.4.2.1 Flood History. Provide the date, level, peak discharge, and related information for major historical flood events in the site region. A "flood" is defined as any abnormally high water stage or over flow from a stream, floodway, lake, or coastal area that results in significantly detrimental effects. Include stream floods, surges, seiches, tsunami, dam failures, ice jams, floods induced by landslides, and similar events.

2.4.2.2 Flood Design Considerations. Discuss the general capability of safety-related facilities, systems, and equipment to withstand floods and flood waves. The design flood protection for safety-related components and structures of the plant should be based on the highest calculated flood water level elevations and flood wave effects (design basis flood) resulting from analyses of several different hypothetical causes. Any possible flood condition up to and including the highest and most crit ical flood level resulting from any of several different events should be considered as the basis for the design protection level for safety related components and structures of the plant. The flood potential from streams, reservoirs, adjacent watersheds, and site drainage should be discussed. The probable maximum water level from a stream flood, surge, seiche, combination of surge and stream flood in estuarial areas, wave action, or tsunami (whichever is applicable and/or greatest) may cause the highest water level at safety-related facilities. Other possibilities are the flood level resulting from the most severe flood wave at the plant site caused by an upstream or downstream landslide, dam failure, or dam breaching resulting from a seismic or foundation disturbance. The effects 2-14

Revision 3 November 1978 of coincident wind-generated wave action should be superimposed on the applicable flood level. The assumed hypothetical conditions should be evaluated both statically and dynamically to determine the design flood protection level.

The topical information that should be included is generally out lined in Sections 2.4.3 through 2.4.6 of this guide, but the types of events considered and the controlling event should be summarized in this section. Indicate whether, and if so how, the regulatory positions of Regulatory Guide 1.59, "Design Basis Floods for Nuclear Power Plants,"

have been followed; if not followed, describe the specific alternative approaches used.

2.4.2.3 Effects of Local Intense Precipitation. Describe the effects of local probable maximum precipitation (see Section 2.4.3.1) on adjacent drainage areas and site drainage systems, including drainage from the roofs of structures. Tabulate rainfall intensities for the selected and critically arranged time increments, provide characteristics and descrip tions of runoff models, and estimate the resulting water levels. Summarize the design criteria for site drainage facilities and provide analyses that demonstrate the capability of site drainage facilities to prevent flooding of safety-related facilities resulting from local probable maximum precipitation. Estimates of precipitation based on NOAA publications (formerly U.S. Weather Bureau) with the time distribution based on critical distributions such as those employed by the Corps of Engineers usually provide acceptable bases. Sufficient details of the site drainage system should be provided (1) to allow an independent review of rainfall and runoff effects on safety-related facilities, (2) to judge the adequacy of design criteria, and (3) to allow independent review of the potential for blockage of site drainage due to ice, debris, or similar material.

Provide a discussion of the effects of ice accumulation on site facil ities where such accumulation could coincide with local probable maximum (winter) precipitation and cause flooding or other damage to safety-related facilities.

2.4.3 Probable Maximum Flood (PMF) on Streams and Rivers Indicate whether, and if so how, the guidance given in Appendix A of Regulatory Guide 1.59 has been followed; if not followed, describe the specific alternative approaches used. Summarize the locations and associated water levels for which PMF determinations have been made.

2.4.3.1 Probable Maximum Precipitation (PMP). The PMP is the theoret ical precipitation over the applicable drainage area that would produce flood flows that have virtually no risk of being exceeded. These estimates usually involve detailed analyses of actual storms in the general region of the drainage basin under study and certain modifications and extrapola tions of historical data to reflect more severe rainfall conditions than have actually been recorded, insofar as these are deemed "reasonably 2-15

Revision 3 November 1978 possible" to occur on the basis of hydrometeorological reasoning. Discuss considerations of storm configuration (orientation of areal distribution),

maximized precipitation amounts (include a description of maximization procedures and/or studies available for the area such as reference to National Weather Service and Corps of Engineers determinations), time distributions, orographic effects, storm centering, seasonal effects, antecedent storm sequences, antecedent snowpack (depth, moisture content, areal distribution), and any snowmelt model. Present the selected maximized storm precipitation distribution (time and space).

2.4.3.2 Precipitation Losses. Describe the absorption capability of the basin, including consideration of initial losses, infiltration rates, and antecedent precipitation. Provide verification of these assump tions by reference to regional studies or by presenting detailed applicable local storm-runoff studies.

2.4.3.3 Runoff and Stream Course Models. Describe the hydrologic response characteristics of the watershed to precipitation (such as unit hydrographs), verification from historical floods or synthetic procedures, and the nonlinearity of the model at high rainfall rates. A description of subbasin drainage areas (including a map), their sizes, and topographic features of watersheds should be provided. Include a tabulation of all drainage areas. Discuss the stream course model and its ability to compute floods up to the severity of the PMF. Present any reservoir and channel routing assumptions anu coefficients and their bases with appropriate discussion of initial conditions, outlet works (controlled and uncontrolled),

and spillways (controlled and uncontrolled).

2.4.3.4 Probable Maximum Flood Flow. Present the controlling PMF runoff hydrograph at the plant site that would result from rainfall (and snowmelt if pertinent). The analysis should consider all appropriate positions and distributions of the probable maximum precipitation and the potential influence of existing and proposed upstream and downstream dams and river structures. Present analyses and conclusions concerning the ability of upstream dams lying within a practical sphere of influence to withstand PMF conditions combined with setup, waves, and runup from appropriate coincident winds (see Section 2.4.3.6). If failures are likely, show the flood hydrographs at the plant site resulting from the most critical combination of such dam failures, including induced domino type failures of dams lying upstream of the plant site. When credit is taken for flood lowering at the plant site as a result of failure of any downstream dam during a PMF, support the conclusion that the downstream dam is reasonably certain to fail. Finally, provide the estimated PMF discharge hydrograph at the site and, when available, provide a similar hydrograph without upstream reservoir effects to allow an evaluation of reservoir effects and a regional comparison of the PMF estimate to be made.

2.4.3.5 Water Level Determinations. Describe the t!ansiation of the estimated peak PMP discharge to elevation using (when ai)vlicable) 2-16

Revision 3 November 1978 cross-section and profile data, reconstitution of historical floods (with consideration of high water marks and discharge estimates), standard step methods, transient flow methods, roughness coefficients, bridge and other losses, verification, extrapolation of coefficients for the PMF, estimates of PMF water surface profiles, and flood outlines.

2.4.3.6 Coincident Wind Wave Activity. Discuss setup, significant (33-1/3%) and maximum (1%) wave heights, runup, and resultant static and dynamic effects of wave action on each safety-related facility from wind generated activity that may occur coincidently with the peak PMF water level. Provide a map and analysis showing that the most critical fetch has been used to determine wave action.

2.4.4 Potential Dam Failures, Seismically Induced Indicate whether, and if so how, the guidance given in Appendix A of Regulatory Guide 1.59 has been followed; if not followed, describe the specific alternative approaches used.

2.4.4.1 Dam Failure Permutations. Discuss the locations of dams (both upstream and downstream), potential modes of failure, and results of seismically induced dam failures that could cause the most critical conditions (floods or low water) with respect to the safety-related facil ities for such an event (see Section 2.4.3.4). Consideration should be given to possible landslides, preseismic-event reservoir levels, and ante cedent flood flows coincident with the flood peak (base flow). Present the determination of the peak flow rate at the site for the worst dam failure reasonably possible or combination of dam failures, and summarize all analyses to show that the presented condition is the worst permutation.

Include descriptions of all coefficients and methods used and their bases.

Also, consider the effects on plant safety of other potential concurrent events such as blockage of a stream, waterborne missiles, etc.

2.4.4.2 Unsteady Flow Analysis of Potential Dam Failures. In deter mining the effect of dam failures at the site (see Section 2.4.4.1), the analytical methods presented should be applicable to artificially large floods with appropriately acceptable coefficients and should also consider flood waves through reservoirs downstream of failures. Domino-type failures resulting from flood waves should be considered, where appli cable. Discuss estimates of coincident flow (see Regulatory Guide 1.59) and other assumptions used to attenuate the dain-failure flood wave down stream. Discuss static and dynamic effects of the attenuated wave at the site.

2.4.4.3 Water Level at Plant Site. Describe the backwater, unsteady flow, or other computational method leading to the water elevation estimate (Section 2.4.4.1) for the most critical upstream dam failure or failures, and discuss its verification and reliability. Superimpose wind and wave conditions that may occur simultanecusly in a manner similar to that described in Section 2.4.3.6.

2-17

Revision 3 November 1978 2.4.5 Probable Maximum Surge and Seiche Flooding 2.4.5.1 Probable Maximum Winds and Associated Meteorological Param eters. This mechanism is defined as a hypothetical hurricane or other windstorm that might result from the most severe combinations of meteorolog ical parameters that are considered reasonably possible in the region involved, with the hurricane or other type of windstorm moving along a critical path and at an optimum rate of movement. The determination of probable maximum meteorological winds should be presented in detail.

This determination involves detailed analyses of actual historical storm events in the general region and certain modifications and extrapolations of data to reflect a more severe meteorological wind system than actually recorded, insofar as these are deemed "reasonably possible" to occur on the basis of meteorological reasoning. Where this has been done previously or on a generic basis (e.g., Atlantic and Gulf Coast Probable Maximum Hurricane characteristics reported in U. S. Weather Bureau memorandum HUR 7-97), reference to that work with a brief description will be suffi cient. The probable maximum conditions are the most severe combinations of hydrometeorological parameters considered reasonably possible that would produce a surge or seiche that has virtually no risk of being exceeded. This hypothetical event is postulated along a critical path at an optimal rate of movement from correlations of storm parameters of record. Sufficient bases and information should be provided to ensure that the parameters presented are the most severe combination.

2.4.5.2 Surge and Seiche Water Levels. Discuss considerations of hurricanes, frontal (cyclonic) type windstorms, moving squall lines, and surge mechanisms that are possible and applicable to the site. Include the antecedent water level (the 10% exceedance high tide, including initial rise for coastal locations, or the 100-year recurrence interval high water for lakes), the determination of the controlling storm surge or seiche (include the parameters used in the analysis such as storm track, wind fields, fetch or direction of wind approach, bottom effects, and verifi cation of historic events), a detailed description of the methods and models used, and the results of the computation of the probable maximum surge hydrograph (graphical presentation).

2.4.5.3 Wave Action. Discuss the wind-generated wave activity that can occur coincidently with a surge or seiche, or independently. Estimates of the wave period and the significant (33-1/3%) and maximum (1%) wave heights and elevations with the coincident water level hydrograph should be presented. Specific data should be presented on the largest breaking wave height, setup, runup, and the effect of overtopping in relation to each safety-related facility. A discussion of the effects of the water levels on each affected safety-related facility and the protection to be provided against static and dynamic effects and splash should be included.

2.4.5.4 Resonance. Discuss the possibility of oscillations of waves at natural periodicity, such as lake reflection and harbor resonance phenomena, and any resulting effects at the site.

2-18

Revision 3 November 1978 2.4.5.5 Protective Structures. Discuss the location of and design criteria for any special facilities for the protection of intake, effluent, and other safety-related facilities against surges, seiches, and wave action.

2.4.6 Probable Maximum Tsunami Flooding For sites adjacent to coastal areas, discuss historical tsunami, either recorded or translated and inferred, that provide information for use in determining the probable maximum water levels and the geoseismic generating mechanisms available, with appropriate references to Section 2.5.

2.4.6.1 Probable Maximum Tsunami. This event is defined as the most severe tsunami at the site, which has virtually no risk of being exceeded. Consideration should be given to the most reasonably severe geoseismic activity possible (resulting from, for example, fractures, faults, landslides, volcanism) in determining the limiting tsunami producing mechanism. The geoseismic investigations required to identify potential tsunami sources and mechanisms are similar to those necessary for the analysis of surface faulting and vibratory ground motions indicated for Section 2.5 and are summarized herein to define those loca tions and mechanisms that could produce the controlling maximum tsunami at the site (from both local and distant generating mechanisms). Such considerations as the orientation of the site relative to the earthquake epicenter or generating mechanism, shape of the coastline, offshore land areas, hydrography, and stability of the coastal area (proneness of sliding) should be considered in the analysis.

2.4.6.2 Historical Tsunami Record. Provide local and regional historical tsunami information.

2.4.6.3 Source Generator Characteristics. Provide detailed geoseismic descriptions of the controlling local and distant tsunami generators, including location, source dimensions, fault orientation, and maximum displacement.

2.4.6.4 Tsunami Analysis. Provide a complete description of the analysis procedure used to calculate tsunami height and period at the site. All models used in the analysis should be described in detail.

The description should include the theoretical bases of the model, its verification, and the conservatism of all input parameters.

2.4.6.5 Tsunami Water Levels. Provide estimates of maximum and minimum (low water) tsunami heights from both distant and local generators.

Describe the ambient water levels, including tides, sea level anomalies, and wind waves assumed coincident with the tsunami.

2.4.6.6 Hydrography and Harbor or Breakwater Influences on Tsunami.

Present the routing of the controlling tsunami, including breaking wave 2-19

Revision 3 November 1978 formation, bore formation, and any resonance effects (natural frequencies and successive wave effects) that result in the estimate of the maximum tsunami runup on each pertinent safety-related facility. This should include a discussion both of the analysis used to translate tsunami waves from offshore generator locations, or in deep water, to the site and of antecedent conditions. Provide, where possible, verification of the tech niques and coefficients used by reconstituting tsunami of record.

2.4.6.7 Effects on Safety-Related Facilities. Discuss the effects of the controlling tsunami on safety-related facilities and discuss the design criteria for the tsunami protection to be provided.

2.4.7 Ice Effects Describe potential icing effects and design criteria for protecting safety-related facilities from the most severe ice jam flood, wind-driven ice ridges, or other ice-produced effects and forces that are reasonably possible and could affect safety-related facilities with respect to adjacent streams, lakes, etc. , for both high and low water levels. Include the location and proximity of such facilities to the ice-generating mech anisms. Describe the regional ice and ice jam formation history with respect to water bodies.

2.4.8 Cooling Water Canals and Reservoirs Present the design bases for the capacity and the operating plan for safety-related cooling water canals and reservoirs (reference Sec tion 2.4.11). Discuss and provide bases for protecting the canals and reservoirs against wind waves, flow velocities (including allowance for freeboard), and blockage and (where applicable) describe the ability to withstand a probable maximum flood, surge, etc.

Discuss the emergency storage evacuation of reservoirs (low-level outlet and emergency spillway). Describe verified runoff models (e.g.,

unit hydrographs), flood routing, spillway design, and outlet protection.

2.4.9 Channel Diversions Discuss the potential for upstream diversion or rerouting of the source of cooling water (resulting from, for example, river cutoffs, ice jams, or subsidence) with respect to historical, topographical, and geologic evidence in the region. Present the history of flow diversions and realignments in the region. Discuss the potential for adversely affecting safety-related facilities or water supply, and describe avail able alternative safety-related cooling water sources in the event that diversions are possible.

2-20

Revision 3 November 1978 2.4.10 Flooding Protection Requirements Describe the static and dynamic consequences of all types of flood ing on each pertinent safety-related facility. Present the design bases required to ensure that safety-related facilities will be capable of surviving all design flood conditions, and reference appropriate discus sions -in other sections of the SAR where the design bases are implemented.

Describe various types of flood protection used and the emergency pro cedures to be implemented (where applicable).

2.4.11 Low Water Considerations 2.4.11.1 Low Flow in Streams. Estimate and provide the design basis for the probable minimum flow rate and level resulting from the most severe drought considered reasonably possible in the region, if such conditions could affect the ability of safety-related facilities, particularly the ultimate heat sink, to perform adequately. Include considerations of downstream dam failures (see Section 2.4.4). For non-safety-related water supplies, demonstrate that the supply will be adequate during a 100-year drought.

2.4.11.2 Low Water Resulting from Surges, Seicdhes, or Tsunami.

Determine the surge-, seiche-, or tsunami-caused low water level that could occur from probable maximum meteorological or geoseismic events, if such level could affect the ability of safety-related features to func tion adequately. Include a description of the probable maximum meteorolog ical event (its track, associated parameters, antecedent conditions) and the computed low water level, or a description of tsunami conditions appli cable. Also consider, where applicable, ice formation or ice jams causing low flow since such conditions may affect the safety-related cooling water source.

2.4.11.3 Historical Low Water. Discuss historical low water flows and levels and their probabilities (unadjusted for historical controls and adjusted for both historical and future controls and uses) only when statistical methods are used to extrapolate flows and/or levels to probable minimum conditions.

2.4.11.4 Future Controls. Provide the estimated flow rate, durations, and levels for probable minimum flow conditions considering future uses, if such conditions could affect the ability of safety-related facilities to function adequately. Substantiate any provisions for flow augmentation for plant use.

2.4.11.5 Plant Requirements. Present the required minimum safety related cooling water flow, 'the sump invert elevation and configuration, the minimum design operating level, pump submergence elevations (operating heads), and design bases for effluent submergence, mixing, and dispersion.

Discuss the capability of cooling water pumps to supply sufficient water during periods of low water resulting from the 100-year drought. Refer 2-21

Revision 3 November 1978 to Sections 9.2.1, 9.2.5, and 10.4.5 where applicable. Identify or refer to institutional restraints on water use.

2.4.11.6 Heat Sink Dependability Requirements. Identify all sources of normal and emergency shutdown water supply and related retaining and conveyance systems.

Identify design bases used to compare minimum flow and level estimates with plant requirements and describe any available low water safety factors (see Sections 2.4.4 and 2.4.11). Describe (or refer to Section 9.2.5) the design bases for operation and normal or accidental shutdown and cool down during (1) the most severe natural and site-related accident phenomena, (2) reasonable combinations of less severe phenomena, and (3) single failures of man-made structural comporents. In the PSAR, describe or refer to the criteria for protecting all structures related to the ultimate heat sink during the above events. In the FSAR, describe the design to implement the criteria. Identify the sources of water and related retain ing and conveyance systems that will be designed for each of the above bases or situations.

Describe the ability to provide sufficient warning of impending low flow or low water levels to allow switching to alternative sources where necessary. Heat dissipation capacity and water losses (such as drift, seepage, and evaporation) should be identified and conservatively estimated.

Indicate whether, and if so how, guidance given in Regulatory Guide 1.27, "Ultimate Heat Sink for Nuclear Power Plants," has been followed; if not followed, describe the specific alternative approaches used.

Identify or refer to descriptions of any other uses of water drawn from the ultimate heat sink, such as fire water or system charging requirements. If interdependent water supply systems are used, such as an excavated reservoir within a cooling lake or tandem reservoirs, describe the ability of the principal portion of the system to survive the failure of the secondary portion. Provide the bases for and describe the measures to be taken (dredging or other maintenance) to prevent loss of reservoir capacity as a result of sedimentation.

2.4.12 Dispersion, Dilution, and Travel Times of Accidental Releases of Liquid Effluents in Surface Waters Describe the ability of the surface water environment to disperse, dilute, or concentrate accidental liquid releases of radioactive effluents as related to existing or potential futurd water users. Discuss the bases used to determine dilution factors, dispersion coefficients, flow velocities, travel times, sorption and pathways of liquid contaminants. The locations and users of surface waters should be included in Section 2.4.1.2, and the release points should be identified in Section 11.2.3.

2-22

Revision 3 November 1978 2.4.13 Groundwater All groundwater data should be presented in this section, 2.5.4, or in both and should be appropriately cross-referenced. in Section information is placed in both sections, the information If the in the two sections should be consistent.

2.4.13.1 Description and Onsite Use. Describe the regional and local groundwater aquifers, formations, sources, and sinks. Describe the type of groundwater use, wells, pumps, storage facilities, and flow requirements of the plant. If groundwater is to be used as a safety related source of water, the design basis protection from natural and accident phenomena should be compared with Regulatory Guide 1.27 guide lines and an indication should be given as to whether, and if so how, the guidelines have been followed; if not followed, the specific alter native approaches used should be described. Bases and sources of data should be adequately described.

2.4.13.2 Sources. Describe present regional use and projected future use. Tabulate existing users (amounts, water levels tions, locations, and drawdown). and eleva Tabulate or illustrate the history of groundwater or piezometric level fluctuations beneath and in the vicinity of the site. Provide groundwater or piezometric contour maps of aquifers beneath and in the vicinity of the site to indicate flow directions and gradients; discuss the seasonal and long-term variations of these aquifers.

Indicate the range of values and the method of determination for vertical and horizontal permeability and total and effective porosity (specific yield) for each relevant geologic formation beneath the site. Discuss the potential for reversibility of groundwater flow resulting from local areas of pumping for both plant and nonplant use.

Describe the effects of present and projected groundwater use (wells) on gradients and ground water or piezometric levels beneath the site. Note any potential ground water recharge area such as lakes or outcrops within the influence of the plant.

2.4.13.3 Accident Effects. Provide a conservative analysis of a postulated accidental release of liquid radioactive material at the site.

Evaluate (where applicable) the dispersion, ion-exchange, capability of the groundwater environment with and dilution respect to present and projected users. Identify potential pathways of contamination to groundwater users and to springs, lakes, streams, nearby etc. Determine ground water and radionuclide (if necessary) travel time to the nearest down gradient groundwater user or surface body of water.

Include all methods of calculation, data sources, models, and parameters or coefficients used such as dispersion coefficients, dispersivity, distribution (sorption) coefficients, hydraulic gradients, and values of permeability, total and effective porosity, and bulk density along contaminant pathways.

2.4.13.4 Monitoring or Safeguard Requirements.

plans, procedures, safeguards, and monitoring programs Present and discuss to be used to protect present and projected groundwater users.

2-23

Revision 3 November 1978 2.4.13.5 Design Bases for Subsurface Hydrostatic Loading.

1. For plants not employing permanent dewatering systems, describe the design bases for groundwater-induced hydrostatic loadings on subsurface portions of safety-related structures, systems, and components. Discuss the development of these design bases. Where dewatering during construc tion is critical to the integrity of safety-related structures, describe the bases for subsurface hydrostatic loadings assumed during construction and the dewatering meLhods to be employed in achieving these loadinqs.

Where wells are proposed for safety-related purposes, discuss the hydrodynamic design bases for protection against seismically-induced pressure waves. These design bases should be consistent with the ground wiater conditions described in Sections 2.4.13.2 and 2.5.4.6.

2. For plants employing permanent dewatering systems:
a. Provide a description of the proposed dewatering system, including drawings showing the proposed locations of affected structures, components, and features of the system. Provide information related to the hydrologic design of all system components. Where the dewatering system is important to safety, provide a discussion of its expected func tional reliability. The discussion of the bases for reliability should include comparisons of proposed systems and components with the perform ance of existing and comparable systems and components for applications under site conditions similar to those proposed.
b. Provide estimates and their bases for soil and rock perme abilities, total porosity, effective porosity (specific yield), storage coefficient, and other related parameters used in the design of the dewatering system. If available, provide the results of monitoring pumping rates and flow patterns during dewatering for the construction excavation.
c. Provide analyses and their bases for estimates of ground water flow rates in the various parts of the permanent dewatering system, the area of influence of drawdown, and the shapes of phreatic surfaces to be expected during operation of the system.
d. Provide analyses, including their bases, to establish con servative estimates of the time available to mitigate the consequences of the system degradation that could cause groundwater levels to exceed design bases. Document the measures that will be taken to repair the system or to provide an alternative dewatering system that would become operational before the design basis grounawater level is exceeded.
e. Provide both the design basis and normal operation ground water levels for safety-related structures, systems, and components.

The design basis groundwater level is defined as the maximum groundwater level used in the design analysis for dynamic or static loading conditions (whichever is being considered) and may be in excess of the elevation 2-24

Revision 3 November 1978 for which the underdrain system is designed for normal operation.

This level should consider abnormal and rare events (such as an occurrence of the Safe Shutdown Earthquake (SSE), a failure of a circulating water system pipe, or a single failure within the system) that can cause failure or overloading of the permanent dewatering system.

f. Postulate a single failure of a critical active feature or component during any design basis event. Unless it can be documented that the potential consequences of the failure will not result in dose guidelines exceeding those in Regulatory Guides 1.26, "Quality Group Classifications and Standards for Water-, Steam-, and Radioactive-Waste Containing Components of Nuclear'Power Plants," and 1.29, "Seismic Design Classification," either (1) document by pertinent analyses that groundwater level recovery times are sufficient to allow other forms of dewatering to be implemented before the design basis groundwater level is exceeded, discuss the measures to be implemented and equipment needed, and identify the amount of time required to accomplish each measure or (2) design all system components for all severe phenomena and events.
g. Where appropriate, document the bases that ensure the abil ity of the system to withstand various natural and accidental phenomena such as earthquakes, tornadoes, surges, floods, and a single failure of a component feature of the system (such as a failure of any cooling water pipe penetrating, or in close proximity to, the outside walls of safety related buildings where the groundwater level is controlled by the system).

An analysis of the consequences of pipe ruptures on the proposed underdrain system should be provided and should include consideration of postulated breaks in the circulating system pipes at, in, or near the dewatering system building either independently of, or as a result of the SSE.

h. State the maximum groundwater level the plant structures can tolerate under various significant loading conditions in the absence of the underdrain system.
i. Provide a description of the proposed groundwater level monitoring programs for dewatering during plant construction and for permanent dewatering during plant operation. Provide (1) the general arrangement in plans and profile with approximate elevation of piezom eters and observation wells to be installed, (2) intended zone(s) of placement, (3) type(s) of piezometer (closed or open system),

(4) screens and filter gradation descriptions, (5) drawings showing typical installa tions showing limits of filter and seals, (6) observation schedules (initial and time intervals for subsequent readings), (7) plans for evalua tion of recorded data, and (8) plans for alarm devices to ensure sufficient time for initiation of corrective action.

j. Provide information regarding the outlet flow monitoring program. The information required includes (1) the general location and type of flow measurement device(s) and (2) the observation plan and alarm 2-25

Revision 3 November 1978 procedure to identify unanticipated high or low flow in the system and the condition of the effluent.

k. For OL reviews, but only if not previously reviewed by the staff, provide (1) substantiation of assumed design bases using infor mation gathered during dewatering for construction excavation and (2) all other details of the dewatering system design that implement design bases established during the CP review.
1. For OL reviews, provide a technical specification for periods when the dewatering system may be exposed to sources of water not considered in the design. An example of such a situation would be the excavation of surface seal material for repair of piping such that the underdrain would be exposed to direct surface runoff. In addition, where the permanent dewatering system is safety related, is not completely redundant, or is not designed for all design basis events, provide the bases for a technical specification with action levels, the remedial work required and the estimated time that it will take to accomplish the work, and the sources, types of equipment, and manpower required as well as the availability of the above under potentially adverse conditions.
m. Where wells are proposed for safety-related purposes, discuss the hydrodynamic design bases for protection against seismically induced pressure waves. These design bases should be consistent with the groundwater conditions described in Section 2.4.13.2 and 2.5.4.6.

2.4.14 Technical Specification and Emergency Operation Requirements Describe any emergency protective measures designed to minimize the impact of adverse hydrology-related events on safety-related facilities.

Describe the manner in which these requirements will be incorporated into appropriate technical specifications and emergency procedures. Discuss the need for any technical specifications for plant shutdown to minimize the consequences of an accident resulting from hydrologic phenomena such as floods or the degradation of the ultimate heat sink. In the event emergency procedures are to be used to meet safety requirements associated with hydrologic events, identify the event, present appropriate water levels and lead times available, indicate what type of action would be taken, and discuss the time required to implement each procedure.

2.5 Geology, Seismology, and Geotechnical Engineering This section of the SAR should provide information regarding the seismic and geologic characteristics of the site and the region surround ing the site. Appendix A, "Seismic and Geologic Siting Criteria for Nuclear Power Plants," to 10 CFR Part 100, "Reactor Site Criteria," gives the principal seismic and geologic considerations that guide the staff in its evaluation of the acceptability of sites and seismic design bases.

2-26

Revision 3 November 1978 This section should include, but not necessarily be limited information discussed below. to, the It should be preceded by a summary that contains a synopsis of Sections 2.5.1 through 2.5.6.

Include a brief description of the sites, the investigations performed, results of investigations, conclusions, and a statement as to who did the work.

2.5.1 Basic Geologic and Seismic Information Basic geologic and seismic information is required throughout following sections to provide a basis for evaluation. the In some cases, this information is germane to more than one section.

The information may be presented under this section, under the following sections,-or as appendices to this section, provided adequate cross-references are made in the appropriate sections.

Information obtained from published reports, maps, private cations, or other sources should be referenced. Information communi from surveys, geophysical investigations, borings, trenches, or other investigations should be adequately documented by descriptions of techniques, graphic logs, photographs, laboratory results, identification of principal inves tigators, and other data necessary to assess the adequacy of the information.

2.5.1.1 Regional Geology. Discuss all geologic, seismic, and man made hazards within the site region and relate them to the regional physiography, tectonic structures and tectonic provinces, geomorphology, stratigraphy, lithology, and geologic and structural history, and geochro nology. The above information should be discussed, documented by appro priate references, and illustrated by a regional physiographic map, surface and subsurface geologic maps, isopach maps, regional gravity and magnetic maps, stratigraphic sections, tectonic and structure maps, fault maps, a site topographic map, a map showing areas of mineral and hydrocarbon extraction, boring logs, aerial photographs, and any maps needed to illustrate such hazards as subsidence, cavernous or karst terrain, irregular weathering conditions, and landslide potential.

The relationship between the regional and the site physiography should be discussed. A regional physiographic map showing the site location should be included. Identify and describe tectonic structures such as folds, faults, basins, and domes underlying the region surrounding the site, and include a discussion of their geologic history.

A regional tectonic map showing the site location should be included and detailed discussions of the regional tectonic structures of significance site should be provided. to the The detailed analyses of faults to determine their capacity for generating ground motions at the site and to deter mine the potential for surface faulting should be included in Sections 2.5.2 and 2.5.3, respectively.

The lithologic, stratigraphic, and structural geologic conditions of the region surrounding the site should be described and related to 2-27

Revision 3 November 1978 its geologic history. Provide geologic profiles showing the relation ship of the regional and local geology to the site location. The geologic province within which the site is located and the relation to other geologic provinces should be indicated. Regional geologic maps indicating the site location and showing both surface and bedrock geology should also be included.

2.5.1.2 Site Geology. Material on site geology included in this section may be cross-referenced in Section 2.5.4. The site physiography and local land forms should be described and the relationship between the regional and site physiography should be discussed. A site topographic map showing the locations of the principal plant facilities should be included. Describe the configuration of the land forms and relate the history of geologic changes that have occurred. Areas that are significant to the site of actual or potential landsliding, surface or subsurface subsidence, uplift, or collapse resulting from natural features such as tectonic depression and cavernous or karst terrains should be evaluated.

The detailed lithologic and stratigraphic conditions of the site and the relationship to the regional stratigraphy should be described.

The thicknesses, physical characteristics, origin, and degree of consoli dation of each lithologic unit should also be described, including a local stratigraphic column. Furnish summary logs or borings and excavations such as trenches used in the geologic evaluation. Boring logs included in Section 2.5.4 may be referenced.

A detailed discussion of the structural geology in the vicinity of the site should be provided. Include in the discussion the relationship of site structure to regional tectonics, with particular attention to specific structural units of significance to the site such as folds, faults, synclines, anticlines, domes, and basins. Provide a large-scale structural geology map (1:24,000) of the site showing bedrock surface contours and including the locations of Seismic Category I structures.

A large-scale geologic map (1:24,000) of the region within 5 miles of the site that shows surface geology and that includes the locations of major structures of the nuclear power plant, including all Seismic Cate gory I structures, should also be furnished. Areas of bedrock outcrop from which geologic interpretation has been extrapolated should be distinguished from areas in which bedrock is not exposed at the surface.

When the interpretation differs substantially from the published geologic literature on the area, the differences should be noted and documentation for the new conclusions presented.

The geologic history of the site should be discussed and related to the regional geologic history.

Include an evaluation from an engineering-geology standpoint of the local geologic features that affect the plant structures. Geologic con ditions underlying all Seismic Category I structures, dams, dikes, and pipelines should be described in detail. The dynamic behavior of the 2-28

Revision 3 November 1978 site during prior earthquakes should be described.

Deformational zones such as shears, joints, fractures, and folds, or combinations of these features should be identified and evaluated relative to structural founda tions. Describe and evaluate zones of alteration or profiles, zones of structural *weakness, unrelieved irregular weathering residual stresses in bedrock, and all rocks or soils that might be unstable because of their mineralogy or unstable physical or chemical properties. The effects of man's activities in the area such as withdrawal or addition of subsurface fluids or mineral extraction at the site should be evaluated.

Site groundwater conditions should be described.

Information included in Section 2.4.13 may be referenced in this section.

2.5.2 Vibratory Ground Motion This section is directed toward establishing the seismic design basis for vibratory ground motion. The presentation should be aimed at (1) determining the Safe Shutdown Earthquake (SSE) and the Operating Basis Earthquake (OBE) for the site and (2) specifying motion corresponding to each of these events. the vibratory ground Determination of the SSE and the OBE should be based on the identification of tectonic provinces or active geologic structures with which earthquake activity in the region can be associated. The design vibratory ground motion for the OBE should then be determined by assessing SSE and the effects at the site of the SSE and OBE associated with the identified provinces or structures.

The presentation in the SAR should proceed from discussions of the regional seismicity, geologic structures, and tectonic activity to a deter mination of the relation between seismicity and geologic structures.

Earthquake-generating potential of tectonic provinces and any active struc tures should be identified. Finally, the ground motion that would result at the site from the maximum potential earthquakes associated with each tectonic province or geologic structure should be assessed considering any site amplification effects. The results should be used to establish the vibratory ground motion design spectrum.

Information should be presented to describe for vibratory ground motion (Safe Shutdown how the design basis Earthquake) was determined.

The following specific information and determinations included, as needed, to clearly establish the should also be design basis for vibratory ground motion. Information presented in other sections may be cross referenced and need not be repeated.

2.5.2.1 Seismicity. A complete list of all historically reported earthquakes that could have reasonably affected the region surrounding the site should be provided. The listing should include all earthquakes of MM Intensity greater than IV or magnitude greater than 3.0 that have been reported in all tectonic provinces, any part of which is within 200 miles of the site. This account should be augmented by a regional scale map showing all listed earthquake epicenters and, in areas of high 2-29

Revision 3 November 1978 seismicity, by a larger-scale map showing earthquake epicenters within 50 miles of the site. The following information describing each earth quake should be provided whenever it is available: epicenter coordinates, depth of focus, origin time, highest intensity, magnitude, seismic moment, source mechanism, source dimensions, source rise time, rupture velocity, total dislocation, fractional stress drop, any strong-motion recordings, and identification of references from which the specified information was obtained. In addition, any earthquake-induced geologic hazards (e.g.,

liquefaction, landsliding, landspreading, or lurching) that have been reported should be described completely, including the level of strong motion that induced failure and the properties of the materials involved.

2.5.2.2 Geologic Structures and Tectonic Activity. Identify the regional geologic structures and tectonic activity that are significant in determining regional earthquake potential. All tectonic provinces any part of which occurs within 200 miles of the site should be identified.

The identification should include a description of those characteristics of geologic structure, tectonic history, present and past stress regimes, and seismicity that distinguish the various tectonic provinces and parti cular areas within those provinces where historical earthquakes have occurred. Alternative models of regional tectonic activity from available literature sources should be discussed. The discussion in this section should be augmented by a regional-scale map showing the tectonic provinces, earthquake epicenters, the locations of geologic structures and other features that characterize the provinces, and the locations of any capable faults.

2.5.2.3 Correlation of Earthquake Activity with Geologic Structures or Tectonic Provinces. Provide a correlation between epicenters or regions of highest intensity of historically reported earthquakes and geologic structures or tectonic provinces. Whenever an earthquake epicenter or concentration of earthquake epicenters can be reasonably correlated with geologic structures, the rationale for the association should be developed.

This discussion should include identification of the methods used to locate the earthquake epicenters and an estimate of their accuracy and should provide a detailed account that compares and contrasts the geologic struc ture involved in the earthquake activity with other areas within the tectonic province. When an earthquake epicenter cannot be reasonably correlated with geologic structures, the epicenter should be discussed in relation to tectonic provinces. A subdivision of a tectonic province should be corroborated on the basis of evaluations that consider, but should not be limited to, detailed seismicity studies, tectonic flux measurements, contrasting structural fabric, differences in geologic history, and differences in stress regime.

2.5.2.4 Maximum Earthquake Potential. The largest earthquakes asso ciated with each geologic structure or tectonic province should be identi fied. Where the earthquakes are associated with a geologic structure, the largest earthquake that could occur on that structure should be evaluated based on considerations such as the nature of faulting, fault length, 2-30

Revision 3 November 1978 fault displacement, and earthquake history. Where the earthquakes are associated with a tectonic province, the largest historical earthquakes within the province should be identified and, whenever reasonable, the return period for the earthquakes should be determined.

Isoseismal maps should also be presented for the earthquakes.

Ground motion at the site should be determined assuming seismic energy transmission effects are constant over the region and assuming the largest earthquake associated with each geologic structure or with each tectonic province occurs at the point of closest approach of that structure or province to the site. The set of conditions describing the occurrence of the potential earthquake that would produce the largest vibratory ground motion at the site should be defined. If different potential earthquakes would produce the maximum ground motion in different frequency bands, the conditions describing all such earthquakes should be specified. The description of the potential earthquake occurrences should include the maximum intensity or magnitude and the distance from the assumed location of the potential earthquake to the site.

2.5.2.5 Seismic Wave Transmission Characteristics The following material properties should be determined of the Site.

for each stratum under the site: seismic compressional and shear velocities, bulk densities, soil properties and classification, shear modulus and its variation with strain level, and water table elevation and its variation.

The methods used to determine these properties should be described.

For each set of conditions describing the occurrence of the maximum potential earthquakes, determined in Section 2.5.2.4, the types of seismic waves producing the maximum ground motion and the significant frequencies at the site should be determined. For each set of conditions, an analysis should be performed to determine the effects of transmission in the site material for the identified seismic wave types in the significant frequency bands.

2.5.2.6 Safe Shutdown Earthquake. The acceleration surface, the effective frequency range, and the duration at the ground corresponding to each maximum potential earthquake should be determined.

earthquake has been associated with a geologic structure, Where the the acceleration should be determined using a relation between acceleration, magnitude, or fault length, earthquake history and other geologic information, and the distance from the fault. Where the earthquake has been associated with a tectonic province, the acceleration should be determined using appropriate relations between acceleration, intensity, epicentral inten sity, and distance. Available ground motion time histories from earth quakes of comparable magnitude, epicentral distance, and acceleration level should be presented. The spectral content from each maximum poten tial earthquake should be described based on consideration ground motion time histories and regional characteristics of the available of seismic wave transmission. The dominant frequency associated with the peak acceleration should be determined either from analysis of ground motion time histories or by inference from descriptions of earthquake phenomenology, reports, and regional characteristics of seismic wave damage transmission. Design 2-31

Revision 3 November 1978 response spectra corresponding to the SSE should be defined and their conservatism assessed by comparing them to the ground motion expected from the potential earthquakes.

2.5.2.7 Operating Basis Earthquake. The vibratory ground motion for the Operating Basis Earthquake should be described and the probabil ity of exceeding the OBE during the operating life of the plant should be determined.

2.5.3 Surface Faulting Information should be provided to describe whether or not there exists a potential for surface faulting at the site. The following specific information and determinations should also be included to the extent neces sary to clearly establish zones requiring detailed faulting investigation.

Information presented in Section 2.5.1 may be cross-referenced and need not be repeated.

2.5.3.1 Geologic Conditions of the Site. The lithologic, strati graphic, and structural geologic conditions of the site and the area surrounding the site, including its geologic history, should be described.

Site and regional geologic maps and profiles illustrating the surface and bedrock geology, structure geology, topography, and the relationship of the safety-related foundations of the nuclear power plant to these features should be included.

2.5.3.2 Evidence of Fault Offset. Determine the geologic evidence of fault offset at or near the around surface at or near the site. If faulting exists, it should be defined as to its attitudes, orientations, width of shear zone, amount and sense of movement, and age of movements.

Any topographic photo linears and Environmental Resources Technology Satellite linears prepared as part of this study should be discussed.

Site surface and subsurface investigations to determine the absence of faulting should be reported, including information on the detail and areal extent of the investigation.

2.5.3.3 Earthquakes Associated with Capable Faults. List all histor ically reported earthquakes that can be reasonably associated with faults, and part of which is within 5 miles of the site. A plot of earthquake epicenters superimposed on a map showing the local tectonic structures should be provided.

2.5.3.4 Investigation of Capable Faults. Identified faults, any part of which is within 5 miles of the site, should be investigated in sufficient detail and using geological and geophysical techniques of suffi cient sensitivity to demonstrate the age of most recent movement on each.

The type and extent of investigation varies from one geologic province to another and depends on site-specific conditions.

2.5.3.5 Correlation of Epicenters with Capable Faults. The structure and genetic relationship between site area faulting and regional tectonic 2-32

Revision 3 November 1978 framework should be discussed. In regions of active tectonism, any detailed geologic and geophysical investigations the structural relationships of site area conducted to demonstrate faults with regional faults known to be seismically active should be discussed.

2.5.3.6 Description of Capable Faults.

than 1,000 feet long, any part of which For capable faults more is within 5 miles of the site, determine for all offsets within the immediate of the fault; the relationship to regional site vicinity the length tectonic structures; the nature, amount, and geologic displacement along the fault; and the outer limits of the fault zone established by detailed faulting investigation.

2.5.3.7 Zone Requiring Detailed Faulting the zone requiring detailed faulting investigation Investigation. Determine as described in Appen dix A to 10 CFR Part 100.

2.5.3.8 Results of Faulting Investigation.

within a zone requiring detailed faulting Where the site is located results of investigations should be provided investigation, details and the are no geologic hazards that could affect to substantiate that there of the plant. The information may be in the safety-related facilities geologic maps, geophysical data, maps and the form of boring logs, detailed logs of trenches, remote sensing data, and seismic refraction and reflection data.

2.5.4 Stability of Subsurface Materials and Foundations Information should be presented that tions and engineering properties of both thoroughly defines the condi nuclear power plant foundations. soil and/or rock supporting The stability of the soils and rock under plant structures should be evaluated loading conditions (including an evaluationboth for static and dynamic materials to perform their support function of the ability of these or excessive subsidence and settlement without incurring unexpected due to their long-term consolida tion under load or to their response operating and safe shutdown earthquakesto natural phenomena). Both the should be used in the dynamic stability evaluation. An evaluation of features that may affect nuclear power site conditions and geologic foundations should be presented. plant structures or their Information presented in other sec tions should be cross-referenced rather than repeated.

2.5.4.1 Geologic Features. Describe geologic features, including the following:

1. Areas of actual or potential surface or subsurface subsidence, upl ift, or collapse and the causes of these conditions,
2. Previous loading history of the foundation history of deposition and erosion, groundwater materials, i.e.,

levels, and glacial or other preloading influences on the soil, 2-33

Revision 3 November 1978

3. Rock jointing pattern and distribution, depth of weathering, zones of alteration or irregular weathering, and zones of structural weak ness composed of crushed or disturbed materials such as slickensides, shears, joints, fractures, faults, folds, or a combination of these features. Especially note seams and lenses of weak materials such as clays and weathered shales,
4. Unrelieved residual stresses in bedrock, and
5. Rocks or soils that may be hazardous, or may become hazardous, to the plant because of their lack of consolidation or induration, varia bility, high water content, solubility, or undesirable response to natural or induced site conditions.

2.5.4.2 Properties of Subsurface Materials. Describe in detail the static and dynamic engineering properties of the materials underlying the site. The classification and engineering properties of soils and rocks should be determined by testing techniques defined by accepted standards such as ASTM and AASHO, or in manuals of practice issued by the Army Corps of Engineers and the Bureau of Reclamation. The determina tion of dynamic or special engineering properties should be by accepted state-of-the-art methods such as those described in professional geotech nical journals. Reported properties of foundation materials should be supported by field and laboratory test records. Furnish data to justify and demonstrate the selection of design parameters. These data should be sufficient to permit the staff to make an independent interpretation and evaluation of design parameters. Furnish summaries of the physical (static and dynamic), index, and chemical properties of materials. Infor mation provided should include grain-size distribution (graphic representa tion), consolidation data, mineralogy, natural moisture content, Atterberg limits, unit weights, shear strength, relative density, overconsolidation ratio, ion exchange capacity, sensitivity, swelling, shear modulus, damping, Poisson's ratio, bulk modulus, cyclic strength, and seismic wave velocities.

2.5.4.3 Exploration. Discuss the type, quantity, extent, and purpose of all explorations. Provide plot plans that graphically show the location of all site explorations such as boring, trenches, borrow pits, seismic lines, piezometers, wells, geologic profiles, and the limits of required excavations. The locations of the safety-related facilities should be superimposed on the plot plan. Also, furnish selective geologic sections and profiles that indicate the location of borings and other site explora tion features, groundwater elevations, and final foundation grades. The location of safety-related foundations should be superimposed on these sections and profiles.

Logs of all borings and test pits should be provided. Furnish logs and maps of exploratory trenches in the PSAR and geologic maps and photo graphs of the excavations for the facilities of the nuclear power plant in the FSAR.

2-34

Revision 3 November 1978 2.5.4.4 Geophysical Surveys. Results of compressional and shear wave velocity surveys performed to evaluate the occurrence and character istics of the foundation soils and rocks should be provided in tables and profiles. Discuss other geophysical methods used to define foundation conditions.

2.5.4.5 Excavations and Backfill. The following data concerning excavation, backfill, and earthwork at the site should be discussed:

1. The extent (horizontally and vertically) of all Seismic Cate gory I excavations, fills, and slopes. The locations and limits of excava tions, fills, and backfills should be shown on plot plans and on geologic sections and profiles.
2. The dewatering and excavation methods to be used. Evaluate how these will affect the quality and condition of foundation materials.

Discuss the need and proposed measures for foundation protection and treatment after excavation. Also discuss proposed quality control and quality assurance programs related to foundation excavation, and sub sequent protection and treatment. Discuss measures to monitor foundation rebound and heave.

3. The sources and quantities of backfill and borrow. Describe exploration and laboratory studies and the static and dynamic engineering properties of these materials in the same fashion as described in Sec tions 2.5.4.2 and 2.5.4.3. Provide the plans for field test fills and identify the material and placement specification proposed in the PSAR.

Include grain size bands, moisture control, and compaction requirements.

Results of test fills should be included in the FSAR.

2.5.4.6 Groundwater Conditions. The analysis of groundwater at the site should include the following points:

1. A discussion of groundwater conditions relative to the stability of the safety-related nuclear power plant facilities,
2. A discussion of design criteria for the control of groundwater levels or collection and control of seepage,
3. Requirements for dewatering during construction and a discus sion of how dewatering will be accomplished,
4. Description and interpretation of actual groundwater conditions experienced during construction (FSAR),
5. Records of field and laboratory permeability tests,
6. History of groundwater fluctuations, including those due to flooding, and projected variances in the groundwater levels during the life of the plant, 2-35

Revision 3 November 1978

7. Information related to the periodic monitoring of local wells and piezometers,
8. Direction of groundwater flow, gradients, and velocities.
9. Discussion of or reference to the groundwater monitoring program during the life of the plant to assess the potential for subsidence.

2.5.4.7 Response of Soil and Rock to Dynamic Loading. Furnish analyses of the responses of the soil and rock to dynamic and seismic loading condi tions. Discuss the testing performed and test results. Justify selected design values used for dynamic response analyses. Justify the methods of analyses used and indicate the results of analyses. Identify computer programs used and provide abstracts. Sol-structure interaction analyses should be described in this section or cross-referenced from Section 3.7.2.4. Buried pipelines and earthworks should also be included in this section.

2.5.4.8 Liquefaction Potential. If the foundation materials at the site adjacent to and under safety-related structures are saturated soils or soils that have a potential for becoming saturated, an appro priate state-of-the-art analysis of the potential for liquefaction occur ring at the site should be provided. The method of analysis should be determined on the basis of actual site conditions, the properties of the plant facilities, and the earthquake and seismic design requirement.

2.5.4.9 Earthquake Design Basis. A summary should be provided of the derivation of the OBE and SSE, including references to Sections 2.5.2.6 and 2.5.2.7. Justify the selection of earthquakes for liquefaction and seismic response analysis of earthworks.

2.5.4.10 Static Stability. The stability of all safety-related facilities should be analyzed for static loading conditions. Foundation rebound, settlement, differential settlement, and bearing capacity should be analyzed under the design loads of fills and plant facilities. A discussion and evaluation of lateral earth pressures and hydrostatic ground water loads acting on plant facilities should be included in this section.

Field and laboratory test results should be discussed. Design parameters used in stability analyses should be discussed and justified. Sufficient data and analyses should be provided so that the staff may make an inde pendent interpretation and evaluation. Results of stability analyses should be presented in the PSAR and confirmed with as-built data in the FSAR.

2.5.4.11 Design Criteria. Provide a brief discussion of the design criteria and methods of design used in the stability studies of all safety related facilities. Identify required and computed factors of safety, assumptions, and conservatisms in each analysis. Provide references.

Explain and verify computer analyses used.

2-36

Revision 3 November 1978 2.5.4.12 Techniques to Improve Subsurface Conditions. Discuss and provide specifications for measures to improve foundations such as grouting, vibroflotation, dental work, rock bolting, and anchors. A verification program designed to permit a thorough evaluation of the effectiveness of foundation improvement measures should also be discussed.

2.5.4.13 Subsurface Instrumentation. Instrumentation for the surveil lance of foundations for safety-related structures should be presented in this section. Indicate the type, location, and purpose of each instru ment and provide significant details of installation methods. Provide a schedule for installing and reading all proposed instruments and for the interpretation of the data obtained (PSAR). Results and analyses should be presented in the FSAR.

2.5.4.14 Construction Notes. Significant construction problems should be discussed. Discuss changes in design details or construction procedures that became necessary during construction (FSAR).

2.5.5 Stability of Slopes Information should be presented concerning the static and dynamic stability of all soil or rock slopes, both natural and man-made, the failure of which could adversely affect the safety of the nuclear power plant. This information should include a thorough evaluation of site conditions, geologic features, the engineering properties of the materials comprising the slope and its foundation. The stability of slopes should be evaluated using classic and contemporary methods of analyses. The evaluation should include, whenever possible, comparative field performance of similar slopes. All information related to defining site conditions, geologic features, the engineering properties of materials, and design criteria should be of the same scope as that provided under Section 2.5.4.

Cross-references may be used where appropriate. The stability evaluation of man-made slopes should include summary data and a discussion of con struction procedures, record testing, and instrumentation monitoring to ensure high quality earthwork.

2.5.5.1 Slope Characteristics. Describe and illustrate slopes and related site features in detail. Provide a plan showing the limits of cuts, fills, or natural undisturbed slopes and show their relation and orientation relative to plant facilities. Benches, retaining walls, bulk heads, jetties, and slope protection should be clearly identified. Pro vide detailed cross sections and profiles of all slopes and their founda tions. Discuss exploration programs and local geologic features. Describe the groundwater and seepage conditions that exist and those assumed for analysis purposes. The type, quantity, extent, and purpose of exploration should be described and the location of borings, test pits, and trenches should be shown on all drawings.

Discuss sampling methods used. Identify material types and the static and dynamic engineering properties of the soil and rock materials comprising the slopes and their foundations. Identify the presence of any weak zones, 2-37

Revision 3 November 1978 such as seams or lenses of clay, mylonites, or potentially liquefiabie materials. Discuss and present results of the field and laboratory testing programs and justify selected design strengths.

2.5.5.2 Design Criteria and Analyses. The design criteria for the stability and design of all safety-related and Seismic Category I slopes should be described. Valid static and dynamic analyses should be presented to demonstrate the reliable performance of these slopes throughout the lifetime of the plant. Describe the methods used for static and dynamic analyses and indicate reasons for selecting them. Indicate assumptions and design cases analyzed with computed factors of safety. Present the results of stability analyses in tables identifying design cases analyzed, strength assumptions for materials, and type of failure surface. Assumed failure surfaces should be graphically shown on cross sections and appro priately identified on both the tables and sections. Explain and justify computer analyses; provide an abstract of computer programs used.

2.5.5.3 Logs of Borings. Present the logs of borings, test pits and trenches that were completed for the evaluation of slopes, founda tions, and borrow materials to be used for slopes. Logs should indicate elevations, depths, soil and rock classification information, groundwater levels, exploration and sampling method, recovery, RQD, and blow counts from standard penetration tests. Discuss drilling and sampling procedures and indicate where samples were taken on the logs.

2.5.5.4 Compacted Fill. In this section, provide information related to material, placement, and compaction specifications for fill (soil and/or rock) required to construct slopes such as canal or channel slopes, break waters, and jetties. Planned construction procedures and control of earth works should be thoroughly described. Information necessary is similar to that outlined in Section 2.5.4.5. Quality control techniques and docu mentation during and following construction should be discussed and refer enced to quality assurance sections of the SAR.

2.5.6 Embankments and Dams This section should include information related to the investigation, engineering design, proposed construction, and performance of all earth, rock, or earth and rock fill embankments used for plant flood protection or for impounding cooling water required for the operation of the nuclear power plant. The format given below may be used for both Seismic Cate gory I and safety-related embankments, the failure of which could threaten the public health and safety. The following information should be included: (1) the purpose and location of the embankment and appurtenant structures (spillways, outlet works, etc.), (2) specific geologic features of the site, (3) engineering properties of the bedrock and foundation and embankment soils, (4) design assumptions, data, analyses, and discus sions on foundation treatment and embankment design, (5) any special con struction requirements, and (6) proposed instrumentation and performance monitoring systems and programs.

2-38

Revision 3 November 1978 Embankment design studies should include an evaluation of the perfor mance of the embankment on the basis of instrumentation monitored during construction and during the initial reservoir filling.

Information related to the evaluation of embankment performance should be provided in the FSAR.

Any significant event such as an earthquake or flood that occurs during construction or during the initial reservoir filling should be documented in the FSAR together with all information related to the per formance of the embankment and observed behavior within its foundation and abutments during the event.

Photographs showing general views of damsite (before, during, and after construction), foundation stripping and treatment (FSAR), construc tion equipment and activities (FSAR), instrumentation devices and instal lation work (FSAR), and special items should be provided.

Embankment zone placement quantities, a comparison of embankment zone design placement requirements with a summary of field control test data results (FSAR), and a comparison of embankment shear strength design assumptions with a summary of record control shear strength test results (FSAR) should be tabulated.

The following drawings should be provided:

1. General plan with vicinity map,
2. Large-scale embankment plan with boring and instrumentation locations shown,
3. Geologic profile embankment axis, control structure axis, and spillway axis,
4. Embankment cross sections with instrumentation shown,
5. Embankment details,
6. Embankment foundation excavation plan,
7. Embankment and foundation design shear strength test data graphic summaries with selected design values shown,
8. Embankment slope stability cross sections with design assumptions, critical failure planes, and factors of safety shown,
9. Embankment slope stability reevaluation, if necessary (FSAR),
10. Embankment seepage control design with assumptions, section, and selected design shown, 2-39

Revision 3 November 1978

11. Relief well profile with the quantities of flow measured at various depths in the relief wells shown (FSAR),
12. Plot of pool elevation versus total relief well discharge quantities (FSAR),
13. Distribution of field control test locations. For each zone tested, plot a profile parallel to the axis with field control test data plotted at the locations sampled.
14. Instrumentation installation details,
15. Interpretations of instrumentation data.
a. Settlement profile or contour plan,
b. Alignment profiles of measured movements,
c. Embankment section with embankment and foundation pore pressure contours. May be necessary to plot contour diagrams at various dates.
d. Embankment sections showing phreatic surface through foundation,
e. Profile in relief well line showing well and piezometer locations and measured and design heads.

2.5.6.1 General. The purpose of the embankment, including natural and severe conditions under which it is to function, should be stated.

Identify the reasons for selecting the proposed location within the site.

General design features, including planned water control structures, should be discussed.

2.5.6.2 Exploration. Discuss exploration and the local geologic features of the proposed embankment site, and relate these features to the plant site in general. The type, quantity, extent, and purpose of the underground exploration program should be provided. Exploration and sampling methods used should be discussed.

2.5.6.3 Foundation and Abutment Treatment. Discuss the need for, and justify the selection of the types of foundation and abutment treat ment such as grouting, cutoff trenches, and dental treatment. Evaluate and report the effectiveness of the completed foundation and abutment treatment programs in the FSAR. The areal extent and depth limits of treatment should be shown on plot plans. Discuss the construction proce dures to be employed, and estimate the construction quantities involved.

2.5.6.4 Embankment. Present the general embankment features, including height, slopes, zoning, material properties (including borrow and foundation), sources of materials, and location and usage of materials 2-40

Revision 3 November 1978 in the embankment. Slope protection design, material properties, and placement methods should be presented. Discuss consolidation testing results, embankment settlement, and overbuild.

Compaction test results on laboratory test specimens and on test fills in the field should be discussed, as well as field control to be specified for the foundation preparation and protection and also for place ment of fill, including material requirements, placement conditions, moisture control, and compaction. Also, discuss protection required of fill surfaces and stockpiles during construction, compaction equipment to be used, and any special fill placement activities required. The FSAR should document compliance with specifications related to foundation preparation and also with material specifications and fill placement requirements. Significant or unusual construction activities and problems should also be documented in the FSAR.

2.5.6.5 Slope Stability. For both the foundation and embankment materials, discuss the shear testing performed, shear test data results, selected design strengths, reasons for selecting the method of slope stabil ity analysis used, and the results of design cases analyzed for the embank ment constructed.

2.5.6.6 Seepage Control. Exploration and testing performed to deter mine assumptions used for seepage analyses should be discussed. Present design assumptions, results of design analyses, and reasons for the seepage control design selected. Special construction requirements as well as activities related to the final construction of seepage control features should be discussed in the FSAR.

2.5.6.7 Diversion and Closure. Programs needed for the care and diversion of water during construction should be discussed, including the need for cofferdams, techniques used to dewater excavations, and any expected problems or difficulties. Discuss the proposed diversion and closure construction sequence. Relate actual construction experiences in the FSAR.

2.5.6.8 Performance Monitoring. The overall instrumentation plan and the purpose of each set of instruments should be discussed, as well as the different kinds of instruments, special instruments, and significant details for installation of instruments. Provide the program for periodic monitoring of instrumentation and periodic inspection of the embankment and appurtenant structures.

2.5.6.9 Construction Notes (FSAR). Significant embankment construc tion history should be provided. Discuss changes in design details or construction procedures that became necessary during construction.

2.5.6.10 Operational Notes. Embankment performance history since completion of construction should be provided in the FSAR.

2-41

Revision 3 November 1978

3. DESIGN OF STRUCTURES, COMPONENTS, EQUIPMENT, AND SYSTEMS This chapter of the SAR should identify, describe, and discuss the principal architectural and engineering design of those structures, com ponents, equipment, and systems important to safety.

3.1 Conformance with NRC General Design Criteria This section should briefly discuss the extent to which the design criteria for the plant structures, systems, and components important to safety meet the NRC "General Design Criteria for Nuclear Power Plants" specified in Appendix A to 10 CFR Part 50. For each criterion, a summary should be provided to show how the principal design features meet the criterion. Any exceptions to criteria should be identified and the justification for each exception should be discussed. In the discussion of each criterion, the sections of the SAR where more detailed informa tion is presented to demonstrate compliance with or exceptions to the criterion should be referenced.

3.2 Classification of Structures, Components, and Systems 3.2.1 Seismic Classification This section should identify those structures, systems, and compo nents important to safety that are designed to withstand the effects of a Safe Shutdown Earthquake (see Section 2.5) and remain functional.

These plant features are those necessary to ensure:

1. The integrity of the reactor coolant pressure boundary,
2. The capability to shut down the reactor and maintain it in a safe condition, or
3. The capability to prevent or mitigate the consequences of accidents that could result in potential offsite exposures comparable to the guideline exposures of 10 CFR Part 100.

Guidance for determining the seismic classification of structures, systems, and components is provided in Regulatory Guide 1.29, "Seismic Design Classification." These plant features, including their founda tions and supports, designed to remain functional in the event of a Safe Shutdown Earthquake are designated as Seismic Category I. This section should indicate if the recommendations of Regulatory Guide 1.29 are being followed and provide a list of all Seismic Category I items. If only portions of structures and systems are Sei-smic Category I, they should be listed and, where necessary for clarity, the boundaries of the Seismic Category I portions should be shown on piping and instrumentation diagrams.

Where there are differences with Regulatory Guide 1.29, they should be identified and a discussion of the proposed classification should be included.

3-1

Revision 3 November 1978 All structures, systems, and components or portions thereof, which are intended to be designed for an Operating Basis Earthquake (OBE),

should be listed or otherwise clearly identified.

3.2.2 System Quality Group Classifications This section should identify those fluid systems or portions of fluid systems important to safety and the industry codes and standards applicable to each pressure-retaining component in the systems.

Section 50.55a of 10 CFR Part 50 specifies quality requirements the reactor coolant pressure boundary, and Regulatory Guide 1.26, for "Quality Group Classifications and Standards for Water-, Steam-, and Radioactive Waste-Containing Components of Nuclear Power Plants," describes a quality group classification system and relates it to industry codes for water and steam-containing fluid systems. The section should indicate the to which the recommendations of Regulatory Guide 1.26 are followed. extent Where there are differences, they should be identified and a discussion included justifying each proposed quality group classification in terms of the reliance placed on these systems:

1. To prevent or mitigate the consequences of accidents and mal functions originating within the reactor coolant pressure boundary,
2. To permit shutdown of the reactor and maintenance in the safe shutdown condition, and
3. To contain radioactive material.

In such cases, the proposed design features and measures that would be applied to attain a quality level equivalent to the level of the above classifications should be specified, including the quality assurance pro grams that would be implemented. The section should contain group classi fication boundaries of each safety-related system. The classifications should be noted at valves or other appropriate locations in each fluid system where the respective classification changes in terms of the NRC group classification letters, for example, from A to B, B to C, C to D as well as other combinations, or alternately, in terms of corresponding classification notations that can be referenced with those classification groups in Regulatory Guide 1.26.

3.3 Wind and Tornado Loadings 3.3.1 Wind Loadings This section should discuss the design wind load on Seismic Cate gory I structures and, in particular, should include the information identified below.

3-2

Revision 3 November 1978 3.3.1.1 Design Wind Velocity. The design wind velocity and its recurrence interval, the vertical velocity profiles, and the applicable gust factors, as described in Section 2.3, should be presented here for information.

3.3.1.2 Determination of Applied Forces. The procedures used to transform the wind velocity into an effective pressure applied to exposed surfaces of structures should be described. Wind force distribution and shape coefficients being applied should be included.

3.3.2 Tornado Loadings This section should discuss the design basis tornado loadings on structures that must be designed for tornadoes. It should include the information identified below.

3.3.2.1 Applicable Design Parameters. The design parameters appli cable to the design basis tornado should be presented here for information.

The translational velocity, the tangential velocity, the pressure differ ential and its associated time interval, and the spectrum and pertinent characteristics of tornado-generated missiles should be included. Material covered in Sections 2.3 and 3.5.1 may be incorporated by reference.

3.3.2.2 Determination of Forces on Structures. The procedures used to transform the tornado loadings into effective loads on structures should be described. The following information should be included:

1. The procedures used for transforming the tornado wind into an effective pressure on exposed surfaces of structures. Shape coefficients and pressure distribution on flat surfaces and round structures such as containments should also be included.
2. If venting of a structure is used, the procedures employed for transforming the tornado-generated differential pressure into an effec tive reduced pressure.
3. The procedures used for transforming the tornado-generated missile loadings, which are considered impactive dynamic loads, into effective loads. Material included in Section 3.5.3 may be referenced in this section.
4. The various combinations of the above individual loadings that will produce the most adverse total tornado effect on structures.

3.3.2.3 Effect of Failure of Structures or Components Not Designed for Tornado Loads. This section should present information to show that the failure of any structure or component not designed for tornado loads will not affect the ability of other structures to pe'rform their intended safety functions.

3-3

Revision 3 November 1978 3.4 Water Level (Flood) Design This section should discuss the flood and/or the highest ground water level design for Seismic Category I structures and components including the following information.

3.4.1 Flood Protection 3.4.1.1 Flood Protection Measures for Seismic Category I Structures.

The flood protection measures for Seismic Category I structures, systems, and components should be described and include the following:

1. Identify the safety-related systems and components that should be protected against floods (see Regulatory Guide 1.59, "Design Basis Floods for Nuclear Power Plants," and Regulatory Guide 1.102, "Flood Pro tection for Nuclear Power Plants"), and show the relationship to design flood levels and conditions defined in Section 2.4 (include station drawings).*
2. Describe the structures that house safety-related equipment, including an identification of exterior or access openings and penetra tions that are below the design flood levels.*
3. If flood protection is required, discuss the means of providing flood protection (e.g., pumping systems, stoplogs, watertight doors, and drainage systems) for equipment that may be vulnerable because of its location and the protection provided to cope with potential inleakage from such phenomena as cracks in structure walls, leaking water stops, and effects of wind wave action (including spray). Identify on plant layout drawings individual compartments or cubicles that house safety related equipment and that act as positive barriers against possible flooding.
4. Describe the procedures required (see regulatory position 2 of Regulatory Guide 1.59 and regulatory position 2 of Regulatory Guide 1.102) and implementation times available to bring the reactor to a cold shutdown for the flood conditions identified in Section 2.4.14. These procedures and times should be compared with the procedures and times required to implement flood protection requirements identified in Section 2.4.14.
5. Identify those safety-related systems or components, if any, that are capable of normal function while completely or partially flooded.

3.4.1.2 Permanent Dewatering System. This section should describe any permanent dewatering system provided to protect safety-related structures, systems, or components from the effects of ground water.

The following information should be included:

  • The details discussed herein should be consistent with Sections 2.4.1.1,.

2.4.2.2, and 2.4.10.

3-4

Revision 3 November 1978 I. A summary description of the dewatering system. All major sub systems such as the active discharge subsystem and the passive collection and drainage subsystem should be described.

2. The design bases for the functional performance requirements for each subsystem, along with the bases for selecting the system operating parameters.
3. A safety evauation demonstrating how the system satisfies the design bases, the system's capability to withstand design basis events, and its capability to perform its safety function assuming a single active failure with the ioss of offsite power. Protection against single failure should be evaluated in terms of piping arrangement and layout, selection of valve types and location, redundancy of various system components, redundancy of power supplies, redundant sources of actuation signals, and redundancy of instrumentation. The safety evaluation should also demonstrate that the dewatering system is protected from the effects of pipe breaks and missiles.
4. The testing and inspection to be performed to verify that the system capability and reliability are met and the instrumentation and control necessary for proper operation of the system.
5. The information provided in this section of the SAR should be consistent with the information provided in Sections 2.4 and 2.5, which should be referenced as appropriate.

3.4.2 Analytical and Test Procedures Describe the methods and procedures by which the static and dynamic effects of the design basis flood conditions or design basis ground water conditions identified in Section 2.4 are applied to safety-related struc tures, systems, and components. Summarize for each safety-related struc ture, system, and component that may be so affected, the design basis static and dynamic loadings, including consideration of hydrostatic load ings, equivalent hydrostatic dynamically induced loadings, coincident wind loadings, and the static and dynamic effects on foundation properties (Section 2.5).

If physical models are used to predict prototype performance of hydraulic structures and systems, information on such model testing should be included herein (see Regulatory Guide 1.125, "Physical Models for Design and Operation of Hydraulic Structures and Systems for Nuclear Power Plants").

3.5 Missile Protection 3.5.1 Missile Selection and Description 3.5.1.1 Internally Generated Missiles (Outside Containment). The design bases for the structures, systems (or portions of systems), and 3-5

Revision 3 November 1978 components that are to be protected against damage from internally gen erated missiles outside containment should be provided. Missiles asso ciated with overspeed failures of rotating components and with failures of high-pressure system components should be considered. The design bases should consider the design features provided for either continued safe operation or shutdown during all operating conditions, operational tran sients, and postulated accident conditions.

A tabulation showing the safety-related structures, systems, and components outside containment required for safe shutdown of the reactor under all conditions of plant operation should be provided and, as a minimum, should include the following:

1. Locations of the structures, systems, or components.
2. Applicable seismic category and quality group classifications (may be referenced from Section 3.2).
3. Sections in the SAR where descriptions of the items may be found.
4. Reference drawings or piping and instrumentation diagrams where applicable (may be referenced from other sections of the SAR).
5. Identification of missiles to be protected against, their source, and the bases for selection.
6. Missile protection provided.

The ability of the structures, systems, and components to withstand the effects of selected internally generated missiles should be evaluated.

3.5.1.2 Internally Generated Missiles (Inside Containment). All plant structures, systems, and components inside containment whose failure could lead to offsite radiological consequences or that are required for safe plant shutdown to a cold condition assuming an additional single failure should be identified. The separation and independence of those structures, systems, and components protected by redundancy rather than physical barriers against very low probability missile strikes should be clearly demonstrated. The structures, systems, and components protected by physical barriers should be identified. Missiles associated with over speed failures of rotating components, with primary and secondary failures of high-pressure system components, and those due to gravitational effects should be identified.

A tabulation showing the safety-related structures, systems, and components inside containment required for safe shutdown of the reactor under all conditions of the plant operation, including operational tran sients and postulated accident conditions, should be provided and, as a minimum, should include the following:

3-6

Revision 3 November 1978

1. Location of the structure, system, or component.
2. Identification of missiles to be protected against, their source, and the bases for selection.
3. Missile protection provided.

The ability of the structures, systems, and components to withstand the effects of selected internally generated missiles should be evaluated.

3.5.1.3 Turbine Missiles. Information should be provided on the following topics:

1. Turbine Placement and Orientation. Plant layout drawings should indicate clearly turbine placement and orientation. Plan and elevation views should have appropriate indication of the + 25-degree low-trajectory turbine missile ejection zone with respect to the low-pressure turbine wheels for each turbine unit "within reach" of the plant structures.

Target areas should be indicated clearly on plan and elevation views with respect to all systems identified in Section 3.5.2.

2. Missile Identification and Characteristics. Description of postulated turbine missiles should include missile properties such as mass, shape, cross-sectional areas, ranged turbine exit speeds, and range of turbine exit angles. Mathematical models used in the analysis of such items as missile selection, turbine casing penetration, and missile trajectories should be included. A description of the analytical models used to determine the characteristics of the selected missiles, including any assumptions, should be included.
3. Target Description. Structures and equipment identified in Section 3.5.2, if within the low-trajectory turbine missile strike zones described in item 1, should be identified in dimensioned plan and eleva tion drawings. Safety-related equipment occupying small portions of a room or a structure should be indicated individually (e.g., batteries, switchgear cabinets, isolation valves). Separation distances and/or separation barriers should be indicated with respect to redundant equipment.
4. Probability Analysis. An analysis of strike probabilities for low-trajectory turbine missiles with respect to plant systems identified in Section 3.5.2 should be provided. If the analytical methods are described by referencing other documents, a brief summary outline of the method, including sample calculations, should be provided. All assump tions used in the analysis should be identified, and the bases supporting them should be discussed.

Numerical results of the analysis should be presented in tabular form, listing the individual strike probabilities for each vital area with respect to design and destructive overspeed turbine missiles. The 3-7

Revision 3 November 1978 data should be resolved into strike probability contributions from each turbine unit (including nonnuclear units) on or in the vicinity of the site.

In the case of destructive overspeed, an analysis should be presented justifying the assumption of only one disc failure. Turbine overspeed acceleration characteristics, statistical distribution of destructive overspeed failure speeds, and related information should be considered in the evaluation of the probability of second wheel failure during the interval of physical disassembly caused by the first failure.

5. Turbine Overspeed Protection. A description of the turbine overspeed protection system in terms of redundancy, diversity, component reliability, and testing procedures should be provided.
6. Turbine Valve Testing. A discussion of the turbine valve test ing environment should cover such items as test frequency, power level, pressure difference across the steam valve(s), and other parameters pertinent to overspeed protection.
7. Turbine Characteristics. Turbine data pertinent to the evalua tion of its failure characteristics should include a description of its overall configuration, major components (e.g., steam valves, reheaters, etc.), rotor materials and their properties, steam environment (e.g.,

pressure, temperature, quality, chemistry), and other appropriate pro perties. Turbine operational and transient characteristics should be described, including turbine startup and trip environments, as well as its overspeed parameters (e.g., time to 180% overspeed from loss of 100%

power load).

3.5.1.4 Missiles Generated by Natural Phenomena. Identify all missiles generated as a result of natural phenomena (e.g., tornadoes and floods) in the vicinity of the plant. For selected missiles, specify the origin, dimensions, mass, energy, velocity, and any other parameters required to determine missile penetration.

The structures and/or barriers used for missile protection should be tabulated. The table should contain the following information:

1. Systems or components that are protected by the structure/

barrier.

2. Concrete thickness and strength for walls, roofs, and floors used for missile protection and the curing time on which the strength is based.

3.5.1.5 Missiles Generated by Events Near the Site. Identify all missile sources resulting from accidental explosions in the vicinity of the site. The presence of and operations at nearby industrial, trans portation, and military facilities should be considered. The following missile sources should be considered with respect to the site:

3-8

Revision 3 November 1978

1. Train explosions (including rocket effects),
2. Truck explosions, 3., Ship or barge explosions,
4. Industrial facilities,
5. Pipeline explosions, and
6. Military facilities.

Missiles from each type of source should be characterized in terms of dimensions, mass, energy, velocity, trajectory, and energy density.

(Aircraft crashes should be analyzed in Section 3.5.1.5.)

3.5.1.6 Aircraft Hazards. An aircraft hazard analysis should be provided for each of the following:

1. Federal airways or airport approaches passing within 2 miles of the nuclear facility.
2. All airports located within 5 miles of the site.
3. Airports-with projected operations greater than 500d 2 movements 2

per year located within 10 miles of the site and greater than 1000d out side 10 miles, where d is the distance in miles from the site.

4. Military installations or any airspace usage that might present a hazard to the site. For some uses such as practice bombing ranges, it may be necessary to evaluate uses as far as 20 miles from the site.

The analyses should provide an estimate of the probability of an aircraft accident with consequences worse than those of the design basis accident. Hazards to the plant may be divided into accidents resulting in structural damage and accidents involving fire. These analyses should be based on the projected traffic for the facilities, the aircraft accident statistics provided in Section 2.2, and the critical areas described in Section 3.5.2.

All the parameters used in these analyses should be explicitly justified. Wherever a range of values is obtained for a given parameter, it should be plainly indicated and the most conservative value used.

Justification for all assumptibns made should also be clearly stated.

Conclusions on the aircraft, if any, that are to be selected as design basis impact events should be stated and the rationale for the choice clearly set forth. The whole aircraft or parts thereof should be characterized in terms of dimensions, mass (including Variations along the length of the aircraft), energy, velocity, trajectory, and energy 3-9

Revision 3 November 1978 density. Resultant loading curves on structures should be presented in Section 3.5.3.

3.5.2 Structures, Systems, and Components To Be Protected from Externally Generated Missiles All plant structures, systems, and components whose failure could lead to offsite radiological consequences or that are required to shut down the reactor and maintain it in a safe condition assuming an addi tional single failure should be identified. It should be demonstrated that such safety-related structures, systems, and components are ade quately protected against very low probability missile strikes by physical barriers or protective structures. Missiles that should be considered are identified in Section 3.5.1. Protective structures and barriers should be identified on plant arrangement and elevation drawings and in the system and component classification tables.

3.5.3 Barrier Design Procedures The procedures by which each structure or barrier will be designed to resist the missile hazards previously described should be presented; the following should be included:

1. Procedures utilized (a) to predict local damage in the impact area, including estimation of the depth of penetration, (b) to estimate barrier thickness required to prevent perforation, and (c) in the case of concrete barriers to predict the potential for generating secondary missiles by spalling and scabbing effects, and
2. Procedures utilized for the prediction of the overall response of the barrier and portions thereof to missile impact. This includes assumptions on acceptable ductility ratios and estimates of forces, moments, and shears induced in the barrier by the impact force of the missile.

3.6 Protection Against Dynamic Effects Associated with the Postulated Rupture of Piping This section should describe design bases (PSAR) and design measures (FSAR) to ensure that the containment vessel and all essential equipment inside or outside the containment, including components of the reactor coolant pressure boundary, have been adequately protected against the effects of blowdown jet and reactive forces and pipe whip resulting from postulated rupture of piping located either inside or outside of contain ment. The following specific information should be included.

3.6.1 Postulated Piping Failures in Fluid Systems Outside of Containment 3.6.1.1 Design Bases (PSAR). Systems or components important to plant safety or shutdown that are located proximate to high- or moderate energy piping systems and that are susceptible to the consequences of failures of these piping systems should be identified. The identification 3-10

Revision 3 November 1978 should be related to predetermined piping failure locations in accordance with Section 3.6.2. Typical piping runs with failure points ý..dicated on drawings should be provided. The identification of affected components should also include limiting acceptable conditions, i.e., those conditions for which operation of the component will not be precluded. The design approach taken to protect the systems and components identified above should be indicated.

3.6.1.2 Description (FSAR). Provide a listing of high- and moderate energy lines. In the case where physical arrangement of the piping systems provides the required protection, a description of the layout of all systems should be submitted. In the case where the high- or moderate-energy piping systems have been enclosed in structures or compartments to protect nearby essential systems or components, descriptions and pressure rise analyses should be provided to verify the structural adequacy of such enclosures.

An analysis of the potential effects of secondary missiles on the compo nents should also be provided. If failure of or leakage from high- or moderate-energy lines affect nearby safety features or results in the transport of a steam environment to other rooms or compartments in the facility, an analysis should be provided of the effects of the environ ment on the operation of the affected equipment or systems. In the case of the control room, analyses should be provided to verify that habitabil ity will be ensured.

3.6.1.3 Safety Evaluation (FSAR). The results of failure mode and effects analyses should be provided to verify that the consequences of failures of high- and moderate-energy lines do not affect the ability to safely shut the plant down. The analyses should include consideration of single active component failures occurring in required systems concur rently with the postulated event.

3.6.2 Determination of Break Locations and Dynamic Effects Associated with the Postulated Rupture of Piping This section should describe the design bases for locating postu lated breaks and cracks in piping inside and outside of containment, the procedures used to define the jet thrust reaction at the break or crack location, and the jet impingement loading on adjacent safety-related structures, equipment, systems, and components.

3.6.2.1 Criteria Used to Define Break and Crack Location and Configuration (PSAR). The criteria should be provided for the location and configuration of postulated breaks and cracks in those high- and moderate-energy piping systems for which separation or enclosure cannot be achieved. In the case of containment penetration piping, in addition to the material requested above, the details of the containment penetra tion identifying all process pipe welds, access for inservice inspection of welds, points of fixity, and points of geometric discontinuity should be provided.

3-11

Revision 3 November 1978 3.6.2.2 Analytical Methods to Define Forcing Functions and Response Models (PSAR). The methods used to define the forcing functions to be used for the pipe whip dynamic analyses should be described. The descrip tion should include direction, thrust coefficients, rise time, magnitude, duration, and initial conditions that adequately represent the jet stream dynamics and the system pressure differences. Pipe restraint rebound effects should be included if appropriate.

Diagrams of typical mathematical models used for the dynamic response analysis should be provided. All dynamic amplification factors to be used should be presented and justified.

3.6.2.3 Dynamic Analysis Methods to Verify Integrity and Operability (PSAR). The method of analysis that will be used to evaluate the jet impingement effects and loading effects applicable to components and systems resulting from postulated pipe breaks and cracks should be provided. In addition, provide the analytical methods used to verify the integrity of mechanical components under pipe rupture loads. In the case of piping systems where pipe whip restraints are included, the loading combinations and the design criteria for the restraints should be provided along with a description typical of the restraint configuration to be used.

3.6.2.4 Guard Pipe Assembly Design Criteria (PSAR). The details of protective assemblies or guard pipes (a guard pipe is a device to limit pressurization of the space between dual barriers of certain containments to acceptable levels) to be used for piping penetrations of containment areas should be provided. Discuss whether such protective assemblies serve to provide an extension of containment, prevent overpressurization, or both.

The use of moment-limiting restraints at the extremities or within the protective assembly should be indicated. The following should be provided:

1. The criteria for the design of the process pipe within the protec tive assembly. Include type of material (seamless or welded), allowable stress level, and loading combinations.
2. The design criteria to be used for flued heads and bellows expan sion joints.
3. The design criteria applicable to the guard pipe that is used with the assembly.
4. A description of the method of providing access and the loca tion of such access openings to permit periodic examinations of all process pipe welds within the protective assembly as required by the plant inservice inspection program (refer to Section 5.2.4 for ASME Class 1 systems. and Section 6.6 for ASME Class 2 and 3 systems).

3-12

Revision 3 November 1978 3.6.2.5 Material To Be Submitted for the Operating License Review (FSAR). A summary of the dynamic analyses applicable to high- and moderate energy piping systems and associated supports that determine the loadings resulting from postulated pipe breaks and cracks should be presented.

The following should be included:

1. The implementation of criteria for defining pipe break and crack locations and configurations. Provide the locations and number of design basis breaks-and cracks on which the dynamic analyses are based. Also provide the postulated rupture orientation, such as the circumferential and/or longitudinal break(s), for each postulated design basis break location.
2. The implementation of criteria dealing with special features such as augmented inservice inspection program or the use of special protec tive devices such as pipe whip restraints, including diagrams showing their final configurations, locations, and orientations in relation to break locations in each piping system.
3. The acceptability of the analysis results, including the jet thrust and impingement functions and the pipe whip dynamic effects.
4. The design adequacy of systems, components, and component supports to ensure that their design-intended functions will not be impaired to an unacceptable level of integrity or operability as a result of pipe whip loading or jet impingement loading.
5. The implementation of the criteria relating to protective assembly design, including the final design, location of restraints, stress levels for various plant operating conditions for the process pipe, flued heads, bellows expansion joints, and guard pipes. Present the final design and arrangement of the access openings that are used to examine all process pipe welds within such protective assemblies to meet the requirements of the plant inservice inspection program.

3.7 Seismic Design 3.7.1 Seismic Input 3.7.1.1 Design Response Spectra. Design response spectra (Operat ing Basis Earthquake (OBE) and Safe Shutdown Earthquake (SSE)) should be provided to permit comparison with Regulatory Guide 1.60, "Design Response Spectra for Seismic Design of Nuclear Power Plants," which provides accept able design response spectra. The basis for any response spectra that differ from the spectra given in Regulatory Guide 1.60 should be included.

The response spectra applied at the finished grade in the free field or at the various foundation locations of Seismic Category I structures should be provided.

3-13

Revision 3 November 1978 3.7.1.2 Design Time History. For the time history analyses, the response spectra derived from the actual or synthetic earthquake time motion records should be provided. A comparison of the response spectra obtained in the free field at the finished grade level and the founda tion level (obtained from an appropriate time history at the base of the soil/structure interaction system) with the design response spectra should be submitted for each of the damping values to be used in the design of structures, systems, and components. Alternatively, if the design response spectra for the OBE and SSE are applied at the foundation levels of Seismic Category I structures in the free field, a comparison of the free-field response spectra at the foundation level (derived from an actual or synthetic time history) with the design response spectra should be provided for each of the damping values to be used in the design. The period intervals at which the spectra values were calculated should be identified.

3.7.1.3 Critical Damping Values. The specific percentage of crit ical damping values used for Seismic Category I structures, systems, and components and soil should be provided for both the OBE and SSE (e.g.,

damping values for the type of construction or fabrication such as pre stressed concrete and welded pipe) to permit comparison with Regulatory Guide 1.61, "Damping Values for Seismic Design of Nuclear Power Plants,"

which provides acceptable damping values. The basis for any proposed damping values that differ from those given in Regulatory Guide 1.61 should be included.

3.7.1.4 Supporting Media for Seismic Category I Structures. A descrip tion of the supporting media for each Seismic Category I structure should be provided. Include in this description foundation embedment depth, depth of soil over bedrock, soil layering characteristics, width of the structural foundation, total structural height, and soil properties such as shear wave velocity, shear modulus, and density. This information is needed to permit evaluation of the suitability of using either a finite element or lumped spring approach for soil/structure interaction analysis.

3.7.2 Seismic System Analysis This section should discuss the seismic system analyses applicable to Seismic Category I structures, systems, and components. The specific information identified in the following sections should be included.

3.7.2.1 Seismic Analysis Methods. The applicable methods of seismic analysis (e.g., modal analysis response spectra, modal analysis time history, equivalent static load) should be identified and described. Descriptions (sketches) of typical mathematical models used to determine the response should be provided. Indicate how the dynamic system analysis method includes in the model consideration of foundation torsion, rocking, and translation. The method chosen for selection of significant modes and adequate number of masses or degrees of freedom should be specified.

The manner in which consideration is given in the seismic dynamic analysis to maximum relative displacement among supports should be indicated. In addition, other significant effects that are accounted for in the dynamic 3-14

Revision 3 November 1978 seismic analysis (e.g., hydrodynamic effects and nonlinear response) should be indicated. If tests or empirical methods are used in lieu of analysis, the testing procedure, load levels, and acceptance bases should also be provided.

3.7.2.2 Natural Frequencies and Response Loads (FSAR).

For the operating license review, significant natural frequencies and response loads determined by seismic system analyses should be provided for major Seismic Category I structures. In addition, the response spectra at critical major Seismic Category I elevations and points of support should be specified.

3.7.2.3 Procedure Used for Modeling. The criteria used for modeling in the seismic system analyses should and procedures be provided.

Include the criteria and bases used to determine whether a component or structure should be analyzed as part of a system analysis or independently as a subsystem.

3.7.2.4 Soil/Structure Interaction. As applicable, the methods of soil/structure interaction analysis used in the seismic system analysis and their bases should be provided. The following information should be included: (1) the extent of embedment, (2) the depth of soil over and (3) the layering of the soil stratum. If the finite rock, element approach is used, the criteria for determining the location of the bottom boundary and side boundary should be specified. The procedure by which strain dependent soil properties (e.g., damping and shear modulus) are incorpo rated in the analysis should also be specified. The material given in Section 3.7.1.4 may be referenced in this section.

If lumped spring methods are used, the parameters used in the analysis should be discussed. Describe the procedures by which strain-dependent soil properties, layering, and variation of soil properties are incorporated into the analysis. The suitability of a lumped spring method used for the particular site conditions should also be discussed.

Any other methods used for soil/structure interaction analysis or the basis for not using soil/structure interaction analysis should be provided.

The procedures used to consider effects of adjacent structural response in soil/structure interaction structures on analysis should be provided.

3.7.2.5 Development of Floor Response Spectra. The procedures for developing floor response spectra considering the three components of earthquake motion should be described. If a modal response spectrum method of analysis is used to develop floor response spectra, the basis for its conservatism and equivalence to a time history method should be provided.

3.7.2.6 Three Components of Earthquake Motion. Indicate the extent tc which the procedures for considering the three components of earthquake 3-15

Revision 3 November 1978 motion in determining the seismic response of structures, systems, and components follow the recommendations of Regulatory Guide 1.92, "Combining Modal Responses and Spatial Components in Seismic Response Analysis."

3.7.2.7 Combination of Modal Responses. When a response spectra method is used, a description of the procedure for combining modal responses (shears, moments, stresses, deflections, and accelerations) should be provided. Indicate the extent to which the recommendations of Regulatory Guide 1.92 are followed.

3.7.2.8 Interaction of Non-Category I Structures with Seismic Cate gory I Structures. Provide the design criteria used to account for the seismic motion of non-Category I structures or portions thereof in the seismic design of Seismic Category I structures or portions thereof. In addition, describe the design criteria that will be applied to ensure protection of Seismic Category I structures from the structural failure of non-Category I structures due to seismic effects.

3.7.2.9 Effects of Parameter Variations on Floor Response Spectra.

The procedures that will be used to consider the effects of expected varia tions of structural properties, dampings, soil properties, and soil/structure interaction on floor response spectra (e.g., peak width and period coor dinates) and time histories should be described.

3.7.2.10 Use of Constant Vertical Static Factors. Where applicable, identify and justify the application of constant static factors as vertical response loads for the seismic design of Seismic Category I structures, systems, and components in lieu of a vertical seismic-system dynamic analysis method.

3.7.2.11 Method Used to Account for Torsional Effects. The method used to consider the torsional effects in the seismic analysis of the Seismic Category I structures should be described. Where applicable, discuss and justify the use of static factors or any other approximate method in lieu of a combined vertical, horizontal, and torsional system dynamic analysis to account for torsional accelerations in the seismic design of Seismic Category I structures.

3.7.2.12 Comparison of Responses'SFSARQ. For the operating license review where both modal response and time history methods are applied, the responses obtained from both methods at selected points in major Seismic Category I structures should be provided, together with a compar ative discussion of the responses.

3.7.2.13 Methods for Seismic Analysis of Dams. A comprehensive description of the analytical methods and procedures that will be used for the seismic system analysis of Seismic Category I dams should be pro vided. The assumptions made, the boundary conditions used, and the proce dures by which strain-dependent soil properties are incorporated in the analysis should be provided.

3-16

Revision 3 November 1978 3.7.2.14 Determination of Seismic Category I Structure Overturning Moments. A description of the dynamic methods and procedures used to determine Seismic Category I structure overturning moments should be provided.

3.7.2.15 Analysis Procedure for Damping. The analysis used to account for the damping in different elements of the procedure model of a coupled system should be described.

3.7.3 Seismic Subsystem Analysis This section should discuss the seismic subsystem analyses appli cable to Seismic Category I structures, subsystems, and components.

specific information identified in the following sections should The be included.

3.7.3.1 Seismic Analysis Methods. Information should be provided as requested in Section 3.7.2.1, but as applied to the Seismic Category I subsystems.

3.7.3.2 Determination of Number of Earthquake Cycles. Describe criteria or procedures that are used to determine the number quake cycles during one seismic event. The maximum number of of earth cycles for which applicable Seismic Category I structures, subsystems, and components are designed should be specified.

3.7.3.3 Procedure Used for Modeling. The criteria and procedures used for modeling for the seismic subsystem analysis should be provided.

3.7.3.4 Basis for Selection of Frequencies. Where applicable, discuss the procedures and criteria used to separate the fundamental frequencies of components and equipment from the forcing frequencies of the support structures.

3.7.3.5 Use of Equivalent Static Load Method of Analysis. The for the use of the equivalent static load method of analysis and basis the proce dures used for determining the equivalent static loads should be provided.

3.7.3.6 Three Components of Earthquake Motion. Information be provided as requested in Section 3.7.2.6, but as applied to the should Seismic Category I subsystems.

3.7.3.7 Combination of Modal Responses. Information should vided as requested in Section 3.7.2.7, but as applied to the Seismicbe pro Cate gory I subsystems.

3.7.3.8 Analytical Procedures for Piping. The analytical dures applicable to seismic analysis piping should be described. proce Include the methods used to consider differential piping support movements different support points located within a structure and between at structures.

3-17

Revision 3 November 1978 3.7.3.9 Multiply Supported Equipment Components with Distinct Inputs.

The criteria and procedures for seismic analysis of equipment and compo nents supported at different elevations within a building and between buildings with distinct inputs should be described.

3.7.3.10 Use of Constant Vertical Static Factors. Information should be provided as requested in Section 3.7.2.10, but as applied to the Seismic Category I subsystems.

3.7.3.11 Torsional Effects of Eccentric Masses. The criteria and procedures that will be employed to account for the torsional effects of valves and other eccentric masses (e.g., valve operators) in the seismic subsystem analyses should be provided.

3.7.3.12 Buried Seismic Category I Piping Systems and Tunnels.

For buried Seismic Category I piping and tunnels, describe the seismic criteria and methods for considering the compliance of soil media, the settlement due to the earthquake, and the differential movement at support points, penetrations, and entry points into other structures provided with anchors.

3.7.3.13 Interaction of Other Piping with Seismic Category I Piping.

The analysis procedures used to account for the seismic motion of non Category I piping systems in the seismic design of Seismic Category I piping should be described.

3.7.3.14 Seismic Analyses for Reactor Internals. The seismic sub system analyses that will be used in establishing seismic design adequacy of the reactor internals, including fuel elements, control rod assemblies, and control rod drive mechanisms, should be described. The following information should be included:

1. Typical diagrams of dynamic mathematical modeling of the reactor internal structures to be used in the analysis,
2. Damping values and their justification,
3. A description of the methods and procedures that will be used to compute seismic responses,
4. A summary of the results of the dynamic seismic analysis for the operating license review.

3.7.3.15 Analysis Procedure for Damping. Information should be provided as requested in Section 3.7.2.15, but as applied to the Seismic Category I subsystems.

3-18

Revision 3 November 1978 3.7.4 Seismic Instrumentation 3.7.4.1 Comparison with Regulatory Guide 1.12.

The proposed seismic instrumentation should be discussed and compared with the seismic instru mentation program recommended in Regulatory Guide 1.12, "Instrumentation for Earthquakes." The bases for elements of the proposed program that differ from Regulatory Guide 1.12 should be included.

3.7.4.2 Location and Description of Instrumentation.

mentation such as triaxial peak accelerographs, Seismic instru triaxial time history accelerographs, and triaxial response spectrum recorders that will be installed in selected Seismic Category I structures and on selected Seismic Category I components should be described. The bases for selection of these structures and components and the location of instrumentation, as well as the extent to which this instrumentation will be employed to verify the seismic analyses following a seismic event, should be specified.

3.7.4.3 Control Room Operator Notification. The provisions that will be used to inform the control room operator of the value of the peak acceleration level and the input response spectra values shortly after occurrence of an earthquake should be described.

The bases for establish ing predetermined values for activating the readout of the seismic instru ment to the control room operator should be included.

3.7.4.4 Comparison of Measured and Predicted Responses.

the criteria and procedures that will Provide be used to cQmpare measured responses of Seismic Category I structures and selected components in the event of an earthquake with the results of the seismic system and subsystem analyses.

3.8 Design of Category I Structures 3.8.1 Concrete Containment This section should provide the following information on concrete containments and on concrete portions of steel/concrete containments:

1. The physical description.
2. The applicable design codes, standards, and specifications.
3. The loading criteria, including loads and load combinations.
4. The design and analysis procedures.
5. The structural acceptance criteria.
6. The materials, quality control programs, and special construction techniques.

3-19

Revision 3 November 1978

7. The testing and inservice inspection programs.

3.8.1.1 Description of the Containment. A physical description of the concrete containment or concrete portions of steel/concrete contain ments should be provided and supplemented with plan and section views sufficient to define the primary structural aspects and elements relied upon to perform the containment function. The geometry of the concrete containment or concrete portions of steel/concrete containments, including plan views at various elevations and sections in at least two orthogonal directions should be provided. The arrangement of the containment and the relationship and interaction of the shell with its surrounding struc tures and with its interior compartments and floors should be provided to establish the effect that these structures could have upon the design boundary conditions and expected structural behavior of the containment when subjected to design loads.

General descriptive information should be provided for the following:

1. The base foundation slab, including the main reinforcement, the floor liner plate and its anchorage and stiffening system, and the methods by which the interior structures are anchored through the liner plate and into the slab, if applicable.
2. The cylindrical wall, including the main reinforcement and pre stressing tendons, if any; the wall liner plate and its anchorage and stiffening system; the major penetrations and the.reinforcement surround ing them, including the equipment and personnel hatches and major pipe penetrations; major structural attachments to the wall which penetrate the liner plate, such as beam seats, pipe restraints, and crane brackets; and external supports, if any, attached to the wall to support external structures such as enclosure buildings.
3. The dome and the ring girder, if any, including the main rein forcement and prestressing tendons; the liner plate and its anchorage and stiffening system; and any major attachments to the liner plate made from the inside.
4. Steel components of concrete containments that resist pressure and are not backed by structural concrete should be discussed in Section 3.8.2.

3.8.1.2 Applicable Codes, Standards, and Specifications. Informa tion pertaining to design codes, standards, specifications, regulations, general design criteria, regulatory guides, and other industry standards that are used in the design, fabrication, construction, testing, and inservice inspection of the containment should be provided. The specific edition, date, or addenda of each document should be identified.

3.8.1.3 Loads and Load Combinations. The loads and load combinations that are utilized in the design of the containment should be discussed, with emphasis on the extent of compliance with Article CC-3000 of the 3-20

Revision 3 November 1978 ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code,Section III, Division 2, "Code for Concrete Reactor Vessels and Containments," particularly with respect to the following:

1. Those loads encountered during preoperational testing.
2. Those loads encountered during normal plant startup, and shutdown, including dead loads, live loads, thermal operation, loads due to operating temperature, hydrostatic loads such as those present in pressure-suppression containments utilizing water, and localized transient pressure loads induced by actuation of safety relief valves in BWRs.
3. Those loads that would be sustained in the event of mental conditions, including those that would be induced severe environ by the design wind and the Operating Basis Earthquake.
4. Those loads that would be sustained during extreme environmental conditions, including those that would be induced by the Design Basis Tornado and the Safe Shutdown Earthquake.
5. Those loads that would be sustained during abnormal plant condi tions, including the design basis loss-of-coolant accident (LOCA). Loads generated by other postulated accidents involving various high-energy pipe ruptures should also be discussed. Loads on the containment induced by such accidents should include associated temperature effects and pressure and localized loads such as jet impingement and associated missile impact. Also, external pressure loads generated by events inside or outside the containment should be discussed.
6. If applicable, those loads that would be encountered after abnormal plant conditions, including flooding of the containment subsequent to a loss-of-coolant accident for the purpose of fuel recovery.

The various combinations of the above loads that should be discussed include testing loads, normal operating loads, normal operating loads with severe environmental loads, normal operating loads with extreme environmental loads, normal operating loads with abnormal loads, normal operating loads with severe environmental and abnormal loads, normal operating loads with extreme environmental and abnormal loads, and post-LOCA flooding loads with severe environmental loads, if applicable.

The loads and load combinations described above are generally appli cable to most containments. Other site-related or plant-related design loads may also be applicable. Such loads include those induced by floods, potential aircraft crashes, explosive hazards in proximity to the site, and missiles generated from activities of nearby military installations or from plant-related accidents such as turbine failures.

As appropriate, these loads and load combinations should be discussed.

3.8.1.4 Design and Analysis Procedures. The design and analysis procedures utilized for the containment should be described, with emphasis 3-21

Revision 3 November 1978 on the extent of compliance with Article CC-3000 of the ASME Code, Sec tion III, Division 2. The assumptions made on the boundary conditions should be described. The treatment of loads, including those that may be nonaxisymmetric, localized, or transient, should be provided. The manner in which creep, shrinkage, and cracking of the concrete are addressed in the analysis and design should be described. Computer pro grams utilized should be referenced to permit identification with avail able published programs. Proprietary computer programs should be described in sufficient detail to establish the applicability of the pro grams and the measures taken to validate the programs with solutions derived from other acceptable programs or with solutions of classical problems. The treatment of the effects of tangential (membrane) shears should be discussed. Information on the evaluation of the effects of expected variation in assumptions and material properties on the analysis results should be provided. The method of analyzing large thickened penetration regions and their effect on the containment behavior should be described. The analysis and design procedures for the liner plate and its anchorage system should be described.

3.8.1.5 Structural Acceptance Criteria. The acceptance criteria relating stresses, strains, gross deformations, and other parameters that identify quantitatively the margins of safety should be specified, with emphasis on the extent of compliance with Article CC-3000 of the ASME Code,Section III, Division 2. The information provided should address the containment as an entire structure, and it should also address the margins of safety related to the major important local areas of the con tainment, including openings, hatch penetrations, anchorage zones, and other areas important to the safety function. The criteria addressing the various loading combinations should be presented in terms of allowable limits for at least the following major parameters:

1. Compressive stresses in concrete, including membrane, membrane plus bending, and localized stresses.
2. Shear stresses in concrete.
3. Tensile stresses in reinforcement.
4. Tensile stresses in prestressing tendons.
5. Tensile or compressive stress/strain limits in the liner plate, including membrane and membrane plus bending.
6. Force/displacement limits in the liner plate anchors, including those induced by strains in the adjacent concrete.

3.8.1.6 Materials, Quality Control, and Special Construction Tech niques. The materials that are used in the construction of the containment should be identified, with emphasis on the extent of compliance with Article CC-2000 of the ASME Code,Section III, Division 2. A summary of the 3-22

Rpvi*inn R Revision q November 1978 engineering properties of the materials should be presented. Among the major materials of construction that should be indicated are the following:

1. The concrete ingredients,
2. The reinforcing bars and splices,
3. The prestressing system,
4. The liner plate.,
5. The liner plate anchors and associated hardware,
6. The structural steel used for embedments, such as beam seats and crane brackets, and
7. The corrosion-retarding compounds used for the prestressing tendons.

The quality control program that is proposed for the fabrication and construction of the containment should be described with emphasis on the extent of compliance with Articles CC-4000 and CC-5000 of the ASME Code,Section III, Division 2. The description should show the extent to which the quality control program covers the examination of materials, including tests to determine the physical properties of concrete, reinforc ing steel, mechanical splices, the liner plate and its anchors, and the prestressing system, if any; placement of concrete; and erection tolerances of the liner plate, reinforcement, and prestressing system.

Special, new, or unique construction techniques, if proposed, should be described, and the such as slip forming, effects that these techniques may have on the structural integrity of the completed containment should be discussed.

The detailed program for the use of grouted tendons for the contain ment structure, if proposed, should be completely described in the PSAR and should indicate the extent to which the recommendations of Regulatory Guide 1.107, "Qualifications for Cement Grouting in Containment Structures," are followed. for Prestressing Tendons At the time of submittal of the FSAR, or earlier if desirable, information on the following subjects should be included:

1. Deviations in the materials and methods from those proposed in the PSAR.
2. Grout properties from tests on the grout.
3. Test results demonstrating the suitability and splices, effective grouting of curved of the sheathing and vertical tendons, and accept able grout under all bearing plate configurations.

3-23

Revision 3 November 1978 3.8.1.7 Testing and Inservice Inspection Requirements. The testing and inservice inspection program for the containment should be described with emphasis on the extent of compliance with Articles CC-6000 and CC-9000 of the ASME Code,Section III, Division 2, and the extent to which the recommendations of Regulatory Guides 1.18, "Structural Acceptance Test for Concrete Primary Reactor Containments;" 1.35, "Inservice Inspec tion of Ungrouted Tendons in Prestressed Concrete Containment Structures;"

and 1.90, "Inservice Inspection of Prestressed Concrete Containment Struc tures with Grouted Tendons," are followed. Discussion of the initial structural integrity testing, as well as those tests related to the inservice inspection programs and requirements, should be provided. Infor mation pertaining to the incorporation of inservice inspection programs into the Technical Specifications should be provided. The objectives of the tests, as well as the acceptance criteria for the results, should be defined. If new or previously untried design approaches are used, the extent of additional testing and inservice inspection should be discussed.

3.8.2 Steel Containment This section should provide information similar to that requested in Section 3.8.1, but for steel containments and for Class MC (see ASME Code,Section III, Subsection NE) vessels, parts, or appurtenances of steel or concrete containments. In particular, the information described below should be provided.

3.8.2.1 Description of the Containment. A physical description of the steel containment and other Class MC components should be provided and supplemented with plan and section views sufficient to define the primary structural aspects and elements relied upon to perform the con tainment or other Class MC component function.

The geometry of the containment or component, including plan views at various elevations and sections in at least two orthogonal directions, should be provided. The arrangement of the containment shell, particu larly the relationship and interaction of the shell with its surrounding shield building and with its interior compartments and floors, should be provided to establish the effect that these structures could have upon the design boundary conditions and expected behavior of the shell when subjected to the design loads.

General information related to cylindrical containment shells should include the following:

1. The foundation of the steel containment.
a. If the bottom of the steel containment is continuous through an inverted dome, the method by which this inverted dome and its supports are anchored to the concrete foundation should be described. The founda tion, however, should be described in Section 3.8.5.

3-24

Revision 3 November 1978

b. If the bottom of the steel containment is not continuous, and where a concrete base slab covered with a liner plate is used for a foundation, the method of anchorage of the steel shell cylindrical walls in the concrete base slab, particularly the connection between the floor liner plate and the steel shell, should be described. The concrete foundation, however, should be described in Section 3.8.1.
2. The cylindrical portion of the shell, including major structural attachments, such as beam seats, pipe restraints, crane brackets, and shell stiffeners, if any, in the hoop and vertical directions.
3. The dome of the steel shell, including any reinforcement at the dome/wall junction, penetrations or attachments on the inside such as supports for containment spray piping, and any stiffening of the dome.
4. Major penetrations of steel or concrete containments, or por tions thereof, in particular, portions of the penetrations that are intended to resist pressure but are not backed by concrete, including sleeved and unsleeved piping penetrations, mechanical systems penetra tions such as fuel transfer tubes, electrical penetrations, and access openings such as the equipment hatch and personnel locks.

Similar information should be provided for containments that are not of the cylindrical type.

3.8.2.2 Applicable Codes, Standards, and Specifications. This sec tion should provide information similar to that requested in Section 3.8.1.2 for concrete containment but as applicable to steel containments or other Class MC components.

3.8.2.3 Loads and Load Combinations. The loads used in the design of the steel containment or other Class MC components should be specified with emphasis on the extent of compliance with Article NE-3000 of the ASME Code,Section III, Division 1, and the extent to which the recommenda tions of Regulatory Guide 1.57, "Design Limits and Loading Combinations for Metal Primary Reactor Containment System Components," are followed.

The items listed below should be included.

1. Those loads encountered during preoperational testing.
2. Those loads encountered during normal plant startup, operation, and shutdown, including dead loads, live loads, thermal loads due to operating temperature, hydrostatic loads such as those present in pressure suppression containments utilizing water, and localized transient pressure loads such as those induced by actuation of safety relief valves in BWRs.
3. Those loads that would be sustained in the event of severe environ mental conditions, including those that would be induced by the design wind (if the containment is not protected by a shield building) and the Operating Basis Earthquake.

3-25

Revision 3 November 1978

4. Those loads that would be sustained in the event of extreme environ mental conditions, including those that would be induced by the Design Basis Tornado (if the containment is not protected by a shield building) and the Safe Shutdown Earthquake.
5. Those loads that would be sustained in the event of abnormal plant conditions, including the design basis loss-of-coolant accident.

Loads generated by other postulated accidents involving various high energy pipe ruptures should also be discussed. Loads induced on the con tainment by such accidents should include associated temperature effects, pressures, and possible localized impact loads such as jet impingement and associated missile impact. Also, external pressure loads generated by events inside or outside the containment should be discussed.

6. If applicable, those loads that would be encountered, after abnormal plant conditions, including flooding of the containment sub sequent to a postulated loss-of-coolant accident for the purpose of fuel recovery.

The various combinations of the above loads that should be discussed include the following: testing loads, normal operating loads, normal operating loads with severe environmental loads, normal operating loads with severe environmental loads and abnormal loads, normal operating loads with extreme environmental loads and abnormal loads, and post-LOCA flooding loads with severe environmental loads, if applicable.

Unless the steel containment is protected by a shield building, other site-related or plant-related design loads may also be applicable, as explained in Section 3.8.1.3, and should be addressed accordingly.

3.8.2.4 Design and Analysis Procedures. The procedures that will be used in the design and analysis of the steel containment should be described, with emphasis on the extent of compliance with Subsection NE of the ASME Code,Section III, Division 1. In particular, the following subjects should be discussed: (1) the manner in which local buckling effects are treated, (2) the expected behavior under loads, including loads that may be nonaxisymmetric and localized, and (3) the computer programs utilized. These programs should be referenced to permit identi fication with available published programs. Proprietary computer programs should be described in sufficient detail to establish the applicability of the programs and the measures taken to validate the programs with solutions derived from other acceptable programs or with solutions of classical problems.

3.8.2.5 Structural Acceptance Criteria. The acceptance criteria related to allowable stresses and other response characteristics that identify quantitatively the structural behavior of the containment should be specified with emphasis on the extent of compliance with Subsection NE of the ASME Code,Section III, Division 1, and the extent to which the recommendations of Regulatory Guide 1.57 are followed. The criteria 3-26

Revision 3 November 1978 addressing the various loading combinations specified should be presented in terms of allowable limits for at least the following major parameters:

1. Primary stresses, including general membrane, local membrane, and bending plus local membrane stresses.
2. Primary and secondary stresses.
3. Peak stresses.
4. Buckling criteria.

3.8.2.6 Materials, Quality Control, and Special Construction Tech niques. The materials that are to be used in the construction of the steel containment should be identified with emphasis on the extent of compliance with Article NE-2000 of Subsection NE of the ASME Code, Sec tion III, Division 1. Among the major materials that should be identi fied are the following:

1. Steel plates used as shell components.
2. Structural steel shapes used for stiffeners, beam seats, and crane brackets. Corrosion protection procedures should be described.

The quality control program that is proposed for the fabrication and construction of the containment should be described with emphasis on the extent of compliance with Article NE-5000 of the ASME Code,Section III, Division 1, including the following:

1. Nondestructive examination of the materials, including tests to determine their physical properties.
2. Welding procedures.
3. Erection tolerances.

Special construction techniques, if proposed, should be described, and potential effects on the structural integrity of the completed con tainment should be discussed.

3.8.2.7 Testing and Inservice Inspection Requirements. The testing and inservice inspection programs for the containment should be described with emphasis on the extent of compliance with Article NE-6000 of Sub section NE of the ASME Code, Section HI, Division 1. A discussion of the proposed initial structural testing, including the objectives of the test and the acceptance criteria for the results, should be provided.

If new or previously untried design approaches are used, the extent of additional testing and inservice inspection should be discussed. The structural integrity testing criteria for components of the containment such as personnel and equipment locks should be provided. Test program 3-27

Revision 3 November 1978 criteria for any other components that are relied upon for containment integrity should be submitted. Programs for inservice inspection in areas subject to corrosion should be provided.

3.8.3 Concrete and Steel Internal Structures of Steel or Concrete Con tai nments This section should provide information similar to that requested in Section 3.8.1, but for internal structures of the containment. In particular, the information described below should be provided.

3.8.3.1 Description of the Internal Structures. Descriptive informa tion, including plan and section views of the various internal structures, should be provided to define the primary structural aspects and elements relied upon to perform the safety-related functions of these structures.

General arrangement diagrams and principal features of major internal structures should be provided. Among the major structures that should be described are:

1. For PWR dry containments:
a. Reactor support system.
b. Steam generator support system.
c. Reactor coolant pump support system.
d. Primary shield wall and reactor cavity.
e. Secondary shield walls.
f. Other major interior structures, as appropriate, and including the pressurizer supports, the refueling pool walls, the operating floor, intermediate floors, and the polar crane supporting elements.
2. For PWR ice-condenser containments:
a. All structures listed in item 1 above, as appropriate.
b. The divider-barrier.
c. The ice-condenser elements.
3. For BWR containments:
a. Drywell structure and appurtenances such as the drywell head and major penetrations.

3-28

Revision 3 November 1978

b. Weir wall.
c. Refueling pool and operating floor.
d. Reactor and recirculation pump and motor support system.
e. Reactor pedestal.
f. Reactor shield wall.
g. Other major interior structures, as appropriate, including the various platforms inside and outside the drywell and the polar crane supporting elements.

3.8.3.2 Applicable Codes, Standards, and Specifications. This sec tion should provide information similar to that requested in Section 3.8.1.2 for concrete containments, but as applicable to the internal struc tures of the containment as listed in Section 3.8.3.1.

3.8.3.3 Loads and Load Combinations. Among the loads used in the design of the containment internal structures listed in Section 3.8.3.1 that should be specified are the following:

I. Loads encountered during normal plant startup, operation, and shutdown, including dead loads, live loads, thermal loads due to operating temperature, and hydrostatic loads such as those present tn refueling and pressure-suppression pools.

2. Loads that would be sustained in the event of severe environ mental conditions, including those induced by the Operating Basis Earthquake.
3. Loads that would be sustained in the event of extreme environ mental conditions, including those that would be induced by the Safe Shut down Earthquake.
4. Loads that would be sustained in the event of abnormal plant conditions, including the design basis loss-of-coolant accident and other high-energy pipe rupture accidents. Loads that should be discussed include compartment pressures, jet impingement and reaction forces due to pipe rupture, elevated temperatures, impact forces of associated missiles and whipping pipes, and loads applicable to some structures such as pool swell loads in the BWR Mark Ill containment and drag forces in the ice-condenser PWR containment.

The structures listed are those of the BWR Mark III containment. For other BWR containment concepts, the applicable major interior structures should be described accordingly.

3-29

Revision 3 November 1978 The various combinations of the above loads that should be discussed include, as a minimum, normal operating loads, normal operating loads with severe environmental loads, normal operating loads with extreme environmental loads, normal operating loads with abnormal loads, normal operating loads with severe environmental loads and abnormal loads, and normal operating loads with extreme environmental loads and abnormal loads.

In addition, the following information should be provided:

1. The extent to which the applicant's criteria comply with ACI-349, "Proposed ACI Standard: Code Requirements for Nuclear Safety Related Concrete Structures," for concrete, and with the AISC "Specifica tion for Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Build ings,"* for steel, as applicable.
2. For concrete pressure-resisting portions of the divider barrier of the PWR ice-condenser containment and for concrete pressure-resisting portions of the drywell of the Mark III BWR containment, the extent to which the applicant's criteria comply with Article CC-3000 of the ASME Code,Section III, Division 2.
3. For steel pressure-resisting portions of the structures describec in item 2 above, the extent to which the applicant's criteria comply with Article NE-3000 of Subsection NE of the ASME Code,Section III, Division 1, and the extent to which the recommendations of Regulatory Guide 1.57 are followed.
4. For steel linear supports of the reactor coolant system, the extent to which the applicant's criteria comply with Subsection NF of the ASME Code,Section III, Division 1.

3.8.3.4 Design and Analysis Procedures. The procedures that will be used in the design and analysis of at least those internal structures listed in Section 3.8.3.1 should be described, including the assumptions made and the identification of boundary conditions. The expected behavior under load and the mechanisms for load transfer to these structures and then to the containment base slab should be provided. Computer programs that are utilized should be referenced to permit identification with available published programs. Proprietary computer programs should be described to the maximum extent practical to establish the applicability of the programs and the measures taken to validate the programs with solutions derived from other acceptable programs or with solutions of classical problems.

The extent to which the design and analysis procedures comply with ACI-349 and with the AISC Specifications for concrete and steel structures, respectively, should be provided as applicable.

Copies of the AISC Specifications may be obtained from American Institute for Steel Construction, 100 Park Ave. , New York, New York 10017.

3-30

Revision 3 November 1978 For reactor coolant system linear supports, the design and analysis procedures utilized, including the type of analysis (elastic or plastic),

the methods of load transfer, particularly seismic and accident loads, and the assumptions on boundary conditions, should be provided. Specifi cally, the extent of compliance with design and analysis procedures delineated in Subsection NF of the ASME Code,Section III, Division 1, should be indicated.

For PWR primary shield walls and BWR reactor pedestals and shield walls, the design and analysis procedures utilized should be described, including the manner by which the individual loads and load combinations are transferred to the walls and their foundations. In particular, the description should cover the normal operating thermal gradient, if any, seismic loads, and accident loads, particularly pipe rupture jet and reaction forces and cavity pressures as they may act on the entire cavity or on portions thereof.

For secondary shield walls and operating and intermediate floors, the design and analysis procedures utilized for these walls and floors, including assumptions on structural framing and behavior under loads, should be described. Where elastoplastic behavior is assumed and the ductility of the walls is relied upon to absorb the energy associated with jet and missile loads, the procedures and assumptions should be described with particular emphasis on modeling techniques, boundary con ditions, force-time functions, and assumed ductility. For the differential pressure, methods of ensuring elastic behavior should be described, particularly in determining an equivalent static load for the impulsive pressure load.

For concrete pressure-resisting portions of the divider barrier of the PWR ice-condenser containment and for concrete pressure-resisting portions of the drywell of the BWR Mark III containment, the extent to which the applicant's criteria comply with Article CC-3000 of the ASME Code,Section III, Division 2, should be provided. For steel pressure resisting portions of these two structures, discuss the extent to which the applicant's criteria comply with Article NE-3000 of Subsection NE of the ASME Code,Section III, Division 1, and the extent to which the recommendations of Regulatory Guide 1.57 are followed.

3.8.3.5 Structural Acceptance Criteria. This section should provide information similar to that requested in Section 3.8.1.5 for concrete containments, but as applicable to the various containment internal struc tures listed in Section 3.8.3.1.

For each applicable load combination listed in Section 3.8.3.3, the allowable limits should be provided, as applicable, for stresses, strains, deformation (particularly for the RCS linear supports), and factors of safety against structural failure. The extent of compliance with the various applicable codes, as indicated in Section 3.8.3.3, should be presented.

3-31

Revision 3 November 1978 3.8.3.6 Materials, Quality Control, and Special Construction Tech "niques. The materials, quality control programs, and any special construc tion techniques should be identified and described.

Among the major materials of construction that should be described are the concrete ingredients, the reinforcing bars and splices, and the structural steel and various supports and anchors.

The quality control program proposed for the fabrication and construc tion of the containment interior structures should be described, including nondestructive examination of the materials to determine physical properties, placement of concrete, and erection tolerances.

Special, new, or unique construction techniques should be described to determine their effects on the structural integrity of the completed interior structure.

In addition, the following information should be provided:

1. The extent to which the material and quality control require ments comply with ACI-349 for concrete, and with the AISC Specifications for steel, as applicable.
2. For steel linear supports of the reactor coolant system, the extent to which the material and quality control requirements comply with Subsection NF of the ASME Code,Section III, Division 1.
3. For quality control in general, the extent to which the applicant complies with ANSI N45.2.5, and follows the recommendations of Regulatory Guide 1.55, "Concrete Placement in Category I Structures."
4. If welding of reinforcing bars is proposed, the extent to which the design complies with the ASME Code,Section III, Division 2. Any exceptions taken should be identified and justified.

3.8.3.7 Testing and Inservice Inspection Requirements. The testing and inservice inspection programs for the internal structures should be described. Test requirements for internal structures related directly and critically to the functioning of the containment concept such as the drywell of the BWR Mark III containment should be specified. Inservice inspection requirements, when needed, should also be described. The extent of compliance with the applicable codes as described in Section 3.8.3.6 should be indicated.

3.8.4 Other Seismic Category I Structures Information should be provided in this section for all Seismic Cate gory I structures not covered by Sections 3.8.1, 3.8.2, 3.8.3, or 3.8.5.

The information should be similar to that requested for Section 3.8.1.

In particular, the information described below should be provided.

3-32

Revision 3 November 1978 3.8.4.1 Description of the Structures. Descriptive information, including plan and section views of each structure, should be provided to define the primary structural aspects and elements relied upon for the structure to perform its safety-related function. The relationship between adjacent structures, including any separation or structural ties, should be described. Among the plant Seismic Category I structures that should be described are the following:

1. Containment enclosure buildings.
2. Auxiliary buildings.
3. Fuel storage buildings.
4. Control buildings.
5. Diesel generator buildings.
6. Other Seismic Category I structures, as applicable, including such structures as pipe and electrical conduit tunnels, waste storage facilities, stacks, intake structures, pumping stations, water wells, cooling towers, and concrete dams, embankments, and tunnels. Structures that are safety related but because of other design provisions are not classified as Seismic Category I should also be described.

3.8.4.2 Applicable Codes, Standards, and Specifications. Informa tion similar to that requested in Section 3.8.1.2 for concrete contain ments, but as applicable to all other Seismic Category I structures, should be provided.

3.8.4.3 Loads and Load Combinations. The loads used in the design of all other Seismic Category I structures should be specified, including:

1. Those loads encountered during normal plant startup, operation, and shutdown, including dead loads, live loads, thermal loads due to operating temperature, and hydrostatic loads such as those in spent fuel pools.
2. Those loads that would be sustained in the event of severe environmental conditions, including those that would be induced by the Operating Basis Earthquake (OBE) and the design wind specified for the plant site.
3. Those loads that would be sustained in the event of extreme environmental conditions, including those that would be induced by the Safe Shutdown Earthquake (SSE) and the Design Basis Tornado specified for the plant site.
4. Those loads that would be sustained in the event of abnormal plant conditions. Such abnormal plant conditions include the postulated rupture of high-energy piping. Loads induced by such an accident include 3-33

Revision 3 November 1978 elevated temperatures and pressures within or across possibly jet impingement and impact forces usually compartments and associated with such ruptures.

The various combinations of the above loads that should include normal operating loads, normal operating loads be discussed with severe environ mental loads, normal operating loads with extreme environmental loads, normal operating loads with abnormal loads, normal operating loads with severe environmental loads and abnormal loads, and normal operating loads with extreme environmental loads and abnormal loads.

The loads and load combinations described above cable to most structures. However, other site-relatedare generally appli also be applicable. Such loads include those induced design loads might by floods, potential aircraft crashes, explosive hazards in proximity to the site, and projec tiles and missiles generated from activities of nearby military installations.

3.8.4.4 Design and Analysis Procedures. The procedures should be described with emphasis on the design and analysis with ACI-349 and the AISC Specifications for concrete extent of compliance and steel structures, respectively, including the assumptions made on The expected behavior under load and the mechanisms boundary conditions.

the foundations should be provided. Computer programs of load transfer to to permit identification with available published should be referenced programs. Proprietary computer programs should be described to the maximum establish the applicability of the program and the extent practical to measures taken to validate the program with solutions derived from other acceptable pro grams or with solutions of classical problems.

3.8.4.5 Structural Acceptance Criteria. The design criteria relating to stresses, strains, gross deformations, factors parameters that identify quantitatively the margins of safety, and other of safety should be specified with emphasis on the extent of compliance with ACI-349 for con crete and with the AISC Specifications for steel.

3.8.4.6 Materials, Quality Control, and Special niques. The materials, quality control programs, and Construction Tech any new or special construction techniques should be addressed as outlined in Section 3.8.3.6.

3.8.4.7 Testing and Inservice Inspection Requirements.

The testing and inservice inspection requirements, if any, should be specified.

3.8.5 Foundations The information provided in this section should be requested under Section 3.8.1 for concrete containments similar to that but as applicable to foundations of all Seismic Category I structures.

Concrete foundations of steel or concrete containments should be discussed in Section 3.8.1 and in this section as appropriate.

3-34

Revision 3 November 1978 The information should address foundations for all Seismic Category I structures constructed of materials other than soil for the purpose of transferring loads and forces to the basic supporting media. In partic ular, the information described below should be provided.

3.8.5.1 Description of the Foundations. Descriptive information, including plan and section views of each foundation, should be provided to define the primary structural aspects and elements relied upon to perform the foundation function. The relationship between adjacent foundations, including any separation provided and the reasons for such separation, should be described. In particular, the type of foundation and its structural characteristics should be discussed. General arrange ment of each foundation should be provided with emphasis on the methods of transferring horizontal shears, such as those seismically induced, to the foundation media. If shear keys are utilized for such purposes, the general arrangement of the keys should be included. If waterproofing membranes are utilized, their effect on the capability of the foundation to transfer shears should be discussed.

Information should be provided to adequately describe other types of foundation structures such as pile foundations, caisson foundations, retaining walls, abutments, and rock and soil anchorage systems.

3.8.5.2 Applicable Codes, Standards, and Specifications. Informa tion similar to that requested in Section 3.8.1.2, but as applicable to foundations of all Seismic Category I structures,. should be provided.

3.8.5.3 Loads and Load Combinations. This section should provide similar information to that requested in Section 3.8.4.3, but as applic able to the foundations of all Seismic Category I structures.

"3.8.5.4 Design and Analysis Procedures. This section should provide information applicable to the foundations of all Seismic Category I struc tures. The information should be similar to that requested in Section 3.8.4.4.

In particular, the assumptions made on boundary conditions and the methods by which lateral loads and forces and overturning moments thereof are transmitted from the structure to the foundation media should be discussed, and the methods by which the effects of settlement are taken into consideration should be described.

3.8.5.5 Structural Acceptance Criteria. This section should pro vide information applicable to foundations of all Seismic Category I structures. The information should be similar to that requested in Section 3.8.4.5.

In particular, the design limits imposed on the various parameters that serve to define the structural stability of each structure and its 3-35

Revision 3 November 1978 foundations should be indicated, including differential settlements and factors of safety against overturning and sliding.

3.8.5.6 Materials, Quality Control, and Special Construction Tech niques. This section should provide information for the foundations of all Seismic Category I structures. The information should be similar to that requested in Section 3.8.4.6.

3.8.5.7 Testing and Inservice Inspection Requirements. This section should discuss information for the foundations of all Seismic Category I structures. The information should be similar to that requested in Section 3.8.4.7.

If programs for continued surveillance and monitoring of foundations are required, a discussion to define the various aspects of the program should be provided.

3.9 Mechanical Systems* and Components 3.9.1 Special Topics for Mechanical Components 3.9.1.1 Design Transients. Provide a complete list of transients to be used in the design and fatigue analysis of all ASME Code Class 1 and CS components, component supports, and reactor internals. The number of events for each transient should be included, along with assurance that the number of load and stress cycles per event is properly taken into account. All design transients that are contained in the ASME Code required "Design Specifications" for the components of the reactor coolant pressure boundary should be specified. Examples of such transients are startup and shutdown operations, power level changes, emergency and recovery conditions, switching operations (i.e., startup or shutdown of one or more coolant loops), control system or other system malfunctions, component malfunctions, transients resulting from single operator errors, inservice hydrostatic tests, and seismic events. All transients or combinations of transients should be classified with respect to the plant and system operating condition categories identified as "normal," "upset," "emergency,"

"faulted," or "testing."

3.9.1.2 Computer Programs Used in Analyses. Provide a list of compu ter programs that will be used in dynamic and static analyses to determine structural and functional integrity of all Seismic Category I systems, components, equipment, and supports. Include a brief description of each program, the extent of its application, and the design control measures, required per Appendix B of 10 CFR Part 50, that will be employed to demonstrate the applicability and validity of each program.

3.9.1.3 Experimental Stress Analysis. If experimental stress analysis methods are used in lieu of analytical methods for Seismic Category I "XFuel system design information is addressed in Section 4.2.

3-36

Revision 3 November 1978 ASME Code and non-Code items, sufficient information should be provided to show the validity of the design.

3.9.1.4 Considerations for the Evaluation of the Faulted Condition.

The analytical methods (e.g., elastic or elastic-plastic) used to evaluate stresses for Seismic Category I ASME Code and non-Code items should be described, including a discussion of their compatibility with the type of dynamic system analysis used. The stress-strain relationship and ultimate strength used in the analysis for each component should be shown to be valid. If the use of elastic, elastic-plastic, or limit item analysis concurrently with elastic or elastic-plastic system analysis is invoked, the basis for these procedures should provide assurance that the calculated item or item support deformations and displacements do not violate the corresponding limits and assumptions on which the method used for the system analysis is based. When elastic plastic stress or deformation design limits are specified for ASME Code and non-Code items, the methods of analysis used to calculate the stresses and/or deformations resulting from the faulted condition loadings should be provided. Describe the procedure for developing the loading function on each component.

3.9.2 Dynamic Testing and Analysis The criteria, testing procedures, and dynamic analyses employed to ensure structural and functional integrity of piping systems, mechanical equipment, and reactor internals under vibratory loadings, including those due to fluid flow and postulated seismic events, should be provided.

3.9.2.1 Piping Vibration, Thermal Expansion, and Dynamic Effects.

Information should be provided concerning the piping vibration, thermal expansion, and dynamic effects testing that will be conducted during startup functional testing on (1) ASME Code Class 1, 2, and 3 systems, (2) other high-energy piping systems inside Seismic Category I structures, (3) high-energy portions of systems whose failure could reduce the func tioning of any Seismic Category I plant feature to an unacceptable level, and (4) Seismic Category I portions of moderate-energy piping systems located outside containment. The purpose of these tests is to confirm that these piping systems, restraints, components, and supports have been designed adequately to withstand the flow-induced dynamic loadings under operational transient and steady-state conditions anticipated during service.

In addition, the thermal motions should be monitored to ensure that adequate clearances are provided to allow unrestrained normal thermal movement of systems, components, and supports. The program should include a list of different flow modes, a list of selected locations for visual inspection and measurements, the acceptance criteria, and the possible corrective actions if excessive vibration occurs.

3.9.2.2 Seismic Qualification Testing of Safety-Related Mechanical Equipment. Seismic qualification testing of safety-related mechanical equipment is required to ensure its functional integrity and operability 3-37

Revision 3 November 1978 during and after a postulated seismic occurrence. The following informa tion should be provided in the PSAR:

1. The criteria for seismic qualification, such as the deciding factors for choosing test and/or analysis, considerations in defining the input motion at the equipment monitoring locations, and the process to demonstrate adequacy of the seismic qualification program.
2. The methods and procedures used to test Seismic Category I mechanical equipment operation during and after the Safe Shutdown Earth quake (SSE) and to ensure structural and functional integrity of the equip ment after several occurrences of the Operating Basis Earthquake (OBE) in combination with normal operating loads. Included are mechanical equip ment such as fans, pump drives, heat exchanger tube bundles, valve actuators, battery and instrument racks, control consoles, cabinets, panels, and cable trays.. Broad-band seismic excitation, dynamic coupling, and multi directional loading effects should be considered in the development of the seismic qualification program.
3. The methods and procedures of analysis and for testing of the supports for the above Seismic Category I mechanical equipment, and the verification procedures used to account for the possible amplification of design loads (amplitude and frequency content) under seismic conditions.

There should be provided in the FSAR the results of tests and analyses to ensure the proper implementation of the criteria accepted in the construction permit (CP) review and to demonstrate adequate seismic qualification.

3.9.2.3 Dynamic Response Analysis of Reactor Internals Under Operational Flow Transients and Steady-State Conditions. A description of the dynamic system analysis of structural components within the reactor vessel caused by the operational flow transients and steady-state condi tions should be provided in the PSAR. The purpose of this analysis is to demonstrate the acceptability of the reactor internals design for normal operating conditions and to predict the input forcing functions and the vibratory response of the reactor internals prior to conducting the preoperational vibration test of a prototype reactor. Information concerning the method of analysis, the specific locations for response calculation, the considerations to define the mathematical model, and the acceptance criteria should be provided in the PSAR.

3.9.2.4 Preoperational Flow-Induced Vibration Testing of Reactor Internals. Information should be provided in the PSAR describing the extent to which the recommendations of preoperational flow-induced vibra tion testing of reactor internals during the startup functional test pro gram, as delineated in Regulatory Guide 1.20, "Comprehensive Vibration Assessment Program for Reactor Internals During Preoperational and Initial Startup Testing," will be implemented. The purpose of this test is to 3-38

Revision 3 November 1978 demonstrate that flow-induced vibrations experienced during normal opera tion will not cause structural failure or degradation. For the prototype reactor, information in the PSAR should include a list of flow modes, a list of sensor types and locations, a description of test procedures, methods used to process and interpret the measured data, and the proce dures for implementing the visual inspection. For a reactor internal with the same design, size, configuration, and operation conditions as an identified valid prototype reactor internal, indicate the extent to which the preoperational vibration test program follows the recommenda tions for non-prototype testing presented in Regulatory Guide 1.20; pro vide justification for any alternative approach.

3.9.2.5 Dynamic System Analysis of the Reactor Internals Under Faulted Condition. The following information should be included in the discussion of the dynamic system analysis methods and procedures used to confirm the structural design adequacy of the reactor internals and the unbroken loop of the reactor piping system to withstand dynamic effects with no loss of function under a simultaneous occurrence of LOCA or steam line break and Safe Shutdown Earthquake (SSE):

1. Typical diagrams of the dynamic system mathematical modeling of piping, pipe supports, and reactor internals, along with fuel element assemblies and control rod assemblies and drives, that will be used in the analysis, including a discussion of the bases for any structural partitioning and directional decoupling of components (PSAR).
2. A description of the methods used to obtain the forcing func tions and a description of the forcing functions that will be used for the dynamic analysis of the LOCA or steam line break and SSE event, including system pressure differentials, direction, rise time, magnitude, duration, initial conditions, spatial distribution, and loading combina tions (PSAR).
3. A description of the methods and procedures that will be used to compute the total dynamic structural responses, including the buckling response, of those structures in compression (PSAR).
4. A summary of the results of the dynamic analysis (FSAR).

3.9.2.6 Correlations of Reactor Internals Vibration Tests with the Analytical Results (FSAR). A-discussion should be provided that describes the method to be used for correlating the results from the reactor inter nals preoperational vibration test with the analytical results derived from dynamic analyses of reactor internals under nperational flow tran sients and steady-state conditions. In addition, this discussion may include procedures for verifying the mathematical model used in the faulted condition (LOCA, steam line break, and SSE) by comparing certain dynamic characteristics such as natural frequencies.

3-39

Revision 3 November 1978 3.9.3 ASME Code Class 1, 2, and 3 Components, Component Supports, and Core Support Structures The information requested in Sections 3.9.3.1 through 3.9.3.4 should be provided for components and component supports constructed in accord ance with Division I of Section III of the ASME Code. Section 3.9.3 includes ASME Code Class 1, 2, and 3 components, core support (CS) struc tures, and component supports; Class MC is covered in Section 3.8.3.

The design information relative to component design for steam generators as called for in Section 5.4.2 should be incorporated in this section.

This includes field run piping and internal parts of components.

3.9.3.1 Loading Combinations, Design Transients, and Stress Limits.

Provide the combination of loading conditions and the design transients applicable to the design of each ASME Code constructed item for each system.

Identify for each initiating event (i.e. , LOCA, SSE, pipe break, and other transients) the appropriate plant operating condition and the appropriate component operating condition used to establish the design stress limits for the ASME Code constructed items (see Section 3.9.1.1).

The actual design condition (including test condition) stress limits and deformation criteria selected for design (for the combination of loading conditions and design transients established as described above) should be presented. Design stress limits that allow inelastic deformation (compar able to faulted condition design limits) should be identified, and a description of the procedures that will be used for analysis or test should be provided in the PSAR (see Section 3.9.1.4).

The FSAR should include the following for ASME Code Class 1 compo nents, CS structures, and ASME Code Class 1 component supports:

1. A summary description of mathematical or test models used,
2. Methods of calculation or test, including simplifying assumptions, identification of method of system and component analysis used, and demonstra tion of their compatibility (see Section 3.9.1.4) in the case of components and supports designed to faulted limits, and
3. A summary of the maximum total stress, deformation, and cumulative usage factor values should be provided in the FSAR for each of the compo nent operating conditions for all ASME Code Class I components. Identify those values that differ from the allowable limits by less than 10%, and provide the contribution of each of the loading categories, such as seismic, dead weight, pressure, and thermal, to the total stress for each maximum stress value identified in this range.

The FSAR should include the following for all other classes of com ponents and their supports:

3-40

Revision 3 November 1978

1. A summary description of any test models used (see Section 3.9.1.3).
2. A summary description of mathematical models or test models used to evaluate the faulted conditions, as appropriate, for components and supports (see Sections 3.9.1.2 and 3.9.1.4).
3. For all ASME Code Class 2 and 3 components required to shut down the reactor or mitigate the consequences of a postulated piping failure without offsite power, a summary of the maximum total stress and deformation values should be provided in the FSAR for each of the component operating conditions. Identify those values that differ from the allowable limits by less than 10%.

The PSAR should include a listing of transients appropriate to ASME Code Class 1, 2, and 3 components, CS structures, and component supports and should be categorized on the basis of plant operating condition. In addition, for ASME Code Class 1 components and CS and ASME Code Class 1 component supports, include the number of cycles to be used in the fatigue analysis appropriate to each transient (see Section 3.9.1.1).

3.9.3.2 Pump and Valve Operability Assurance. Provide a list that identifies all active ASME Class 1, 2, and 3 pumps and valves. Present the criteria to be employed in a test program, or program consisting of test and analysis, to ensure the operability of pumps required to function and valves required to open or close to perform a safety function during or following the specified plant event. Discuss the features of the program, and include conditions of test, scale effects if appropriate, loadings for specified plant event, transient loads, including seismic component, dynamic coupling to other systems, stress limits, deformation limits, and other information considered pertinent to assurance of operability.

Design stress limits established as provided for in Section 3.9.3.1 should be included in the program. All of the above should be included in the PSAR.

The FSAR should include program results summarizing stress and defor mation levels and environmental qualification, as well as maximum test envelope conditions for which the component qualifies, including end connec tion loads and operability results.

3.9.3.3 Design and Installation Details for Mounting of Pressure Relief Devices. The design and installation criteria applicable to the mounting of the pressure-relieving devices (safety valves and relief valves) for the overpressure protection of ASME Class 1 and 2 system components should be described. Information pertaining to loading combinations should identify the most severe combination of the applicable loads due to internal fluid pressure, fluid states, dead weight of valves and piping, thermal load under heatup, steady-state and transient valve operation, reaction forces when valves are discharging (valve opening sequence and opening 3-41

Revision 3 November 1978 times), and seismic events (i.e., Operating Basis Earthquake and Safe Shutdown Earthquake).

The method of analysis and magnitude of any dynamic load factors used should be included. Discharge piping effects (i.e., closed or open system) should be discussed and included in the analysis. The PSAR should include the criteria presented above, and the FSAR should present the results of the analysis.

3.9.3.4 Component Supports. Loading combinations, design transients, stress limits, and deformation limits should be provided as discussed in Section 3.9.3.1 .

The supports for active components should be tested, analyzed, or analyzed and tested, as discussed for components in Section 3.9.3.2, and their effects on operability included in the discussion provided in that section.

The PSAR should present the criteria to be used, and the FSAR should present the results of analysis or test programs as discussed in Sections 3.9.3.1 and 3.9.3.2.

3.9.4 Control Rod Drive Systems Information on the control rod drive systems (CRDS) should be provided by the applicant in the SAR for review by the staff. For electromagnetic systems, this includes the control rod drive mechanism (CRDM) and extends to the coupling interface with the reactivity control elements. For hydraulic systems, this includes the CRDM, the hydraulic control unit, the condensate supply system, and the scram discharge volume and extends to the coupling interface with the reactivity control elements. For both types of systems, the CRDM housing should be treated as part of the reactor coolant pressure boundary (RCPB). Information on CRDS materials should be included in Section 4.5.1.

If other types of CRDS are proposed or if new features that are not specifically mentioned here are incorporated in current types of CRDS, information should be supplied for the new systems or new features.

3.9.4.1 Descriptive Information of CRDS. The descriptive informa tion, including design criteria, testing programs, drawings, and a summary of the method of operation of the control rod drives, should be provided to permit an evaluation of the adequacy of the system to properly perform its design function.

"3.9.4.2 Applicable CRDS Design Specifications. Information should be provided pertaining to design codes, standards, specifications, and standard practices, as well as to NRC general design criteria, regulatory guides, and positions that are applied in the design, fabrication, con struction, and operation of the CRDS.

3-42

Revision 3 November 1978 The various criteria should be supplied along with the names of the apparatus to which they apply. Pressurized parts of the system should be listed or referenced in Section 3.2.2 in order to determine the extent to which the applicant complies with the Class 1 requirements of Section III of the ASME Code for those portions that are part of the reactor coolant pressure boundary, and with other specified parts of Section III or other sections of the ASME Code for pressurized portions that are not part of the reactor coolant pressure boundary.

Information should be provided to evaluate the nonpressurized portions of the control rod drive system to determine the acceptability of design margins for allowable values of stress, deformation, and fatigue used in the analyses. If an experimental testing program is used in lieu of analysis, the program should be provided. The program description should adequately cover the areas of concern in the determination and verifica tion of the stress, deformation, and fatigue in the CRDS.

3.9.4.3 Design Loads, Stress Limits, and Allowable Deformations.

Information should be presented that pertains to the applicable design loads and their appropriate combinations, to the corresponding design stress limits, and to the corresponding allowable deformations. The deformations are of interest in the present context only in those instances where a failure of movement could be postulated to occur and such movement would be necessary for a safety-related function.

If the applicant selects an experimental testing option in lieu of establishing a set of stress allowables and deformation allowables, an extensive description of the testing program should be provided. The load combination, design stress limit, and allowable deformation criteria should be provided in the PSAR.

The design limits and safety margins for those components not designed to the ASME Code should be specified in the FSAR, or alternatively a commitment to provide this information prior to fuel loading should be made in the FSAR. Information similar to that requested in Section 3.9.3 should be provided for those components designed to the ASME Code.

3.9.4.4 CRDS Performance Assurance Program. Plans for the conduct of a performance assurance program or plans that reference previous test programs or standard industry procedures for similar apparatus should be provided. For example, the life cycle tezt program for the CRDS should be presented. The design performance assurance program presented should cover the following:

1. Life cycle test program,
2. Proper service environment imposed during test,
3. Mechanism functional tests, and
4. Program results (FSAR).

3-43

Revision 3 November 1978 3.9.5 Reactor Pressure Vessel Internals The information requested in Sections 3.9.5.1 through 3.9.5.3 should be provided as part of an evaluation program to ensure the structural and functional integrity of the reactor internals (includes ASME Class CS (core supports) and non-ASME-Code-covered internals). Information on reactor internals materials should be included in Section 4.5.2.

3.9.5.1 Design Arrangements. The physical or design arrangements of all reactor internals structures, components, assemblies, and systems should be presented, including the manner of positioning and securing such items within the reactor pressure vessel, the manner of providing for axial and lateral retention and support of the internals assemblies and components, and the manner of accommodating dimensional changes due to thermal and other effects. The functional requirements for each com ponent should be described. Verify that any significant changes in design from those in previously licensed plants of similar design do not affect the flow-induced vibration test results requested in Section 3.9.2.

3.9.5.2 Loading Conditions. The plant and system operating condi tions and design basis events that provide the basis for the design of the reactor internals to sustain normal operation, anticipated operational occurrences, postulated accidents, and seismic events should be specified in accordance with the information requested in Section 3.9.1.1.

3.9.5.3 Design Bases. Provide the specific design and service loading combinations applicable to reactor internals. These loading com binations should consider all the conditions in 3.9.5.2 above. Describe the method of combination of these loads. For each specific loading com bination, provide the design or service limits to be applied to the reactor internals. Provide the deflection, cycling, and fatigue limits. Verify that the allowable deflections will not interfere with the functioning of all related components (e.g., control rods and standby cooling systems).

Indicate the extent to which the design and construction of the core support structures is in accordance with Subsection NG of the ASME Code. Indicate the extent to which the design of other reactor internals will be consistent with Article NG-3000. A summary of the maximum calculated total stress, deformation, and cumulative usage factor should be provided in the FSAR for each designated design or service limit. Details of the dynamic analyses should be presented in Section 3.9.2 of the SAR.

3.9.6 Inservice Testing of Pumps and Valves A test program should be provided that includes baseline preservice testing and a periodic inservice test program to ensure that all ASME Code Class 1, 2, and 3 pumps provided with an emergency power source and all ASME Code Class 1, 2, and 3 valves will be in a state of operational readiness to perform their safety function throughout the life of the plant.

3-44

Revision 3 November 1978 3.9.6.1 Inservice Testing of Pumps. Descriptive information in the PSAR should cover the inservice test program of all ASME Code Class 1, 2, and 3 system pumps provided with an emergency power source. Refer ence value* tests for speed, pressure, flow rate, vibration, lubrication, and bearing temperature at normal pump operating conditions should be presented. Methods for measuring the reference values and inservice values for the pump parameters listed above should be presented. In addition, the pump test plan and schedule should be provided and included in the technical specifications.

3.9.6.2 Inservice Testing of Valves. Descriptive information in the PSAR should cover the inservice test program of all ASME Code Class 1, 2, and 3 valves. The test program should include preservice tests, valve replacement, valve repair and maintenance, indication of valve position, and inservice tests for all valve categories (as defined in IWV-2100 of the ASME Code). In addition, the valve test procedure and schedule should be provided and included in the technical specifications.

3.9.6.3 Relief Requests. Paragraph 50.55a(g) of 10 CFR requires a nuclear power facility to periodically update its inservice testing program to meet the requirements of future revisions of Section XI of the ASME Code. However, if it proves impractical to implement these criteria, the applicant is allowed to submit requests for relief from Section XI requirements on a case-by-case basis. Information provided should describe the specific area of relief requested, explain why compliance with Sec tion XI in this case is impractical, and describe any alternative test procedures.

3.10 Seismic Qualification of Seismic Category I Instrumentation and Electrical Equipment All Seismic Category I instrumentation, electrical equipment, and their supports should be identified. The seismic qualification criteria applicable to the reactor protection system, engineered-safety-feature Class 1E equipment, the emergency power system, and all auxiliary safety related systems and supports should be provided. Methods and procedures used to qualify electrical equipment, instrumentation, and their supports should also be provided.

3.10.1 Seismic Qualification Criteria The criteria for seismic qualification, including the decision criteria for selecting a particular test or method of analysis, the con siderations defining the input motion, and the process to demonstrate adequacy of the seismic qualification program, should be provided. The extent to which guidance contained in Regulatory Guide 1.100, "Seismic Qualification of Electric Equipment for Nuclear Power Plants," will be used should be indicated.

Defined in IWP-3112 of the ASME Code.

3-45

Revision 3 November 1978 3.10.2 Methods and Procedures for Qualifying Electrical Equipment and Instrumentation The methods and procedures used to qualify by test or analysis Seismic Category I instrumentation and electrical equipment for operation during and after the Safe Shutdown Earthquake and to ensure structural and func tional integrity of the equipment after several occurrences of the Operating Basis Earthquake should be provided. Seismic Category I instrumentation and electrical equipment include the reactor protection system, engineered I safety-feature Class IE equipment, emergency power system, and all auxiliary safety-related systems.

3.10.3 Methods and Procedures of Analysis or Testing of Supports of Electrical Equipment and Instrumentation The methods and procedures for analysis or testing of Seismic Cate gory I instrumentation and electrical equipment supports and the verifi cation procedures used to account for the possible amplification of design loads (amplitude and frequency content) under seismic conditions should be provided. Supports include items such as battery racks, instrument racks, control consoles, cabinets, panels, and cable trays.

3.10.4 Operating License Review (FSAR)

The results of tests and analyses that ensure the proper implementa tion of the criteria established in the construction permit review, and that demonstrate adequate seismic qualification, should be provided in the FSAR.

3.11 Environmental Design of Mechanical and Electrical Equipment The purpose of this section is to provide information on the environ mental conditions and design bases for which the mechanical, instrumenta tion, and electrical portions of the engineered safety features and reactor protection systems are designed to ensure acceptable performance in all environments (e.g., normal, tests, and accident).

The following specific information should be included concerning the design bases related to the capability of the mechanical. nstrumenta tion, and electrical portions of the engineered safety features, and reactor protection system to perform their intended functions in the combinec postaccident environment of temperature, pressure, humi ity, chemistry, and radia.ion.

3.11.1 Equipment I-entification and Environmental Conditions Ali safety-related equipment and components (e.g., motors, cables, filters. pumrp seals. shielding) iocated in the Frimary containment and "e!h*Pwhet:at ;re required to function during and subsequent. to any of the design basis accidents should be identified and their locations specified. for equipment inside containment, the locatioin should secCifv 3-46

Revision 3 November 1978 whether inside or outside the missile shield (for PWRs) or whether inside or outside the drywell (for BWRs).

Both the normal and accident environmental conditions itly defined for each item of equipment. These definitions should be explic should include the following parameters: temperature, pressure, relative humidity, radia tion, chemicals, and vibration (nonseismic).

For the normal environment, including that due to loss of environ mental control systems, specific values should be provided. For the accident environment, these parameters should be presented as functions of time, and the cause of the postulated environment (loss-of-coolant accident, steam line break, or other) should be identified.

The length of time that each item of equipment is required to operate in the accident environment should be provided.

3.11.2 Qualification Tests and Analyses A description should be provided of the qualification tests and analyses that have been or will be performed on each of these items to ensure it will perform in the combined temperature, pressure, humidity, that chemical, and radiation environment. The specific values of temperature, pressure, humidity, chemicals, and radiation should be included.

Indicate how the requirements of General Design Criteria 1, 4, and 50 of Appendix A to 10 CFR Part 50 and Criterion III of Appendix 23, to 10 CFR Part 50 will be met. The extent to which the guidance B contained in the regulatory guides listed below will be utilized should be indicated:

Regulatory Guide i.30 (Safety Guide 30), "Quality Assurance Require ments for the Installation, Inspection, and Testing of Instrumentation and Electric Equipment;"

Regulatory Guide 1.40, "Qualification Tests of Continuous-Duty Motors Installed T iside the Containment of Water-Cooled Nuclear Power Plants;"

Regulatory Guide 1.63, "Electric Penetration Assemblies in Contain ment Structures for Light-Water-Cooled Nuclear Power Plants;"

Regulatory Guide 1.73, "Qualification Tests of Electric Valve ators Installed Inside the Containment of Nuclear Power Plants;" Oper Regulatory Guide 1.89, "Qualification of Class 1E Equipment for Nuclear Power Plants;" and Regulatory Guide 1.131, "Qualification Tests of Field Splices, and Connections for Light-Water-CooledElectric Cables, Nuclear Power Plants."

3-47

Revision 3 November 1978 3.11.3 Qualification Test Results The results of the qualification tests for each type of equipment should be provided in the FSAR or should be referenced if previously submitted.

3.11.4 Loss of Ventilation Provide the bases that ensure that loss of the air conditioning or ventilation system will not adversely affect the operability of safety related control and electrical equipment located in the control room and other areas. The analyses performed to identify the worst case environ ment (e.g. , temperature, humidity) should be described, including identifi cation and determination of the limiting condition with regard to temper ature that would require reactor shutdown. Any testing (factory or onsite) that has been or will be performed to confirm satisfactory operability of control and electrical equipment under extreme environmental conditions should be described. The documentation of the successful completion of qualification tests for each type of equipment should be specified in the PSAR and supplied in the FSAR.

3.11.5 Estimated Chemical and Radiation Environment For each engineered safety feature (ESF), the design source term for the chemical and radiation environment both for normal operation and for the design basis accident environment should be identified. For engineered safety features inside containment, the chemical composition and resulting pH of the liquids in the reactor core and in the containment Ssump should be identified. Indicate the extent to which estimates of radiation exposures are based on a radiation source term that is consistent with Regulatory Guides 1.3, "Assumptions Used for Evaluating the Potential Radiological Consequences of a Loss-of-Coolant Accident for Boiling Water Reactors," 1.4, "Assumptions Used for Evaluating the Potential Radiological Consequences of a Loss-of-Coolant Accident for Pressurized Water Reactors,"

and 1.7, "Control of Combustible Gas Concentrations in Containment Following a Loss-of-Coolant Accident." Wherever alternative approaches are used, demonstrate that an acceptable level of safety has been attained. Determina tions of the exposure of organic components on ESF systems should consider both beta and gamma radiation. Beta and gamma exposures should be tabulated separately and should list the average energy of each type of radiation.

For ESF systems outside containment, the radiation estimates should take into account factors affecting the source term such as containment leak rate, meteorological dispersion (if appropriate), and operation of other ESF systems. The engineered safety features considered and the correspond ing source terms and chemical environments should be presented in tabular form. All assumptions used in the calculation should be listed.

3-48

Revision 3 November 1978

4. REACTOR In this chapter of the SAR, the applicant should provide an tion and supporting information to establish the capability evalua of the reactor to perform its safety functions throughout -its design lifetime normal operational modes, including both transient and steady under all accident conditions. This chapter should also include information state, and support the analyses presented in Chapter 15, "Accident Analyses." to 4.1 Summary Description A summary description of the mechanical, nuclear, and thermal hydraulic designs of the various reactor components, including and reactor vessel internals, and reactivity control systems, should the fuel, be given.

The description should indicate the independent and interrelated perform ance and safety functions of each component. Information on drive systems and reactor vessel internals presented in Sections control rod and 3.9.5 may be incorporated by reference. 3.9.4 A summary table of the important design and performance characteristics should be tabulation of analysis techniques used and load conditions included. A considered, including computer code names, should also be included.

4.2 Fuel System Design The fuel system is defined as consisting of guide tubes or thimbles; fuel rods with fuel pellets, insulator pellets, cladding, springs, end closures, fill gas, and getters; water rods; burnable poison grids and springs; assembly end fittings and springs; channelrods; spacer boxes; and the reactivity control assembly. In the case of the control rods, this section covers the reactivity control elements that extend coupling interface of the control rod drive mechanism. The from the for the mechanical, chemical, and thermal design of the fuel design bases system that can affect or limit the safe, reliable operation of the plant presented. The description of the fuel system mechanical design should be include the following aspects: (1) mechanical design limits should for allowable stresses, deflection, cycling, and fatigue, such as those for fuel fission gas inventory and pressure, (3) a listing (2) capacity properties, and (4) considerations for radiation damage, claddingof material collapse time, materials selection, and normal operational vibration.

Details for seismic loadings should be presented in Section 3.7.3; shock (LOCA) loadings and the effects of combined shock and seismic loads presented in this section. The chemical design should consider should be all possible fuel-cladding-coolant interactions. The description of the thermal design should include such items as maximum fuel temperatures, clad-to-fuel gap conductance as a function of and cladding burnup and operating conditions, and fuel cladding integrity criteria.

4.2.1 Design Bases The applicant should explain and substantiate the selection of bases from the viewpoint of safety considerations. Where design the limits selected 4-1

Revision 3 November 1978 are consistent with proven practice, a referenced statement to that effect will suffice; where the limits extend beyond present practice, an evalua tion and an explanation based on developmental work or analysis should be provided. These bases may be expressed as explicit numbers or as general conditions.

The discussion of design bases should include a description of the functional characteristics in terms of desired performance under stated conditions. This should relate systems, components, and materials per formance under normal operating, anticipated transient, and accident con ditions. The discussion should consider the following with respect to performance:

i. Cladding
a. The mechanical properties of the cladding, e.g., Young's modulus, Poisson's ratio, design dimensions, strength, ductility, and creep rupture limits, and the effects of design temperature and irradia tion on the properties,
b. Stress-strain limits,
c. Vibration and fatigue,
d. The chemical properties of the cladding.
2. Fuel Material
a. The thermal-physical properties of the fuel, e.g., melting point, thermal conductivity, density, and specific heat, and the effects of design temperature and irradiation on the properties,
b. The effects of fuel densification and fission product swelling,
c. The chemical properties of the fuel.
3. Fuel Rod Performance
a. Analytical models and the conservatism in the input data,
b. The ability of the models to predict experimental or operating characteristics,
c. The standard deviation or statistical uncertainty asso ciated with the correlations or analytical models.
4. Spacer Grid and Channel Boxes
a. Mechanical, chemical, thermal, and irradiation properties of the materials, 4-2

Revision 3 November 1978

b. Vibration and fatigue,
c. Chemical compatibility with other core components, cool ant. including
5. Fuel Assembly
a. Structural design,
b. Thermal-hydraulic design.
6. Reactivity Control Assembly and Burnable Poison Rods
a. The thermal-physical properties of the absorber material,
b. The compatibility of the absorber and cladding materials,
c. Cladding stress-strain limits,
d. Irradiation behavior of absorber material.
7. Surveillance Program
a. The requirements for surveillance and testing fuel rods, burnable poison rods, control rods, of irradiated channel boxes, and instru ment tube/thimbles.

4.2.2 Description and Design Drawings A description and preliminary (PSAR) or final of the fuel rod ccmponents, burnable poison (FSAR) design drawing rods, reactivity control assemblies showing arrangement, fuel assemblies, and tolerances, sealing and handling features, methods dimensions, critical pressurization, fission gas spaces, burnable of support, internal poison content, and internal components should be provided. A discussion of design features that prevent improper orientation or placement of fuel rods or assemblies within the core should be included.

4.2.3 Design Evaluation An evaluation of the fuel system design should physically feasible combinations of chemical, be presented for the mechanical, and hydraulic interaction. Evaluation thermal, irradiation, should include the effects of normal reactor operations, of these interactions sients without scram, and postulated accidents. anticipated tran The fuel system design evaluation should include the following:

1. Cladding
a. Vibration analysis, 4-3

Revision 3 November 1978

b. Fuel element internal and external pressure and cladding stresses during normal and accident conditions with particular emphasis on temperature transients or depressurization accidents,
c. Potential for chemical reaction, including hydriding, fission product attack, and crud deposition,
d. Fretting and crevice corrosion,
e. Stress-accelerated corrosion,
f. Cycling and fatigue,
g. Material wastage due to mass transfer,
h. Rod bowing due to thermal, irradiation, and creep dimen sional changes,
i. Consequences of power-coolant mismatch,
j. Irradiation stability of the cladding,
k. Creep collapse-and creepdown.
2. Fuel
a. Dimensional stability of the fuel,
b. Potential for chemical interaction, including possible waterlogging rupture,
c. Thermal stability of the fuel, including densification, phase changes, and thermal expansion,
d. Irradiation stability of the fuel, including fission product swelling and fission gas release.
3. Fuel Rod Performance
a. Fuel-cladding mechanical interaction,
b. Failure and burnup experience, including the thermal condi tions for which the experience was obtained for a given type of fuel and the results of long-term irradiation testing of production fuel and test specimens,
c. Fuel and cladding temperatures, both local and gross, with an indication of the correlation used for thermal conductivity, gap conduct ance as a function of burnup and power level, and the method of employing peaking factors, 4-4

Revision 3 November 1978

d. An analysis of the potential effect transients on waterlogged elements or elements withof sudden temperature high internal gas pressure,
e. An analysis of temperature effects tional transients that may cause bowing or other during anticipated opera damage to fuel, control rods, or structure,
f. An analysis of the energy release and potential for chemical reaction should physical burnout of fuel elements a occur,*
g. An analysis of the energy release pulse should waterlogged elements rupture and spilland resulting pressure fuel into the coolant,*
h. An analysis of the behavior of fuel rods in the event coolant flow blockage is predicted.*
4. Spacer Grid and Channel Boxes
a. Dimensional stability considering thermal, chemical, and irradiation effects,
b. Spring loads for grids.
5. Fuel Assembly
a. Loads applied by core restraint system,
b. Analysis of combined shock (including LOCA) and seismic loading,
c. Loads applied in fuel handling, including misaligned handling tools.
6. Reactivity Control Assembly and Burnable Poison Rods
a. Internal pressure and cladding stresses during normal, transient, and accident conditions,
b. Thermal stability of the absorber material, including phase changes and thermal expansion,
c. Irradiation stability of the absorber material, taking into consideration gas release and swelling,
d. Potential for chemical interaction, including possible waterlogging rupture.

If this information is included in Chapter 15, it may be incorporated in this section by reference.

4-5

Revision 3 November 1978 4.2.4 Testing and Inspection Plan The testing and inspections to be performed to verify the design characteristics of the fuel system components, including clad integrity, dimensions, fuel enrichment, burnable poison concentration, absorber com position, and characteristics of the fuel, absorber, and poison pellets, should be described. Descriptions of radiographic inspections, destruc tive tests, fuel assembly dimensional checks, and the program for inspec tion of new fuel assemblies and new control rods to ensure mechanical integrity after shipment should be included. Where testing and inspec tion programs are essentially the same as for previously accepted plants, a referenced statement to that effect with an identification of the fabricator and a summary table of the important design and performance characteristics should be provided.

4.3 Nuclear Design 4.3.1 Design Bases The design bases for the nuclear design of the fuel and reactivity control systems should be provided and discussea, including nuclear and reactivity control limits such as excess reactivity, fuel burnup, nega tive reactivity feedback, core design lifetime, fuel replacement program, reactivity coefficients, stability criteria, maximum controlled reactiv ity insertion rates, control of power distribution, shutdown margins, stuck rod criteria, rod speeds, chemical and mechanical shim control, burnable poison requirements, and backup and emergency shutdown provisions.

4.3.2 Description A description of the nuclear characteristics of the design should be provided and should include the information indicated in the follow ing sections.

4.3.2.1 Nuclear Design Description. Features of the nuclear design not discussed in specific subsections should be listed, described, or illustrated for appropriate times in the fuel cycle. These should include such areas as fuel enrichment distributions, burnable poison distributions, other physical features of the lattice or assemblies relevant to nuclear design parameters, delayed neutron fraction and neutron lifetimes, core lifetime and burnup, plutonium buildup, soluble poison insertion rates, and the relationship to cooldown or xenon burnout or other transient requirements.

4.3.2.2 Power Distribution. Full quantitative information on calcu lated "normal" power distributions, including distributions within typical assemblies, axial distributions, gross radial distributions (XY assembly patterns), and nonseparable aspects of radial and axial distributions should be presented.

4-6

Revision- 3 November 1978 A full range of both representative and limiting power density patterns related to representative and limiting conditions of such relevant parameters as power, flow, flow distribution, rod patterns, time in cycle (burnup and possible burnup distributions), cycle, burnable poison, and xenon should be covered in sufficient detail to ensure that normally anticipated distributions are fully described and that the effects of all parameters important in affecting distributions are displayed. This should include details of transient power shapes and magnitudes accom panying normal transients such as load following, xenon buildup, decay or redistribution, and xenon oscillation control. Describe the radial power distribution within a fuel pin and its variation with burnup if use is made of this in thermal calculations.

Discuss and assign specific magnitudes to errors or uncertainties that may be associated with these calculated distributions and present the experimental data, including results from both critical experiments and operating reactors that back up the analysis, likely distribution limits, and assigned uncertainty magnitudes. Experimental checks to be made on this reactor and the criteria for satisfactory results should be discussed.

The design power distributions (shapes and magnitudes) and the design peaking factors to be used in steady-state limit statements and transient analysis initial conditions should be given in detail. Include all relevant components and such variables as maximum allowable peaking factors vs.

axial position or changes over the fuel cycle. Justify the selections by a discussion of the relationship of these design assumptions to the previously presented expected and limiting distributions and uncertainty analysis.

Describe the relationship of these distributions to the monitoring instrumentation, discussing in detail the adequacy of the number of instru ments and their spatial deployment (including allowed failures); required correlations between readings and peaking factors, calibrations and errors, operational procedures and specific operational limits; axial and azimuthal asymmetry limits; limits for alarms, rod blocks, scrams, etc., to demon strate that sufficient information is available to determine, monitor, and limit distributions associated with normal operation to within proper limits. Describe in detail all calculations, computer codes, and computers used in the course of operations that are involved in translating power distribution-related measurements into calculated power distribution infor mation. Give the frequency with which the calculations are normally performed and execution times of the calculations. Describe the input data required for the codes. Present a full quantitative analysis of the uncertainties associated with the sources and processing of informa tion used to produce operational power distribution results. This should include consideration of allowed instrumentation failures.

4.3.2.3 Reactivity Coefficients. Full quantitative information on calculated reactivity coefficients, including fuel Doppler coefficient, moderator coefficients (density, temperature, pressure, void), and power 4-7

Revision 3 November 1978 coefficient should be presented. The precise definitions or assumptions relating to parameters involved, e.g., effective fuel temperature for Doppler, distinction between intra- and interassembly moderator coeffi cients, parameters held constant in power coefficient, spatial variation of parameter, and flux weighting used, should be stated. The information should be primarily in the form of curves covering the full applicable range of the parameters (density, temperature, pressure, void, power) from cold startup through limiting values used in accident analyses.

Quantitative discussions of both spatially uniform-parameter changes and these nonuniform parameter and flux weighting changes appropriate to operational and accident analyses and the methods used to treat nonuniform changes in transient analysis should be included.

Sufficient information should be presented to illustrate the normal and limiting values of parameters appropriate to operational and accident states, considering cycle, time in cycle, control rod insertions, boron content, burnable poisons, power distribution, moderator density, etc.

Potential uncertainties in the results of the calculations and experi mental results that back up the analysis and assigned uncertainty magni tudes and experimental checks to be made in this reactor should be discussed. Where limits on coefficients are especially important, e.g2, positive moderator coefficients in the power range, experimental checks on these limits should be fully detailed.

Present the coefficients actually used in transient analyses and show by reference to the previously discussed information and uncertainty analysis that suitably conservative values are used (1) for both beginning of life (BOL) and end of life (EOL) analyses, (2) where most negative or most positive (or least negative) coefficients are appropriate, and (3) where spatially nonuniform changes are involved.

4.3.2.4 Control Requirements. Tables and discussions relating to core reactivity balances for BOL, EOL, and, where appropriate, interme diate conditions should be provided. This should include consideration of such reactivity influences as control bank requirements and expected and minimum worths, burnable poison worths, soluble boron amounts and unit worths for various operating states, "stuck rod" allowance, moder ator and fuel temperature and void defects, burnup and fission products, xenon and samarium poisoning, pH effects, permitted rod insertions at power and error allowances. Required and expected shutdown margin as a function of time in cycle, along with uncertainties in the shutdown margin and experimental confirmations from operating reactors should be presented and discussed.

Methods, paths, and limits for normal operational control involving such areas as soluble poison concentration and changes, control rod motion, power shaping rod (e.g., part length rod) motion, and flow change should be described fully. This should include consideration of cold, hot, and peak xenon startup, load following and xenon reactivity control, power shaping (e.g., xenon redistribution or oscillation control), and burnup.

4t-03

Revision 3 November 1978 4.3.2.5 Control Rod Patterns and Reactivity Worths. Full informa tion on control rod patterns expected to be used throughout a fuel cycle should be presented. This should include details on separation into groups or banks if applicable, order and extent of withdrawal of individual rods or banks, limits, with justification, to be imposed on rod or bank posi tions as a function .of power level and/or time in cycle or for any other reason, expected positions of rods or banks for cold critical, hot standby critical, and for full power for both BOL and EOL. Describe allowable deviations from these patterns for misaligned or stuck rods or for any other-reason such as special power shaping. For the allowable patterns, including allowable deviations, indicate for various power and EOL and BOL conditions, the maximum worth of rods that might be postulated to be removed from the core in an ejection or drop accident and rods or rod banks that could be removed in rod withdrawal accidents, and give the worths of these rods as a function of position. Describe any experimental confirmation of these worths. Present maximum reactivity increase rates associated with these withdrawals. Describe fully and give the methods for calculating the scram reactivity as a function of time after scram signal, including consideration for Technical Specification scram times, stuck rods, power level and shape, time in cycle, and any other parameter important for bank reactivity worth and axial reactivity shape functions.

For BWRs, provide criteria for control rod velocity limiters and control rod worth minimizers.

4.3.2.6 Criticality of Reactor During Refueling. The maximum value of koff for the reactor during refueling should be stated. Describe the basi* or assuming that this maximum value will not be exceeded.

4.3.2.7 Stability. Information defining the degree of predicted stability with regard to xenon oscillations in both the axial direction and in the horizontal plane should be provided. If any form of xenon instability is predicted, include evaluations of higher mode oscillations.

Indicate in detail the analytic and experimental bases for the predictions.

Include an assessment of potential error in the predictions. Also, show how unexpected oscillations would be detectable before safety limits are exceeded.

Unambiguous positions regarding stability or lack thereof should be provided. That is, where stability is claimed, provide corroborating data from sufficiently similar power plants or provide commitments to demonstrate stability. Indicate criteria for determining whether the reactor will be stable or not. Where instability or marginal stability is predicted, provide details of how oscillations will be detected and controlled and provisions for protection-against exceeding safety limits.

Analyses of the overall reactor stability against power oscillations (other than xenon) should be provided.

4.3.2.8 Vessel Irradiation. The neutron flux distribution and spectrum in the core, at core boundaries, and at the pressure vessel wall for appro priate times in the reactor life for NVT determinations should be provided.

4-9

Revision 3 November 1978 4.3.3 Analytical Methods A detailed description of the analytical methods used in tne nuclear design, including those for predicting criticality, reactivity coefficients, and burnup effects should be provided. Computer codes used should be described in detail as to the name and the type of code, how it is used, and its validity based on critical experiments or confirmed predictions of operating plants. Code descriptions should include methods of obtain ing parameters such as cross sections. Estimates of the accuracy of the analytical methods should be included.

4.3.4 Changes Any changes in reactor core design features, calculational methods, data, or information relevant to determining important nuclear design parameters that depart from prior practice of the reactor designs should be listed along with affected parameters. Details of the nature and effects of the changes should be treated in appropriate subsections.

4.4 Thermal and Hydraulic Design 4.4.1 Design Bases The design bases for the thermal and hydraulic design of the reactor should be provided, including such items as maximum fuel and clad tempera tures and cladding-to-fuel gap characteristics as a function of burnup (at rated power, at design overpower, and during transients), critical heat flux ratio (at rated power, at design overpower, and during trans ients), flow velocities and distribution control, coolant and moderator voids, hydraulic stability, transient limits, fuel cladding integrity criteria, and fuel assembly integrity criteria.

4.4.2 Description of Thermal and Hydraulic Design of the Reactor Core A description of the thermal and hydraulic characteristics of the reactor design should be provided and should include information indi cated in the following sections.

4.4.2.1 Summary Comparison. A summary comparison of the thermal and hydraulic design parameters of the reactor with previously approved reactors of similar design should be provided. This should include, for example, primary coolant temperatures, fuel temperatures, maximum and average linear heat generation rates, critical heat flux ratios, critical heat flux correlations used, coolant velocities, surface heat fluxes, power densities, specific powers, surface areas, and flow areas.

4.4.2.2 Critical Heat Flux Ratios. The critical heat flux ratios for the core hot spot at normal full power and at design overpower con ditions should be provided. State the critical heat flux correlation used, analysis techniques, method of use, method of employing peaking factors, and comparison with other correlations.

4-10

Revision 3 November 1978 4.4.2.3 Linear Heat Generation Rate. The core-average linear heat generation rate (LHGR) and the maximum LHGR anywhere in the core should be provided. The method of utilizing hot channel factors and power distribution information to determine the maximum LHGR should be indicated.

4.4.2.4 Void Fraction Distribution. Curves showing the predicted radial and axial distribution of steam quality and steam void fraction in the core should be provided. State the predicted core average void fraction and the maximum void fraction anywhere in the core.

4.4.2.5 Core Coolant Flow Distribution. Coolant flow distribution and orificing and the basis on which orificing is designed relative to shifts in power production during core life should be described and discussed.

4.4.2.6 Core Pressure Drops and Hydraulic Loads. Core pressure drops and hydraulic loads during normal and accident conditions that are not addressed in Chapter 15 should be provided.

4.4.2.7 Correlation and Physical Data. The correlations and physical data employed in determining important characteristics such as heat transfer coefficients and pressure drop should be discussed.

4.4.2.8 Thermal Effects of Operational Transients. The capability of the core to withstand the thermal effects resulting from anticipated operational transients should be evaluated.

4.4.2.9 Uncertainties in Estimates. The uncertainties associated with estimating the peak or limiting conditions for thermal and hydraulic analysis (e.g., fuel temperature, clad temperature, pressure drops, and orificing effects) should be discussed.

4.4.2.10 Flux Tilt Considerations. Discuss the margin provided in the peaking factor to account for flux tilts to ensure that flux limits are not exceeded during operation. Describe plans for power reduction in the event of flux tilts and provide criteria for selection of a safe operating power level.

4.4.3 Description of the Thermal and Hydraulic Design of the Reactor Coolant System The thermal and hydraulic design of the reactor coolant system should be described in this section. The information indicated in the following sections should be included.

4.4.3.1 Plant Configuration Data. The following information on plant configuration and operation should be provided:

1. A description of the reactor coolant system, including isometric drawings that show the configuration and approximate dimensions of the reactor coolant system piping, 4-11

Revision 3 November 1978

2. A listing of all valves and pipe fittings (elbows, tees, etc.)

in the reactor coolant system,

3. Total coolant flow through each flowpath (total loop flow, core flow, bypass flow, etc.),
4. Total volume of each plant component, including ECCS components with sufficient detail in reactor vessel and the steam generator (for PWRs) to define each part (downcomer, lower plenum, upper head, etc.),
5. The flowpath length through each volume,
6. The height and liquid level of each volume,
7. The elevation of the bottom of each volume with respect to some reference elevation, preferably the centerline of the outer piping,
8. The line lengths and sizes of all safety injection lines,
9. Minimum flow areas of each component,
10. Steady-state pressure and temperature distribution throughout the system.

4.4.3.2 Operating Restrictions on Pumps. The operating restrictions that will be imposed on the coolant pumps to meet net positive suction head requirements should be stated.

4.4.3.3 Power-Flow Operating Map (BWR). For boiling water reactors, a power-flow operating map indicating the limits of reactor coolant system operation should be provided. This map should indicate the permissible operating range as bounded by minimum flow, design flow, maximum pump speed, and natural circulation.

4.4.3.4 Temperature-Power Operating Map (PWR). For pressurized water reactors, a temperature-power operating map should be provided.

The effects of reduced core flow due to inoperative pumps, including system capability during natural circulation conditions, should be indicated.

4.4.3.5 Load-Following Characteristics. The load-following charac teristics of the reactor coolant system and the techniques employed to provide this capability should be described.

4.4.3.6 Thermal and Hydraulic Characteristics Summary Table. A table summarizing the thermal and hydraulic characteristics of the reactor coolant system should be provided.

4-12

Revision 3 November 1978 4.4.4 Evaluation An evaluation of the thermal and hydraulic design of the reactor and the reactor coolant system should be provided. It should include the information indicated in the following sections.

4.4.4.1 Critical Heat Flux. The critical heat flux, departure from nucleate boiling, or critical power ratio correlation utilized in the core thermal and hydraulic analysis should be identified. The experi mental basis for the correlation should be described, preferably by refer ence to documents available to the NRC. The applicability of the correla tion to the proposed design should be discussed in the SAR. Particular emphasis should be placed on the effect of the grid spacer design, the calculational technique used to determine coolant mixing, and the effect of axial power distribution.

4.4.4.2 Core Hydraulics. The core hydraulics evaluation should include (1) a discussion of the results of flow model tests (with respect to pressure drop for the various flowpaths through the reactor and flow distributions at the core inlet), (2) the empirical correlation selected for use in analyses for both single-phase and two-phase flow conditions and the applicability over the range of anticipated reactor conditions, and (3) the effect of partial or total isolation of a loop.

4.4.4.3 Influence of Power Distribution. The influence of axial and radial power distributions on the thermal and hydraulic design should be discussed. An analysis to determine which fuel rods control the thermal limits of the reactor should be included.

4.4.4.4 Core Thermal Response. The thermal response of the core should be evaluated at rated power, at design overpower, and for expected transient conditions.

4.4.4.5 Analytical Methods. The analytical methods and data used to determine the reactor coolant system flow rate should be described.

This should include classical fluid mechanics relationships and empirical correlations. The description should include both single-phase and two phase fluid flow, as applicable. Estimates of the uncertainties in the calculations and the resultant uncertainty in reactor coolant system flow rate should be provided.

A comprehensive discussion of the analytical techniques used in evalu ating the core thermal-hydraulics, including estimates of uncertainties, should be provided. This discussion should include such items as hydraulic instability, the application of hot spot factors and hot channel factors, subchannel hydraulic analysis, effects of crud (in the core and in the reactor coolant system), and operation with one or more loops isolated.

Descriptions of computer codes may be included by reference to documents available to the NRC.

4-13

Revision 3 November 1978 4.4.5 Testing and Verification The testing and verification techniques to be used to ensure that the planned thermal and hydraulic design characteristics of the core and the reactor coolant system have been provided and will remain within required limits throughout core lifetime should be discussed. This discus sion should address the applicable portions of Regulatory Guide 1.68, "Initial Test Program for Water-Cooled Reactor Power Plants." References to the appropriate portions of Chapter 14 are acceptable.

4.4.6 Instrumentation Requirements The functional requirements for the instrumentation to be employed in monitoring and measuring those thermal-hydraulic parameters important to safety should be discussed. The requirements for in-core instrumenta tion to confirm predicted power density distribution and moderator tempe rature distributions, for example, should be included. Details of the instrumentation design and logic should be discussed in Chapter 7 of the SAR.

The vibration and loose-parts monitoring equipment to be provided in the plant should be described. The procedures to be used to detect excessive vibration and the occurrence of loose parts should be discussed.

4.5 Reactor Materials 4.5.1 Control Rod Drive System Structural Materials For the purpose of this section, the control rod drive system includes the control rod drive mechanism (CRDM) and extends to the coupling inter face with the reactivity control (poison) elements in the reactor vessel.

It does not include the electrical and hydraulic systems necessary for actuating the CRDMs. The information described below should be provided.

1. Materials Specifications
a. Provide a list of the materials and their specifications for each component of the control rod drive mechanism. Furnish informa tion regarding the mechanical properties of any material not included in Appendix I to Section III of the ASME B&PV Code or Regulatory Guide 1.85, "Materials Code Case Acceptability - ASME Section III Division 1," and provide justification for the use of such material.
b. State whether any of the following materials that have a yield strength greater than 90,000 psi are being used: cold-worked austenitic stainless steels, precipitation hardenable stainless steels, or hardenable martensitic stainless steels. If such materials are employed, identify their usage and provide evidence that stress-corrosion cracking will not occur during service life in components fabricated from the materials.

4-14

Revision 3 November 1978

2. Austenitic Stainless Steel Components
a. Provide a description of the processes, inspections, and tests on austenitic stainless steel components to ensure freedom from increased susceptibility to intergranular stress-corrosion cracking caused by sensitization. If special processing or fabrication methods subject the materials to temperatures between 800 and 1500*F, or involve slow cooling from temperatures over 1500 0 F, describe the processing or fabrica tion methods and provide justification to show that such treatment will not cause susceptibility to intergranular stress-corrosion cracking.

Indicate the degree of conformance to the recommendations of Regulatory Guide 1.44, "Control of the Use of Sensitized Stainless Steel." Provide justification for any deviations from these recommendations.

b. State the procedures and requirements that will be applied to prevent hot cracking in austenitic stainless steel welds, especially those procedures and requirements to control the delta ferrite content in weld filler metal and in completed welds. Indicate the degree of con formance to the recommendations of Regulatory Guide 1.31, "Control of Ferrite Content in Stainless Steel Weld Metal." Provide justification for any deviations from these recommendations.
3. Other Materials The tempering temperature of hardenable martensitic stainless steels and the aging temperature and aging time of precipitation-hardening stainless steels should be described. The processing and treatment of other special purpose materials such as cobalt-base alloys (Stellites),

Inconels, Colmonoys, and Graphitars should be described.

4. Cleaning and Cleanliness Control Provide details of the steps that will be taken in protecting austenitic stainless steel materials and parts of these systems during fabrication, shipping, and onsite storage to ensure that all cleaning solutions, processing compounds, degreasing agents, and detrimental con taminants are completely removed and that all parts are dried and properly protected following any flushing treatment with water. Indicate the degree of conformance to the recommendations of Regulatory Guide 1.37, "Quality Assurance Requirements for Cleaning of Fluid Systems and Associated Compo nents of Water-Cooled Nuclear Power Plants." Provide justification for any deviations from these recommendations.

4.5.2 Reactor Internals Materials This section should discuss the materials used for reactor internals and should include the information described below.

4.5.2.1 Materials Specifications. Provide a list of the materials and their specifications for major components of the reactor internals.

Include materials treated to enhance corrosion resistance, strength, and 4-15

Revision 3 November 1978 hardness. Furnish information regarding the mechanical properties of any material not included in Appendix I to Section III of the ASME B&PV Code and provide justification for the use of such material.

4.5.2.2 Controls on Welding. Indicate the controls that will be used when welding reactor internals components, and provide assurance that such welds will meet the acceptance criteria of Article NG-5000 of ASME B&PV Code Section III or alternative acceptance criteria that provide an acceptable level of safety.

4.5.2.3 Nondestructive Examination of Tubular Products and Fittings.

Indicate that the nondestructive examination procedures used for the examina tion of tubular products conform to the requirements of the ASME B&PV Code. Provide justification for any deviations from these requirements.

4.5.2.4 Fabrication and Processing of Austenitic Stainless Steel Components. Indicate the degree of conformance with the recommendations of Regulatory Guide 1.44, "Control of the Use of Sensitized Stainless Steel;" Regulatory Guide 1.31, "Control of Ferrite Content in Stainless Steel Weld Metal;" and Regulatory Guide 1.37, "Quality Assurance Require ments for Cleaning of Fluid Systems and Associated Components of Water Cooled Nuclear Power Plants." If alternative measures are used, show that they will provide the same assurance of component integrity as would be achieved by following the recommendations of the guides. Indicate the maximum yield strength of all cold worked stainless steels used in the reactor internals.

4.5.2.5 Other Materials. The tempering temperature of hardenable martensitic stainless steels and the aging temperatures and aging time of precipitation-hardening stainless steels should be described. The processing and treatment of other special purpose materials such as cobalt base alloys (Stellites), Inconels, and Colmonoys should be described.

4.6 Functional Design of Reactivity Control Systems Information should be presented to establish that the control rod drive system (CRDS), which includes the essential ancillary equipment and hydraulic systems, is designed and installed to provide the required functional performance and is properly isolated from other equipment.

Additionally, information should be presented to establish the bases for assessing the combined functional performance of all the reactivity con trol systems to mitigate the consequences of anticipated transients and postulated accidents.

These reactivity control systems include, in addition to the CRDS and the emergency core cooling system (ECCS), the chemical and volume control system (CVCS) and the emergency boration system (EBS) for pres surized water reactors and the standby liquid control system (SLCS) and the recirculation flow control system (RFCS) for boiling water reactors.

4-16

Revision 3 November 1978 4.6.1 Information for CRDS Information submitted should include drawings of the rod drive mechanism, layout drawings of the collective rod drive system, process flow diagrams, piping and instrumentation diagrams, component descriptions and character istics, and a description of the functions of all related ancillary equip ment and hydraulic systems. This information may be presented in conjunc tion with the information requested for Section 3.9.4.

4.6.2 Evaluations of the CRDS Failure mode and effects analyses of the CRDS should be presented in tabular form with supporting discussion to delineate the logic employed.

The failure analysis should demonstrate that the CRDS, which for purposes of these evaluations includes all essential ancillary equipment and hydraulic systems, can perform the intended safety functions with the loss of any single active component.

These evaluations and assessments should establish that all essential elements of the CRDS are identified and provisions made for isolation from nonessential CRDS elements. It should be established that all essential equipment is amply protected from common mode failures such as failure of moderate- and high-energy lines.

4.6.3 Testing and Verification of the CRDS A functional testing program should be presented. This should include rod insertion and withdrawal tests, thermal and fluid dynamic tests simulat ing postulated operating and accident conditions, and test verification of the CRDS with imposed single failures, as appropriate.

Preoperational and initial startup test programs should be presented.

The objectives, test methods, and acceptance criteria should be included.

4.6.4 Information for Combined Performance of Reactivity Systems Information consisting of piping and instrumentation diagrams, lay out drawings, process diagrams, failure analyses, descriptive material, and performance evaluations related to specific evaluations of the CVCS, the SLCS, and the RFCS is presented in other sections of the safety analysis report, e.g., 9.3.4 and 9.3.5. This section should include sufficient plan and elevation layout drawings to provide bases for establishing that the reactivity control systems (CRDS, ECCS, CVCS, SLCS, RFCS, EBS) when used in single or multiple redundant modes are not vulnerable to common mode failures.

Evaluations pertaining to the response of the plant to postulated process disturbances and to postulated malfunctions or failures of equip ment are presented in Chapter 15, "Accident Analyses." This section should include a list of all the postulated accidents evaluated in Chapter 15 that take credit for two or more reactivity control systems for preventing 4-17

Revision 3 November 1978 or mitigating each accident. The related reactivity systems should also be tabulated.

4.6.5 Evaluations of Combined Performance Evaluations of the combined functional performance for accidents where two or more reactivity systems are used should be presented.

neutronic, fluid dynamic, instrumentation, controls, time The sequencing, and other process-parameter-related features are presented primarily in Chapters 4, 7, and 15 of the safety analysis report. This section include failure analyses to demonstrate that the reactivity control should used redundantly are not susceptible to common mode failures. systems These analyses should consider failures originating within each reactivity failure system and from plant equipment other than reactivity systems control and should be presented in tabular form with supporting discussion and logic.

4-18

Revision 3 November 1978

5. REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM AND CONNECTED SYSTEMS This chapter of the SAR should provide information regarding the reactor coolant system and systems connected to i.t. Special considera tion should be given to the reactor coolant system and pressure-containing appendages out to and including isolation valving which is the "reactor coolant pressure boundary" (RCPB), as defined in paragraph 50.2(v) of 10 CFR Part 50.

Evaluations, together with the necessary supporting material, should be submitted to show that the reactor coolant system is adequate to accomplish its intended objective and to maintain its integrity under conditions imposed by all foreseeable reactor behavior, either normal or accident conditions. The information should permit a determination of the adequacy of the evaluations; that is, assurance that the evaluations included are correct and complete and all the evaluations needed have been made. Evaluations included in other chapters that have a bearing on the reactor coolant system should be referenced.

5.1 Summary Description A summary description of the reactor coolant system and its various components should be provided. The description should indicate the inde pendent and interrelated performance and safety functions of each compo nent. Include a tabulation of important design and performance characteristics.

5.1.1 Schematic Flow Diagram A schematic flow diagram of the reactor coolant system denoting all major components, principal pressures, temperatures, flow rates, and coolant volume under normal steady-state full power operating conditions should be provided.

5.1.2 Piping and Instrumentation Diagram Provide a piping and instrumentation diagram of the reactor coolant system and connected systems delineating the following:

1. The extent of the systems located within the containment,
2. The points of separation between the reactor coolant (heat transport) system and the secondary (heat utilization or removal) system, and
3. The extent of isolability of any fluid system as provided by the use of isolation valves between the radioactive and nonradioactive sections of the system, isolation valves between the RCPB and connected systems, and passive barriers between the RCPB and other systems.

5-1

Revision 3 November 1978 5.1.3 Elevation Drawing Provide an elevation drawing showing principal dimensions reactor coolant system in relation to the supporting or of the surrounding con crete structures from which a measure of the protection arrangement and the safety considerations incorporated afforded by the in the layout can be gained.

5.2 Integrity of Reactor Coolant Pressure Boundary This section should present discussions of the measures employed to provide and maintain the integrity of the to be reactor coolant pressure boundary (RCPB) for the plant design lifetime.

5.2.1 Compliance with Codes and Code Cases 5.2.1.1 Compliance with 10 CFR §50.55a. A table showing with the regulations of 10 CFR §50.55a, "Codes and Standards," compliance provided. This table should identify pressure vessel components,should be pumps, and valves. The applicable component code, code piping, edition, code addenda, and, when required, the component order date of tion III, Class 1 component within the reactor coolant each ASME Sec may be identified by reference to the table of structures,pressure boundary systems, and components in Section 3.2 of the SAR; alternatively, they in this section of the SAR. In the event there are cases may be included wherein conform ance to the regulations of §50.55a would result in hardships or unusual difficulties without a compensating increase in the level quality, a complete description of the circumstances of safety and resulting in such cases and the basis for proposed alternative requirements should provided. Describe how an acceptable level of safety and quality be be provided by the proposed alternative requirements. will 5.2.1.2 Applicable Code Cases. Provide a list of ASME interpretations that will be applied to components within Code Case the reactor coolant pressure boundary. Each component to which a Code applied should be identified by Code Case number, revision,Case has been Caution is advised in the use of Code Cases to ensure that and title.

revision of a Code Case is identified for each component the applicable Regulatory Guides 1.84, "Design and Fabrication Code Case application.

Acceptability ASME Section III Division 1," and 1.85, "Materials Code Case Acceptabil ity - ASME Section III Division 1," list those Section ASME Code Cases that are generally acceptable. The section III, Division 1, should indicate the extent of conformance with the recommendations of Regulatory Guides 1.84 and 1.85. If Code Cases other than those listed are their use will result in as acceptable a level of quality used, show that and safety for the component as would be achieved by following the recommendation of the guides.

5-2

Revision 3 November 1978 5.2.2 Overpressurization Protection The information cited below should be provided to accommodate an evaluation of the systems that protect the RCPB and the secondary side of steam generators from overpressurization. These systems include all pressure-relieving devices (safety and relief valves) for:

1. The reactor coolant system,
2. The primary side of auxiliary or emergency systems connected to the reactor coolant system,
3. Any blowdown or heat dissipation systems connected to the discharge of these pressure-relieving devices, and
4. The secondary side of steam generators.

5.2.2.1 Design Bases. Provide the design bases on which the func tional design of the overpressure protection system was established.

Identify the postulated events or transients on which the design require ments are based, including:

1. The extent of simultaneous occurrences,
2. The assumptions regarding initial plant conditions and system parameters, and
3. A list of all systems that could initiate during the postulated event and the initiating and trip signals.

5.2.2.2 Design Evaluation. An evaluation of the functional design of the overpressurization system should be provided. Present an analysis of the capability of the system to perform its function. Describe the analytical model used in the analysis and discuss the bases for its validity. Discuss and justify the assumptions used in the analysis, including the plant initial conditions and system parameters. List the systems and equipment assumed to operate and describe their performance characteristics. Provide studies that show the sensitivity of the perform ance of the system to variations in these conditions, parameters, and performance.

5.2.2.3 Piping and Instrumentation Diagrams. Provide piping and instrumentation diagrams for the overpressure protection system showing the number and location of all components, including valves, piping, tanks, instrumentation, andcontrols. Connections and other interfaces with other systems should be indicated.

5.2.2.4 Equipment and Component Description. Describe the equip ment and components of the overpressure protection system, including schematic drawings of the safety and relief valves and a discussion of how the valves operate. Identify the significant design parameters for 5-3

Revision 3 November 1978 each component, including the design, throat area, capacity, and set point of the valves and the diameter, length, and routing of piping. List the design parameters (e.g., pressure and temperature) for each component.

Specify the number and type of operating cycles for which each component is designed. The environmental conditions (e.g. , temperature and humidity) for which the components are designed should also be specified.

5.2.2.5 Mounting of Pressure-Relief Devices. Describe the design and installation details of the mounting of the pressure-relief devices within the reactor coolant pressure boundary and the secondary side of steam generators. Specify the design bases for the assumed loads (i.e.,

thrust, bending, and torsion) imposed on the valves, nozzles, and con nected piping in the event all valves discharge. Describe how these loads can be accommodated; include a listing of these loads and result ing stresses. Material contained in Section 3.9.3.3 may be incorporated by reference.

5.2.2.6 Applicable Codes and Classification. Identify the appli cable industry codes and classifications applied to the system.

5.2.2.7 Material Specification. The material specifications for each component should be identified.

5.2.2.8 Process Instrumentation. Identify all process instrumen tation.

5.2.2.9 System Reliability. The reliability of the system and the consequences of failures should be discussed.

5.2.2.10 Testing and Inspection. Identify the tests and inspec tions to be performed (1) prior to operation and during startup which demonstrate the functional performance and (2) as inservice surveillance to ensure continued reliability.

5.2.3 Reactor Coolant Pressure Boundary Materials 5.2.3.1 Material Specifications. Provide a list of specifications for the principal ferritic materials, austenitic stainless steels, and nonferrous metals, including bolting and weld materials, to be used in fabricating and assembling each component (e.g., vessels, piping, pumps, and valves) that is part of the reactor coolant pressure boundary (RCPB),

excluding the reactor pressure vessel. Identify the grade or type and final metallurgical condition of the material placed in service.

5.2.3.2 Compatibility with Reactor Coolant. Provide the following information relative to compatibility of the reactor coolant with the materials of construction and the external insulation of the RCPB:

1. PWR reactor coolant chemistry (for PWRs only). Provide a descrip tion of the chemistry of the reactor coolant and the additives (such as inhibitors). Describe water chemistry, including maximum allowable content 5-4

Revision 3 November 1978 of chloride, fluoride, and oxygen and permissible content of hydrogen and soluble poisons. Discuss methods to control water chemistry, including pH.

2. BWR reactor coolant chemistry (for BWRs only). Describe the chemistry of the reactor coolant and the methods for maintaining coolant chemistry. Provide sufficient information about allowable range and maxi mum allowable chloride and fluoride contents, maximum allowable conductiv ity, pH range, location of conductivity meters, performance monitoring, and other details of the coolant chemistry program to indicate whether coolant chemistry will be maintained at a level comparable to the recom mendations in Regulatory Guide 1.56, "Maintenance of Water Purity in Boiling Water Reactors."
3. Compatibility of construction materials with reactor coolant.

Provide a list of the materials of construction exposed to the reactor coolant and a description of material compatibility with the coolant, contaminants, and radiolytic products to which the materials may be exposed. If nonmetallics are exposed to the reactor coolant, include a description of the compatibility of these materials with the coolant.

4. Compatibility of construction materials with external insula tion and reactor coolant. Provide a list of the materials of construction of the RCPB and a description of their compatibility with the external insulation, especially in the event of a coolant leakage. Provide suffi cient information about the selection, procurement, testing, storage, and installation of any nonmetallic thermal insulation for austenitic stainless steel to indicate whether the concentrations of chloride, fluoride, sodium, and silicate in thermal insulation will be within the ranges recom mended in Regulatory Guide 1.36, "Nonmetallic Thermal Insulation for Aus tenitic Stainless Steel." Provide information on the leachable contaminants in insulation on nonaustenitic piping.

5.2.3.3 Fabrication and Processing of Ferritic Materials. Provide the following information relative to fabrication and processing of ferritic materials used for components of the RCPB:

1. Fracture toughness. In regard to fracture toughness of the ferritic materials, including bolting materials for components (e.g.,

vessels, piping, pumps, and valves) of the RCPB, indicate how compliance with the test and acceptance requirements of Appendix G to 10 CFR Part 50 and with Section NB-2300 and Appendix G of the ASME Code,Section III, is achieved. Submit the fracture toughness data in tabular form, including information regarding the calibration of instruments and equipment (FSAR).

2. Control of welding. Provide the following information relative to control of welding of ferritic materials used for components of the RCPB:
a. Sufficient information regarding the avoidance of cold cracking during welding of low-alloy steel components of the RCPB to 5-5

Revision 3 November 1978 indicate whether the degree of weld integrity and quality will be com parable to that obtainable by following the recommendations of Regulatory Guides 1.50, "Control of Preheat Temperature for Welding of Low-Alloy Steel," and 1.43, "Control of Stainless Steel Weld Cladding of Low-Alloy Steel Components." Provide details on proposed minimum preheat tempera ture and maximum interpass temperature during procedure qualification and production welding. Provide information on the moisture control for low-hydrogen, covered-arc-welding electrodes.

b. Sufficient information for electroslag welds in the low-alloy steel components of the RCPB to indicate whether the degree of weld integ rity and quality will be comparable to that obtainable by following the recommendations of Regulatory Guide 1.34, "Control of Electroslag Weld Properties." Provide details on the control of welding variables and the metallurgical tests required during procedure qualification and pro duction welding.
c. In regard to welding and weld repair during fabrication and assembly of ferritic steel components of the RCPB, provide suffi cient details for welder qualification for areas of limited accessibil ity, requalification, and monitoring of production welding for adherence to welding qualification requirements to indicate whether the degree of weld integrity and quality will be comparable to that obtainable by following the recommendations of Regulatory Guide 1.71, "Welder Qualifi cation for Areas of Limited Accessibility."
3. Nondestructive examination. Provide sufficient information on nondestructive examination of ferritic steel tubular products (pipe, tubing, flanges, and fittings) for components of the RCPB to indicate whether detection of unacceptable defects (regardless of defect shape, orientation, or location in the product) will be in conformance with the requirements of the ASME Code.

5.2.3.4 Fabrication and Processing of Austenitic Stainless Steels.

Provide the following information relative to fabrication and processing of austenitic stainless steels for components of the RCPB:

1. Avoidance of stress-corrosion cracking. Provide the following information relative to avoidance of stress-corrosion cracking of aus tenitic stainless steels for components of the RCPB during all stages of component manufacture and reactor construction:
a. Sufficient details about the avoidance of sensitization during fabrication and assembly of austenitic stainless steel components of the RCPB to indicate whether the degree of freedom from sensitization will be comparable to that obtainable by following the recommendations of Regulatory Guide 1.44, "Control of the Use of Sensitized Stainless Steel." Provide a description of materials (including provision for 5%

minimum delta ferrite when required), welding and heat treating processes, inspections, and tests.

5-6

Revision 3 November 1978

b. Sufficient details about the process controls to minimize exposure to contaminants capable of causing stress-corrosion cracking of austenitic stainless steel components of the RCPB to show whether the process controls will provide, during all stages of component manufacture and reactor construction, a degree of surface cleanliness comparable to that obtainable by following the recommendations of Regulatory Guide 1.44 and Regulatory Guide 1.37, "Quality Assurance Requirements for Cleaning of Fluid Systems and Associated Components of Water-Cooled Nuclear Power Plants."
c. Characteristics and mechanical properties of cold-worked austenitic stainless steels for components of the RCPB. If such steels are employed at yield strength levels greater than 90,000 psi, provide assurance that they will be compatible with the reactor coolant.
2. Control of welding. Provide the following information relative to the control of welding of austenitic stainless steels for components of the RCPB:
a. Sufficient information about the avoidance of hot cracking (fissuring) during weld fabrication and assembly of austenitic stainless steel components of the RCPB to indicate whether the degree of weld integ rity and quality will be comparable to that obtainable by following the recommendations of Regulatory Guide 1.31, "Control of Ferrite Content in Stainless Steel Weld Metal." Describe the requirements regarding welding procedures and the amount of and method of determining delta ferrite in weld filler metals and in qualification welds.
b. Sufficient information about electroslag welds in tenitic stainless steel components of the RCPB to indicate whether aus the degree of weld integrity and quality will be comparable to that obtain able by following the recommendations of Regulatory Guide 1.34. Provide details on the control of welding variables and the metallurgical tests required during procedure qualification and production welding.
c. In regard to welding and weld repair during fabrication and assembly of austenitic stainless steel components of the RCPB, pro vide sufficient details about welder qualification for areas of limited accessibility, requalification, and monitoring of production welding for adherence to welding qualification requirements to indicate whether the degree of weld integrity and quality will be comparable to that obtain able by following the recommendations of Regulatory Guide 1.71.
3. Nondestructive examination. Provide sufficient information about the program for nondestructive examination of austenitic stainless steel tubular products (pipe, tubing, flanges, and fittings) for compo nents of the RCPB to indicate whether detection of unacceptable defects (regardless of defect shape, orientation, or location in the product) will be in conformance with the requirement of the ASME Code.

5-7

Revision 3 November 1978 5.2.4 Inservice Inspection and Testing of Reactor Coolant Pressure Boundary This section should discuss the inservice inspection and testing program for the NRC Quality Group A components (ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code,Section III, Class 1 components). Provide sufficient detail to show that the inservice inspection program meets the requirements of Section XI of the ASME Code. Areas to be discussed should include:

1. System boundary subject to inspection, including associated component supports, structures, and bolting,
2. Arrangement of systems and components to provide accessibility,
3. Examination techniques and procedures, including any special techniques and procedures that might be used to meet the Code requirement,
4. Inspection intervals,
5. Inservice inspection program categories and requirements,
6. Evaluation of examination results, and
7. System leakage and hydrostatic pressure tests.

In the FSAR, a detailed inservice inspection program, including infor mat 4 on on areas subject to examination, method of examination, and extent and frequency of examination, should be provided in Chapter 16, "Technical Specifications."

5.2.5 Detection of Leakage Through Reactor Coolant Pressure Boundary The program should be described and sufficient leak detection system information should be furnished to indicate the extent to which the recom mendations of Regulatory Guide 1.45, "Reactor Coolant Pressure Boundary Leakage Detection Systems," have been followed.

Specifically, provide information that will permit comparison with the regulatory positions of the guide, giving a detailed description of the systems employed, their sensitivity and response time, and the reli ance placed on their proper functioning. Also, the limiting leakage con ditions that will be included in the technical specifications should be provided.

Identify the leakage detection systems tnat are designed to meet the sensitivity and response guidelines of Regulatory Guide 1.45. Describe these systems as discussed in Section 7.5, "Safety-Related Display Instru mentation." Also, identify these systems that are used for alarm as an indirect indication of leakage, and provide the design criteria.

5-8

Revision 3 November 1978 Describe how signals from the various leakage detection systems are correlated to provide information to the plant operators on conditions of quantitative leakage flow rate.

Discuss the provisions for testing and calibration of the leak detec tion systems.

5.3 Reactor Vessels 5.3.1 Reactor Vessel Materials This section should contain pertinent data in enough detail to provide assurance that the materials, fabrication methods, and inspection techniques used for the reactor vessel conform to all applicable regulations.

The PSAR should describe the specifications and criteria to be applied, whereas the FSAR should demonstrate that these requirements have been met.

5.3.1.1 Material Specifications. List all materials in the reactor vessel and its appurtenances and provide the applicable material specifi cations, making appropriate references to Section 5.2.3. If any materials other than those listed in Appendix I to the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code,Section III, are used, provide the data called for under Appendix IV for approval of the new material. Information provided in Section 5.2.3.1 may be incorporated by reference.

5.3.1.2 Special Processes Used for Manufacturing and Fabrication.

Describe the manufacture of the product forms and the methods used to fabricate the vessel. Discuss any special or unusual processes used, and show that they will not compromise the integrity of the reactor vessel.

5.3.1.3 Special Methods for Nondestructive Examination. Describe in detail all special procedures for detecting surface and internal disconti nuities with emphasis on procedures that differ from those in Section III of the Code. Pay particular attention to calibration methods, instrumen tation, method of application, sensitivity, reliability, reproducibility, and acceptance standards.

5.3.1.4 Special Controls for Ferritic and Austenitic Stainless Steels.

Making appropriate references to Section 5.2.3, describe controls on weld ing, composition, heat treatments, and similar processes covered by regu latory guides to verify that these recommendations or equivalent controls are employed. The following regulatory guides should be addressed:

Regulatory Guide 1.31, "Control of Ferrite Content in Stainless Steel Weld Metal;"

Regulatory Guide 1.34, "Control of Electroslag Weld Properties;"

5-9

Revision 3 November 1978 Regulatory Guide 1.43, "Control of Stainless Steel Weld Cladding of Low-Alloy Steel Components;"

Regulatory Guide 1.44, "Control of the Use of Sensitized Stainless Steel;"

Regulatory Guide 1.50, "Control of Preheat Temperature for Welding of Low-Alloy Steel;"

Regulatory Guide 1.71, "Welder Qualification for Areas of Limited Accessibility;" and Regulatory Guide 1.99, "Effects of Residual Elements on Predicted Radiation Damage to Reactor Vessel Materials."

5.3.1.5 Fracture Toughness. Describe the fracture testing and accept ance criteria specified for materials of the reactor vessel. In particular, describe how the toughness requirements of Appendix G to 10 CFR Part 50 will be met.

In the FSAR, report the results of fracture toughness tests on all ferritic materials of the reactor vessel, and demonstrate that the mate rial toughness meets all requirements.

5.3.1.6 Material Surveillance. Describe the material surveillance program in detail. Provide assurance that the program meets the require ments of Appendix H to 10 CFR Part 50. In particular, consider the follow ing subjects:

1. Basis for selection of material in the program,
2. Number and type of specimens in each capsule,
3. Number of capsules and proposed withdrawal schedule,
4. Neutron flux and fluence calculations for the vessel wall and surveillance specimens,
5. Expected effects of radiation on the vessel wall materials and the basis for this estimation, and
6. Location of capsules, method of attachment, and provisions to ensure that capsules will be retained in position throughout the life time of the vessel.

5.3.1.7 Reactor Vessel Fasteners. Describe the materials and design of fasteners for the reactor vessel closure. Include enough detail regarding materials property requirements, nondestructive evaluation procedures, lubricants or surface treatments, and protection provisions to show that the recommendations of Regulatory Guide 1.65, "Materials and Inspections for Reactor Vessel Closure Studs," or equivalent measures, are followed.

5-10

Revision 3 November 1978 In the FSAR, include the results of mechanical property and tough ness tests to demonstrate that the material conforms to these recommen dations or their equivalent.

5.3.2 Pressure-Temperature Limits This section should describe the bases for setting operational limits on pressure and temperature for normal, upset, and test conditions.

It should provide detailed assurance that Appendices G and H to 10 CFR Part 50 will be complied with throughout the life of the plant.

5.3.2.1 Limit Curves. Provide limits on pressure and temperature for the following conditions:

1. Preservice system hydrostatic tests,
2. Inservice leak and hydrostatic tests,
3. Normal operation, including heatup and cooldown, and
4. Reactor core operation.

If procedures or criteria other than those recommended in the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code are used, show that equivalent safety margins are provided.

In the PSAR, describe the bases used to determine these limits, provide typical curves with temperatures relative to the RT and (as defined in paragraph NB-2331 of Section III of the ASME Code) o 3fP e limiting material.

In the FSAR and technical specifications, include the actual material toughness test results, and provide limits based on these properties and the predicted effects of irradiation. Describe the bases used for the prediction, and indicate the extent to which the recommendations of Regu latory Guide 1.99 are followed.

Describe the procedures that will be used to update these limits during service, taking into account radiation effects.

5.3.2.2 Operating Procedures. Compare the pressure-temperature limits in Section 5.3.2.1 with intended normal operating procedures, and show that the limits will not be exceeded during any foreseeable upset condition.

5.3.3 Reactor Vessel Integrity This section should contain any important information about vessel integrity not covered in other sections. In addition, it should summarize the major considerations in achieving reactor vessel safety and describe the factors contributing to the vessel's integrity.

5-11

Revision 3 November 1978 The introductory material should identify the reactor vessel designer and manufacturer and should describe their experience.

5.3.3.1 Design. Include a brief description of the basic design, preferably with a simple schematic showing materials, construction features, and fabrication methods. Summarize applicable design codes and bases.

Reference other sections of the SAR as appropriate.

5.3.3.2 Materials of Construction. Note briefly the materials used and describe any special requirements to improve their properties or quality.

Emphasize the reasons for selection and provide assurance of suitability.

5.3.3.3 Fabrication Methods. Summarize the fabrication methods.

Describe the service history of vessels constructed using these methods and the vessel supplier's experience with the procedures.

5.3.3.4 Inspection Requirements. Summarize the inspection require ments, paying particular attention to the level of initial integrity.

Describe any examination methods used that are, in addition to the minimum requirements of Section III of the ASME Code.

5.3.3.5 Shipment and Installation. Summarize the means used to protect the vessel so that its as-manufactured integrity will be main tained during shipment and installation. Reference other sections of the SAR as appropriate.

5.3.3.6 Operating Conditions. Summarize the operational limits that will be specified to ensure vessel safety. Provide a basis for con cluding that vessel integrity will be maintained during the most severe postulated transients, or reference other appropriate SAR sections.

5.3.3.7 Inservice Surveillance. Making appropriate reference to Section 5.2.4, summarize the inservice inspection and material surveil lance programs and explain why they are adequate.

5.4 Component and Subsystem Design This section should present discussions of the performance require ments and design features to ensure overall safety of the various compo nents within the reactor coolant system and subsystems closely allied with the reactor coolant system.

Because these components and subsystems differ for various types and designs o- reactors, the Standard Format does not assig, specific subsection numbers to each of these components or subsystems. The appli cant should provide separate subsections (numbered 5.4.1 through 5.4.X) for each principal component or subsystem. The discussion in each sub section should present the design bases, description, evaluation, and necessary tests and inspections for the component or subsystem, including a discussion of the radiological considerations for each subsystem from a viewpoint of how radiation affects the operation of the subsystem and 5-12

Revision 3 November 1978 from a viewpoint of how radiation levels affect the operators and capa bilities of operation and maintenance. Appropriate details of the mechanical design should be described in Sections 3.7, 3.9, and 5.2.

The following paragraphs provide examples of components and subsys tems that should be discussed as appropriate to the individual plant and identify some specific information that should be provided in addition to the items identified above.

5.4.1 Reactor Coolant Pumps In addition to the discussion of design bases, tions, and tests and inspections, the provisions description, evalua taken to preclude rotor overspeeding of the reactor coolant pumps in the event of a design basis LOCA should be discussed.

5.4.1.1 Pump Flywheel Integrity (PWR). The applicant should provide explicit information to indicate the extent to which the recommendations of Regulatory Guide 1.14, "Reactor Coolant Pump Flywheel Integrity," are followed in the design, testing, and inservice inspection of the reactor coolant pump flywheels.

5.4.2 Steam Generators (PWR)

The information provided should include estimates for radioactivity levels in the secondary side of design limits of the steam generators during normal operation and the bases for these estimates. The potential effects of tube ruptures should be discussed.

Provide the steam generator design criteria used to prevent unaccept able tube damage from flow-induced vibration and cavitation. Information included in Section 3.9.3 should be referenced in this section. The fol lowing specific information should be included:

1. The design conditions and transients the design of the steam generator tubes and the that will be specified in operating condition cate gory selected (e.g., upset, emergency, or faulted) that defines the allow able stress intensity limits to be used and the justification for this selection.
2. The extent of tube-wall thinning that could be tolerated without exceeding the allowable stress intensity limits defined above under the postulated condition of a design basis pipe break in the reactor coolant pressure boundary or a break in the secondary piping during reactor operation.

5.4.2.1 Steam Generator Materials. This section should contain information on the selection and fabrication of Code Class 1 and 2 steam generator materials (including those that are part of the reactor coolant pressure boundary), the design aspects of the steam generator that affect 5-13

Revision 3 November 1978 materials performance, and the compatibility of the steam generator materials with the primary and secondary coolant.

1. Selection and Fabrication of Materials. Making appropriate references to Section 5.2.3, provide information on the selection and fabrication of materials for Code Class 1 and 2 components of the steam generators, including tubing, tube sheet, channel head casting or plate, tube sheet and channel head cladding, forged nozzles, shell pressure plates, access plates (manway and handhole), and bolting. Indicate the method used to fasten tubes to the tube sheet and show that it meets the require ments of Sections III and IX of the ASME Code. Include the extent of tube expansion and the methods of expansion used. Describe onsite cleaning and cleanliness control provisions, and show that they produce results equivalent to those obtained by following the recommendations of Regula tory Guide 1.37 and ANSI Standard N45.21-1973, "Cleaning of Fluid Systems and Associated Components for Nuclear Power Plants." For steam generators that are shipped partially assembled, include a discussion of the tech niques used to maintain cleanliness during shipment and final assembly.

List the Code Cases used in material selection. Technical justification for any Code Cases not listed in Regulatory Guide 1.85, "Materials Code Case Acceptability - ASME Section III Division 1," should be provided.

Provide information on the fracture toughness properties of ferritic materials, making appropriate references to Section 5.2.3. Sufficient information on materials for Class 1 components should be given to show that they meet the requirements of Article NB-2300 and Appendix G of Sec tion III of the ASME Code. Sufficient information on Class 2 materials should be provided to show the extent to which they meet the requirements of Article NC-2300 of Section III of the Code.

2. Steam Generator Design. Provide information on those aspects of steam generator design that may affect the performance of steam generator materials. Describe the methods used to avoid extensive crevice areas where the tubes pass through the tube sheet and tubing supports.
3. Compatibility of the Steam Generator Tubing with the Primary and Secondary Coolant. Provide information on the compatibility of the steam generator tubing with both the primary and secondary coolant.
4. Cleanup of Secondary Side. Describe the procedures and methods used to remove surface deposits, sludge, and excessive corrosion products in the secondary side.

5.4.2.2 Steam Generator Inservice Inspection. In this section, the PSAR should describe the provisions in the design of the steam gener ators to permit inservice inspection of all Code Class 1 and 2 components, including individual steam generator tubes. The FSAR should describe detailed plans for baseline and inservice inspections of all Code Class I 1 and 2 components making appropriate references to Section 5.2.4.

5-14

Revision 3 November 1978

1. Compliance with Section XI of the ASME Code. Provide sufficient information on the proposed inservice inspection program for Code Class 1 and 2 components of the steam generators to show that it complies with the edition of Section XI of the ASME Code, Division 1, "Rules for Inspec tion and Testing of Components of Light-Water-Cooled Plants," required by 10 CFR 50.55a, paragraph g.
2. Program for Inservice Inspection of Steam Generator Tubing.

Provide sufficient information in the FSAR on the inservice inspection program for steam generator tubing to show that it will be at least as effective as the program recommended in Regulatory Guide 1.83, "Inservice Inspection of Pressurized Water Reactor Steam Generator Tubes." The information provided should include a description of the equipment, pro cedures, sensitivity of the examination, and recording methods; criteria used to select tubes for examination; inspection intervals; and actions that will be taken if defects are found (including criteria for plugging defective tubes).

5.4.3 Reactor Coolant Piping The section on reactor coolant piping should present an overall description of this system, making appropriate references to detailed information *on criteria, methods, and materials provided in Chapter 3 and Section 5.2.3. The discussion should include the provisions taken during design, fabrication, and operation to control those factors that contribute to stress corrosion cracking.

5.4.4 Main Steam Line Flow Restrictions 5.4.5 Main Steam Line Isolation System Include discussion of provisions, such as seal systems, taken to reduce the potential leakage of radioactivity to the environment in the event of a main steam line break.

5.4.6 Reactor Core Isolation Cooling System 5.4.6.1 Design Bases. A summary description of the reactor core isolation cooling (RCIC) system should be provided. The RCIC system design bases and criteria for both the steamside and pumpside should be specified, and in particular discuss:

1. The design bases with respect to General Design Criteria 34, 55, 56, and 57.
2. Design bases concerned with reliability and operability require ments. The design bases for the manual operations required to operate the system should be described.
3. Design bases for RCIC operation following a loss of offsite power event.

5-15

Revision 3 November 1978

4. The design bases established for the purpose of protecting the RCIC system from physical damage. This discussion should include the design bases for the RCIC system support structure and for protection aganst incidents that could fail RCIC and high pressure core spray (HPCS) jointly.

5.4.6.2 System Design. This section should include:

1. Schematic Piping and Instrumentation Diagrams. Provide a descrip tion of the RCIC system. Provide piping and instrumentation diagrams showing all components, piping, points where connecting systems and sub systems tie together, and instrumentation and controls associated with subsystem and component actuation. Provide a complete description of component interlocks. Provide a diagram showing temperatures, pressures, and flow rates for RCIC operation.
2. Equipment and Component Descriptions. Describe each component of the system. Identify the significant design parameters for each com ponent. State the design pressure and temperature of components for various portions of the system and explain the bases for their selection.
3. Applicable Codes and Classifications. Identify the applicable industry codes and classifications for the system design.
4. System Reliability Considerations. Discuss the provisions incorporated in the design to ensure that the system will operate when needed and will deliver the required flow rates.
5. Manual Actions. Discuss all manual actions required to be taken by an operator in order for the RCIC system to operate properly, assuming all components are operable. Identify any actions that are required to be taken from outside the control room. Repeat this discussion for the most limiting single failure in the combined RCIC and HPCS system.

5.4.6.3 Performance Evaluation. Provide an evaluation of the ability of the RCIC system to perform its function. Describe the analytical methods used and clearly state all assumptions.

5.4.6.4 Preoperational Testing. The proposed preoperational test program should be discussed. The discussion should identify test objec tives, method of testing, and test acceptance criteria.

5.4.7 Residual Heat Removal System 5.4.7.1 Design Bases. A summary description of the residual heat removal (RHR) system should be provided. Nuclear plants employing the same RHR system design that are operating or have been licensed should be referenced. The design basis should be specified, including:

1. Functional design bases, including the time required to reduce the reactor coolant system (RCS) temperature to approximately 212*F, and 5-16

Revision 3 November 1978 to a temperature that would permit refueling. The design basis times should be presented for the case where the entire RHR system is operable and for the case with the most limiting single failure in the RHR system.

2. The design bases for the isolation of the RHR system from RCS. the These isolation design bases should include any interlocks that are provided. The design bases regarding prevention of RHR pump damage in event of closure of the isolation valves should be discussed.
3. The design basis for the pressure relief capacity of the RHR system. These design bases should consider limiting transients, equip ment malfunctions, and possible operator errors during plant startup and cooldown when the RHR system is not isolated from the RCS.
4. The design bases with respect to General Design Criterion 5.
5. Design bases concerned with reliability and operability ments. The design bases regarding the manual operations require required to operate the system should be described with emphasis on any operations that cannot be performed from the control room in the event of a single failure.

Protection against single failure in terms of piping arrangement and layout, selection of valve types and locations, redundancy of various system com ponents, redundancy of power supplies, and redundancy of instrumentation should be described. Protection against valve motor flooding and spurious single failures should be described.

6. The design bases established for the purpose of protecting the RHR system from physical damage. This discussion should include the design bases for the RHR system support structure and for protection against incidents and accidents that could render redundant components inoperative (e.g., fires, pipe whip, internally generated missiles, loss-of-coolant accident loads, seismic events).

5.4.7.2 System Design.

1. Schematic Piping and Instrumentation Diagrams. Provide a description of the RHR system, including piping and instrumentation grams showing all components, piping, points where connecting dia systems and subsystems tie together, and instrumentation and controls associated with subsystem and component actuation. Provide a complete description of component interlocks. Provide a mode diagram showing temperatures, pressures, and flow rates for each mode of RHR operation (for example, in a BWR, the RCIC condensing mode).
2. Equipment and Component Descriptions. Describe each component of the system. Identify the significant design parameters for each com ponent. State the design pressure and temperature of components various portions of the system, and explain the bases for for their selection.

Provide pump characteristic curves and pump power requirements.

Specify the available and required net positive suction head for the RHR pumps.

Describe heat exchanger characteristics, including design flow rates, 5-17

Revision 3 November 1978 inlet and outlet temperatures for the cooling fluid and for the fluid being cooled, the overall heat transfer coefficient, and the heat trans fer area. Identify each component of the RHR system that is also a portion of some other system (e.g. , ECCS).

3. Control. State the RHR system relief valve capacity and settings, and state the method of collection of fluids discharged through the relief valve. Describe provisions with respect to the control circuits for motor operated isolation valves in the RHR system, including consideration of inadvertent actuation. This description should include discussions of the controls and interlocks for these values (e.g. , intent of IEEE Std 279 1971), considerations for automatic valve closure (e.g. , RCS pressure exceeds design pressure of residual heat removal system), valve position indications, and valve interlocks and alarms.
4. Applicable Codes and Classifications. Identify the applicable industry codes and classifications for the system design.
5. System Reliabiity Considerations. Discuss the provisions incor porated in the design to ensure that the system will operate when needed and will deliver the required flow rates (e.g., redundancy and separation of components and power sources).
6. Manual Actions. Discuss all manual actions required to be taken by an operator in order for the RHR system to operate properly with all components assumed to be operable. Identify any actions that are required to be taken from outside the control room. Repeat this discussion for the most limiting single failure in the RHR system.

5.4.7.3 Performance Evaluation. Provide an evaluation of the ability of the RHR system to reduce the temperature of the reactor coolant at a rate consistent with the design basis (5.4.7.1, item 1).

Describe the analytical methods used and clearly state all assump tions. Provide curves showing the reactor coolant temperature as a function of time for the following cases:

1. All RHR system components are operable.
2. The most limiting single failure has occurred in the RHR system.

5.4.7.4 Preoperational Testing. The proposed preoperational test program should be discussed. The discussion should identify test objec tives, method of testing, and test acceptance criteria.

5.4.8 Reactor Water Cleanup System (BWRs)

This section should describe the processing capabilities and the safety-related functions of the reactor water cleanup system of a BWR.

5-18

Revision 3 November 1978 5.4.8.1 Design Bases. The PSAR should provide tives and design criteria for the reactor water the design objec cleanup system in terms of (1) maintaining reactor water purity within tory Guide 1.56, "Maintenance of Water Purity the guidelines of Regula in Boiling Water Reactors,"

(2) providing system isolation capabilities to maintain the integrity of the reactor pressure boundary, and (3) precluding when the poison is required for reactor shutdown. liquid poison removal The PSAR should describe how the requirements of 10 CFR Part 50 will indicate the extent to which the recommendationsbe implemented and should "Quality Group Classifications and Standards of Regulatory Guide 1.26, for Radioactive-Waste-Containing Components of NuclearWater-, Steam-, and Regulatory Guide 1.29, "Seismic Design Classification,"Power Plants," and will be followed.

5.4.8.2 System Description. In the PSAR, each described and its capacity provided. component should be The processing routes and the expected and design flow rates should be indicated.

mentation and controls provided to (1) isolate Describe the instru the reactor coolant pressure boundary, (2) isolate the system to maintain the liquid poison system is needed for reactor the system in the event shutdown, and (3) monitor, control, and annunciate abnormal conditions concerning ature and differential pressure across filter/demineralizer the system temper resin strainers. units and Indicate the means to be used for "holding" demineralizer beds intact if system flow is reduced filter/

features to prevent inadvertent opening of the or lost. Any control wash valves during normal operation should filter/demineralizer back be described. Describe the resin transfer system and indicate the provisions transfers are complete and that crud traps in taken to ensure that transfer ated. For systems using other than filter/demineralizer lines are elimin priate information should be provided. The routing units, appro and termination points of system vents should be indicated. Provide diagrams indicating system interconnections and piping and instrumentation interfaces. The FSAR should provide any additional seismic and quality group information required to update the PSAR to the final design conditions.

5.4.8.3 System Evaluation. The PSAR should for the system capacity and should discuss the provide the design bases maintain acceptable reactor water purity for system's capability to normal operation, including anticipated operational occurrences (e.g. , reactor ing, condensate demineralizer breakthrough, startup, shutdown refue reliance on other plant systems to meet the designequipment downtime). Any radwaste system) should be indicated. The design objectives (e.g. , liquid criteria for components and piping should be presented in terms of temperature, or volume capacity. The seismic design and quality pressure, flow, for components and piping should be provided. group classifications Discuss the capability of the nonregenerative heat exchanger to reduce the process temperature to a level low enough to be compatible with the cleanup in the event that there is no flow return to demineralizer resins FSAR should provide any additional information the reactor system. The required to update the PSAR to the final design conditions.

5-19

Revision 3 November 1978 5.4.9 Main Steam Line and Feedwater Piping 5.4.10 Pressurizer 5.4.11 Pressurizer Relief Discharge System (PWR) 5.4.11.1 Design Bases. The design bases for the pressurizer relief discharge system should include the maximum step load and the consequent steam volume that the pressurizer relief tank must absorb and also the maximum heat input that the volume of water in the tank must absorb under any plant condition. This should be provided for (1) the relief valve discharge to the tank only and (2) the combined relief and safety valve discharge to the tank. The method of supporting the tank and the system should be verified.

5.4.11.2 System Description. Provide a description of the system, including the tank, the piping connections from the tank to the loop seals of the pressurizer relief and safety valves, the relief tank spray system and associated piping, the nitrogen supply piping, and the piping from the tank to the cover gas analyzer and to the reactor coolant drain tank.

A piping and instrumentation diagram and a drawing of the pressurizer relief tank should be presented.

5.4.11.3 Safety Evaluation. The safety evaluation should demon strate that the system, including the tank, is designed to handle the maximum heat load. The adequacy of the tank design pressure and temper ature should be stated and justified. The results of a failure mode and effects analysis should be presented to demonstrate that the auxiliary systems serving the tank can meet the single-failure criterion without compromising safe plant shutdown. The tank rupture disk and relief valve capacities should be given, and it should be shown that their relief capacity is at least equal to the combined capacity of the pressurizer safety valves. Compliance of the system with General Design Criteria 14 and 15 should be demonstrated. The extent to which the recommendations of applicable regulatory guides such as Regulatory Guide 1.46, "Protec tion Against Pipe Whip Inside Containment," and Regulatory Guide 1.67, "Installation of Overpressure Protection Devices," are followed should be indicated.

5.4.11.4 Instrumentation Reouirements. The instrumentation and control requirements for the pressurizer relief tank and associated piping should be stated.

5.4.11.5 Inspection and Testing Requirements. The inspection and testing requirements for the pressurizer relief tank and associated piping should be described. Chapter 14 of the SAR should include a description of the preoperational and startup testing to demonstrate pressurizer relief discharge system response to step loads and transients that it is expected to accommodate during operation. Such material may be incorporated into this section by reference.

5-20

Revision 3 November 1978 5.4.12 Valves 5.4.13 Safety and Relief Valves 5.4.14 Component Supports 5-21

Retrieved from "https://kanterella.com/w/index.php?title=ML011340072&oldid=2202691"